JP2023101632A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a first condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means can at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to improve the interest of a player in a game by suggesting to the player that a lottery result is winning in accordance with the contents of the variation performance to be executed.

JP-A-2006-345901

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises launching means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, first ball-entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the shooting means, acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball-entering means is satisfied, storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the first execution condition is satisfied. a determination means capable of executing determination based on information, means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means in which the game ball fired by the launching means can enter; a first position at which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means; a second position, a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and executes the second displacement control based on establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and is configured to allow at least a first mode based on execution of the determination by the determining means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the shooting means, an acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquiring means, and a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the first execution condition is satisfied. a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means in which the game ball fired by the launching means can be entered, a first position at which the game ball can be entered into the second ball-entering means, and a second position at which it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball-entering means than at the first position. a displacement means capable of displacing to the second position; a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and executes the second displacement control based on establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player at least when a game ball enters the first ball-entering means, and is configured such that at least the first mode based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means can occur.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the second mode can occur based on the occurrence of the specific game state.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means can occur.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate, the variable winning device, the collecting gutter and the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the big winning type in the special symbol, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is the figure which showed time-measurement change of the operation|movement pattern of the opening-and-closing board of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each jackpot classification, and the operation|movement pattern of the slide displacement member of a sorting device. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit; It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; It is a front view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. FIG. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40; FIG. 11 is a front view of the first action unit in an intermediate effect state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first action unit in an intermediate rendering state; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotational member; 4(a) and 4(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing changes in angles accompanying rotation of a rotating member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; 29(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 29(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 34(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 31(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 31(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), and FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. 4 is a timing chart showing, in chronological order, an example of an arrangement of an elevating arm member, a drive mode of a drive motor, and an output of a detection sensor; FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28; (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the sorting device along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 73; FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75; (a) to (d) are front perspective views of an intermediate member of the sorting device. FIG. 4A is a top view of the intermediate member, the state switching device, the slide displacement member, and the lower member; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. (a) and (b) are side views of a slide displacement member and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. (a) and (b) are rear views of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam; It is a front perspective view of a first decorative rotary member and a second decorative rotary member. (a) and (b) are front schematic views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhang decorative portion. (a) and (b) are front schematic views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhang decorative portion. It is a front schematic diagram which shows a guidance long hole, a rectangular-shaped box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94; FIG. 4 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member and a shaft rotating member; FIG. 4 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member and a shaft rotating member; It is a front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the third motion unit, schematically showing displacements of the metal rod and the intermediate arm member; It is a front schematic diagram of a 3rd operation|movement unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member; (a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 11 is a front view of a third operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of a third operating unit; FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105; FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104; FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the third embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. (a) and (b) are schematic top views of a third flow path configuration portion, a variable probability detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member, which schematically show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path configuration portion in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path configuration portion, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor and the slide displacement member along the CXIa-CXIa line in FIG. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the fifth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; It is a front perspective view of the sorting device in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV of FIG. 114; It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and rotation member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and rotation member in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning equipment provided in the area under the front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow path of the winning ball of the variable winning device in the first control example. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when ready-to-win is established in the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution of normal symbol variation during the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a normal symbol winning game (long open winning game) is executed in the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a chance zone is set in the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation performance executed while the special figure 2 holding ball displayed on the third symbol display device is acquired in the first control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation performance executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is not acquired. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram of the latter half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode, (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the latter half of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a state in which the chance mode is set as the production mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and an example of a display mode during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the frame button is operated on the . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period of the chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period of the chance mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol variation is performed during the "super chance mode" displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode when the second special symbol variation is performed during the "super chance mode" displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of performance when a variation pattern in which the non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of performance when the variation pattern in which the reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the ending period targeting the normal jackpot in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the ending period targeting the variable probability big win in the first control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down the specific area (V gate) during the variable probability big win game in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the normal table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation and time reduction set in ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example. 3A is a block diagram showing a ROM configuration of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing a RAM configuration of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the production|presentation selection table during probability variation set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a continuous advance notice execution selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a button operation effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving state selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variable probability state selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining rear surfaces BD in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing a state command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure winning information command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing normal map-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. 7 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a chance mode effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 3A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 3B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 4(a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4A is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed in the pachinko machine and the display screen in the second control example, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display effect executed when the display of the main symbol layer is set to off and the display of the sub symbol layer is set to on in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main symbol for the sea used when the sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main image for the mountains used when the mountain image (mountain background) is set in the second control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the image data corresponding to the various images used for the main design. FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of variable display of the third symbol (main symbol, sub symbol) in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the variation pattern used in the effect example in the second control example, (b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the normal effect in the second control example, (c) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the reach line forewarning effect in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the foretelling effect in the second control example in which the direction of variation of the sub-symbol is different from normal. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed on the pachinko machine and the display screen in the modification of the second control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the triple reach effect in the modification of the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the case of a triple reach state due to the triple reach effect in the modification of the second control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a structure near a specific winning opening of the variable winning device of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow path of a ball that has won the specific winning opening in the third control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow-down route of a ball that has won a prize in a specific prize-winning hole in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; It is a flowchart which shows the big-hit control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 3rd control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 4 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing V-round processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third control example; It is a flow chart which shows update processing during a big hit performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 3rd control. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a fourth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the falling lottery table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth control example. 8A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in a fourth control example, and FIG. 8B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in a fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a button operation effect selection 2 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the probability changing state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fall-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display effect in the second control example; It is the figure which showed the modification of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a big win game executed based on the fact that a special symbol lottery is won in a special symbol lottery in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the ending screen of the big win game in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the chance time in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen at the end of the chance time in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the start of the pullback zone in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a time reduction win is made during the pullback zone in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the extended time that is executed when the long working hours are set in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 9900 times during the long working hours in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen of the preparation time performed during a time saving state after the chance time completion|finish in the 5th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background type displayed in the pullback zone and the content indicated by each background in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of suggestion mode in the pullback mode and the suggestion content indicated by each suggestion mode in the fifth control example. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a game flow in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the fifth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time reduction winning random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 5 table in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal/second probability variation 5 table in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the 5 tables for probability variation / time saving in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pullback mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a suggestion mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start winning process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pullback mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd probability variation state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 5 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 5 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process during chance time performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot or a short time election in the normal state in the first modification of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is a short time election in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in the first modification of the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the time saving state when 30 seconds is set as the variable time of special figure 1 in the normal state in the first modification of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time saving state in the first modification of the fifth control example ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of short-time winning by special figure 2 reservation in the promotion chance zone in the 1st modification of the 5th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving random number 5a table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving type selection 5a table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 5a performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing 5a executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 5a performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 5th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a chance time acquisition effect executed when a jackpot with a first time reduction state is awarded in a special figure 1 lottery in a normal state in the second modification of the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern at the time of jackpot election in the 2nd modification of the 5th control example, and the variation pattern at the time of short-time election. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving random number 5b table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot 5b table in the second modified example of the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection 5b table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process 5b performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 5th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when time saving A is set in the sixth control example, and (b) is a view showing an example of the display screen when time saving B is set in the sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time saving is won during the time saving state in the sixth control example and the remaining number of time saving is increased, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time saving is won during the time saving state in the sixth control example and the remaining number of time saving is reduced. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow in the sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving random number 6 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving type selection 6 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 6 big-hit tables set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 6th control. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 6 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing mode-specific effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing during time saving B performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; It is a partial enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the seventh control example; FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the seventh control example; It is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the seventh control example as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic plan view of a state in which the opening/closing door of the V prize opening of the V winning device is closed in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic plan view of a state in which the V prize opening of the V prize device is open in the seventh control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the time saving lottery result suggestion effect is executed during the variation of the special figure 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when suggesting a time saving election during the variation of the special figure 1 in the seventh control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when suggesting time-saving non-winning during the variation of special figure 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when duplicate winning is made in the seventh control example. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern in the case of double winning in the time saving lottery and the jackpot lottery in the seventh control example, (b) is a time saving lottery in the seventh control example, a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern in the case of non-winning, and (c) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern in the case of a time saving non-winning, jackpot winning in the seventh control example. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the seventh control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first special symbol random number 7 table in the seventh control example, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second special symbol random number 7 table in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving grant 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection 7 table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 7th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the variation pattern 7 table for time saving in a 7th control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a lottery result notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 7th control. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 7th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time update process 7 for small hits performed by MPU in the main controller in the 7th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 7 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 7 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 7 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a diagram showing a modified configuration of the game board 13 that the pachinko machine 10 has. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064 of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a production screen when the special figure 2 reservation is continuously acquired by overflow winning in a disadvantageous time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when suggesting the end of the disadvantageous time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the ending of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection 8 table in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time saving random number 8 table in the eighth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 8 tables for variable probability/time saving in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the eight time saving type selection tables in the eighth control example. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in an eighth control example, and FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a prefetch suspension mode selection table in the eighth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving lottery processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 8th control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in the example of the 8th control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction state production|presentation setting process 8 performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning information command process 8 for special figures performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a preceding winning detection process 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example; (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern in the ninth control example is set. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern in the ninth control example is set. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow showing transition contents of a game state in the ninth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning a time saving symbol in a normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a space mode effect screen displayed on a third symbol display device in a ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a challenge mode effect screen displayed on a third symbol display device in a ninth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 9 table in the ninth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving random number 9 table in the ninth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection 9 table per normal figure in the 9th control example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the expectation level selection table in the ninth control example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing game state update processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction related processing 9 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of 9th control. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a non-powered state management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a time saving effect screen after a special figure 1 jackpot in normal times displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the special figure 2 jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the final variation screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen when the special figure 2 hold is accumulated to MAX during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a treasure box opening effect screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the final variation screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow showing transition contents of a game state in the tenth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, (b) is a part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 10 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 10 table which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 10 table in the 10th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table in the 10th control example. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the tenth control example, and FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the tenth control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the notification target selection table in the tenth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a pending ball count command process 10 executed by an MPU in a sound ramp control device in a tenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a normal right-handed game screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eleventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 11 table in the eleventh control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 11 table in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number 11 table per time saving in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction lottery process 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 11th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 11 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction limit update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the twelfth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first per random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second per random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the time saving per random number 12 table in the 12th control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the small per random number 12 table in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the twelfth control example, (b) is a part of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the twelfth control example It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 12 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 12 tables for special-figure 2 jackpots which are a part of 12 jackpot classification selection tables in the 12th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 12 table in the 12th control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal state variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving state variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving winning variation state, which is a part of the variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 time reduction lottery process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process 12 during a 1st special design variation execution performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 forced stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction setting processing 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a small winning lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 12 during a 2nd special design variation execution performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 forced stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 small hit stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 12 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing time saving limit update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is defined as the upper (upper) side, the lower side as the lower (lower) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 is provided with a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for shooting a ball to the front area of the game board 13, a shooting rail (not shown) for guiding the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening and closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or a ready-to-win performance is performed, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit or blinked by the lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs to notify that the big win is in progress or the reach just before the big win is in progress. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a certificate stamp or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) in front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation part 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. A ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball rental operation section 40, but in this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball rental operation section 40 so that the parts configuration may be shared. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-like lower tray 50 with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be fully stored in the upper tray 17 on the left side thereof. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation, the ball is shot with the strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit in front of the game board 13 with the distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extraction lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened, and the ball is naturally dropped and discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for ball guidance (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area), a windmill (not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. A general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140 and a variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that a game area is formed in front of the game board 13 where the game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (an area in which winning holes are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the ball, and the ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the central part side while the momentum is attenuated.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37B operates.

In addition, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B indicate by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode or the normal state by the lighting state, indicate by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not, indicate by the lighting state whether the stop pattern is the pattern corresponding to the variable probability big win, the pattern corresponding to the normal big win or the missing pattern by the lighting state, indicate the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and display the number of rounds during the big win and an error by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combinations of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the type of the big win when the result is a big win.

Here, the “15R variable probability jackpot” is a variable probability jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “4R variable probability jackpot” is a variable probability jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds and a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

The ``high-probability state'' means a state in which the probability of a subsequent big win is increased as an added value after the end of the big win, that is, a time during probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, it is a game state that easily shifts to a special game state. The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a big win is increased during a predetermined number of times of variation (100 times of variation in the present embodiment), the probability of winning a second symbol to be described later is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (intermediate time-saving state) of the 'low-probability state' refers to a game state in which the probability of big win is normal and the probability of winning only the second pattern is increased while the probability of big win remains as it is so that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the sorting device 300 to be described later in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state for 100 variations. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a time saving state for 100 variations.

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second pattern is increased, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) associated with the second prize winning port 140 is changed, and the time is set longer than during the normal period. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball is more likely to win the second prize winning port 140 than when the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second prize winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time reduction, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit may be increased more than during normal times. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second pattern is not changed, and at least one of the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened for one win may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, only the winning probability of the second pattern may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal period, without changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened for one winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140, and a second symbol display device composed of an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to border the window of the base plate 60. That is, in a front view, the center frame 86 seems to be arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81, but actually the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display of 9-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three pattern rows of top, middle and bottom are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second pattern display device performs variable display by alternately lighting up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that an electric accessory 140a attached to a second prize winning opening 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 140a of the second winning opening 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the variable probability or the short time, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state when the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability or the short time by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 140a for one win. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 140a for one winning may be made constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed by a second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of ``○'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of ``x'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown) is also lit and displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment, or may be performed using part of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning hole switch, a lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first pattern display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning hole switch, the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot lottery, and the first pattern display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of winning may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize winning port 140. - 特許庁This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the pattern of "○" is displayed on the second pattern display device, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is easily entered into the second prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the winning probability of the second pattern is higher during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal period, and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is short, so that the "○" pattern is easily displayed in the variable display of the second pattern, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won is set higher when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory associated with the second prize winning port 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Therefore, it is better to shoot a ball toward the first prize winning port 64 with no electric role so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and to obtain many chances of winning a big prize lottery by winning the first prize winning port 64, aiming for a big win. beneficial to those who

On the other hand, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is easily opened, and the second winning opening 140 is easily won. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

Since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" and aim for the second winning hole 140 by "left-handed hitting". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can eliminate the need for the player to change the way of shooting the ball between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed'' according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is variable probability, short time, or normal). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to become a jackpot stop pattern after the lapse of a predetermined time (fluctuation time), and the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a value in the game (game value).

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, and when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open, the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. You may make it form as a technique state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like affixed to the affixing space K1 can be visually recognized through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.例文帳に追加

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port for communication with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover that are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is cut into the box base side and the box cover side when the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102 or when the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing ball payout by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). . The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as setting of the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device.

Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The RAM 203 has a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and the like, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reserve lamp, and a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 11) of the specific winning opening 65a toward the front side as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. and send various commands and control signals to them.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotating position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631 , 731 , 782 , 861 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 by the command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226. Also, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in correspondence with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display such as the variation effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 6(a) shows the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the balls from flowing down to the specific winning hole 65a, and FIG. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6 .

The variable winning device 65 is formed such that the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side when the opening/closing plate 65b is opened (see FIG. 6(b)) so that a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b can be received and guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left-right central part of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to the ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left-right central portion, but mainly occurs in the left-right outer portion of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the placement of the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, the placement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (it is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward from the lower end of the front end portion facing the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the back side). can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be arranged near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower portion of the front design member 141 may be arranged in either the front or rear direction. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is arranged downward on the front side, so that a larger space on the side of the opening/closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the width of the front design member 141 becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow bottom surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is disposed at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. Guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the left-right outside of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion that extends forward and left and right inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end face is formed as an inclined surface that deviates rearward toward the left and right inner sides.

As a result, when a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b and rolling comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be guided to the inclined downflow surface 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is arranged outside the inclined flow surface 163a1 to the left and right, the degree of hindrance to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced.

That is, for example, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened by applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening/closing plate 65b by applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening/closing plate 65b, for example, in which the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed due to the poor flow of the ball, or the ball flowed backward by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed by a rising motion. That is, the ball landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning port 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning port 65a almost without any omission, regardless of the lateral position of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged on the left and right outer sides or if the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are devised, so that the flow of the balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a is not retained, and the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed flat (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, the ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b flows backward once, and then flows in the left and right direction due to the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls are temporarily moved backward in parallel, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped to have a laterally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a and the rolling balls flow in the lateral direction, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will move irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby preventing unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with a contact surface portion 163a3 that abuts on the tip of rotation at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of left and right portions, and are formed so as to allow surface contact rather than point contact due to a shape design that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily stabilized, and stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, so that durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 so as to be substantially parallel to the open/close plate 65b, which is arranged opposite to the contact surface portion 163a3, with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in the event that contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b fails for some reason.

In this embodiment, the member to be fixed 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is arranged on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and is basically configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state cannot be maintained.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, surface contact between the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is caused to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. As a result, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there is a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball on the way to be received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be received in a state of being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

That is, when the ball contacts the lower shape of the front design member 141 in a state in the middle of receiving (for example, a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening and closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning port 65a and is sliding sideways), it can be guided by the curved shape to flow down to the inside of the specific winning port 65a. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming part 336, so that the visibility to the third flow path forming part 336 can be easily secured.

In the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so the arrangement of the balls flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to the left and right outside of the electric accessory 140a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to limit the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific prize winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. As a result, it is possible to ensure the field of view at the left and right inner positions of the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a below the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. 7 and 8 illustrate a state in which components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the back of the variable prize winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, a collection gutter 150 is provided that forms a path for the balls entering the first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 140 and the general winning port 63 (see FIG. 2) to flow to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the groove-shaped portion has an open front side facing the base plate 60 . By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning hole 64, a second flow path part 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning hole 140, and a plurality of third flow paths 153 that form the flow paths for the balls that land in the general winning holes 63 arranged on both left and right sides.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward to the left from the rear position of the first prize winning port 64, and the second flow path portion 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes to the lower right direction from the rear position of the second prize winning port 140. The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending downward from the general winning opening 63 .

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are arranged at the left-right center position of the game area, but the flow of the balls entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is gathered left and right outside from the left-right center position by the gathering gutter 150. - 特許庁Thereby, a space can be provided below the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140, and the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, which will be described later, can be arranged using this space.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150 and sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, gathering gutter 150 and sorting device 300. In FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and the other parts are omitted, and the illustration of other components assembled to the base plate 60 is omitted, so that the ground of the base plate 60 is visible. 9, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60 for convenience of explanation.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 fastened and fixed to the variable prize winning device 65 at the upper portion, and an insertion hole 331 fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collecting gutter 150, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are when the sorting device 300 is provided and when the sorting device 300 is not provided. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of the sorting device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 can be shared.

Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific prize winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a downflow path along which the balls received by the variable prize winning device 65 flow. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes based on the detection result of the ball flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and a receiving member 163 arranged on the rear side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 and capable of receiving a ball passing through a specific winning opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/close state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side shape is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, fastening positions with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, the shape of the rear side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 in the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through-hole having a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be disposed is formed through the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted through the through hole of the base plate 60 .

Inside the boundary portion 161a, there are formed a specific winning opening 65a, a horizontally elongated plate-like portion extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a pair of right and left substantially T-shaped extending support plates 161b having a vertically extending plate-like portion extending downward in the middle of the horizontally elongated plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, and a projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the boundary portion 161a have a function of supporting the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, a symmetrical projecting portion 161f projecting in a left-right symmetrical shape below the left-right central position of the specific winning opening 65a has a function of contacting the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the flow of the ball.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws to be screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of to-be-fastened portions 161h having female thread portions for screwing fastening screws inserted through the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

A fastened portion 161i having a female threaded portion for screwing a fastening screw to be inserted through the interposed member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left-right central position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through-holes formed in the base plate 60, the connecting portion (see FIG. 9) between the through-hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through-hole for inserting the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a is provided with the fastened portion 161i.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The sphere can flow down in the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161 .

On the rear side of the front design member 162, there are provided a plurality of fastening portions 162a which are arranged at positions matching the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female screw portions formed so that the fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161g can be screwed in, and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c which extend to the rear side in such a shape as to cover the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened portion 162a.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extended portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the flow-down path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides, thereby suppressing the balls riding on the extending portions 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (at two locations on the left and right ends) extending at both the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inner sides, the flow-down path of the ball flowing on the extension portion 162c can be combined with the flow-down path of the ball on the extension portion 162b. As a result, the range in which the falling balls are arranged can be narrowed (the arrangement density of the balls can be increased) compared to the number of the falling balls, and a portion where the visibility is not hindered by the balls (a space where the flowing-down path is not formed) can be secured.

Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is illustrated in a plain color and the visibility on the back side is good, it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by sticking a sticker showing a pattern or character, or the front design member 162 may be grooved with a geometric pattern, and the groove may be irradiated with light so that the geometric pattern emerges and can be visually recognized. Alternatively, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-permeable after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side. A plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h and through which the fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 161h is inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d which are female screw portions into which the fastening screws inserted through the intervening member 164 are screwed and are arranged on the left and right central sides, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female screw portions into which the fastening screws inserted through the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a laterally inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outwards with the central portion of the left and right as the vertex.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear; a pair of insertion holes 164b that are formed through the upper portion of the body portion 164a and into which fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163 can be inserted; A pair of fastened portions 164d formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted through the sorting device 300 can be screwed at both left and right ends, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a and through which fastening screws screwed into the fastened portion 161i of the fixed member 161 can be inserted.

The light-emitting substrate 164c is arranged in such a manner that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces obliquely forward and upward, and in the assembled state, it is arranged directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning opening 140 in a front view. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who wants to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes obliquely backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the lighting of the LED of the light emitting board 164c when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the player can easily grasp whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a.

Due to the configuration described above, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 . As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed compared to the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. In addition, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws to be screwed into a fastening portion 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted. a rotating portion 165e that is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such a manner that the tip of the rotating portion protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the sliding portion 165d slides;

A tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so as to be engageable with a rod-shaped portion, and a transmission protrusion 65c projecting rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b enters and engages with the recessed portion. The transmission projection 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 164d of the interposed member 164 can be inserted; A substrate 350 that is housed between the upper member 30 and the upper member 310 and on which a light-emitting means 351 such as an LED is arranged on the front side; a state switching device 360 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and is configured to be able to switch between states depending on the presence or absence of energization; A lower member 380 is provided below the intermediate member 330 so as to sandwich the 370 and has an insertion hole 381 through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be described. The sorting device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow path along which balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the passage forming portions 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380, and the ball flowing down from the lower member 380 is discharged to a ball discharge passage (not shown).

The ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 is constructed so as to be visible to the player, and depending on the flow mode, not only a mere performance effect to please the player's eyes but also an effect relating to the game profit such as causing a change in the profit obtained by the player is exhibited.

Differences in the manner in which balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the position of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to gather at the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later).

Next, the details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 penetrating to receive a ball, a pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent sealing members 313 attached as marks, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 along the outer periphery toward the front side, and fastening screws screwed into the middle member 330 being inserted. a plurality of insertion cylindrical portions 315 having through holes formed therethrough; a fastened portion 316 having a female screw into which a fastening screw inserted through the middle member 330 can be screwed; a pair of longitudinally elongated projections 317 projecting downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and arranged side by side; A pair of left and right inner projecting portions 318 disposed between them, a pair of left and right outer projecting portions 319 which are elongated portions in the left and right direction projecting downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess of a size that allows the upper part of the substrate 350 to be placed.

The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows it downward. As a result, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that it does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b is guided to the opening 312. FIG.

The seal member 313 receives light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and is visually recognized brilliantly, thereby functioning as a member that attracts the player's attention, the details of which will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow-down path of the ball below the upper member 310 . A first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and arranged on the left and right inner sides, is formed to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. Further, the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right intervals become longer toward the near side, so that the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b can be ensured.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface thereof for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from the upper side.

The insertion tubular portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches a fastened portion 332 d having a female screw portion formed on the intermediate member 330 . In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged in such a manner that the screw portion faces upward and the screw head faces downward. Therefore, while the fastening part 316 is arranged on the near side, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who views it obliquely from above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from deteriorating due to the fastening screws while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed.

The reason why the fastened part 316 is formed only on the right side is that since two insertion cylinder parts 315 are already arranged on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and the appearance of the sorting device 300 is improved by omitting the arrangement if it is unnecessary even though the screw head is downward and inconspicuous. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair of left and right.

The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set so as to avoid the falling path of the balls and to minimize the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting device 300, which will be described later in detail.

The lower surface portions of the front-rear long projecting portion 317, the left-right inner projecting portion 318, and the left-right outer projecting portion 319, which are formed in pairs, are each formed as a curved surface that lowers with increasing distance from the same point. The curved surface has different shapes for the front-rear projection 317, the left-right inner projection 318, and the left-right outer projection 319, and the difference in shape is intended to control the flow of the ball.

The intermediate member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a bottom portion on the front side, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 and forming a flow-down path of the sphere, and the first flow path forming portions 334. A pair of second flow passage forming portions 335 connected to the front end portion of the second flow passage forming portion 335 and recessed in the front side of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow passage forming portions 336 connected to the left and right inner end portions of the second flow pass forming portion 335 to form a flow down route of the sphere and recessed in the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the intermediate member 330 has a discharge hole 337 which is elongated in the left and right direction and is formed through the lower bottom of the intermediate member 330 on the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and functions as a ball discharge path. and a setting portion 339 .

The rear frame-shaped part 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front part which forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a part that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360 . The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed through the front end portion of the left-right central portion in the vertical direction so that the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged therethrough, a guide hole 332b formed through the lower bottom portion as an elongated through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of fastened portions 332 having female screw portions formed so that the fastening screws inserted through the lower member 380 can be screwed therein. c, and a column-shaped fastened portion 332d having a female screw portion at the upper end into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

The front frame-shaped part 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower base, so that the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped part 333 is reduced. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape when viewed from above, and includes an insertion hole 333a formed as a spot facing hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted.

The first flow-path forming part 334, the second flow-path forming part 335, and the third flow-path forming part 336 are parts constituting the flow-down path of the sphere, and are designed so that the flow-down direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, etc. are different, but the details will be described later.

An open portion 335a, which is open on the front side at the connecting position between the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336, is a gap for allowing the symmetrical projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged to enter the inside of the flow channel through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300. As shown in FIG.

The ejection holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are formed in a pair of right and left holes, and are formed in a size that allows balls to be ejected through at least two paths. That is, it is configured with a lateral length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since a plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the shape of the discharge hole 337 may be designed according to the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, the details of which will be described later. The alignment projecting portion 339 is fitted with the projecting portion 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding positional deviation between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, the details of which will be described later.

The substrate 350 has an inverted T shape in which the lower part 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper part 352, and the lower part 353 has a recessed part 354 for alignment at the lower end on the left end side.

The concave portion 354 engages with a portion corresponding to the internal shape of the intermediate member 330 to position it in the left-right direction, the longitudinally positioned lower portion 353 is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330 so as to be sandwiched from the front and back, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling upward, thereby fixing the arrangement. Details will be described later along with the intention.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a slide portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger that is supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction and is slidably displaced together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and rotates as the slide portion 362 slides.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to receive the disc portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, an overhanging portion 362b that projects rightward from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the front-rear central portion of the lower surface and is formed with an oval cross section that is long in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the intermediate member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted through the guide hole 332b of the intermediate member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the horizontal direction. In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is elongated in the horizontal direction, it is possible to maintain the posture of the sliding portion 362 by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the top, and has a support cylinder portion 363a which is formed in a cylindrical shape elongated in the vertical direction at the connection portion of the L-shape and has a through hole large enough to allow the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to pass therethrough; a lower columnar portion 363c that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370;

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 . That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the plunger is slid and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the projecting portion 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced accordingly, thereby displacing the slide displacement member 370.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. The thin plate portion 371 is supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and a pair of left and right upper protrusions 376 are protruded upward from the thin plate portion 371, and the left and right center portions are above the upper protrusions 376. a recessed portion 378 which is recessed at the projecting end portion of the projecting portion projecting from the bottom portion 378 and formed so as to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363;

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a penetrating through the rear half portion, a recessed portion 372 that is longitudinally elongated from the front end portion of the left and right central portion and has a horizontal width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper projecting portion 376, a pair of lower projecting portions 373 that project downward in the shape of a projecting line along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and a projecting line shape along the left and right edges of the rear half portion that projects in both the vertical direction. and a columnar protrusion 375 that protrudes downward from the rear end and is inserted into the guide slot 386 of the lower member 380 .

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are assumed to face and slide on the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides, and are projections for reducing the contact area with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 compared to contact on a plane. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from slowing down.

The upper projecting portion 376 is a substantially trapezoidal columnar portion when viewed from the front, and is arranged so as to pass through the placement through hole 332 a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 . The width of the left and right inner gaps of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 . With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 .

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap on the left and right inner sides, and is configured to be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction by coming into contact with the partition plate portion 338 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be properly guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as an elongated hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the slide displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction.

The projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332, so that the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the through-hole 332a for placement is designed as a through-hole having a shape that includes the entire range in which the upper protruding portion 376 to be inserted and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged.

The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in the shape of a thin plate elongated in the left and right direction, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows a plurality (four in this embodiment) of detection sensors SE1 to be arranged side by side on the lower side of the plate-like portion 382.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings formed on the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 passes, and the other portions are closed.

The plate-like portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 in the same way as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole in the vertical direction. A pair of guide protrusions 384 protruding at a position behind the slide displacement member 370 so as to be able to be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, a pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both laterally outer positions of the guide protrusions 384, an elongated guide hole 386 extending on the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, and a curved surface formed on the front side surface so as to protrude backwards. and an insertion hole 388 through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 332c of the intermediate member 330 can be inserted.

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a left-right thickness that is slightly shorter than the left-right gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The projecting portion 383 a is designed such that the left and right inner end portions thereof are positioned at the same positions as the left and right outer end portions of the alignment projecting portion 339 of the intermediate member 330 . That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted to the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the position of the middle member 330 in the left-right direction with respect to the lower member 380 can be appropriately determined. At the same time, by bringing the rear side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion that connects the projecting portion 383 and the projecting portion 383a at the front end side) into contact with the front side surface of the alignment projecting portion 339, the position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lower member 380 can be appropriately determined.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation between the third flow path forming portion 336 as a structure of the intermediate member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380 .

The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right long elliptical shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371 a of the slide displacement member 370 , and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range where the guide projecting portion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 from colliding with the ridge 383, so that the durability of the ridge 383 can be improved, for example, compared to a configuration in which the displacement end in the forward direction is determined by the position at which the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge 383. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protrusion 383 can be maintained for a long time.

Even if the guide projecting portion 384 is damaged, it does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 , but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting portion 383 . For this reason, although the guide projection 384 is normally designed to be strong enough to be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) without damage to the guide projection 384, the strength of the guide projection 384 and the projection 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the projection 383 collides with the slide displacement member 370 after the guide projection 384 is damaged. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the strength of the projecting portion 383 may be used for the rest of the period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide projection 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the horizontal width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridges 385 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide long hole 386 is a long hole formed with a lateral width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 to the guide elongated hole 386 .

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of the sphere that flows below the middle member 330 . In this embodiment, the flow of the ball entering the out hole 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 388 with the screw head directed downward. As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous visibility of the fastening screw. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right outside and on the rear side of the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 388 blocks the view of the ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 or near the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 is guided by a plurality of portions, namely, the guide projection 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide projection 384 for the supported hole 371a, the projection 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower projection 373, the guide elongated hole 386 for the cylindrical projection 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper projection 376, and the like. As a result, the load at the time of guiding can be distributed to a plurality of positions, so that the load can be avoided from being applied locally, and damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guiding portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370 can be avoided.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by a plurality of members including at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 . That is, the slide displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper projecting portions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 and a recessed portion 372 guided by the projecting portion 383 of the lower member 380 .

Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously form the flow-down path of the sphere, and it is preferable to suppress the displacement to a small extent.

In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will not be performed satisfactorily. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, it is possible to perform control so that an error notification may be performed assuming that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in an unsatisfactory state.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described. In addition, here, the configuration related to the flow of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration of entering the flow-down path side of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15, FIG. 17 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and sorting device 300 along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. and a sectional view of the sorting device 300. FIG.

15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the intermediate member 330 . The first flow path forming portion 334, the subsequent second flow path forming portion 335, and the subsequent third flow path forming portion 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path for causing the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, the second flow path forming part 335 is formed as an inclined flow path for causing the ball to flow down in the horizontal direction rotated 90 degrees with respect to the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334, and the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path for causing the ball to flow down in the horizontal direction rotated 90 degrees with respect to the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. It is formed as an inclined channel that allows the spheres to flow down to the

In this way, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape with a right angle of curvature, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow-down speed of the spheres increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, since the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, the flowing direction in the subsequent second flow path forming part 335 does not have a longitudinal component, so that the first flow path forming part 334 can realize a flow mode in which the influence of the acceleration is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path forming part 336 following the second flow path forming part 335, the water flows backward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming part 334. Therefore, it is possible to realize a flow down mode in which the influence of acceleration in the front-rear direction is suppressed.

Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow speed of the ball on the downstream side, unlike the flow down mode in which the ball flows down in the same direction (for example, leftward) all the time. In other words, it is possible to easily make the flowing speed of the ball uniform in the entire flow path, to keep the player's attention to the ball high, and to easily avoid the situation where the player loses sight of the ball.

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming part 335, but forming the second flow path forming part 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging of balls and reverse flow. When the second flow path forming part 335 is not formed (when the left-right direction length of the second flow path forming part 335 is 0), that is, when the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 are connected, it is necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere from the front side flow to the rear flow by 180 degrees at the connection point. In this case, the ball has a large flow direction switching angle, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth, so it is difficult to smoothly flow the ball, and it is easy for the ball to stagnate, clog, and flow backward, which may cause problems.

On the other hand, if the switching angle of the flow direction is 90 degrees or less (in this embodiment, 90 degrees) as in this embodiment, the reversal of the velocity direction of the ball does not occur, so the ball can smoothly flow down, and stagnation, clogging, and reverse flow of the ball can be easily avoided.

The shape of the flow path at the connecting ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-described symmetrical protruding part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the downflow of the ball in such a manner as to bend the downflow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed so that the portion arranged downstream of the sphere is more receded from the path of the sphere than the portion arranged upstream. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged to face is formed longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portion 338 arranged adjacent to it. Further, the rear end portions of the left and right ends of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged to face each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow channel side surfaces of the second flow channel forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

As a result, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from backflowing.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, side wall portions 334a curvedly formed at the front left and right ends of the intermediate member 330 are formed as portions that guide the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

Further, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b projecting upward from the flow-down surface of the first flow-path forming part 334 in a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) whose arrangement decreases toward the front side is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow-down direction of the ball.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved projection 334b, flows down the first flow path forming part 334, contacts the side wall part 334a during the flow, thereby switching the flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming part 335, contacts the symmetrical projecting part 161f during the flow, switches the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the projecting support portion 161d of the member 161 to be fixed. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and displacement in the left-right direction is regulated, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angles and length ratios of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third flow path forming part 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and is set to a slightly loose common inclination angle in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. FIG.

As for the length, each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in a square shape in top view as an inner side surface, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed as an outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is set to 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square is set to 45 mm, thereby forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around it.

Therefore, since the total clearance from the flow path is set to 1 mm on both sides of the sphere with respect to the commonly used sphere with a diameter of 11 mm, the sphere flows down with almost no displacement in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined to be about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and it is possible to suppress positional deviation of the falling sphere.

Of the portions forming the ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 arranged in a square surrounding the square front frame portion 333, the upstream end of the first flow path forming portion 334 Only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the end portion is arranged inside (front side) the vertex of the square, so the first flow pass forming portion 334 is shorter than the second flow pass forming portion 335 and the third flow pass forming portion 336.

In terms of actual measurements in top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm at the ball center distance), and the length is about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm at the ball center distance).

It can be explained from the ratio of the longitudinal direction inclination angle and length of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 that the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 with the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is shorter than the time to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 with a looser inclination angle and 1.5 times the path length.

In the present embodiment, with this configuration, when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the position shifts to the back side, and a part of the ball is hidden by the non-transmissive resin portion of the detection sensor SE1, resulting in poor visibility of the ball. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, in a state where the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the flow speed of the ball, it is unnecessary for the player to quickly move the line of sight toward the ball, and the game burden (eye fatigue due to the movement of the eyeball) of the player who pays attention to the ball can be reduced.

When paying attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 with high visibility in this way, compared to the case of the ball flowing down in the left and right direction along the second flow path forming part 335, the amount of displacement of the ball flowing down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming part 336 is smaller in the front view. can be minimized.

In other words, since the length and the angle of inclination are the same, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 are equivalent. be late.

The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and it is easy to draw attention to the ball. Therefore, since the player's line of sight tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336, the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight in this manner can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the field of vision of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336, in the present embodiment, the front side surface of the second flow path forming part 335 is provided with an open part 335a (see FIG. 17).

Furthermore, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only in a portion necessary for abutting and guiding the falling ball, and formation of shaped portions on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a vertically thin plate-like portion, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, the possibility that the line of sight directed to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrical protruding portion 161f can be reduced, and the visibility can be improved.

In addition, it is configured such that the spheres deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and directed toward the out port 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, a ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming portion 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow passage forming portion 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the inner side of the third flow passage forming portion 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are covered in front and behind and visually recognized, so that the total number of balls entering the field of view focused on the rear end part of the third flow path forming part 336 increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path forming part 336 or the ball does not enter the specific winning hole 65a but enters the out port 71, the ball enters the rear end part of the third flow path forming part 336. - 特許庁

Therefore, the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is arranged at the position where most of the shot balls (excluding the balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 140) gather and the position covered in the front-rear direction, regardless of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning hole 65a, that is, the structure of the nail implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge). As a result, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the falling ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336. Configured.

For example, the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 is formed with a light diffusing processed surface 333b having a prism-like shape for producing light diffusing action. In FIG. 17, the saw-toothed portion is the light diffusion processing surface 333b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner circumference of the inner surface and over the top and bottom.

When the light diffusion action occurs, the light is diffused in a plurality of directions, so that the entire surface is visually recognized as if it is shining. According to this embodiment, the visibility is poor when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when the light is not emitted, the visibility can be improved at least as compared to the state where light is emitted.

On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the shielding object, the shadow of the shielding object will be visually recognized as a black dot, making it easier to determine its position.

A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the rear side surface of the left and right outer protrusions 319, and a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the rear side surface of the frame front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (see FIG. 17).

Examples of the processed surface formed in the same shape include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of a plate-shaped portion extending to the back side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 and covering the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 in the assembled state, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion processing surfaces are formed on the rear surface side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow paths formed in a spiral from the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, respectively, and the effect of changing the visibility due to light irradiation is achieved.

In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the player's line of sight focusing on the rear end part of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side can immediately hide the sphere turned in the lateral direction from the third flow path forming part 336 by the front side frame-shaped part 333 to make it difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if the player tries to see the ball that has fallen after passing through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 with the player's line of sight viewing the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 obliquely from above, the line of sight will pass through the light diffusion processing surface 340, so that the light is irradiated on the light diffusion processing surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball that has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and has fallen.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in order to grasp how the sphere flows down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily visible as a black dot can be configured. In this manner, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, the visibility of the sphere can be switched between good and bad. In addition, depending on whether or not the sphere is arranged on the front side of the black point, it is possible to construct a situation in which the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation in which the black point is visible without being hidden by the sphere.

As described above, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336, but are consistently formed on the side surfaces that do not contact the spheres flowing down the flow paths formed by the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

As a result, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be prevented from being scraped by contact with the spheres, so the shapes of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Furthermore, by contacting the light diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 with the spheres, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being hindered from flowing down or being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sphere from deteriorating even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

It should be noted that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the channel side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to produce the effect of diffusing the light and the effect of decelerating the sphere by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastening portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and visibility may be maintained high without countermeasures. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screws.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is made of metal and is non-permeable, it is possible to hide the portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped part 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and the fastening screw reflects the light in the part where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped part 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the part where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processed surface 332e of the intermediate member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, and the purpose of this is to make it shine brilliantly, and to create a function as a blind for the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360 that are arranged on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 serves as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330 and accommodated, but is arranged with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 in the left-right central portion, and the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position sandwiching the slide displacement member 370 with the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and the lack of this thickness creates a gap in the vicinity of the left-right central position, in which the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the housing recess 320 of the upper member 310 and faces the light diffusion processing surface 164f formed on the interposed member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating the light from the light emitting means 351 arranged in the upper part 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a performance effect that shines brilliantly, and furthermore, the visibility of the range on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged in the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f, and the light diffusion processed surface 164f has a prism-like cross-sectional shape along the entire surface in the vertical direction. Therefore, from the player's eye level, it is possible to make it appear as if the specific winning hole 65a is illuminated above and below.

In the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left-right central position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 interferes with the field of view and cannot be visually recognized well.

The lower side portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate the light toward the seal member 313 and the portion disposed therebelow where the ball flows down, the details of which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow-down path of the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. 19 and 20, FIG. 15 to FIG. 18 will be referred to as needed.

19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 19 and 20, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged bilaterally symmetrically, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 having a common function. The variable probability detection sensor SE11 is arranged inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged outside in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is an entering ball sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. That is, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is detected to have entered the rear detection sensor SE1, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 balls per detection of one ball) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 functions not as a detection sensor for paying out prize balls, but as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the jackpot game ends by detecting the entering ball.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the variable probability state, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not the next big win is to be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the ball is prevented from passing through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the channel side concave, the flowing ball can smoothly flow toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 is retracted rearward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the ball is allowed to pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (front position or rear position). Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 during the big winning game, the game state after the big winning game is controlled to be the variable probability state. In other words, when the ball is not detected as having passed through the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 but only through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or the time-saving state).

Here, in the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots, variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots are provided as described above. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 in the case of a variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, but the details of the control will be described later.

Thus, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly related to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, more than a few fraudulent acts of illegally switching the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 have been discovered, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is arranged on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the front side position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the portion inserted into the concave portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced rearward, thereby maintaining the slide displacement member 370 at the rear side position. This is the normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-described fraudulent act may, for example, insert a fine metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball delivery opening, a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), etc., press the fine metal wire against the slide displacement member 370, and push the slide displacement member 370 to the back side, thereby illegally creating a state in which the ball can enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is positioned below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18). Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface shape that relieves the load to the left and right outer sides as described above, even if the fine metal wire is pressed against the front side surface 376a, the load can be relieved to the left and right outer sides, and the slide displacement member 370 can easily be prevented from being illegally displaced to the rear side position.

In addition to the fact that the route to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not straight but spirally wound, and the position of the slide displacement member 370 itself is also far (about 10 cm) away from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the back side, it is possible to make it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 . In other words, conventionally, there are many cases where the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism that transmits the driving force against the fraudulent act as described above. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360 by configuring the slide displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply a load in the first place.

In addition, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire that runs through the third flow path forming part 336, the thin metal wire itself hinders the flow of the ball that is about to flow down the third flow path forming part 336. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

As described above, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid erroneous balls as much as possible.

In the conventional model, it was usually configured to restrict the ball entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when the ball is allowed to enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11, but in the present embodiment, there is no movable member that restricts the ball entering the normal detection sensor SE12 in the state where the ball is allowed to enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20).

Even with this configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the variable probability state after the big winning game is ensured. Based on this idea, in the present embodiment, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. In addition, as a result of arranging no movable member, there is no need for maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member, and the pachinko machine can be used longer than the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 are devised to guide the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side. That is, the shape of the portions (i.e., protruding portions 317, 318, 319) fixedly arranged inside the flow path is designed to prevent the flow of more balls than expected to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position. This will be explained below.

First, the contrivance of the shape of the flow path will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) in the lateral direction (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set so that the angle and direction are the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path forming part 335, so that when the ball flows from the second flow path forming part 335 into the third flow path forming part 336, the bouncing of the ball (bouncing in the direction away from the partition plate part 338) can be reduced.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the ball passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338) by mistake.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the short direction, the flow path formed by the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a horizontal path formed only by the second flow path forming portion 335, and the inclination direction is the center side of the left and right (partition plate portion 338 side), so the velocity in the left and right direction is generated in the left and right direction. This also reduces the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, arrangement and configuration of the fixed projecting portions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner projecting portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path configuring portion 336 are first placed close to each other. The left and right inner projecting portion 318 is the smallest projecting portion among the projecting portions 317, 318, and 319, but it is arranged on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the front side of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370, so that it contacts the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 while sliding on the partition plate portion 338 without omission.

The projecting tip end surface of the left and right inner projecting portion 318 is configured as a downwardly concave curved surface when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the projecting portion is formed so as to expand to the left, right, outside and lower than the front end side of the projecting portion, and the front and rear end portions are formed so as to be connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and abutting on the left and right inner projecting portion 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward component and the downward component are mixed, and flows down.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are formed in a small size, the load received from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or left and right outward, and functions only as an impetus. Since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370 , the above-described biasing force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner projections 318 will be described separately for each case. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper projecting portion 376 and the front-rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding ends of the front-to-rear protruding portion 317 have similar uses as the upper protruding portion 376 . That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is made substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376 . As a guideline, the upper projecting portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at a position behind the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in a top view (see FIG. 17). 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down to the left and right outer sides, and the ball that is forced to the left and right outer sides by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 flows down in the left and right outer directions by making use of the momentum, so that the ball can smoothly flow down.

Furthermore, the left and right outward projecting portions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the bouncing of the ball, it is possible to smoothly form the downward flow of the ball. Since the purpose of the left and right outer projecting portions 319 is not to switch the flowing direction of the ball but to suppress the bouncing of the ball, its shape is significantly different from the front-rear long projecting portion 317, and the projecting end portion is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature formed from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer projecting portions 319 are arranged on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), when the left and right outer projecting portions 319 and the sphere are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer projecting portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball can be prevented from flowing back to the front side.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted further rearward than the longitudinally elongated projecting portion 317, so that the ball contacts the longitudinally elongated projecting portion 317 and flows.

The surface shape of the projecting end portion (curved surface) of the front-rear long projecting portion 317 is such that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely forward and downward because the projecting tip of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner projections 318 receives the load from the front-rear long projections 317 and flows toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

Here, there is a fear that the ball may rebound to the front side (reverse flow occurs) depending on where it collides with the front-rear projecting portion 317, but in the present embodiment, as described above, the contact with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 forces the ball outward and obliquely downward. 9), and the back flow in the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily avoided.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position and the ball flows to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side, the ball is displaced to the left and right outside due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318 in the same way as when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. However, if the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position toward the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, there is a possibility that a forward load will be applied to the ball, and a load in a direction (forward) that causes the third flow path forming part 336 to flow backward (forward load) will be applied to the ball.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 . For example, if the ball is controlled to complete the closing operation before reaching the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 in operation can be eliminated, so the possibility of the ball flowing backward can be reduced.

In addition, the front surface of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outer sides, and the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the balls without exception. This makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

In addition, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (movement from the front side position to the rear side position) is not the movement in the direction facing the ball but the movement in the side away from the ball, for example, even if the movement is executed while the ball is on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, the load that pushes the ball back toward the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is considered that even if the opening operation is performed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, the backflow of the balls will not easily occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (it is still in the stage before it flows to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 applies a load in the direction to suppress the rotation (the direction to rotate backward) to the ball, so the rotation of the ball can be stopped, the flow of the ball is stopped, and it is easy to shift to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is opened while the ball is rolling on the thin plate part 371, it can be easily avoided that the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the rolling so far, and the ball can be easily guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment equipped with the sorting device 300 described above, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be described. In the following, as an example, different cases will be described in which the angles of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction are different.

21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a game may be played by keeping the head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight that is horizontal or in a direction inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22), or by bringing the head close to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice details, while the latter narrows the field of view, but makes it easier to notice details in that field of view.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be mainly given while comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 21 to 23 show the opening state of the opening/closing plate 65b for the sake of convenience.

FIG. 21 shows the light emitting means 351 in phantom lines. Although the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top is as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half arranged in the lower side part 353 will be explained here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. As a result, the player's attention to the sealing member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is arranged right above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be noticed.

In addition, formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually stretched vertically by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the sealing member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Although the light emission control is not limited at all, for example, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 during a jackpot game, light is applied to the sealing member 313. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 arranged below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions right above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the light emitting means 351 is controlled so that when the ball enters the variable probability detecting sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the variable probability detecting sensor SE11 emits light, and when the ball enters the normal detecting sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detecting sensor SE12 emits light, thereby informing the player of the passing point of the ball.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the left and right central light emitting means 351 are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the left and right outer light emitting means 351 are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed over the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visible as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, so compared to the direction of FIG. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Since the placement through-hole 332a of the intermediate member 330 is formed as an opening with a minimum size sufficient for the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass through, the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize winning port 65a during the round game, and flow down the respective flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, there is a possibility that the line of sight directed to the sphere on the back side is obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the front side hides the ball on the back side.

Also, when the ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12 side, it flows from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right outward direction. Since the visibility decreases due to the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame portion 333 after it is detached from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction, it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of detaching from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction. If there is a sphere that is slightly displaced in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 , the sphere that is in the process of being displaced in the left-right direction from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is hidden by that sphere.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by visually checking whether or not the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336, and it is only necessary to pay attention to the inside and the right edge of the third flow path forming part 336. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path forming part 336 and the second flow path forming part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the sphere is configured so that it can flow down along a route that includes the inside of the third flow path forming part 336 and the periphery of the right edge (moving from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, there may occur a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12.

23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path forming part 335 are clearly separated in the vertical arrangement, so it is easy to avoid a situation in which the spheres on the upstream side are blinded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path that is visible at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized from the direction is reduced.

In particular, as described above, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, and then switches between the flow path toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, compared to the case where the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the upstream side, such as the case where the flow path of the sphere is switched depending on whether it flows directly downward or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are not formed and the sphere toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, the switching position is at least behind the center line of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming part 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path forming part 336 (falls by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower base of the third flow path forming part 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate part 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), so that part of the ball is hidden in the third flow path forming part 336 itself, and the ball is partially hidden in the third flow path forming part 336 itself. A portion of the sphere is hidden by the front side frame-shaped portion 333 by displacing it to the left and right outside of the range visually recognized through 336 .

Therefore, the area of the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336, which is visible to the player's eyes, becomes small, making it difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. As a result, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, each of the plurality of direction views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as direction views for identifying the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 has advantages and disadvantages. As a result, the player can adjust and select his/her favorite visual recognition method instead of requesting the player to play a one-sided game even with respect to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300, and the game mode can be given a range, thereby avoiding the situation where the player gets bored with the game.

The visibility of the player can be secured by various methods, but in the present embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, the roof portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be removed, so that the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be easily visually recognized.

Regarding the directional views of FIGS. 22 and 23 , the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, the thickness of the member reduces the amount of light that passes through, which blocks the view.

Since the range where the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is narrowed, it may be easier to visually recognize the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 in the direction view of FIG. 23 than in the direction view of FIG. 22 .

The member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured so that light is less likely to be refracted (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it can be avoided that the visibility of the sorting device 300 is deteriorated.

Even the portions that cannot be made flat from a functional point of view are formed so as to have little effect on visibility. For example, the projecting support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are arranged outside the player's line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower) so as not to block the player's line of sight looking obliquely downward.

Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the height of the center of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so the visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 , the ball that deviates from the specific prize winning opening 65 a flows down toward the out opening 71 . The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be described.

FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the out port 71 with the opening/closing plate 65b opened. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball flowing down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided to the side of the specific prize winning port 65a, so that the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 becomes the ball deviated to the left and right of the opening/closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portions 162 b and 162 c and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the out port 71 .

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 are arranged below the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, so that the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 can easily prevent the visibility of the balls flowing down the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 from being lowered.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 flows toward the center of the game area in the left-right direction at a gentle angle, like the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. Therefore, the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left-right center position of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and to the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, since the lateral positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are set to the same position (horizontal central position), the player's line of sight is moved up and down to guide the line of sight to a state in which both the out port 71 and the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, regardless of whether the ball hit toward the game area is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a efficiently (whether the number of useless balls is small during the jackpot game) or whether the balls frequently flow down between the extending portions 162b and 162c (whether the balls frequently occur during the jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path forming portion 336 by the falling ball can be achieved.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third channel forming part 336 while flowing down the second channel forming part 335, and when the ball deviates from the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third channel forming part 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

Normally, the ball heading for the out port 71 is a useless ball and does not have any action in the game, but in the present embodiment, with the configuration as described above, the ball heading for the out port 71 can have a role of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path forming part 336.

In the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may flow through the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path forming portion 335, thereby reducing the field of view of the second flow passage forming portion 335.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment in which the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a, and the third flow passage forming part 336 is arranged below the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down by the second prize winning port 140 and the electric role member 140a. . Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the periphery of the rear end thereof is lowered due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formed length of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, but this is intended to avoid an increase in the arrangement space that is likely to occur as a detriment. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the arrangement interval between the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guideline for the arrangement of the third flow passage forming part 336 is formed short from the player's eye level.

In addition, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the lower rear side of the specific prize winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG.

In addition, the ball enters the specific winning port 65a that is elongated in the left and right direction, and passes through the ball passage holes 163b of the detection sensors SE1 arranged at the left and right ends of the ball. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down in the horizontal direction of the specific prize winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required for the flow-down path of the ball can be a structure in which the lateral length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61 .

In particular, in the present embodiment, the specific prize winning opening 65a is arranged close to the out port 71. However, instead of the structure in which the ball flows downward from the left and right inner end portions of the second flow path forming portion 335, the structure in which the ball flows backward from the left and right inner end portions of the second flow pass forming portion 335 by the third flow pass forming portion 336 is adopted. 335 can be formed directly below. As a result, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the horizontal width of the specific prize winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 in the player's line of sight, in designing the game area in which the size in front view is restricted to a certain standard, the vertical width of the range occupied by the specific prize winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, the specific winning port 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow down of the ball after hitting the sorting device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessories (the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow down will be described.

First, as a premise, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 in about 0.3 seconds.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow passage forming portion 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 after entering the specific winning hole 65a.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific prize winning opening 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, the ball does not reach the detection sensor SE1 arranged at the rear end of the third flow passage forming part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is not shifted and the ball cannot pass through neither the variable probability detection sensor SE11 nor the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball winning a prize incorrectly.

Therefore, for example, control for releasing the opening/closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent erroneous winning to the V winning sensor (control accompanied by unnatural operation of the opening/closing plate), which is generally seen in a pachinko machine equipped with a V probability variable attacker, can be eliminated. As a result, the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening operates in a natural manner, thereby providing the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine provided with the variable V probability attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the variable V probability attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of the present invention, as will be described later, the ball that enters immediately after release produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball).

The time required for the sphere to pass through can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the channel forming portions 334 to 336, the shape of the channel inner wall (whether it is smooth or uneven).

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special symbol, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table that stores determination values for determining the jackpot types, and the determination values of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each jackpot type and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is determined, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with a first winning type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the lottery for the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry of the ball into the first winning hole 64) results in a big win, the value of the first winning type counter C2 ranges from "0 to 9".

When the jackpot A1 is reached, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 19" in association with the jackpot A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 39" in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the actuation pattern X (details will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "40 to 49" in association with the big winning B2 (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B2 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with the jackpot C1 (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot C1 is won, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the actuation pattern X (details will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with the jackpot C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot C2 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

As described above, when a big win is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), the 4-round big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls compared to the case of a big win in the lottery for the special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big win, the value of the first win type counter C2 is defined as "0 to 99" in the range of "0 to 99" in association with the big win a (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot a, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced in the actuation pattern X (details will be described later).

As described above, if the lottery for the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big win, 15 rounds of the big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, a player who wins a big win in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can get a large amount of paid-out prize balls compared to the case of winning a big win in the lottery of the special pattern 1, so that the player's motivation to play a game for the lottery of the special pattern 2 (a game of shooting balls so as to enter the second winning hole 140) can be enhanced.

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, when there is the third operation pattern as an operation pattern which has the disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated but has the advantage that the ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable prize winning device 65 for the big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2 to the third operation pattern, the effect of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage that the time required for the big win game can be shortened can be emphasized.

That is, since the possibility of delaying the big win game in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be reduced, the big win game which is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of putting out prize balls is good) can be realized.

In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol 2 jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. Also, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that the player can be prevented from casually playing the big winning game. In other words, the player can visually recognize the displacing motion of the slide displacing member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacing motion, and enhance the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability variation of the special symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbols is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessary 140a when winning the normal symbols is set to be long (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the definite variable state of the special symbols, the special symbols are likely to be a big win, and when the big win is achieved, the definite variable state of the special symbols is likely to be the big win a (a big win with good profit balance), so that the player can easily acquire a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning prize hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the winning is the normal symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing changes over time in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the big winning game (of the determined type). Operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300, which is performed when a jackpot game is awarded, will be described below. Note that FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 25 .

Incidentally, in this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is common in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of the jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation performance) is completed, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the opening/closing plate 65b is kept closed until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds), and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set as a period longer than a period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a and shorter than a period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously shot.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, when the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or the pachinko balls win a specified number (10 in this embodiment)) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls entering the left and right sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time for preventing a plurality of balls from entering one of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as ``entering balls in a row''), and the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a is not intended to be limited to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball reaches each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at once.

In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. In this embodiment, the driving control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front side position to the rear side position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through each flow path forming part 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20).

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced from the front side position to the rear side position at the same time when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and the slide displacement member 370 is so driven and controlled as to be displaced from the rear side position to the front side position after 0.8 seconds.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, so the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), the upper side of the slide displacement member 370, and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the state in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The 0.8 second as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is set based on the idea that it is a time shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 and the time that is longer than the time required for the ball to reach the third flow path forming portion 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening and closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336 regardless of the ball entering timing (see FIG. 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and the ball flowing down each flow path constituting part 334 to 336 as a ball entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Attention to the ball can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the ball reaches the third flow passage forming part 336, the possibility that the ball will block the line of sight is low, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming part 335 is arranged close to the front plate part of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight tends to be focused on the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying "Attention to the flowing ball!" etc. on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily avoid the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is configured so as to be separated at the center of the left and right, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on the left and right sides, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being blocked by the falling ball by paying attention to the rear of the third flow path forming portion 336 on the side where the ball does not enter (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, so that the attention to the ball can be improved, and the player can easily visually recognize whether the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the big win B1 or the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation performance) is completed, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the opening/closing plate 65b is kept closed until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds), and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the open/close plate 65b is operated for a long time.

The initial opening time is set as a period longer than a period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a and shorter than a period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously shot.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, when the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or the pachinko balls win a specified number (10 in this embodiment)) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering a ball in succession").

In this control example, since the balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, two balls can enter the specific prize-winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is opened once in 1.0 seconds even when the ball flowing-down interval does not change from that at the time of shooting. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 before the two balls pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336.

In the case of the big win B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the visibility is not lowered by other balls as in the case of the big wins A1 and A2, so the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the upstream ball is placed in the player's line of sight looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336.

In the case of a big win C1, a big win C2 or a big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation performance) is completed, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the opening/closing plate 65b is kept closed until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds), and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (up to 30 seconds), displaces the opening/closing plate 65b from the closed state to an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a, and causes the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time within the limit of the first operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, when the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or the pachinko balls win a specified number (10 in this embodiment)) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this control example, since the open/close plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, the next ball may enter each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 before the two balls pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern tends to cause a situation in which the visibility of the balls arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is lowered by the balls arranged on the upstream side.

In the case of the big win C1 or the big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big win C1 or the big win a, the ball passing through each flow path forming part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit C2, the ball passing through each flow path forming part 334 to 336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the control mode is such that the open/close plate 65b is maintained in an open state. Since the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 is structurally managed, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball bite can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the visibility is not lowered by other balls as in the case of the big wins A1 and A2, so the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the player's line of sight looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336.

In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the round game R of the first round, so compared to the second operation pattern, the arrangement of the balls in the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336 tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to deteriorate.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be performed early. That is, it is possible to quickly satisfy the winning of a specified number of balls as the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls), and to avoid the delay of the jackpot game.

In particular, the special symbol 2 jackpot is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X with a probability of 100%, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the ball is guaranteed to pass through the variable probability detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is originally low.

Therefore, even if the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is daringly allowed, by giving priority to avoiding the delay of the big win game, the progress of the big win game is realized in a short time, and the player's interest in the big win game can be improved.

Regardless of the kind of jackpot, when the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to hold the open/close plate 65b in a closed state until the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses, and after the first interval time between rounds Int1 elapses, the round game R of the second round is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning opening 65a, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is normally discharged after passing through the detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the second round is ended.

After that, as in the second round, the round game R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds interposed between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening/closing plate 65b is kept closed until the timer means passes the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds), and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this control example, the short-open displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the 3rd round, the 8th round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path configuration portions 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration portion 336 can be varied. As a result, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow passage forming part 336 can be motivated to devise a shooting mode of the ball.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when a plurality of balls are arranged in the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 at the same time, so if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern) By intentionally widening the ball firing interval in the jackpot type of the operation pattern, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the first operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning hole 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the shooting mode.

On the other hand, if the ball shooting interval is extended, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so there is a possibility that the round game R will be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R, a certain period (for example, 1.0 seconds) may be left before the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid the situation where the ball is placed in the third flow path forming portion 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y).

On the other hand, if the period until ball launch is set, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, according to the present embodiment, the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can enter through the specific winning opening 65a from either the left or right side.

That is, for example, the same effect as described above can be achieved even if the above-described shooting mode of increasing the shooting interval of the ball and the shooting mode of leaving a period until the ball is shot are maintained when the ball is entered on the left side, and the ball is shot in an arbitrary shooting mode when the ball is entered on the right side.

Specifically, as a shooting mode in which the balls are shot separately to the right and left toward the specific winning hole 65a, at least the first ball is shot to the right, the number (for example, the second) of the balls is shot to the left, and the rest of the balls are shot to the right.

In this case, by not paying attention to the sphere flowing down the right side flow path as each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but focusing on the sphere flowing down the left side flow path, it is possible to visually check whether the ball flowing down the left side flow path passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 while avoiding the line of sight being blocked by other spheres. In addition, in this case, since the balls are continuously shot toward the right part of the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to avoid the extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, and to avoid the round game R from being delayed.

It should be noted that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to make one ball enter the left channel. In particular, it suffices that the number of balls arranged in each of the left flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 can be limited to one for about 0.9 seconds until the number of balls passes through the left flow passage, and during the other period, the balls can be arbitrarily entered into the left and right flow passages.

As a result, even when the opening width above the specific winning hole 65a is not as long as in the present embodiment (for example, when the ball entry path is limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the nail arrangement (see FIG. 2)), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading for the specific winning hole 65a collide with each other and one of the balls spills to the left and right outside of the specific winning hole 65a. Although the nail arrangement is left-right asymmetrical in FIG. 2, the nail arrangement may be left-right symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the action unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

26 is a front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the opening 511a. Also, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27 .

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 is provided as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a plurality of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby integrally fixing the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. Therefore, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 may be used, or a protrusion with a shape (smaller outer shape) that increases the fitting gap in consideration of workability during assembly may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 arranged in the inner right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 arranged in the inner lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 arranged in the inner upper part of the rear case 510. A substrate having a light-emitting means such as an LED, and a decorative diffuser plate LB1, which is formed of a light-transmitting material and has a light-diffusing process over its entirety, are disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, on the left inside of the rear case 510.

Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is located on the right side of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is located above the opening 511a. First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. FIG. 28 shows the operation units 600 to 800 in an effect standby state, FIG. 29 shows a state in which the first operation unit 600 has changed from the effect standby state of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state, and FIG.

In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface of the covering member 787 facing forward is different from that of the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. On the inside, the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side is clearly visible, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member, the field of view is likely to be blocked by the nails, various prize-winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2) provided on the base plate 60. Therefore, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operation unit 500, the roles are the same. In addition, the inner frame of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third motion unit 800, but it does not curve downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate protrudes from the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third motion unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG.

FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward and the third operation unit 800 is shown in an individually combined state, and in FIG.

31 and 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, and if it is executed in the presentation standby state of the third operation unit 800, the surrounding decorative members and the decorative members 870, 880 will collide with each other, causing a problem.

In other words, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced downward from the standby state to a degree sufficient to avoid the collision of the decorative members 870 and 880), and the state is such that the decorative members 870 and 880 are allowed to be displaced within the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) performs control to perform reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), details of which will be described later. do.

FIG. 33 shows the third operation unit 800 in the extended state and the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly lowered from the extended state, FIG. 34 shows the state in which the first operation unit 600 is displaced from the state in FIG. 33 to the intermediate effect state, and FIG.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third motion unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first motion unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second motion unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), and the state of the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes from the presentation standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second operation unit 700 is prevented from overlapping the other operation units 600 and 800 in a front view by controlling the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the extended state so that it can be executed on the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the rendering standby state, or by placing the second operation unit 700 in an intermediate rendering state (see FIG. 33) when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. I can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

In particular, the function of the second action unit 700 as a rendering device is improved by configuring a plurality of states as the visual recognition state of the second action unit 700, namely, a case where the second action unit 700 is visually recognized in an overhanging state closer to the opening 511a and a case where the second action unit 700 is visually recognized in a state in which the second action unit 700 is slightly receded from the opening 511a but is arranged close to the third action unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first motion unit 600 performs displacement motion on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member 661. The box-shaped member 661 has a first rendering surface 661a facing obliquely to the left in an rendering standby state, a second rendering surface 661b formed on the back side of the first rendering surface 661a, and a third rendering surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first rendering surface 661a and the second rendering surface 661b. . Each rendering surface 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

In the waiting state of the first action unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, where the visibility from the front side tends to be lowered due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. The visibility of the first performance surface 661a can be improved from the inside of the frame of the opening of the first performance surface 661a in the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotary member 660 in an oblique direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first action unit 600 , the second decoration rotary member 660 projects in front of the third pattern display device 81 to face the player who views the inside of the center frame 86 . In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the second performance surface 661b facing straight ahead, the visibility of the second performance surface 661b from the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch the performance surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and is configured to be able to switch the posture according to the arrangement for the purpose of improving the visibility of the respective performance surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is not limited to planar posture changes parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but is designed to provide angle changes intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight is in the front-back direction and the easier it is for the player to face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction therewith. The projecting decorative part 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and is hidden from the player by being arranged in the upper right corner of the back case 510 in the waiting state for the effect (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the first action unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged inside the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front view, thereby being visible to the player.

In this state, the right end portion of the external shape of the projecting decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operation unit 600, and in the standby state of the first operation unit 600, the left edge of the first rendering surface 661a of the second decorative rotary member 660 and the area right end RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized approximately match.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the plate front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, the player can be made to visually recognize as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area. As a result, it is possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same polka dot pattern is used to decorate the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

As an example of associating the above display with decoration, for example, the third pattern display device 81 displays six colors out of the seven colors that make up the rainbow color, and the plate front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining one color. An example reminiscent of ignition in the 0 extension state is exemplified.

The presentation mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the projecting decorative portion 652b. Light emitting means for changing the brightness of the projecting decorative portion 652b will be described later.

Further, by arranging a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the projecting decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types, so that the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when expanding the display area beyond the right end RE1 of the area can be avoided from being restricted.

Further, the object to be associated with the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member of the second operation unit 700 (eg, the covering member 787), or the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b and the decoration formed on the member of the third operation unit 800 (eg, the first decorative member 870, the second decorative member 880) (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885). and may be associated with each other.

36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotary member 660 rotates while changing its attitude, and also the projecting decorative part 652b of the first decorative rotary member 650 is relatively displaced with respect to the second decorative rotary member 660, so that the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 transmitting a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the other end of the supported member 640. A first decoration rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the part, a second decoration rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decoration rotating member 650, and a decoration fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixed means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction, and a front lid member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened and fixed to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the fixing portion 614, and a long guide hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The elongated guide hole 616 is formed with a unique shape in which straight portions and curved portions are mixed, the details and operation of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a body portion 621 formed in a long plate shape, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the body portion 621 and externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the intermediate portion of the body portion 621 as an elongated hole extending in a straight line direction, and a drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the body portion 621. and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624 .

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622 . The torsion spring SP1 is configured so that one arm contacts the side wall of the main body 621 and the other arm contacts the projecting piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) to raise the rotating member 620.

In addition, in the axial support of the cylindrical portion 622 , a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip portion of the support fastening portion 615 while the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622 . As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The long transmission hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through-hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, details of which will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding rearward through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 pivotally supported on a cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in a state of meshing with the drive gear 632, and a cylindrical portion 613 of the front cover member 612 in a state of meshing with the transmission gear 633. and a transmission gear cam 634 journalled on c.

In a state in which the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are inserted into the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c, fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that is cylindrically projected toward the front side at the eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotary member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-described cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted through the long transmission hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the width and length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. As a result, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 641 and having a cylindrical cross-section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a cylindrical portion 643 projecting parallel to the cylindrical portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to engage with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the cylindrical portion 643, and the intermediate gear 644. A bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extending to the front side at the end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged.

With the above-described configuration, as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 can be meshed to generate driving force transmission.

With the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported by the body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a bottom rear side disposed close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface portion so that the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth 654a of the first decorative rotary member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed circularly around the center of the tubular shape and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decoration rotating member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

The first decorative rotary member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a perpendicular rotary shaft, a front rotary member 652 pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed tubular portion 645 , an illumination substrate 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652 b of the front rotary member 652 and having a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side, a rear rotary member 654 coaxially with the front rotary member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side, and a main body member 6 . A wire receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to 51 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wire passage, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and a perpendicular rotation member 657 that is externally fitted and pivotally supported in the cylindrical portion formed by the wire receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a that extends cylindrically on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diametrical position of the distal end thereof, and a notch portion 651c that is cut so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane passing through the female screw portions 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front lid member 612 in order from the base end, and is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw that has been inserted through the dish-shaped lid portion C2 into the female screw portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and configured to be displaceable along the guide elongated hole 616.

An opening C2a is formed in a part of the circumference of the dish-shaped lid C2, and the opening C2a forms a path for electric wiring by being disposed facing the notch 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state.

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided inside the second ornamental rotating member 660 , and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 662 . Other wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side facing the main body member 651 on the vertically opposite side of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a), is guided behind the projecting decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the electrical decoration board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. It should be noted that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An electrical decoration board 653 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the decorative projection 652b, and the projection decorative part 652b can be illuminated or blinked by light emitted from a light emitting means arranged on the decorative electrical board 653.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wire receiving member 655, and includes gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652 . That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of the operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for operations to be described later.

The second decorative rotary member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotary member 657, an electrical board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring clamping plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotary member 657 and fastened and fixed to the distal ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661, which will be described later, rotates, the electrical wiring board 662 is also rotated and displaced. Therefore, when guided by the connector of the electrical wiring board 662, the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a may be twisted or arranged disorderly. are

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the electrical board 662, twisting of the electrical wiring is unavoidable. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotary member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is reversed at a rotational angle of 135 degrees, so that it is possible to avoid excessive load on the electrical wiring or twisting of the electrical wiring.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotating shaft (rotating shaft formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from falling out of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The electrical board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 are aligned. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the electrical decoration board 662, the first rendering surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis is directed in the thickness direction, the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis is directed in the thickness direction, and the third rendering surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second rendering surface 661b) and whose optical axis is directed in the width direction. is given.

In this way, the light-emitting means arranged on the electrical decoration board 662 functions to illuminate the respective rendering surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but since the LEDs illuminating the third rendering surface 661c are arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second rendering surface 661b), the third rendering surface 661c (the surface facing upward) can be illuminated when the second rendering surface 661b is arranged on the front side (the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600). When the illuminating LED is caused to emit light, the second rendering surface 661b can be illuminated with light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LED is arranged behind the electrical decoration board 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the electrical decoration board 662, so that the light illuminating the third rendering surface 661c can also illuminate the second rendering surface 661b. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of rendering modes in which the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated, or to improve the brightness of the second rendering surface 661b during the light emitting rendering.

The decoration fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has decorative characters and figures formed so that the player can see it, and has an electric decoration substrate 671 that irradiates light obliquely forward left from the rear side thereof. The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always inclined to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the eyes of the player are likely to be arranged.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised toward the back side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612 . This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a side view of the first operation unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and fastening screws is omitted.

In the performance standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623 (for example, parallel). Thereby, the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding in the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of displacement, inertia assistance cannot be obtained as compared to the middle of displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase.

In addition, the same thing is configured to hold for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the overhanging state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the direction of displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the long transmission hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the stage waiting state and the position in the overhanging state) is along the longitudinal direction of the long transmission hole 623 (for example, parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decoration rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth portion 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be changed depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are meshed with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decoration rotating member 660 whose rotation axis is orthogonal.

The rotation angle of the second decoration rotary member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a , and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652 a of the front side rotation member 652 . That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first action unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. 43 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state. 45 is a front view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate performance state and the extended state.

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decoration rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third rendering surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first action unit 600, the second rendering surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44 , the guide long hole 616 includes a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b formed on a curve (substantially arc-shaped) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a.

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the standby state for the effect and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state is a curved displacement along the curved portion 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured to be changeable in state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the change in state. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630 , and the supported member 640 , the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620 .

Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, there is a possibility that displacement resistance generated between the portion guided by the elongated guide hole 616 and the elongated guide hole 616 will increase.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the waiting state for rendering (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises obliquely upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, the displacement resistance of the portion displaced inside the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. 47A and 48B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIGS. 48A and 48B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven member 640 on the driven side when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. As for the positive and negative values, positive indicates downward displacement and negative indicates upward displacement. In FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the supporting positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in the posture in the extended state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated by solid lines.

47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide long hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is arranged. The displacement in the guide length holes 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement caused by the movement of the supporting member 640 connected to the circular penetrating holes 624 of the rotating member 620, which is caused by the displacement due to the rotation of the rotating member 620. The end of the supporting member 640 where the axis O1 is located is also called the operation side of the supporting member 640.

An overview of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is the sum of the vertical displacement of the leading end of the rotation (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 due to the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical posture, and the displacement velocity component of the rotating member 620 is larger in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged in a range of 45 degrees to the left and right from the vertical). In other words, there are two conditions for the displacement in the vertical direction to be small.

Both of these are reversed in the overhanging state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are duplicated. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and is likely to be high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. Displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide long hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop violently. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (position in the middle of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide long hole 616, a mode is adopted in which a curved portion 616b is combined with a linear portion 616a below. As a result, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight in the linear portion 616a and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from vigorously falling beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

Displacement of the driven member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driving side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, the driving side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the driving side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the left side of the linear portion 616a in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocatingly displaced while the rotating member 620 is tilted without changing direction.

As a result, the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, while the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the linear portion 616a, the supported member 640 can appear to the player as if it is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, it is possible to generate a sliding displacement in the left-right direction by utilizing the run-up due to the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 about the driven side, so that the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to the case where the entire supported member 640 is slid in the left-right direction from the start of displacement. Therefore, the load required to start the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured according to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driving portion of the supported member 640 is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the orientation change direction of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotary member 660 are maintained without being switched (inverted).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning), and the displacement mode of the second ornamental rotating member 660 can be made vigorous.

Further, even in a situation where sufficient displacement of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 is ensured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement direction of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is displacement in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

The action produced by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600. FIG. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state where the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to employ a curved portion for the guide slot 616 . In other words, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above, the long guide hole 616 may be composed only of linear portions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the use of the curved portion 616b prevents the speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the linear portion 616a or guided by the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is similarly displaced downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in the opposite direction (rightward) to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, and the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided in the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the lower half of the curved portion 616b. ) is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the direction (to the left).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilt start side), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that a large displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be ensured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 . That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced from a specific initial position to the end position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the result of integrating the vertical velocity is the same. Therefore, if the displacement is slow at the start of the displacement, the displacement velocity increases in the final stage.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the imaginary axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown for comparison in FIG. In other words, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the imaginary axis line OE1 is greater than the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis line O1 guided by the guide slot 616 during the time when the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the imaginary axis OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which adversely affects the performance of the first motion unit 600 when performing the performance of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side is increased is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side uniform.

Uniformity in this case means not only that the velocity is brought to the same level over the entire range of displacement, but also means that the magnitude of the velocity is suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the rotating member 620 is tilted, the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually increases on the entry start side of the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after the entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, monotonous displacement of the supported member 640 can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side portion of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raising motion), so the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing changes in the angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624 and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 . That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, both the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decoration rotating member 650 and the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the rotation member 657 perpendicular to the axis are the same, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the attitude of the second decorative rotation member 660 .

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the waiting state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and is 90 degrees from the intermediate effect state of the first action unit 600 to the extended state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is tilted leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is tilted rightward by 45 degrees). b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the elongated guide hole 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640 . That is, in this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decoration rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even when only a sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the arrangement and orientation of the second ornamental rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

That is, if the extended portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the arrangement and attitude of the second decoration rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of rotating member 620 . Therefore, when judging the arrangement and orientation of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to calculate the numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Further, as a result, even when rotating the rotating member 620 at a constant speed, it is possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decoration rotating member 660 from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

A change in the angle θ is substantially the same as a change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhanging state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees) (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally becomes below the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to rotation per unit angle of the rotating member 620 to change depending on the size, it is possible to similarly configure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 to change. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 tends to be small, so that the posture can be easily maintained.

With the above-described configuration, the displacement motion of the second ornamental rotating member 660 can be adjusted. In the displacement operation of the second ornamental rotating member 660, as described above, the position change and attitude change accompanying the displacement of the supported member 640 and the rotational displacement around the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are simultaneously executed.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably larger at the timing when the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the curved portion 616b from the linear portion 616a of the long guide hole 616.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and even if the supported member 640 moves up and down (rebounds) somewhat from the position of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can maintain the state in which the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotating direction is conspicuously visible. That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In the present embodiment, the second rendering surface 661b of the second ornamental rotating member 660 faces the front side at the end of rotation (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and can be seen integrally with the ornamental fixing member 670 (see FIG. 28). Therefore, it is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from rebounding upward from the state where the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform by forming the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is arranged at the lower end of the displacement, and prevent the supported member 640 from rebounding.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotary member 660 (for example, the placement of the cylindrical portion 643) at the end of the downward displacement of the rotary member 620 are configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation axis of the rotary member 620. As a result, the weight of the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620 can prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from swaying, and the rotating displacement of the rotating member 620 can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is configured to preferably prevent displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the rebound direction (upper left direction) about the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. In other words, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is slanted in the upper left direction, and the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed, so that the supported member 640 can be prevented from springing back.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 differs from the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement.

In the former case, if there is no guidance, it is assumed that the supported member 640 is displaced downward and to the left along the direction of displacement of the driven member 640 (rotating direction of the rotating member 620).

On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640 , so the displacement direction is not along the long guide hole 616 but along the width direction of the long guide hole 616 . As a result, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and rebounding of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

A feature of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first motion unit 600 changes from the extended state to the presentation standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the driving motor 631) is mainly used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 disposed on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660, the less the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the value of the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is designed to be the lowest at the time when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (a posture facing the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertia force in the rotational direction of the second ornamental rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted about the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the rotating member 620 is broken. In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 elastically deforms to withstand a load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

Displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b will be described. The projecting decorative portion 652b is a member that rotates around the axis O1, and the rotational angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the positional change of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when the performance standby state is changed to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates as long as the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the presentation standby state to the projecting state is about 135 degrees, and the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotated by about 45 degrees. Here, if the projecting decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the waiting state for the effect, it feels like it collides with the other action units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). However, in this embodiment, the posture of the supported member 640 itself, which serves as a reference for the rotation of the projecting decorative portion 652b, changes in a manner of clockwise rotation, so collision with the other action units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) can be avoided.

In other words, since the decorative projecting portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacing the decorative projecting portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the projecting decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, when the supported member 640 changes from the projecting state arrangement to the production standby state arrangement, the projecting decorative portion 652b projects to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operation unit 800, or partially hides the projecting display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. May have adverse effects.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driven side of the supported member 640 is used as a reference, and the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the driving side of the supported member 640. Therefore, when the supported member 640 projects toward the third symbol display device 81, it projects in conjunction with the supported member 640, and when the supported member 640 moves away from the third symbol display device 81, it retracts in conjunction. Therefore, the projecting decorative portion 652 b in the retracted state can be arranged on the side away from the third pattern display device 81 .

The rotation angle of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's line of sight can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. FIG. That is, the difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees is 45 degrees.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the attitude of the supported member 640 is the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620 . That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into the angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and the angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the posture change of the supported member 640 is obtained as ((a1+b1)−(a2+b2))−(b1−b2)=(a1−a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotational angle of the decorative projecting portion 652b with respect to the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotational angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, if the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant angular velocity, the rotational angular velocity of the decorative projecting portion 652b with respect to the posture of the supported member 640 is constant, although the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the projecting decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 can be made to appear as if there is a section of sliding movement or a section of rotational movement from the player's eye level, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decorative section 652b can be visually recognized as a non-mechanical soft displacement mode.

This action can be realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by separating a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. That is, the decorative projecting portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b is influenced by the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's viewpoint.

Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that the decorative projecting part 652b is rotationally displaced in a section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, and it is possible to visually recognize the decorative projecting part 652b as if it is slidingly displaced in the section where the posture change is small relative to the displacement amount in the sliding direction.

As described above, the rotating member 620 is rotatably displaceable so as to constitute the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state, and has been described as being displaced from one end of displacement to the other end of displacement.

For example, after rotating and displacing the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed so as to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of its descent, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to set the stop position accurately.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate presentation state where the amount of rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force allocated to the second decoration rotating member 660 increases, so that the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 can be reduced as the amount of rotation of the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, so that the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate presentation state without setting the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 to be low in advance.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is an effect standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28) is retracted below the opening 511a in order to secure the field of view of the player looking at the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28); The state is mainly switched between the state (see FIG. 35).

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the up/down reversal effect device 770 are illustrated in a disassembled state, and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a rotating arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and rotatable about the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720, and the tip of the rotating arm member 720. a left rear plate member 750 fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the lift plate member 740; a pair of left and right front support members 760 fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750; An up-and-down reversal effect device 770 configured to be capable of displacing the member 740 and the front support member 760 in a combination of up-and-down displacement and front-back direction displacement is provided.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730 , a gap formation portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge and forms a gap with the rear case 510 , a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 that are arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730 , and the up/down reversal effect device 7 that is inclined toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. and a plurality of fastened portions 718 formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are arranged at intervals such that a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged with detection grooves at positions where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged so as to match the position of the detected portion 735 in the waiting state of the second action unit 700, the position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate effect state of the second action unit 700, and the position of the detected portion 735 in the extended state of the second action unit 700.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, or an extended state, and the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operation unit 700 from the output result.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511 b projecting forward from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 . A long hole portion 723 is bored along the longitudinal direction at the end portion, a cylindrical fastening portion 724 is provided at the left end portion of the body portion 721 in a cylindrical shape and protrudes forward (in a direction parallel to the projecting direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a) and has an internal thread formed therein, and a cylindrical fastening portion 724 is projected rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrical projective portion 724 and the support cylindrical portion 722 and has a female thread formed on the internal periphery. A fastening portion 725 and a torsion spring SP<b>2 that is wound around the support cylinder portion 722 and applies a biasing force in the upward direction (the direction to lift the left side portion) to the main body portion 721 between the rear case 510 and the back case 510 .

The left side of the main body portion 721 is stepped so as to be displaced toward the front side compared to the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and the support plate 701 is arranged in the gap formed on the back side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so that the cylindrical fastened portion 725 can be guided. A fastening screw inserted through the long hole 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the support plate 701 via the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 725 so as not to fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , the left portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation arm member 720 from tilting toward the front due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side portion of the body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 . That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 .

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotational direction of the rotary arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the elongated hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 that is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, a drive gear 732 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 that meshes with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 that meshes with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a projecting cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are rotatably supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734 .

The gear cam member 734 includes a detected portion 735 projecting forward in an arc shape centering on the rotation shaft portion and formed so as to be able to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, an extending portion 736 extending so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical projecting portion 736a cylindrically projecting from the tip of the extending portion 736 toward the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a portion for enabling the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to detect the attitude of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protruding portion 736 a is formed to be able to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720 , and the displacement of the cylindrical protruding portion 736 a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723 .

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing the fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down along with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a guided member 741 that is arranged on the left end side and is guided in the vertical direction, and a laterally elongated member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741.

The guided member 741 is formed so that the metal rod 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a vertical direction can be inserted through the guided member 741 , and the guided member 741 can be vertically displaced along the metal rod 702 . The tips of the protrusions protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear face abut against the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the posture of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontal member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 includes a long hole 743 formed in an elongated oval shape in the left and right direction with a vertical width through which the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 protruding to the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744.

A fastening screw inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 through the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is inserted, and supports the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 so as to be displaceable back and forth. That is, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevation plate member 740, but is arranged on the front side of the elevation plate member 740 so as to be displaceable back and forth with the elevation plate member 740 as a reference.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773 . The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of separating the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting/lowering reversal effect device 770 from each other.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a longitudinally elongated plate portion 745a and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft portions projecting outward from the plate portion 745a to the left and right.

The rotary tube portion 745b rotates when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 described above is displaced back and forth, and functions as a portion that guides the front and back displacement, the details of which will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750 includes, like the front upper slope portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, a front upper slope portion 751 that is inclined toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the right side so as to be able to guide the rotating cylindrical portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and a plurality of fastened portions 752 that are formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws that are inserted from the back side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 is provided with a three-dimensional decoration part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate to which an LED is fixed on the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a, so that the three-dimensional decoration part 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front side support members 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 configured to have an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving slope portion 762 which is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and formed so as to slope toward the front side as the back surface of the plate goes upward.

The fixing plate portion 761 is a plate portion that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving slope portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper slope portions 714 and 751 . That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the up/down reversal effect device 770 moves up and down while being displaced in the front-rear direction. The vertical displacement will be described below.

52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and center frame 86 along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 52(a) and 52(b) show the effect waiting state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. In FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the intermediate rendering state of the second action unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 54(a) and 54(b) illustrate the extended state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

The up-and-down displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 shown in FIGS. Driving force transmission when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced up and down will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as needed.

At the start of driving force transmission from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723 of the rotary arm member 720, so displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. Moreover, the same thing holds true in the overhanging state as well.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the vertical reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 is arranged on the back side under the center frame 86, and is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction as it is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by a configuration in which the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751, and a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the elevation reversal effect device 770 are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevation plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotating cylinder portions 774e are designed to be aligned in parallel with the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side, not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56), which are arranged at symmetrical positions. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 that displaces can be reduced.

Furthermore, by designing the arrangement of the rotary cylinder portions 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly upward, thereby suppressing the tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby avoiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotational axis position) of the effect device 780 is designed to be positioned slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always biased forward by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b that is closely arranged when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered is arranged slightly upward, and the rear rotary cylinder portion 745b that is closely arranged when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised is arranged slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this configuration, since the front rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, rolling can be stably generated with the first horizontal plate 774b. As a result, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guidance. Therefore, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction displacement as compared to when it is lowered.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is vertically displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to resist gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced upward.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second action unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the arrangement of the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of assisting the longitudinal displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged above the arrangement of the intermediate effect state, the force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770.

As a result, the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the performance waiting state of the second motion unit 700, and the stop control is performed to stop the second motion unit 700 so as to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, even if the stop timing is slightly earlier than the ideal, the second motion unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate performance state side by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

Further, for example, when stop control is performed in the same manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operation unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descent due to its own weight is suppressed by the urging force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operation unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state side and maintained.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the extended state of the second operation unit 700, and the stop control of the drive motor 731 is performed so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the up/down reversal effect device 770 passes the intermediate effect state downward, so that it is possible to easily prevent a large downward displacement from the intermediate effect state. Then, even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second motion unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the effect of displacing the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction along with the up-and-down displacement will be described. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it is displaced inside and outside a frame bordered by a center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of such movable accessories are designed with emphasis on appearance when arranged inside the center frame 86, and in the state of retracting to the outside of the center frame 86, the appearance is often not considered under the assumption that the player will not pay attention.

Recently, however, the front-to-rear distance from the third pattern display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the end of the field of view where the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is seen through the inside of the center frame 86, the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the rear side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and upper and lower surfaces (first and second secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 in FIG. 52). Each decorative surface is configured to easily fit into the field of view of the player by setting the line extending moderately (sloping downward toward the rear), that is, the direction of displacement along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the field of view of the player.

As a result, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be placed within the visual field of the player without difficulty. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, in FIG. 54) visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54) and the upper side surface (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 or second secondary decorative surface 787b2, FIG. 2, decorations (graphics, patterns, letters or pictures) formed on the first secondary decoration surface 787a2) are formed as mutually related decorations.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are formed as the first decoration related to each other, the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 are formed as the secondary decoration related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decorations formed on the upper surface are arranged in the front and rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged behind the center frame 86 in the performance waiting state of the second operation unit 700, so that they are easily seen when the player moves his eyes so as to switch between the state of paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the state of paying attention to the display performance developed on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents such as ``chance'', ``jackpot'', etc.) visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state can be made visible to the player through the upper side surface of the covering member 787 even in the waiting state for presentation.

As a result, the third pattern display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement of the performance standby state so as to be easily visually recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously attracted to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Further, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, so that the contents of the decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state can be different.

For example, if the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state (if overlooked or if the operating speed is excessively fast), if the contents of the decorative surface can only be grasped from the front side, the majority of the front side is hidden by the game board 13 in the effect standby state. attention to is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper surface as in the present embodiment, the player can grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that the player has been able to visually recognize through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state by visually recognizing the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the waiting state for the effect.

As a result, the contents notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visually recognizable decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance waiting state to the player who missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the projecting state. As a result, regardless of each state such as the effect waiting state or the projecting state, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be maintained high.

In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the up/down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is configured such that it moves forward of the rear end surface of the game area from the state arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second action unit 700 is in the performance standby state, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the rear surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 includes a flow path forming portion 86a protrudingly formed on the covering member 787 side.

The flow passage forming portion 86a is a portion that forms a rear side portion of a guide flow passage for guiding a ball that has entered a warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 to the lower edge of the center frame 86, then swung backward on the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86, then flowed forward again, and guided toward the first prize winning opening 64 disposed in the game area (see FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

Since the ball flowing down the flow path forming part 86a enters the first winning hole 64 with a high probability, the player's attention to the flow path forming part 86a is high, and especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86, the player's line of sight tends to gather on the flow path forming part 86a. In the effect waiting state (see FIG. 52), since the effect device 780 is arranged directly behind the flow path forming part 86a, it is possible to easily constitute a state in which the effect device 780 enters the player's field of view in the effect standby state.

When the second action unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the covering member 787 is arranged on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)). When the second action unit 700 is in the middle effect state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)).

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inner side of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front and rear positions as the front and rear positions of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front side (approaching the player side).

In addition, when the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction as the second motion unit 700 is vertically displaced, the front-rear position of the front end surface of the second motion unit 700 is configured to match (coincide with) the front-rear position of the second effect surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first motion unit 600.

As a result, the front and back positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first action unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second action unit 700, which are arranged close to each other when viewed from the front in the overhanging state, are matched, and they can be easily visually recognized integrally.

On the other hand, the arrangement of the production device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate production state and the production standby state than in the overhanging state, so that the box-like member 661 of the first operation unit 600 and the production device 780 can be separated (independently) from each other in comparison with the overhanging state, and can be easily visually recognized.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 includes a body member 771 connected and supported by the lift plate member 740, and a effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with the body member 771 as a reference. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.

55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. 50 and 51 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56 as needed.

The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 that is elongated in the left-right direction, an insertion tubular portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extensions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the rear side, and a connecting portion that extends vertically. a length portion 775; a plurality of guide portions 776 arranged on the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 on the back side so as to be able to guide the linear motion plate member 784 of the effect device 780 in the left and right direction; .

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a slidable dimensional relationship on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction by sliding. That is, by inserting the tubular portion 773 through the cylindrical portion 744, tilting displacement of the body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lift plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The guide extending portion 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the horizontal direction, a second horizontal plate 774c which is connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b and whose width direction faces the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and left and right outer side surfaces of the vertical plate 774a. A pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d protruding outward from the upper and lower sides, and a rotary tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width than the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b so as to extend inward in the left and right direction. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanded portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the lift plate member 740 in the vertical direction. That is, by ensuring the width of the second horizontal plate 774c to such an extent that it is arranged vertically opposite to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement in which the body member 771 falls forward with the elevating plate member 740 as a reference.

A pair of the tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of tubular portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotary tubular portions 774e can be brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and localized load can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned manner and having internal threads formed on the inner peripheral side, and a plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b fastened and fixed so as to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The drop-off prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a by screwing a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole from the back side into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, the details of which will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical projecting portion 777c cylindrically projected toward the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a rear surface. and a wiring retaining member 777e that is fastened and fixed on the side.

The cylindrical protruding portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and is a portion that axially supports the upside-down reversing member 781 so as not to come off by screwing a fastening screw into the cylindrical protruding portion 777c while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b.

A fastening screw that is screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and fastening the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between it and the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the wiring retaining member 777e in a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777, it is possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777.

The light emitting means 778 includes two vertically elongated plate-shaped electrical boards 778a on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light diffusing member 778b which is a plate member formed of a light-transmitting resin material and on which light diffusion processing is formed and which is arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 778a.

The upper electrical board 778a is provided with a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler-type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the effect device 780 by arranging an arcuate projecting portion 781d in the detection groove, the details of which will be described later.

The light diffusion member 778b on the lower side has a plurality of fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws that are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions are screwed into the fastening portions, thereby making the fastening screws inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both left and right sides, and the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 778c from the front side are screwed into the female screw portions 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is arranged so as to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c.

Therefore, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the production. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the insertion direction of the fastening screw can be increased.

The effect device 780 is a device configured to be displaceable by disposing an outer portion around the upper long portion 775. A vertically reversing member 781 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777, a driving motor 782 having a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the vertically reversing member 781 and a drive motor 782 fixed to a drive shaft, and one end of each of the longitudinal direction ends of the vertically reversing member 781 is a shaft. A pair of intermediate arm members 783 supported, a pair of linear motion plate members 784 whose other end portions are pivotally supported and displacements are guided in the lateral direction by a guide portion 776, a pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate members 784 and the intermediate arm members 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) by a rotation shaft extending in the lateral direction, and a pair of shaft supporting members 7 that jointly support the shaft rotating members 785 with the linear motion plate members 784. 86, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the shaft rotation member 785 so as not to fall off in a state where the phase is fixed, and covering members 787 that are arranged in front and behind the end plate members 785d and are formed with a left and right length that cover the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775.

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the rear side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a in a gear shape, a pair of cylindrical protruding portions 781c protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion 781a toward the back side, and an arc shape protruding from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. and a projecting portion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at its center. A cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted through this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the upside-down reversing member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a. When the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the drive motor 782, thereby rotating the upside-down reversing member 781. That is, the upside-down reversing member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782 .

The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. As shown in FIG. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c that is displaced as the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arcuate protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effect means 778 . That is, the arcuate projecting portion 781d can be arranged on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, it is possible to determine the posture of the upside-down member 781 from two postures in which the arcuate projections 781d are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensor 778d, and an posture between them (a posture in which the arcuate projections 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long bar shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side penetratingly formed at the other end on the opposite side of the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. and a portion 783c.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction. A pair of supporting plate portions 784d that are arranged parallel to each other between the hole portion 784c and the elongated hole portion 784c and protrude toward the back side, a pair of projecting portions 784e that are formed as projecting ridges extending in the front-rear direction and protrude from the intermediate portion of the supporting plate portion 784d so as to face each other, and a pair of fastened portions 784f that are cylindrically opened at the end portion of the supporting plate portion 784d and have female threads formed on the inner peripheral side. , an arrangement hole 784g penetrating between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the shaft support member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the intermediate arm member 783 is axially supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 784a so that the fastening screw inserted from the back side of the other cylindrical portion 783b is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner peripheral diameter that is slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is arranged close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to face the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction, thereby limiting the tilting displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. As a result, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other-side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the tubular portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw that is inserted from the rear side into the insertion hole of the drop-off prevention plate portion 776b is screwed into the female screw formed in the tubular portion 776a, so that the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

In the supported state (assembled state), the direct-acting plate member 784 can be slidably displaced along the forming direction of the long hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the axial rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for defining the lateral arrangement of the metal rod 785a, the details of which will be described later.

The arranging hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, which will be described later in detail.

The shaft rotating members 785 are members arranged in a left and right pair and pivotally supported by the direct-acting plate member 784. The metal rod 785a is formed of a metal material in a substantially cylindrical shape, the recessed groove 785b is formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the metal rod 785a in the length direction, and the members are arranged at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and are fixed to the metal rod 785a. an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a; a ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged in a manner raised from the end plate member 785d around the metal rod 785a of the end plate member 785d; and a rotational position stabilizing portion 785f into which a screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is arranged between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the ridge portion 784e is arranged to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship such that it is slidable with respect to the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship such that displacement in the left-right direction is restricted with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove 785b is set slightly longer than the horizontal width of the ridge 784e, the diameter of the groove depth of the recessed groove 785b is set shorter than the gap length between the ridges 784e, and the diameter of the portion where the recessed groove 785b is not formed is set longer than the gap length between the ridges 784e.

As a result, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the direct-acting plate member 784 so as to be axially rotatable and restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784 . With the bevel tooth member 785c partially entering the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c are meshed.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and displacement toward the back side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross-sectional shape) as the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed in a dimensional relationship of interference fit to be fitted and fixed.

The method for fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or a method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female screw on the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw into the female screw to be inserted into the end plate member 785d, or any other method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the direct-acting plate member 784 . The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the tubular portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d can be easily aligned with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion in which the provided metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft supporting member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is a member capable of holding the magnet Mg between an insertion hole 786a formed so that a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, a ring holding half portion 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between a ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784, and a magnet holding half portion 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. and a magnet retaining half 786c formed in the shape of a box.

When the connecting screws inserted from the back side in the insertion hole 786a are screwed into the tightening portion 784f and the direct mobilized board member 784 and the axis branch material 786 are assembled, the dropout of the metal rod 785a on the back side of the shaft branch material 786 is restricted, and a ring -shaped metal component 785E. Is held in the ring holding half part 784h and 786B, and the magnet MG is held in the magnet holding half part 784i and 786c.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides opened as a pair at the front and back.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 which is formed as a decorative surface to be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 which is formed on the back surface, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 which is formed on the side where the player can visually recognize when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the production standby state (see FIG. 52), and a second secondary decorative surface 787a2 which is formed on the back surface. and a secondary decorative surface 787b2. The second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and the waiting state for effect (see FIG. 52) is reached.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26).

The extending portions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are arranged close to each other when the covering member 787 is arranged close to each other (see FIG. 26). As a result, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be viewed integrally.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening the circular portion arranged in the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emission effecting means 778 and the arc plate portion above the center of the upper left and right portion 775 when the covering member 787 is arranged close to the covering member 787 (see FIG. 26).

The covering member 787 is formed so as to be switchable between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an erect vertical arrangement state) of the upside-down member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projections 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the vertical reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the erect vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the effect device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical inversion member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the horizontal direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785 , and the lateral displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783 b corresponds to the lateral displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785 .

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, but there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangement in which the degree of linear motion displacement is greater.

First, to explain the outline, the structure of the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the direct acting plate member 784 is a known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside-down reversing member 781 moves parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c in front view. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in opposite left and right directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it rotates about 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends).

57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the posture change centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view, which is suppressed to an angle of 15 degrees or less, which is the angle of the arrangement interval between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the load transmission (engagement transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at positions opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), and FIG. 4 and an axial rotation member 785. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). In FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown to overlap each other, and the width of this overlap is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced by transmitting the driving force. While the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 57( a ), the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward.

While the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 rotates 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b), the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement is less than the thickness of the gear teeth in the circumferential direction, and is less than the amount to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. That is, it is smaller than the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for rotation of an angle of 30 degrees, given that the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are made of a resin material. ).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c is caused by the attraction force generated from the magnet Mg to the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f (see FIG. 54) of the shaft rotating member 785, which opposes the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside down member 781.

That is, in order to limit the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 .

As for the left shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the magnet Mg is arranged on the upper side opposite to the right side (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785 .

In this embodiment, the attracting force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f are separated from each other, resulting in an extremely reduced magnetic force.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the force in the direction of rotation of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785 .

As a result, the movement of the covering member 787 can be slowed down without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782, so that the performance effect of the covering member 787 can be improved while reducing the burden of the control design of the driving motor 782. - 特許庁

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg can delay the timing of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 from the timing of the start of rotation of the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attractive force of the magnet Mg is configured as a pair of upper and lower portions. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotational position stabilizing portions 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force (see FIG. 52(b)). The upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force delays the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of translational displacement in the horizontal direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of translational displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, since the slider-crank mechanism is employed as described above, a similar action is produced. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the horizontal direction and small in the vertical direction, so the displacement in the horizontal direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation thereof is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the vertical reversing member 781 tilts toward the horizontal direction, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c decreases in the horizontal direction and increases in the vertical direction. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotating operation of the upside-down reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 first increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases, and the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

By generating linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extended portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Next, changes in appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the effect device 780. FIG. 59(a) to 59(c) show the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 in chronological order. FIG. 59(a) shows the production device 780 in the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781, FIG. 59(b) shows the production device 780 when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertical arrangement state, and FIG. 59(c) shows the production device 780 in the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781.

The vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 57(a)) to change the state to the inverted vertically arranged state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

When the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) in front view from the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Therefore, the reversing operation can be repeatedly switched between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG.

As described above, while the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 57( a ), the shaft rotating member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783 c. Here, from the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right sides and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left covering member 787 faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed together during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the contents of the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally shifted left and right, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to be difficult for the player to recognize, so that the amount of information given to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

As a result, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced. In addition, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, there is an effect that the player's line of sight can be easily maintained on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

Rotational displacement is executed in the extended state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but when this rotational displacement is stopped and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the effect device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state the first secondary decorative surface 787a. 2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is less likely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced closer to the second operating unit 700, the third operating unit 800 blocks the view to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

On the other hand, when the second action unit 700 is in the waiting state for effect (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes easier to enter the player's field of vision.

In this way, in the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is formed as a side surface that can attract the player's attention in the waiting state for the effect by preventing the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized together during the rotational displacement or facing the player side in the extended state.

As a result, the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a state in which performance performance with respect to the cost of arranging the second operation unit 700 (occupying a place, burden of skillful concealment) is excessively lowered.

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotationally displaced, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the attitudes of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In the present embodiment, the metal member attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by translational displacement in the horizontal direction, so the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of executing rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right collide with the cover member 787 by executing the rotational displacement.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be rotated.

Therefore, drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is performed on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state. As a result, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781, and in this state are arranged to face the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 in the front and rear. Therefore, if the covering member 787 is rotated by the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction from this arrangement, the extended portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a problem.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as a unit, and is a configuration that is necessary for presentation, so it is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be translatively displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 before being rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear motion displacement of length L1, the extended portion 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, thereby avoiding the problem of collision between the extending portion 787c and the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, the decoration surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed ignoring the appearance during the rotational displacement, thereby improving the degree of freedom in design.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attracting force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if there is a design change to lengthen the lateral width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, while the configuration of the effect device 780 remains the same, by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet having a large attracting force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c as in the present embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be hidden by the covering member 787 at all times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw inserted through the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to avoid lowering the performance effect due to the tightening screw.

In the present embodiment, since the decorations (graphics, patterns, pictures, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787, the insertion holes 778c are arranged asymmetrically in accordance with the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the electrical board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is likely to be visible in the dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c in the right and left decorations, avoiding areas that are conspicuously illuminated. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical.

In addition, it is naturally permitted to make the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c bilaterally symmetrical. In particular, when the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identically decorated, there is no disadvantage due to the symmetrical arrangement of the insertion holes 778c, and the design of the decorative substrate 778a can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced to the left and right during the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770, and even in a state in which the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is not surrounded by the extended portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up/down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the direct acting plate member 784 are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 disposed on the front side. The upside-down reversing member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b.

As a result, the mechanical part for realizing the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the presentation effect due to the appearance of the presentation device 780 during the reversing operation can be avoided from deteriorating.

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the waiting state for effect, supported by the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the back case 510, and configured to be vertically displaceable as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

60 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 60 and 61 show the parts that constitute the displacement of the third operation unit 800, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative parts arranged outside is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted on the inner peripheral side, and a main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted on the inner peripheral side. a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840; and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a cylindrical fixing portion 812 formed in a recessed portion to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 at the center thereof, and having an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting an electric wiring, a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with a detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detection target portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 for holding a drive motor 861, and a transmission gear 863. and a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding on the front side as double cylindrical portions that support the load response gear 865 without falling off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the central portion. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a disc-shaped decorative substrate 823 fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and having a light-emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side, an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) translucent decorative member 824 formed of a light-transmitting resin material capable of covering the decorative substrate 823 from the front side, and the cylindrical portion 8. A sliding member 825 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of 21 and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 .

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the rear end portion thereof, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole of the tubular fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, whereby the fixed cylindrical member 820 is non-rotatably fastened and fixed to the held member 810.

The cylindrical portion 821 is axially penetrating on the inner peripheral side, and the electrical wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is laid through this penetrating portion toward the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the electrical board 823.

The illumination board 823 includes, as LEDs, inner light-emitting portions 823a arranged at the apexes of the pentagon and central positions equidistant from the vertices, and outer light-emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 locations at equal intervals on the circumference. The inner light emitting portion 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (forward), and the outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b irradiates the plated portions 871a of the first decorative members 870 which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with the light from the three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting portion 823b is fixed to the electric decoration substrate 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate about the center of the circle. Since the outer light-emitting portion 823b and the first decorative members 870 are arranged on a coaxial circle at equal intervals, the light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be emitted to each first decorative member 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the light amount of the light LD1 that irradiates the first decorative member 870 during the rotating operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side portion slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and an outer diameter side portion slidable on the circular flange portion 831 a of the inner rotating member 830 .

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion projecting rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion.

The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable therearound. In addition, by arranging the sliding member 825 on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the circular flange portion 831a side of the body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed by the load generated during sliding or sliding failure (unintentionally excessive displacement resistance).

The inner rotary member 830 includes a cylindrical body portion 831 having a circular flange portion 831a at the front end thereof, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange portion 831a in positions where the circumference of the body portion 831 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction so that the longitudinal direction is aligned in the radial direction, and a plurality of linear motion members 83 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted and guided by the metal rods 832 so as to be linearly displaceable. 3 and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer portion of the linear motion member 833 .

The body portion 831 includes the circular flange portion 831a described above, a plurality of sliding protrusions 831b extending rearward in a protrusion shape with the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five points) between the adjacent metal rods 832, and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding ridge portion 831b is configured to be slidable on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and has a protruding tip formed in a semicircular cross-section in order to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, it is positioned opposite to the metal rod 832 with respect to the center axis of the outer rotating member 840 (a position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in the radially outward direction along the metal rod 832 in a switching rotation operation, which will be described later, and the outer rotary member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported is subjected to a load such that the outer rotary member 840 is displaced in the radially outward direction, the displacement of the outer rotary member 840 can be received by the sliding ridges 831b.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission projection 864a of the central annular gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission projection 864a in the recessed portion 831c, mutual relative rotation is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central annular gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical projections 833a and 833b that are spaced apart in the direction of linear movement displacement and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape; and a recessed groove 833d recessed along.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement restricting groove for preventing the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidably fitting the overhanging portions 873 and 883 of the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the details of which will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b projecting in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner peripheral side, and functions to fasten and fix the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 874 and 884 of the decorative members 870 and 880, the details of which will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extending arms 842 extending radially outward at positions that divide the circumference of the main body 841 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target extending radially outward of the main body 841 so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. a portion 844;

The extension arm portion 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841. A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting a fastening screw into the female thread while the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the proximal side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a part for switching the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, details of which will be described later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is an elongated member having a proximal side rod portion 851 whose one end side is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotating member 840 , a thickened portion 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side of the proximal side rod portion 851 at the other end side, a distal side rod portion 853 extending from the front end of the thickened portion 852 in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the proximal side rod portion 851 , and a distal side rod portion 8 . and a rotation transmission part 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of 53 .

The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the direct-acting member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 833a to be inserted therethrough so as to be rotatable with each other; and a bevel tooth portion 854c that is formed and meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 that are rotatably supported by the cylindrical protruding portion 815 and meshed so as to transmit the driving force via the drive gear 862, a central annular gear 864 that meshes with the transmission gear 863, and the central annular gear 864 located in front of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 that are displaced and pivotally supported by the double cylinder projecting portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 that is supported on the back side of the load response gear 865 by the double cylinder of the double cylinder projecting portion 816 and has a variable resistance corresponding to the rotational load applied to the load response gear 865.

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted through its inner peripheral side. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, the rear end portion of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a dimensional relationship of intermediate fit or interference fit in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

The arrangement of the concave portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equidistant, they can be assembled by aligning the positions of the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, so assembly can be performed quickly. As in the present embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at 72 degree intervals), it is considered that the influence of the misalignment of the attitudes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 during assembly is small, and it is effective to equidistantly space them.

If the intervals are unequal, the number of man-hours for assembling after aligning the posture of the central annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 is increased by one.

The load response gear 865 is arranged to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . By engaging the torque limiter 866 with the load response gear 865, it is configured to switch between a state in which the rotation of the load response gear 865 is allowed and a state in which rotation of the load response gear 865 is restricted (restricted) due to the magnitude of rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and cancel transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting driving force in one direction is configured as a set in which the transmission direction is reversed so that switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 62 and 63 show the decorative portion of the third motion unit 800 and omit the illustration of the portion for configuring the displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 includes the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side surface of the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. , provided.

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that covers one side of the first skeleton portion 871. As shown in FIG.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering part 875 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and figures, patterns, and character patterns (hereinafter also referred to as "patterns, etc.") are drawn on the surface thereof, and when the surface faces the front side, the patterns, etc. are visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, independent patterns or the like are drawn on each of the plurality (five) of the first covering portions 875 . Therefore, by changing the first covering part 875 that emits strong light under the light emission control by the illumination board 823 or by changing the arrangement of the first covering part 875, it is possible to change the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 executes a display effect that makes the player pay attention to which first covering portion 875 stops on the side of the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covering portion 875 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 can be continuously changed along with the rotation, so that the player's line of sight is focused on the first covering portion 875 until the rotation stops. I can.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 that can be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 that covers the other side of the second skeleton portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

In the second covering portion 885, a metal screw is screwed and fixed at a position (close position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. The magnet Mg2 is attracted to the metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the combined state (particularly, the single united state, see FIG. 32).

The second covering part 885 has figures, patterns, and character patterns (hereinafter also referred to as ``patterns, etc.'') drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the player can visually recognize the patterns, etc.

In the present embodiment, the pattern or the like drawn on the plurality (five in this embodiment) of the second covering portions 885 is configured such that a plurality (at least two, at most five) of the second covering portions 885 form a set.

The pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, it is designed so that the contents grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the single united state are not significantly different even if the arrangement of the second decorative member 880 in the rotational direction is different. In other words, the design is such that the pattern does not have a clear top, bottom, left, and right, and the change in the outer shape is inconspicuous even when it is rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the effect performance when the second covering parts 885 are visually recognized by the player can be improved. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 strongly integrates the second covering portion 885 in the combined state, so that the rendering performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side can be improved.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed back and forth by a switching rotation operation, which will be described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw is also reversed when viewed from the front.

Even in this case, the metal screw attracted by each magnet Mg2 is merely replaced by the metal screw screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 provided adjacently on the opposite side, and since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when they are integrated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnet is not housed in the first covering portion 875 . As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this avoids a decrease in performance performance.

That is, since an independent pattern or the like is drawn on each of the first covering parts 875, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decoration member 870 is slightly shifted, there is no possibility that the pattern or the like visually recognized by the player will not be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the rendering performance of the rendering using the pattern or the like drawn on the first covering portion 875 .

Furthermore, since the strength of integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is weakened, the arrangement of the first covering portions 875 that are united can be displaced due to vibration caused by vertical displacement (stop) or rotational displacement (stop) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be realized in a conventional machine composed of a single circular member instead of a divided body, so that the effect of the presentation by the first covering part 875 can be improved.

In view of the above circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the combined state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual coalesced state and the single coalesced state will be described.

64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIGS. 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

64 to 67 show, in chronological order, the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

64A and 66A, the inner rotary member 830 is shown rotating by 45 degrees from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)).

64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is indicated as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. FIG. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as a “switching rotating operation”), the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed, so that the inner rotating member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840. FIG.

From the above-described configuration between the members, the imaginary position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 , the rotation transmission portion 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotary member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction, so the rotation member 834 supported by the rotation transmission portion 854 is similarly displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotary member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation movement includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear movement member 833, the rotation member 834, and the decoration members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the radial movement movement movement (for example, the reversing movement described above in the second movement unit 700), it is possible to maintain a high presentation effect during the switching rotation movement.

On the other hand, in the above-described reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58) is used to generate a rotational motion with high acceleration, thereby weakening the impression that the arrangement of the covering member 787 is fixed at the end of the outer displacement in the linear movement direction (see FIG. 59(b)).

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved. Even in a situation where the width of change in the lateral position is small at the end of the displacement in the left-right direction (the period near the dead center of the slider crank) continues, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased so as to maintain a high performance effect of the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation includes radial displacement, it is conceivable that a radial load is likely to occur from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, which may cause the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to deviate. However, in the present embodiment, the radial loads of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so the loads cancel each other out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, so that the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs with rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collision with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed in a state in which the extension state of the third operation unit 800 is determined by the output of the detection sensor that determines the attitude of the lifting arm member 801.

Along with the displacement of the rotation transmitting portion 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 are similarly displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction.

By rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) and the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834 mesh with each other, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate about the metal rod 832.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the rotation direction is set so that the angle θ32 moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and since the rotating member 834 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60), the rotation direction is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F.

When rotating member 834 rotates integrally, either first decorative member 870 or second decorative member 880 faces the front side. Therefore, when rotation of intermediate arm member 850 reaches maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) as the maximum value of angle θ31, bevel tooth portion 834a of rotating member 834 rotates half a turn ( 180 degree rotation).

That is, the rotation angle of the rotating member 834 around the metal rod 832 is twice the rotation angle around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not act to retard the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the attractive force can be lost.

Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 is lost before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 is started, and no effect of delaying the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be quickly started and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement about the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

The quickness at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be different.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, when the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is contracted and can be rotated together is 45 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and the angle θ32 is 27 degrees when the imaginary position line 832F rotates by 45 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from the state in which the integral rotation operation is possible than during rotation. As a result, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, the intermediate arm member 850, and the decorative members 870, 880. With the configuration described above, the driving force required for rotating the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating from the state in which the integral rotation operation is possible. I can.

In addition, since the decorative members 870 and 880 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832 while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during rotational displacement can be kept low. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible, and improve the degree of freedom in designing the side portions of the decorative members 870 and 880.

During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement of the extended arm portion 842 adjacent to the extended arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the self is supported is arranged overlaps. Therefore, without countermeasures, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with surrounding parts.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 forward and backward for each part. That is, by arranging the distal side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal side rod portion 851, the distal side rod portion 853, and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped in the front and rear directions, and collision can be avoided during the switching rotation operation.

Further, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extension arm portion 842 and the distal side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extension arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extension arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extension arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 as a reference is the direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed to rotate (the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66) has been described. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that resistance is received, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction (clockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state), or when the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction even after reaching a state where rotation is restricted by rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction in front view in the separately combined state) (for example, reaching from the individually combined state to the one combined state), a torque limiter 866 restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. is applied to the load response gear 865, the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is canceled, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the restriction of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as "integral rotating operation"). .

The integral rotation operation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In this embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other and are combined.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation motion in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider the collision with the surrounding decoration members, so the integral rotation motion can be executed in the standby state of the third motion unit 800.例文帳に追加Therefore, in this embodiment, the co-rotation motion is feasibly controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 .

In the present embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) enables the switching rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 with displacement in the radial expansion direction, and the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without displacement in the radial expansion direction. Although any operation can be performed in both driving directions, there is a priority in the operation, and any operation can be performed immediately in any rotation direction. is not feasible.

For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation as it is, and the integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front.

Further, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in front view, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and the integral rotation operation clockwise in front view cannot be immediately performed.

As described above, in the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 changes depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. Based on the determination result, the drive motor 861 can be driven and controlled in an appropriate driving direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the drive mode of the drive motor 861, and an example of the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800. FIG.

During the reversal performance, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and during the normal performance, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power failure or the like, or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is put in the extended state, and after the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control during the normal performance is executed. As a result, even if the state of the movable portion cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from erroneously colliding with the surrounding decorative members.

Forward rotation and reverse rotation are described as the driving direction of the drive motor 861 . The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately performed in the individually combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and the reverse rotation in FIG.

First, the drive control during the normal effect before reaching the time of the reversal effect will be described. During this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions.

Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is vertically displaced by the vertical movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are controlled to rotate simultaneously with the vertical movement.

Of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the arrangement of the lift arm member 801 is fixed, or the lift arm member 801 may move upward and downward while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is stopped.

Since the drive motor 861 only rotates in the forward direction, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotary member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switching, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotary member 840 as the initial position. can be controlled to

Next, drive control at the time of reversal effect will be described. First, during the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third motion unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue forward rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the driving motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving the third operation unit 800 in the reverse direction, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation is started, the outer rotating member 840 also starts to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions. Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detecting sensor 813, and the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reversal performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in forward rotation. By driving the forward rotation, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Then, the integral rotation motion of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is performed. After the integral rotation operation is started, the portion to be detected 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the outer rotation member 840 starting to rotate, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the normal presentation is performed again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect which are arranged before the reversal effect described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 can be used both to determine switching of the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the reference of the rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the driving direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the single combined state.

Therefore, when performing control to switch to the one union state at the timing of the announcement of the big win in the action presentation, it is possible to avoid the player's prediction of the presence or absence of the announcement of the big win from the attitude of the first decoration member 870.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the decoration in the one union state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not differ greatly depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotational direction, as described above. In other words, even if the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged in different rotational directions at the start of the switching rotation, the content recognized by the player as one united state at the end of the switching rotation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one united state are arranged differently in the rotational direction, the integral rotation operation for adjusting the attitude after reaching the one united state can be omitted, so the drive control up to the announcement of the big win can be made the same regardless of the attitude of the first decoration member 870 in the individual united state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize both the switching rotation operation and the integrated rotation operation in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861 . Therefore, compared to the case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of presentation modes can be realized with the single drive motor 861. FIG.

69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 extends from the rear end where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end where the electrical board 823 is arranged. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electrical board 823 are configured to be capable of controlling light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the decorative electrical board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side on the central side of the translucent decorative member 824. As shown in FIG. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion visible to the player at the center of the circle around which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870 and 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the electrical decoration board 823 is applied to the inside of the decoration members 870, 880 (the first decoration member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and acts to illuminate the decoration members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between the individually combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side and the combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side.

In the individually united state (see FIG. 69), the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 reflects the light to the front side, thereby switching the direction of the light LD1 to the front side. As a result, most of the light LD1 can be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 can be favorably increased when the light LD1 is emitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the electrical board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it. For example, if the center of the plated portion 871a is irradiated with the light LD1 during rotation, the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated at a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering part 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and it may be difficult to execute the effect of integrally rotating the decorative members 870, 880 while emitting light with constant brightness.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plated portion 871a capable of reflecting the light LD1 has a concave shape, the radius of curvature of this concave shape is smaller than the radius of the electrical board 823, and the center is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that the optical axis is directed toward the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a, so that the light LD1 travels toward the center of the radius of curvature of the plated portion 871a and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with reference to the outer light emitting part 823b, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875. FIG. As a result, the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875 can be stably irradiated with light, so that the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 includes an outer plating portion 871b, which is a portion to be plated in the same manner as the plating of the plating portion 871a and which is arranged outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plated portion 871b as well as the plated portion 871a, but since the outer plated portion 871b is arranged behind the plated portion 871a, it is possible to weaken the light direction of the outer plated portion 871b.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the intensity of the light seen outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, the player feels dazzled, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875 is lowered.

The electrical board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joint is not completely closed, so not all the light from the outer light emitting part 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, between the member edge portion 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second covering portion 885 arranged to face the member edge portion 875a, there is formed a gap VA1 that allows the internal structure to be visually recognized in FIG. Since the outer plated portion 871b protrudes outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plated portion 871b.

In addition, a large gap VA2 exceeding the area required to avoid member interference with the metal rod 832 is formed between the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 arranged opposite to the metal rod 832 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885.

First, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and ensuring the function of guiding the linear motion displacement of the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 by the metal rod 832.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for the fastening screws that are inserted through the skeleton portions 871 and 881 and screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834.

Furthermore, the gap VA2 is formed thirdly for the purpose of ensuring a path for light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the equally-spaced positions on the circumference and is viewed as light traveling radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by integrally rotating the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated. As a result, while it is unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b (for example, while continuing full lighting), it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized in a rotating light emitting mode.

In the united state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the second skeleton portion 881 from reflecting the light LD1.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the frame of the second covering portion 885 with light (weak light) out of the light LD1, which is distant from the optical axis, so that the degree of illumination of the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the center of rotation of the third operation unit 800 can be increased.

Within the frame of the second covering portion 885, a light diffusion decorative portion 885c formed of a colored (in this embodiment, any color is set as the color of the circular body) and light-transmitting resin material, and having a light diffusion processing formed inside, is arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and the light diffusion decorative portion 885c as a whole acts to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light visually recognized through the light diffusing decorative portions 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, and to produce the effect that the light diffusing decorative portions 885c of the five second decorative members 880 are integrally recognized by the player.

Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the rendering performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player if the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be strongly integrated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rendering performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (contacts with) the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with respect to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third action unit 800 is obliquely viewed in the one union state (see FIG. 32), it is possible to reduce the extent to which the first covering part 875 of the first decoration member 870 arranged on the back side comes into the player's field of view, thereby reducing the effect on the performance.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored with different colors, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of view when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 alone is in the overhanging state in the one combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operation units 600 and 700 are both in the overhanging state (see FIG. 33, F9), there is more space around the third operation unit 800, making it easier for the line of sight to see the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the side of the third operation unit 800 is visible, which tends to reduce the presentation effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end surface 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is arranged rearwardly of the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface in the one united state. Therefore, even if the side surface of the third operation unit 800 is viewed obliquely, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as the second covering portion 885, and the visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. As a result, the second covering portion 885 can be seen more easily than the first covering portion 875 in the one union state, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individually combined state and the united state, the driving force of the driving motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830 to rotate the inner rotating member 830, while the outer rotating member 840 is stopped from rotating due to the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding ridges 831b, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will increase, and the allowable value of the load transmission of the torque limiter 866 will have to be increased, which tends to hinder the downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 are only the front end that comes into contact with the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864, and other portions are configured to leave a gap. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered necessary to provide a stopper for suppressing forward displacement with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 fulfills the function of this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in the direction of pushing forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts on the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and back.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the rear side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and a protrusion 822b having a semicircular cross-section and protruding toward the rear side is formed in an annular shape at the outermost diameter portion thereof.

Since the protrusion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the sliding member 825 is in contact with the entire rear surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotating direction can be reduced.

Since no fastening screw is used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected if the weight of the fastening screw increases.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. 62 and 63 will be referred to when explaining this fixation.

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotary member 834 is performed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first covering portion 875 to fasten and fix the first covering portion 875 to the first skeleton portion 871. After that, the projecting portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is formed into a groove. 833d (slidably fitted), and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 874 is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is performed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 into a female screw of a fastened portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885 so that the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881. After that, the projecting portion 883 projecting from the end of the semicircular recess of the second skeleton portion 881 is formed into a groove. 833d (slidably fitted), and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to be linearly displaced or rotationally displaced as the rotational member 834 is linearly displaced or rotationally displaced.

In the fixing process, the projecting portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby regulating the arrangement of the frame portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction), thereby preventing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

Since the skeletal portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined, and the rotating member 834 can be prevented from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotary member 834 is assembled to the linear motion member 833, the portions that define the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 are formed on the skeleton portions 871 and 881 that are fixed to the rotary member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotary member 834 itself, the man-hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the skeletons 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the regulation of the arrangement of the skeletons 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 be canceled, but also the regulation of the arrangement of the rotation member 834 on the linear motion member 833 can be cancelled. Thereby, working efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of an operation unit 500 for schematically explaining examples of combined operations of the operation units 600 to 800 in chronological order. Note that FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

In FIGS. 70 and 71, decorations on the rendering surfaces 661a to 661c of the first action unit 600, the decoration surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the second action unit 700, and the covering portions 875 and 885 of the third action unit 800 are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by letters or the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a shows the characters "normal" in vertical writing, the second effect surface 661b shows the characters "active" in horizontal writing, and the third effect surface 661c shows the symbol "!" along the longitudinal direction.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 shows the characters "War", the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 shows the characters "Pinch is a chance", the second main decorative surface 787b1 shows the characters "Attack", and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 shows the characters "Patience!?"

In addition, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 is illustrated with five integral “○” symbols.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the action units 600 to 800 is placed in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second action unit 700, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

Also, in FIG. 70(b), the first action unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second action unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state.

By executing the integral rotation motion of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative members 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be replaced one after another. Further, by setting the first motion unit 600 to an intermediate performance state during the continuation of the integral rotation motion or after the stop, the third performance surface 661c is protruded inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the motion of the motion units 600 to 800 can be lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visually recognizable, the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be improved by controlling the performance so as to increase the expectation of the big win in the lottery.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decoration surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be viewed integrally.

As a result, attention to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second action unit 700 can be improved, and the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81 by returning the third action unit 800 to the presentation standby state while starting the display performance related to the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

The first decoration member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 . For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to irradiate the first decorative member 870 with light, it is possible to draw attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870 by turning on the LED that emits the light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be focused and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870 .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be sequentially switched in the rotation direction so that the player can visually recognize that the light and the first decoration member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative members 870 irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that the respective first decorative members 870 sequentially reach the positions irradiated with light from the LEDs by integral rotation.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), both the second decoration rotating member 660 and the decoration fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 have vertically long decorations and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction in the same manner as the first rendering surface 661a in the standby state for rendering, thereby enhancing the effect of being visually recognized integrally.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 71(a), in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotary member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixed member 670 in the course shown in FIG. 70(b), the second decorative rotary member 660 of the first operating unit 600 becomes a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixed member 670 is reduced. can be made

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700, if the second motion unit 700 is in the overhanging state as shown in FIG. 71(a), the vertical interval between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotary member 660 is further reduced, and the effect of integral visual recognition can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative part 652b is overhanging at a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of visually making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 expand to the right from the area right end RE1 can prevent the player from giving a cramped impression even if the arrangement of the second performance surface 661b is close to the right edge.

In addition, as with the second main decorative surface 787b1, the second performance surface 661b can also be visually recognized by the player as being arranged on the center side of the third pattern display device 81, and the effect of integrally recognizing the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b can be enhanced.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b with the contents related to the decoration of the second rendering surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (the first main decorative surface 787a1), the second main decorative surface 787b1 (the first main decorative surface 787a1), the second rendering surface 661b, and the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized integrally.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first action unit 600 and the third action unit 800 are in the effect waiting state, and the second action unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70(d) shows the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decoration rotating member 660 is not arranged outside the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed even with the first operating unit 600 in the extended state.

In the reversal operation of the covering member 787, the left and right secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are directed to the front side, so the state of having no distinguishing ability has been described above. However, as shown in FIG.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the content of "Pinch!?"

For example, when informing that the lottery is lost, the state of FIG. 70D is controlled to return to FIG.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the presentation standby state. Above the second action unit 700, a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both written horizontally, so it is easy for the player to visually recognize them as one. In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the waiting state for rendering (see FIG. 70(a)), the first motion unit 600 has the first rendering surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both written vertically. In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

Thus, in this embodiment, the rendering surfaces 661a and 661b of the first action unit 600 are configured to be viewed integrally with the side surfaces of different members (eg, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decoration fixing member 670). As a result, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first action unit 600 and the second action unit 700 are in the effect waiting state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) are different in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the integral rotation of the third operation unit 800 being performed. On the other hand, even if the switching rotation motion is executed from any state, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same one union state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in arrangement of the first decorative member 870 . As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so as to notify the success or failure of the big win by executing the switching rotation motion at the end of the display performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the pattern variation, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the presence or absence of the notification of the success or failure of the big win from the arrangement of the first decoration member 870.例文帳に追加

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the player's expectation of whether or not the big win will be won can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third action unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is viewed alone and a case where the decoration is viewed integrally in combination. Therefore, the decorations formed in each of the action units 600-800 are designed as decorations that relate to each other between the action units 600-800 rather than being completed only by each action unit 600-800.

Whether or not the operation units 600 to 800 can be controlled is affected by their arrangement. That is, if the operation units 600 to 800 are driven at inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that the members will collide and malfunction.

For example, the change to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 may be performed arbitrarily in the state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation.

The change to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 may be any state of the second operation unit 700, any vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and the rotation operation is controlled to be executed when it is determined that the switching rotation operation has not occurred.

The change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 may be any state of the first operation unit 600, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled so as to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation.

The change to the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700 may be any state of the first operation unit 600, any vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and the rotation operation is controlled to be executed when it is determined that the switching rotation operation has not occurred.

The control for changing the third operation unit 800 to the protruding state and not executing the rotation or causing only the integral rotation operation is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate performance state or the performance standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the intermediate performance state or the performance standby state.

The control for changing the third operation unit 800 to the extended state and causing the switching rotation operation is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the presentation standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the presentation standby state.

As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not enabled at arbitrary timing, but is controlled after determining the arrangement of the members of other units.

Next, details of the sorting device 300 according to the first embodiment will be described. In addition, FIG. 1 to FIG. 25 are appropriately referred to in the detailed description of the sorting device 300 . First, an example of decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIG. 72, the front design member 162 is formed with a light-transmissive window 162d as a difference from the content shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design member 162 disposed on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front plate formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a window portion 162d is formed as a range with higher light transmittance in the center side range of the front plate than in the peripheral range.

In the present embodiment, a light-transmissive seal member SL1 cut out in the central area to match the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. As shown in FIG. With this configuration, the front-rear thickness of the window part 162d is thinner than the front-rear thickness of the range where the seal member SL1 is stuck around it, and the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162 can be differentiated, so that the light transmittance of the window part 162d can be increased.

The window part 162d is formed for the first purpose of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, considering that the player's line of sight passes through the plate part of the front design member 162 when the player looks at the sorting device 300. In particular, the window part 162d is formed for the second purpose of relieving the player's dissatisfaction that the flow state of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 cannot be grasped. That is, the window part 162d is formed with a shape and size that take into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300 .

Note that the means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having a higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be arranged on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or a plurality of groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as the light guide plate, so that the appearance of the front design member 162 may be changed for each light emission pattern of a light emitting means such as an LED.

Also, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or a shape in which the portion extending left and right is omitted so that the left and right width is equivalent to the left and right width of the range that extends upward (a pentagonal shape like a home plate), or a shape along the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Moreover, although the window portion 162d is formed as a single range, it is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the highly light-transmissive range may be formed by a combination of a plurality of locations partitioned by a lattice-like portion or a ladder-like portion, the range may be defined by arranging a plurality of small windows, or the range may be defined by arranging the windows randomly. Also, the shape of the window may be variable.

Moreover, the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, the surface may have a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape formed by texturing, a large number of grooves or ridges may be formed on the surface, or the surface may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but it may be any aspect as long as it can ensure higher light transmittance than the surroundings (corresponding to the formation range of the seal member SL1), and various aspects other than the shape similar to the surface shape of the seal member SL1 can be adopted.

73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 21, a light-transmissive window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short in the vertical direction and long in the horizontal direction, and a sub window portion 162d2 that is continuously formed above the central portion of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub window portion 162d2 are made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the ball passages of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, and is formed in a V shape that slopes upward toward the left and right outer sides according to the inclination of the second flow path forming part 335.

As a result, since the spheres flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 can be accommodated inside the main window part 162d1 in a front view, the visibility of the spheres flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 can be improved.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow passage forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 cannot be seen through the main window portion 162d1, and the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is particularly low.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a can be improved compared to the case of designing on the premise that the side wall portion 334a will be visually recognized by the player, such as when a good-looking shape is required.

The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape covering the sealing member 313 .

As a result, in addition to the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336, the state of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow down state of the ball can be easily grasped by the player, so that the player can be provided with a comfortable game.

74 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. In FIGS. 74 and 75, the front design member 162 is provided with a light-transmitting window 162d, which is different from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18 above.

As shown in FIG. 74, when viewed in a downward direction (angled direction) of the sorting device 300, a part of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the front position is visible below the opening and closing plate 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protruding portion 376 is hidden behind the opening/closing plate 65b when viewed in the direction of FIG. Therefore, as long as the upper protruding part 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 will pass through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The field of view toward the upper protruding portion 376 is also well ensured by the fact that the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines left and right outward toward the front side.

That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 from jumping up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper projecting portion 376.

In addition, forming the inner side surface 314b1 as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of forming the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be increased in a downward view (viewed in an angled direction) as shown in FIG. .

In other words, constructing the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front is advantageous for light production, but may be disadvantageous for the visibility of the falling ball.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, so that the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced at the location where the ball enters from the second flow path forming portion 335 to the third flow path forming portion 336, and the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 74 , when viewing from a direction looking down on the sorting device 300 (viewing from an angled direction), the sealing member 313 is not visible inside the sub-window portion 162d2. Therefore, without countermeasures, the player will be forced to adjust the eye position and line-of-sight angle so that the sealing member 313 can be seen in order to visually recognize the state of the sealing member 313, which may hinder a comfortable game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313 passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit by looking at the sub window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not subjected to light diffusion processing, the action of stopping the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window portion 162d2. As a result, when the light emitting means 351 is turned on, red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window portion 162d2, so that the sub-window portion 162d2 can be illuminated in red.

As a result, the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window portion 162d2 before the light reaches is made easy to understand, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not the light-emitting means 351 is lit. It should be noted that the sealing member 313 (or the wall on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with light diffusion processing. In this case, the seal member 313 can be made easier to emit light uniformly.

As shown in FIG. 75 , the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range in which the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be arranged.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a rides.

Furthermore, between the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) prevents the ball from flowing down, so that the flow-down range of the ball is laterally outside of the width of the front design member 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping the straight line LL1.

Therefore, by arranging on the straight line LL1 the balls that flow down the front side of the base plate 60 (for example, the game area), the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the balls that flow down the sorting device 300 (for example, the third flow path configuration part 336), it is possible to avoid the situation where the light is reflected and refracted by the spheres. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window portion 162d2 regardless of how the sphere flows down.

It should be noted that the placement of the seal member 313 in this embodiment may benefit the player if the player can continue to make the seal member 313 difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always visible, light enters the player's eyes each time the light emitting means 351 emits light, and some players feel dazzling.

In addition, although the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described in the present embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be difficult to reach the sub-window portion 162d2 by forming light diffusion processing on the member 161 to be fixed in the range intersecting the straight line LL1.

In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 is turned on toward the sealing member 313 unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 so that the sealing member 313 can be seen directly. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the variable probability detection sensor SE11 as a preference of the game, the purpose can be achieved by maintaining the line of sight shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, the case where the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed with a smooth surface shape has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub-window portion 162d2 may be subjected to light diffusion processing, or may be formed so as to provide an air bubble portion therein so that light can be easily diffused.

In this case, the light reaching the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it possible for the player to easily notice that the sub window portion 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1 have been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs arranged at four positions on the left and right in the lowermost stage will be described.

76 is a cross-sectional view of middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380 and detection sensor SE1 of sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the lowermost LEDs arranged on the left and right inner sides will be referred to as inner light emitting means 351c, and the lowermost LEDs arranged on the left and right outer sides will be referred to as outer light emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processing surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusing processed surface 332e formed in a range extending from left to right is illuminated.

This light emitting effect is performed on the back side of the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 75, a long space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 to the left and right) where the flow of the ball branches between the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the ball flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the inner light emitting means 351c is lit, the position where the ball flowing on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e that emits light in the left and right range is visible as a shadow, so that the player can easily grasp how the ball flowed by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 75). In addition, although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner projecting portions 318, the arrangement allows light in the vicinity of the optical axis to pass through, and the projecting end portions of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

Therefore, part of the light emitted from the inner light emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front-rear elongated protrusions 317 and the left-right inner protrusions 318, so that the light travels obliquely forward and downward, and this light can reach the light diffusion processed surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

Since the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed in the entire range of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be reduced by allowing light to reach the light diffusion processed surface 340. Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the ball that flows down the inside of the third flow path forming part 336 and the out ball that passes through the out port 71 (see FIG. 75) and flows down below the third flow path forming part 336.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside (upper) the light diffusion processed surface 332e and inside the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting means 351d, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emitting effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 75, a long space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 to the left and right) where the flow of the ball branches between the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the ball flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b emit light above and in front of the ball, and the ball flowing through the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light diffusion processed surface 333b (see FIG. 17).

In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed over the top and bottom, and the light diffusion processing surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is arranged on the upper side thereof (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make the branch point BP1 difficult to see due to the light emitted from the light diffusion processed surface 314c even when viewed from above the light diffusion processed surface 333b (see FIG. 74).

In addition, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the top and bottom, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged on the lower side thereof, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed to the lower back surface of the second flow path forming part 335 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making the branch point BP1 difficult to see in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, and when the ball flows down the second flow path forming part 335, the ball blocks the light (the light diffused by the light diffusion processing surface 340) to generate a shadow, thereby making it easier for the player to grasp that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is arranged on the front side of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 333b, light may be hidden by the sphere. However, in the present embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) is arranged outside (upper side) of the range where the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so that the light can be avoided from being blocked by the sphere arranged at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, the light-diffusing surface 333b can be illuminated brightly by causing the outer light-emitting means 351d to emit light regardless of the manner in which the spheres in the sorting device 300 flow down. When the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (see FIG. 17) arranged in front of it blocks the light and casts a shadow.

In this embodiment, as a device for avoiding a situation in which the light is blocked by the sphere placed at the branch point BP1, a configuration for smoothing down the flow of the sphere is adopted. The configuration will be described.

The ball that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down flows downward and passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position (see FIG. 20).

When the ball flows down while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, the through hole edge 382a of the plate-shaped portion 382 that supports the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 is arranged to connect the left and right outer edges of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the ball reaching the upper surface of the through-hole edge portion 382a is configured to easily flow downward in the left-right direction.

As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball, which starts to flow down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide part 371b, flows back to the inside in the left and right direction after being bridged by the through-hole edge part 382a, or jumps, and the ball can smoothly flow down.

In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which the sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusion processed surface 319a does not occur, so that the situation in which the light is hidden by the sphere is unlikely to occur regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 319a.

In this manner, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged with a lateral shift, but also are designed with intentional differences in the positional relationship between the light diffusing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front and rear positions and the optical axes of the respective light emitting means 351c, 351d. By making a and 333b different, it is possible to make different front and rear positions where light reaches, is diffused, and is visually recognized.

In the above description, the cases where the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are caused to emit light are described separately, and the description is based on the premise that the light emitting means 351c and 351d on the opposite side are extinguished. The pattern of light emission control and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 is seen at that time will be described below.

77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIGS. 77(a) to 77(d), the illustration of streaks as the shape lines of the light diffusion processed surface is omitted for easy understanding, and the cases where the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting means 351c and 351d are different are illustrated, and the range brightly lit by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d is illustrated with a hatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) shows the both extinguished state in which both the light emitting means 351c and 351d are extinguished, FIG. 77(b) shows the inner lit state in which the inner light emitting means 351c is lit and the outer light emitting means 351d is extinguished, FIG. 51d are both lit, and both lit states are illustrated.

In the both off state, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and the visibility of the back side is ensured, but the player is given a dull impression. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing above the third flow path forming part 336 and the out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming part 336 .

In the inner lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77B, the light diffusion processing surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the ball flowing above the third flow path forming portion 336, and reducing the visibility of the out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming portion 336.

Furthermore, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in an unilluminated state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the branch point BP1 is blinded by light.

That is, in the inner lighting state, the range from the third flow path forming part 336 to the branching point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branching point BP1 through the front side frame-shaped part 333 passes through, so that the player can easily grasp the flowing state of the ball at the branching point BP1. In addition, since the light is illuminated at the point to be noticed when grasping the flow-down mode of the ball, the possibility that the player misses the point of interest can be reduced, and the game stress of the player can be reduced.

A light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed over the entire range on the inner surface of the front frame-shaped part 333 (see FIG. 13), and is configured so that it is difficult for the player's eyes to see the back through the front frame-shaped part 333.

When viewing the back through the front frame-shaped part 333, the rear is viewed through the two side surfaces of the inner surface of the front frame-shaped part 333, which are arranged opposite to each other in the front and rear.

The same can be said for a player who tries to see through the front side frame-shaped part 333 to the back side with a line of sight inclined from the left and right inner side to the oblique left and right outer direction (a line of sight inclined from the front side left and right central position to the normal detection sensor SE12).

That is, in this embodiment, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the inside of the rectangular cylindrical shape, and the rear side surface and the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) of the front frame portion 333 are arranged on the inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

In this way, according to the front frame-shaped portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 not only when viewed in the front-rear direction but also when viewed obliquely.

In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so that the ball flowing to the left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light, so the visibility of the falling ball is reduced.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed on the far side (lower side) of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 can be improved. That is, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is improved, which has the effect of improving the attention of the player, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is lowered.

In the both lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a and 333b are illuminated over a wide range. The lighting conditions are a combination of inside lighting conditions and outside lighting conditions, which can have both effects, but not only assist each other in an advantageous effect.

For example, since the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside of the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inner lighting state.

Various modes are exemplified for the control modes related to the lighting/extinguishing of the light emitting means 351c and 351d. For example, in a big hit game, in a round game in which there is a possibility that a ball may enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), control may be performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1, and in other round games, control may be performed to configure an outer lighting state or both lighting states to make the whole brighter.

Further, for example, control may be performed in such a manner that the both lighting state and the both lighting state are alternately switched irrespective of the type of round game.

Also, the timing for lighting the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c and 351d may be controlled to light up after the ready-to-win stands upright during pattern variation, or the light emitting means 351c and 351d may be controlled to light up when it is detected that a ball has entered the winning openings 63, 64, 140 and 65a or the through gate 67. - 特許庁

Returning from FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the balls in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper side surfaces of the extended portions 162b arranged on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b are formed as inclined surfaces that slope down toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, the ball that has deviated to the left/right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and has landed on the upper surface of the extension portion 162b can be flowed to the left/right outside (opposite side of the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged), so that the ball on the extension portion 162b can be prevented from flowing down through the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, so that the ball can be prevented from jumping up (bouncing high) in the vicinity of the out port 71. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow passage forming portion 336 arranged on the inner side thereof from being hidden by the jumped ball, thereby avoiding a decrease in visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the opened/closed state is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center side, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335, so that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and the ball flowing from the second flow path forming portion 335 toward the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily distinguished.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped so that the balls on its upper surface are flowed into the specific winning opening 65a without omission, and various shapes are devised so as not to delay the flow of the balls.

For example, firstly, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-like portion that abuts on the ball flowing backward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and guides the ball inward in the left and right directions. The guide plate portion 163a2 does not have a plate-like shape extending in the horizontal direction, but has a plate-like shape extending in a downwardly inclined direction inward and leftward according to the vertical positional displacement of the ball flowing from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG.

That is, the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface arranged rearward toward the left and right inner sides.

As a result, the contact position of the ball contacting the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball) can be stabilized, and the ball can be guided smoothly. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed based on the relative relationship between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 and the floor surface so that the guide plate portion 163a2 can come into contact with the ball at the central height position over the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b (rotation base end side) and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed in the middle. That is, the opening/closing plate 65b is lower at the lateral center position where the lower surface portion 163a is at the highest height, but the lower surface portion 163a is inclined downward toward the left and right sides, and is configured to be turned upside down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outer side in the left and right width direction.

In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of switching the flow-down mode of the ball between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is designed as a position on the same plane as the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame-shaped portion 333 (the side facing the partition plate portion 338) (the position directly above the front frame-shaped portion 333 in FIG. 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the rolling surface of the ball, while the rolling resistance of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b can be generated with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bouncing backward near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b collides with (the inner rear surface of) the receiving member 163 and bounces forward again, it is possible to suppress the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening/closing plate 65b after the bouncing of the ball stops and starts to roll.

In addition, the ball rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163 does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts contacting the lower surface portion 163a, the ball is swept left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface portion 163a.

In addition, since the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) prevents the ball from falling to the vicinity of the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b, it can be said that the configuration prevents the ball from bouncing. However, ball bouncing can occur due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer ranges of the switching position EP1 (the range of the left and right outer sides of the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 (on the side where the ball passage hole 163b is arranged)), due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the rolling surfaces of the balls, rolling of the balls from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b is suppressed, while rolling of the balls from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 can occur with little resistance. For example, even if the ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a moves forward due to collision with another ball or vibration of the game machine, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the opening/closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, by limiting the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, the back flow of the ball in the vicinity of the ball passage hole 163b is avoided and the ball flows smoothly, thereby avoiding the ball staying.

In addition, the rearward rolling of the ball from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 does not switch to the left-right direction after the rearward flow is completed, but rather, it rolls along an oblique straight line connecting the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, instead of a flow along a path that intersects at right angles like the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, the flow can be along the oblique side connecting the other ends of the front-rear direction straight line and the left-right direction straight line whose one ends are arranged at the same position.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the balls tend to flow backward over the left and right positions of the opening/closing plate 65b, as in the present embodiment, the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is configured so that the balls tend to flow forward, so even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, the situation in which the flow of the balls stagnate can be easily avoided.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the range on the left and right outside of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), and is provided with a plate-like upper surface portion 163f that is formed in a plate-like shape so as to leave a space on the front side in the range on the left and right central side of the pair of switching positions EP1.

The upper surface portion 163f is designed to reduce the possibility of the ball being clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface portion 163a.

As a result, clogging of balls in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 can be prevented, and when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it, the ball can be prevented from being caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f extends laterally in a direction along the inclination angle of the second flow path forming portion 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and is disposed at a position (5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path forming portion 335) in contact with the ball at the central height position of the ball rolling on the second flow path forming portion 335.

As a result, when the forming thickness of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the bifurcation point BP1, the ball contacts the symmetrical projecting portion 161f at a position deviated from the height of the center of the ball, so that the rolling of the ball can be made smoother than in the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f generates a load in the direction of lifting the ball or in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor.

If the visibility of the bifurcation point BP1 is allowed to decline, the thickness of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed to be about the total length of the sphere, thereby avoiding the situation where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f comes into contact with the sphere at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere.

Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described again in detail. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380. FIG. In FIG. 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is seen transparently with imaginary lines, and the slide displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 is seen through.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1, but the front end thereof does not abut against the side surface of the discharge hole 337 that is arranged to face the front side position (see FIG. 78), and a gap is maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a size sufficiently short to prevent the ball from entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As a result, the front end of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337 while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

The front end portion of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the arrangement thereof shifts rearward toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid stagnation of the ball between the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337 .

That is, even if the ball is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, since the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, the load generated on the ball has a directional component directed to the left and right outside, so the ball can be pushed out to the left and right outside. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the position of the slide displacement member 370 can change the player's profit, reproducibility (stability) and smoothness are required for the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa of FIG. 78, FIG. 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330, slide displacement member 370 and lower member 380 along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb of FIG. 78, and FIG. 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of LXXIXc-L of FIG. Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 taken along line XXIXc; 13 and 14 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper projecting portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface positioned downward toward the left and right outer sides, and the ball can flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of balls rolling on this inclined surface, it is configured to suppress the attitude change of the slide displacement member 370 that causes the inclination of the inclined surface to change.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79( a ), the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 is abutted and supported by the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380 not only at the left and right end portions but also at the lower rib portion 373 . As a result, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into left and right by the concave portion 372 can be supported on the left and right sides (supported on both sides), so that the change in posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed.

In other words, even if the balls give different loads to the pair of left and right ball guide portions 371b (even if the number of balls is unbalanced), each ball guide portion 371b is supported at both the left and right ends.

In addition, upward displacement of the edge of the recessed portion 372 is restricted by the partition plate portion 338 disposed on the upper side. That is, it is possible to suppress the upward movement of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilting displacement in the backward tilting direction.

As a result, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily maintained in a proper state, the displacement resistance in the longitudinal direction displacement can be suppressed, and malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed to protrude forward on the projecting proximal end side of the upper projecting portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that descends toward the left and right outside.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the ridge portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of hemispherical projecting portions 372a project from the recessed portion 372 toward the projecting portion 383, and the hemispherical projecting portion 372a and the projecting portion 383 are configured to make point contact when the gap is closed.

Here, as described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is divided into a vertical component and a horizontal component, and the horizontal component displaces the slide displacement member 370 in the horizontal direction (a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370).

At this time, it is preferable to reduce the lateral gap between the recessed portion 372 and the ridge portion 383 of the slide displacement member 370 because the lateral position of the ball guide portion 371b is easily stabilized.

For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction with the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, there is a possibility that the front-rear displacement will be defective (for example, no displacement will occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact between the hemispherical projecting portion 372a and the projecting portion 383 is configured to be a point contact, so the area where the frictional force is generated can be reduced, and the contact friction can be kept small. As a result, even when the ball rides on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the front-rear direction satisfactorily.

In particular, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction while the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b is a displacement operation that switches the state from a state in which the ball cannot enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11 to a state in which the ball can enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

Further, by increasing the displacement speed of this displacement operation, it is possible to change the rotation of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and the ball on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. FIG. 80(a) illustrates a state in which a ball is placed on the slide displacement member 370 at the front side position, and FIG. 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear side position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), examples of the direction of rotation of the sphere are illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the direction of rotation of the ball that rolls backward and reaches the sliding displacement member 370 is the forward rolling direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear position while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 acts to reverse the rotation direction (guide direction) of the ball (backward rotation direction).

As a result, the rotation of the ball can be suppressed, so that the ball can easily receive the action of gravity, and the ball can be easily dropped straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can easily flow down to the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the front-rear long projecting portion 317 is not limited to the function of guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11, but is configured as a shape that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 arranged on the upstream side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position, the ball in contact with the front-rear length projecting portion 317 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve of the end of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a substantially circular arc shape in which the width in the front-rear direction is longer than the width in the vertical direction (see FIG. 18), the load in the downward direction is greater than that in the forward direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from contacting the front-rear projection 317 from rebounding back and forth in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the flowing direction of the ball depends on the shape of the slide displacement member 370 . In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward in the left and right direction, so the ball is guided outward in the left and right direction along this curve.

Here, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, if the ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with momentum, the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward by the load at the time of collision, and it is possible that the state is switched to a state in which the ball can pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected downward by contacting the front-rear projection 317 before colliding with the upper projection 376 of the slide displacement member 370 . Therefore, since the direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

In addition, since the load applied by the ball in the direction of rearward displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced, the biasing force (the biasing force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against the biasing force can be reduced.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is arranged at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backward flow of the ball.

The left and right inner projecting portion 318 abuts the ball on the front side of the front displacement end position of the upper projecting portion 376, and the force of the ball is directed downward to the left and right outside. In addition, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-rear long projecting portion 317 . As a result, the velocity of the ball in the front-rear direction is reduced, so that the inertia of the ball's own weight stabilizes the arrangement, and the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

Furthermore, the contact between the ball and the upper projecting portion 376 occurs when the ball is lower than the height position at which it contacts the front-rear projecting portion 317. However, when the ball is lowered to the extent that it can contact the upper projecting portion 376 (see FIG. 80(a)), the portion that contacts the ball is the ball guide portion 371b, which is located at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. As a result, even if the ball receives a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protruding part 376 and is displaced to the front side, considerable energy is required to climb from the upper surface of the ball guide part 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a, so that the backflow of the ball can be reduced.

In addition, the upper projecting portion 376 has an acute-angled front end portion on the side of the partition plate portion 338, and the plane does not collide head-on with the sphere in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper projecting portion 376 is large in the lateral direction and small in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the ball in contact with the upper protruding portion 376 can be smoothly flowed in the laterally outward direction, so that when the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is placed at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is caught between the upper protruding portion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

Returning to FIG. 78, FIG. 79(b) and FIG. 79(c), description will be made. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 will be displaced forward due to the weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the portion formed behind the upper projecting portion 376, i.e., the portion where the upper and lower projecting portions 374 are formed on both the left and right sides over the front and rear, has a sufficient front-to-rear width length, and is configured to be able to contact the lower bottom portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 over the front-to-rear width. As a result, tilting displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper and lower protrusions 374 are formed long in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 from concentrating on one point when a load is applied to tilt and displace the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction. Thereby, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity of the slide displacement member 370 can be increased).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter also referred to as the projecting portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 is set so that the front side surface of the projecting portion 378 a contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 . For this purpose, the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 is not formed with a light diffusing surface, and a flat surface is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the projecting portion 378a so as to be able to contact each other. Thereby, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is arranged inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front side meat portion of the projecting portion 378a.

In this way, since the position to which the driving force is transmitted is the left-right central portion of the slide displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the direction of rotation about the vertical axis during the displacement in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, so that the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotational direction about the vertical axis.

Here, when the posture maintenance and posture restoration of the slide displacement member 370 are performed by the contact between the partition plate portion 338 and the semispherical projecting portion 372a, since the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the semispherical projecting portion 372a is small, a load may be applied locally and the durability of the semispherical projecting portion 372a may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the slide displacement member 370 is misaligned in the rotational direction about the vertical axis before the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the posture deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the process in which the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, thereby correcting the posture to an appropriate posture.

The partition plate portion 338 abuts against the projecting portion 378a to align the slide displacement member 370 when displaced in the front-rear direction.

That is, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, when the weight of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b causes a load in the direction to change the attitude of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction, when the projecting portion 378a is displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the clearance allowed for the slide displacement member 370, the projecting portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the projecting portion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, thereby suppressing the displacement of the projecting portion 378a.

Next, the details of the operation units 600, 700, and 800, which have not been sufficiently explained, will be explained again. First, as a detailed description of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a).

82 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. 82 and 83 illustrate a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is displaced along the guide long hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), the pivoting member 620 is designed with an asymmetrical shape in relation to the load applied to the pivoting member 620 during the execution of the motion. The details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described below.

A body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621 a , a second side surface 621 b , and a third side surface 621 c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622 .

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can come into contact with the base end side projecting portion 617a projecting from the front cover member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the base end side projecting portion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the proximal projection 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can come into contact with the front end side projecting portion 617b projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the front end side projecting portion 617b). The displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined by restricting the displacement of the second side surface 621b by the tip-side projecting portion 617b (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range).

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can come into contact with a rectangular box portion 618 that is formed in a substantially rectangular box shape on the front side of the front lid member 612 (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range).

Thus, at the end of displacement of the rotating member 620, each of the side surfaces 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 contacts the corresponding portion of the front lid member 612, and displacement is restricted. In particular, a plurality of contact points are formed at the end of displacement on the rising side of the rotating member 620 .

The purpose of forming a plurality of abutting portions in this way is to disperse the load in the rotational direction received at the time of abutment in a plurality of locations, and to suppress deformation in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 in a plurality of locations.

Examples of the load in the front-rear direction that can be applied to the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsional load due to inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (load in the rotational direction about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620).

In particular, the load in the forward tilting direction is the load in the forward tilting direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as a fulcrum. Therefore, by considering the moment of force, the farther the contact position receiving the load from the cylindrical portion 622, the smaller the load generated at the contact position. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions separated from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

A body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d recessed in a direction away from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e formed to increase in thickness including a range including the recessed portion 621d and including a range that abuts on the proximal side projecting portion 617a as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622.

Since the rotation base end side of the rotation member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the recessed portion 621d, there is a possibility that the impact load may cause breakage without countermeasures. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620 .

Furthermore, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion where it can come into contact with the proximal side projecting portion 617a, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotating member 620 against an impact load that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the proximal side projecting portion 617a.

84 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. 84 and 85 illustrate a state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension part 634b is formed with a width (length in the circumferential direction) that is three times or more as long as the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, forming the width length of the extending portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of utilizing it for detection.

That is, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating distal end portion of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed in front of the supported member 640. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 may be subjected to a load in the forward tilting direction, the rotating member 620 may be deformed in the front-rear direction and malfunction if no countermeasures are taken.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the extended portion 634b arranged to face the back surface of the fixed means 610 is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, so that the load applied from the extended portion 634b to the fixed means 610 in the forward tilting direction of the rotating member 620 via the cylindrical portion 634a can be received in a wide angular range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (a large area is secured for the load). can be). As a result, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while avoiding damage to the extended portion 634b.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain a structurally advantageous effect by securing a long width of the extension portion 634b. On the other hand, the structure is devised so that the rotation member 620 reaches the end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side due to a load such as inertia even in a control mode in which the driving of the rotation member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84).

For example, firstly, the inertial force of each member is generated in the direction to displace the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertia force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 rotating clockwise about the axis O1 in the rear view is generated in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side (the direction of rotating the rotating member 620 counterclockwise in the rear view).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (which is the same as the center of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in this embodiment), which is disposed so as to operate integrally with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a constituting the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644, is arranged at a position separated left and right from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear tooth 654a.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of rotating the gear teeth 654a. In the present embodiment, the gear tooth 654a receives a load in the direction of counterclockwise rotation in a rear view due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 itself.

This load is transmitted to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 in this order, so that a load is applied to the rotating member 620 through the gear tooth portion 625 in the direction of counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the rear. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side.

In this manner, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the load for rotating the rotating member 620 is generated even after the drive motor 631 is de-energized.

Therefore, even if the driving motor 631 is controlled to be de-energized in a state where the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not reached the displacement end position as shown in FIG.

86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 are rear views of the elongated guide hole 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1, and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634. FIG.

FIGS. 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 show, in chronological order, the rotational motion of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the waiting state of the first motion unit 600.

86(a) corresponds to the effect waiting state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 83, and FIG.

Arrangement of electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. An electrical wiring 618d whose end portion is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a substrate accommodated in the rectangular box portion 618 is arranged so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electric wiring 618d is arranged so as to bypass the lower side of a partition portion 619 projecting from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electric wiring 618b has a length that takes into consideration the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to bend under its own weight.

The partition portion 619 includes columnar portions 619a formed at both upper and lower end portions, and plate-like portions 619b projecting in the shape of a long plate so as to connect the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619 a and the plate upper portion 619 b abut on the front side surface of the base member 611 .

A female screw is formed inside the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is screwed through an opening formed in the base member 611 so as to correspond to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening and fixing the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. In other words, the partitioning portion 619 not only restricts the arrangement position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also secures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. As shown in FIG.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described with particular attention to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 86(a) will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time series of FIGS.

In the operation from the effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state where the width direction end of the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the vertical arrangement of the dish-shaped lid C2 does not change greatly, but the arrangement of the opening C2a rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear.

As a result, the electrical wiring 618d in the vicinity of the opening C2a can be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid C2 starts full-scale downward displacement, and the electrical wiring 618d can be prevented from being caught between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2.

In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a faces the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the partitioning portion 619, so that even if the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is designed to be arranged close to the partitioning portion 619, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the electric wiring 618d.

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electrical wiring 618d is purposely configured to have downward slack. As a result, it is possible to avoid unnecessary slackness of the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slackening in the front-rear direction) while ensuring the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself.

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough not to come into contact with the extended portion 634b while the first operating unit 600 is operating. As a result, even without providing a partition between the extension 634b and the electrical wiring 618d, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from coming into contact with the extension 634b and receiving a load.

In the present embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension 634b is located away from the connector 618c (located on the opposite side of the connector 618c with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large range for arranging the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension 634b, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electrical wiring 618d. can.

Next, the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 88 will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87(b), 87(a), 86(b), and 86(a).

During upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 side but faces downward from the displacement lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 comes closest to the partition 619. As a result, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while securing downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 has passed the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is kept facing downward (the electric wiring 618d near the opening C2a is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) while gradually rotating (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to face the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electric wiring 618d is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

As a result, it is possible to avoid disconnection of the electrical wiring 618d between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, thereby suppressing the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted by changing the arrangement of the openings C2a corresponding to the arrangement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, and the electrical wiring 618d is prevented from being arranged between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 when the distance between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 is narrowed, so that the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d can be suppressed.

Therefore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other, so the degree of freedom in arranging the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be improved.

Also, the restriction of the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is realized by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2, not by using a separate member such as a binding band. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, and it also serves to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a binding band for bundling the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike a binding band, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electric wiring 618d can be arranged on the appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid C2, so that the electric wiring 618d can be easily avoided from being stretched or bent.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening with a central angle of about 110 degrees. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape adopted as the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d passing through the opening C2a.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be described. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotary member 650 and the second decorative rotary member 660. FIG.

In FIG. 89, only the parts required for explanation are illustrated, and the illustration of other parts is omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotary member 650, and the electrical decoration board 662 and the wiring clamping plate 663 of the second decorative rotary member 660 are shown in solid lines, and the box-shaped member 661 is shown in imaginary lines to make the inside visible for easy understanding.

Also, FIG. 89 illustrates an arrangement example of the electrical wiring 618d, and illustrates a dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618 d is shown in such a manner that the wiring connected to the terminal of the electrical board 653 (see FIG. 41) and the wiring connected to the terminal of the electrical board 662 are branched between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 .

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and includes a wiring insertion slot 663a having an elongated hole shape through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b drilled as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted on both sides of the insertion slot 663a.

Since the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) can be prevented from falling off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a by the wiring retaining plate 663.

A fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in each of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition to this, the wiring fastening plate 663 has a function of temporarily fastening the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the wiring insertion elongated hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in such a manner that displacement is suppressed by being pinched. In the present embodiment, the rotating motion of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not a motion of one or more rotations, but a rotating motion of less than half a revolution (rotating motion of about 135 degrees) in the reciprocating direction.

The load applied to the electrical wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates (load in the twisting direction) is considered to be greater near the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting tends to occur. It is

Therefore, even if the electrical wire 618d is overloaded in the twisting direction, the load can be relieved by displacing the electrical wire 618d within the wire insertion elongated hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotating motion of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. That is, as the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction, twisting occurs in the counterclockwise direction in a rear view.

As the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, so that the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to twisting can be reduced (the durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates along the guide elongated hole 616 while being displaced in the vertical direction. Here, in time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state of large slack to a state of small slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

Correspondingly, the rotating operation of the electrical board 662 is configured such that the terminal of the electrical wiring 618d on the electrical board 662 side is arranged on the rear side (body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to the state where the terminal is arranged on the front side (wiring receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state change can be such that the electric wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

86A to 88, the state of the electric wiring 618d changes from a state in which the electric wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 has a large degree of slack (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical board 662 is arranged on the back side) to a state in which the state in which the electric wiring 618d has little slack (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical decoration board 662 is arranged on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the magnitude relationship of slackness is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. FIG. Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be described.

86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, while the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 is twisted in the rotation direction of the decorative board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from the bottom in FIG. That is, they are twisted in mutually opposite directions.

This embodiment is designed to minimize the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d in the standby state of the first operation unit 600, and maximizes the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d in the overhanging state.

As a result, in a state where the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is largely slack, it is difficult for a problem to occur (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)), and the load on the electrical wiring 618d is reduced. Also, it is possible to maximize twisting due to the rotational motion of the electrical board 662 and suppress slackness of the electrical wiring 618d (suppress displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means for improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, it is configured to switch between a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which the surrounding member (e.g., the extended portion 634b) and the electrical wiring 618d are prevented from contacting each other by reducing slack by twisting.

As another embodiment, in the time-series operations shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the direction of rotation of the decorative board 662 may be reversed (clockwise when viewed from the bottom in FIG. 89 (when viewed from the side of the decorative board 662 to see the insertion hole 663b)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational movement of the electrical board 662 are the same, so that the torsional deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, the features of the overhang decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b), and 92 are schematic front views showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618, and the projecting decorative portion 652b.

90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b), and 92 schematically illustrate the outlines of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box portion 618, and illustrate the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the presentation standby state of the first operating unit 600 in chronological order, with the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652 omitted for ease of understanding.

90(a) shows an arrangement corresponding to the effect waiting state (see FIG. 40) of the first operating unit 600, FIG. 90(b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state in which the width direction end of the extension part 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84), and FIG. 91(b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range (see FIG. 82), and FIG. 92 shows an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 45).

In the effect standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 in top view. As a result, the projecting decorative portion 652b can be placed outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the decorative projecting portion 652b is arranged behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, so that the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73, so that the visibility of the decorative projecting portion 652b can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the decorative projecting portion 652b is displaced downward in a state where the decorative projecting portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, the decorative projecting portion 652b collides with the rectangular box portion 618 to cause a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attitude of the decorative projecting portion 652b is changed prior to the downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b or in accordance with the downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b (see FIGS. 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in the direction of retreating from the rectangular box portion 618 (diagonally upper left direction in a front view, rotational direction about the axis O1), so collision between the projecting decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be easily avoided.

In the present embodiment, due to this posture change, after the decorative projecting portion 652b is retracted from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91(a)), full-scale downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the decorative projecting portion 652b is started.

The downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b is accompanied by the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the axis O1 is displaced along the shape of the guide slot 616 in a direction (to the right) to approach the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91(b)).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a concave portion 618 a formed along the shape of the long guide hole 616 on the left side surface. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is recessed at a position where the guide long hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at the right end of the guide long hole 616. As shown in FIG. Thus, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is studied with one purpose of avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618 .

Furthermore, since the posture of the decorative projection 652b continues to change as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the decorative projection 652b can be displaced in the direction away from the rectangular box portion 618. FIG. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) of the overhang decorative portion 652b is designed to be equal to or greater than (equal to or greater than) the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. As a result, collision between the projecting decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be avoided.

In the states shown in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement associated with the attitude change of the decorative protrusion 652b are opposite to each other and offset each other, so that the lateral displacement of the decorative protrusion 652b is kept small.

On the other hand, in the states shown in FIGS. 91(b) to 92, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement accompanying the attitude change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are the same in the left and right directions.

As a result, although the attitude of the decorative projecting portion 652b is always changed by rotating about the axis O1, the player can see that the decorative projecting portion 652b is displaced vertically with a small horizontal displacement (narrow displacement trajectory) in FIGS.

Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) that guides the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

In other words, the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b can be seen by the player as if the projecting decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in the left and right areas of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30) where the width is narrow and sufficient displacement in the left and right direction cannot be ensured, it is possible to show the player the surprising displacement of popping out in the left and right direction.

For the sake of convenience, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b were compared, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a part of the rotation axis of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2 configured to be rotatable about the rotation axis and the lateral displacement of the axis O1 have the same meaning. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the lateral displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b.

93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85. FIG. FIG. 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane through which the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass. As shown in FIG. 93 , the rear rotating member 654 is arranged in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and the gear teeth 654 a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh with each other at a location where an opening 645 a is formed and communicated.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is arranged with a slight gap between the stepped portions formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the axial base end side (the upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring retaining plate 663. As a result, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from coming off and to stabilize the arrangement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 in the central axis direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

A fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in each of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As shown in FIG. 93, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged behind the second decorative rotary member 660, and thus is arranged closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) than the second decorative rotary member 660 in the front-rear direction. In other words, it is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is arranged in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b are arranged apart from each other, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29).

In particular, when the projecting decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are visually recognized at the same time (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged away from the third pattern display device 81 on the front side and can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third pattern display device. can be highlighted.

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotary member 660), the degree of discrimination of other structures (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b) is low. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b.

The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion formed from a hard resin, and the shape cannot be changed in the middle. However, the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling to change the light emission mode (color, brightness, etc.) of a light emitting means such as an LED provided on the electrical decoration board 653.

Therefore, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the electrical decoration board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29), and the effect of giving the player the illusion that the display area is expanded to the right can be easily generated.

Next, a detailed description of the second operation unit 700 will be given again. 94 is a front view of the second motion unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 along line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. FIG.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 is configured such that vertical displacement and front-rear displacement occur synchronously in sliding displacement (sliding displacement in the obliquely tilted front-rear direction).

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second motion unit 700, the obliquely tilted front-rear displacement is not composed of a single displacement, but is composed of a combination of a vertical displacement and a front-rear displacement.

That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal rod 702 at the left end so as to be vertically displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal rod 702 . At the left end, a left rear plate member 750 and blind decoration member 768 are also arranged in front of and behind the lift plate member 740 to prevent the lift plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

A right side portion of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 . The right end of the elevating plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762) via the effect device 780 (see FIG. 54). As a result, the right end of the lift plate member 740 is prevented from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction, and the displacement direction of the lift plate member 740 can be limited in the vertical direction.

The effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In this manner, in order to achieve the obliquely tilted sliding displacement in the front-rear direction, the displacement guidance of the lifting plate member 740 and the production device 780 as constituent members is configured separately for the gravity direction and the horizontal direction.

As a result, compared to a configuration that guides in an obliquely tilted front-rear direction, it is possible to facilitate a configuration in which displacement resistance is maintained low.

The extended state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is controllable to perform a displacement (see FIG. 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787 . That is, in the present embodiment, the second operation unit 700 is controlled so as not to cause displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 in other states of the extended state (for example, the waiting state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700).

By controlling in this manner, even if the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are arranged at positions overlapping the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when the covering member 787 is displaced to switch the state, the covering member 787 can be prevented from colliding with the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

A contrivance of the configuration of the rendering device 780 for the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates a driving force for displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787 is arranged at the center position of the effect device 780 (the center is located directly above the center of the insertion cylindrical portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

As a result, not only is it possible to prevent the direction of the effect device 780 from tilting to the left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but the left-right balance of the driving force generated from the drive motor 782 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operation unit 700 capable of executing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the lateral position of the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 supporting the elevating plate member 740 is the same as the lateral center position of the effect device 780 or the right side position.

In this way, while the right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is supported only by the rotating arm member 720 capable of displacing the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a support position in the left-right direction, especially when it is assumed that the arrangement and posture of the effect device 780 are likely to change, that is, when the dislocation to switch the state of the covering member 787 is executed, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 is set to the same position as the left-right center position of the effect device 780 or to the right side of the effect device 780 . It is possible to stabilize the placement and posture of

The control for executing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 is switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to the waiting state for presentation or the intermediate presentation state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the effect waiting state of the second operating unit 700 and bring the second operating unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the second operating unit 700 is once put into the extended state, and after executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787, the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction to such an extent that it overlaps the inner end portions of the pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rotary cylinder part 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front side support member 760 can be hidden so as not to be seen by the player, so that the situation can be avoided in which the player grasps the disposition and shape of the rotary cylinder part 774e and the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700, the light diffusing member 778b and the fixedly arranged three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are visible in a straight line on the left and right in a front view (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 in front view and across the left and right length of the lower edge.

On the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a, substrates to which the LEDs are fixed are arranged on the front side, respectively, and the light emission effect of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a can be performed by the light emitted from the corresponding LED. By this light emission performance, it is possible to perform a performance to make the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 look as if it is separated by light, or to make the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 brighter by light.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b can be configured to have both a function as a member that hides the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member that performs light emission performance jointly with the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally elongated member 742 includes a covering cover 742a which is provided behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and covered with a space on the front side in a range (left range) outside the rear of the light diffusing member 778b.

The covering cover 742a is a blindfold member formed over the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that the electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the horizontal member 742 and the covering cover 742a. That is, the electric wiring for energizing the effect device 780 is guided to the effect device 780 side from behind the blindfold decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontally long member 742, and is connected to the drive motor 782, the decorative substrate 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

At this time, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a are arranged in a folded manner in front of the electric wiring, so that the player's line of sight is easily blocked, and the electric wiring can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, are arranged in front of the path of the electrical wiring so as to function as a blinder for the electrical wiring, so that the size of the covering cover 742a required for blinding the electrical wiring can be suppressed to a minimum size.

In addition, since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a is fixed, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the waiting state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), and cannot be used to hide the electric wiring.

Considering this, in the present embodiment, the formation range of the laterally elongated member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. As a result, the electrical wiring can be hidden by the horizontally elongated member 742 and the light diffusing member 778, so that the electrical wiring can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player regardless of the state of the second operation unit 700 (standby state for presentation, intermediate presentation state, extended state).

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 96 shows a horizontally arranged state of the upside-down member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG.

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but are provided with curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface of the vertically reversing member 781 in the horizontally arranged state. The curved portion 783d is curved to protrude in a direction away from the driving gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the driving gear 782a when the upside down member 781 is vertically arranged.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member 787 .

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged near both left and right ends, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts independently on the pair of covering members 787 instead of directly joining the covering members 787 together.

As a result, for example, when one of the covering members 787 malfunctions, it is possible to prevent the other covering member 787 from malfunctioning as well.

Further, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction of the horizontal displacement. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 starts rotating from the upright vertically arranged state, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

As a result, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnet Mg. Therefore, compared to the case where it is necessary to release the attraction of the magnet when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force or malfunction due to unstable displacement. .

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides vertically, and the effect of this will be described. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f to which a metal screw that abuts the magnet Mg and is loaded with magnetic force is fixed is arranged on the same side in the front-rear direction (on the front side when the upside-down member 781 is vertically arranged in an upright position, see FIG. 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated on the magnet Mg in relation to the metal screw is the same in the front and back direction on both the left and right sides.

More specifically, for example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 787 on the left side when viewed from the front rotates in the forward direction. Therefore, as the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located above) is displaced forward, a forward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side when viewed from the front is loaded. rotates in the backward direction, the magnet Mg is subjected to a forward load as a reaction to the attracting force as the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced forward.

For example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an inverted vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side when viewed from the front rotates in the backward direction. Therefore, as the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backward, a backward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side when viewed from the front rotates forward. Since the magnet Mg rotates in the opposite direction, a backward load is generated in the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attracting force as the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located below) is displaced backward.

In this manner, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and the direct-acting plate member 784 supporting the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured so that the front and rear directions are the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, when a load in the front-rear reverse direction is generated on both the left and right sides (for example, when the magnets Mg on the left side are placed at the lower position so that the magnets Mg on the left and right sides are placed at the lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f of the left shaft rotating member 785 is placed on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state is applied to the up-and-down reversing effect device 770. The up/down reversal effect device 770 is rotated by a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, vibrations in the rotational direction of the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction are likely to occur in the up/down reversal effect device 770 . In particular, as in the present embodiment, the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of releasing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and after the attraction of the magnet Mg is released, the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c is used to forcefully rotate the covering member 787. In this case, it is assumed that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction about the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it becomes difficult to relieve the load from the up/down reversal effect device 770, and there is a possibility that the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged or the durability of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is lowered. Therefore, in view of the purpose of stabilizing the displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the long term, it is considered necessary to take countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state, the direction of the load generated between the rotating cover member 787 and the main body member 771 and the direct-acting plate member 784 that supports the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured so that the direction of the load is the same on the left and right sides. 770 can be displaced in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the displacement (displacement having a component in the front-rear direction) of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 can be easily offset, and damage to the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 due to the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state can be avoided.

In the second motion unit 700, the direction of slide displacement of the rendering device 780 (the direction having a vertical component and a front-back component, i.e., the direction in the plane perpendicular to the horizontal direction) is orthogonal to the displacement start direction (horizontal direction) from the state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other (the vertically arranged state of the upside-down member 781).

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the displacement of one due to the inertia of the displacement of the other. For example, when the presentation device 780 is slid, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 are unintentionally started to displace (displace in directions away from each other) from the state in which they are arranged close to each other.

Next, a detailed description of the third operation unit 800 will be given again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 99( a ) and 99 ( b ), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion is switched at the thickened portion 852 .

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 includes a base-end reinforcement portion 852a arranged to face the tip-side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and a recessed portion 852b hollowed out from the front side along the axial direction.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed to have a relatively small lightening amount and a high deformation resistance. As a result, excessive deformation can be avoided even when contact is made with the distal end side rod portion 853 formed on the rotational distal end side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase.

The recessed portion 852 b acts to weaken the resistance to elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852 . Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

On both lateral side surfaces of the increased thickness portion 852, there are formed curved portions 852c that are concavely formed in a curved shape. The curved shape portion 852c is formed in a shape that can smoothly receive the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end portion of the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are rotated and arranged close to each other is reversed between the individually combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the single combined state. Therefore, which side surface of the intermediate arm member 850 in the short direction is arranged close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved portion 854d can be smoothly received in any combined state. As a result, the state change to the united state can be executed smoothly.

In addition, since the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d are designed so that they can come into contact with each other at their surfaces, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of local excessive loads between the curved shape portions 852c and 854d in the combined state, and it is possible to improve the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operation unit 800 is configured to be vertically displaceable by the elevating arm member 801, but the direction of the elevating displacement does not necessarily intersect perpendicularly with the direction in which the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 start to be displaced from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), virtual position lines 832F recognized as displacement starting directions of the rotating members 834 are set as different directions at intervals of 72 degrees, so that the displacement starting directions of all the rotating members 834 and the vertical displacement directions cannot be perpendicular to each other.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the load and inertia that occur when the third operation unit 800 is vertically displaced unintentionally cause a rotation operation (an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation). A device for countermeasures against this malfunction will be described.

FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operation unit 800 schematically showing the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

In FIG. 100, of the imaginary position lines 832F of the metal rods 832, the imaginary position line 832F extending downward in the individually combined state and the imaginary position line 832F rotated counterclockwise in front view until the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees are illustrated.

That is, FIG. 100 shows a state where the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to allow the rotating member 834 to slide along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotating motion of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotating motion.

The amount of change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of intermediate arm member 850 with respect to metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which bevel teeth 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) are engaged and rotated.

Here, backlash (clearance) is essential for the meshing of the gear teeth to be upright, and the setting of the size of this clearance changes the responsiveness of rotation. Various aspects can be selected for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

That is, until the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is merely filled and the engagement rotation is not started. On the other hand, the rotation tip side portion of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operation unit 800 along the imaginary position line 832F.

That is, at the start of the switching rotation operation from the united state (individually united state), the rotational operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the sliding movement mainly along the metal rod 832 occurs.

101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. FIG. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate. In FIG. 101, the third motion unit 800 is shown in a combined state, and the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that provide resistance to displacement of the third motion unit 800 are shown.

Here, it is configured so that the rotating member 834 does not rotate even when the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly with respect to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, rotating about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)).

As a result, even when the magnet Mg2 is employed to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880 as in the present embodiment, and the attracting force is generated in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880 from the united state can be limited to linear displacement, so that the uniting by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be easily maintained.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate about the metal rod 832 when the displacement from the combined state is started, the magnetic force is likely to disappear because the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the united state at the start of the displacement is displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), so that the united state due to the magnetic force can be easily maintained.

As a result, even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (for example, rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load or the like, the combined state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIG. 101 , the torque limiter 866 is configured to cut the connection when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied in forward rotation, and to generate switching rotation DR1 to reduce resistance (idling), and to generate idling rotation AR1 to reduce resistance (idling) in reverse rotation. The torque limiter 866 is composed of a pair of reversed forward and reverse rotations.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 is configured to generate switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches an allowable value in clockwise rotation when viewed from the front, and idle when the load exceeds the allowable value.

The torque limiter 866 on the right side is configured to generate idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise rotation direction when viewed from the front, while it is configured to generate switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches a permissible value, and when it exceeds the permissible value, idling rotation occurs in the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the front.

In this manner, the pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotational directions, thereby enabling switching rotational motion in both directions, as described above.

Furthermore, in a state where a load exceeding the allowable value in the rotational direction does not occur, resistance is applied to the outer rotating member 840 in both forward and reverse directions via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) attached to the torque limiter 866, so that the rotating motion of the outer rotating member 840 that may be caused by an unintended load (inertial force of vertical displacement or impact force when opening and closing the door) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866 .

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are annularly united. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 which is adjacently arranged.

With this configuration, compared to the case where the magnets Mg2 are arranged on both sides of the specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (that is, the case where both of the second covering portions 885 that are adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 receive the biasing force from the magnet Mg2 in the direction of approaching the specific second covering portion 885), the second covering portion 885 is placed away from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state. 5 can be avoided, and the gaps between all the adjacent second covering portions 885 can be made uniform.

Further, as described above, the second decorative member 880 is displaced from the combined state by sliding outward in the radial direction. By the time the rotational movement about the metal rod 832 is started, the second decorative member 880 is separated from the united state by the magnetic force (see FIG. 100). It acts as a resistance to sliding movement radially outward.

In addition, since this resistance force is generated in the same magnitude from each direction that divides 360 degrees into 5, it is possible to balance the load that the third operation unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2. That is, compared to the case where the magnetic force Mg2 acts unevenly, the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be easily stabilized.

The five second decorative members 880 have the same shape, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so that the front and rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load having a longitudinal component to the second decorative member 880 due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, so that it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the second decorative member 880 vibrates in the longitudinal direction due to the magnetic force being generated in the longitudinal direction when the displacement from the combined state starts or immediately before reaching the combined state.

102 is a front view of outer rotating member 840 and middle arm member 850. FIG. In FIG. 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individually combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated, and for easy understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated in phantom lines, and the outer rotating member 840 disposed on the rear side is visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the present embodiment, at least one portion that restricts the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 102 when viewed from the front) can be secured, and in most cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two locations. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

First, there is a contact projecting portion 845 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840 . The contact protruding portion 845 is tapered radially outward at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent extended arm portions 842 , and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841 .

The contact projecting portion 845 is arranged to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is arranged so as to contact the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing the intermediate arm member 850 from over-rotating.

The thickened portion 852 is weakened in resistance to elastic deformation by the concave portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the contact projecting portion 845 is lightened. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at a high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the contact protruding portion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the contact protruding portion 845 and the thickened portion 852, so damage to the contact protruding portion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The contact protruding portion 845 is not provided at all intermediate angular positions of the extended arm portion 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. As a result, the positions of the abutting protruding portion 845 and the detected portion 844 are displaced as viewed in the axial direction, and the direction in which the outer rotary member 840 is removed from the mold can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841 . Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the molding die.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the formation of the contact projecting portion 845 is omitted in exchange for the simplification of the design of the molding die, but in the present embodiment, the base end side reinforcing portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second configuration for restricting the rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is arranged to face the tip-side rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the tip-side rod portion 853 when the tip-side rod portion 853 overrotates, thereby preventing the intermediate arm member 850 from overrotating.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed to have a relatively small lightening amount and a high deformation resistance. As a result, even if the rotary arm member 850 comes into contact with the tip of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of deformation.

The curved shape portion 852c is designed to be able to abut on the curved shape portion 854d, and in the combined state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a local excessive load between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d, and it is possible to improve the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the contact projecting portion 845 is arranged to face the contact projecting portion 845, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is such that, in addition to the contact with the contact projecting portion 845, the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other, and the base end reinforcing portion 852a and the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other. .

On the other hand, even if the abutment protruding portion 845 is omitted, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted by a configuration that allows the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 to abut or the proximal side reinforcing portion 852a and the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 to abut against each other.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five pivot arm members 850 are associated with each other (circularly arranged). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of one abutting projecting portion 845 is omitted, and since there is little configuration for restricting the rotation of only the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted portion, it seems that the load at the time of contact is concentrated.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the contact projecting portion 845 is omitted) from being extremely deteriorated.

Further, the annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 in the shape of an annular plate on one plane along the back side end portion of the contact projecting portion 845 is also omitted at a portion overlapping the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similarly to the contact projecting portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as compensation for simplification of the design of the molding die in the same way as the omission of the abutment projecting portion 845 described above.

That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as correction of the displacement of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 . That is, even if the distal end of the rotating arm member 850 is unintentionally displaced forward and backward when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) (see FIG. 64(a)) and returns to the combined state, the rear side surface of the base end side rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 and is capable of coming into contact with the rotating arm member 85. The position before and after 0 can be modified.

This action cannot be achieved if the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted, because contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back side surface of the distal end side rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842. Therefore, even if the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the rear side surface of the distal end side rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 and is capable of coming into contact with the front side surface.

Thus, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same action as the annular plate portion 846 . As a result, the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be produced in all the rotating arm members 850 while partially omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 .

103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG. In Figures 103(a) and 103(b), the relative positioning of the outer rotating member 840 and the middle arm member 850 in one union is illustrated.

The state illustrated in FIG. 103(a) corresponds to the state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated up to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) from the state in FIG. 65(b) (the state in which the switching rotation operation has been completed), and the state illustrated in FIG. state).

Comparing the combined state and the individually combined state (see FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)), the lateral side of the intermediate arm member 850 that is adjacent to the outer rotary member 840 is reversed, so there is a difference that the curved shape portion 852c that contacts the contact projecting portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved shape portion 852c that contacts the curved shape portion 854d is reversed.

In order to accommodate this difference, the contact projecting portion 845 has a line-symmetrical shape in a front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body portion 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d has a line-symmetrical shape in a front view with respect to the longitudinal direction line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the rotation proximal end and the supported hole 854a).

Further, the curved shape of the contact projecting portion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to be similar curved shapes in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 852c. As a result, the combined state can be configured with the same engagement relationship in both the individual combined state and the one combined state.

In the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is sandwiched between the contact projecting portion 845 and the curved portion 854d from both sides. As a result, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 can be prevented from being displaced in any rotational direction, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained and the combined state can be easily maintained.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (an intermediate state between the individual combined state and the one combined state), and FIG. 105 shows the one combined state.

106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of third operation unit 800 along line CVII-CVII in FIG. As the configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player can see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal bar 832 can be lowered. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal rod 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850. As shown in FIGS.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a supporting member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850 . As a result, the intermediate arm member 850, which is not a decorative member but a functional member, can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the appearance of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal bar 832 also functions as a rendering member that reflects light due to the luster of the surface. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of light directed by the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 107). In other words, the metal bar 832 can be used as a reflecting member for light production.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal bar 832, the light entering the player's eyes may be blocked by the intermediate arm member 850, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the back side of the metal bar 832, it is possible to prevent the light from being blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and deteriorating the appearance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light can be reflected via the metal rod 832 in the middle of the switching rotation operation (see FIGS. 104 and 107) in which the metal rod 832 is exposed, thereby expanding the range in which the light effect is performed. That is, the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player not only in the range behind the light-transmitting decorative member 824 in which the electrical decoration board 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged, but also in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) in which the metal rod 832 arranged so as to protrude radially outward of the light-transmitting decorative member 824 is exposed and visually recognized when viewed from the front.

As a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a has, on its inner peripheral surface, a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having an annular light diffusion shape. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be emitted to the light diffusing shape portion 824b, and the light diffusing shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

As a result, not only the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the annular arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 is released, the light diffusing shape part 824b is visually recognized brightly in an annular shape, so that the performance effect using the annular shape of the third operation unit 800 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 includes not only a bulging portion 824a visible in the combined state, but also an extending portion 824c extending radially outward from the bulging portion 824a in a front view.

The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state, and thus has a low function as a decorative portion.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extended portion 824c is formed in a size large enough to shield and blind mechanical portions such as the body portion 831 of the inner rotary member 830 and the extended arm portion 842 of the outer rotary member 840 (see FIG. 61), which are difficult to use for performance.

Since the decorative pattern is provided not only on the bulging part 824a but also on the front side of the extension part 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the range where the mechanical part is shielded and blinded, and the presentation effect can be improved.

An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the up-and-down displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the lift arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

According to this embodiment, the vertical displacement and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 are configured to be independently executable. In this case, the third operation unit 800 changes its posture, or the combined state of the third operation unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced radially outward against the attracting force of the magnet Mg2), which may reduce the presentation effect.

In order to avoid this, for example, the up-down displacement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement (particularly, integral rotation operation) of the third operation unit 800 may be controlled to be performed at the same time.

As a result, the rotational displacement of the third motion unit 800 during the up-and-down displacement can be shown to the player as a performance motion, so that the performance effect can be prevented from deteriorating. Furthermore, while the integral rotation operation continues, a load continues to be applied in the direction of radially inwardly displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 (see FIG. 101), so it is possible to avoid canceling the combined state of the third operation unit 800.

Further, even if the control for simultaneously performing vertical displacement and rotational displacement is not performed, the attitude of the third operation unit 800 may be adjusted in advance in the rotational direction so that the rotation arm member 850 is unlikely to be displaced by the vertical displacement.

A change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotary member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotary member 830 is executed in integral rotation in this embodiment. Therefore, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are associated with each other and designed on the premise of this.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state in which the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid situations in which this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is controlled by the driving force of the driving motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the posture of the outer rotating member 840.

Therefore, for example, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the direct-acting member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during execution of the switching rotation operation, and the resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834 and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

For example, the displacement direction of the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 . That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation of the metal rod 832, resistance to rotation of the metal rod 832 is less likely to occur, and the resistance generated between the metal rod 832, the direct-acting member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 can be kept small.

In the state where the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 are arranged at the radial outer end position (see FIG. 104), the direction of displacement of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is aligned with the rotation direction of the metal rod 832. Therefore, especially when the speed is insufficient, the state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel can easily be configured. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is employed in which, once the switching rotation operation is started, the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is reached. In the state where the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 are arranged at the radial outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia so as to rotate about the metal rod 832.

Under the influence of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870, 880 rotates, and the bevel tooth portion 834a and the bevel tooth portion 854c engage and rotate, so that the rotating distal end side of the intermediate arm member 850 passes the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (see FIGS. 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of the radially outer end position, it becomes easier for the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 to be displaced in the direction along the metal rod 832, and the resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832 can be easily suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained, and the arrangement of the detected portion 844 does not change. Therefore, the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by the change in the detection state of the detected portion 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 at the timing when the combined state is reached can be achieved by presetting a necessary and sufficient drive time for the switching rotation operation and controlling to stop the drive at that drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and there is a possibility that the drive will be stopped before the combined state is reached. In this case, there is a possibility that the performance effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, instead of the control mode that stops the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has started due to a change in the detection mode of the detection target part 844 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68), and after this determination, the drive motor 861 may be controlled to stop. With this control, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped before the decorative members 870 and 880 reach the united state after the switching rotation operation is executed.

As drive control, the switching rotation operation is executed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800 as described above.

As drive control, the switching rotation operation can be executed without being affected by the arrangement of the rotation direction of the third operation unit 800, so as described above with reference to FIG. That is, it is not limited to the state in which the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66(a)), but the switching rotation operation can be performed even in the state in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the detection target portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until the detection target portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation is completed, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be performed in a drive period set in advance as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, or the drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to the integrated rotation operation, and the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that it can be determined that the switching rotation operation has already been completed and the decorative members 870 and 880 are in a united state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the driving of the drive motor 861 is changed from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation and the part to be detected 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that the third operation unit 800 is malfunctioning based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

Further, in the latter case, the switching rotation operation is executed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and the drive is continued until the detection target portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the state where the one united state (see FIG. 32) is maintained.

In the union state of the third operating unit 800, as described above, the appearance is less likely to be different even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the part to be detected 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the one union state, it is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the case of performing control to return from the reversal performance to the normal performance shown in FIG. 68, since the detected part 844 is already arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switching rotation operation is completed can be minimized. In other words, since a short drive period for retracting the detected part 844 arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 from the detection groove is sufficient, the length required for the control to return from the reversal performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 for starting the switching rotation operation to switch from the normal performance to the reversal performance is improved, and the switching rotation operation from the reversal performance to the normal performance as the return operation is shortened, although the return operation may normally take a long time.

In other words, a part of the return operation for correcting the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 (rotational displacement until the detected part 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) is performed in a united state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational arrangement differs, thereby avoiding a decrease in the performance effect of the third operation unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switching rotation operation as the rest of the return operation.

Among the operation units 600, 700, and 800, the configuration commonly adopted by the plurality of operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be cross-sectionally explained, including the reasons for the differences in the manner of adoption.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, the configurations of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 commonly employed in the operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be confirmed, and the reasons for the differences in the manner of adoption (the number of sensors, the shape of the piece to be detected, etc.) will be explained.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extended portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device provided in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). With respect to a plurality of displacement members, namely, the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the projecting decorative portion 652b, and the second ornamental rotating member 660, the placement and posture of the other displacement members are determined when the posture of the rotating member 620 is determined. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detectors to be installed.

The detection sensor 713 of the second motion unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second motion unit 700, and the detected portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second motion unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which correspond to the effect standby state, intermediate effect state, and extended state of the second motion unit 700, respectively.

A detection sensor 713 for determining the effect standby state is necessary for determining return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 for judging the overhanging state is necessary not only for judging whether the upward displacement end position has been reached, but also for judging the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 and the displacement caused by the influence of unintended load. The detection sensor 713 for judging the intermediate production state is necessary for judging whether the player has reached the upper or lower position in the intermediate production state, and also for judging positional deviation due to the influence of an unintended load. In the following, the reversal operation and the effects of unintended loads will be described in order.

First, the inversion operation will be described. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable vertical displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 caused in conjunction with the rotation of the gear cam member 734, as well as the reversal operation of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since there is a possibility that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the reversal operation, for example, if only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is employed, there is a possibility that the vertical positional deviation in the overhang state or the intermediate effect state cannot be determined, and the appropriate effect operation cannot be executed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction by reversing the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the overhanging state, and based on this determination result, by rotating the drive motor 731 in the direction to appropriately correct the posture of the gear cam member 734 (so as to be in the overhang state), the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 can be properly arranged.

In the present embodiment, the reversing operation is allowed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is on the operation terminal side), so the positional deviation during the reversing operation can be easily corrected by rotating the gear cam member 734 toward the operation terminal side.

Next, the effects of unintended loads will be described. In the second operation unit 700, the elevation plate member 740 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotation of the gear cam member 734, and the elevation reversal effect device 770 is also displaced forward and backward based on the elevation plate member 740 for displacing to the front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position of the elevation plate member 740 (see FIGS. 52 to 54).

Therefore, the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction by the load applied in the longitudinal width direction of the game machine, and the vertical positions of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 fluctuate, resulting in a change in the attitude of the gear cam member 734. Examples of the load applied in the longitudinal width direction of the game machine include impact load when the player hits the game machine, load when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the like.

Since there is a possibility that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detecting device for determining the effect standby state) is employed, it is possible that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 cannot be maintained in a proper arrangement because it is not possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the overhang state or the intermediate effect state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the longitudinal width direction is applied to the game machine in an intermediate effect state and the vertical positions of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 change, the attitude of the gear cam member 734 changes accordingly, so that it is possible to determine that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 has displaced in the vertical direction. 770 placement can be maintained properly.

When it is determined that the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is displaced from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is arranged in the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, in this embodiment, it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 is displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 from colliding.

In the present embodiment, when the detected portion 735 again enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state due to this driving, it is found that the displacement of the detected portion 735 due to the unintended load is caused on the side that causes the effect device 780 to be upwardly displaced.

Further, by this driving, when the detected part 735 does not enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state but enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect waiting state, it is found that the displacement of the detected part 735 due to the unintended load is on the side of the effect device 780 that is downwardly displaced. can cancel out the effects caused by unbalanced loads.

Note that the detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not serve the structural purpose described for the extended portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion having a width suitable for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be improved.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the second motion unit 700, and the arcuate projecting portion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the orientation of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), which correspond to the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781, respectively.

The second operation unit 700 is in a combined state in which a pair of left and right covering members 787 are adjacent to each other in the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)) and the inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)) of the upside-down reversing member 781.

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device for reversing the upright vertical arrangement state of the upright reversing member 781) is employed, it is possible to determine the position deviation of the upside down reversing member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the positional deviation of the vertically reversing member 781 from the inverted vertically arranged state, even if the united state of the covering members 787 in the inverted vertically arranged state changes due to an unintended load, control failure, etc., the state change cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the united state is canceled will continue, which is not preferable in terms of presentation.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down reversing member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside down reversing member 781 is provided. Therefore, regardless of whether the cover member 787 is in the erect vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state, the detection sensor 778d can determine that the state has changed from the combined state. Thereby, the rendering effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

The arcuate protruding portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not serve the structural purpose described for the extended portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion having a width and length suitable for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the orientation of the upside down member 781 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detected portion 844 can enter the detection groove (see FIG. 60). The third operation unit 800 uses one detection device to detect the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detecting device is used (also used) to determine the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 (switching rotation operation) when the outer rotating member 840 stops rotating.

Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not serve the structural purpose described for the extended portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion having a width suitable for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 can be improved.

The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840, and the number thereof is as small as one. For example, even if a displacement that cancels the combined state occurs when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detected part 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine it.

Therefore, rather than returning to the combined state after determining the deviation from the combined state, the drive motor 861 is driven at regular time intervals in the direction to return the decorative members 870 and 880 to the combined state (in the individually combined state (see FIG. 66(a)), the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and in the single combined state (see FIG. 103(b)), the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front). A control that drives it to rotate (eg, for a short period of time) may be preferable.

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, so that the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 can be avoided from being maintained for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the action of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the posture of the covering member 787, and in the third operation unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. Similar techniques are employed, but the design concept of the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 is different, and will be described here.

The second operation unit 700 is designed so that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides are aligned in the front-rear direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to the plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the covering member 787. As shown in FIG.

In this case, compared to the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 approaching and separating from each other can be reduced. As a result, the movement resistance of the covering member 787 at the start of movement can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 provided on the decorative member 880 is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832 are arranged as the rotational axis of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880 (the plane perpendicular to the rotational axis of the inner rotary member 830).

In this case, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can reduce the degree of load applied to the decorative members 870 and 880 in the direction of rotation, so that the magnetic force can easily prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from wobbling in the direction of rotation.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing the operation units 600, 700, and 800 integrally will be explained.

In the first operation unit 600, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to appear to overlap with the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged near the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third pattern display device 81, the display region and the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be easily visually recognized as a group of display effects.

In the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is arranged to match the height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (see FIGS. 26 and 52). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is arranged near the lower edge of the display region of the third pattern display device 81, the display region and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 can be easily visually recognized as a group of display effects.

In the third operation unit 800, each first covering part 875 visible to the player in the individually united state is decorated differently, and in the overhanging state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is arranged so as to surround the surroundings in front view. Therefore, for example, in a range close to the first covering part 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covering part 875 is arranged, the display area and the first covering part 875 can be easily visually recognized as a group of display effects.

In addition, if the third operation unit 800 is driven to rotate integrally, it is possible to perform a roulette-like action effect in which each first covering part 875 rotates. In this case, for example, by moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covering part 875 in a range close to the first covering part 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the display area and the first covering part 875 can be easily visually recognized as a collective display effect. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shapes of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 are fixed was described, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment includes a first flow path forming part 2334 having a variable internal shape. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

When explaining the first flow path forming part 2334 as an alternative part of the first flow path forming part 334 in the first embodiment, the structure arranged on the right side will be illustrated and explained, but the structure arranged on the left side can also be the first flow path forming part 2334. Also, the configuration may be different between the left and right so that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path forming portion 2334 and the other is the first flow path forming portion 334 .

FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment along line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path forming portion 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the curved protrusion 334b, a slide member 2420 guided along the through hole 2410 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame-shaped portion 332 so as to generate a driving force for sliding the slide member 2420.

In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 2430 is illustrated by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 slides the slide member 2420 to the rear side arrangement RP.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 protrudes inside (above) the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the ball can roll.

That is, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the ball contacts the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the rear side RP, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not contact.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, it is possible to suppress the influence on the flow-down mode of the ball.

The flowing direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is the oblique front-back direction, and the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-back direction. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 influences the strength of rotation of the ball.

Since the ball rolls forward on the bottom surface 2334c, it rotates forward in the traveling direction (forward). When the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the front side arrangement FP to the rear side arrangement RP by energizing the solenoid 2430 from the de-energized state (see FIG. 108) of the solenoid 2430, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 2420. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

On the other hand, when the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the rear side arrangement RP to the front side arrangement FP by changing the solenoid 2430 from the energized state to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), a forward load (frictional force) is generated via the upper surface of the slide member 2420 against the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load is generated in the direction of pushing the ball upward. Therefore, the velocity in the vertical direction of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, so that the falling velocity of the ball can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by executing control to cause slide displacement of the slide member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is arranged behind the second flow passage forming part 335, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the ball is affected by the slide member 2420.

That is, since the contact between the slide member 2420 and the ball is caused before the ball is introduced into the second flow passage forming part 335 which is easy for the player to visually recognize and attracts attention, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is rotated or displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 .

In this embodiment, a contact load is applied when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the ball is placed on the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c.

Therefore, the sphere placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is in motion and the sphere placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped can have different flow-down modes (rotation, change in rotation, flow-down speed, flow-down speed change, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side was described, but in the sorting device 3300 of the third embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear side of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As an example of changing the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, description will be made on the right side of the left and right center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be different on the left and right sides of the distribution device 3300. Also on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the distribution device 3300 so that the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side as described in detail below. They may be arranged symmetrically.

109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 109(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is placed at the front position, and FIG. 109(b) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is placed at the rear position.

In addition, in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the guiding path of the ball after flowing through the third flow path forming portion 336 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the sphere is changed by disposing the slide displacement member 3370 .

As shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the intermediate member 3330 of the sorting device 3300 has a rear frame-shaped portion 3332 that defines the ball guide path to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is set such that the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 and the rear inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this way, if the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the ball passing through the third flow path forming part 336 is flowed to the right side while contacting the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and normally passes the detection sensor SE12. It can be configured to flow to the right side while contacting 376a and pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

That is, both the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 are configured to flow rightward after passing through the third flow path forming portion 336. The only difference is the front-to-rear position that flows to the right.

Therefore, it can be difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 from the player's line of sight viewing the third flow path forming portion 336 from the front side.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side, an upper front projecting portion 3376b integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376, and an upper lateral projecting portion 3376c integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376.

The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and a pair of left and right rod-shaped guide portions 3371c are formed on both the left and right sides of the center of the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336. The rod-shaped guide portions 3371c are configured to pass through the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and be accommodated on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336.

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 so that it does not come into contact with the ball.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, the bottom left and right portions of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be bridged to the slide displacement member 3370.

As a result, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c can easily avoid misguiding the falling ball.

In addition, since the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 is arranged to ride on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball and the ball guide portion 371b collide head-on in the front-rear direction. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c can easily avoid a situation in which the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b and causes the ball to flow backward, or a situation in which the ball is caught between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

The upper front projecting portion 3376b is formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376 in a positional relationship similar to that of the front-rear projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, relative to the front position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper lateral protruding portion 3376c is a portion having the same shape as the left and right inner protruding portions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, and is formed integrally with the upper front protruding portion 3376b in the same relative position as the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment.

As a result, the action of the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c on the abutting ball occurs as an effect on the ball flowing down near the upper projecting portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike the case where the projecting portion 317 is fixed in the front-rear direction and the projecting portion 318 (see FIG. 18) is arranged in a fixed position, the projecting portions 3376b and 3376c in a state where the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear side position can eliminate the action of the projecting portions 3376b and 3376c to force the ball that has reached the front position of the upper projecting portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side was described, but in the sorting device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and back by moving the arrangement of the normal detection sensor SE12 to the rear side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path configuration portion 336, the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, which schematically show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path configuration portion 336 in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 111 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path configuration portion 336, probability variation detection sensor SE11, normal detection sensor SE12 and slide displacement member 4370 along the CXIa-CXIa line of Figure 110 (a), and Figure 111 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path configuration portion 336, probability variation detection sensor SE11, normal detection sensor SE12 and the CXIb-CXIb line of Figure 110 (b). FIG. 13 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a slide displacement member 4370; In FIG. 111(b), illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through.

The front side slide member 4371 and the rear side slide member 4375 are slidably displaced in left and right directions opposite to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. 110(a) and 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110(b) and 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides leftward and the rear slide member 4375 slides rightward.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged to cover the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in the same shape as the left and right inner projecting portions 318 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slidably displaced.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a contacts the upper contact portion 4373 and receives a load, so that it flows downward (downward to the right).

Therefore, when the front side slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the front side slide member 4371 is configured to come into contact with the ball at different points and guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 is provided with a slide plate 4376 arranged to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in the same shape as the front-rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 17), which are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally slidably displaced.

An upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is a slanted plane that is reversed from the upper side surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a allows the ball arranged on the upper side surface 4376a to flow toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a contacts the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, thereby flowing downward.

Therefore, the rear slide member 4375 is configured such that when the front open state and the rear open state are changed, the state changes so as to come into contact with the ball at different points and guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring in this way, the ball after passing backward above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 may return to the upper side of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 again and pass through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

As a mode of returning above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so that the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward through the upper side surface 4372a. In this case, the ball usually rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the detection sensor SE12, flows backward along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, when the timing at which the ball passes through the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the driving timing of the slide displacement member 4370 match, the ball is configured to return to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side. Therefore, compared to a game machine configured such that the ball passing above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 to the downstream side does not pass through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, attention to the ball after passing through the third flow path forming part 336 and the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the ball flow path is common up to the third flow path forming part 336, and the case where the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path forming part 336 has been described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 112(a) shows a state where the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right side position and the ball is guided to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370, and FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), the guiding path of the ball after flowing through the first flow path forming portion 334 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the sphere is changed by disposing the slide displacement member 5370 .

The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 forming a rolling surface of a ball, and an upper projecting portion 5376 projecting upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed so thin that a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 can ride on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protruding portion 5376 facing the sphere is formed in an arc shape with a concave portion on the flow path side, so that the flowing sphere can smoothly flow backward.

According to this embodiment, as in the sorting device 5300, the front and rear width of the ball flowing down path is formed long, and the visibility of the ball flowing down on the front side is higher than that of the ball flowing down on the rear side.

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the right side, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure is such that a ball can enter. On the other hand, the ball that normally flows down the upstream side of the path entrance to the detection sensor SE11 flows toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path forming portion 334 .

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow passage forming portion 334, the sphere is unlikely to move in the opposite direction to the rear, so that the sphere is unlikely to enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, provision of a member for closing the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is intentionally omitted, thereby reducing member costs.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338, and the flow paths do not merge. In the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, the right third flow path forming portion 336 is connected to a confluence flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the left curved protrusion 334b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed of flow path forming portions 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the sorting device 6300 is formed by a confluence flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a location where a space for one sphere is provided on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the balls flowing down the right channel and the balls flowing down the left channel join at the connection point JP1 where the channels are connected, so the balls may collide with each other.

The confluence channel 6341 has a raised floor portion 6342 at the lower end of the channel. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface positioned higher than the lower bottom surface 336 a of the third flow path forming portion 336 . As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the height position between the ball flowing into the connection point JP1 from the confluence channel 6341 and the ball flowing down the right channel and down the third channel forming part 336, so that the degree of backflow that occurs when the balls collide with each other can be reduced.

Due to the contact between the spheres at the connection point JP1, the flow down of the spheres can be delayed as compared with the case where the contact between the spheres does not occur. As a result, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) to reach the branch point BP1 can be changed depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

Since the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b, regardless of the manner in which the ball enters, there is a possibility that the ball can reach the branch point BP1 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged differently by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1.

The premise of the contact between the spheres is that the spheres merge and that there is a sphere flowing down the confluence channel 6341 . If the player wants to cause the balls to contact each other, the player can adjust the shooting intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passing holes 163b (see FIG. 74).

According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the ball launching strength is related to whether or not the ball is in contact with the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the ball reaches the branch point BP1. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

Also, according to this embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a sphere continuation. That is, the two spheres that are in contact at the connection point JP1 can flow down to the branch point BP1 while being arranged close to each other.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path configured by the flow path configuration units 334 to 336 has been described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

114 is a front perspective view of a sorting device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 includes, in addition to the ball passage hole 163b, a ball passage hole 7163b, which is formed at a substantially central position on the left and right, as a path through which a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening of a detection sensor SE71 having the same function as the detection sensor SE1 used for detecting the ball entering the variable winning device 65 and detecting the timing of changing the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state by determining the number of balls entering.

On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a cylindrical flow path 7164 is provided that extends in a downwardly inclined direction rearward and has a rectangular cylindrical cross section. Cylindrical channel 7164 is formed sufficiently large so that the ball can flow down inside, and the end thereof extends up to the upper front side of branch point BP1. In other words, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b is configured to flow down the inside of the cylindrical channel 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the sphere to pass through the cylindrical channel 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the channel forming portions 334 to 336, and is set to be equal to the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the first channel forming portion 334.

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled in the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b and passing through the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 returns to the front position. The branch point BP1 may be reached while being placed in the side position.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b has changed to the open state easily reaches the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position.

That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, it can be configured such that whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 depends on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning hole 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, the arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is devised so as to prevent the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 from being lowered by the cylindrical flow path 7164 when viewed from the general direction during the game.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by increasing the flow path for guiding the ball to the branch point BP1 while maintaining high visibility of the branch point BP1, it is possible to increase the types of length of time required for the ball to reach the branch point BP1, and to improve the player's attention to the specific winning opening 65a.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, an eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b of the guide long hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 are connected at one point, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connection position to switch the displacement direction of the axis O1. 1 displacement direction is switched. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide long hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide slot 8616 bends left and right twice below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide elongated hole 8616 includes a linear portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (substantially circular arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (substantially circular arc shape) in which the center of the curvature radius of the first curved portion 8616b is horizontally reversed to the first curved portion 8616b. .

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, so that the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed).

In addition, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, so that the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed).

In this way, since it is possible to configure a plurality of midway positions where the axis O1 is easily stopped, the types (variations) of the stop postures of the second ornamental rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43), which is stopped midway by stopping the axis O1, can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, a ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 is configured with a single path, but in the first operation unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 includes a first path composed of a linear portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 117 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide long hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 includes a linear portion 616a and a curved portion 616b in the same manner as the guide elongated hole 616 of the first embodiment. and a connecting portion 9616d to be connected.

Angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the locus of displacement of axis O1 when it is assumed that axis O1 is displaced while angle θ is maintained when pivoting member 620 is rotated to the tilting side from a state in which axis O1 is located at the connection point between linear portion 616a and curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced in the angle maintaining portion 9616c, so that the orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decoration rotating member 660 in the rotation direction is maintained such that the third rendering surface 661c faces the front (see FIG. 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, so that the posture in which the third rendering surface 661c faces the front can be maintained over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 displaces the connecting portion 9616d, the angle θ is allowed to change as the rotating member 620 rotates.

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of angle θ when axis O1 is disposed on curved portion 616b differs from the magnitude of angle θ when axis O1 is disposed on connecting portion 9616d.

Moreover, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 is displaced is left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when arranged at the lower end of the displaceable range are respectively one type, so the posture of the box-shaped member 661 when the axis O1 is arranged at the upper end or the lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

In other words, in the present embodiment, when the axis O1 is arranged between the ends (middle position) of the displaceable range, the arrangement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) related to the arrangement of the axis O1, and the displacement speed of the supported member 640 and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be generated in multiple types.

The guide elongated hole 9616 is merely composed of a plurality of paths, and does not have a mechanism for limiting the paths over which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of malfunction due to a defect in the mechanism that restricts the path, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to axis O1 via rotating member 620 . This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction will be described.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled so that the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 does not stop midway.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a, and is displaced to the lower end position of the guide long hole 9616 as it is.

Second, when the axis O1 is displaced along the path on the right side (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the driving motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled so as to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 at the stage when the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting point of the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and then the driving motor 631 is again driven and controlled in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction (vertical direction) in which the linear portion 616a extends decreases, so the selection of whether to displace the left path or the right path of the axis O1 selects the side with less displacement resistance.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, since the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that engages and rotates with the rotating member 620, or to members downstream of the intermediate gear 644. That is, since the displacement resistance is reduced by that amount, the axis O1 can be moved toward the angle maintaining portion 9616b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, it is possible to select the path along which the axis O1 is displaced by controlling whether or not to stop the drive motor 631 halfway.

In addition, when the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the oblique upper right direction, so the situation in which the axis O1 is displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d is unlikely to occur, and the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In the present embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set in the middle of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is formed as an upper left inclined surface located on the upper right side of the axis O1 located at the lower end of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced upward (bouncing back) along the circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball once flows down toward the near side by the sorting device 300 and then flows down backward, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by bending the path a plurality of times or forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a portion that flows down toward the near side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second prize winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape has been described. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so that a large number of fine projections protrude from the plane so as to impart an irregular load to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the sorting device 300, the case where it flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left-right central portion of the specific winning opening 65a, and the balls may be formed so as to directly flow into the third flow passage forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, the balls may pass through the opening. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the opening or does not pass through the opening.

In the first embodiment described above, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific prize winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the detection sensors SE<b>11 and SE<b>12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335 . Moreover, in this case, the order of the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branching to the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the ball flows down in the horizontal direction, or the branching to the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the ball flows down in the front-rear direction (flowing toward the front side).

In the above-described first embodiment, as features of the sorting device 300 alone, the channel directions and inclinations of the channel forming portions 334 to 336 have been described, but the features are not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of the "sleep" that is performed on a daily basis.

Laying down means that the pachinko machine 10 is installed not in a vertical posture but in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) lying backward about 1 degree (4/5 rins). Compared to the above description of the sorting device 300 alone (in a non-sleep state), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 336 having an inclination in the front-back direction have a different meaning.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is designed to be inclined downward by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. On the other hand, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is less likely to be affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 is the same, and the acceleration in the second flow path forming part 335 is slightly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the ball in the horizontal direction, so that the player can easily see the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 . In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 can be passed through in a shorter period of time than passing through the third flow path forming part 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the aging of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each of the flow passage forming portions 334, 336 is smaller than the resting angle (approximately 1 degree), the falling direction of the ball in the flow passage forming portions 334, 336 changes (reverses) depending on the degree of resting (angle setting).

In addition, the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and in a configuration in which the flow path is visible, there is a possibility that the degree of the pachinko machine 10's sluggishness can be grasped from a slight difference in the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the flow path. If you dare to grasp the degree of laziness, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured so that it is easy to visually recognize it.

On the other hand, in the above-described first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so as not to grasp the degree of "nekase" from a slight difference in the flow velocity of the ball.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is made worse except for the normal player's line of sight (range of 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). As a result, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of "sleep" of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the balls flowing down the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, this inclination relationship may be reversed, or the same inclination may be used.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a linear flow path, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a stepwise curved channel shape may be used.

Further, although the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, Krun may be employed as each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, a case was described in which the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 was designed to be 0.3 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even when the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the upstream ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can function as a blindfold for the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 on the downstream side.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the passage length of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is ensured to ensure the flow time of the sphere, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, long ridges are formed in a direction intersecting the flowing direction of the game ball from the inner side walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370, and the ridges are alternately projected. As a result, it is possible to secure the flow-down time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, by forming the ridges only in the third flow path configuration portion 336 without forming the ridges in the first flow path configuration portion 334 and the second flow path configuration portion 335, it is possible to allow the sphere to quickly reach the third flow path configuration portion 336 while allowing the sphere to slowly flow down the third flow path configuration portion 336.

Moreover, the projecting direction of the ridges may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected along the flow-down path of the ball from the left and right to the inner side of the path, or a direction in which the ridges are projected upward from the bottom at a predetermined interval.

In the case of projecting from the left and right direction, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusions is directed to the partition plate portion 338 side instead of the normal detection sensor SE12 side, thereby making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of projecting upward from the bottom side, the projection itself may function as a blindfold for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight.

In addition, you may form a protrusion so that it can be projected and retracted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down in the extended state, and to resume the downward flow of the ball in the retracted state.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which blindfold is performed by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be blinded by the decorative member. The cosmetic member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

Also, when blindfolded by a ball, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized by utilizing the reflection of the mirror, a blindfold function can be produced by placing a ball between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be arranged behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blinded, or the other general winning holes 63 may be blinded.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 are linear and formed of flow passages capable of guiding spheres one by one has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or may be configured such that the flow path width is large and small, and the spheres are likely to stay at a portion where the flow path width is large.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the blinding effect is produced by the ball directed toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning openings 63, 64, 65, 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blinded by the discharge path and the balls arranged in the discharge path.

In the above-described first embodiment, the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a exclusively passes through the first flow path forming part 334 and flows to the second flow path forming part 335 side (front side). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing the balls is provided downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path forming section 335, so that some of the balls may flow toward the second flow path forming section 335.

The distribution mechanism may be displaced by the ball's own weight, may be driven by a driving device to perform a constant operation from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be controlled to be driven in a predetermined pattern from the time the pachinko machine is powered on.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming part 335 side. For example, in the case of entering the specific winning hole 65a, when there is an entering ball exceeding the count (10 balls/round) (excessive winning), the ball may flow to the second flow passage forming part 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a ball entering the first winning port 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank), the ball may be flowed to the second flow path forming part 335 side. In this case, the player can be made to notice that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the side of the second flow passage forming part 335 . In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

In the case of displacing by the ball's own weight, the predetermined movement may be repeated each time the ball reaches, or different movements may be performed depending on the number of balls that reach. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning hole 65a collectively, the balls may flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side. Also, the opposite is possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the ball flows down from the specific winning hole 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, the game may be delayed due to the long ball discharge time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-described distribution mechanism, the number of balls that enter the specific winning hole 65a is flowed down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and the balls after that are discharged without passing through the second flow path forming part 335. As a result, it is not necessary to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is arranged under the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is flowed forward near the lower end of the game area. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 of the sorting device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or may be configured to be arranged on the front side of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81 . In this case, by associating the size of the profit obtained by the player from the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can easily grasp whether the profit obtained is large or small by confirming the display.

In addition, although the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in a front view with reference to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spheres rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in such a positional relationship that the spheres rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 are not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping. In this case, not only the ball entering the sorting device 300 but also the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the front flowing ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has passed can be made to enter the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the leading trailing ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds passes normally enters the through hole of the detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship functioning as a blindfold for the trailing ball, the player cannot visually recognize the timing when the flow of the trailing ball is switched (downward) toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 by being hidden by the trailing ball. In addition, since the chasing ball usually hits the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not hit the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it look as if the ball does not enter the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11, so that the performance effect of the display performance can be improved in a game machine that maintains the player's sense of expectation by displaying the same display performance in the time saving state and the variable probability state.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has collided with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 does not normally flow toward the detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the speed and rotation of the ball before being guided to the left and right inner portions 318 can be composed in multiple types (for example, the level of freedom in the balloon's flow direction by arranging crunes and widening the route width), the speed of the sphere, the speed of the sphere. Due to the difference, it may be configured so that it can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision with the left and right portions 318.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed separately has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370 . That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 .

In the first embodiment described above, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a ball, but the operation timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the sphere may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the long guide hole 616 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width and length of the guide long hole 616 to form an outer phase of the gap, or by using a magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring to change the displacement resistance.

In the above-described first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 is formed in a shape that bends in the middle, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 . For example, the long guide hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the angle θ can be maintained while the rotating member 620 is rotating.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of elongated guide holes 616 in which the axis O1 is movable may be formed, and the elongated guide hole 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by coming into contact with the rotating member 620), or the elongated guide hole 616 may be configured to be changeable in shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the first rendering surface 661a is directed obliquely forward and leftward. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be directed diagonally forward and right in the state of being arranged on the left side of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be directed diagonally forward and upward (lower side) when arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal side of the displacement. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 rather than the direct-acting member functions favorably to secure the rotation angles of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the projecting decoration portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the driving side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is limited to an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that regardless of this favorable effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and has decorations on three sides that intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the second ornamental rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side face faces forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easy to see together with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decoration rotating member 660 can intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with the longitudinal component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above-described first embodiment, the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described so that the second action unit 700 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720 so as to generate an attractive force between the magnet and the magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, and the attractive force may be easily generated in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 is maintained by elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, a permissible value may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters from the rear end of the game area to the front side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be possible to project forward by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be passed forward from below, or the game area may be protruded forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 787 rotates in the opposite direction, so that the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized in alignment, thereby reducing the identification power. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, instead of turning the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, they may rotate while turning toward the left and right outer sides. Moreover, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the above-described first embodiment, both the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotation member 785 and the rotation member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in a configuration in which a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 is grooved in a unicursal manner and a projecting piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be defined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched from the state where the detected part 844 is arranged in the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integral rotation operation. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the driving direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detection target portion 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detection target portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in places, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that produces viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of the oil damper, since resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, and can easily realize high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal rod 832 may reflect light. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, in the switching rotation operation, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side of the metal rod 832 (on the outer diameter side of the circle), the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inner sides has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured so as to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or may be configured so as to be downwardly inclined in the left-right direction. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path forming portion 335 compared to the latter.

Further, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path forming portion 335 may be configured so as not to be inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path forming portion 336 compared to the latter.

Moreover, although the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward inward in the left-right direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow passage forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal surface) along the left-right direction. In this case, since the ball is less urged toward the partition plate portion 338, the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or friction with the ball can be kept low.

In the first embodiment described above, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured so as to pass through the inside of the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point (located at a lower position). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, the sphere passing through the branch point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the rear side, so that the light does not reach the light diffusion processed surface 333b (dark state).

That is, while the outer light-emitting means 351d remains lit, the flow-down state of the sphere at the branch point can be associated with the brightness of the light diffusion processed surface 333b (and the light diffusion processed surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processed surface 333b). Since each of the light diffusion processed surfaces 314c, 333b, 340 has a larger area (projected area) in the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp how the ball flows down at the branch point.

In the above-described first embodiment, the timing for controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351 is explained during the jackpot game, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emission may be controlled due to detection of winning to the winning openings 63, 64, 140, etc., the light emission may be controlled due to the input operation of the frame button 22, or the light emission may be controlled due to the occurrence of winning exceeding a specified number (the number of winnings defining the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of times of change based on the ball entering the winning openings 64, 140).

In the above-described first embodiment, when the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position between the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective. Therefore, by checking the operation of the slide displacement member 370, it is possible to determine whether the assembly of the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 is good or bad at the manufacturing stage.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the movement of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is deviated due to repetitive operation or the influence of some external force, although it did not appear at the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the deviation can be determined by the malfunction of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 for switching the flowing direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rolling motion (e.g., roulette type), or may be provided with features that make the ball flow irregular (e.g., a funnel-shaped croon) so that the ball can flow down in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through either the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the start winning opening (the winning opening 64, 140), may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, or may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to another winning opening or winning area.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 300 is arranged at the lower corner of the game area has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the sorting device 300 may be arranged at the upper corner of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86), at the left and right corners (left and right outside the left and right edges of the center frame 86), or at the central side of the game area. For example, when arranged at the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player who sees the sorting device 300 is inclined upward with respect to the horizontal plane, so that the downstream side ball can be configured to hide the upstream side ball in the portion of the flow path which is inclined downward toward the front side.

Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reverse inclination, and the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the window portion 162d is designed based on the shape of the flow passage forming portions 335 and 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the sealing member 313, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a shape that allows (only) the slide displacement member 370 to be visually recognized from the player's line of sight (viewed obliquely downward), or may have a shape that reduces the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 . Further, the shape may be such that one of the front side position and the rear side position of the slide displacement member 370 is visible and the other side is invisible.

Further, in the first embodiment, the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 are configured as a pair of left and right flow passages so that they do not merge, so that the number of balls entering one flow passage can be reduced (the entering balls can be dispersed), and the slide displacement member 370 can switch any path of the ball that has passed through each flow passage while generating an effect of making it easier to avoid ball clogging.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d may be such that only one of the left and right components of the slide displacement member 370 (eg, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper projecting portion 376) is visible and the other is invisible. In this case, since the player can predict the path of the ball flowing down on the side that cannot be visually recognized, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is set to the backward direction (forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336), and the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction due to sliding is suppressed, the amount of rotation of the ball in the state immediately before falling is suppressed, and the player can see the ball as if it is temporarily stopped. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be the forward direction (opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

That is, by displacing the ball guide portion 371b forward and allowing the ball guide portion 371b to enter the lower side of the third flow passage forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11 can be opened. The upper projecting portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to protrude toward the branch point BP1 when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball does not ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the upper projecting portion 376 is displaced in the front and rear reverse direction at the same timing as the ball guide portion 371b is displaced, and the ball passage to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction can be accelerated due to the sliding movement of the ball guide part 371b with the ball, so that the amount of rotation in the state immediately before the ball falls can be increased to make it appear to the player that the ball has immediately dropped (smoothly dropped).

In the above-described first embodiment, the control of the rotating member 620 takes into account the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is de-energized, and is controlled in such a manner that the drive motor 631 is de-energized when the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 may be reduced, and the drive motor 631 may be rotated slightly for a short period of time and then stopped. As a result, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (the position in the waiting state for the effect).

In the first embodiment, the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operation unit 700 are straight inclined grooves. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, by forming a groove having a partial curve that curves forward on the lower end side, the displacement of the effect device 780 can be made into a displacement mode in which vertical slide displacement, forward/backward slide displacement, and forward/backward posture displacement are combined.

As for the shape of the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may have a doglegged shape (or inverted doglegged shape) when viewed in the left-right direction, or may have an S-curved shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, regarding the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation by magnetic force, the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787) are displaced so as to avoid collision.

For example, by setting the number of gears of the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, a design method that avoids collision between the members may be employed.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the second operation unit 700, in the overhanging state as the upper end position, the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is arranged at the horizontal position corresponding to the horizontal center of the effect device 780. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 to the right side of the left-right center of the production device 780, a long support position interval between the metal rod 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the rotating arm member 720 supporting the right side of the lifting plate member 740 can be secured. As a result, the lift plate member 740 can be stably supported.

In the third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion that remains visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individually combined state or the single combined state, and the bulged portion 824a is made visible to the player as a part (central portion) of the decorative members 870 and 880 in both the individually combined state and the single combined state. Although the case where the shape is designed so as to suppress discomfort has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be arranged in such a positional relationship that the display section is arranged in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging portion 824a is changed by changing the illumination mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the object visually recognized by the bulging portion 824a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display portion, so that the degree of freedom of presentation can be improved.

Further, for example, for either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880, the shape of the covering portions 875 and 885 may be changed so as to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, and the expanded portion 824a may be covered by the extended portion. In this case, since the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player in either the individually united state or the single united state, the degree of freedom in designing the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are magnetically attracted to the third operation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the united state may be maintained by the load of the concave-convex engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the biasing force of the spring member.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by adopting an operation mode in which momentum is applied, even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is greater than or equal to the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, the switching rotation operation can be realized.

As a mode of operation to give momentum, for example, rotation control in the opposite direction may be performed as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, a reaction can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and a load can be generated in the direction of throwing the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the attraction due to the magnetic force.

In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration was described in which the decoration members 870 and 880 were configured to undergo radial displacement before the reversing operation as a device for suppressing the wobble during the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal rod 832 serving as the rotation axis for the reversal operation is arranged, even if the reversal operation occurs before the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced from the combined state in the radial direction, the magnetic force generated between the plurality (five) of the decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so that the third operation unit 800 can be prevented from wobbling during the switching rotation operation.

In the above-described first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 are reversed by 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be configured so that they are reunited by a 120-degree reversal operation. In this case, before and after the switching rotation operation, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the visible angles of the covering parts 875 and 885 are changed (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the operation and 60 degrees to the left after the operation) while the sides of the decoration members 870 and 880 that are visible in the front view are the same.

In addition, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, the length may be configured to be different, or the formation range and shape of the bevel tooth portion 854c may be configured to be different, so that the decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by reversing 180 degrees and the decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by reversing 120 degrees coexist. For example, one of the five decorative members 870 and 880 may be configured to be flipped 120 degrees by switching rotation, and the other (four) decorative members 870 and 880 may be configured to be flipped 180 degrees by switching rotation.

The angle of the reversing operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be set to 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

In the above-described first embodiment, a pair of left and right torque limiters 866 are arranged above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 and in asymmetrical positions. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged symmetrically, may be arranged on the left side, the right side or the lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or may be arranged on opposite sides (exactly opposite sides) across the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured to have a common shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the supported hole 854a and the guide hole 854b in which the linear motion member 833 that slides along the metal rod 832 is arranged may be varied to create a difference in the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rod 832 between the linear motion members 833.

For example, by changing the design of the supported hole 854a to form an elongated hole or a hole with a large diameter and mixing the intermediate arm member 850 in which the shape of the guide hole 854b is changed accordingly, it is possible to provide a difference in the displacement start timing of the direct-acting member 833 in the switching rotation operation.

As a result, the decorative members 870 and 880, which are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the direct-acting member 833, can be displaced radially outward from the united state at different timings, so that the attracting portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load for releasing the adsorption can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to generate displacement in the shearing direction (radial direction) at the attracting portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 each time. For example, a displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward trip), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation leads to the combined state (return trip).

For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 is differentiated between a displacement mode in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates from the combined state (a state in which the rotating tip is arranged on the rotation shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position, and a displacement mode in which the intermediate arm portion i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position to the combined state. It is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode in which displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) is generated in the attraction portion between g2 and metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 has been described for each operation unit 600, 700, 800, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of a single detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at positions where the extended portion 634b can be detected, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two or less or four or more detection sensors 713 may be employed. As for the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extended portion 634b can be detected in the intermediate effect state or the extended state of the first motion unit 600 is exemplified.

Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, and instead of one detection sensor 813, a plurality of detection sensors 813 may be arranged at positions where the detected portion 844 can be detected. As for the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state of the third operation unit 800 can be determined in five types (five modes that differ in the direction of rotation).

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the balls continue to roll regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to have a length equivalent to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314, so that the deceleration action of the ball can be strengthened and the ball can be easily retained.

In the above-described second embodiment, it was not described that the ridge is formed inside the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 may be configured to have a ridge for decelerating the ball. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set such that it contacts with either the sphere that rides on the slide member 2420 at the front side position FP or the sphere that rides on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is positioned at the rear side BP, but does not contact the other. In this case, the deceleration action by the protrusion can be generated in either the state where the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP or the state where the slide member 2420 is arranged on the rear side BP.

In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 is formed integrally with the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper lateral protruding portion 3376c as separate members appear and disappear in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing when the thin plate portion 371 is arranged at the front side position and the rear side position.

In addition, although the front and back arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited at all, it is better to use the probability variation detection sensor SE11 on the rear side as in the present embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, these components may be configured as separate members, and may be configured to operate synchronously (interlockedly) at the same timing. In addition, you may comprise so that it may be slidably displaced in the front-back direction.

In the fourth embodiment described above, when the slide members 4371 and 4375 are slid at the timing when the ball passes rearward on the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned forward due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 when the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state can be guided to the additional ball detection sensor. The greater the profit that the player obtains by entering the ball into the additional ball detection sensor (for example, the larger the right obtained by entering the ball into the variable probability detection sensor SE11, such as the acquisition of multiple jackpots, the acquisition of the right to shift to a higher variable probability state, etc.), the more attention can be paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming part 336.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the confluence flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in the vicinity of the raised floor portion 6342, a curved flow path may be formed in which the connection point JP1 side faces rearward. As a result, both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path forming portion 335 can both have a backward velocity component, and it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to the collision of these.

Note that the connection point JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the center position of the sorting device 6300 in the left-right direction. Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reverse inclination, and the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the near side, so that attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300 can be improved.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, the long guide hole 9616 is configured as a long hole having a branch, and the case where the axis O1 passes through the long guide hole 9616 is switched depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, only the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 9616 is always configured as an elongated hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d may alternately be configured as an elongated hole and closed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an erroneous path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, in the guide long hole 9616 having branches, a switch valve may be provided to limit the displacement path of the axis O1 by closing one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the guide long hole 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be restricted by the switching valve. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an erroneous path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decoration rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
A control example of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 118 to 87, as a first control example, a control example when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 120 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 provided in the area under the front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed of wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 118) to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 is provided with a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, a shooting rail (not shown) that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118). The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 119) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or a ready-to-win performance is performed, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit or blinked by the lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs to notify that the big win is in progress or the reach just before the big win is in progress. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when the prize balls are being paid out and when an error occurs.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a certificate stamp or the like stuck to the pasting space K1 (see FIG. 119) in front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation part 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. A ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball rental operation section 40, but in this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball rental operation section 40 so that the parts configuration may be shared. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 for storing balls that cannot be fully stored in the upper tray 17 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation, the ball is shot with the strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit in front of the game board 13 with the distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off. That is, in this control example, there are shooting means for shooting the ball to the game area formed on the game board 13, and shooting intensity varying means for varying the shooting intensity based on the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51. As a result, the player can execute a ball shooting action using the shooting means and a shooting intensity varying action of varying the shooting intensity of the ball simply by operating the operating handle 51 . Therefore, the operation of shooting a ball toward a specific game area out of the game areas formed on the game board 13 can be executed with one hand, and the game can be executed without imposing an excessive burden on the player.

In this control example, the firing intensity is varied based on the amount of rotational operation (rotating position) of the operating handle 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a firing intensity selection button that allows the player to select the firing intensity may be provided, and the shooting means may shoot the ball at the firing intensity corresponding to the operation result (selection result) of the firing intensity selection button.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extraction lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened, and the ball is naturally dropped and discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable prize winning device 65, a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and the inner frame 12 ( (See FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 118). Mainly referring to FIG. 119, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 118), thereby forming a game area in front of the game board 13 in which a game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (an area in which winning holes are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 119) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back to the center side while the momentum is attenuated.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS) so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.例文帳に追加

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for showing the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, since the pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is used, the first symbol display device 37 displays the result of two types of special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery).

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state) by the lighting state, indicates by the lighting state whether or not the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to indicate the lottery result), and the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to an advantageous big win for the player or a figure corresponding to a disadvantageous big win. Whether it is a pattern or a missing pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and a combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this control example, various game states are notified by combinations of the light emitting colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can distinguish between the various game states.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, an open state in which balls can be easily entered into a specific prize winning port 65a of a variable prize winning device 65 is achieved, and a game capable of acquiring many prize balls in a short period of time is executed by allowing balls to enter the specific prize winning port 65a. This jackpot game is executed (in some cases) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display), and the opening period (for example, 1 second) of a predetermined time (a period in which a closed state is set to make it difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65), the round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A jackpot game period consisting of a set interval period and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern showing the winning of the big win is stopped and displayed (determined display), it is possible to prepare for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction in accordance with the timing when the specific winning opening 65a is opened during the big win game, so that the big win game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

By setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game, so that preparations can be made for shooting balls in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed after the jackpot game is finished, so that the game can be switched smoothly.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, a plurality of types of jackpot games are configured to be executable, and the number of round games (number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to be different according to the type of the jackpot won. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the big win is won by lottery of special symbols, but also in the type of the big win won and the game state at the time of winning.

In addition, the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win or the type of the jackpot. 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of other jackpot games, and during the ending period, it is possible to execute a performance for preliminarily guiding the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends to the player during the ending period. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a big win is won in which the game contents at the time of winning the big win and the game contents to be executed after the end of the big win game are the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the big win may be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of the other big win games. This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without actually discriminating between the game contents at the time of winning the big win and the game contents to be executed after the completion of the big win game, for example, the game state to be set after the end of the big win game may be defined in advance based on the type of the winning big win and the game state at the time of winning the big win, and the ending period of each big win game may be set in advance according to the defined contents.

Although a specific description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured so that three types of game states can be set by combining two states (high-probability state of special patterns, low-probability state of special patterns) with different probabilities of winning a jackpot in the lottery of special patterns and two states (high-probability state of normal patterns, low-probability state of normal patterns) of different probability of winning in the lottery of normal patterns described later. Specifically, a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), a time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), and a variable state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) can be set. Both the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery are configured so that winning is more likely in the high probability state than in the low probability state, so that among the plurality of game states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the variable probability state is a game state in which it is easier to win a big win in the special pattern lottery than in other game states, and the variable probability state and the short time state are a game in which it is easier to win in the normal pattern lottery than in the other game states. state.

In addition, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, it is configured to execute a winning game (normal pattern winning game) that facilitates the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the electric accessory 640 attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened to provide a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of normal symbols are set, the game state becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of normal patterns is set, a shorter period (dynamic display period) from the execution of the special pattern lottery to the stop display of the result of the lottery is more likely to be set than when the low probability state of normal patterns is set. Therefore, when the variable state and the time-saving state, that is, the high-probability state of normal patterns are set, the special pattern lottery can be executed in a shorter period of time than other game states, so that the game state is such that the new special pattern lottery can be easily executed.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable prize winning device 65 which is opened during the big win game, and only when the ball passes through the specific area during the big win game, a high probability state of the special symbol can be set after the big win game ends. A big winning game (advantageous big winning game) in which the ball easily passes through the specified area during the big winning game and a big winning game (disadvantageous big winning game) in which the ball hardly passes through the specified area during the big winning game can be executed according to the type of the winning big winning. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which a ball is likely to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game is called a probability variable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed is called a probability variable jackpot. In addition, a disadvantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game is called a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed is called a normal jackpot.

In this control example, if a special symbol lottery does not win a big win, it is determined as a loss, and the player is not provided with a privilege. However, the configuration is not limited to this. A first pattern display device 37 not only shows whether or not the result of lottery is a big win (whether it is a small win) as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also shows a pattern corresponding to the type of the big win when it is a big win.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a are provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of a third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display of special symbols executed by the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning); A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying a pattern) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three upper, middle, and lower pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230(a)). The third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (decorative pattern that fluctuates corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) is composed of 10 types of main patterns to which identification information imitating numbers '1' to '9' is attached. These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . The third symbol display device 81 of this control example performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is performed by the first symbol display device 37. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols sz are formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each number-like identification information. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win game is generated. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on the top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the main symbols arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to be variably displayed by scrolling from right to left, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are variably displayed by scrolling from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) fz which do not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol are also formed between the main symbols sz. In FIG. 122(b), a blank pattern (secondary pattern) fz is displayed using a pattern imitating a triangle.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in an oblique direction. If the third symbols (main symbols sz) are stopped on the activated line in a combination of the big winning symbols (in this control example, the same combination of the same main symbols) while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, a big win is achieved. A video is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, until all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (the middle symbol row V2 in this control example) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In this control example, among the above-described three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3), a specific symbol row (symbol row Z2), that is, a symbol row whose variable display is stopped and displayed last among a plurality of symbol rows is configured so that the number of main symbols is larger than that of the other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols to which a specific number (for example, the number "4") is attached is greater than that of other symbol rows. As a result, when the identification information simulating the specific number is in the ready state, the number of big winning patterns (identification information simulating the specific number) passing on the effective line can be increased more than when the other identification information is in the ready state, so that the player can visually predict that the degree of expectation of winning the big prize is high.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variability display area of the third symbol may be made smaller, or the variability display area may be moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are configured to be the same (including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to identify), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying special symbol.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(b). As shown in FIG. 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol (whether the lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result) is displayed. configured to be displayed.

In addition, the small display area Dm2 is an area for displaying identification information for indicating the lottery status of normal symbols (whether or not lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth pattern (fourth normal pattern) for indicating the lottery status of normal symbols (normal pattern) is displayed in the small display region Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of special symbols and the lottery status of normal symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross. ), the lottery result of the special symbol is shown. However, the lottery result of the special symbol may be shown by, for example, using a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors to indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating according to the display mode of changing the number or color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbol or color.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result). Further, as shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and the normal symbol fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which the normal symbol fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol is displayed is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. It may be configured such that the formed position and size are varied according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the restriction of the region in which the variation performance is executed by the fourth pattern display region and the normal-fourth pattern display region. In this case, the fourth symbol display area and the normal symbol fourth symbol display area may be deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display device unit 80 may be configured so that the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed using light emitting means (LED, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or when a winning game is being performed, that is, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which a new special symbol lottery cannot be executed, the number of ball entrances is reserved up to four times for each ball entrance. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for entering the first ball opening 64 is set to 4, and the maximum number of reserved balls to be stored for entering the second ball opening 640 is set to 4. Therefore, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The waiting area Ds1b is an area for displaying a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols, and eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the upper limit number (8) of reserved and memorizable are displayed in order from the left. Then, when a reserved ball with a special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the pedestal with the lowest number among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 on which the reserved pattern is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), four reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and stored, and in the waiting area Ds1b, four reserved symbols (hz1 to hz4) of the display mode (white circle mark) corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first pedestal hr1 to the fourth pedestal hr4.

The running area Ds1a is a display area in which the pending symbols displayed corresponding to the currently running special symbol variation are shifted and displayed, and the running pending symbols hz0 are displayed on the running pedestal hr0. That is, when a new special symbol variation is started, the reserved symbol hz1 displayed on the pedestal hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the pedestal hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. By constructing in this way, for example, when a notice performance (for example, a performance of varying the display mode of a reserved pattern) indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is executed for the reserved symbols displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the player can easily discriminate that the special pattern variation corresponding to the reserved pattern for which the notice performance is executed is being executed.

Further, by making it possible to display the reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed, the performance of changing the display mode of the reserved patterns can be executed also for the reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed, so that the game can be played while expecting the display mode of the reserved patterns to be varied for a longer time than when the reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed are not displayed.

In this control example, depending on the display mode of the reserved design displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, the reserved design being displayed is configured to be able to identify whether the displayed reserved design is the reserved design (special figure 1 reserved design) indicating the reserved ball of the first special design or whether it is the reserved design (special design 2 reserved design) indicating the reserved ball of the second special design. The pattern is displayed as a black circle (see FIG. 124(a)). As a result, the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of the special pattern, so that the player can easily judge whether or not to continue the game for entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the display contents of the reserved pattern.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special symbol is displayed, and the special symbol lottery is executed using the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols displayed on the pedestal with the lowest number (the pedestal with the youngest number is the pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order of use in the special symbol lottery, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the reserved symbols may be displayed in the order in which the reserved balls are acquired, and each reserved symbol may be provided with order information for indicating the order of use in the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which reserved ball acquired at which timing corresponds to which reserved symbol.

Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122(b), it is configured to be able to display up to eight reserved symbols side by side. In this case, for example, when the game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to obtain the special figure 2 reservation is set, the display area of the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed more conspicuously than the display area of the special figure 2 reserved pattern, and when the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain the special figure 2 reservation is set, the display area of the special figure 2 reserved pattern may be displayed more conspicuously than the display area of the special figure 1 reserved pattern.

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, and the same game results are given when a right-handed game is performed and when a left-handed game is performed. If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a game method in which a left-handed game is more advantageous, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction of shooting the ball (game direction). By constructing in this manner, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot toward, only by visually recognizing the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that the game machine can be provided that is easy for the player to understand.

To explain in more detail, it is preferable that the guidance display area displays a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to play a right-handed game and a "left-handed" display mode for guiding the player to play a left-handed game. is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed in a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, the display mode of 'left-handed' is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In addition, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each control example described above may be configured to be displayed as appropriate.

<Regarding the production contents of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 131, the characteristic effect contents among the various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 123(a), the display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ready-to-reach state is reached in the normal state (normal state). In this control example, the variably displayed third symbols are stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the winning of the jackpot on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)), the ready-to-win state is entered, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the winning of the big win. The middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed with the effective line on which is displayed as a ready-to-win effective line. After reaching the ready-to-win state, the middle pattern row Z2 is configured to variably display each piece of identification information (third pattern) at a low speed (a speed of about 0.5 seconds required for one main pattern (third pattern imitating a number) to shift by one) at which the player can visually recognize.

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row has 10 main symbols (one each of the main symbols with the numbers "1" to "3" and "5" to "9" and two main symbols with the number "4"). Therefore, when the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed at a low speed, it takes 5 seconds (0.5×10) to make one round. Then, the medium symbol row Z2, which is variably displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123(a), even when the ready-to-win state is reached with any third symbol (in FIG. 123(a), the identification information imitating "9" (the third symbol imitating a crab)), the medium symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)) variably displayed during the ready-to-win is displayed so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third symbol resembling an octopus) can be visually recognized first. It consists of

In addition, in this control example, the effect mode of the variable effect is variable according to the change mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after entering the ready-to-win state. For example, it is configured to be variable to a different effect mode (ready-to-win mode) at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round (5 seconds after the execution of the low-speed fluctuation display) or the timing after two rounds (10 seconds after the low-speed fluctuation display is executed) after entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, as in this control example, by unifying the identification information of the medium pattern row Z2 which becomes visible first after entering the ready-to-win state, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand at what timing to change to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode).

In this control example, the timing of changing to a different production mode (reach mode) is set to the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round or two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state, but is not limited to this. aspect). In this way, by structuring such that specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information for which the ready-to-win state is stopped is changed to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode) on the basis of passing through the ready-to-win effective line, it is possible to provide the player with a relationship between the timing at which the middle pattern row Z2 is stop-displayed in combination for a big hit and the timing for changing to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode). Specifically, when the identification information (the same identification information as the reach-stopped identification information) that becomes the combination indicating the big win after entering the ready-to-win state is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-reach mode) at the timing of passing through the ready-reach effective line, it is possible for the player to overlap the timing at which the medium symbol row Z2 is stop-displayed in the combination that becomes the big win and the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (the ready-to-win mode). (identification information) approaches the reach effective line, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable presentation while having a great sense of anticipation.

Here, in this control example, as described above, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed with low-speed fluctuation so that the specific identification state (the third symbol imitating the number "1") becomes visible first regardless of which third symbol is in the ready-to-win state. A new problem arises that the period from reaching the ready-to-win state until all the third patterns are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed) differs depending on the type of the third pattern to be in the ready-to-win state.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "1", the medium symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a low-speed fluctuation manner. In the hit state, the middle pattern row Z2 displays the third pattern simulating the number ``1'' as a specific pattern at a low speed, so that it takes 8 seconds (first round) and 13 seconds (second round) after the ready-to-win state to stop and display the medium pattern row Z2 in the final stop display mode with one frame off the ready-to-win state.

Therefore, in order to establish a ready-to-win state with third patterns of different types in a variation pattern in which the same variable time is set, it is necessary to execute a process of setting the timing of reaching the ready-to-win state by calculating back from the stop display timing of the third pattern. In other words, there is a problem that a non-uniform ready-to-win performance that varies according to the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is executed during the period from the fluctuation start timing to the ready-to-win state, and the performance effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this control example, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the main controller 110 determines by lottery the variation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result, and the determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display performance of the performance period suitable for the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and executes the variable display performance of the third pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic variation time and an addition time command indicating an added variation time, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern to be in the ready-to-win state based on the length of the variation time included in the addition time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional time. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional time. In other words, the notification content of the addition time command allows the audio lamp control device 113 side to identify the variation type that is seven seconds longer than the basic time. As a result, it is possible to set the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state simply by confirming the contents of the addition time command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123(b) to 126, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 123(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the normal symbol variation that is winning in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during execution of normal symbol variation in which winning is achieved in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(b), when the normal symbol variation is performed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being performed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an icon simulating an electric accessory 640 to be opened in a normal game is displayed therein, and an emphatic display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to inform the player that the small display area Dm3 is formed. In the situation shown in FIG. 123(b), since the winning normal symbol variation is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 has a display mode that imitates the electric accessory 640 in the closed state. By configuring in this way, the game may soon be executed for the player. can be predicted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 123(b), the execution of the normal symbol variation in which the player wins is explained as an example, but it is configured to form a small display area Dm3 in a part of the execution of the normal symbol variation in which the lottery result is lost (for example, the probability of 1/100 of the loss variation), and to perform the effect (fake effect) of displaying an icon imitating the electric accessory 640. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed is stopped and displayed. By constructing in this way, since the performance display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when the normal pattern lottery is not won, the player can play the game while expecting the normal pattern winning game to be executed. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), by displaying an icon simulating the electric accessory 640 in the small display area Dm3, the effect of suggesting the start of the general-purpose game is exemplified.

In addition, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of the normal per figure game. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is also performed while the normal symbol variation is performed, the performance suggesting the execution of the normal symbol winning game is performed, so that, for example, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 which allows the ball to enter more easily than the first ball entrance 64 which is the trigger for the execution of the special symbol lottery, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is not previously suggested to the player who is executing only the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege (execution of an effect suggesting the result of a normal symbol lottery in advance) to a player who is playing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example may be set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed, or that the ball shooting game is being continuously executed.

In addition, depending on the game contents being executed, the degree of expectation of the suggestion performance suggesting the start of the game per normal pattern may be configured to be different, for example, when the game is normally played, when the suggestion performance suggesting the start of the game per normal pattern is executed, the game per normal pattern is executed at a rate of almost 100%, and only the normal pattern drawing is executed without executing the special pattern drawing (stopping game), that is, the normal game. is not performed, even if the suggestion performance suggesting the start of the normal pattern winning game is executed, the normal pattern winning game may be executed only at a rate of about 10%. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the stopping game to grasp the start timing of the normal pattern winning game based on the executed suggestion performance, and to impose a penalty.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, up to four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal pattern reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the preliminary determination result can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 . Therefore, the suggesting performance suggesting that the normal pattern winning game will soon be executed can be executed from the stage before the execution of the normal pattern variation in which the winning of the suggesting performance suggesting the execution of the normal pattern winning game is executed, that is, the stage of acquiring the normal pattern holding that the preliminary determination result is winning. In this case, the suggestive effect may be executed in an effect mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 123(b). For example, the suggestive effect may be configured to be executed in the same effect mode as the effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, or the pre-determined result of the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive effect may be configured to notify the player only that a situation advantageous to the player will soon come. .

In this way, it is difficult for a player to understand the performance mode of the suggestive performance for indicating that the normal game will be executed to the extent that the timing of actually executing the general pattern winning game and the execution timing of the suggestive performance diverge, and by making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestive performance is the general pattern winning game, the amusement of the game when the suggestive performance is executed can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124(a), description will be given of the content of the effect when the normal pattern winning game (long open winning game) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 124(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the content of the effect displayed when the normal pattern winning game (long open winning game) is executed in the normal state (during the normal state). In this control example, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100 in the normal state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set, and the variation time of the normal pattern variation executed in the normal pattern low probability state is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, it is configured such that about 1/2 of the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 in either case of executing a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, it is configured to be able to store up to four lottery rights (normal pattern reservation) for normal patterns.

In other words, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the normal symbol lottery is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. In addition, when winning a general pattern in the normal state, the electric accessory 640 is configured to be executed for a general pattern per game (long open per) in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, so that the shot ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal pattern winning game in the low probability state of the normal pattern that occurs at a low probability is suppressed.

When winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 124(a), in the small display area Dm2, the combination (two circles in the figure) indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning, the identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the normal symbol winning game is executed. Then, a comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, and an icon simulating an open electric chew (electric accessory 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery can be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variable display of the third symbol executed corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol executed in the small display area Dm1 are continuously executed even during the regular per-symbol game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds, the special figure 2 reserved pattern (indicated by a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 2 reserved balls) of the second special pattern acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is given priority over the special figure 1 reserved pattern (indicated by white circles in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reserved balls) of the first special pattern that has been acquired (in the waiting area Ds1b). on the left). In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 124 (a), it is a state after four or more balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a game per normal, and four are the upper limit number of special 2 reserves.

In this control example, since the lottery for the second special pattern is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special pattern, the special pattern lottery is executed with the later obtained special pattern 2 reserved ball having priority over the earlier obtained special pattern 1 reserved ball. By constructing in this way, when a normal pattern winning game is executed in a normal state and a plurality of special 2 reserved balls are obtained, the second special symbol lottery can be preferentially and continuously executed, so that one period during which the second special symbol lottery is executed can be used as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and a dedicated performance can be executed, and an easy-to-understand performance can be provided to the player.

In this control example, the acquired special figure 1 reserved balls and special figure 2 reserved balls are displayed side by side (maximum 8 pieces are displayed) in the waiting area Ds1b. The area is preferably displayed so as to be more conspicuous than the special figure 2 reserved ball display area, and when the reserved ball of the second special pattern is obtained, the switching display is performed so that the special figure 2 reserved ball display area is more conspicuous than the special figure 1 reserved ball display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the lottery for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed next.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is configured to be continuously displayed until the end timing of the normal pattern per game in the normal state or the start timing of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. That is, even during normal per game, when the second special symbol variation is started, the chance zone effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 124(b), is executed. On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation does not start even when the end timing of the normal per game is reached, for example, when the per normal per symbol game (5 seconds) is executed while the first special symbol variation in which a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected is executed, the character "waiting for the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and when the first special symbol variation currently being executed ends, the standby screen notifying the player that the second special symbol variation will start. is displayed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when a general pattern per game is executed during the first special symbol variation, while continuously displaying the third symbol variation effect (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the main display region Dm corresponding to the first special symbol variation being executed, a part of the main display region Dm (in the figure, the small display region Dm3 formed at the lower right in the figure) informs that the general symbol per game is in progress. It is preferable to configure the size of the display area used for displaying that the normal figure winning game has been executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation. For example, when the first special symbol variation being executed is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the small display area Dm3 to be smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124 (a) or not to form the small display area Dm3. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating the winning of the jackpot due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when the normal pattern winning game is started without forming the small display area Dm3, the player can be notified that the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is the big winning variation, so that the player can be made to watch the operation state of the electric accessory 640 even in the state where the execution of the normal symbol winning game in the small display area Dm3 is not reported. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable that the same effect mode as the big winning variation is executed even in a part of the case where the special symbol variation being executed is not the big winning variation (the loss variation).

On the other hand, when the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is a deviation variation or when the special symbol variation is not executed, the small display area Dm3 may be formed larger than the example shown in FIG.

In other words, in the limited display area of the third symbol display device 81, when it is necessary to display a plurality of pieces of information (lottery results and winning game situations) redundantly, it is sufficient to display information that is advantageous to the player with priority, and display in various display modes based on the technical idea. In this case, the information that is advantageous may differ depending on the player. For example, some players regard the information indicating that they have won a big win in the special symbol lottery as advantageous information, and some players regard the performance with a lower appearance rate as the advantageous information than the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an operation means that can be operated by the player and an advantage level selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage level of various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means, and to set the display mode corresponding to the various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the advantage level selected by the advantage level selection means. As a result, it is possible to display various information in a display mode that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 124(b) to 126. FIG. FIG. 124(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state, the comment "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set to a period until all the special 2 reserves obtained in the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, characters of ``variable probability GET high probability'' are displayed as a guide display mode for showing that the variable probability state can be obtained with a high probability. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning the big win is the same in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but it is configured to make it easier to set the probability variable state after the jackpot game is over when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the period of the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is a period in which it is easier to obtain a jackpot winning in a variable probability state than in the period other than the chance zone in the normal state. Therefore, as shown in FIG.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this chance zone, during one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation), a pseudo variation effect is executed to make it appear as if the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124 (a)) indicating the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is hidden, and the special figure 1 reserved number (in the figure, "2" indicating that the special figure 1 reserved number is 2) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 124(a)) of the sub display area Ds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the chance zone, the player can be made to think that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In the present control example, a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm is used to display the number of special figures pending, but without being limited to this, the number of special figures pending may be configured not to notify the player during the chance zone, or may be configured to notify the number of special figures pending in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is only necessary to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of reserved special figures. When configured in this way, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effect as this control example can be obtained.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate that the second special symbol is currently changing. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), so the period during which the normal pattern per game is executed may overlap with the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (see FIG. 124 (a)) or may not overlap. When the normal pattern winning game is executed while overlapping with the fluctuation period of the first special pattern, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the first special pattern fluctuation being executed is finished, and when it is not overlapped with the fluctuation period of the first special pattern, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game (during the normal pattern winning game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special pattern lottery is different according to the fluctuation state of the first special pattern when the normal pattern winning game is executed, and there arises a problem that it is difficult for the player to accurately discriminate whether the currently executed special pattern fluctuation is the first special pattern fluctuation or the second special pattern fluctuation.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125(a) and FIG. 126, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) among the variable effects executed during the chance zone will be described. Figure 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation production, Figure 125 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in the special variation production executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired, and Fig. 126 is a display when the third symbol restarts in the special variation production executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not acquired. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen typically.

Here, the contents of the special fluctuation production (pseudo-variation production) will be explained. This special variation performance is a variation performance in which the third pattern is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) during one variation period of the second special pattern variation and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation performance that makes the player think that the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times. First, the ready-to-win effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variable effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special variation presentation, characters of ``sorry'' suggesting that the result of the special pattern lottery is lost are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player is made to think that the second special pattern lottery executed in the chance zone was lost. In other words, in the first half period of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the ready-to-win performance with expectation of winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with the performance result indicating the failure.

After that, in the second half period (about 30 seconds) of the special variable performance, a variable performance (special second half performance) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured to vary its effect mode according to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations. For example, when the special figure 2 reserved balls are secured, as shown in FIG. A special second half production is executed. That is, in this control example, the type of special symbol variation to be executed after the second special symbol variation being executed is terminated is discriminated as the special variation performance based on the number of special symbol reservations, and the performance mode of the special second half performance is set in the performance mode corresponding to the discrimination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more strongly that a plurality of special symbol variations are executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the special second half performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone (see FIG. 125(b)), it is configured to vary the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the second half period in correspondence with the number of special symbols 2 that have already been acquired. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the special variation effect is executed, if neither the special figure 2 reserved ball nor the special figure 1 reserved ball is secured, the temporary stop display of the 3rd symbol shown in FIG. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only in a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is secured, so that it is possible to make the player think more strongly that the special symbol variations are executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a presentation mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol to be executed during the second half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot. As described above, in this control example, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped, so it is difficult to accurately determine the number of temporary stops. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed to make the player think that the temporary stop display has been performed five times or more, or to make the player think that a part of the temporary stop display is the stop display and make him think that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached 5 times or more even though the temporary stop display is actually made five times or more, and the enjoyment of predicting the performance result can be provided to the player.

In addition, other configurations may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect, for example, a display mode indicating the number of times of temporary stop display for allowing the player to easily grasp the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol change. , effect of the third pattern, etc.) may be configured to vary in stages. Further, it is also possible to display a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again (for example, the first time, the second time) at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the special variation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured, the characters "Chance zone end" are displayed in the sub display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm is the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol fluctuates in the horizontal direction). After making you think, the effect result of the special variation effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stop-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the above-described special variation performance is executed in part of the second special symbol variation in the normal state, and in other cases, one variation performance is performed for one second special symbol variation. Therefore, when a plurality of (maximum 4) special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired in the normal figure per game, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special variation effect for a long unnecessarily long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game, and FIG. (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the variable probability jackpot game.

In this control example, when a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a normal state is a jackpot game (variable probability jackpot game) in which a variable probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the variable probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is difficult to set. Specifically, in the probability variable jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds, and in the normal jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 15 seconds. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period (before the variable probability state is set) that the contents of the game change greatly (shift from the normal state to the variable probability state) through the jackpot game. In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game can be notified to the player using a long ending period.

Further, in this control example, as described above, even when the variable probability jackpot game is executed, the variable probability state is not set unless the balls that have won the variable prize winning device 65 flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). Therefore, when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variable big winning game, the time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set like the normal big winning game without setting the variable probability state after the completion of the variable probability big winning game.

In this case, there is a problem that if the notification performance indicating the setting of the variable probability state is executed in the ending period of the variable probability jackpot game, the performance contents of the notification performance and the actually set game state are different, which makes the player feel dissatisfied. Furthermore, when the performance mode of the notification performance executed in the ending period (17 seconds) of the probability variable jackpot game is switched to the performance mode of the notification performance executed in the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, the length of the actual ending period and the performance period of the notification performance are different, and there is a problem that the notification performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed.

Therefore, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of the jackpot game. Then, the effect mode of the notification effect to be executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when the normal jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect that is executed during the jackpot ending period, the letters "chance mode 100 times" suggesting that the time saving state is set are displayed for the first half period (8 seconds) (see FIG. 127 (a)). 127(c)), in which characters of "win and super chance GET in chance mode" are displayed.

On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect to be executed during the jackpot ending period, the characters "super chance mode 100 times" suggesting that the probability variable state is set are displayed in the first half period (10 seconds) (see FIG. 127(b)), and then, in the second half period (7 seconds), the characters "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" are displayed as a warning mode that is not directly related to the game content (see FIG. 127(d)). configured to run

In this control example, the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the above-described jackpot ending period is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing executed during the jackpot game since it is not necessary to execute the processing for determining the performance mode of the notification performance each time during the jackpot game where various control processing is executed.

Here, the case where the ball could not flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big winning game even though the variable probability big winning game was executed will be described. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 127(b), a process of hiding the characters "Super" and a process of switching the notification effect executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the normal winning game ending period (see FIG. 127(c)) are executed.

More specifically, as a display mode shown in FIG. 127(a), the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "Super" are displayed is different from the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "Chance Mode 100 times" are displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the ball has been made to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the period set with the same length as the second half period of the jackpot ending period, the presentation mode of the notification presentation can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period varies depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all the jackpot types without being limited to this. In addition, in this control example, the second half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all the jackpot types, but without being limited to this, the first half period of the jackpot ending period may be configured to have the same length for all the jackpot types. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the first half period of the jackpot may be the same length for the jackpot types A and B, and the second half period of the jackpots may be the same length for the jackpot types B and C.

In addition, in this control example, the ending period of different length is set according to the winning jackpot type, but it is not limited to this, and the length of the ending period may be changed according to the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the effects executed during the chance mode will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the high-probability state of normal symbols is set 100 times after the jackpot game ends. Further, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 50 times after the jackpot game ends. Further, although the detailed description will be given later, it is possible to set a case where a V notification effect for notifying that a ball in a big win game has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v is executed and a case where the V notification effect is not executed.

Then, when the V notification performance is executed during the jackpot game, a performance mode (special chance mode) is set for informing the player that the variable probability state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the V notification performance is not executed during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball does not pass through the specific region (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, or when the ball does not pass the specific region (V gate) 6. When the V notification performance is not executed in spite of passing 5v, a performance mode (chance mode) is set in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the chance mode is set as the effect mode, the characters "in chance mode" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the high probability state of the normal symbol ends is displayed (see FIG. 128(a)). The example shown in FIG. 128(a) shows the state in which the 20th special symbol variation is executed after the chance mode is set, and the character "80 times" indicating that the chance mode will end when the special symbol variation is performed 80 more times is displayed as the remaining period informing mode.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the performance mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state from various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game while expecting the current game state to be a game state (variable probability state) advantageous to the player.

In addition, only when the V notification effect is not executed during the big win game, even if the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game, the chance mode can be set as the performance mode. can be suppressed. In addition, when the V notification performance for notifying that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v is executed during the jackpot game, a super chance mode is set as a performance mode for indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big win game but the V notification effect is not executed, the chance mode is set as the effect mode after the end of the big win game. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) for the ball to pass through the specific region (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific region (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game, and whether or not the V notification effect has been executed. 127(b) and 127(d) during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a super chance mode may be set as an effect mode after the jackpot game ends.

By constructing in this way, even when the V information performance is not executed during the big winning game, the possibility of setting the super chance mode can be left, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the big winning game is finished.

As described above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the performance mode set after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving state is set as the game state and the variable probability state is set. Then, regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period of the period during which the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues is displayed. That is, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, the first advantageous game state (probability variable state) and the second advantageous game state (time reduction state) can be set as advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the first advantageous game state continues for a predetermined first period (period until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times after the jackpot game ends), and the second advantageous game state lasts longer than the above-described first period. The game machine is configured so as to continue for two periods (period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game), is configured to set the second advantageous game state until the second period elapses when the first period elapses after the first advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and is configured to set the normal state when the second period elapses, regardless of whether or not the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the period (second period) until the end of the advantageous gaming state can be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues. Furthermore, in this control example, in a state in which the remaining period of the second period (the remaining period of the chance mode) is set, a game state suggesting performance for suggesting to the player whether the current game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state can be executed using the notification mode (display mode) of the remaining period notification.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128(b), when the chance mode is set in a state where the variable probability state is set and a predetermined notification condition is met, a game state suggesting effect (displayed in white in FIG. 128(b)) in which the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is varied is executed. In the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, a comment "expectation for big win UP" is displayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which game state is set among the advantageous game states while informing the player of the period until the end of the advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as the display mode shown in FIG.

By constructing in this way, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that the probability variable state is set, information about winning a big win) can be displayed using the same display mode during the chance mode indicating the period during which the advantageous game state advantageous to the player continues, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand presentation. In addition, even when the time-saving state is actually set, since a display mode that is likely to be displayed when the variable probability state is set based on the winning of the jackpot can be displayed, the player can be made to think that the variable probability state is set at a rate higher than the designed value, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

In addition, it may be configured to execute an effect in the chance mode using a technical concept different from the technical concept of this control example described above. For example, when the chance mode is set in the variable probability state and the information that the jackpot is won or the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball contains information that the jackpot is won, a suggestion effect for suggesting that the currently set gaming state is a time saving state (for example, the display mode of the remaining period notification is displayed differently from FIGS. 128(a) and (b). It may be configured so as to execute a display mode (a display mode in which Kanji numerals are displayed). As a result, in the advantageous game state, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a jackpot during the time-saving state which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the variable probability state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, since the rate at which the variable probability state is set as the game history can be shown to be lower than the actual rate, the game can be played while making the players expect that the variable probability state will be set in the next big winning game.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b), in the first control example, the currently set game state can be suggested to the player by varying the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period during which the chance mode continues (remaining period), so that the player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode can easily comprehend the game state suggesting effect suggesting the currently set game state. The suggestive effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode, for example, a first display mode (e.g., characters of "chance") that is easier to display when the variable probability state is set than when the time saving state is set, or a second display mode (e.g., characters of "pinch"), which is easier to display when the time saving state is set than when the variable probability state is set, may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. By varying the display mode of the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 81, the game state suggesting effect may be executed.

In addition, in this first control example, both the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured to end when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. However, for example, the above-described configuration of the chance mode may be used in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the high-probability state of the special symbols continues until the next big win game is executed. In this case, when a time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set as the continuation period of the chance mode, the remaining period until the high probability state of the normal pattern ends (the period until the time saving state ends) is notified by the remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has passed, when the time saving state is set, an effect of notifying that it has shifted to the normal state is performed and confirmed. When the variable state is set, it is possible to execute the performance of displaying the characters "congratulations" as a display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbols continues until the next big win game is executed, that is, the remaining period for which the variable probability state continues is the period until the next big win, and to display the characters "congratulations" when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied during the period in which the chance mode is set.

That is, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) that is updated at any time corresponding to the remaining period of the chance mode that is updated every time the special symbol lottery is executed, a display mode that only indicates that the remaining period of the chance mode exists, that is, a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the number of remaining special symbol selections that can be executed during the chance mode, such as the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. For example, a remaining period notification mode may be used in which the length of the remaining period of the chance mode can be roughly notified by changing the display color. Furthermore, a plurality of remaining period information modes may be configured to be displayed, and by combining the display modes of the displayed plurality of remaining period information modes, the player may grasp the length of the remaining period of the chance mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, description will be given of the effect executed when the player operates the operation means during the chance mode. In this control example, when the player executes a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the details of the operation and the operation timing. Although detailed description is omitted, an operation effect of changing the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and a guidance notification for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 as part of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and when the player operates the frame button 22, an operation effect of executing a different effect than when the player does not operate the frame button 22, and an operation effect of executing the effect of the third pattern display device 8. It is configured such that an operation effect or the like is executed for enlivening the variable effect executed in one main display area Dm. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game other than the action of shooting the ball, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Here, among the operation effects described above, the contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when an advantageous gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) is set, it is configured so that different variation times can be selected according to the number of special symbol variations after the advantageous gaming state is set. Specifically, the period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations is “1st to 20th” after the advantageous gaming state is set is the first period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) is likely to be selected, the period “21st to 49th” is the second period in which a longer fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set, and only the “50th” is a specific period in which a specific fluctuation time (for example, 20 seconds) is set. , "51st time to 100th time" is configured to be the third period in which the fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) similar to the second period is likely to be set.

In other words, during a predetermined period (first period) after the chance mode is set, that is, during the predetermined period after the end of the big win game, the special symbol variation is likely to be executed in a short change time. As a result, the next big winning game may have been executed as part of the previous big winning game. It is possible to make the player think that, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described second period and third period, the special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and the special symbol variation with a longer variation time is more likely to be performed than in the first period. Thus, in the chance mode, it is possible to secure a period for executing a suggestive performance for suggesting whether the currently set game state during one special pattern variation is the time saving state or the probability variable state. In addition, during a specific period (the 50th special pattern variation after the advantageous game state is set), the special pattern variation for a specific variation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and the suggestive performance for 20 seconds is performed for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state is (has been) set to the player.

In this way, by making it possible to select a different variation time according to the number of executions of special symbol variation, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each number of variations using an appropriate period.

FIG. 129(a) is a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode, the normal state is set internally, and is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display effect displayed in FIG. 129(a). In this control example, during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and by pressing (operating) the frame button 22 by the player, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are alternately switched and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm in a display mode (shown with an arrow pointing in the button pressing direction) indicating that the icon HR10 is in an operable state. When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the display is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode" as shown in FIG. 129(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the contents of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from setting of the time-saving state and variable probability state to the end of the 20th special pattern fluctuation), the background image is not switched (difficult to display). That is, if the background image is switched and displayed in a high-speed variation period in which a short variation time (5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of one special symbol variation, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 frequently changes, making it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery. However, if all the player's operations on the frame buttons 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed instead of switching display of the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the characters "special mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the player is notified that the current high-speed fluctuation period is in progress. During this ``special mode'', a special pattern variation set to a variation time of 5 seconds is executed regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, and the variation performance of the third pattern is also performed exclusively for the ``special mode''. Then, the icon HR10 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm even during the "special mode", and when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG.

In this way, even when the player performs the same operation (depression of the frame button 22), by making the performance contents of the operation performance to be executed different depending on the operation timing, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 at various timings to play the game. Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a) or FIG. 130(a), the guidance display (icon HR10) for guiding the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 is made the same, and when the player performs the same operation (presses the frame button 22), the effect contents of the operation effect to be executed are varied depending on the operation timing. Therefore, until the player actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, it is difficult for the player to understand what kind of operation performance is to be executed, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 more willingly.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, in this control example, a plurality of operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the ratio at which each operation effect is selected is varied according to the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state depending on the appearance ratio of each operation effect executed during the high speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is repeatedly executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, in this control example, the switching display of the background image is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied even during the high-speed fluctuation period. Specifically, when the second special symbol reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) obtained during the high-speed variation period contains the information to win the jackpot, the variation time of the big hit special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball containing the information to win the jackpot and the special symbol variation executed before the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired before the special figure 2 reserved ball containing the information to win the jackpot). When the player presses a frame button 22 in a state where the condition for executing the special variation performance is satisfied, the background image currently displayed (for example, sea mode) is switched to a dedicated special background image (for example, space mode). That is, when the switching display of the background image is executed based on the player's depression of the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning the jackpot is not increased, and the player can be actively pushed down the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22, the background image can be switched and displayed. This special operation (long press) is determined to be performed when the player continuously presses the frame button 22 for two seconds, and the period until it is determined that the operation is performed is longer than the normal operation (press) on the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the operation is harder to perform frequently than the normal operation (pressing), it is possible to prevent the background image from being switched and displayed frequently even if the switching display of the background image is configured to be executable. In this control example, a long-pressing operation is used as a special operation in which the operation time is longer than that of the normal operation. However, the operation is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22, an operation means having a plurality of operation units (for example, a cross key) may be provided as operation means, and a special operation performed by operating the plurality of operation units in a predetermined order may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the effect executed during the "super chance mode" in which the player is informed that the variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 131(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents when the first special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode", and FIG. 131(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents when the second special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode".

In this control example, when a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed. Then, when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, a variable probability state is set with a high probability (a variable probability big win game in which a ball can easily flow down to a specific gate is always executed during the big win game). Then, the variable probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state can be looped at a high probability as long as the second special symbol lottery wins the big win (the probability of the big win in the high probability state of the special symbols is 1/50) before the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly win the big win in the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, even in the state where the variable probability state is set, for example, when the variable probability big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and immediately after the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the special figure 2 reserved ball is not acquired and the special figure 1 reserved ball is acquired, the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability variable big winning game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability variable big winning game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. In other words, even if the variable probability state is set, there is a case where the variable probability state cannot be looped when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, if the player early determines that the winning jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed, the player's willingness to play will decrease. A double ready-to-win performance, which is a variable performance to bring the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the big win and the ready-to-win state at the same time, is easily executed. More specifically, when the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the double reach effect described above is always executed (see FIG. 131(a)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent execution of the ready-to-win performance in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal big win is in the ready-to-win state when winning the normal big win in the first special pattern lottery executed during the variable probability state, and to prevent the player from predicting in advance that the normal big win will be won during the variable period of the special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in this control example, during the "super chance mode", the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same manner as during the above-described "chance mode", and the player is configured to make it difficult to grasp the number of reserved special symbols. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters of "under super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the current state is in the variable probability state.

Here, in the super chance mode, double reach shown in FIG. 131 (a) (the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to the normal jackpot are in the ready state at the same time Double reach performance) is executed. In the control example, even in the variation performance executed in correspondence with the second special symbol variation, the double reach performance shown in FIG. 131(a) is configured to be executable. In other words, the variable performance corresponding to the second special pattern lottery in which the variable probability big win game is always executed when the big win is won, is constituted so as to be able to execute the double reach performance using the third pattern corresponding to the normal win.

By configuring in this way, even if the double reach performance shown in FIG. 127(a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily discriminate whether the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the double ready-to-win effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is shown in FIG. 131 (b).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the probability variable big winning game will always be executed when the special symbol lottery being executed has won the big winning. In addition, even when the double reach performance is executed as the variable performance corresponding to the first special pattern lottery, the game can be played while expecting the player to be promoted to the variable probability double reach on the way.

In this control example, a variable condition is set as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach effect being executed to a variable reach effect to the variable reach effect when the variation mode of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one round has passed). However, the variable condition is not limited to this. may be set, or a variable condition may be set that is satisfied when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that the player can operate is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this control example, when the variable condition is established, the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbols (represented by triangle marks in the drawing) are erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed sequentially from the left as the upper symbol row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed sequentially from the left as the lower symbol row Z3. Even in the case of such constitution, the number of reach of the third pattern corresponding to the variable probability big win can be increased in the triple reach performance rather than the double reach performance, so that the player can be visually notified of the high possibility of winning the probability variable big win in the special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-described technical idea may be applied to the variable performance executed in the normal state, for example, when the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach performance in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the ready-to-win state, the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state may be switched to the type of the third symbol to correspond to the probability variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the ready-to-win state may be increased. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting a more advantageous performance result to be provided until the variable performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this control example and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of production when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation production is executed is set as the variation production of the third symbol, and FIG.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern obtained by summing the basic time and the addition time is defined. A period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common variation pattern, and a period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific variation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, as an effect mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the period from the display of the ready-to-win state to the stop display of the third symbol is configured to vary according to the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state. Then, the third pattern corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. By constructing in this way, the third pattern variation performance (the third pattern variation performance executed corresponding to the basic time) executed during a predetermined period after the third pattern starts to fluctuate can be shared.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the case of the non-ready-to-win fluctuation production, since the addition time is not set, a common fluctuation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper symbol row Z1 is stop-displayed at a timing (for example, 5-second elapsed timing) after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third symbol fluctuation production, and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stop-displayed in a stop display mode in which the reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later, the lottery result. The middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a stopped display mode indicating that the is out. After that, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is finally displayed after a stop display period (determined time) of 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), when the ready-to-win variation performance is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common variation pattern for 30 seconds, a presentation mode is set until 5 seconds have passed since the ready-to-win state. In other words, the effect mode from when the ready-to-win state is reached to when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one turn is set as the common variation pattern. After that, an effect mode (ready-to-win pattern, stop pattern) is set according to the added time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 133(a) shows the flow of the ending period targeting the normal jackpot, FIG. 133(b) shows the flow of the effect for the variable probability big win, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot, and the ED period is set to 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the variable probability jackpot. And, it is configured such that an ending effect divided into a first half period and a second half period is executed (see FIG. 127).

In this control example, a performance mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, whether or not the player has won a V prize (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) during the jackpot period is discriminated at the start timing of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the discrimination result.

First, with reference to FIG. 133(a), the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the normal jackpot game is executed will be described. In this control example, in order to suppress the increase in the processing load during the jackpot game due to the complication of various processes executed during the jackpot game, the performance mode of the performance (ending display performance) to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the execution of the round game (game in which prize balls can be obtained) during the jackpot game (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game).

When the normal jackpot game is executed, the display mode of the ending performance (see FIGS. 127(a) and (c)) is set for showing the player that a 'chance mode' is set (a time saving state is set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. In the normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a preset ending effect is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the variable probability jackpot game is executed will be described. When the probability variable jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the performance mode of the ending performance is determined based on the determination result. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute a V notification effect in which a guidance notification that guides the player to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a V passage notification that notifies the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. A display mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and 127(d)) for indicating to the player that the "super chance mode" is set (probability variable state is set) is set as a landing effect after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V notification effect is not to be executed, as the ending effect, a display mode (a display mode in which the display of "super" is deleted from the display mode of FIG. 127(b) and a display mode of FIG. 127(c)) for indicating to the player that the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game is set.

When the V notification effect is executed, a comment "Aim for V" and a schematic diagram schematically showing the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the start of the V round (first round) game. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the V passage notification is executed in which the comment "V acquired!" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) in spite of the execution of the guidance notification, the emphasized guidance notification is executed to guide the player to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v with more emphasis. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the V round game is finished, the above-mentioned V passage notification is executed, and when the V round game is finished without passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the character "I'm sorry I didn't get V!" is displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, it is determined whether or not to replace the display mode of the preset ending effect based on the actual game result of the V-round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined to execute the V notification effect at the start of the jackpot game, the display mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and 127(d)) indicating that the "super chance mode" is set as the ending effect is set in advance. Therefore, when the ball is passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending effect is executed without switching the display mode of the ending effect. On the other hand, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so the display mode of the ending effect is changed to the display mode for indicating that the "chance mode" is set. executed.

In addition, when the V information performance is not executed, the V information performance is not executed during the big win game as in the normal jackpot game, and the execution of the V round game and the passing of the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v cannot be grasped from various performance displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the big win game is executed. Then, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. As a result, it is possible to provide a state in which the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game although the variable probability state is actually set.

Furthermore, when the ``chance mode'' is set in the state where the variable probability state is set, the V notification performance is not executed during the big winning game (during the variable probability big winning game), so that it is difficult to grasp in advance that the variable probability state is set by the performance during the big winning game. In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends despite the fact that the variable probability state is actually set. However, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v but the V passage notification is not executed, the "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game is finished. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the V notification effect can be executed even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it easy to cause the phenomenon that the V passing information is not executed in spite of the execution of the V information performance, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the 'chance mode' is set after the big winning game in which the V information performance is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first specific period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times) is set in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is predetermined after the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a predetermined second specific period (a period until the special pattern variation is executed 50 times) is set for a high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game is finished. Then, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), "chance mode" is set as the production mode (see FIG. 134(b)). In addition, when the game state set after the jackpot game is a probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), according to the production contents during the jackpot game (according to the presence or absence of V notification production), The production mode set after the jackpot game ends is changed, and as shown in FIG. In other words, when the display mode (see FIG. 127(b)) of entering the "super chance mode" is displayed as the ending effect, the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode (see the display a of FIG. 134(a)), and during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), it is not notified that the probability variable state is set, that is, when the display mode of entering the "chance mode" (see FIG. 127(a)) is displayed as the ending effect, A "chance mode" is set as the mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in the display a of FIG. 134(a), when the ``super chance mode'' is set after the end of the jackpot game, the ``super chance mode'' continues until the variable probability state ends, and when the game state shifts from the variable probability state to the time saving state, the display is switched to the ``chance mode''. In this case, while the "super chance mode" is set, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), the period until the variable probability state ends as the remaining period mode (up to 50 times) is displayed in the small display area Ds2. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the game state most advantageous to the player continues. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131 (a), after the variable probability state ends, it may be configured to execute a pre-notification effect that notifies the player in advance that the time saving state is set 50 times. The remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time saving state continues to be set later may be displayed in a display mode different from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state (for example, displaying "50 times" in black). As a result, even after the variable probability state ends, it is possible to notify the player in advance that a game state (time saving state) more advantageous than the normal state is set.

In addition, when the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probability variable state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time saving state may be displayed, and each remaining period mode may be decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variation is executed. 0 times) is displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state is first subtracted, and when the remaining period of the variable probability state becomes 0 and the state shifts to the time saving state, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time saving state may be subtracted. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to notify in advance to a player playing a game in the variable probability state that a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be set after the variable probability state is finished.

134(a) and FIG. 134(b), the effect during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, a chance mode is set as an effect mode when part of the case where the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, the game state suggesting effect for changing the notification mode of the remaining period notification is executed. The game state suggesting effect is set so that the chance mode during the variable probability state has a higher appearance rate than the chance mode during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, the mode of the operation performance (the performance executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) executed during the chance mode is configured to be variable according to the operation timing and operation method of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), during the chance mode when the time saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times. (After the 21st special pattern variation frequency), it is configured to be able to execute the operation presentation of "background mode transition" for shifting the background mode. In addition, as an operation method, when a long press "long press" of the button is executed, during the high speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation performance of "background mode transition" for shifting the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 times to 50 times of the special symbol fluctuation (during the second period), the operation production of "state suggestion" suggesting the currently set game state can be executed. In order to suggest the game state set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)), the operation performance of "past state suggestion" can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(b), during the chance mode when the variable probability state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation production of "reach suggestion" to suggest during the third symbol fluctuation, "state suggestion" to suggest the currently set game state, or "background mode transition" to shift the background mode. , and in a period (during the second period) when the number of times of special pattern variation is 21 to 50 times, the operation performance of ``background mode transition'' or ``suggestion of state'' can be performed, and after that (the number of times of special symbol variation is 51 or later), the operation performance of ``background mode transition'' can be performed. In addition, as an operation method, when a button long press "long press" is executed, regardless of the number of special pattern variations, the operation effect of "background mode transition" for shifting the background mode is configured to be executable.

As described above, in this control example, when the time saving state is set or when the variable probability state is set, the "chance mode" can be set as the production mode. According to the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the chance mode, the duration of the chance mode (100 times of the time saving) is divided into a plurality of periods, and the operation production mode executed when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) for each set game state and period. configured to be different. As a result, when the chance mode is set, the player can predict the currently set game state based on the contents of the operation performance executed by the operation performance, so that the player can be motivated to execute the game by operating the operation means.

As described above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if the operation of "normal pressing" is performed on the frame button 22, the operation effect of "background mode transition" is configured to be less likely to be executed than in other periods. A period from the execution of the second special symbol variation after the end of the winning game to the execution of the 20th special symbol variation may be set as the high-speed variation period.

With this configuration, for example, during the first special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, the comment ``You cannot change the background mode from the next variation! Please select your desired background now'' is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notice mode for notifying that the high-speed variation period will be set. It is possible to suppress the situation. Furthermore, as a guidance mode for explaining the game contents of the ``chance mode'' to the player using one special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, the comment ``the chance mode may be in a variable probability state!

As in the first control example, when the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special symbol fluctuation after the end of the big win, the background mode in the "chance mode" can be selected during the game period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), and when the "chance mode" is set, the player is informed that the background mode cannot be changed for a predetermined period (during the high-speed fluctuation period). .

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time every time the ball passes through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a winning game (normal winning game) in which an electric accessory 640a attached to a second ball entrance 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example).

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern (ordinary pattern fluctuation time) is varied according to the set probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state), and when the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern is set, the normal pattern fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds, and when the high probability state of the normal pattern (probable variable state, time reduction state) is set, the normal pattern fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to largely deviate the frequency at which the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal symbol low probability state and the normal pattern per game per frequency in the normal symbol high probability state. That is, the normal pattern high probability state can increase the number of normal pattern lotteries (general pattern lottery) that can be executed per unit time by shortening the normal pattern variation time in the high probability state of the normal pattern compared to the low probability state of the normal pattern, and furthermore, it is possible to make it easier to win and win in the executed normal pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the normal pattern winning game when the normal pattern high probability state is set, while making it difficult to execute the normal pattern winning game when the normal pattern low probability state is set.

In this control example, the high-probability state of normal symbols is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability state of normal symbols. For example, irrespective of the probability state of normal symbols, the normal pattern fluctuation time of the same time (for example, 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. As a result, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute a normal pattern winning game during a normal pattern low probability state (normal state), in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time required for the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer in the normal state than in the time reduction state, the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) is difficult to be executed from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). When the game state shifts to a high probability state), it is possible to prevent the shift to the time saving state during the execution of a long-time normal pattern variation (normal pattern winning game more disadvantageous to the player than during the time saving state) executed in the normal state, and the setting of a long period during which the normal pattern lottery in the time saving state is not executed in spite of the setting of the time saving state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has various devices arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference in the game value obtained by the player (it is difficult to occur) even if a game (left-handed game) in which balls flow down to the left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 is executed or a game (right-handed game) in which balls flow down to the right side area is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertical line of the central portion of the game board 13. In the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there is a first ball entrance 64 that can trigger a lottery for a first special symbol when a ball enters the unit. 40, an electric accessory 640a which is opened in a normal pattern winning game executed when winning a normal pattern lottery, and a variable winning device 65 which is provided at a lower position of the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a big winning game executed when a special pattern lottery is won are arranged.

Balls shot in a left-handed game flow down the left side area and pass through a through gate 67 provided in the left side area at a rate of 1/2, and both the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and the balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward a first ball inlet 64 provided in the lower side area by nails planted in the game board 13.例文帳に追加Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters two general ball entrances 63 . In this control example, approximately 1/50 of the balls flowing down the left side region are configured to enter either of the two general ball entrances 63, and when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (privileges) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is constructed so that one ball can enter in 15 balls, and when the balls enter, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured such that when the electric accessory 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), few balls enter, and in the state where the electric accessory 640 is open (shown in black in FIG. 2), one out of every two balls launched in a left-handed game and flowing down the left side area receives one ball. Configure. Also, the variable winning device 65 is constructed so that almost no balls enter when the big win game is not executed, and two balls enter about three balls during the big win game, and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

Here, the variable winning device 65 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is a variable ball entry means which is opened in a big winning game executed when a special pattern lottery is won, and is constructed so that a ball winning to the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game passes through a specific area (V gate) provided in the internal area of the variable winning device 65, so that a high probability state of special symbols can be set after the big winning game is finished.

In addition, according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is possible to execute a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) in which the balls that enter the variable prize winning device 65 easily pass through the specific region (V gate) and a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the ball that has won the variable prize winning device 65 easily passes through the specific region (V gate). A jackpot (game) in which a ball can easily flow down to a (V-gate) is called a variable-probability jackpot (game), and a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult for a ball that has entered a variable winning device 65 to pass through a specific gate, that is, a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through a specific area (V-gate) even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game is called a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if the variable probability big winning game is executed, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the big winning game, the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the big winning game is finished. That is, in this control example, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is not determined. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the round game (V round game) that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) most easily is executed. Therefore, the game state set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until the V-round game ends. In this way, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the game result during the jackpot game, so that the player can play a game for acquiring various benefits (prize ball, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when using the above -mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set the news of the news (for example, at the start of the jackpot gaming), and the control processing of the ball cannot be set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot gaming), and control processing related to the outing is performed. There was a problem that the control process of pachinko machine 10 had to be complicated during the densely executed jackpot, and the control process of pachinko machine 10 was complicated.

On the other hand, in this control example, when a variable probability jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the performance mode of the notification performance (at the start of the jackpot game). When the ball is on, the notification performance of the performance mode set in advance is executed, and only when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate), the performance mode of the notification performance is switched. In this way, when a normal game is played during a big win game, the performance mode of the information mode is set in advance on the assumption of a game state that is likely to be set after the end of the big win game, and only when it is determined that an unexpected game state is set, the performance mode of the information mode is switched, whereby the frequency of execution of the control processing for setting the performance mode of the information performance during the big win game can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is differentiated between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the probability variable jackpot game advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. Thus, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set (during the big winning game). On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

Thus, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, there is a problem that if the performance mode of the jackpot ending period is simply changed to the performance mode executed in the ending period of the normal win game, the notice performance with a sense of incongruity is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode which is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) in the probability variable jackpot game is prepared in advance, it is necessary to store image data (performance data) for the performance mode in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot), and when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the ending period of the normal winning game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification performance that does not give the player a sense of incongruity without providing a dedicated performance mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the variable probability big winning game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, so that the effect mode of the notification effect executed when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the variable probability jackpot game is configured to switch. A notification performance executed for a period longer than the period may be executed, or a round performance executed during the final round period of the big winning game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the big win ending period is set, and then the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual big winning ending period by executing the notification performance.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically. The ratio of balls entering the 1 ball entrance 64 may be configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game, so that the left-handed game is more difficult to acquire prize balls than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is more likely to acquire prize balls than the left-handed game, but the first special symbol lottery is made difficult to be executed. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, i.e., during the execution of the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method, and in the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (the game during the time-saving state or the probability variable state), the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled in both the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 and the right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80, and the through gate 67 in the left area is configured so that 1/2 of the ball flowing down the left area of the game board 13 can pass through. Also, the through gate 67 in the right area is configured so that 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area of the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, a variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of ``O'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of ``X'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using part of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 due to the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but it is not limited to this, and only some of the balls may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80 (below the electric accessory 640), a variable winning device 65 having an opening width of about 50 mm is arranged so that both the ball launched by the left-handed game and flowing down the left-hand side area and the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right-hand side area can win. Thus, by providing the variable winning device 65 having a wide opening width, the variable winning device 65 can win both the ball flowing down the left side of the electric accessory 640 in the left-handed game and the ball flowing down the right side of the electric accessory 640 in the right-handed game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 120, a specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow-down path of the ball that has won the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 120(a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable prize winning device 65, and is configured so that a ball that has flowed down on the opening/closing door 65b in the open state and won the specific prize opening 65a will flow down in the horizontal direction.

Specifically, the ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning hole 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the first opening 65a1. Also, the ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning hole 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2.

Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, ball detection sensors (65s1, 65s2) for detecting winning balls in the variable winning device 65 are provided, and when the ball detection sensors detect the balls, payout control for paying out 15 balls as prize balls is executed. In this way, an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and entered the variable winning device 65 can pass, and an opening (second opening 65b1) through which a ball that has flowed down the right area and entered the variable winning device 65 can pass, and a ball detection sensor is provided for each opening. can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120(b), the flow of the ball that has won the specific prize winning opening 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the ball passing through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1, flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e, and flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

A discharge port 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which balls that enter the discharge port 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that have entered the discharge port 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and a discharge port 65h2 into which a ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v enters is provided at the downstream end. A detection sensor for detecting a passing ball is provided in the specific area (V gate), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a predetermined period during the big winning game, the detection result is stored, and when the big winning game ends, the game state after the big winning game is set by referring to the stored result.

Here, the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y during the jackpot game will be described. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V-solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137) (not shown). When the V-solenoid 209a is not energized (OFF state), the switching valve 65y maintains a closed state (see FIG. 120B) for causing the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the third flow path 65e3. It is configured to maintain an open state for flowing down to the flow path 65e4.

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an off state, and is drive-controlled so as to be in an on state only for a predetermined period during the jackpot game. Specifically, it is driven and controlled so that it is turned on when a specific round game (first round game) among a plurality of round games executed during a jackpot game is started, and is turned off when a specific round game (first round game) is finished, or when the game time of the specific round game has passed a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds). That is, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game.

By constructing in this way, only when a big winning game is executed (when big winning control is executed), a ball can be won in the variable winning device 65, and the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 can be made to flow down to a specific area (V gate) 65v. Also, the privilege given based on the passing of the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v (the setting of the high probability state of the special pattern) is given at the end timing of the big win game (processing executed at the end of the big win game), so even if the player cheats to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v at the timing other than the big win game, the player is not given the privilege.

In this control example, in the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game, it is configured to execute switching control for switching the switching valve 65y according to a predetermined rule based on the timing at which a specific round game is started, but it may be configured to execute switching control based on other triggers. Alternatively, the number of winning balls may be measured by the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and the switching control may be executed when the measurement result reaches a specific number. When the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number as a trigger for execution of the switching control, the number of balls in the whole jackpot game or the number of balls in round game units may be the object of discrimination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game the state in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) is set.

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when the jackpot game is executed and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 65b may be changed for each jackpot type. With this configuration, even when the same switching control is executed for the switching valve 65y regardless of the type of big win, a big win game in which the ball can easily reach the specific region (V gate) 65v and a big win game in which it is difficult for the ball to pass can be executed during a period in which a state in which the ball can easily pass through the specific region (V gate) is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port for communication with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover that are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is cut into the box base side and the box cover side when the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102 or when the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 positioned at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). are The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 137) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the game flow in this control example will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and an initial state (state at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10 or RAM). In the state after the power is turned on while the erase switch 122 is operated (depressed), the normal state is set.

Then, during the normal state, a game mainly including the first special symbol lottery executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed. In the normal state in which the low probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of the big win of the special pattern is set to 1/200, and when the big win is won, either 'big win A' (selection rate 1/2) or 'jackpot B' (selection rate 1/2) is selected as the big win classification. When ``jackpot A'' is selected, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) is executed during the jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v, and when ``jackpot B'' is selected, a jackpot game (ordinary jackpot game) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed during the jackpot game.

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this variable probability state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, the end condition is established and the state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery reaches 50 times in a state where the variable probability state is set, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the time saving state before the 51st special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, the process of shifting the game state from the probability variable state to the time saving state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation corresponding to the 50th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. The game state may be shifted just before the execution of the first special symbol lottery (the execution condition of the 51st special symbol lottery is satisfied, but the special symbol lottery is not executed).

Since the variable probability state is a high probability state of normal patterns, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be opened by a normal pattern winning game than a normal state of a low probability state of normal patterns, and a game mainly based on the second special pattern lottery is executed. In the variable probability state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the big win probability of the special pattern is set to 1/50, and when the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, one of ``jackpot C'' (selection rate 3/10), ``jackpot D'' (selection rate 4/10), and ``jackpot E'' (selection rate 3/10) is selected as the jackpot type.

The ``jackpot C'' is a jackpot type in which a 4-round probability variable big winning game is executed, the ``jackpot D'' is a jackpot type in which a 7-round probability variable big winning game is executed, and the ``jackpot E'' is a jackpot type in which a 16-round probability variable big winning game is executed. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the execution probability of the probability variable jackpot game.

Further, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, 7 rounds are always played, and when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, round games of 8.8 rounds (4th round: 30%, 7th round: 40%, 16th round: 30%) are performed on average. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. When a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that a 4-round game is executed, so the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big win game can be minimized when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game.

Next, the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) will be described. When a ``jackpot B'' is won in a first special pattern lottery executed in a normal state, when the number of special pattern lotteries executed in a variable probability state exceeds 50 times, or when a ball cannot be passed to a specific area (V gate) 65v during a variable probability big winning game, a time saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of times of the special pattern lottery executed after the end of the previous big win game reaches 100 times or when a big win is won before reaching 100 times. That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot B is won), the time saving state is set during the period from the end of the big win game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times). On the other hand, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the variable probability state exceeds 50 times, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times after the variable probability state ends.

Since this time-saving state is a game state in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set in the same manner as the above-described variable probability state, the electric accessory 640 is easily opened and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Also, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, from the point of view of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a jackpot probability lower than that in the variable probability state, and the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the variable probability state. That is, from the point of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. In this control example, the easiness of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same in the variable probability state and the time saving state, but it is not limited to this.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 137, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device.

Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 138, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are used in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the special symbol jackpot type, the stop type selection counter (C3) used for selecting the stop type of the special symbol, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the variation pattern. A variation type counter CS1 used for selection is used.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of normal symbols are used for initial value setting of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering a first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to a ball entered into a second ball opening 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). 4, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively, and the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or among the various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, those having special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol classification to be executed next are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

In this control example, two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are used, but the number of special symbols may be one. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol may be configured to be executable at the same time (parallel). . Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is established, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery result of the special pattern is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but it is not limited to this. With such a configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In this case, a small winning type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the obtained value of the small winning type counter is configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area so as to be referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, when it is possible to win a small win in a special symbol lottery, for example, the transition contents of the game state based on the jackpot winning and the game state transition contents based on the small win may be configured to be different, for example, when the big win is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big win game, and further, based on the set big win type, a new game state can be set after the big win game ends, and when the small win is won, A small winning game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small winning game is completed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that the game rich in variations can be provided.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reservation areas (retained first area), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal pattern is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal pattern execution area, and the normal pattern fluctuation is started based on the stored various values.

Next, referring to FIG. 138, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The value of the random number that becomes the big win for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big winning set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). FIG. 140(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table that defines random numbers (determined values) for determining a big hit in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, "0 to 4" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as a big hit determination value, and other values ("5 to 999") are defined as out determination values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value, and other values ("20 to 999") are defined as the out determination values. That is, since the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 of "0 to 999", the probability of being determined as a big win is 1/200 (5 out of 1000) in the low probability state of special symbols, and the probability of being determined as a big win is 1/50 (20 out of 1000) in the high probability state of special symbols.

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but without being limited to this, the probability of winning the jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be different for each of at most four types of game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, ``big hit'' and ``loss'', are determined as the lottery result of the special pattern, but in addition to this, as the third lottery result, it may be configured so that ``small win'' can be determined as one type of ``loss''. When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. When the ``small win'' is one type of ``losing'', it is possible to give the player a prize ball in the small win game, but since the big win is not won, it is preferable that the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

As described above, when it is configured so as to be able to win a ``small win'' as a lottery result of special symbols, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the ``small winning'' may be defined in the first winning random number table 202a. By constructing in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed by the same processing, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case of executing the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery by different processing. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 141(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 141(a), this big win type selection table 202d has a special figure 1 big win table 202d1 that is referred to when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 big win table 202d2 that is referred to when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery.

First, with reference to FIG. 141(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the obtained first win type counter C2.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 49". This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 7 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game is finished. When the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after finishing the big winning game. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win A'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win A'' is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 7 rounds and a normal jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game is finished. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot B'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B'' is 50% (50/100).

That is, the two types of jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but differ in the ease with which the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It is configured so that techniques can be executed. Therefore, the "jackpot A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 in the first control example, as the second special symbol (special figure 2) jackpot type, "jackpot C" ~ "jackpot E" Three jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type. The "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after finishing the big winning game. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``big win C'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining the ``big win C'' is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after finishing the big winning game. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot D'', so when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot C'' is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". The ``jackpot E'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is a jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to ``100'' and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is set to ``50'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after finishing the big winning game. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the ``jackpot E'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining the ``jackpot E'' is 30% (30/100).

That is, three types of jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery are all executed as variable jackpot games, but the number of rounds of the jackpot games is made different, "jackpot E" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and "jackpot A" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As explained above, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variable probability big winning game is always executed, so that the game state set after the end of the big winning game is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery in which the variable probability big winning game is executed at a rate of 50%. In terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls obtainable during the jackpot game, the maximum obtainable number is larger in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum obtainable number is also smaller in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, the number of prize balls that can be acquired on average is defined to be larger in the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls obtainable under the minimum conditions, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other respects. In this control example, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are defined, but without being limited to this, various jackpot types can be set based on the same technical concept as each jackpot type that can be set in each control example described above.

In this control example, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the same number of rounds of the big win game is executed for all the big wins, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a different number of round games may be executed according to the selected big win type. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, the time saving state is set for the same period (100 times of time saving times) after the end of the jackpot game for all jackpots. Furthermore, according to the selected jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description continues. The movement type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal table 202b1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and a probability variable state or a time saving state are set. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is changed according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be varied.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 142(b) and 143. FIG. FIG. 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table referred to when a normal state is set as a game state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of special symbols is a big hit than when it is a loss, and different variation patterns are defined according to the type of special symbol lottery executed and the result of the executed special symbol lottery.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal table 202b1. In this normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the win/loss determination result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating either a basic time of 30 seconds or an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the addition time is configured to be set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. For example, if the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds"; If the additional time is "5 seconds" or "4", the additional time is "5.5 seconds"; if the additional time is "5", the additional time is "6 seconds"; if the additional time is "6", the additional time is "6.5 seconds"; if "7" is "7 seconds"; If the additional time is "9 seconds" and "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds"; if "15", the additional time is "10 seconds"; if "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds";

Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice ramp control device 113, the variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the ready-to-win pattern (type of the third symbol) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of the third pattern of the medium pattern row Z2, which is first visible to the player in the ready-to-win state, is always set to the specific third pattern (in this control example, the third pattern to which the number 1 is attached), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the additional time of 13 to 22 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the above-described normal pattern, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, in this control example, the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, when the number of seconds included in the addition command is "3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal ready-to-win effect (effect to stop and display after the middle pattern row Z2 fluctuates about one turn) is "13 to 22 seconds", the super ready-to-win effect (effect to stop and display after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about two times). ) is configured to run.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during the first predetermined period, and then the variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, the period in which the same performance mode is executed can be set based on the basic command (command including information indicating the basic time), and the variable performance after branching can be set based on the addition command (command including information indicating the addition time). Therefore, for example, even when the entire fluctuation time is the same, the voice lamp control device 113 side can easily set different fluctuation performances by only changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time in the fluctuation time.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) for executing the normal reach and the basic time (30 seconds) for executing the super reach are set to be the same, and the effect mode of the ready reach effect is varied according to the length of the variable time set as the additional time. 12 seconds” may be selected.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an additional time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, an effect is executed in which the variable effect of the third symbol once in the ready-to-reach state is switched to another variable effect. Therefore, even if the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is first visible to the player when the ready-to-reach condition is established, is configured to always be a specific third symbol (the third symbol to which the number 1 is attached in this control example), the middle symbol row Z does not make the player feel uncomfortable during the variation. Since the display order of the third pattern of 2 can be changed corresponding to the third pattern to be finally stopped, there is no need to set the type of the third pattern to be in a ready-to-win state by varying the addition time like the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the loss is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the loss without entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the addition time.

Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the variation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When this out of reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of 30 seconds of basic time and 3 to 22 seconds of additional time is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the above-described normal pattern, so detailed description will be omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is a loss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. When the result of the lottery is a loss, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed so that the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that makes a big win. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 side performs a correction process so that the third symbol shifted by one from the set content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is set. Thus, when the out-of-reach performance is executed, it is possible to easily set a performance mode in which the third pattern is stop-displayed (disappearance-stop display) in the vicinity of the third pattern that is the combination of the big win.

On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit/fail judgment is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a variation time of 40 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command showing a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command of a combination of a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when the basic command indicating the basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, as shown in FIG. 125(a), an effect mode is set to stop display (temporary stop display) of the third symbol. Then, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is out of special), the third pattern is fixed and displayed as it is, and the variation performance is terminated.

On the other hand, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is special ready-to-win), as shown in FIG. 125(b) and FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the contents of the table 202b2 for variable probability/reduction of working hours will be described. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation/time reduction table 202b2. The probability variable/time reduction table 202b2 is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected according to the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the high-probability state (probability variable state or time-saving state) of normal symbols is always set. Then, the set normal pattern high probability state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this control example, as the time-saving end conditions, a first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of special symbol fluctuations after the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set reaches 100 times, and a second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in the state where the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set. configured to migrate.

During the high-probability state (probability variable state, short-time state) of normal symbols, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the low-probability state (normal state) of normal symbols is set to be easily selected. Therefore, since the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with an efficient game (special symbol lottery game).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 time to 20 times" after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variation pattern (short variation) with the variation time of "5 seconds" is selected regardless of the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In other words, a predetermined period (period until special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times) after the setting of the high probability state of normal patterns becomes a high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which special symbol lottery is executed in a fluctuation time shorter than other periods. By setting the high-speed fluctuation period, the next big winning game can be easily executed in a short period of time after the end of the big winning game, so that the player can be made to think that the next big winning game is executed in relation to one big winning game, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed fluctuation period, since the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of ``5 seconds'' is always selected, it is possible to easily set the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) over a plurality of times of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in a state where a normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is set, there is a high possibility that the second special pattern reserved ball (special pattern 2 reserved ball) is not acquired at the time of the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot prize. ) is set, the special pattern lottery (special figure 2 lottery) using the special figure 2 reserved ball is likely to be obtained at the time of finishing the big win game executed based on the big win winning.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the normal design is set, the special design lottery of any design type (first special design, second special design) can be executed, so as shown in FIG. As a result, the same special pattern variation can be executed even when the special pattern lottery of any pattern type is executed, and the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) over a plurality of times of the special pattern lottery can be easily set.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, when the high-probability state of normal symbols is set, both the balls fired by the left-handed game and the balls fired by the right-handed game are configured to reach the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of 1 out of 2 balls. Therefore, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set, 100 seconds, which is a period until the end of the high speed variation period, i.e., the period until the 20th special symbol variation is completed (5 seconds×20 times), is set in advance as a high speed variation period, and continuous performance for 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance over 20 special symbol lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, the switching processing for switching the performance mode of the already set continuous performance can be executed, and the processing for executing the performance during the high-speed fluctuation period can be simplified.

Further, a determination means for determining whether or not to temporarily stop the continuous performance for 100 seconds set during the high-speed variation period may be provided, and, for example, when it is determined that the period from when the special symbol variation in execution is stopped to when the next special symbol variation is performed is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is interrupted, processing for temporarily stopping the continuous performance in execution may be executed. As a result, even when the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent only the continuous performance from proceeding ahead. In addition, an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) operable by the player is provided, and when a predetermined operation is executed with respect to the operation means, a process of temporarily stopping the continuous performance being executed may be executed.

In this control example, the same variation time (5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the high-speed variation period. In this case, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is set more easily when the special symbol lottery results in a big win than in the case when the big win is not won. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from the switching of the performance mode of the preset continuous performance for 100 seconds to the stop display of the special pattern showing the winning of the big win, so that the winning of the big win can be notified in the performance mode in which the player can fully grasp the result of the lottery, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, the high -speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) is divided into multiple periods, rather than setting a continuous production complexity in a batch, for example, the high -speed fluctuation period (first high -speed fluctuation period) (the first high -speed fluctuation period (1st high -speed fluctuation period)). The second consecutive production that is set at the timing and executed in the second high -speed change period (50 seconds) may be configured to be set at the start timing of the second high -speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (a performance mode in the second half period of continuous performance) that is not executed when a big win is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute the continuous performance for the entire period of the high speed fluctuation period, and the continuous performance may be executed only for a specific first period (for example, the 10th to 20th fluctuation periods of the special symbol fluctuations (20 times in total) executed during the high speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 143, the description continues. When the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of variations (the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is ``21 times to 49 times (second period)'', and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is ``win'', the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is ``0 to 198'', that is, the variation pattern (winning) with the variation time of ``30 seconds'' in the entire range is stipulated. If the lottery result is "out", a variation pattern (long deviation) with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the range of "0 to 179" for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and a variation pattern (short deviation) with a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when a high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) of normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and during a second period in which 21 or more special symbol variations are executed after the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed as long as the game is continued. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a configuration of the game board 13 that allows balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether a left-handed game or a right-handed game is performed. Therefore, for example, if the game is interrupted during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the first special symbol lottery may be executed after the game is restarted.

As described above, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that a normal jackpot game is executed (50% of the jackpot win), unlike when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, and in a game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, if a jackpot in which a normal jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery is won, the lottery results are disadvantageous to the player while the jackpot is won. In addition, in this control example, in the variation performance (variation performance using the third pattern) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type is also configured to be suggested to the player. It is configured to suggest a jackpot winning in which a jackpot game is normally executed when the display is stopped.

Therefore, when a ready-to-win state (a state in which some of the main patterns sz, which are a combination indicating a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is executed, is stopped and the rest of the pattern rows are variably displayed) is created in main patterns sz to which an even number is attached in the variable performance executed during the probability variable state or the time-saving state, the player is made to think that he/she has won a disadvantageous jackpot before the special pattern change is stopped and displayed, and the willingness to play decreases. there was Therefore, in this control example, in the gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he/she has won a disadvantageous jackpot before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

In order to execute this double reach effect, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. If the double reach performance described above as the variable performance executed during the probability variable state or the time saving state is executed only when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the player will grasp the first special symbol jackpot winning at the time the double reach performance is executed. A variation pattern (variation time of 30 seconds) for executing a double reach performance is selected in part (about 5%) of cases where the second special symbol lottery is lost and won.

By constructing in this way, when the double reach performance is executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is difficult to understand whether the corresponding special symbol lottery is the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery, and it is also possible to make it difficult to understand whether the result of the lottery is a big win or not, so that the player can play the game while having expectations until the performance result of the double reach performance is displayed.

Furthermore, since the double reach performance is executed also for the second special pattern lottery in which the variable probability big winning game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the performance result indicating the winning of the big win in which the variable probability big winning game is executed for the entire double reach performance (the performance result of stop-displaying the combination of the main symbols sz with odd numbers indicating the winning of the big win) can be easily created compared to the case of executing the double reach performance only for the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description is continued. When the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of times of variation (the number of times of special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game) is ``50 times (specified period)'', the variation pattern (medium variation) with the variation time of ``20 seconds'' is selected regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained.

In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big win game, and as the probability variable end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is won in the state where the first variable probability end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 50 times and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A second variable probability ending condition is established when any of the variable probability ending conditions is established, and when any of the variable probability ending conditions is established, the special symbol high probability state is shifted to the special symbol low probability state.

In other words, depending on the game result during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game, a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until the number of times of execution of special symbol variations reaches 50 times. There is a case where a short state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set.

The display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a game state suggestion effect for suggesting the currently set game state to the player. For example, when a V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a notification effect (super chance mode effect) is executed to notify the player that the current game state is a variable state, and the ball is moved to the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game. When the performance mode during the jackpot game is set so that the V information performance is not executed even when the player passes through the V gate 65v, a common performance (chance mode performance) is executed to make it difficult to understand whether the current game state is a variable probability state.

When the super chance mode performance is executed, the variable probability state is completed at the 50th special pattern variation (specified period), so the performance indicating that the variable probability state is completed and then the chance mode (time reduction) is set is executed using the variation time of ``20 seconds'' set for the 50th special symbol variation. Further, when the chance mode is executed, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the variable probability state has been set during the specific period.

In this way, by using the special symbol variation period for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in the specific period, when executing the information notification effect for notifying the player of information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (information for guiding the transition of the game state and information for suggesting the game state set in the past), by fixing the variation time of the selected special symbol variation, the information notification effect for notifying the player of the information other than the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to reduce the variation of the performance mode (including performance time).

In this control example, the execution period of the special symbol variation (the 50th special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot) is defined as the specific period, and the variation time of the special symbol variation is fixed to "20 seconds". The information notification effect may be configured to be executable using the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the period.

In addition, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period described above, the effect mode of the information notification effect may be varied. For example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the information indicating that the variable probability state ends may be changed to a effect mode that does not notify. state).

In addition, the timing at which the information reporting performance is executed during the specified period may be changed according to the result of the special pattern lottery, and for example, the execution timing of the information reporting performance is likely to be later when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot than when the big win does not occur. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the performance contents of the information notification performance, but also in the execution timing, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, as in the above example, when the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period is varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the information notification effect may be set to be executed at the specific timing in advance, and when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (for example, a big win), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be varied from the above-described specific timing, or the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be executed during the specific period without setting in advance. One execution timing may be determined from a plurality of execution timings according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

Next, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of variations (the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the variation pattern (win) with the variation time of "30 seconds" in the entire range is selected. If the lottery result is "out", the variation pattern (long deviation) with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179".

This 3rd period is a period when a game state turns into a time saving state. That is, even if the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is a period in which the variable probability end condition is established and the time saving state is set. During this third period, as in the above-described second period, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method to be executed. Since the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the execution of the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed during the third period is configured to facilitate the selection of a variation pattern with a long variation time. Thus, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time-saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be easily acquired during that period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

It should be noted that, during the third period, the double reach performance (see FIG. 131) is executed in the same manner as during the second period described above, so that when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the variation pattern with the variation time of "30 seconds" is selected in part of the winning win in the second special symbol lottery, in part of the winning jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, and in part of the winning failure.

Next, the contents of various variation patterns defined for the second special symbol lottery when the variable probability state or the time saving state are set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 143, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "1 time to 20 times (first period)". That is, during the first period, the same variation pattern (5-second variation) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of special symbols) is "win", the fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" for the range of "0 to 149" of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" for the range of "150 to 198". is selected, and when the lottery result is “out”, the variation pattern (second short variation) with a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected for the range of the acquired variation type counter CS1 value of “0 to 191”, and the variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected for the range of “192 to 198”.

During a second period in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in a high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) of normal symbols, a variation pattern with a variation time of ``10 seconds'' is selected except for the variation pattern in which the above-described double reach performance is performed (variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds is set). That is, the second special symbol variation is completed in a short period of time in a state where the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the special figure 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, and the player can enjoy a pleasant game.

In this control example, "10 seconds" is specified as the short-time variation time, but this variation time may be specified even shorter. In this case, it is preferable to specify a time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the interval (about 1.2 seconds) at which the ball launched to the game board 13 can reach the second ball entrance 640. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls decreases and the first special symbol lottery, which is set to have a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery, is executed despite the fact that the player continuously shoots balls.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is ``50 times (specified period)'', the fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation) with the fluctuation time of ``20 seconds'' is selected regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of special symbols) and the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. Since the variation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the variation pattern selected in response to the above-described first special symbol lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) with the fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is "15". A variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected for the range of “0 to 198”, and a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” is selected for the range of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 191”, and a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected for the range of “192 to 198” when the lottery result is “loss”.

As described above, in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b includes the normal table 202b1 and the probability variation/time reduction table 202b2, and the data table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different according to the set game state. As a result, the kind of variation pattern to be selected can be varied according to the set game state, and the results of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player with various variation patterns, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the variable pattern is selected by referring to the same data table (variable probability/time reduction table 202b2) when the variable probability state is set as the game state and when the time reduction state is set. Therefore, in a state in which a ``chance mode'', which is a performance mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state or the variable probability state is set, is set, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set game state by the kind of variation pattern selected corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed. In this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the variable probability state and the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the time saving state are the same, but not limited to this, it may be configured to refer to different data tables.

In this case, a probability variable data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the probability variable state and a time saving data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the time saving state are provided, and a specific variation pattern defined only in one of the data tables may be provided as the type of variation pattern selected with a small probability (for example, 5%). As a result, the player can grasp the currently set game state based on the type of the selected variation pattern only when the specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the data table for probability variation and the data table for time saving may be configured to have different ratios of selecting each variation pattern. By constructing in this way, by analyzing the deviation of the variation pattern selected for the special symbol lottery executed during the 'chance mode', the player can be provided with the enjoyment of predicting the currently set game state.

As described above, in this control example, the data table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different according to the game state to be set, but it may be configured to select the data table to be referred to according to conditions other than the game state. The data table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the same time saving state may be made different based on the display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed at 81, the result of whether or not the ball has passed to the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball has won a prize), or the like.

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is preferable to set a command that includes information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table). As a result, when a variation pattern command is received on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine not only the type of variation pattern set this time but also how the current gaming state was set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, it is possible to set an exclusive performance mode (for example, ``sorry mode'') by discriminating that the ball cannot win the V prize and the time-saving state is set, for example, in spite of the execution of the probability variable jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) in this embodiment, acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number to be the winning of the normal pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, the winning of the normal pattern (second pattern) is determined. The second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for normal pattern low probability and one for high probability when normal pattern winning is higher than the low probability, and the number of random numbers to be a big win included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 140(b). FIG. 140(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second winning random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be a value of "0 to 2".

That is, in this control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. Thus, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state of the low probability state of normal patterns and the time-saving state of the high probability state of normal patterns, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal pattern winning game during the normal state, so that the normal pattern winning game is executed during the normal state and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured such that a variation time of a different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state, and a longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set than when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Thus, by varying the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery and the length of the variation time of the normal pattern variation according to the game state, it is possible to easily set the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the player wins in the normal pattern lottery and easily enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Further, in this control example, when a win is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened in an operation mode (long opening) in which a plurality of balls can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 can be executed. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the possibility of executing the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player regardless of the state in which the game state is set, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the big win lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results on the second symbol display device 83, according to the values of the counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 139(a). FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a jackpot type selection table 202d. Since the first hit random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d have been described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the RAM 203 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 167) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 166) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

139(b), the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, and a variable counter 2. 03i, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot medium flag 203k, variable probability setting flag 203m, variable probability passage counter 203n, winning number counter 203o, remaining ball timer flag 203p, remaining ball timer 203q, variable probability effective flag 203r, variable probability effective timer 203s, discharge counter 203t, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) up to the maximum number (4 in this control example).

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this control example).

A special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of special symbols are stored, and when various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b when the special symbols stop varying, the various counter values are shifted and stored. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, when various counter values are stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted and stored to the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the start winning. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing a special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 selects one of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in order to execute processing such as setting the display of the big winning lottery and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Data corresponding to prizes are shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area for storing the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it acquires the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (value of the counter C4) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passage through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas where the data is vacant.

In addition, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) stores each counter value when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, and is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processes such as normal symbol winning lottery and setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display performance of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 shifts the data corresponding to one start winning out of the data (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c to this normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (standby number) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning to the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special symbol big hit determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), performs a big win lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern and the stop classification which are decided here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop classification command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of variable display reserved balls (waiting times) performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to a maximum of 1 time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and stores the game state corresponding to the game state (the setting state of the time reduction counter 203h, the setting state of the variable probability counter 203i) set after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, if the value of the time -saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the probable change counter 203i is 0, the normal state is remembered, the value of the time -saving counter 203H is larger than the value of 0, and the value of the probable change counter 203i is 0, and the value of the time -saving counter 203H is higher than the value of 0. The probable change state is remembered when the value of the probable change counter 203i is larger than 0.

Further, in a state in which the big winning game is being executed, a winning game state (big winning state) showing that the big winning game is being executed and type information indicating a big winning type corresponding to the big winning game being executed are also stored. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is configured to set a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g in the start-up process (see FIG. 166) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends (see S2103 in FIG. 170). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted based on the special design lottery (fluctuation), and when the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal design is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability state of the normal design. Until), it may be configured so that the high probability state of the normal symbol continues. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203h.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the conditions for terminating the high probability status of the normal pattern and the condition for subtracting the value of the time -saving counter 203H are set only to the conditions for subtracting the value of the time -saving counter 203h based on the number of special pattern lottery (fluctuations), but for example, the main control device 110. When the terminated terms that can be established by the contents of the various processing to be executed are established, the value of the time -saving counter 203h may be subtracted. Specifically, when the lottery result of each pattern lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or when the result of the normal pattern lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special normal winning), the value of the time reduction counter 203h may be subtracted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203h is configured to be decremented by 1, but depending on the type of end condition that is satisfied, a plurality of the values of the time saving counter 203h may be collectively (for example, 2) subtracted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The variable probability counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a special symbol high probability state is set, and is set to a value corresponding to a case in which a special symbol high probability state is set. A value is set in the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 170). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set, based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends and the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol is performed. until) may be configured so that the high probability state of the special symbol continues. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the conditions for terminating the high probability status of the special pattern and the condition for subtracting the value of the probable change counter 203i are set to subtract the value of the probable change counter 203i based on the number of special pattern lottery (fluctuations), but for example, for example, the fruit of the main control device 110 is 110. When the terminated terms that can be established by the processing content of various processing to be performed may be configured to subtract the value of the probable change counter 203i. Specifically, when the lottery result of each pattern lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning winning), or when the result of the normal pattern lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special normal winning winning), the value of the variable probability counter 203i may be subtracted.

Further, the value set in the variable probability counter 203i may be changed based on the winning jackpot type and the passing state of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, or the value of the variable probability counter 203i may be subtracted according to conditions other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, similarly to the content of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203h described above, or when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203i is satisfied. It may be configured such that a plurality of values of i can be subtracted at once. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special pattern continues, so that the player can watch the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored.

In this control example, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203i, only the condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., special winning win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., special normal win winning), the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted, or based on the ball entering a specific ball entrance (e.g., first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, etc.). You may comprise so that the value of the probability variation counter 203i may be subtracted.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is configured to be decremented by one, but depending on the type of end condition that has been met, a plurality of values of the variable probability counter 203i may be collectively (for example, 2) subtracted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the variable probability state may be varied according to the content of establishment of the conditions for which the variable probability state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203j is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. The big win start flag 203j is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the big win comes. Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203k is ON, it means that the big winning is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the big winning is not in progress. The big-hit flag 203k is set to ON at the same time as a big-hit game (special game state) is started (see S1903 in FIG. 168) when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 157), this big-hit flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not the big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The variable probability setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the ball enters (flows down) a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific area (V gate) 65v (passing of the variable probability switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON (see S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203m is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). The variable probability setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

When the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable probability switch has been passed, the variable probability setting flag 203m may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by determining whether the variable probability passage counter 203n, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the game parlor side by discriminating fraud such as turning on only the variable probability setting flag 203m and turning on the power again while the power is turned off.

The variable probability passage counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (flowed down a specific area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the winning balls have been discharged from the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203n and the ejection number counter 203t, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203n is updated by adding 1 each time the ball passes through the variable probability switch (flows down a specific area). Also, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that the probability variable passing counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and is updated by adding one by one based on the detection of winning in the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, when one round is finished, it is reset to "0" which is the initial value after it is determined whether or not the number of prizes won by the variable prize device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203o) and the number of the discharged number (the total value of the discharge number counter 203t and the probability variable passage counter 203n) match. The value of the winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed.

The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the winning balls to the variable prize winning device 65 has elapsed when one preset round is finished and the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the variable winning device 65 to discharge the winning ball is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q. When the remaining ball timer 203q reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

When the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a special flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the variable probability setting flag 203m may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The variable probability effective flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage (entrance) when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after the switching valve 65y is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to the specific area (V gate) 65v. When this variable probability effective flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is a normal period.

The variable probability effective timer 203s is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203r described above is set to ON. After the switching valve 65y is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v, the period required for the variable probability switch to pass normally can be determined by the variable probability effective timer 203s. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that reaches the switching valve 65y to pass through the variable probability switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the vehicle passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, it is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as illegally entering the game ball into a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) to pass through the variable probability switch, pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passing it through, or erroneously detecting that the game ball has passed through the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The discharged number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203t is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotating position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 by the command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance role product (not shown), a voice output command is set for causing the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22, or a lamp output command is set for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226. Also, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in correspondence with the display content.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the error type to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal special figure 2 effect selection table 222b, a probability change during effect selection table 222c, a continuous notice execution selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation time effect selection table 222f are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in this control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) is performed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by horizontal scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation performance, a detailed variation pattern is determined on the basis of the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the winning/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play the game (special figure game) while predicting whether or not the current special symbol variation wins a jackpot by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The normal special figure 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table referred to when selecting a third symbol performance mode when a variation pattern with an addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are defined corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (whether or not result), the special figure 2 reserved number, the special figure 1 reserved number, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

In this control example, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the state where the normal state is set, the normal symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is open for 5 seconds is executed. Then, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed by entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal figure winning game. In other words, in a game state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed, when a predetermined execution condition is established (when a normal pattern is won), the second special symbol lottery lottery opportunity (special figure 2 reserved ball) can be easily acquired (a ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640) for a predetermined period (during the normal pattern game period).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), a variation pattern with a variation time of ``10 seconds'' and a variation pattern with a variation time of ``40 seconds'' are selectable, and when the second special symbol lottery in which the variation pattern with a variation time of ``40 seconds'' is set, the performance mode of the variation performance is set by referring to the normal special pattern 2 performance selection table 222b.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b. This normal medium special figure 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table referred to when selecting the performance mode of the variation performance of the 3rd pattern when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are defined corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (result of winning/failure determination), the special figure 2 reservation number, the special figure 1 reservation number, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, the common out reach production is executed in correspondence with the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 125(a)), and then the pseudo-variation production (see FIGS. 125(b) to 126) as the production content (production mode) selected with reference to the normal special figure 2 production selection table 222b is added time. It is configured to be executed during (30 seconds).

Specifically, when the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is in the range of "0 to 79", "pseudo 3 production" is defined as the variation pattern, and "special pseudo 2 production" is defined as the variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99", and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 2, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is "0 to 9 In the range of 9", ``pseudo 2 performance'' is defined as a variation pattern, and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 1, the value of the performance counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations is defined in the range of ``0 to 89'', ``pseudo 1 performance'' as the variation pattern, and ``special pseudo 4 performance'' as the variation pattern in the range of ``90 to 99''.

In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0, ``special ending performance'' is set when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 1 to 4, and ``non-pseudo presentation'' is set when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0.例文帳に追加

If the lottery result is out, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of "0 to 99", and "pseudo 3 production" is defined as the variation pattern. In the case, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of ``0 to 99'', and the variation pattern is ``pseudo 1 production'', and when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, ``pseudo no production'' is defined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when setting the performance mode of the pseudo-variation performance of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the special figure 2 reserved number and the special figure 1 reserved number is determined, and the pseudo-variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily make the pseudo-variation performance executed during one special symbol variation period look like a variation performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Further, since the number of times of pseudo fluctuation executed in the pseudo fluctuation performance (the number of times of temporary stop of the third pattern) is set to correspond to the number of reserved special figures 2 already acquired, it can be made to think that all the reserved special figures 2 acquired during the normal figure per game executed in the normal state are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance of winning the jackpot is executed, the player can be made to think that he or she has won the jackpot as a result of acquiring many special 2 reserves during the normal game winning game executed in the normal state. In addition, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance of losing winning is executed, the fluctuation performance using the special figure 2 reservation is executed next (because the chance zone continues) after making the player think that the special figure 2 reservation has been completely consumed, so that the player can be provided with the performance with extraneousness.

In addition, in this control example, a pseudo-variation performance (special pseudo-2 performance, pseudo-4 performance) set only when a big win is won is provided, so that the player can be interested in the number of pseudo-variations executed in the pseudo-variation performance and the number of special figure 2 reservations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probability variation will be described. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probability variation. This performance selection table 222c during probability variation is a data table referred to when setting a variation performance when a variation pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as a variation pattern of special symbol variation executed during a probability variation state (time saving state), that is, during a normal symbol high probability state. This probability variation during production selection table 222c is referred to when setting the production mode of the variable production for the special symbol variation to be executed, and the special figure 1 production mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) executed in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (basic fluctuation time) is "30 seconds" (S5007 in FIG. 183: Yes), or in the special figure 2 production mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), it is during the "super chance mode" which is a production mode for notifying the player that it is a probability changing state (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes), which is executed this time. If the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes), it is referred to.

In this control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol lottery, in order to prevent the player from grasping the fact that the jackpot (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed) that can be won only in the first special symbol lottery is won before the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the third symbol to indicate the jackpot win in which the normal jackpot game is executed. A double ready-to-win performance is executed in which both a (third pattern with an even-numbered number) and a third pattern (a third pattern with an odd-numbered number) for indicating a big winning winning in which a probability variable big winning game is executed are in a ready-to-win state.

Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery when the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed in the probability variable state or the time saving state which is a high probability state of normal symbols, the above-mentioned double reach performance is also executed in the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable big winning game is always executed when the big win is won. Also, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are both configured so that the variation pattern of ``30 seconds'' variation time can be selected, and the double ready-to-win performance is performed when the variation pattern of ``30 seconds'' is selected. In this way, regardless of the type of the special pattern, the same variation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach performance as the same variation performance is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the pattern type of the special symbol variation being executed by the variation performance to be executed, and the capacity of the performance data used for various performances executed by the Pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by standardizing the performance data used for the variation performance.

As shown in FIG. 146, in the variable probability effect selection table 222c, different effect modes are defined according to the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol lottery result), and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot A), the value of the performance counter 223f is defined as "variable single reach" in the range of "0 to 49", "double reach" in the range of "50 to 99", "double reach" in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot B), and "non-reach" in the case of a loss.

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is a variable probability jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is defined as "special double reach" in the range of "0 to 49", and "variable double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99". ' is defined as 'non-reach' in the range of '11-99'.

By configuring in this way, both when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, "double reach" (shown in FIG. 131 (a), the reach effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the normal hit are in the ready state) is executed. Therefore, when the "double reach" is executed for the player, the third symbol variation effect corresponding to any special symbol lottery is executed. can make it difficult to understand

Further, when ``special double reach'' is set, the performance mode of ``double reach'' is set first, and then the ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance mode is changed to ``variable double reach'' shown in FIG. 131(b). Therefore, even when "double reach" is executed corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be played while expecting to be promoted to "probability variable double reach" on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing of changing the performance mode of the ready-to-win performance is the timing when the middle pattern row Z2 makes one or two rounds, but the performance mode may be varied based on the timing when the player operates the operation button 22 without being limited to this.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state, when the variation pattern (special failure) of variation time "10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 seconds)" is selected, after the failure ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, when a variation pattern (special win) with a variation time of ``10 seconds (basic time of 10 seconds, additional time of 0 seconds)'' is selected, the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (e.g., ``777'') indicating a big win after pattern variation for 10 seconds.

In this way, by providing a special variation pattern in which a plurality of simulated variation performances are performed during one special symbol variation period and a normal variation pattern in which one variation performance is performed during one special symbol variation period as variation performances corresponding to the second special symbol variation performed in the normal state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol variation is performed, so that the player can play while expecting the chance zone to continue.

Moreover, the greater the number of variable performances (including dummy) executed in the chance zone, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, so that the player can play while expecting the chance zone to continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, since the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal variation pattern is defined to be the same time as one pseudo variation time (10 seconds) that is performed with the special variation pattern that simulates a plurality of variations during one special symbol variation period. The variation performance for seconds is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the pseudo variation performance is repeatedly executed as the special variation pattern or whether the special variation pattern and the normal variation pattern are continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol variation is executed, so that the player can play while expecting the chance zone to continue.

In this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation in the normal state, the variation effect of the special variation pattern is executed. In addition, in this control example, the pseudo-variation time, which is a part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and the pseudo-variation performance is easily executed with a length other than 10 seconds when the expectation of the big win is high. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while anticipating that the execution period of one variable performance will be long.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the description is continued. The continuous notice execution selection table 222d is a data table referred to when determining whether or not to establish execution conditions for continuous notice performance executed over a period of a plurality of special symbol variations, based on winning information (whether or not a jackpot is won) included in a winning information command received from the main controller 110 side. Here, when the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is established, a special valid time is set for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special valid time, the continuous announcement effect is executed.

When this continuous advance notice performance is executed, it shifts to a background mode (sky mode) different from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and the continuous performance is executed using the period until the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is established is displayed. Although the detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, among the periods in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set until the 20th special symbol fluctuation is executed), it is configured so that the transition to the background mode becomes more difficult based on the operation of the frame button 22 than in other periods. Since the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 even during such a high-speed fluctuation period, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

In addition, unlike the normal background mode transition, the background mode transition can be executed with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, during the high-speed fluctuation period, since the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation tends to be shorter than in other periods, if the background mode is shifted like in the other period, there is a risk of overlooking the result of the special special pattern lottery, which is important, so that it is difficult to shift to the background mode. However, when the background mode is shifted based on the execution of the continuous advance notice performance, the continuous notice performance is executed using the fluctuation times of the special symbol fluctuations a plurality of times, so that the performance result of the continuous notice performance is not immediately displayed after the background mode shift. Therefore, even if the transition to the background mode is executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to execute a performance (operation performance) other than the transition to the background mode, and even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22, thereby suppressing early boredom of the game. Among them, the transition to the background mode is executed based on the fulfillment of the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance, whereby the player can be provided with the performance with unexpectedness, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 147(a), the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 147(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147(a), in the continuous notice execution selection table 222d, the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) included in the received prize information, the number of reserved special figures 2 (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol), and the acquired value of the production counter 223f, and whether or not to establish the execution condition of the continuous notice production is defined.

Specifically, the lottery result is ``big hit'', the number of reserved special figures 2 is ``3'', and the value of the obtained performance counter 223f is defined in the range of ``0 to 79'' as ``with continuous notice'' where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is satisfied, and in the range of ``80 to 198'', ``without continuous notice'' in which the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is not satisfied. In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved number is ``4'' and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of ``0 to 149'', ``with continuous notice'' where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is satisfied is defined, and in the range of ``150 to 198'', ``without continuous notice'' where the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is not established is defined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is ``missing'', the number of reserved special figures 2 is ``3'', and the value of the obtained performance counter 223f is ``0 to 194'', ``without continuous notice'' in which the condition for executing the continuous notice performance is not satisfied is defined, and ``with continuous notice'' in which the condition for executing the continuous notice performance is satisfied is defined in the range of ``195 to 198''. In addition, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is ``4'' and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of ``0 to 189'', ``without continuous notice'' in which the condition for executing the continuous notice performance is not satisfied is defined, and in the range of ``190 to 198'', ``with continuous notice'' in which the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is satisfied is defined.

As described above, in this control example, the larger the special figure 2 reservation number, the easier it is to establish the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance, and furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the execution conditions for the continuous notice performance are more likely to be established than when it is lost. By constructing in this manner, the player can be motivated to play a game (a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640) to execute the continuous notice performance, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced. In addition, it is configured so that the greater the number of reserved special figures 2, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit in the case where the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance are established. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous announcement performance with a high expectation of big win, the game (the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640) can be enthusiastically performed, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

In this control example, when a prize information command (a prize information command for a special symbol) is received from the main controller 110 side, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d is referred to, and only whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous notice performance are met is determined (determined). are doing. Thus, when a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and a plurality of prize winning information commands are received, the winning prize information for which execution conditions are to be established can be made difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous notice performance will continue, and it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance contents of the continuous notice performance.

In this control example, as described above, the player is not notified (suggested) that the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect have been satisfied. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the frame button 22 can be operated willingly to execute the continuous advance notice performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), an icon HR10 imitating the frame button 22 is displayed at the lower right side of the main display area Dm as an effective period notification mode capable of informing the player that the effective period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is set (that the effective period is in effect). It is configured so that it cannot be (hardly) determined from the display mode of the icon HR10. With this configuration, the player does not know whether the continuous advance notice performance is executed or the normal operation performance is executed until the player operates the frame button 22, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 willingly to execute the continuous advance notice performance.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, it may be configured such that the player can determine whether the currently set valid period is the special valid period or the normal valid period depending on the display mode of the icon HR10, or the icon HR10 may be configured to determine whether the currently set valid period is the special valid period or the normal valid period according to the display timing when the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the period in which the special effective time is set may be different from the period in which the normal effective time is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special pattern variation is started), and furthermore, the setting of the special effective time may not be reported (suggested) to the player. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the continuous advance notice performance, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Similarly, in the case of not notifying (suggesting) that the special effective time is set to the player, only the effect (for example, displaying the characters "waiting" in the sub-display area Ds) for notifying (suggesting) that the conditions for executing the continuous announcement effect are satisfied may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being unnecessarily operated in a state in which the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is not satisfied. In addition, when the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance are satisfied and the frame button 22 is operated outside the special effective time, a notification display (for example, a display of "not now" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executed for informing the player that the special effective time is out of the present, or a guidance display for guiding the special effective time (for example, a display of "Press again in two seconds" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executed.

Further, in this control example, when a winning information command including winning information for the second special symbol is received, the continuous announcement performance table 222d is referred to, and a process for establishing the execution condition for the continuous announcement performance is executed.

Returning to FIG. 144, description will be made. The V information execution selection table 222e is a data table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V information effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable winning device 65 which is opened during the jackpot game, and when a winning ball in the variable prize winning device 65 passes through the specific region (V gate) 65v, a high probability state (probability variable state) of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. According to the type of the jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) in which balls easily pass through the specific region (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game and a jackpot game (ordinary jackpot game) in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game than in the probability variable jackpot game can be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing into the variable winning device 65 is divided into a third flow path 65e3 that cannot (difficultly) pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v. The switching valve 65y is drive-controlled so as to be switched to an arrangement state in which the ball can be distributed to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round game when the probability variable jackpot game is executed.

The V notification effect includes a V guidance effect that guides a player who is executing a jackpot game on a period (V period) in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a game method for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V period effect that notifies that the current period is V, a V success effect that notifies that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period, and a V success effect that informs the player that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65 during the V period. A V-failure effect for notifying that v is not passed is an effect that can be executed. By executing this V notification performance, when the variable probability big winning game is executed, the game for passing the ball through the specific region (V gate) 65v can be easily performed, and since the player is notified that the ball has passed through the specific region (V gate) 65v, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game.

Here, in this control example, after the normal jackpot game is executed, the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state is set, the "chance mode" is set as the performance mode (see FIG. 134). Further, the "chance mode" is set even in a part of cases where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Thus, even when the ``chance mode'' is set after the end of the jackpot game, the possibility that the variable probability state is set internally can be left, so that the player can play while expecting the variable probability state. However, if the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, it is easy to grasp whether or not the ball has passed through the specific region (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a variable probability end condition to end the variable probability state as the condition for ending the variable probability state, which is established when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the variable probability state ends without winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery.

Therefore, in this control example, a process for determining whether or not to execute the V information effect during the big win game is executed, and based on the processing result, the presence or absence of the V information effect during the big win game is determined. Then, when a ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a big winning game in which the V information performance is not executed (when a variable probability state is set after the big winning game ends), a 'chance mode' is set after the big winning game ends. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for a player to discriminate whether or not the variable probability state is internally set, so that the player playing the ``chance mode'' can be made to play while expecting the variable probability state to be set without causing distrust.

Here, the contents of the V-notification execution selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 147(b). FIG. 147(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V-notification execution selection table 222e. This V -alien notice selection table 222E is determined to be the timing to start a probable greater jackpot in the jackpot -related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) in the main process (see Fig. 174) in the audio lamp control device 113 (S4701: YES in Fig. 180). It is referenced when determining whether or not V -warning production is performed during the technique (Figure 180 S4704).

As shown in FIG. 147(b), the V notification execution selection table 222e defines the presence or absence of V notification (determination result of whether or not to execute the V notification effect) in association with the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed this time (the jackpot type in which the jackpot is won) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V report presence" indicating execution of V report effect is defined, and "V report absence" indicating not execution of V report effect is defined in the range of "150 to 198". In addition, when the jackpot types are ``jackpots C, D, and E'' and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of ``0 to 189'', ``with V notification'' is defined, and in the range of ``190 to 198'', ``without V notification'' is defined.

When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot A" in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed is set, the V notification performance is executed at a rate of about 75%. Here, when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, 50% is a variable big win game ("big win A") and the remaining 50% is a normal big win game ("big win B"). Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the V information performance is executed during the big win game at a rate of about 37.5%, and the V information performance is not executed during the big win game at a rate of about 62.5%. In addition, it is configured such that the percentage of the probability variable jackpot game being executed is about 20% in the case where the V notification effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery and the big win types ``big wins C, D, E'' in which the probability variable big win game is executed are set, the V notification performance is executed at a rate of about 90%. Here, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to always be a probability variable big win game ("big wins C, D, E"). Therefore, in practice, a jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed is executed at a rate of about 10% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this way, by providing the case where the V information performance is not executed even for the big win winning by the second special pattern lottery in which the probability variable big winning game is always executed, the ratio of the game state to the probability variable state can be increased when the V information performance is not executed, that is, when the ``chance mode'' is set after the big winning game is finished.

Further, as described above, the ratio of execution of the V notification performance is made different between the case of winning the big win ("jackpot A") in which the probability variable big win game is executed in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the big win ("jackpot C, D, E") in which the probability variable big win game is executed in the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery, in which the probability variable big winning game is difficult to be executed, is structured so that the V notification performance is more difficult to be executed when the probability variable big winning game is actually executed, than the second special symbol lottery, in which the probability variable big winning game is actually likely to be executed. By configuring in this way, when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, the frequency of not executing the V notification performance during the big win game can be increased, so that even when a ``chance mode'' is set after the big win game based on the first special pattern lottery in which the normal big win game is finished, the player can easily have expectations.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the execution ratio of the V notification effect is varied according to the jackpot type, but the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be varied according to other factors. Alternatively, the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be changed according to the operation result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 . By varying the execution ratio of the V information performance in accordance with various conditions in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of apparent probability change ratios (percentages of execution of the V information performance in the entire jackpot winning), so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the above-described V notification performance is executable only when a variable probability big winning game is executed, that is, when a big winning game that allows a ball to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, but the V notification performance may be executed even when a normal jackpot game is executed without being limited to this. In this case, the V notification performance is executed in accordance with the timing (the timing at which the first round round game is executed) when the V period (the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the probability variable jackpot game, and finally the V failure performance for notifying that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period is executed. Further, when the V failure performance is executed even though the game is normally played during the big winning game, for example, the V failure performance may be executed even though the ball is passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the probability variable big winning game, and the ``chance mode'' may be set after the big winning game is finished.

Also, in this control example, it is possible to set a pattern in which the V notification performance is not executed during the probability variable jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the description is continued. The button operation effect selection table 222f is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means, when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. If so (S5314 in FIG. 186: Yes), it is referred to (see S5315 in FIG. 186). In this way, by varying the performance mode of the operation performance executed when the player operates the frame button 22 by referring to the performance selection table 222f at the time of button operation, the player can be provided with a wide variety of operation performances.

Here, with reference to FIG. 148(a), the contents of the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation will be described. FIG. 148(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the button operation time effect selection table 222f includes a time saving state selection table 222f1 that is referred to when the time saving state is set, and a probability changing state selection table 223f2 that is referred to when the probability changing state is set.

In this control example, when the time saving state is set and in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. Then, regardless of the game state that has been set, during the "chance mode", a common variable effect is executed. Furthermore, when the probability variable state is set and when the time saving state is set, the same variation pattern table (variable probability/time saving table 202b2) is referred to to select a variation pattern (variation time). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state from the special symbol variation executed during the ``chance mode'' and the variation performance of the third symbol executed corresponding to the special symbol variation, so that the player can play the game while expecting the current probability variable state.

However, there is a problem that the player who is playing the "chance mode" will get tired of the game in the "chance mode" at an early stage unless information that can suggest the currently set game state is provided. Therefore, in this control example, a plurality of types of operation performances are configured to be executable during the "chance mode", and the execution ratio of each operation performance is made different according to the set game state. In other words, although the types of operational performances that can be executed are the same, the current game state can be predicted based on a plurality of operational performances that are actually executed by making the rate of selection of each operational performance different. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state.

Incidentally, the performance mode of the operation performance executed when the normal state is set, the performance mode of the operation performance executed during the ``super chance mode'' which is the performance mode for notifying that the variable probability state is set, and the performance mode of the operation performance executed as part of the variable performance are also configured to determine and execute any one of a plurality of types of performance modes, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148(b), the contents of the time saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG.148(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1. This time saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table referred to when determining the performance mode of the operation performance in the ``chance mode'' in which the time saving state is set, and defines different performance modes of the operation performance depending on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22, and the value of the performance counter 223f obtained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), when the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "150 to 189", whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in the ready-to-win state. In the range of 190 to 198", "suggestion of state" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state is defined. Further, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated so that the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198".

Here, in this control example, a plurality of operation methods that can be executed by the player for the frame button 22 are set, and "normal press" is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for less than two seconds, and "long press" is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for two seconds or longer. And, it is constructed such that different operation presentations are executed according to the operation method of the player. As a result, the player can arbitrarily select an operation method to execute various operation effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In this control example, the two types of operation methods described above are used as the operation methods that the player can operate. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with operation means (for example, a second frame button) other than the frame button 22, and different operation effects may be selected according to the type of the frame button pressed by the player. can be configured to Further, when the player presses down the frame button 22, it is determined as ``normal pressing'', and when the pressing state continues for a predetermined period (for example, two seconds), ``long pressing'' is additionally determined, so that an operation effect dedicated to ``long pressing'' may be executed.

Furthermore, as an operation means that can be operated by the player, other than the configuration of the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player, an operation means comprising a lever member that can be tilted in the vertical and horizontal directions by the player or a rotating member that can be rotated by the player can be provided. In addition, instead of the player directly operating the member, a proximity sensor having a predetermined detection area may be provided, and an operation means (for example, a touch sensor) may be provided that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed by detecting a hand placed in the detection area.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described. Here, if only one type of operation method is provided, it may be configured such that different operation presentations are performed according to the interval at which the operation is performed. As a result, even if the operation method itself is one type, it is possible for the player to select various operation effects.

It returns to FIG.148(b) and continues description of the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1. "Background mode shift" indicating that the background mode is shifted is defined in the range of "0 to 198" in which the operation timing is in the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 198". In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 198" to indicate the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggestion of state".

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is ``normal push'', and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range ``0 to 198'', ``background mode transition'' indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is defined. In addition, when the operation method is ``long press'', ``past state suggestion'' indicating the performance for suggesting the game state set in the past (when the ``chance mode'' was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is defined in the range of ``0 to 198'' for the value of the obtained performance counter 223f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the contents of the variable probability state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability state selection table 223f2. The variable probability state selection table 223f2 is a data table referred to when determining the performance mode of the operation performance in the ``chance mode'' in which the variable probability state is set, and defines different performance modes of the operation performance according to the timing when the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22, and the value of the performance counter 223f obtained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, when the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", indicating that no operation effect is executed, in the range of "120 to 139", the variable effect being executed indicates whether or not the variable effect will be in the ready-to-win state. The range from 189 to 189" defines a ``suggestion of state'' indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state, and the range of ``190 to 198'' defines a ``background mode transition'' indicating transition to the background mode. Further, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated so that the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198".

In addition, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", "background mode transition" indicating transition to the background mode is defined, and in the range of "170 to 198", "state indication" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state is defined. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 198" to indicate the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggestion of state".

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is ``normal push'', and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range ``0 to 198'', ``background mode transition'' indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is defined. In addition, when the operation method is ``long press'', ``past state suggestion'' indicating the performance for suggesting the game state set in the past (when the ``chance mode'' was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is defined in the range of ``0 to 198'' for the value of the obtained performance counter 223f.

As described above, when the ``chance mode'' is set as the performance mode after the end of the jackpot game, different data tables are referred to in the time-saving state and in the variable-probability state to select the performance mode of the operation performance, and the ratio of selection of each performance mode is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the production mode, when the advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, as a production mode (advantageous production mode) that is easily executed when, for example, the "state suggestion" operation effect executed by the "normal push" during the "first period" is provided. Advantageous game state is set? The game can be played while having a sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, since the operation performance can be executed a plurality of times during the 'first period', the more the number of times the operation performance is executed in the above-described advantageous performance mode during the 'first period', the higher the degree of expectation that the advantageous game state is set, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (variable probability state, time-saving state) in which the “chance mode” can be set as the production mode, only when the advantageous game state (variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set. As a production mode (fixed production mode) that is executed only when, for example, the “background mode transition” operation performance is executed by the “normal press” during the “first period”. In this case, it can be grasped that an advantageous gaming state is set.

In addition, as the above-described advantageous rendering mode and fixed rendering mode, a rendering mode that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal push" during "second period") is used. More specifically, the performance mode of the ``suggestion of state'' is configured such that when it is executed by the ``normal push'' during the ``first period'', the degree of expectation that the variable probability state is set is high, and when it is executed by the ``normal push'' during the ``second period,'' the degree of expectation that the time saving state is set is high. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing the game while analyzing in which performance mode the operation performance is executed in which period the ``chance mode'' is set.

148 and 149, the contents of the effect mode of the operation effect that can be selected when the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22), and the contents of the data table (the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation) referred to when the mode is selected have been described. However, in the first control example, different data tables are referred to according to the set game state. In each data table, the same effect modes are defined with different selection ratios. Thus, it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state only by the performance mode of the operation performance to be executed, and by executing the operation performance a plurality of times, the current game state can be grasped by grasping the selection ratio of each performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to execute the operation effect multiple times.

In this control example, different data tables are referred to in accordance with the set game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the currently set game state and the currently set effect mode, different data tables may be referred to to select the effect mode of the operation effect. Thus, when the variable probability state is set, different operation performances can be executed depending on whether the ``super chance mode'' is set as the performance mode or the ``chance mode'' is set.

Here, when the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode, for example, it is not necessary to execute the "suggestion of state" which is the effect mode suggesting that the current game state is set. Therefore, instead, the effect mode of "suggest reach" and the effect mode of "suggestion of advance" which suggests whether or not the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b includes information indicating a specific lottery result (variation pattern in which a variable time period of a variation over a predetermined time is set or winning a jackpot) are stipulated. good to do As a result, even in the state where the "super chance mode" is set, the player can be motivated to execute the operation presentation.

Furthermore, the type of the data table for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect (the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation) may be configured to be different according to the game state at the time of winning the big win, the type of the big win (stop display mode of the special symbol), the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the presence or absence of V winning during the big win game.

In this case, for example, when a time saving state is set as a game state and a ``chance mode'' is set as a presentation mode, the ``chance mode'' is set after the end of a normal jackpot game, and the case where the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the ``chance mode'' is set after the completion of the normal jackpot game. Specifically, during the ``chance mode'' in which the time-saving state is set after the completion of the definite variable jackpot game, the performance mode of ``past jackpot type suggestion'' suggesting that the previous jackpot game was the definite variable jackpot game may be defined. As a result, the player can be made to think that the variable probability state is set even though the time saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to define the effect mode of "past game history notification" for informing that the previous big winning game was a variable probability big winning game but the V prize could not be won. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(b). As shown in FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a production counter 223f, a sub-state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h, a special production flag 223i, a V winning flag 223j, and a V At least a performance execution flag 223k, a V notification flag 223m, a time-shortening counter 223n, a special continuous notice flag 223o, a performance mode storage area 223p, a continuous notice execution flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operating counter 223t, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written according to a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for the special symbols, and winning information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 is stored in each of these areas in order from the first area. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls of the first special symbol and a maximum of four reserved balls of the second special symbol are configured to be able to be retained and stored respectively, so that the winning information storage area 223b is formed with four reserved areas for the first special symbol and four reserved areas for the second special symbol. In this control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured so as not to be executed at the same time, and when a new special symbol lottery is executed in a state in which both the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are held, the oldest stored winning information (winning information stored in the first area) in the second special symbol holding area is configured to move to the execution area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the reserved area with the number one lower. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, for example, regardless of the type of special symbols, if the pachinko machine 10 executes a special symbol lottery according to the order in which the reserved balls are acquired (so-called winning order digestion pachinko machine 10), eight reservation areas may be provided in the winning information storage area 223b, and the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 may be stored in order from the first area. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (overlapping) executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10), a first execution area for the first special symbol and a second execution area for the second special symbol are provided in place of one execution area for the configuration of this control example, and the winning information stored in the first area of the reserve area corresponding to each special symbol is executed corresponding to each special symbol. It may be configured so as to shift to an area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and has a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 for counting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls of each special pattern is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is subtracted in order to execute a new first special symbol lottery in the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls command (special figure 1 number of reserved balls command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. . In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is added by the ball entering the second entrance 640, or when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is subtracted in order to execute a new second special symbol lottery in the main control device 110, a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command, special figure 2 reserved ball number command) transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is acquired from the reserved ball number command, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1, second It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display reserved symbols. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, it controls image drawing so that the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 122(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which execution of the special symbol lottery is suspended.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the special figure variation start flag 223d has a first special figure variation start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure variation start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

The special figure stop classification selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop classification command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation stop classification output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, this special figure stop type selection flag 223e has a first special figure stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second special figure stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 198". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect counter 223f is composed of a plurality of counters, each of which has a different update rule. Any of the counters is configured so that counter update processing is executed each time the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, when selecting a variation pattern or performing a plurality of selection processes of various effects within the execution interval of the main process, the values of different counters of the effect counter 223f are acquired and the processes are executed. Thus, even when the process using the value of the effect counter 223f is executed a plurality of times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process), it is possible to suppress selection of various effects using the same value of the effect counter 223f.

Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 . Further, the sub-state setting area 223g has a current game state storage area for storing the currently set game state and a past game state storage area for storing the game state set before the current game state is set, so that it is possible to calculate what process the current game state was set through. Thus, for example, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or whether the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game and then whether the time saving state is set when the probability variable end condition is satisfied, and the performance based on the determination result (past state suggesting performance for suggesting the past game state to the player) can be executed. In addition, the subordinate state setting area 223g is configured to store game states such as a jackpot game state and a normal game state in addition to the normal state, the variable probability state, and the time saving state.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the normal symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f for counting the number of normal symbol reserved balls held in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, the detailed contents are omitted because they are the same except that the object is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol with respect to the above-described special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

The flag 223i during special performance is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the second special symbol variation during the normal state is established. Specifically, when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state, or when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired in the state where the first special symbol variation is performed, it is set to ON. And, when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the flag 223i is set to ON during the special effect, that is, when the special figure 2 reservation is 0, it is set to OFF. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see FIG. 124(b)) is executed to indicate a period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Specifically, when a V winning command is set by main controller 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that the V winning command is received in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4407 in FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referenced in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) (S4801 in FIG. 181), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game (whether the ball has won a V prize). Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) (S4801 in FIG. 181: Yes), it is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification performance can be executed as a performance for causing a ball to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a big win game, and depending on the presence or absence of a V winning, the performance mode of the performance executed at the time of V winning (at the end of the V round) and at the time of ending the big winning game can be varied. Further, the effect mode at the time of V winning and the effect mode at the time of the ending of the jackpot game are changed depending on whether or not the V notification effect is being executed. Thus, in order to execute the performance variably set based on the presence/absence of the V winning prize at a timing (at the time of ending) different from the time of the V winning prize, the presence/absence of the V winning prize is determined by the setting state of the V prize winning flag 112j.

The V effect execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the V information effect is to be executed during the big win game, and is set to ON when it is determined to execute the V information effect during the big win game. Specifically, when it is determined in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) that a command to start the jackpot has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes), and when the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S4703 in FIG. 180: No), the V notice execution selection table 222e is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the V notice effect. Then, when it is determined to execute the V notification effect (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, that is, when the V winning flag 112j does not occur during the jackpot game, it is referred to (S4802 in FIG. 181), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), the effect mode of the ending effect is changed. A process for switching is executed (S4804 in FIG. 181), and then set to OFF (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when the variable probability big winning game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V information performance during the big winning game, and when the execution of the V information performance is determined, the performance mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and 127(d)) for indicating that the variable probability state is set as the performance mode during the ending period at that time is set. In other words, when the V notification performance is executed during the probability variable jackpot game, the player is notified of this fact at the time when the V prize is won. Therefore, in the ending performance executed during the ending period, the performance mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and 127(d)) for indicating to the player that the probability variation state is set is set. Therefore, when the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the processing for switching the performance mode of the ending performance to the performance mode (see FIGS. 127(a) and 127(c)) for indicating that the time saving state is set is executed.

On the other hand, when the V notification performance is not executed during the probability variable jackpot game, the effect is not notified to the player even if the V prize is won, and the performance mode (see FIGS. 127(a) and 127(c)) for indicating that the time saving state is set as the performance mode of the ending performance is set in advance. Therefore, even if the V prize is not won during the big win game, there is no need to execute the process of switching the performance mode of the ending performance.

The time-saving medium counter 223n is a counter for measuring a period in which a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high-probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a big win game), a predetermined value ("100" in this control example) is set. When the special pattern variation is executed in a state where the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223n becomes '0', it is determined that the normal pattern has shifted to a low probability state. Moreover, based on the value of the counter 223n during time saving, it is comprised so that the detailed period in the high probability state of a normal design may be discriminate|determined.

The special continuous notice flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is established during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the ``chance mode'' is set as the performance mode, and is set to ON when the execution condition of the continuous notice performance is established. When the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set for effectively discriminating the operation to the operating means, and when a specific operation is performed to the operating means during the special effective period, continuous notice performance is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) which is part of the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the winning information command for the special figure (see S4406 in FIG. 178) executed when receiving the winning information command for the special symbol (see S4406 in FIG. (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and when it is determined to execute the continuous announcement effect by referring to the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to ON (S4507 in FIG. 178).

Then, in the special figure 2 production mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variable production corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the setting status of the special continuous notice flag 223o is referred to (S5210 in FIG. 185) in the production setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185) that is executed when the "chance mode" is set. As a period, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer 223s (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then turned off.

In this way, a special effective period is set for validly discriminating the operation to the operation means only when the condition for executing the continuous advance notice performance is established, and the continuous advance notice performance can be executed only when the player executes a specific operation for the operation means within the special effective period, so that the player can be motivated to play the game to execute the continuous notice performance. In addition, by varying the notification mode of the notification performance for notifying the player of a plurality of information for executing the continuous announcement performance (information indicating whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous announcement performance are satisfied, information indicating the period in which the special effective period is set (the set period), and information indicating the operation content to be performed on the operation means for executing the continuous announcement performance), the execution difficulty of the continuous announcement performance can be easily variably adjusted.

In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to establish the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (when it does). As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to execute the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means outside the special effective period in a state where the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance are established, it is preferable to execute a guidance notification performance for guiding the player to the timing at which the special effective period is set. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation means more willingly, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The performance mode storage area 223p is a storage area for storing various performance modes set during the high probability state of normal symbols, and different performance modes are stored according to the value of the counter 223n during time saving. Then, when determining the current presentation mode, the stored presentation mode is read. Specifically, in the chance mode production setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time saving counter 223n is read (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the production mode corresponding to the read value (high speed period (high speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) is set and stored. Then, when the high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, the stored information is cleared.

The continuous notice execution flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the continuous notice effect is set as the variable effect of the third symbol, and is set to ON when the continuous notice effect is being executed. Then, in the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 185: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect is determined. Then, it is set to OFF when the continuous announcement effect ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the setting of a different effect mode that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice effect in the new variable effect executed during the continuous advance notice effect.

The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring an operation valid period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third pattern, and when the operation valid period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period is set, and the value is subtracted as time elapses. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to zero. Thus, by setting the operation effective period for effectively discriminating the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the performance (operation performance) executed when the operation means (the frame button 22) is operated.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, when a plurality of operation means such as a second operation means are provided as the operation means other than the frame button 22 (first operation means), different operation effective periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing the SW effective time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set the operation effective period of each operation means in duplicate.

The special valid time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the operation valid period (special operation valid period) for judging whether the operation to the frame button 22 is valid, and is set only when the special continuation notice flag 223o is set to ON and the effect setting process in the chance mode (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed. It consists of Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not the special operation valid period is valid (S5306 in FIG. 186), and if it is determined to be within the valid period (S5306 in FIG. 186: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively handled. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated within the normal operation valid period (the period when the value of the SW valid time timer 223r is greater than 0) and when the frame button 22 is operated within the special operation valid period (the period when the value of the special valid time timer 223s is greater than 0), different operation effects are executed. It is configured so that a continuous advance notice effect is executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods until the game is played. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, the background mode is configured to shift to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period in which the background mode transition is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, the execution of the background mode transition can increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot.

The in-operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and when the player measures and presses the frame button 22, the value of the counter is updated with the passage of time. Based on the value measured by the in-operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display such as the variation effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 121). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 155. FIG. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a character ROM 234 , a resident video RAM 235 , a normal video RAM 236 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 , and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113 , and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 via a bus line 240 . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls put out for one special symbol jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is powered on (including recovery from a power failure; hereinafter the same), the power supply 115 resets the system. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but reading of the data of the first page requires a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take time to read the instructions constituting the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237.

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (such as characters) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the relevant data is read from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when data is written, and generates defective data blocks in which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks.

Since the ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without considering the address position of the defective data block which is different in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether or not one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the designated address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while data is set in one bank, transfers one page of data including data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to the one bank, and sets the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading out from and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND-type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND-type flash memory 234a. This NOR-type ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

The MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and designate the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240 when the system reset is released. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and designates the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. While the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, the reason why not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a but the predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem unique to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order for the MPU 231 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. i. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, by storing in the NOR type ROM 234d a predetermined number of instructions from those to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released. A program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data (eg, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program. It is programmed to transfer to area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is canceled while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the designation of the address of the internal bus as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed to set the command pointer 231a to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then executes the rest of the boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) by the boot program is set as the second predetermined address.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after releasing the system reset, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM composed of the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 155) transmitted from the MPU 231, develops the image drawn in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third pattern display device 81.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231 at intervals (20 milliseconds) between image drawing processing and display processing. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, the display control device 114 is configured such that the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image drawing processing can be performed by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. - 特許庁Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

The display control device 114 is configured such that, when drawing an image using image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading the data can be saved.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

For the transfer instructions of the image data that MPU231 and the transfer data of the drawing list are transferred to the image controller 237, the first address (the top address of storage), the final address (the final address of the storage), and the transfer destination (normal storage) Includes the first address of the local video RAM235 and the normal video RAM236) and the first address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM235 or regular video RAM236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time can be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a and then transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of the image data so that the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the display on the third pattern display device 81 are not in time for the required time.

Further, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character pattern area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image for displaying the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 by a variable performance when the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the special figure entrance 64 is detected.

When the power supply unit 251 starts supplying power, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 151 . FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG.

At this time, when a variation pattern command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays a power-on variation image of a "○" symbol at the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image, as shown in FIG. The variable images are alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variable period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is determined, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. Let

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped while the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the image controller controls the MPU 231 so that the images shown in FIGS. 237. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation performance image when the power is turned on is already resident in the variation image area 235b when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the entry of the ball into the special symbol entrance 64 is detected while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 150, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 152, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 152A and 152B are diagrams for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 152(a) shows the rear A corresponding to the "town stage", and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 152, the back images corresponding to the respective backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 so as to be longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. After the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third design display device 81, when the image between the position a and the position a' is displayed as the display area on the third design display device 81, the rear image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection on the third design display device 81.

When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding rear image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the image for scrolling, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the display area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Specifically, on the rear face E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their display positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky spread over the mountains changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the third pattern display device 81 displays a repeated back image that returns to the back image showing the morning glow.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 with all image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the ``town stage'', which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced by keeping all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the frequently displayed ``town stage'' permanently in the back face image area 235c. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage", as shown in FIG. Also, image data corresponding to the back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the power is turned on.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if this is done, a RAM with a very large capacity must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when the stage change is determined by lottery at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and can be scrolled or displayed while changing the color tone with the lapse of time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is being scrolled from left to right in the range from the position a to the position b. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After the range from position a to position b is scrolled using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. I can.

Similarly, for the rear face E, the range of image data is set so that the transfer of the image data of the remaining images from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Image data stored in normal-use video RAM 236 for rear surfaces B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-surface images provided in image storage area 236a of normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap the image data corresponding to the image between position b′ and position b. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from the position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 smoothly.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. . As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. Thus, when the third pattern display device 81 performs the variable performance, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND type flash memory 234a, the third pattern display device 81 can quickly start the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though the variable performance is started in the first pattern display device 37 after the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box as the main pattern to which the numbers '0' to '9' are not attached, and the main pattern consisting of the rear pattern and accessory patterns simulating characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variation performance associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation performance is stopped. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Further, in this control example, the third pattern is displayed in a different display mode according to the set background mode (back image). Therefore, the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after switching is stored in the third pattern area 235d every time the background mode is switched. This eliminates the need to store the image data for all the third designs corresponding to all the background modes in the third design area 235d, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

In this control example, since the background mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means (the frame button 22), the background mode may be switched multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the background mode before switching is not erased from the third pattern area 235d for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after switching the background mode. As a result, even if the background mode is frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the process of storing the image data in the third pattern area 235d from being complicated. Also, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of a plurality of third patterns corresponding to each of a plurality of background modes in advance.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e. By reading the image data pre-resident in 5e, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 reads the image data preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command, so that the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the corresponding error message can be immediately displayed after receiving the error command.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the type of the image data. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes a one-frame image drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby developing the one-frame image in that frame buffer. A process for displaying the one-frame image on the pattern display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and at the same time, read out the one-frame image previously drawn from the other frame buffer, and display the read-out one-frame image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 to be either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the one frame of image rendering processing is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately designated every 20 milliseconds by alternately switching either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, so that the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data determination flag 233i, a drawing object buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag. 233z at least.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is an area for storing a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table defining transfer data information and transfer timing of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the one effect displayed by the display data table.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, and stored in this data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each performance mode of each performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command from the main controller 110. For example, the display data tables corresponding to the variable performance, the opening performance, the round performance, the ending performance and the demonstration performance are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop pattern indicating the failure is finally stop-displayed, and if the stop type of the variable performance is either the big win A or the big win B, the stop patterns showing the big win are finally stop-displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance is a performance for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

As described above, the demonstration performance is a performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance was stopped, and only the rear image changes while the third pattern consisting of the main patterns with no numbers '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the display data table will be described. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time, in association with the address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which the image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and also defines drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of sprite.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. When the enlargement rate is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and when the enlargement rate is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a smaller size than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, drawing information for each sprite such as one back image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. This back face type describes information specifying whether to display one of the back faces A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of ``town stage'', ``forest stage'', ``river stage'', ``sky stage'', and ``island stage'') or to display a back image different from the back faces AE. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the rear faces A to E as a drawing object when the display of any one of the rear faces A to E is specified by the rear face type, and also specifies the range of the rear face image to be displayed for the frame according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image displayed when the image drawing (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the start of drawing of the image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on the display data table, depending on the back type and position information. (Information indicating whether the display of the pattern display device 81 is information indicating the elapsed time since the start) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. The reason why the offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third pattern is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before and the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time, and the offset information from the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before is described in the pattern offset information until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is described. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Since each third pattern is attached with a specific number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number attached to the third pattern, and the offset information is represented by the difference in the number attached to each third pattern, so that the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

Further, in the pattern offset information, a predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time is set so as to be the time during which the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed. While the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time during that time, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the image content to be drawn next is identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) to be described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110.

Here, when a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, a large load is imposed on the activation and execution of the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous with the diversification of the effect images. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, so that various performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

The reason why a display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list can be created for each frame according to the set data table is that the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, since the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, the display contents cannot be predicted, and therefore the display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above cannot be provided. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 among the sprite image data used in the effect defined in the display data table are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table describes transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 154). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer object image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the prescribed sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the prescribed sprite is started according to the display data table, and the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the transfer object image data corresponding to the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, Null data is defined which means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 154).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the end address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 154). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a variation pattern command for display) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, and if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring, and the generated drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred to the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is necessary for light drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 in the display control device 114. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It can be transferred from ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 .

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data whose transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address is defined in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Therefore, the transfer start timing can be instructed so that the image data of a predetermined sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the D-type flash memory 234a, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in FIG. 187). Then, when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, the third pattern display device 81 is set to OFF in order to display an image other than the power-on image (see S7605 in FIG. 199(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189(b)). 189(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main controller 110.

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 199(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process transfers the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see FIG. 199(b)). is executed, and if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, selects the display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, describing the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 155) in which the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 is described for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared.

Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and if the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f (i.e., if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list described later (see FIG. 155) that describes the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in display setting processing for V interrupt processing (see S6303 in FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later. Add to

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can be surely stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 155, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the back image used in the image of one frame, the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), and the character (character 1, character 2, . It is what I did. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the address thereof, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The image controller 237 performs scaling processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, translucency processing according to the translucency value, and synthesis with other sprites according to the α blending information on a standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from various video RAMs. After applying processing, color tone correction processing according to color information, filtering processing according to filter designation information by a method designated by the information, and performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, an image obtained by drawing is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU231 shows the drawing data tables stored in the displayed data table buffer 233D, and the contents of the drawing specified by the pointer 233F, the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold image that displays the holding ball number, and a warning image that notify the occurrence of an error). Based on, a detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame is generated, and a drawing list is created by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table.

Also, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), character (character 1, character 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e contains transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the storage source start address and storage source end address in the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads the image data from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the performance displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is completed, and executes various processes to be performed in accordance with the completion of the performance.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. FIG. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are inevitably unstored by storing the image data of one sprite, so the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

When transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 200), and the image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying, from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c), a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the driving signal, thereby executing the display processing for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted each time drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 189B) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the one frame of image rendering processing is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately designated every 20 milliseconds by alternately switching either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, so that the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (see S7002 in FIG. 195(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and is set to OFF when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 191A, S6705 in FIG. 192A, and S6705 in FIG. 192). (b) S6805, see S6905 in FIG. 193). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is set to OFF when a display data table other than the fixed display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 191A, S6705 in FIG. 192A, and S6705 in FIG. 192B ), S6905 in FIG. 193). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 156 to 172. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing that is started when power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the start-up processing, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this control example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds), and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal.

In the first control example, as described above, the lottery right for the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved) are stored together, and the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Also, while the big winning game is being executed, the ball is passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65, so that a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the big winning game is finished. Furthermore, as a termination condition for ending the probability variable state which is a game state advantageous to the player, an termination condition established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is provided in addition to the termination condition established when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process associated with entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157-162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is a process of determining on/off of ball shooting on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 157) performs various determinations (validity determination) and determination of the special symbols based on the acquired counter values, and controls the first symbol display device 37 to enable variation display in the determined variable display mode by predetermined control, or sets various commands for executing the variable display effects of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and displays the determination result (validity determination result). Control is executed to stop and display in the mode. The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (during the jackpot game) (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (during the jackpot game) is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). The number of holding times of variable display based on lottery of 1 special symbol (N1) and the value of second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of holding times of variable display based on lottery of second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is greater than 0 (S210).

In the processing of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S210: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S213), and the process proceeds to the process of S208. In the process of S208 executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of S215, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated corresponding to the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and thereafter updated (decremented) each time the process of S215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S215 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol big win according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol big winning, one of the big wins A to E is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 lights up a blue LED in the case of a big win A, a red LED in the case of a big win B, a green LED in the case of a big win C, and a blue LED and a green LED in the case of a big win D. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is started, it is determined whether the special pattern lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special pattern variation start processing is a special pattern jackpot (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), a jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), the values of a time reduction counter 203h and a variable probability counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S218, when the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 113) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, S1901: Yes, the opening command is set (S1902). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, the update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the process of S220, a special figure confirmation command is set (S220), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 140(a)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S302).

When the process of S302 is completed, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big win (S303), and if it is determined to be a big win (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to the big win (S304), based on the acquired value of the winning type counter C2, the big win pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S305), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S303 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S303: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol big hit determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, whether or not a special symbol big hit is set (S401).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 141(a) to (c)) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read out in the process of S404 (S405), and a special figure variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 (S406). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process of the main controller 110 (see S1801 in FIG. 167).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S408), a value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern is set to the value of a special symbol variation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this processing is terminated. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process of the main control device 110 (FIG. 167).

On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This update process (S221) is a process executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (when the fluctuation is stopped), and the process for updating the remaining period of the period in which the variable probability state is continuously set or the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

When the update process (S221) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S501), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0 (S501: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (updated) (S502), and then whether the value of the probability variable counter 203i after the update is 0 (S503), and if it is determined to be 0 (S503: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Also, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S501 (S501: No), the current is not in the high probability state of the special symbol, so the above-described processing of S502 to S504 for updating the value of the probability variation counter 203i is skipped and the process of S505 is performed.

Also, in the processing of S503, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is not 0, that is, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is greater than 0, and even if the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503: No), the processing of S504 is skipped and the processing of S505 is performed.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined to be greater than 0, that is, if the current state is the high probability state of the normal symbol (S505: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the time saving counter 203h (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S507). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), the value of the variable probability counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the current game state are set (S509), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S505 (S505: No), or when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 in the process of S507 (S507: No), the process proceeds to S509 as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the starting winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), it is determined whether the ball has entered (start winning) either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and if the start winning is made, each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number of reservations (up to 4 in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640). It is a process to

In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) of predicting the result of determination of suitability and the variation pattern to be selected in advance is executed based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S601). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S602), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S604), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights of the first special symbol) is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S605).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

Also, when it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, when it is determined that the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit at the present time (S603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S607.

Next, with respect to each process from S607 to S612, the only difference is that the same process as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from S601 to S606 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description will be omitted.

After executing each process from S601 to S612, a prefetch process is executed (S613), and this process ends.

This look-ahead processing (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the result of determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. are determined. In this control example, it is configured to execute a process of determining the result of win/fail judgment, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc., based on each newly stored counter value. You can configure it to run.

In this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance. The contents of the rights (winning information) may be determined in advance.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added, the look-ahead process (S613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). is the upper limit number (4) (S603: No), that is, when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the prefetching process (S613) may be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 162, the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S613).

In the look-ahead process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, from the storage areas newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read out (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S702).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when the new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the big win determination is executed based on the newly reserved winning information. Because it is difficult.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a prize winning command including information capable of specifying the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S704), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a big hit (S703: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information capable of specifying a lost winning and a variation pattern is set (S705), and then this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S704 or S705 is set to include information indicating the above-described win/fail judgment result (information that has a different meaning based on the win/fail judgment result), as well as information showing the various counter values read out by the process of S701 as common information. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, based on various information included in the winning command, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the usual color), and an effect (pre-reading effect) can be executed such as displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of winning or failing determination to the player.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to set information (results of determination of success) to be set in the winning command regardless of the game state. A winning command may be set based on the results of each determination, or a determination value (value of a first winning random number counter C1) for determining a big win regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state may be defined, and only when the determination value is read out, a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set.

By constructing in this manner, a prize winning command indicating a big win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when a specific big win is determined in advance, so that a feeling of expectation of winning the big win can be given to the special pattern variation in which the look-ahead performance is not executed.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and the winning/failure determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, prefetching processing based on the winning information is performed, and a win or miss determination is predicted in advance in the prereading processing. Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (stored) in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the result of winning/failure determination may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is preferably configured to be analyzed (prediction of the result of winning/failure determination). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc., and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery) (processing for executing the normal symbol variation, processing for setting the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol variation to be executed, processing for updating the normal symbol variation being executed, processing for stopping the normal symbol variation, and execution when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win. Processing to determine the game content of the game per normal figure) is executed.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). The normal pattern (second pattern) win includes the period from when the win is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 (after the win pattern is stopped and displayed) until the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed (until the win game is finished). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). When it is determined that normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed at present (S802: No), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S804 (S804: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S805). That is, when it is determined in the process of S804 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning prize information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is established, the value of the normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in order to execute the normal symbol variation using the retained and stored winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the normal pattern (time saving) (S808), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON (S808: Yes), the winning judgment result (lottery result) is obtained based on the hitting judgment value of the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 140(b)) (S809). ), the process proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 140 (b)), the result of the hit/fail determination is acquired (S810), and the process proceeds to S811.

In the processing of S811, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is winning (S811), and when it is determined that it is winning (S811: Yes), the display mode of ``○'' which is the display mode at the time of winning is set (S812), and the process shifts to S814. On the other hand, in the processing of S811, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not winning (losing) (S811: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode when losing is set (S813), and the process shifts to S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h whether the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state) (S814), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state) (S814: Yes), the variation time of the normal pattern is set to 3 seconds (S815), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S814 that it is not in the time saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S816), and this process is finished.

In this control example, as described above, the variation time of the normal symbols is varied according to the set probability state of the normal symbols. By configuring in this way, at the timing of switching the game state, specifically, at the timing of the end of the jackpot game where the game state is switched from the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set to the short time state (normal symbol high probability state) in which the short variation time is likely to be set, a normal symbol variation with a long variation time is executed, and the normal symbol lottery in the time reduction state is not executed even though the time reduction state is set. can be suppressed.

The method of setting the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may vary the variation time according to the game state, vary the variation time according to the number of normal symbol pending balls, or vary the variation time according to the acquired predetermined value. , and may be configured to be variably set based on. Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the game machine so as to vary the degree of entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal pattern, the easiness of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed according to the game state, so that various game properties can be created.

On the other hand, in the processing of S802, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner (S802: No), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed (S817), and when it is determined that the variation time has not passed (S817: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the processing of S817 (S817: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S818). In the processing of S818, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S812 or S813 described above.

When stop display is set by the process of S818, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S812 or the process of S813.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S819). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (S819: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal pattern is a win (S819: Yes), the current game state is determined by referring to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (high probability state of normal patterns) (S820), and when it is determined that it is during time reduction (high probability state of normal patterns) (S820: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 1 as the game content of the normal pattern per game. The game contents (release operation) of 2 times per second are set (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S820 that it is not in the time-saving mode (high-probability state of normal symbols) (S820: No), the game content (opening operation) in which the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is 5 seconds x 1 time is set as the game content of the normal pattern winning game (S821), and the process proceeds to the processing of S822.

In the process of S822, based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is set (S822), and the process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is set based on the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of performing the processing of S808 to S811). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the low probability state).

That is, in this control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and furthermore, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of normal symbols is configured to be variable based on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols which is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, a high probability state of the normal symbols is set at the timing of judging whether or not the normal symbols are appropriate, and a low probability state of the normal symbols is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role product 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of judging the suitability of the normal pattern, there is a problem that the electric role product 640a is long opened (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the normal symbol propriety determination based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of determining the propriety of the normal symbol, and to set the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (open pattern) of the electric role product 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Only when the state is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (open pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set based on the game state set at the timing of judging whether the normal symbol is right or wrong.

Also, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal symbol lottery result, normal symbol variation variation time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 108) are set with commands indicating the contents of each type of information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 167).

Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, it is processing for acquiring the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, using the value of the obtained normal winning random number counter C5, before the actual success/failure determination is executed (before the success/failure determination (see S811) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 163) is executed), it is a process for acquiring the lottery results (results of success/failure determination) in advance.

In the through-gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), next, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S902), and then it is determined whether the acquired value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls has reached the upper limit) (S903).

In the processing of S903, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), and a lottery is drawn based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)). Obtain the result in advance (S906), set the winning information command for normal drawing including the normal hit determination result (preliminary determination result obtained in the processing of S906) (S907), and finish this process.

The normal figure winning information command set in the process of S907 is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal pattern lottery right can be discriminated in advance, and the performance can be executed based on the preliminary discrimination result.

Specifically, in a state in which a chance zone is set, i.e., in a state in which a second special symbol lottery is executed based on execution of a normal pattern winning game in a normal state, when information indicating winning of a normal pattern is included in a normal pattern prize winning information command received, performance to continue the chance zone until the next normal pattern winning game is executed can be executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is all finished and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal pattern lottery game is executed, the production mode of the variable production executed in response to the first special symbol lottery is not the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the production mode of horizontally varying the third symbol shown in FIG. 122(b)), but the production mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, shown in FIG. 124(b). It is preferable to configure so that a production mode in which the third pattern is fluctuated in the vertical direction) is set. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal pattern is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the chance zone is not finished even though the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can grasp that the next general pattern winning game will be executed soon, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, as a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo variation performance of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is executed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone will be extended.

Next, referring to FIG. 165, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 165 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 166), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1713, S1714).

Similarly, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is sent to the payout control device 111. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 157) and the start winning process (see FIG. 161). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (Variation effect, decoration effect, etc.) are set as information for setting. Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 158) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a command for executing a jackpot effect, and executes jackpot control processing for opening the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. In this jackpot control processing (S1804), a specific winning port 65a (hereinafter referred to as a winning port etc.) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and whether the maximum opening time of the winning port (specific winning port 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the winning port (specific winning port 65a) is determined. Judge. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S821 and the processing of S823 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished and the green LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished and the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting color of the LED is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) has ended, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol is displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159). display).

Furthermore, in this control example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big hit, the other special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (loss pattern) indicating a loss, and the stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 and the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163). Display (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809), and if power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has passed since the start of the main process this time (S1810).

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (999 and 999 in this control example). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 can be updated at random. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value relating to the lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent games aimed at the timing of acquiring the judgment value corresponding to winning.

In the processing of S1809, if the RAM 203 stores the power failure occurrence information (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and as a result of the power failure signal SG1 being output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1809 is executed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from the power failure state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initialization process (FIG. 166, S1701), so that the process of S1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203j is ON (S1901). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON (S1901: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off (S1901: No), next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (that is, whether the jackpot flag 203k is on) (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is off) (S1904: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1905).

In the process of S1905, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a big win operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1906), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

In the first control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)) is used to execute processing for determining the jackpot type (S402 in FIG. 159), and the ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the processing of S1908, the ending command for display corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Instead of setting the length of the ending period at the time of winning the jackpot as in the first control example, the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined according to the presence or absence of the V winning during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the ending period is started (end timing of the final round), it is determined whether the V prize is won during this jackpot game (whether the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON), and if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON, the ending display for 17 seconds indicating that the variable probability state is set (FIG. 127 (b), (d) ) is set as the ending period of the jackpot game, and if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203m is not set to ON, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set to 15 seconds in order to display the ending for 15 seconds (see FIGS. 127(a) and (c)).

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of changing the game state set after the end of the big winning game according to the game result during the big winning game, the ending period corresponding to the actually set game state can be set.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game in this way, the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined at any timing between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period. After the end of the round game that can be played), the presence or absence of the V prize may be discriminated, and based on the discrimination result, the ending period of the big win game may be set during the period in which the round games of the second round to the final round are being executed.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, the length of the ending period is set based on the presence or absence of a V prize during the jackpot game, but instead of this, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game is set in advance based on the jackpot type won as in the first control example. When it is necessary to vary the length of the ending period based on the above, that is, when the V prize cannot be won during the big winning game even though the probability variable big winning game is executed, the length of the preset ending period may be varied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1907, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1909, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (S1909: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S1910), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S1909, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1909: No), winning processing for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1911), abnormal processing for determining whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a was discharged normally (S1912), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot action setting process (S1906) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start one round (S2001). In the process of S2001, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S2003).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the contents of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (first round) are varied according to the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), as the first round round game, a round game that operates the switching valve 65y so that the ball can easily flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) is executed. It is configured as follows. By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to a specific area (V gate 65V) only for a specific period of the long-running jackpot game, so that the player can execute the game during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this control example, when the first round of the variable probability jackpot game is executed, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be able to execute a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period for the player to make the ball flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) in the long-running jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the fact that the detection means has detected that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a guidance notification mode for guiding that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.

Note that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of the conditions. For example, based on the elapsed time or the remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate, it is preferable to change the character color of "Aim for the V", change the size of the display area, or change the characters with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for the V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

In this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V function for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable prize winning device 65, and by varying the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, it is possible to set a period in which the ball easily flows down to a specific gate and a period in which it is difficult for the ball to flow down to the specific gate. , the period during which the sphere is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and the period during which it is difficult for the sphere to flow may be set. As a result, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation contents of the switching valve 65y are grasped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the big winning game of this time is a big winning game that easily makes the ball pass to a specific area (V gate 65V). Further, since the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y can be standardized, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V function (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, when it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processing of S2002 and S2003 is skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning opening 65a is set (S2004), and the processing proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2005), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can be set to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the first round. As a result, in the big wins A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) only by the player shooting the ball in the first round, so that the probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) can be set after the end of the big win game.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1910), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203m is ON (S2101). In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203m is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the big hit, so the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if the variable probability setting flag 203m is off (S2101: No), the process of S2102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2103.

In the process of S2103, 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2103), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i (S2104). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, both the flag 203k during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 170), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball passes through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

Next, details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1911). This prize winning process (S1911) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning hole 65a.

In the winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the current round valid period is reached (S2201). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if it is not the round valid period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2202). A winning command indicating that a prize has been detected is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205). On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and if the round time has elapsed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In addition, in the processing of this S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round game of this big win. In this control example, the same round time elapses and the number of wins are established regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds, but the end condition of the round game may be changed according to the jackpot type, or the end condition of the round game may be changed depending on the number of rounds to be executed.

In the process of S2207, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2207), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether or not the closing of the specific prize winning port 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S2209), and when it is determined that it is the closure based on the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, so the processing of S2210 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the variable probability effective flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), and when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S2206 (S2206: No), the processes of S2207 to S2211 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is ON (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is OFF (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203 is ON in the process of S2212 (S2212: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203r is ON (S2217). In the processing of S2217, if the variable probability effective flag 203r is off (S2217: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203r is ON (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s (S2218), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219). Then, if the value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, and the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored to execute the processing of updating the variable probability setting flag 203m. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being illegally passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) and given a variable probability state.

On the other hand, if the value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219: Yes), the variable probability effective flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to OFF (S2220), the value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is reset (S2221), and the process ends.

In the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203n (S2214), the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215), the V winning command is set (S2216), and this processing ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality process (S1912) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for determining whether or not the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a has been discharged normally.

In the abnormality processing (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2301). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302). In the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not a ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball passing through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 120(b)) has detected passage of the ball.

In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203t (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the ball has not passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is ON (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is ON (S2304: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2306). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203n and the value of the discharge number counter 203t) matches the number of prizes won (the value of the prize number counter 203o) (S2307).

In the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120(b)) is closed (the period when the switching valve 65y is in the closed state), it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally causing the ball to flow into the fourth flow path 65e and pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203o, the discharge number counter 203t, and the variable probability passage counter 203n are reset (S2311), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 172), it is possible to quickly detect and notify the occurrence of a problem such as ball clogging occurring inside the variable winning device 65 and the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a not being discharged normally.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 186, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 173, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the current start-up processing was started during execution of the power-off processing (see FIG. 174) in S4117 due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (because the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut off), so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if this launch process was started after the power outage was completed after the power outage was instantaneous power outage, or if the reset was started only on the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 by noise, etc. Since the keyword 55AAh is remembered, the data of RAM223 is determined to be normal (S4003: NO) and shifts to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset during execution of the power-off processing in S4117. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on when the current start-up processing is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off, for example, because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely cut off, the process of S4004 to S4006 was passed through to the process of S4008, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clear processing of S4009 is skipped is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 through the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. This is because the control of the lamp control device 113 can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). The reason why it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S4101 is that S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), but it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are executed to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting presentation, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the setting for switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the performance effect, and the corresponding performance is set to be performed when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4111, command determination processing (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and a variable display setting process is executed for setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4201: Yes), the status command reception process is performed (S4202), and this process ends. This state command receiving process (S4202) receives a state command indicating the current game state, sets a mode effect mode according to the game state, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding effect mode (for example, back image) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加For example, when a state command indicating a variable probability state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when a state command indicating a time saving state is received, a display command corresponding to the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. Details of the actually set game state and the switching control of the effect mode in the mode effect to be executed will be described later. The details of this status command reception processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined that the state command is not received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), then it is determined whether the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203), and if it is determined that it is received (S4203: Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command is set to ON (S4204), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special figure stop type command has been received (S4206). (S4207), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the processing of S4206 (S4206: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Here, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S4209: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, if you receive the holding ball number of special designs, the first special design of the main control device 110 contained in the holding ball number command, the first special pattern holding Counter 203D, the second special pattern holding ball counter 203E (that is, the number of holding balls on the fluctuation display of the special pattern), is extracted. Update the value of the special pattern holding ball count 223c provided in the RAM223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the Unta value.

Further, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the number of reserved balls of variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the pending ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, through gate 67) and the values of various pending ball counters are added, or when the values of various pending ball counters are decremented when various fluctuation start processing is executed. The values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h of 113 can be matched with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.

Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e, and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is notified when the reserved ball number command is notified based on the change of the number of reserved balls at the time of the start winning or when the variable display is set. can be modified to match the values of various reserved ball number counters, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110.

Also, in the process of S4209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4212), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (storing) the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (winning information storage area 223b in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113), and executes the effect (prefetching effect) based on the received winning information. Details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4211, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4211: No), next, it is determined whether or not the design determination command has been received (S4213), and when it is determined that the design determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), the stop display of the third design is set (S4214), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), then it is determined whether or not the general map related command has been received (S4215). In addition, the general figure related process is executed (S4216) and detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4217), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4217: Yes), the processing related to the jackpot is executed (S4218), and then the processing ends. A detailed description of the jackpot related process (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4219), and this process ends.

Next, the state command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4202). This state command reception processing (S4202) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes processing for setting the display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 differently according to the set game state. The details of the status command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4301: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4302).

In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the processing of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time saving state (S4306), and if it is determined that the game state is the time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the time saving state) (S4306: Yes), the time saving medium counter 22 The value of 3n is set to 100 (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the gaming state does not have a time saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309). When the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the process proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to OFF (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the processing of S4304, the game state set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g is set in the past state area (S4304), the game state corresponding to the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g (S4305), and this processing ends.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, only by outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern can be set based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, information (confirmation information) indicating the content of the display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the sound lamp control device 113 side, and a determination means for determining whether the confirmation information received by the sound lamp control device 113 side is appropriate is provided, and the determination result is provided. is not proper, a simple display variation pattern command indicating proper information is set, and the content of the already set display data is rewritten to the simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, simple display data showing proper information can be set, and a variable effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). As the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, or display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol, may be used display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable effect display.

In this control example, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern may be set on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the winning command process (see S4212) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S4212). This winning command processing (S4212) is executed when receiving a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, a normal symbol lottery winning information command set when the lottery right for the normal symbol lottery is acquired, or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). It is determined whether or not winning information (winning information of winning by normal pattern) is included (S4403), and when it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal patterns (S4404).

Here, when it is determined that the present state is not the high probability state of the normal pattern, that is, it is the normal state (S4404: No), it is a state in which the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery winning in the normal state is acquired and the chance zone is highly likely to be set, so a display command for suggesting the opening of the electric churong is set (S4405), and the process is shifted to S4406. When the display command is set in the processing of S4405, the display control device 114 is notified with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control processing of another sound lamp control device, and a suggestion effect (for example, an effect to incite whether or not the small display region Dm3 is formed in the main display region Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) suggesting that the normal figure winning game is executed during the normal state and the electric role product 640a is long opened (opened for 5 seconds). executed.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the above-described suggestion performance is executed only when the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired in the normal state, but it is not limited to this. As a result, it is possible to set the case where the normal pattern winning game is executed and the case where it is not executed when the suggestive performance is executed, so that the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins the normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, the suggestive effect is configured to be executed. In addition to this configuration, the timing at which the normal pattern lottery is actually executed based on the special symbol lottery being executed or the preliminary determination result of the special pattern lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, that is, the timing at which the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information command for the normal pattern indicating the winning of the normal pattern is executed (per normal pattern). A pre-game state process for determining whether or not the game state at the timing at which the game is executed is the normal state may be executed, and when it is determined that the game state is the normal state, the above-described suggestive performance may be executed. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 177, the description continues. In the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the winning information command for the normal figure is not received (S4402: No), if it is determined that there is no winning information in the processing of S4403 (S4403: No), If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in the processing of S4404 (S4404: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4406.

In the process of S4406, a special figure winning information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. The details of this special figure winning information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4407, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2216) set when the ball flows down to the variable probability switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S1911 in FIG. 171)) (S4407). Move to the process of 9. Also, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4409). If the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4409: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set OFF (S4410), a display command for reporting the V prize is set (S4411), the V notification flag 223m is set ON (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, when the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4413, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S4406) executed in the winning command process (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S4406).

When the special figure winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S4503). If it is determined that the special continuous announcement flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d (FIG. 147(a)) is used to select the presence or absence of continuous announcement (S4504), and then it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement is to be executed (S4505). If it is determined that the continuous notice will be executed (S4505: Yes), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

Also, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), if it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON in the process of S4503 (S4503: No), and if it is determined that the continuous notice is not executed in the process of S4505 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, the display command based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command is set (S4507), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the normal figure related process (S4216) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general-purpose map related process (S4216). This general pattern related process (S4216) is a process executed when a general pattern variation pattern command indicating that a normal pattern lottery is executed, a general pattern pattern start command indicating that a general pattern pattern winning game is started, and a general pattern pattern pattern ending command indicating the end of a general pattern pattern pattern drawing are received from the main control device 110.例文帳に追加

When the normal pattern related processing (S4216) is executed, it is first determined whether a normal pattern variation pattern command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4601: Yes), the normal pattern variation start command for display is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is greater than 0, that is, whether it is in a normal pattern high probability state (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern variation pattern command received this time is a normal pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that is won per normal pattern (S4604), and if it is determined that it is not elected per normal pattern (S4604: No), as it is. End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal pattern is won (S4604: Yes), the long open pattern is executed for the normal pattern per variation, so a display command indicating waiting for the long open is set (S4605), and this processing is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will soon be set.

In addition, in the main system example, the processing form (display form that forms a small display area DM3) is displayed based on whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation fluctuates or not, but it is not limited to this. In the part of the vibration fluctuation, the display form (display form that forms a small display area DM3) may be displayed in FIG. 123 (B).

Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied according to the content of the variation performance (third symbol variation performance) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. For example, when the variation performance with high expectation for big win (for example, ready-to-win performance) is executed in the third symbol variation performance, the display content of the small display region Dm3 may be made smaller than when the variation performance with high expectation for big win (for example, ready-to-win performance) is not executed. Good. In this way, by variably controlling the display contents by giving a relationship between the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the useless supply of a lot of game information and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 179, the description continues. If it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received in the process of S4601 (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S466), and if it is determined that the normal pattern per start command is received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607) : No), set a display command indicating that the long open is in progress (S4608), and terminate this process. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the long open win is being executed. Moreover, when it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the start command per normal pattern is not received (S4606: No), it is determined whether the end command per normal pattern is received (S4609), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 0 (S4610), and if it is determined that the value of the counter 223n is 0 (S461) 0: No) Then, it is determined whether the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h is 1 or more (S4611), and if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4612), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4612: No), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S4613), and a special effect is set. The middle flag 223i is set to off (S4614), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4610 to S4612, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218) will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218). In the jackpot-related processing (S4218), the third symbol display device 81 executes the performance display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In the jackpot related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating entry into the chance mode (a time-saving state is set) is set (S4708), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147(b)) is used to select whether or not the V notification effect is to be executed (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). When it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), a V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), an ending display mode indicating entry into a super chance mode (variable probability state is set) is set (S4707), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S4708 process.

That is, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, the ending periods of different lengths are set according to the set jackpot types (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is started. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of the jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control for displaying information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games being played), and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently performed to set the ending display mode during the jackpot game period. Since there is no need to execute the display control of , the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the big win game, but without being limited to this, the ending display mode may be set during the big win fluctuation of the special symbol in which the big win game is confirmed to be executed, or the remaining period of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period when the control process is small in the big win game period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the command for the number of rounds has been received (S4709). When it is determined that it is one round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712: Yes), a display command for guiding V winning is set (S4713), and this process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in the processing of S4711 that the current round number is not the 1st round (V round), i.e., a round game other than the first round is started (S4711: No), and in the processing of S4712 when it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4714). If it is determined in the process of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this process ends.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the above-described jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and is a process for finally determining the ending display mode executed during the ending period.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and if it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is OFF (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the second half period (7 seconds) of the ending period is set (S4803), and the process proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the process of S4803, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set corresponding to the setting of the variable probability state in advance (see FIG. 236(d)) is executed to the display mode (see FIG. 236(c)) corresponding to the time saving state being set. In this control example, since the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1827 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a variable pattern command for display based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4901). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4901: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S4905 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), and then the special figure 1 effect mode setting process for generating the display fluctuation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type is executed (S4903), and the winning information storage area 223b corresponds to the first special symbol. The data to be shifted is shifted (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4905, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM223 is ON (S4905). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4905: No), since it is in a state where the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S4909 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), then the special figure 2 effect mode setting process is executed (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. The details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4909, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4909: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop category selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special figure 1 stop category selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop category selection flag 223e2 that is set to on is set to off (S4910), then the special figure 1 for display or the special figure 2 stop category command is set based on the stop category extracted from the command (S4911) , and then terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described. Figure 183 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S4903). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable effect of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the set game state is executed.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5002), a display command for indicating the value of the time saving counter 223n after the subtraction is set (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the process of S5004, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If it is determined to be the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5007). When it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the probability variable performance selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S5009), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5009 described above. In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the game is in the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to the process of S5009. The details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described. Figure 184 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4907). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variable effect of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the set game state is executed.

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S5101), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S5101: Yes), the command for display indicating entering the chance zone is set (S5102), then the flag 223i during the special effect is set to ON (S5103), and the normal special figure 2 effect selection table 222b (FIG. 145) (see S5104), sets a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode (S5105), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5107), and the value of the time saving counter 223n after subtraction is set (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109. In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the processing of S5109, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If the super chance mode is determined (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5112). When it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the effect mode (details of effect) is determined based on the variable probability effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), the processing of S5105 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to the process of S5115. The details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S5115, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the above-described process of S5105 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the effect setting process during the chance mode (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)) during the chance mode executed in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184).

In the chance mode production setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time saving counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the read value of the time saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high speed period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is not 99 (S5202: No), then it is determined whether the read value of the counter 223n during time saving is 79 (S5204). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), the normal first period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is not 79 (S5204: No), it is then determined whether the read value of the counter 223n during time saving is 49 (S5206). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag 223q is ON (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is ON (S5208: Yes), the continuous effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the processing of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuation notice flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), the special valid time timer is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (S5211), the special continuation notice flag 223o is set to off (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213. In the process of S5210, also when it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the process proceeds to S5213.

In the process of S5213, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5214), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect (operation effect) according to the operation of the player in order to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the player can operate the frame button 22 by a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, it is possible to distinguish between a "normal press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds) and a "long press" in which the frame button 22 is kept pressed for a long time (2 seconds or more). Then, different operation presentations can be executed according to the determined operation content. As a result, the frame button 22 can be operated by various operation methods so as to execute various operation presentations for the player, so that early boredom of the game can be suppressed. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but the number of operation methods may be one, or three or more. Also, in this control example, the frame button 22 is the only type of operation means that can be operated by the player. Then, the discriminable operation method may be configured so as to be discriminated not only by operations on individual operation means but also by a combination of operation contents executed on a plurality of operation means. In addition, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, a first operation means and a second operation means), it may be configured to determine that the same operation has been performed (determine that the same operation method) has been performed when the first operation is performed on the first operation means and when the second operation is performed on the second operation means. By configuring in this way, for example, when the arrangement position of the first operation means and the arrangement position of the second operation means are separated, the player can select the operation means that is easy to operate and enjoy the operation.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is greater than 0) (S5301). It should be noted that this SW valid time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when the variation pattern effect using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S5301: Yes), the value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW valid time counter 223r (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5303.

In the processing of S5303, it is determined whether or not the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special valid time timer is subtracted (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the processing of S5305, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that it is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the in-operation counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. ). If it is determined in the process of S5306 that it is not within the effective time (S5306: No), and if it is determined in the process of S5307 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is decremented (S5312), and it is determined whether the subtracted value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the process proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the in-operation counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the in-operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5314.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current chance mode is in progress (S5314). If it is determined that the current is in the chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.

In the processing of S5314, when it is determined that the current mode is not in the chance mode (S5314: No), the button performance corresponding to the current operation method and the content of the performance being executed is set (S5316), and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, other button processes (background change, etc.) are executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. In other words, the number of operation presentations executed during the period in which each effective time is set is one. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the operation presentation.

In addition, the processing for the remaining period of the SW valid time and the special valid time is not limited to this. For example, when the valid time is set to 10 seconds, within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the valid time is set. When the operation of the frame button 22 is received (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186), a new valid time may be set during the special symbol fluctuation period. By constructing in this way, the number of operation performances executed during one special symbol variation period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 .

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 201. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 to complete drawing processing of one frame of an image. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 187, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", the data for one page including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, the NOR ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read out at high speed by storing in the NOR ROM 234d a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. The boot program stored in d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 188, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like, while eliminating the need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and executes various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, subsequently, according to the rest of the boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S610). 3). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) is completed (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and ending the boot process.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all made up of DRAM. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated productions using the auxiliary production unit.

On the other hand, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. may be The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may be such that a part of the remaining boot program is further transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may be further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a may be set in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is repeated a plurality of times including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

In this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is canceled, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 187 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw and display an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can start normally by inspecting whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the leading address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. be done.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 may write transfer end information indicating transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. The MPU 231 may read information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detect the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the head address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the power-on varying image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. transferred to The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process (see S7502 in FIG. 199A) is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see S7502 in FIG. 199A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is kept ON until transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during this period, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189B) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189B).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, a player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64 (start winning). , that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since a simple variation performance can be performed by using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play the game at ease even while the power-on main image is displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the power is restored.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 189(a). FIG. 189(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 189(b). FIG. 189(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after identifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a drawing list of the image is created and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 189(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). , command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. At the same time, if the display demonstration command or the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. do.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the drawing of the image can be controlled so as to display the performance image corresponding to the mode on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically specified. In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is instructed to use the continuous notice effect. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the image and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 155 is generated from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that the details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected in the command determination processing, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. migrate.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195, details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 190, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then all the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 191(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always makes a judgment of the start of variation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, when a variation performance having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is instructed by the main controller 110, the next variation pattern command for display is received from the main controller 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and another variation display is suddenly started. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variable display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present control example, even if the main controller 110 actually instructs a variable effect having a longer variation time than the set display data table, the display is set so that the demonstration effect is displayed after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed and until the next display pattern command is received from the main controller 110, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the processing, the player can continue to see the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is finished, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406).

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of the big hits A to G, the small hits A to C, the reach out, and the complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is finally set (S6602).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set to on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is described as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. In the task processing (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since main controller 110 always determines the start of a change several seconds or more apart, two or more stop-type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing command determination processing, it is impossible for two or more stop-type commands for display to be stored in the command buffer area. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type table is determined on the assumption that the stop type is completely out of line. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is set, the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 even when the ``big win of the special pattern'' is actually set, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has hit the ``big hit of the special pattern'', and there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, by setting the stop pattern corresponding to the complete loss as in the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special pattern jackpot" even if the third symbol display device 81 displays the stop pattern of the complete loss if it is actually a ``special symbol jackpot'', so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408).

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410).

Here, with reference to FIG. 192(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412).

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414).

Here, with reference to FIG. 194(a), the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 194(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is a fluctuation pattern set in the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 182), that is, to set the variable pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110. The end timing of the time) shows the displayed stop command (normal stop command) output from the audio lamp control device 113 in the timing of the main control device 110.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416).

Details of the notification command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 194(b). FIG. 194(b) is a flow chart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the audio lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this control example, among the various notification commands set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the target of notification is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). is added, the related command may be output to the corresponding control device.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418).

Here, with reference to FIG. 195(a), details of the back image change command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 195(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the bit corresponding to the other back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, the range of the back face image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the back face image range is stored, Identify the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, it does not receive two or more background image change commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on, or the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420).

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 195(b). FIG. 195(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the warning image corresponding to the error type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 191(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 191(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are extracted, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on varying image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, so S650. In the process of 2, the process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 196, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 and S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for causing the third pattern display device 81 to display an error warning image corresponding to all the error discrimination flags set to ON is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the developed warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 198 . FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, each data table has start information written at address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after address "0001H". When the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. data can be read.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timer counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 to initialize (S7405), and this process is executed. End and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is described are always developed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 196 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), based on the rendering content developed in S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are identified, and various parameters required for rendering, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether or not the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the fixed display flag is off (S7209: No), the fixed display effect has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the fixed display effect, so first the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop pattern discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop pattern discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stop pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. As compared with the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 does not have a heavy load, so that a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and the variable display data table describes the pattern offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation, the stop pattern of the previously performed variable performance is specified from the last stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display performance, so after a lapse of a fixed time from the end of the fixed display performance, processing for displaying the demonstration performance on the third pattern display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation performance is not received after the fixed display performance is finished.

In the processing of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration performance is performed after the completion of the fixed display performance, which means that the demonstration performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated as it is, and the V interrupt processing is returned to. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration performance is started again by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, as described above, so that the demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, a process of setting a display data table for stopping display of one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends, is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 199(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is completed, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is OFF (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 199(b). FIG. 199B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the resident image transfer setting process ends because the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). If there is resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data that has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data to be transferred here). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)), the command determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed. is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident object image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as back images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, etc. are resident. Responsiveness can be kept high until 81 displays some image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703). A transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705).

In the process of S7706, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and after setting the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 as the image data to be transferred, the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x that is in the ON state is specified among the back image discrimination flags 233x provided for each back image type, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the processing in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the transfer target image data to be transferred here is to be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off".

Thus, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in task processing (S6304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by transfer setting processing (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified, and the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and a drawing list is generated by describing, as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite, in the sprite order after the rearrangement. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. Therefore, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the top address of the transfer destination in anticipation of the time when it is in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing can be simultaneously processed in parallel.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time drawing processing of V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image for one frame is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read, and the drawing processing and display processing of the image are executed. After 20 milliseconds from the completion of the drawing processing for the image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. 6b is specified. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately designating one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c for each 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame, the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being rendered.

As explained above, in the first control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed in duplicate (in parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time saving state, variable probability state) is set rather than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state), it is easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In addition, it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. That is, when the game is played in the normal state which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. By constructing in this manner, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the game state to be set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game while expecting the game state with a high degree of advantage to be set.

In addition, when winning is won in a normal pattern lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of normal patterns is set, a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which the second special symbol lottery can easily be executed even in a normal state that is a game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player playing in the normal state can be made to execute a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot winning and a game aiming for a winning lottery in the normal symbol lottery, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

Furthermore, in this control example, the performance mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be varied based on the stored lottery right number of the second special symbol, that is, the special figure 2 reserved number. Specifically, as a performance mode of the special figure 2 variation performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-loss variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a win is performed in the first half period of the variation performance, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to perform a pseudo-hit variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, and the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation performance. The number of times is configured to be variable corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the variable performance of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big win. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery is conducted a plurality of times.

As a result, even when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special pattern lottery to be executed first among a plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal game per game, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the big prize because the plurality of special figure 2 reservations are obtained during the normal game per game, so that the player can play the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation more enthusiastically during the normal game per game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reserved number in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 0, as the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance, the variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the pseudo repetition of the special figure 2 variation performance in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variable performance imitating the special figure 1 variable performance is executed, the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, so that the unexpected variable performance can be executed for the player.

In this control example, when a variable probability jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as a performance mode of the notification performance (at the start of the jackpot game). The notification effect of the mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball does not flow down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, and the variable probability jackpot advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, there is a problem that if the performance mode of the jackpot ending period is simply changed to the performance mode executed in the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification performance is executed during the ending period. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode which is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game is made in advance, it is necessary to store image data (performance data) for the performance mode in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is set to be common regardless of the jackpot type, and when the balls cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the normal win game. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification performance that does not give a sense of incompatibility to a player without providing a special performance mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the variable probability big winning game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the latter half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, so that the effect mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game is configured to switch. The notification performance executed for a period may be executed, or the round performance executed during the final round period of the big win game may be continuously executed for a predetermined period after the big win ending period is set, and then the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual big win ending period by executing the notification performance.

Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which the ball flowing down the right area enters the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left area described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this control example, regardless of the set game state and whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the same privilege is provided whether the player executes the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be left-right symmetrical, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that the amount of privilege that the player can obtain does not differ greatly between when playing a left-handed game and when playing a right-handed game. The ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game, so that the left-handed game is more difficult to acquire prize balls than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is more likely to acquire prize balls than the left-handed game, but it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, i.e., during the execution of the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method, and in the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (the game during the time-saving state or the probability variable state), the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the case where the command for the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the number of winnings to the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to one time. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) that differs by the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of areas divided into four.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling patterns as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying patterns in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but includes, for example, a performance display in which one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern, by variously displaying actions or changing displays. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, each display mode may be set by using common image data of the display control device 114, for example, so that the player can hardly distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, the left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. is executed, and in the time-saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed, or a left-handed game may be executed during the time-saving state and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described control examples, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed when any game state is set or when the jackpot game is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means is determined to be operated by the player pressing the button. or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as an effect operation means for changing the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal capable of inputting an output signal from the frame button 22) and outputting to the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of operation means for performance are provided, output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of operation means for performance can be centrally managed, so that the mode of performance for the player's operation of the operation means for performance can be set smoothly.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, during a predetermined period (until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times), a high-speed variation period in which a short-time variation time is selected can be set, and during the high-speed variation period, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background mode transition effect is not performed (hardly performed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a background mode transition performance is executed as an operation performance during a period in which a short time variation time is likely to be selected, and the player has difficulty in grasping the stop display mode of the third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

Further, in the first control example, when the first operation of the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, that is, in the state where the normal state is set, when the operation for executing the background mode transition effect ("normal push") is performed, the operation effect of the effect mode different from the background mode transition effect is executed. As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the second operation (“long press”) other than the above-described first operation (“normal press”) is executed to enable execution of the background mode transition effect. By constructing in this way, the background mode transition performance can be provided to the player who intends to execute the background mode transition performance after knowing that it is difficult to grasp the stop display mode of the third pattern. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been performed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, so that it is possible to suppress excessive difficulty in grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol.

As in the present embodiment, the first operation processing to be executed by performing the first operation on the operation means when the predetermined condition is not satisfied may be applied to other technologies, such as the volume adjustment processing to adjust the loudness (volume) of the sound output by the pachinko machine 10, or the brightness of the liquid crystal display when the liquid crystal display is used as the third symbol display device 81. is applied as the above-described first operation processing, the first operation processing can be executed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, when the special symbol variation is not executed), and the first operation processing can be made difficult to execute when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the special symbol variation is performed).

Further, as the above-mentioned predetermined conditions, not only the existence or non-existence of special symbol variations, but also the condition that is established when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or the condition that is established during the jackpot game may be set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the above-described first operation is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is preferable to execute a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, a process of notifying that the first operation process will not be executed). Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the first operation process is not executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute another operation presentation that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even when the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the above-described first operation process may be executed by executing a second operation different from the first operation, as in the present control example. In addition, in the first control example, the first operation and the second operation can be performed by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22). However, the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to this. can be configured to Also, in this case, the second operation may be configured to be more difficult to execute than the first operation. For example, the first operation means may be arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, which is always operable by the player, and the second operation means may be arranged on the back side (see FIG. 121) of the pachinko machine 10, which is difficult for the player to operate.

Furthermore, when the above-described first operation means and second operation means are provided, the first operation validity determination period for validly determining the operation on the first operation means and the second operation validity determination period for validly determining the operation on the second operation means may be set uniformly, or different periods may be set. If the operation validity determination periods are unified, the validity period determination process can be simplified. In addition, when different periods are set, the period for judging that the operation is effective differs according to the type of operating means to be operated, so that the game can be motivated to operate various operating means at various timings.

In the first control example described above, a normal state and a plurality of advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set, and when one of the advantageous game states is set, the player can be notified of the period (remaining period) until the next normal state is set, not the period until the set game state is completed.

Here, conventionally, when an advantageous game state (for example, probability variable state or time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the number of times of special symbol fluctuations). Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.

In recent years, there are some game machines that can set a plurality of state types as advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, and as advantageous game states, there are some that can set a normal advantageous game state (for example, a short-time state) and a most advantageous game state (for example, a variable state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, when the game state shifts from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the most advantageous game state continues, and after that, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the normal advantageous game state continues.

In other words, in a state in which the most advantageous game state is set, it is possible for the player to grasp the period (remaining period) during which the most advantageous game state continues, but the player cannot grasp what kind of game state is set after the most advantageous game state ends and how long the game state continues after the most advantageous game state ends.

Therefore, when the most advantageous game state ends, the player cannot grasp whether a game state more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state is set or a game state (for example, normal state) disadvantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state is set, and it is difficult to understand what the player should aim at during the most advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, when a plurality of types of advantageous game states are successively set, the advantageous game state remaining period display mode is configured to display the period until the plurality of types of advantageous game states are terminated, that is, the period until the next normal state is set. By constructing in this way, when advantageous game states of different types are set continuously, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to straddle the successively set advantageous game states, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period straddling a plurality of successively set advantageous game states (variable probability state, short working hours state) is notified, the presently set game state is configured to be difficult for the player to identify whether it is the variable probability state or the short working time state. Therefore, since the game state set during the advantageous game state period can be made difficult to understand, the player can play the game while expecting the advantageous game state to be set.

In the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period straddling a plurality of successively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is notified, a suggestive performance capable of suggesting the currently set game state or the game state set in the past can be executed. As a result, the player can be interested in the content of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Further, in the first control example, the operation performance can be executed in a plurality of types of performance modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each performance mode is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, since the player can predict the current game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the advantageous game state period, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since only the selection ratio of each performance mode is changed according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved by increasing the number of operation performances executed during the advantageous game state period. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means (frame button 22). In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the "chance mode" as described above with reference to FIG. 149, and when the "ready-to-win suggestion" is selected as the effect mode of the operation effect, a "ready-to-win suggestion" effect is executed to indicate whether the special symbol variation being executed is in the ready-to-win state, and if it is in the ready-to-win state, to suggest the ready-to-win line and the ready-to-win pattern to the player. It is also possible to judge whether or not there is prize winning information to be in a ready-to-win state in the winning information on the second special symbols stored in b, and to inform the player that the second special symbol variation to be in a ready-to-reach state is to be executed based on the determination result before the execution of the second special symbol variation. In this way, the performance effect of the operation presentation can be further enhanced by expanding not only the special pattern variation under execution but also the reserved and stored special pattern variation (special pattern variation to be executed in the future).

In the above-described first control example, the frame button 22 is operated by the player to perform the background mode transition or the effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. function may be used. As with the transition to the background mode described above, the volume adjustment function and the brightness adjustment function may also make it difficult to see the variation effect of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is established, specifically, when a period (high-speed variation period) in which a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation is set, it may be configured to be less likely to be performed than when other periods are set.

In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set. Further, in the above-described first control example, a first period during which a specific effect mode (background mode transition) is easily executed as an operation effect executed by operating the operating means and a second period during which the specific effect mode (transition to the background mode) is more difficult to execute than the first period are provided.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 210. FIG. The second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control details are different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the above-described first control example, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122(b) are configured to be displayed in one image layer. On the other hand, the second control example is different in that the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz constituting each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in different layers. By synchronizing and controlling the display of the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz displayed on different layers, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be variably displayed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, conventionally, as the identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various performances (variation performances) are executed during the variable display of the third pattern, and the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play the game while expecting a big win.

By the way, as a general gaming machine, there is a game machine that executes a symbol variation display using a plurality (for example, three) of symbol rows formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols to which numbers 1 to 9 are attached), and executes an effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that increases the expectation of a big win when a predetermined third symbol is stop-displayed in another symbol row except for one symbol row. However, in the conventional game machine, the variable display is performed by changing only the variable speed of the variable display without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the variable performance using the variable display of the symbol row cannot be enhanced.

In addition, it has been proposed to increase the variation of the variable display by arranging identification information (sub-symbol) other than the identification information (main symbol) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery in one symbol row.

Further, there is a method in which a plurality of symbol rows having different layouts and types of main symbols and sub-symbols are prepared in advance, and when executing a specific variable performance, the performance effect of the variable performance is enhanced by varying the symbol row itself, but it is necessary to execute control to variably display different symbol rows according to the variable performance to be executed, so there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in this control example, the symbol row display is performed using a plurality of layers. Specifically, the main symbols and the sub-symbols forming the symbol row are displayed on separate layers. In normal times, by synchronizing and variably displaying the main symbols and the sub-symbols, various symbols forming the symbol row are variably displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122(b)), and by differentiating the variably-displayed contents of the main symbols and the variably-displayed contents of the sub-symbols, the symbol row can be variably displayed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement.

By constructing in this manner, while using the image data of the third patterns (main pattern, sub-pattern) forming the specific pattern row, the variable display of the third pattern can be easily performed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 202, display contents displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layers formed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example and the display screen, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-symbol layer fr is set to be ON, and FIG. 202(c) is a view showing an example of the effect result of the display effect of FIG. There is.

As shown in FIG. 202(a), in the second control example, the main symbol layer sr displaying the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol layer fr displaying the sub-symbol fz are overlapped, and the main symbol layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-symbol layer fr (on the player's line of sight). Although only the main symbol layer sr and the sub-symbol fz are shown in FIG. 202(a), in reality, various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. Layers are superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. 155, each layer is formed corresponding to each sprite such as the back image used in the image of one frame, the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), and the character (character 1, character 2, . As for the portion where the display images overlap, the display image displayed in the front layer (layer) is preferentially visible.

In the second control example configured as described above, when both the main symbol sz displayed on the main symbol layer sr and the sub-symbol fz displayed on the sub-symbol layer fr are variably displayed, the main symbol sz is displayed with priority over the sub-symbol fz. Therefore, the identification information (main symbol sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is hidden by the identification information (sub-symbol fz) not indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform variable display control so that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz do not overlap in order to make the result of the special pattern lottery easier for the player to visually recognize, the variable display control can be simplified, and the limited display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be utilized to the maximum to execute the variable display of the main pattern sz.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the main symbol layer sr is arranged on the front side (preferentially) of the sub-symbol layer fr, and the main symbol sz is displayed preferentially over the sub-symbol fz. ) may be arranged. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the main symbol sz while each symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) is being variably displayed. Therefore, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery until the variation of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is stopped and displayed, the variation performance of the third pattern with expectations can be executed until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202(b) and FIG. 202(c), the variation effect executed by the display control for each pattern layer will be described. As described above, in this control example, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz constituting the symbol row can be displayed independently. Further, it is possible to set whether or not to display the display image set for each layer. In other words, while internally executing display control for each layer, it is possible to set whether or not to display the layer itself (on or off).

FIG. 202(b) shows an example of the display screen when the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub-symbol layer fr is set to on. On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, only the sub-symbol fz among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the sub-pattern fz is stop-displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed, thereby displaying characters of 'reach line notice start' indicating that the reach-line notice performance for notifying the player of the reach-line effective in the third pattern change of this time is executed. After that, the effect result corresponding to the stop position of the sub symbol fz is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 202(c), the secondary symbol fz is stopped and displayed in a "rhombus shape", and characters of "Double reach fixed" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a rendering result indicating that the ready-to-win state is reached on the effective line L4 and the effective line L5 (see FIG. 122). When the ready-to-reach line notice effect is completed, the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to ON, and a variable effect is executed to suggest to the player what the type of the main pattern sz to be in the ready-to-reach state on the effective line L4 and the effective line L5 (see FIG. 122) will be, and then the double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is executed.

In this way, in the second control example, the variable display of the main symbol sz and the variable display of the sub-symbol fz can be performed differently. Therefore, by first variably displaying the sub-symbol fz, the player can be notified of the location where the main symbol sz will be stopped and displayed, and then by variably displaying the main symbol sz, the type of the main symbol sz that will be in the ready-to-win state can be notified. Therefore, the effect result of the third symbol variation effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery can be presented to the player in stages, and an easy-to-understand effect can be provided.

In the reach line notice effect explained with reference to FIGS. 202(b) and (c), the player is notified in advance of only the stop display position of the main symbol sz by the stop display position of the sub symbol fz. In addition, for example, the type of the main symbol sz to be stopped and displayed, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery may be indicated by the arrangement of the sub symbol fz which is stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, when the sub-symbol fz is stop-displayed in all areas other than the area forming the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)) as a result of the reach line notice effect, a combination of specific main symbols sz (for example, a combination of "3.4.1" from the top) may be stop-displayed on the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)).

Here, when the combination of the specific main patterns sz is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third pattern is restarted to execute a variable performance (so-called pseudo-continuous variable performance) for increasing the expectation of winning the big win, or a winning game (a big winning game or a small winning game) is executed as it is. By configuring in this way, when the reach line notice effect is executed, the player can be more interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, in the case where the reach line notice effect that variably displays only the sub-symbol fz is executed first, in order to make it easier for the player to understand whether the current reach line notice effect is to pre-notify only the stop display position of the main symbol sz or to pre-notify the type of the main symbol sz to be stop-displayed, for example, after the sub-symbol fz is stop-displayed (see FIG. 202(c)), the stop-displayed sub-symbols fz are used. (For example, a graphic display in which the sub-symbols fz are connected by a line) may be configured to notify the effect result of the current reach line notice effect. For example, in the state shown in FIG. It is preferable to inform the player that when the figure of the shape is displayed, it indicates in advance that the specific main symbol sz will be stopped and displayed.

In this way, by executing the performance (advance notification of performance result) using the sub-symbol fz that is stopped and displayed until the main symbol sz is stop-displayed, the result of the variation performance (variation performance using the third symbol) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player in stages, so that the player can be continuously interested in the variable performance to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of various patterns pre-stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, a back image for a sea background and a back image for a mountain background can be set as back images. Specifically, when the transition to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the currently set back image (for example, the sea background) is switched to the not currently set back image (for example, the mountain background).

Furthermore, this second control example is configured to vary the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz) according to the type of the set (displayed) back image. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display the main pattern sz in the display mode according to the type of the back image, so that it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the back image is switched.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main pattern sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be described with reference to FIGS. 203(a) and 203(b). FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main pattern for sea used when a sea image (sea background) is set, and FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main image for mountains used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set. These image data are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the background mode is switched, the corresponding image data is read out from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d or the third symbol row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. The contents of the process of reading out the image data corresponding to each pattern and the process of storing in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), the image data corresponding to the marine main pattern sz stores image data (D1 to D9) indicating the main pattern in which nine types (octopus, porcupinefish, turtle, shark, shrimp, monkfish, dugong, angelfish, and crab) are assigned numbers "1 to 9" respectively. The main pattern image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 corresponding to the order in which they are actually displayed. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read the image data D1 in order and store them in the third pattern area 235d.

In the second control example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state are formed by 9 main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9), whereas the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the ready-to-win state is formed by 10 main symbols. . Specifically, the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the symbol row Z1 described above and the main symbols for modification (main symbols corresponding to the image data DA) in which the number 4 is added to the shark mode symbol are added to form the symbol row Z2 with 10 main symbols. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be variably displayed so that the main pattern sz with the number 4 passes after the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. As a result, the main pattern sz of the specific type (the main pattern with the number 4 in this control example) can be passed a plurality of times until the variable display of the pattern row completes one round, so that when the ready-to-win state is established for the main pattern sz of the specific type, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot (the possibility that the main pattern sz that is the combination of the big win is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the ready-to-win state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz establishes the ready-to-win state, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203(b), the image data corresponding to the mountain main pattern sz stores image data (D1 to D9) indicating the main pattern in which nine types (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, rat, and snake) are assigned numbers "1 to 9" respectively. The main pattern image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 corresponding to the order in which they are actually displayed. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read the image data D1 in order and store them in the third pattern area 235d.

As in the case where the sea background is displayed, the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state are formed of nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9), whereas the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the ready-to-reach state is formed of ten main symbols. It consists of Specifically, the design row Z2 is formed with 10 main symbols, which are the 9 main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the above-described symbol row Z1, and a change main symbol (main symbol corresponding to the image data DA) in which the number 4 is attached to the rhino mode pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be variably displayed so that the main pattern sz with the number 4 passes after the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. As a result, the main pattern sz of the specific type (the main pattern with the number 4 in this control example) can be passed a plurality of times until the variable display of the pattern row completes one round, so that when the ready-to-win state is established for the main pattern sz of the specific type, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot (the possibility that the main pattern sz that is the combination of the big win is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the ready-to-win state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz establishes the ready-to-win state, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in the second control example, the image data corresponding to the main symbol sz is read from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol row area 235g as symbol row data for displaying the symbol row. That is, among the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the main pattern row image data corresponding to the main pattern (image data in which each main pattern sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display positions of the sub-pattern fz) is generated for each pattern row and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, using this main symbol row image data, the main symbol sz is variably displayed on the main symbol layer sr. With this configuration, the number of pieces of image data used for display control can be reduced compared to the case where the image data for each symbol is variably displayed, so the processing load for display control can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the second control example, among the symbols forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz can be independently variably displayed. Therefore, even if a plurality of main symbols sz of each symbol row are formed by one image data (main symbol row image data) and variably displayed, various variably displayed forms can be executed by varying the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz. Therefore, even if the number of pieces of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent the production effect from deteriorating.

Furthermore, among the third symbols forming each symbol row, the main symbol sz, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, is variably displayed in symbol row units using the main symbol row image data, and the sub symbol fz, which is identification information not indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, is variably displayed in symbol units. By varying the contents of the variable display, various variable performances can be executed. That is, in diversifying the variable display performance of the third pattern, the main pattern sz whose display mode of the stop display is predetermined can perform various variable performances by varying the content of the variable display of the sub pattern fz while performing the predetermined variable display. Therefore, it is possible to make the variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol reliable and easy to have rich variations.

In the second control example, all the main symbols sz forming the symbol row are configured to have one image data (main symbol row image data). However, the present invention is not limited to this. (For example, probability variable main symbol row image data for generating only symbol rows of (for example, probability variable main symbol sz with odd numbers) are stored in the third symbol row area 235g, and the stored image data may be used to variably display the main symbol sz on the main symbol layer sr.

In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the target special symbol lottery is the variable probability big win, that is, when the combination indicating the big win using the main symbols sz with odd numbers is stopped and displayed, it is possible to vary the content of the variable display using the normal main symbol row image data while executing the predetermined variable display only for the variable probability main symbol row image data. Specifically, the variable display using the normal main pattern row image data may be executed at a higher speed than the variable display using the probability variable main pattern row image data so that the player can visually recognize only the probability variable main symbols sz with odd numbers. As a result, the player can be notified of a state in which only the probability variation main pattern sz is variably displayed and only the probability variation main pattern sz is stop-displayed in the third pattern variation of this time, that is, a state in which the normal pattern (main pattern with an even number) is not stop-displayed and the player cannot normally win a jackpot.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main symbol sz is divided into the normal main symbol row image data and the probability variation main symbol row image data and generated separately, the normal main symbol layer (layer) that displays the normal main symbol using the normal main symbol row image data and the probability variation main symbol layer (layer) that displays the probability variation main symbol using the probability variation main symbol row image data are configured to be different, and the normal main symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to determine whether or not to display the main symbol sz displayed in the symbol layer or the variable probability main symbol layer (whether to enable (turn on) the display of each layer). Further, as in the first control example described above, the variable display control may be executed using the image data for each symbol without generating the symbol row image data forming the symbol row.

Next, referring to FIG. 203(c), the content of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described. FIG. 203(c) is a diagram schematically showing the image data of the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character storage area 234a2. This image data is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the background mode is switched, the corresponding image data is read from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. Since the contents of the process of reading out the image data corresponding to each pattern and the process of storing in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), in the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, at least image data SD1 of a normal sub-symbol fz (see FIG. 122(b)) simulating a triangular mark (see FIG. 122(b)), image data SD2 of a sub-symbol fz simulating a bubble for advance notice effect, and image data SD3 of a special sub-symbol fz simulating the numeral 16 are stored. Although omitted in FIG. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz for notice effect is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the sub-symbol fz for notice effect imitating bubbles shown in FIG. Therefore, the character storage area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of a sub-symbol fz (not shown) imitating a leaf as a sub-symbol fz used when a mountain background is set.

Here, in the second control example, of the third symbols variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, only the sub-symbol fz that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery can be displayed on the sub-symbol layer fr. It consists of Therefore, various variable performances using the sub-symbol fz can be easily executed without changing the variable display contents of the main symbol sz. Further, when various variable performances using the sub-pattern fz are executed, the main pattern layer sr is arranged so as to be preferentially displayed over the sub-pattern layer fr even if a part thereof is overlapped with the main pattern sz, so that the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the main pattern sz can be suppressed.

In the second control example, various variable effects other than the reach line notice effect described with reference to FIGS. 202(b) and 202(c) are configured to be executable as variable effects using the sub-symbol fz. For example, the sub-symbol fz is switched to the display mode for the notice effect using the image data SD2, and at the start of the variable display of the third symbol, the variable display is performed in the opposite direction (for example, the left direction) of the main symbol sz (to the right). A notice performance at the start of fluctuation and a part of the sub-pattern fz are switched to a special display mode using the image data SD3, and according to the number and arrangement of the sub-pattern fz (sub-pattern fz imitating the number 16) of the special display mode stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is stopped, the jackpot type suggestion performance suggesting the jackpot type can be executed.

In this way, the identification information (sub-symbol fz) which is different from the identification information (main design sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and which can be variably displayed during the period when the identification information (main design sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is variably displayed is used to execute various variability performances, whereby the player can be made to pay attention to the variably-displayed sub-symbol fz.

In addition, in the second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main symbol sz, the variable display control of the sub-symbol fz is executed for each symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the control of switching the display mode of only some of the plurality of sub-symbols fz formed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (for example, only the vicinity of the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed) to the display mode for the variable effect. In addition, normally, it is possible to display so that the number of sub-symbols fz displayed one between the main symbols sz is two or more, or it is possible to prevent display of only some of the sub-symbols fz.

Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the start timing of the special symbol variation, or may be the timing when the special symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the variation main symbol in the second control example will be described. FIG. 203(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main symbol for variation. The main pattern for variation is the tenth main pattern provided in the pattern row Z2, that is, the pattern row variably displayed during the ready-to-win state, and is the main pattern for which the image data DA is used among the main pattern display data stored in the character storage area 234a2.

Conventionally, identification information (third pattern) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is variably displayed, and when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, it is indicated that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. In this case, a variable effect is executed to prompt the player whether or not the identification information stopped and displayed is the specific identification information. Here, generally, a variable performance is executed using a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of types of identification information are formed in a specific order. Specifically, in a specific order, a variable effect is executed using a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of identification information (for example, main symbol sz) with numbers 1 to 9 are formed.

In the gaming machine configured in this manner, a variable effect is executed to vary the display mode of the third symbol during the variable display in order to enhance the effect of the third symbol variation. However, when changing the identification information (the third symbol) during the variable display, if the numbers 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, that is, the specific information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery are changed, for example, the nine third symbols to which the numbers 1 to 9 are attached are used to perform the variable display. In spite of this, when the third pattern attached with the number 5 is switched to the third pattern attached with the number 6 during the variation, the third pattern attached with the number 6 disappears, so that there is a possibility that the player will be distrustful that the result of the special symbol lottery has been changed during the variation display of the third pattern.

In addition, for example, when the variable display is performed using nine third patterns with numbers 1 to 9, and a third pattern with the number 6 is newly added on the way, and the variable display is switched to a total of ten third patterns, it is necessary to execute display control to cope with the increase in the number of the third patterns to be displayed in a variable manner, and there is a risk that the content of the control will become difficult.

On the other hand, in this control example, the main symbols numbered 1 to 9 and the main symbols for change form the symbol row Z2 with 10 main symbols. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the main symbols without changing the number of the main symbols forming the symbol row while leaving various symbols with numbers 1 to 9 attached. Even if the display mode of the main pattern for change is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns forming the pattern row Z2 is not changed, so that the display control for the pattern row Z2 can be easily executed.

As shown in FIG. 203(d), in the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, image data DA1 of the normal main symbol sz with the number 4 attached, image data DA2 of the normal main symbol sz with the number 7 attached, image data DA3 of the V main symbol sz imitating the number 16, image data DA4 of the special main symbol sz imitating the number 16, and disappointing main symbol imitating the cross mark. sz image data DA4 is stored at least. Although omitted in FIG. 202(d), the normal main pattern sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the normal main pattern sz imitating a “shark” and the normal main pattern sz imitating a “dugong” shown in FIG. Therefore, the character storage area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) imitating a "rhinoceros" or a "wild boar" as a normal main pattern sz used when a mountain background is set.

Here, in the variable display performance of the third pattern at the normal time, the main pattern for change using the image data DA1 is displayed in the pattern row Z2, and the main pattern for change using the image data DA2 is displayed in the pattern row Z2 in a part of the case of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery or in a small part of the case of winning the wrong prize in the special pattern lottery. That is, the main symbol sz for change imitating a "shark" with the number 4 is displayed in a variable manner in normal times, so that the symbol row Z2 is formed by a total of 10 main symbols, 5 main symbols (main symbols with even numbers) suggesting normal jackpot winning (main symbols with even numbers) and 5 main symbols (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating probability variable jackpot winning. In a very part of the cases where the player loses and wins the game, the changing main pattern sz imitating a ``dugong'' with a number 7 is variably displayed to form a pattern row Z2 with a total of 10 main patterns including 4 main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting normal jackpot winning and 6 main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating probability variable jackpot winning.

As a result, the special symbol lottery that is currently being executed may have won a big win (probability variable big win) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. As for the condition for using the main pattern sz for change simulating the ``dugong'' with the number 7, it is preferable that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big hit rather than the other case (loss), and it may not be used when the result of the special pattern lottery is a loss. In addition, among the cases of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the case of winning the probability variable jackpot is preferably used more easily than the case of winning the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to associate the different numbers (even number, odd number) of the main symbols in appearance with the rate of probability variable jackpot winning, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Further, the V main pattern sz shown in the image data DA3 is a display mode which is not normally displayed, and is displayed as a main pattern for change when a special condition is established during the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern). This V main symbol sz is used as a general-purpose main symbol that is combined to indicate a big win when stopped and displayed on the active line in the ready-to-win state regardless of the type of the main symbol sz in the ready-to-win state. By using the general-purpose main patterns in this way, for example, even when the main patterns to be the combination for winning the big win pass on the effective line in the ready-to-win state, the third pattern (main pattern) can be expected to be stopped and displayed in the combination showing the winning of the big win without waiting for the pattern row Z2 to make another round.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the variable display performance of the third symbol, when the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number) are in a double reach state, when the V main symbol is stop-displayed on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it is preferable to configure so that the main symbol on the side that is advantageous to the player wins the jackpot. As a result, even if the V main symbol is variably displayed in the double reach state, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as a general-purpose main symbol, but without being limited to this, when a combination indicating a jackpot win using the V main symbol is stopped and displayed, in addition to the jackpot game to be executed this time, at least the right to execute the next big win game may be used as a duplicate jackpot suggestive symbol indicating that the right to execute at least one subsequent jackpot game has already been obtained (there is prize winning information indicating the jackpot win in the special symbol holding that is reserved and stored), or the V main symbol is only variably displayed. It may be configured to suggest that a plurality of jackpot game execution rights have been acquired. With this configuration, when the V main symbol is variably displayed, the player can play the game while having a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 and the disappointing main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third pattern, but are main patterns for change used in a promotion performance which can be executed after the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating winning of a jackpot. Here, in this control example, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, an advantageous jackpot game (probable variable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game can be executed. In part (or all) of the case of stopping display of winning a jackpot in a combination, promotion performance for changing the type of the stopped and displayed main pattern sz to the probability variable main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number) can be executed.

During this promotion performance, the main pattern sz is not used to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery (big win or loss), but it is a period for indicating whether the big win won this time is a definite variable big win or an ordinary big win, so the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 showing the definite variable big win or the disappointing main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 showing the normal big win is set as the main pattern for change. In this way, by varying the display mode of the main pattern for change in accordance with the timing of changing the content to be notified to the player using the main pattern sz, it is possible to provide the player with an easily comprehensible presentation.

In the second control example, the type of the main symbols sz stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the winning of the jackpot is configured to be promoted from the normal main symbols sz to the probability variable main symbols sz by the promotion effect. Good. In this case, a plurality of image data may be prepared in a display mode suggesting the number of rounds that can be executed as the main pattern for change, and the display mode of the main pattern for change may be determined using the corresponding image data according to the type of the actually won jackpot.

Further, in this control example, the main symbol row image data of the symbol row Z2 is generated using the nine main symbols sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-described main symbol row sz for change and stored in the third symbol row area 235g. It may be configured to execute variable display control in units. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the display mode of the main symbols for change sz in the once set symbol row Z2.

A main pattern layer sr1 for changing the main pattern sz is displayed separately from the main pattern layer sr for displaying the main pattern sz, and the main pattern sz for changing may be displayed using the main pattern layer sr1 for changing. In this case, since the main pattern sz for change is displayed only in the pattern row Z2, the display area of the main pattern layer sr1 for change is only the display region for the pattern row Z2, and the main pattern layer sr1 for change is preferably arranged at a position where it is displayed with less priority than the main pattern layer sr and with priority over the sub-pattern layer fr. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main pattern for change sz from being hidden by the sub-symbol fz, and to display the main pattern for change sz without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

Each of the image data described above with reference to FIGS. 203(a) to (d) is part of the image data representing the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) stored in the character storage area 234a2, and actually stores other image data. For example, each image data stored as the main pattern display data stores image data corresponding to a display mode indicating a different action (for example, a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or a display mode in which it is pleased), and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), by replacing the image data, the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz) stopped and displayed can be varied.

Specifically, when the third pattern indicating the winning of the jackpot is stop-displayed (when the 'dugong' with the number 7 is stop-displayed in the normal display mode), the 'dugong' with the number 7 is switched and displayed in a special display mode with a surprised expression. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the winning of the jackpot even by the display mode of the third symbol. Further, the image data corresponding to the special display mode may be used for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the start of the third pattern variation, and immediately after the third pattern variation is started, a performance may be executed to suggest that the player has won a big win in the special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the flow of variable display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the variable display effects of the third symbols and the display contents of the symbol sequence displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 204, a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds indicating a big win is used as an example of the third symbol variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command indicating the start of special symbol variation, the variation display mode of the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz is determined based on the variation pattern (command) received this time. Specifically, in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the audio lamp control device 113, the presence or absence of the notice effect, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, and the stop pattern are determined, and the corresponding display command is set. After that, in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113, the set display command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the received display command (variation pattern command) is analyzed in the variation pattern command process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209) executed in the command determination process of the display control device 114 (see S6302 in FIG. 190), the variation display table is determined based on the analysis result, and the main pattern sz corresponding to the currently set background mode. is read from the third pattern row area 235g, image data corresponding to the sub-symbol fz corresponding to the currently set background mode is read from the third pattern row area 235g, a display image is generated, and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Then, a normal variation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation effect is executed. This normal fluctuation period is a period in which all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and is set as a period during which a transition to the background mode can be executed by the player operating the frame button 22. FIG. When the background mode shift is executed during the normal fluctuation period, each pattern displayed in the display mode corresponding to the background mode out of the main pattern sz and the sub pattern fz is controlled to switch to the display mode corresponding to the background mode after the shift.

After that, when the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 are stopped and displayed to enter a ready-to-win state, a ready-to-win fluctuation period of 40 seconds is set, and a ready-to-win performance suggesting (inciting) whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a big win is executed. During this reach variation period, the transition to the background mode is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the decoration performance is executed in which the lighting modes of various LEDs for decoration mounted on the pachinko machine 10 are varied. In part of the ready-to-win performance, an operation performance is executed in which an effective period (SW effective period) for validly discriminating the operation of the frame button 22 is set, and by operating the frame button 22 within the set effective period, a performance that is not executed when the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, it is configured to be able to execute the confirmation notification for notifying that the special pattern lottery of this time is winning the jackpot and the suggestion notification indicating that the possibility of winning the jackpot is high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol to operate the frame button 22 willingly. In addition, since a performance that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance is provided, even a player who wants to see various performances can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

As described above, the transition to the background mode is not performed during the ready-to-win fluctuation period, so that the background mode is switched during the execution of the ready-to-win performance suggesting (inciting) whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big win, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, so that the ready-to-win performance difficult for the player to understand can be suppressed. Further, since the operation performance is executed during the reach fluctuation period in which the background mode transition is not executed, for example, even if it is possible to set a variable performance (so-called hidden operation performance) in which the player is not notified of the SW effective period set by the operation performance, the player can be made to actively operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a notification mode for informing the player that it is a period in which the transition to the background mode is not executed (for example, a comment display of "While you are in reach, the background mode will not change even if you press the button") is set, or a notification mode for informing the player that the hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, a comment display is set that "If you press the button at any time during reach, a special effect will be executed."). It's good to do As a result, it is possible to allow the player to execute the operation presentation without anxiety.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, the third pattern is stop-displayed in the combination of the normal main patterns sz (the main patterns sz with even numbers) out of the combinations of the main patterns sz showing the winning of the jackpot, and thereafter the promotion performance for promoting the normal main patterns sz winning the big wins to the probability variable main patterns (the main patterns sz with the odd numbers) is executed. When this promotion performance is executed, it is determined whether or not the winning of the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz and the display mode of the main pattern sz for change among the main patterns sz are determined. Then, the promotion performance using the symbol row for promotion performance is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, as the symbol row for promotion effect, for example, when the display mode of the main symbol sz for change is the display mode using the image data DA4 (see FIG. 203(d)) and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is the display mode using the image data SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)), in addition to the normal variable main symbol sz (the main symbol sz with an odd number), a symbol indicating that the player has won an advantageous jackpot. can be displayed, it is possible to visually inform the player that there is a high possibility of being promoted to the probability variable jackpot in this promotion effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the variable effect executed in the second control example will be described. Fig. 205 shows an example of the variation effect of the third symbol executed in response to the same variation pattern command, Fig. 202(a) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the variation pattern used in the example of effect, Fig. 202(b) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the normal effect, Fig. 202(c) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the reach line notice effect (see Fig. 202(b)), and Fig. 202(d) , is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the advance notice effect in which the direction of variation of the sub-symbol fz is different from the normal one.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set is set by the main controller 110, the voice ramp control device 113 sets a variation pattern command for display to execute a ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, using the period until the ready-to-win effect is executed, various advance notice effects using the sub-symbol fz are executed. In the second control example, as described above, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz forming each symbol row are configured to be independently variably displayed, so that while the main symbol sz is variably displayed in a specific variation pattern according to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, various variation effects (advance effect) can be executed by varying only the variation pattern of the sub-symbol fz.

Specifically, in the effect A shown in FIG. 205(b), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the third symbol variation display (see FIG. 202(a)) in which the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are synchronized is executed, showing a normal pattern of ready-to-win state. In this way, by performing display control so as to synchronize the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz which are variably displayed independently, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz can be visually variably displayed as one pattern row.

Next, in the production B shown in FIG. 205(c), the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off (set to non-display) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the third pattern, and during this time, the reach line notice production to stop and display the variable display of the sub pattern fz is executed. That is, the same display control as in 205(a) described above is executed for the main symbol sz, but the main symbol layer sr is set to non-display in the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal variation period, so that the player cannot visually recognize the variable display of the main symbol sz.

Then, the sub symbol fz is variably displayed using the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal variation period (see FIG. 202(b)), and the sub symbol fz is stop-displayed at the end timing of the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal variation period, thereby displaying the position where the main symbol sz is stop-displayed in the current third symbol variation display (see FIG. 202(c)). After that, in the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON (set to be displayed), and the fluctuation display of the main symbol sz is executed using the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, and the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts, as in FIG. 205(b).

That is, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205(c) is executed, that is, when the reach line notice effect is executed, only the position where the main symbol sz is stop-displayed can be notified to the player before the main symbol sz is stop-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp in advance (15 seconds after the start of the variation of the third symbol) whether the present third symbol variation display will be a double reach, a single reach, or not a reach. Therefore, when the sub pattern fz is stop-displayed at a position where the main pattern sz cannot be in the ready-to-win state in contrast to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205(b)) which requires 30 seconds to grasp whether or not to reach the ready-to-win state, the period of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation can be shortened.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in the ready-to-win state, the player can enjoy the remaining variation time while expecting which main pattern sz will bring the ready-to-win state. In the second control example, when the sub-symbol fz is stop-displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in the ready-to-win state, the sub-symbol fz is always in the ready-to-win state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the current third symbol variation is in the ready-to-win state at the stop display timing of the sub-symbol fz.

Finally, in the effect C shown in FIG. 205(d), a normal display is executed for the main symbol sz similarly to the effect A described above, and an effect different from the effect A is executed for the sub symbol fz for a predetermined period (3 seconds) from the start of fluctuation. Specifically, the display mode using the image data SD2 (see FIG. 203(c)) is set as the display mode of the sub-symbol fz to be displayed at the start of the variation, and the sub-symbol reverse variation display is executed to variably display the sub-symbol fz in the opposite direction (right direction) to the variation display direction (left direction) of the main symbol.

As in the performance pattern shown in the performance C, by making the variable display direction of the main pattern sz and the variable display direction of the sub-symbol fz different from each other at the timing when the third symbol variable display is started, a performance with unexpectedness for the player, that is, the main pattern sz and the sub-symbol fz are formed in the same pattern row and the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed in an unrecognized manner for the player who has recognized that they are variably displayed only in the same direction. performance can be provided.

As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are independently variably displayed, and the variable display mode of the main symbol sz is set in correspondence with the variable pattern command set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the result of the variable display of the main symbol sz is different from the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, when the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed first, for example, the sub-symbol fz is enlarged and variably displayed so that the sub-symbol fz covers the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In the meantime, the variably displayed position of the main symbol sz and the symbol type may be varied.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the content of the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is changed, and that a third symbol row area 235g is added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above with reference to FIG. 203, the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example is different from the character storage area 234a2 of the first control example in that the image data D1 to D9 of the main symbol display data corresponding to each background mode, the image data SD1 to SD3 of the sub symbol display data, and the like, and the image data DA1 to DA5 of the main symbol display data for change are stored. Note that details of each image data newly stored in the second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, so description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern row area 235g is a storage area for reading a plurality of image data of the main pattern sz stored in the character storage area 234a2, generating one image data (main pattern row image data) in advance as a pattern row, and storing the generated main pattern row image data. When the main pattern sz is variably displayed on the main pattern layer sr, the main pattern row image data stored in the third pattern row area 235g is read, and the display position coordinates are variably set based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table to variably display the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, the number of image data used when the main pattern sz is variably displayed can be reduced compared to the case of using image data generated in units of the main pattern sz, so that the processing load of display control can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time, in association with the address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which the image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. The pachinko machine 10 of the second control example is different from the display data table (see FIG. 153) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the drawing contents relating to the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) are different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the drawing contents of the display data table define the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes an image of one frame, and also define drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of sprite.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. Information specifying whether to display either one of the back faces A and B corresponding to the background mode (one of ``sea mode'' and ``mountain mode'') selected by the player or to display a back face image different from the back faces A and B is described in the back face type. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

The MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A and B as a drawing object when it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B by the back face type, and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image displayed when the image drawing (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the start of drawing of the image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on the display data table, depending on the back type and position information. (Information indicating whether the display of the pattern display device 81 is information indicating the elapsed time since the start) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

Next, the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. First, the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, . . . ) are set with display position coordinates indicating the stop positions of the sub-symbols fz stopped and displayed in the preceding variable effect. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop position of the sub symbol fz in the previous variable performance. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 202(a), unlike the main symbols sz, the sub-symbols fz are not given specific numbers, and all the sub-symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, only by setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub pattern fz stop-displayed in the previous variable performance, the variable performance can be easily started from the stop position of the sub pattern fz in the previous variable performance.

Although the detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 208, in the second control example, a plurality of display modes can be set as the display mode of the sub-symbol fz, and according to the display mode of each sub-symbol fz to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, each sub-symbol fz is displayed in the corresponding display mode by designating the storage location of the image data used for display in the drawing list. Here, when the display mode of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance is different from the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the current variable performance, the timing of starting the variable performance, that is, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be changed from the drawing information corresponding to the address "0001H" of the display data table, or the variable performance is started using the display mode of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance, and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is displayed. may be configured such that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied during high-speed fluctuations that make it difficult for the player to recognize the sub-symbol fz.

In the former case, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in the display mode used in the current variable performance before the variable performance is started, that is, at the timing when the sub-pattern fz is stopped, so that the player can grasp the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed from now on in advance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In the latter case, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be varied at a timing that the player hardly notices, so that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be varied smoothly without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, of the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81, sprites for displaying the main symbol sz will be described. The main symbol rows (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2, . . . ) store symbol row type offset information as symbol row type information for specifying the main symbol sz of the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective main symbols sz. The reason why the offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the main pattern sz is that the display of the main pattern sz in the variable performance changes according to the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before and the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time, and the offset information from the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before is described in the pattern offset information until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is described. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Since each main pattern sz is attached with a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number attached to the main pattern sz, and the offset information is represented by the difference in the number attached to each main pattern sz, so that the main pattern sz to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

Further, in the pattern offset information, a predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time is set so as to be the time during which the main pattern sz is variably displayed at high speed. While the main pattern sz is variably displayed at a high speed, the main pattern sz cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time, so that the player does not recognize the discontinuity of the continuity of the number even if the continuity of the number of the main pattern sz is interrupted.

Further, in the second control example, the image data of each main symbol sz displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main symbol row image data) per symbol row. For example, for each main symbol sz to which numbers 1 to 9 are variably displayed in the symbol row Z1, the main symbol sz to which the number 3 is attached is the head of the image data, and then the main symbol row image data are generated at predetermined intervals (intervals at which the sub-symbols fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main symbols sz are in the order of "3→2→1→9→8→7→6→5→4" and stored in the third symbol row area 235g. It is By varying the display position coordinates of the main pattern row image data based on the lapse of time, an image in which only the main pattern sz forming the pattern row Z1 is variably displayed is displayed on the main pattern layer sr. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed in the main symbol layer sr is set to a size that cannot display all the images included in the main symbol row image data, and is set to a size that can display up to three main symbols sz as shown in FIG. 202(a).

Therefore, the type of the main pattern sz to be displayed on the main pattern layer sr is specified based on the offset information included in the pattern row type offset information, the display range of the main pattern row image data is determined corresponding to the position where the specified main pattern sz is to be displayed, and each main pattern sz is displayed in the display range. In this way, when the variable display is executed without changing the arrangement relationship of the main symbols sz, image data is provided for each main symbol sz as in the above-described first control example, the symbol type of each main symbol sz to be displayed when starting the current variable effect is specified based on the offset information of the stop symbol of the main symbol sz in the previous variable effect, and then the display position of the image data of each main symbol sz is determined according to the content of the variable effect to be executed. The load of display control processing can be reduced by generating pattern row image data defining a plurality of main patterns sz in a prescribed order and at prescribed intervals, and executing a variable performance using the pattern row image data, rather than variably setting (display position coordinates) while synchronizing them.

When the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to vary the arrangement of the main symbols sz or to vary the arrangement intervals of the main symbols sz. In this case, it is better to perform the display control to variably display each main symbol sz using the image data corresponding to each main symbol sz as in the above-described first control example. Further, the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example may be combined to use image data for each symbol only for a specific main symbol sz, and to use main symbol row image data for a plurality of main symbols other than the specific main symbol sz. In this case, for a specific main pattern, it is possible to easily perform control such as varying the image data to be used and the degree of change of the display position (variation display speed), and for a plurality of main patterns sz always displayed with synchronized variable display contents, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control when the plurality of main patterns sz are variably displayed without executing special display control.

In this second control example in which one image data (main symbol row image data) is generated for each symbol row, different drawing contents are set for each of the symbol row Z1, symbol row Z2, and symbol row Z3 (for each symbol row). Main pattern row image data are generated at predetermined intervals (intervals at which sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers are arranged in the order of ``4→5→6→7→8→9→1→2→3'' and stored in a third pattern row area 235g. For the symbol row Z3, the main symbol sz to which the number 1 is attached is the head of the image data for each of the main symbols sz to which the numbers 1 to 9 are attached which are displayed in a variable manner. stored in

By performing display control so that all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in the left direction using the main pattern row image data corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 constructed in this way, only the main pattern sz displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed on the main pattern layer sr. As described above, the main symbol sz located at the head of the main symbol row image data is different for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (initial state), the main symbols sz with numbers "3.4.1" are stop-displayed in order from the top at the center position of the third symbol display device 81, that is, on the activated line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)). In other words, by making the numbers attached to the main symbols sz, which are the leading positions of the respective main symbol row image data, different, in the initial state when no variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the combination of the main symbols sz different from the big winning combination can be stopped and displayed, and the display control in the initial state can be simplified simply by setting the initial display so that the leading positions of the main symbol row image data forming the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are on the effective line L2. I can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the drawing list of the first control example described above (see FIG. 155) in that the type of pride for displaying the third symbol is changed, and the others are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 208, the back image used in the image of one frame, sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, . . . ), main symbol row (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2, . For each sprite, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the address thereof, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

That is, as the drawing instruction content for the image of the sub-symbol fz, information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored and the address indicating the image data used for the current drawing instruction from among the plurality of image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)) corresponding to the sub-symbol fz stored in the third symbol area 235d are described. Also, as the drawing instruction contents for the image of the main pattern sz, information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored, and the address indicating the image data used for the current drawing instruction from among the plurality of image data (main pattern row image data) corresponding to the main pattern row stored in the third pattern row area 235g are described.

<Regarding control processing content in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 and 210, the contents of control processing in this second control example will be described. The second control example differs from the above-described first control example at least in that the content of the control processing executed by the display control device 114 is different. In addition, the content of the type of effect mode of the variable effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 is also made different. Other contents are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variation effect mode of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 is made different. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. However, the setting method of the display command corresponding to the variable effect is the same as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the first control example described above, and only the specific setting contents are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, since the contents of various variable effects executed for the sub-symbol fz executed in the second control example have also been described above with reference to FIG. 205, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455). This variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. For the variation pattern command processing (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the types of the change main symbol sz and sub symbol fz used during the current variation effect are determined and stored in various storage areas of the resident video RAM 235. The difference is that processing for storing is added. Since other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the variation pattern command process 2 (S6455), first, the shaded variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) is analyzed (S6501), and it is determined whether the current variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for indicating a big win (variation pattern command selected when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110) (S6551). Then, when it is determined that it is a big hit variation (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether information indicating the effect mode of the promotion effect is included in the current display variation pattern command (S6552), and when it is determined that information indicating the effect mode of the promotion effect is included (S6552: Yes), a change main symbol corresponding to the command is determined as the variation main symbol of the promotion-dedicated symbol row, stored in the third symbol row area, and S65. Move to 54. Also, in the processing of S6551, if the current variation is not a big hit variation, or if it is determined that the promotion effect is not executed in the processing of S6552, then the process proceeds to S6554, based on the information analyzed in the processing of S6501, it is determined whether or not information for executing the advance notice effect using the sub-symbol fz (see FIG. 205) is included in the fluctuation pattern received this time, and the notice effect of the sub-symbol fz is executed. (S6554 in FIG. 209: Yes), the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in this sub-symbol announcement effect is determined, and the image data corresponding to the determined display mode is read from the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

After that, the variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined, the display variation pattern for 0 is set in the display, the variation pattern command processing executed by the display control device 114 of the first control example described above (see S6405 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the same processing of S6502 to S6505 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 210, the contents of the back image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of back image change command processing 2 . This back image change command process 2 (S6469) differs from the back image change command process described above (see S6419 in FIG. 195(a)) in that, when the back image change flag 233w is set to ON, the type of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) corresponding to the back image (background mode) after change is determined, and processing is added to store it in the third symbol area 235d and the third symbol row area 235g. are doing. Since other processes are the same, the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the back image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub pattern fz) corresponding to the back image (background mode) after change is determined, and the image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g (S7002). After that, the back image determination flag 223x corresponding to the changed back image type is set to ON (S7051), and the process ends.

<Regarding Modified Example of Second Control Example>
Next, a modification of the second control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described second control example, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern layer sr, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-pattern layer fr. By synchronizing the display content of the main pattern layer sr and the display content of the sub-pattern layer fr and controlling the display, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a specific order and are varied and displayed regularly. By variably setting only the display control contents for the sub pattern fz, various variable performances can be executed without varying the variable display contents for the main pattern sz for showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one layer in the same manner as in the above-described first control example, and further, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn). The difference is that by varying the display control contents of the third pattern displayed with respect to the two layers (the third pattern image A, the third pattern image B), a special variable effect can be executed. Other contents are the same as those of the second control example described above, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 211(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed in the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the second control example and the display screen, FIG. 211(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the triple reach effect, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), in the modification of the second control example, the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B are formed overlappingly as the layers on which the third pattern is displayed, and the third pattern layer A is arranged in front of the third pattern layer B (on the player's line of sight). In addition, in FIG. 211 (a), only the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B are marked, but in reality, various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are displayed. Layers are superimposed.

By synchronizing and executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol layer A and the third symbol layer B, it is possible to perform the variable display of the third symbol that is visually the same as the variable display of the third symbol shown with reference to FIG. 125(b) of the first control example.

In this modified example configured in this manner, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer A and the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B can be controlled to vary independently, similarly to the second control example described above. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. It becomes possible. In this state, depending on the result of the third symbol variation of the third symbol layer A, the number of the third symbols that are in the ready-to-win state increases, so the characters "Reach! Promotion chance" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(c), when the double reach of "1" and "9" is established in the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer A, the three third patterns appear to be in the reach state, resulting in "triple reach". In this way, by variably displaying the third patterns overlappingly using a plurality of layers, when the third patterns are variably displayed in one layer, the variable performance requiring display control for varying the order of the pattern rows of the respective third patterns can be easily executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this way, in the case where the variable display of the third symbols is made different for a plurality of third symbol layers, for example, the third symbol displayed on the preferentially displayed layer (third symbol layer A) is set as the true third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol displayed on the non-prioritized layer (third symbol layer B) is set as the decorative third symbol, and the variation pattern is set based on the lottery results of the special symbols ( The variation pattern of the third symbol of the third symbol layer A is determined based on the variation pattern set by the main controller 110), and the variation performance of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B is determined based on the determined variation pattern of the third symbol of the third symbol layer A on the side of the voice ramp controller 113 (based on the presence or absence of a big win and the type of reach). Then, it is preferable to perform different variable display control between the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot than when the special pattern lottery does not.

In addition, in this modified example, the variation presentation in which the variation display of the third pattern layer A and the variation display of the third pattern layer B are completely different has been described, but without being limited to this, for example, the variation start timing may be shifted by 0.2 seconds, and then, during the high-speed variation of the third pattern variation, the variation presentation of synchronizing the contents of the variation display may be performed. In this way, by making the variation display of the third pattern layer A and the variation display of the third pattern layer B different only in a partial period of the variation presentation, the player can be given a slight sense of incongruity, so that the player can be made to draw more variation displays.

As described above, in the above-described second control example and the modification of the second control example, various display controls are executed for each of the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 composed of symbols including the main symbol sz having identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. A pattern other than the pattern (third pattern) of 1 to Z3 may be provided.

For example, during execution of the third symbol variation, the special symbols not included in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in the display areas overlapping the display areas of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also, the above-mentioned special symbols may be dynamically displayed during the period in which the third symbol variation is being executed, and the dynamic display of the special symbols may be started during the execution of the third symbol variation, or the special symbols may be stopped or hidden during the execution of the third symbol variation.

Even in the case of such a configuration, the variation display mode (variation pattern) of the main pattern sz may be determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery, and for the special pattern, it is possible to set the variation pattern for performance in the same manner as the sub-pattern fz described above. Further, unlike the sub-pattern fz, the above-mentioned special pattern is not a pattern that the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 have, so even if it is not displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 at the start timing or stop timing of the third pattern variation, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set than the sub-symbol fz, and to further enhance the performance effect.

Also, the dynamic display mode of this special symbol may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third symbol described above. For example, when the dynamic display direction of the third symbol is the left direction (the left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special symbol may be configured to be different from the dynamic display direction of the third symbol (for example, the right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)). As a result, even if the special patterns are dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping the display area of the third pattern variation display during the period when the third pattern variation display is performed, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbols are dynamically displayed.

In the above-described example, the dynamic display direction of the special pattern is the opposite direction to the dynamic display direction of the third pattern. However, it is sufficient if the dynamic display direction is different. may be shifted to an oblique side by an angle of less than 90 degrees). Furthermore, in the above-described example, in order to clearly notify that the special symbol is displayed during the third symbol variation, the dynamic display direction of the third symbol is different from the dynamic display direction of the special symbol. Furthermore, the dynamic display of special patterns may be executed before the execution of the third pattern variation, or the dynamic display of the special patterns may be executed after the stop display of the third pattern variation (including a display state in which the player is swaying to such an extent that the player cannot identify it).

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above-described example, in order to make it difficult to understand that the variable display of the special symbol is executed during the third symbol variation, the dynamic display direction and size of each symbol (third symbol, special symbol) may be configured to be the same. By constructing in this way, since it is impossible to grasp that the dynamic display of the special patterns is executed unless the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are observed, the player who wants to know that the dynamic display of the special patterns is executed can be kept interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

As described above, unlike the third pattern, the special pattern does not have to be displayed all the time. Therefore, unlike the third pattern, the lottery result of the special pattern is not indicated according to the display mode when it is stopped and displayed. For example, when the dynamic display of the special pattern is started, the player may be notified that the special pattern lottery result is likely to win a jackpot. In this way, by varying the timing (dynamic display start timing, stop display timing) of providing information for indicating the lottery result of special symbols according to the type of dynamically displayed symbols, the timing to be observed by the player can be varied according to the various dynamically displayed symbols, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, when using a special pattern showing a high possibility of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery by starting the dynamic display in this way, it is preferable to display at least a part of the special pattern on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a standby display mode suggesting the execution of the dynamic display. For example, when a special pattern in which a plurality of fish are flocking is used as the special pattern, it is preferable to display only the fish displayed near the head of the special pattern on the fluctuation direction side. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting the start of the dynamic display of the special symbols. In this case, it is preferable to display not all of the special symbols but some of them on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, when the special symbol is displayed as the standby display mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the special symbol is already dynamically displayed.

In the above-described second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz forming the third symbol are configured to be displayed on different layers, and the contents of the display control executed for each layer are different, whereby the variable display mode of the main symbol sz and the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz are configured to be different. Layers may be provided, and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the first sub-pattern layer and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the second sub-pattern layer may be displayed in an overlapping manner, or only one of them may be displayed. In addition, display control may be performed so that the stop display positions of the sub-symbols fz displayed on a plurality of display layers are different, and then the reach line notice effect shown in FIG.

In the second control example described above, the display layer on which one symbol (main symbol sz) and the other symbol (sub-symbol fz) constituting each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed is made different, and display control can be executed in units of each display layer, thereby enabling execution of various variable effects. The pattern sz and sub-pattern fz) may be displayed on the same display layer as long as it is possible to perform different display control. In this case, when the display targets displayed as a result of each display control are duplicated, it is necessary to predefine which display target is to be displayed, which complicates the display control processing.

Further, even in the case of using a configuration in which a plurality of display control results are displayed on the same display layer, symbols other than the plurality of symbol types (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, that is, symbols other than the third symbol dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the special symbol lottery result is a specific result (jackpot winning)). Various display control processes described in the above-described second control example may be executed for various symbols including (decorative symbols dynamically displayed during a predetermined period during symbol fluctuation).

In the above-described second control example, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the display mode of the main pattern sz is switched to the display mode corresponding to the background mode after switching. In this case, the image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as the image data of the sub pattern fz stored in the character storage area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, the image data corresponding to the background mode after switching is read out and stored in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, when the background mode transition performance is executed as the operation performance, the result of the special pattern lottery being executed may be discriminated, and the type of the sub-symbol fz to be displayed after the background mode switching may be determined based on the discrimination result. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a display mode imitating ``16'' or a display mode imitating 'V' as the type of the sub-pattern fz which is more likely to be determined when the result of the special symbol lottery in execution is winning the jackpot than when the jackpot is not winning. With this configuration, the background mode transition performance is executed and the background mode is switched, so that the result of the special pattern lottery can be easily predicted before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be made to positively execute the operation performance.

Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win may be changed depending on the combination of the set background mode and the type of the sub-symbol fz to be displayed. For example, when the type of the sub-symbol fz (display mode for the sea mode) normally used in the first performance mode (sea mode) is used in the second performance mode (mountain mode), it may be configured to indicate that the special symbol lottery being executed has a high possibility of winning the big win. In this way, by executing an effect combining the background mode and the type of the sub-symbol fz, various effects can be executed without increasing the types of the sub-symbol fz.

In addition, in this control example, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the process of changing the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub pattern fz) is executed. In addition to this, the number and position of effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be changed.

Further, when the background mode transition effect is executed in the state where the reach line notice effect shown in FIGS. 202(a) and (b) is executed and the secondary symbol fz is stop-displayed (see FIG. 202(b)), the stop display position of the main symbol sz informed by the reach line notice effect may be changed. The stop display position of sz may be configured to be easily variable, or conversely, the stop display position of the main pattern sz may be configured to be more easily variable in cases other than jackpot winning than in jackpot winning.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 222. FIG. In the above-described first control example, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable prize winning device 65 that is opened during the big win game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during the big win game, the probability variable state is set after the big win game ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120, the spheres that have won the large prize-winning opening 65a with a wide (opening width of 50 mm) are collected in one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and flowed down the second flow path 65e2, so that they can reach the V gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the above-described first control example, the ball won from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), that is, the ball fired by the left-handed game flows down the left side region and then enters the variable winning device 65, and the ball that wins from the right side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the fifth flow path 65e5), that is, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the right side region. Since the timing of reaching the V gate 65 is different from the timing of winning the variable winning device 65 after winning the variable winning device 65, when the variable probability jackpot game is executed, it is necessary to position the switching valve 65y for a long time in a state where the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 in order to allow the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 to reach the V gate 65v regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed. There was In addition, since the length of the period (V effective period) for effectively determining whether the ball passes through the V gate 65v (specified area) must be set long as the period in which the winning ball of the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v is set long, there is also a problem that it becomes difficult to detect cheating during the jackpot game, that is, the act of causing the ball to pass through the V gate 65V (specified area) by means of the cheating game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the period until the ball that has won in the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific region is substantially the same in the case where the ball shot in the left-handed game wins the variable prize-winning device 65 after flowing down the left-hand region and the case where the ball shot in the right-handed game wins the variable prize-winning device 65 after flowing down the right region. By constructing in this way, it is possible to shorten the length of the period (V effective period) for effectively discriminating the passing of the ball to the specific area, and it is possible to easily discover the cheating during the jackpot game, that is, the action of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) by the cheating game.

As described above, the third control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the configuration inside the variable prize winning device 65 is changed, and that the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided in the variable prize winning device 65 is changed. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 212, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 212 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 119) in that the arrangement of nail members planted in the area below the electric accessory 640 is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example, the nails are planted so that the balls flowing down in the left area or the balls flowing down in the right area can evenly win in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 . A plurality of nail members are planted in a V-shape below the electric accessory 640 so that the ball flowing down the right side area of the variable prize winning device 65 can easily win a prize at the right end side of the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

In other words, in the third control example, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning port 65a with a wide opening width is provided so that both the ball flowing down in the left region due to the left-handed game and the ball flowing down in the right region due to the right-handed game can win. A plurality of nail members planted in a V-shape are provided as guide members for guiding the winning of the ball near both ends in the width direction of the opening of 65a.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to promote ball winning near both ends in the opening width direction of the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 regardless of whether a right-handed game or a left-handed game is performed during the jackpot game. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 of the third control example is configured to be left-right symmetrical (symmetrical when the opening width direction of the specific winning port 65a is viewed as the left-right direction). Errors can be made less likely to occur.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing the downflow route of the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a.

The variable winning device 65 of the third control example is configured such that, similarly to the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 120), the ball received by the opening/closing door 65b that is opened during the jackpot game state is guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided on both end sides of the specific winning opening 65a. Then, the balls flowing down the first opening 65a1 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213(b)), and payout control is executed such that 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, the balls flowing down the second opening 65a2 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213(b)), and payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in the third control example, since it is difficult for the ball to enter from the vicinity of the central portion of the specific winning hole 65a, the ball received by the opening/closing door 65b in the open state can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to an increase in the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the winning balls are not paid out (the balls do not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) even though they have entered the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 213(b), the variable prize winning device 65 of the third control example differs greatly from the variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 120(b)) used in the above-described first embodiment in that the path through which the ball (the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2) that has won the specific prize opening 65a is guided to the discharge port 65 is bilaterally symmetrical.

First, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y. As shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the switching valve 65y protrudes so as to block the flow path in which the V gate 65V is arranged), it flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. It should be noted that the time (ta) required for the ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the switching valve 65y protrudes so as to block the flow path in which the V gate 65V is disposed) as shown in FIG. The time (tb) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be about 2 seconds, like the time ta described above.

In other words, in the third control example, a ball that enters the vicinity of the left end of the specific winning port 65a in a left-handed game and passes through the first opening 65a1 is configured so that a ball that enters the vicinity of the right end of the specific winning port 65a in a right-handed game and passes through the second opening 65a2 also reaches the switching valve 65y after the flowing time at the same position.

Then, when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the ball is buried so that the ball passes through the flow path in which the V gate 65V is arranged), as shown in FIG. Also, the ball flowing down the second flow path 65r2 is configured to pass through the buried state switching valve 65y, pass through the second V-gate 65V2, and flow into the fourth discharge port 65h4.

In the third control example, when the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 (total number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y is switched from the closed state (see FIG. 213(b)) to the open state (see FIG. 214). The time (about 0.5 seconds) required for the number of balls winning in the variable winning device 65 to reach a predetermined number and for the switching valve 65y to open is shorter than the time (about 2 seconds). Therefore, the above-described predetermined number of balls can pass through the V gate 65V as they are. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is opened, the ball can reliably flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example is the same as the structure of the distribution device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for convenience of explanation, it is shown in simplified diagrams as shown in FIGS. 213 and 214. Therefore, as for the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example, the content of the above-described first embodiment is of course applied, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, the electrical configuration in this third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the contents of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game are different, and that various processing contents based on the difference are different, but the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Specifically, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are partially changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 215, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(b)) in that a V period timer 203ca is added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The V period timer 203ca is for measuring the period of time during which the switching valve 65y is placed in an open state so that the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). Then, when the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated and the V period elapses (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0), the switching valve 65y is configured to switch to the closed state.

In the third control example, when it is determined that the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) is a predetermined number (two) in the round game of the specific number of rounds (the first round game) during the probability variable jackpot game, the V condition is established to allow the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), and the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state for a predetermined period (5 seconds). It consists of

In other words, the switching valve 65y is not switched and controlled based on the lapse of time after the start of the jackpot game, but is configured to be switched and controlled based on the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open state period of the switching valve 65y ends during the period in which the ball could not be won in the variable prize winning device 65 even though the game is normally played during the jackpot game, and the ball cannot pass through to a specific area (V gate 65v).

Further, in the third control example, the period (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state after the V condition is established is shorter than the period (approximately 2 seconds) required for the ball that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, that is, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 for the predetermined number (second time) to reach the switching valve 65y. The sphere is configured to be able to pass through a specific area (V gate 65v). With this configuration, the sphere can be reliably passed through the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is satisfied.

In this control example, the condition V is satisfied and the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds). In other words, the end condition for ending the open state of the switching valve 65y is only the period elapsing end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period elapses, but is not limited to this. 4 seconds required for the winning ball to reach one of the outlets 65h) may be provided. Various end conditions may be set in this manner, and the open state of the switching valve 65y may be switched to the closed state when one of the end conditions is satisfied first. As a result, the period during which the switching valve 65y is open can be shortened as much as possible, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the specific region (V gate 65v) unnecessarily. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will collide with the ball detection sensor provided in the V gate 65v and the ball detection sensor will be physically destroyed.

Next, referring to FIG. 216, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 of the third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(b)) in that a V timer 223ca is added. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the period (V winning period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) is set, and is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined period (3 seconds) when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V period command set by the main controller 110 when the V winning period is reached. Then, the value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when a predetermined period of time has passed), the emphasized guidance information emphasizing the guidance for V winning is executed.

In other words, while the V winning period is set to 5 seconds at maximum, the emphasis guide notification is executed when 3 seconds elapse after the V winning period is set. Here, as described above, normally, the ball that satisfies the V condition is configured to win the V prize as it is, and the time required for the ball that satisfies the V condition to win the V prize is about 2 seconds. That is, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is conceivable that the ball satisfying the V condition did not win the V prize. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for the V winning by using the additional balls, the configuration is such that the emphasized guidance notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to win the V prize due to the game content of the player despite the setting of the period during which the player can win the V prize.

In this control example, the emphasized guidance notification is executed based on the elapsed time after the V condition is established. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the emphasized guidance standby notification may be executed when it is detected that the ball satisfying the V condition has passed through an area that does not have a specific area (the V gate 65v) (for example, the passage having the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 213(b))). Further, in this control example, when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to open does not pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), the above-described emphasized guidance notification is performed. Alternatively, an abnormality notification may be performed to notify the outside that an abnormality (for example, ball clogging) has occurred in the flow path in the variable prize winning device 65.

In this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the winning of the predetermined number (second) ball, switching control is immediately executed to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. may pass through. Therefore, when a predetermined number (second) winning ball is detected, a standby time (approximately 1.5 seconds) is set in consideration of the time (approximately 2 seconds) until the second winning ball reaches the switching valve 65y. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the passage of only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to the open state to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during one big win game, so that the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the big win game. When using a pachinko machine 10 in which the content of a privilege given to a player is changed according to the number of balls passing through V), excessive passage of balls through a specific area (V gate 65V) can be suppressed by setting the waiting time.

In the case of using the pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the privilege given to the player is changed according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game, for example, the number of winning prizes (V winning condition) that triggers the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state is changed according to the type of the winning jackpot, or the winning number of balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state is entered into the variable winning device 65. It is preferable to vary the waiting time until the switching valve 5y is switched to the open state, or to vary the conditions (V end conditions) for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state.

Specifically, as a jackpot game advantageous to the player, it is preferable to set a small number of balls as a V winning condition so that a plurality of balls can easily pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game. As a result, the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the establishment of the V winning condition can be shortened, so that the jackpot game can be executed for a long time while the V winning condition is established, and a plurality of balls can be easily passed through the specific area (V gate 65V). Also, the standby time may be shortened. As a result, the ball (the ball flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) that has won the variable prize device 65 before the ball that has established the V prize condition can also pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, the V end condition may be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). By constructing in this way, when a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed, the game can be motivated to pass a large number of balls to the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, for a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, in order to make it difficult for a plurality of balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, a large number of balls is set as a V winning condition, a long waiting time is set, the V end condition is set to a condition that is met when one ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V), or it is difficult to allow a ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). (for example, 0.1 seconds).

By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation that the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the big winning game can be greatly varied according to the type of the big winning game to be executed. Further, as the ball flow path in the variable winning device 65, it is preferable to provide a normal flow path and a special flow path that allows the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path. Specifically, it is preferable to provide delaying means (for example, a cloon) for delaying the flow of the balls in the special flow path so that the balls discharged from the special flow path are more likely to be discharged in a daisy chain than the balls discharged from the normal flow path.

In this case, when the timing at which the switching valve 65y is opened coincides with the timing at which the balls are discharged from the special flow path, many balls can easily pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Further, in this case, it is preferable to allow the player to select whether the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 easily flows down the normal channel or the special channel. In this case, the display surface of the third symbol display device may be used during the jackpot game to perform a game guidance display to the effect that the left-handed game is a stable game that allows one ball to easily pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), and that the right-handed game is a challenge game that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), but allows a large amount of balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) if the timing is right. In addition, in the past jackpot game, it is stored whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game was executed. More specifically, it is determined which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detected more balls during the jackpot game, and based on the determination result, a game method during the jackpot game is determined and storage means for storing the result is provided. It is preferable to execute a history display that displays the number of passing balls) as a past history.

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the game method to be executed during the jackpot game. In the above-described control example, the privilege given when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is a high probability state of special symbols, but without being limited to this, for example, the right of a lottery that tends to result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player may be given, or a second jackpot game different from the jackpot game may be given. In this case, it is preferable to provide grant right storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of rights to which the above-mentioned benefits are granted as an upper limit. As a result, even if a plurality of granted rights are acquired in a short period of time, the privilege can be reliably granted under the condition of the predetermined number. In addition, in this control example, the ball winning in the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game was explained, but it is not limited to this. In addition, in the winning game that is executed when winning the normal symbol lottery, the above-described configuration may be used for the variable ball entry means (for example, the electric accessory 640) that allows the ball to win.

In this control example, all the balls that have passed through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V). Further, in this control example, the switching valve 65y is used as variable means for switching between a first state in which the ball easily passes through the specific region (V gate 65V) and a second state in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V). 5V), variable means may be provided to make it easier for the sphere to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) within a period of time that effectively discriminates the passage of the sphere to the V gate 65V). Also, a plurality of variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65 .

<Regarding the control processing contents of the main controller in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220, the contents of control processing of the main controller in this third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and the winning process 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) is executed instead of the winning process (see S1911 in FIG. 171). The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 217, the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1854) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1854). This big win control process 3 (S1854) is different from the above-described big win control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that the control content executed at the start of the big win and the control content executed when the ball wins the variable winning device 65 during the big win game are changed, and the control content for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca during the big win game is added. Other contents are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control processing 3 (S1854) is executed, first determine whether the jackpot start flag 203J is set on on (S1901), and if it is set to on it (S1901: YES), then set the opening command (S1902) Set the 203J off, set the flag 203k during the jackpot (S1903), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), next, it is determined whether the jackpot game is currently in progress (whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904), and when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1904: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905). (S1952), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1905, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), the same processing of S1907 to S1910 as the jackpot control processing of the first control example described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168) is executed, and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big win (S1909: No), the winning process 3 is executed (S1953), then the abnormal process is executed (S1912), then the update process during the big win is executed (S1954), and this process is finished.

Next, the details of the prize winning process 3 (S1953) executed in the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize winning process 3 (S1953). This prize winning process 3 (S1953) differs from the prize winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) of the first control example described above in that the contents of the control processing during the V round (first round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in an open state are different, but otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description of the contents is omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1953) is executed, first, the processes of S2201 to S2204 which are the same as the winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) of the first control example described above are executed, and when the process of S2204 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S2202 that the ball has not won the specific winning hole 65a (S2202: No), the V-round process is executed (S2251 ). The details of this V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but when the first round game (V round game) is executed, the process for controlling the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y is executed.

When the V round process (S2251) is finished, next, the same processes of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221 as the winning process (see S1911 in FIG. 171) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the V round process (S2251) executed in the winning process 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V round process (S2251).

When the V round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current round is in progress (S2401). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round is in progress (S2401: Yes), next, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2", that is, whether the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 65 during the first round game is "2" (S2402). , sets a V period command indicating a V winning period (a period during which the ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) (S2404), sets a value corresponding to 5 seconds to the V period timer 203ca (S2405), and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, in a specific round game executed during a jackpot game, when the number of balls entering the variable prize winning device 65 satisfies a predetermined condition (when the number of winning balls becomes 2), the switching valve 65y is configured to switch to the open state so that the ball can easily pass through the specific region (V gate 65v). As a result, during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being switched to the open state in a state in which the variable winning device 65 does not win the ball.

In this control example, only a specific round (first round) during the jackpot game is configured to be a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state, but without being limited to this, a plurality of rounds may be configured to be set as V rounds in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of the round game to be newly executed is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined number of rounds is the V round.

Then, when it is determined to be a V round, the state of the switching valve 65y may be switched and controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during the V round. Further, in this case, the condition for turning on the V solenoid 209a (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) may be varied for each of a plurality of set V rounds.

In addition, when the V round game is being executed, a notification means may be provided to notify the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is satisfied. should be configured to As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game to pass the ball through the specific area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the update process (S1954) during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the update process (S1954) during the jackpot. In this jackpot mid-update process (S1954), a process for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca set during the jackpot game is executed.

When the jackpot medium update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, that is, whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). Then, if it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S1961: No), this processing ends. In the processing of S1961, if it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963). do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is turned off (S1964), a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1965), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222, the contents of control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the jackpot related process 3 (see S4258 in FIG. 221) is executed instead of the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and the effect update process 3 (see S4151 in FIG. 222) is executed in place of the effect update process (see S4111 in FIG. 174). The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 221, the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4258) will be described. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) is different from the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example described above in that the content of the control process executed when a V period command is received from main controller 110 is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot related process 3 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the round count command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether or not the V period command has been received (S4751), and if it is determined that the V period command has been received (S4752: Yes), the V timer 223ca is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds, and this processing ends.

Also, if it is determined that the V period command has not been received in the processing of S4751 (S4751: No), then the same S4714 to S1715 processing as the jackpot related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the content of effect update processing 3 will be described. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing the content of effect update processing 3. FIG. In this effect update process 3, a process of updating the value of the V-timer 223ca set during the jackpot game and a process of setting the effect mode when the value of the V-timer 223ca becomes 0 can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the rendering update process 3 is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), then the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca after updating is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), then it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). Execute and terminate this process.

As described above, in the third control example, the variable prize winning device 65 is arranged at a position where a prize can be won regardless of whether a right-handed game is played or a left-handed game is played, and furthermore, regardless of which game method the ball is shot, the period from when the ball wins until it reaches the switching valve 65y does not have a large difference. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be executed smoothly without setting the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65v) unnecessarily long. Also, by shortening the V effective period, it is possible to easily monitor the act of passing the ball through the specific area due to illegal play.

Further, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is executed based on the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 65, it is possible to suppress the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state in which the balls cannot be won to the variable winning device 65 due to ball clogging or the like occurring during the big winning game. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured for each round game, and when the measurement result becomes a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is configured to be open for a predetermined period of time within the round game period. In this case, the switching valve 65y may be configured to switch to the open state.

In addition, the switch valve 65y may be configured so that the open state is continued across the next round game, for example, without limiting the maximum period of the length of the period in which the switching valve 65y is open to the period until the end of the round game.

In the third control example, as shown in FIG. 213(b), one switching valve 65y closes both the first V-gate 65v1 and the second V-gate 65V2. However, two switching valves 65y are provided so as to close each V-gate. Alternatively, when the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winnings, only the switching valve covering the second V gate 65V2 may be opened. As a result, the range of the switching valve that is in the open state can be reduced, so that unnecessary passing of the ball through the V gate 65V can be suppressed.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 231. FIG. The fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other contents are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the above-described first control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set as advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player. When the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game, the variable probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then the time saving state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, until the number of times of the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times after the big winning game. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is continued until the special symbols are executed 100 times.

In other words, in the above-described first control example, even if any advantageous game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the advantageous game state is continued until the special pattern drawing is executed 100 times unless a big win is won in the special symbol lottery. Then, when an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the period until the advantageous gaming state ends, that is, the period until the normal state disadvantageous to the player is set is configured to inform the player (see FIG. 128(a)).

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of advantageous game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the player can grasp the period until the disadvantageous game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is set, not the period until the currently set advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) ends. Therefore, compared to the case where the player is notified of the period until the currently set advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) ends, that is, the period until the variable probability state ends and the time saving state ends, the player can grasp in advance the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, among the plurality of advantageous game states (variable probability state, time saving state), the period during which the more advantageous variable probability state continues is predetermined to be the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and during the period from the end of the big win game until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, a suggestive effect that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state was configured to be executable (Fig. 128 ( b) see). As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 which notifies the period until the next unfavorable game state is set in the state where the advantageous game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which of a plurality of advantageous game states the currently set game state is.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, when a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, a lottery (so-called falling lottery) for shifting the high probability state of special symbols to the low probability state is executable, and when the falling lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the time saving state. That is, in the above-described first control example, when the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, but in the fourth control example, if the falling lottery is won before the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, the variable probability state ends at that point.

By constructing in this way, even when it is grasped that the variable probability state is set by the suggestive performance executed during the period in which the advantageous game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, so that the player can pay more attention to the contents of the executed suggestive performance.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as a suggestion performance executed during the period when the advantageous game state is set, not only the suggestion of the currently set game state but also the timing at which the variable probability state ends by winning the fall lottery can be suggested.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 226. FIG. This fourth control example is greatly different from the above-described first control example in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state can be executed, and is different in that a configuration for executing the falling lottery is added.

First, referring to FIG. 223, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 of the fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(a)) in that a part of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d is changed and in that a drop lottery table 202da is newly added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, regarding the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d, differences from the first control example will be mainly described. In the fourth control example, the content of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different from that of the first control example described above. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereby, the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game can be varied. Therefore, when the advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues (the remaining period until the unfavorable gaming state is set).

Here, with reference to FIG. 224 (a), when the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is won in the second special symbol lottery in this control example, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd referred to for selecting the jackpot type will be described. FIG. 224(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2, a jackpot type is defined in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends is different according to the value of the acquired first hit type counter c2 and the game state at the time of winning. That is, the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game is varied according to the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and if the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving state, "50" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h, and if the variable probability state is "100", "50" can be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i. If the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving state, "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h If the game state is the variable probability state, "90" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h. However, in the variable probability state, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and "jackpot D" that can be set to "50" is defined as the value of the variable probability counter 203i.

In addition, the content of the round game executed corresponding to each jackpot type, the explanation of the value set in the probability variable counter 203i defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are the same as the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 described above, so the detailed explanation is omitted.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the time period during which the time saving state continues is varied according to the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won and the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, after the end of the big win game executed when the big win D is selected, the player can grasp whether the game state at the time of winning the previous big win was the probability variable state or the time saving state according to the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of advantageous game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the pachinko machine 10 that executes a notification performance capable of notifying only that the advantageous game state is set without specifically notifying the currently set game state, when a jackpot is won during the advantageous game state, the jackpot is won in which game state is set. It becomes possible for the player to comprehend after the fact whether or not. Therefore, future games can be predicted based on the past game results, and the interest in the games can be improved.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), by varying the value set in the time-reduction counter 203h according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, the player is made to predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display contents of the remaining period notification mode (mode for notifying the remaining period until the advantageous game state ends) displayed after the end of the jackpot game. Even when a different value is set for 203h, the display mode of the remaining period information mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game is made common (for example, display of '70'), and when the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery in the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining period information mode may be variably displayed corresponding to the actual value of the time reduction counter 203h.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the game state set at the time of winning the previous big win after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the big win game. As a result, the player can be made to execute a game aiming at winning a big win and a game for grasping the game state set in the past in an advantageous game state, so that the player can be prevented from becoming tired of the game in the advantageous game state early.

In addition, in this control example, by varying the value set in the time-saving counter 203h according to the game state set when the jackpot is won, the player can predict the game state set when the jackpot is won based on the display contents of the remaining period notification mode (the mode for notifying the remaining period until the advantageous game state ends) displayed after the jackpot game ends. If the timing is possible, it may be configured to suggest at other timing, for example, it may be configured to inform the player of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot by the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game. In this case, an effect may be executed to directly notify the game state set when the big win is won, or an effect suggesting the duration of the advantageous game state set after the end of the big win game may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 223, the description is continued. The falling lottery table 202da is a data table that stores the determination values of a falling lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later. When the value of a falling lottery counter Cd1 acquired when a ball enters a first ball entrance 64 or a second ball entrance 640 (at the time of start winning), it is set so as to shift to a low probability state of a special pattern (to fall) when it matches with any of the determination values defined in a falling lottery table 202da.

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 224(b). FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224(b), the falling lottery table 202da defines two determination values "0 and 1" as determination values for determining falling in the variable probability state of the special symbols. Here, the falling lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 999". Among the 1000 possible values of the falling lottery counter Cd1, there are two determination values for determining falling, so the probability of falling (transitioning to the low probability state of the special symbols) becomes 1/500 in the probability variable state of the special symbols.

In the falling lottery table 202da in this control example, only the determination value (determination value for the variable probability state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not to fall in the variable probability state of the special symbol is defined, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is not defined. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state has already been reached.

In this control example, the drop lottery table 202da is compared with a drop lottery counter Cd1 that is updated periodically, and it is determined whether or not to shift (fall) from the probability variable state of special symbols to the low probability state of special symbols. That is, the timing of shifting from the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) which is the most advantageous state to the player among the advantageous game states to the short-time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state although it is one of the advantageous game states can be made random. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the variable probability state will continue as long as possible.

In this control example, the maximum continuation period (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol is defined by the value of the variable probability counter 203i after the end of the jackpot game, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued for a period longer than the maximum continuation period (50 times). In other words, even if the high probability state of the special pattern shifts (falls down) to the low probability state at any timing based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. Therefore, the game state shifts from a variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) to a time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), so that the timing of winning the falling lottery is not grasped by the player by the execution frequency of the game per normal pattern.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state during the advantageous game state (during the high probability state of the normal pattern), so that the player can be interested in the performance contents of the suggestive performance which suggests the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot after the fact.

In this control example, a lottery (judgment) is made as to whether or not to transition (fall) from a high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state of special symbols, but a lottery (judgment) may be made to shift to another state. For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each variation whether or not the high probability state of the normal design shifts to the low probability state of the normal design. As a result, since it is possible to determine how long the advantageous game state lasts at random, it is possible to play the game hoping that the advantageous game state will continue for each variation. Further, for example, it may be possible to draw a lottery whether or not to shift from the low probability state of special symbols to the high probability state of special symbols.

Furthermore, in this control example, the above-described drop lottery is executed each time a special symbol lottery is performed, but without being limited to this, for example, the easiness of execution of the drop lottery may be changed according to the type of special symbol for which the special symbol lottery is executed. Good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation that the high probability state of the special symbols shifts to the low probability state due to the drop lottery executed based on the performance of the first special symbol lottery, making it difficult for the player to play an advantageous game.

Further, a frequency determining means for determining the number of execution times of the fall lottery may be provided at the execution timing of the fall lottery so that the number of times of the fall lottery executed when the execution opportunity of the fall lottery is established may be varied. In this case, it is preferable to set the range of the number of times determined by the number of times determining means to be "0 to 5" and to set the average value to be one. With this configuration, the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed and the number of times the drop lottery is executed can be separated, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to understand at what timing the high probability state of the special pattern shifts to the low probability state. In this case, it is preferable to provide a suggesting means capable of suggesting the number of times determined by the frequency determining means (the number of executions of the falling lottery) so as to suggest to the player a period during which it is easy to fall (a period in which a plurality of times is determined by the frequency determining means) and a period in which it is difficult to fall (a period in which 0 times is determined by the frequency determining means). As a result, it is possible to play a game while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the content of suggestion by the suggestion means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of the special symbol lottery is used as the trigger for the execution of the fall lottery, but without being limited to this, for example, the fall lottery may be executed when the normal symbol lottery is executed, or the fall lottery may be executed when a ball enters a specific winning opening (for example, the general ball entrance 63) provided on the game board 13.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. As described above, the fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that it has a fall lottery function. Further, the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 are also different in that the effects based on the result of the falling lottery can be executed. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and FIG. 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(a). As shown in FIG. 2254(a), this fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a button operation effect selection 2 table 222df is provided in place of the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 226(a), the contents of the effect selection 2 table 222df at the time of button operation will be described. FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the fourth control example, the data table referred to when the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is changed from the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) to the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 226(b), the contents defined in the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2 will be described. FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2. Like the variable probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), the variable probability state selection 2 table 222df2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a performance mode to be executed as an operation performance when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is different in that it is possible to select an effect mode that can suggest information based on the above, and in that the selection ratio of each effect mode is partially changed. Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the variable probability state selection 2 table 222df2, similarly to the variable probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), the operation method, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f In addition, the effect mode executed as the operation effect is defined in correspondence with the setting status of the short fall flag 223da set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but by winning the fall lottery, the duration of the variable probability state is a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol lotteries is within 20 times).

Of the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2, the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF has the same contents as the probability variation state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149). Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Here, a specific description will be given of the defined contents of the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to ON.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to ON, during the first period (the period when the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 20 times) in which the operation timing is a high-speed fluctuation period, the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the obtained production counter 223f is "no" indicating that the operation production is not executed in the range of "0 to 149". The range of ``ready-to-win suggestion'' indicating the performance suggested during the 3-pattern variation is regulated in the range ``140 to 189'' of ``state suggestion'' indicating the performance for suggesting the currently set game state, and the range of ``190 to 198'' defines the ``state suggestion'' indicating the performance for suggesting the currently set game state. Further, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated so that the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198".

In addition, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating transition to the background mode is defined, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state indication" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state is defined. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 198" to indicate the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggestion of state".

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", indicating that the background mode will be transferred. "Early fall notification" is stipulated. In addition, when the operation method is ``long press'', ``past state suggestion'' indicating the performance for suggesting the game state set in the past (when the ``chance mode'' was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is defined in the range of ``0 to 198'' for the value of the obtained performance counter 223f.

Incidentally, for various operation effects in the fourth control example, as in the first control example described above, not only the lottery result for the special symbol variation to be executed this time but also the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b may be executed. Specifically, winning information stored in a winning information storage area 223b is read out in order of execution of the special pattern lottery, and it is determined whether or not the information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information indicates the value for winning the falling lottery. In this case, information corresponding to the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 that wins the drop lottery may be stored in advance in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and determination may be executed based on the stored information and the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in the winning information.

Then, among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the winning information in which the execution order of the special symbol lottery is fixed, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery. A process of calculating a variation time of a special symbol variation corresponding to each winning prize information of a symbol lottery is executed, and a period during which a fall lottery cannot be won, that is, a period in which a probability variable state continues (most advantageous period) is determined. Then, the most advantageous period suggesting effect mode for informing the player of the determined most advantageous period may be executed as the operation effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest (notify) the player the period during which he or she cannot win the drop lottery, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, as a display mode of suggesting the most advantageous period, it is preferable to display at least a part of the total time of each fluctuation time resulting as the most advantageous period. This allows the player to grasp at least the length of time during which the most profitable period lasts. Further, by displaying the most advantageous period in terms of time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the possibility of winning the jackpot is set higher in the variation pattern of the long variation time, the novel game property can be provided to the player to expect the short variation time to be set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation.

As described above, when the operation effect is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation effect may be executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), or the operation effect may be executed at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) and the effect mode of the operation effect is determined, and the special symbol variation is newly started. In this case, a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been received, and a notification means for notifying that it is in a waiting period until the operation performance is executed are preferably provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the fact that the operation effect is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22 . In addition, in the presentation for notifying the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed by the number of executions of the special symbol variation instead of being displayed by the time as described above. In addition, when it is determined that there is winning information having information indicating winning of the falling lottery among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the period until the falling lottery is won and the high probability state of the special pattern shifts to the low probability state is calculated, and a performance suggesting winning of the falling lottery or a performance suggesting the remaining period until the high probability state of the special pattern ends may be executed.

<Regarding control processing content in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 229, among the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth control example, points different from the first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example in that it has a fall lottery function as described above and that the continuation period of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed, and the control contents regarding this difference are different. Specifically, for the control contents of the main controller in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is replaced with the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158), the look-ahead process 4 (see S653 in FIG. 228) is replaced by the look-ahead process (see S613 in FIG. 162), and the jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170). ) is replaced with the jackpot ending process 4 (see S1960 in FIG. 229), and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 227, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258). When this special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) is executed, the same S301 process as the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0 (S351). Here, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the above-described special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and the process of S302 to S307, which is the same as the process, is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., the state of the high probability of the special symbol (S351: Yes), then the value of the acquired falling lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value defined in the falling lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the falling lottery has been won (S353).

When it is determined that the falling lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), and a falling command for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state is set (S355), the same S302 to S307 processing as the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and this processing ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in a state where the special symbol low probability state is set. On the other hand, in the processing of S353, when it is determined that the falling lottery is not won (S353: No), the processing of S353 to S355 is skipped, and the processing of S302 to S307, which is the same as the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S208 in FIG. 158), is executed, and this processing ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in the normal state in which the special symbol high probability state is set.

As described above, in the fourth control example, in the state where the special symbol lottery execution condition is established (the state where the special symbol big hit determination process 4 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is executed), before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, the falling lottery is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery result of the falling lottery can be immediately executed, so that the player can be provided with a fair game.

The execution timing of the fall lottery and the execution timing of the special symbol lottery may be different from the control example, for example, the fall lottery may be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, a special pattern lottery is executed in a state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set, and a drop lottery is executed immediately after that, so an event occurs that the drop lottery is won and a low probability state of the special pattern is set until the lottery result of the special pattern lottery executed in the high probability state of the special pattern is stop-displayed (before the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed). When such a state occurs, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation currently being executed is the last variation after the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state, and the next special symbol lottery is preferably executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the falling lottery is won, the process of shifting the special symbol high probability state to the low probability state is executed before the next special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured to set the number of times (for example, twice). Even in the case of such a constitution, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the game state (probability variable state) most advantageous to the player will continue by winning the falling lottery, so that the player can play the game with a sense of tension.

In this control example, when the drop lottery is not won, that is, when the special pattern high probability state continues, the effect for suggesting or notifying the player of that effect is not executed, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the special symbol high probability state continues (continuing period). In this case, for example, not only the value of the drop lottery counter Cd1 determined as winning (falling) but also the value (e.g., 998, 999) determined as being out of specification may be defined in the drop lottery table 202da, and when the value is determined to be determined as being out of specification, a command may be set to indicate that the result of the drop lottery is out of specification. is set, and when a voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command for indicating that the lottery result of the falling lottery is a loss, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to execute a performance indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is a loss, and when it is determined that the performance is to be executed in the lottery, the loss performance may be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 228, the content of the prefetching process 4 (S653) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 4 (S653). This look-ahead process 4 (S653) differs from the look-ahead process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the above-described first control example in that the types of the various counters to be read out are different in the process of reading the various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b), but otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the look-ahead process 4 (S653) is executed, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the falling lottery counter Cd1, and the variation type counter CS1 newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) are read out (S751), and then the look-ahead process executed in the above-described first control example (see S613 in FIG. 162). ) are executed, and the process ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161), when the special symbol lottery right (special symbol reservation) is newly acquired (when new winning information is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area), in the look-ahead process 4 (S653) executed, the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is also read, and the winning command including the acquired value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is set, and the voice lamp is set. It is configured to be able to transmit to the control device 113 . As a result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 that wins the falling lottery is included in the special figure reserved balls already acquired on the side of the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting a period until winning the falling lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the contents of the jackpot ending process 4 (S1960) will be described. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 4 (S1960). This jackpot end processing 4 (S1960) is different from the jackpot end processing (see S1910 in FIG. 170) of the first control example described above in that the processing content for setting the value of the time reduction counter 203h is different, and the other content is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the jackpot end process 4 (S1960) is executed, first, the same S2101 and S2102 processes as the jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170) of the first control example described above are executed, and then the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the value corresponding to the jackpot type are set to the time reduction counter 203h (S2153), the value of the probability variable counter 203i set this time, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h. Set the state command based on the value (S2104), set the jackpot middle flag 203k, probability variation setting flag 203m to OFF (S2105), and terminate this process.

Here, the processing contents of S2153 will be described in detail. In this control example, the game state storage area 203g is configured so as to be able to temporarily store the current game state, the game state set when the previous big win was won, and the big win type selected when the big win is won. Then, when the processing of S2153 is executed, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type stored in the game state storage area 203g are read out, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set in the time reduction counter 203h.

In this control example, when the jackpot ending process 4 is executed, that is, when all the round games in the jackpot game are finished, the value to be set to the time saving counter 203h is determined. By configuring in this way, a setting condition that can be established during a round game of a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is established when a specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during a round game (V round game), can be set according to whether or not a setting condition is established.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, at the start of the jackpot game or at the time of selecting the winning jackpot type, the value of the time reduction counter 203h based on the game state at the jackpot winning may be determined, and the value according to the determined content may be set in the jackpot end processing 4 (see S1960). By configuring in this way, since it is not necessary to hold the information indicating the game state at the time of winning the big win during the period of the big win game, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231, among the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the present fourth control example, differences from the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first control example will be described. The fourth control example differs greatly from the above-described first control example in that the falling lottery is executed, and the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is also different in that the falling lottery processing is executed.

Specifically, the difference is that the command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 230, the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4162) will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, in this command determination process 4 (S4162), when it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No) with respect to the command determination process of the first control example (see S4112 in FIG. 175), it is then determined whether a fall command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4251). The difference is that (S4252) is executed. If it is determined in the process of S4251 that the fall command has not been received (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) has been executed, the process of S4219, which is the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 175) of the first control example described above, is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the details of the fall-related processing (S4252) executed in the command determination processing 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described. FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing details of the fall-related processing (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is a process executed when a fall command (see S355 in FIG. 227) set when it is determined that the fall lottery is won in the fall lottery executed by main controller 110 (see S352 and S353 in FIG. 227) is received, and is for executing processing for determining the timing at which the fall command is received (the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbol ends).

When the fall-related processing (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving set after the end of the jackpot game (the number of times of the special pattern lottery that can be executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern), and is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern lottery is executed. is determined. That is, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the drop lottery is won early despite the high probability state of the special symbol being set.

In the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), the time saving state is set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S5504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process ends.

By setting the short fall flag 223da to ON in the process of S5503, it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186), and when selecting the effect mode with reference to the variable probability state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226(b)), the effect mode is selected by referring to a different data table from when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF. It will be. Therefore, the player can be made to grasp the result of the fall lottery after the fact by the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the production example in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the content of the reverse variation display effect (see FIG. 205(d)), which is an effect executed by making the direction of variation of the sub symbol fz different from the direction of variation of the main symbol sz among the variation effects of the third symbol executed in the above-described second control example, will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the reverse fluctuation display effect.

As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz including the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the sub-symbol fz different from the main symbol sz are configured to be independently display-controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to be able to execute a reach line announcement performance for informing the player only of the stop display position of the main symbol sz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205(d), in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol variation, the sub symbol fz is variably displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the variable display direction of the main symbol sz.

The contents of this reverse fluctuation display presentation will be described with reference to FIG. First, a variation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is transmitted from main controller 110 . Then, when the variation pattern command is received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182)) determines the effect mode (variation pattern) for the main symbol sz. Thus, based on the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main controller 110, the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which is the identification information (identification pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, can be surely set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stop display of the main symbol sz for indicating a lottery result different from the result of the actually executed special symbol lottery.

After that, based on the effect mode of the main symbol sz determined by the sound ramp control device 113, processing for setting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the performance mode of the ready-to-win state is set as the performance mode for the main pattern sz, and when it is determined that the performance mode of the ready-to-win state is set, processing for selecting the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed. In addition, when the performance mode of the ready-to-win state is not set as the performance mode for the main pattern sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the performance mode set for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz. As a result, the sub-symbol fz can be variably displayed in synchronism with the main symbol sz which is variably displayed in the effect mode (fluctuation pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can be made to feel as if the main symbols sz and the sub-symbols fz are variably displayed as a sequence of symbols arranged in a specific order.

In the above-described example, when the effect mode for the main symbol sz is in the ready-to-win state, the processing for selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is configured to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process for selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz may be executed even in a part of the state. In other words, when the performance mode of the main pattern sz is set in the performance mode indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is likely to be a big hit, the process of selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz may be easily executed. By constructing in this way, a player can be made to expect a big win just by setting (executing) a performance mode different from a normal performance mode (a performance mode synchronized with the performance mode of the main pattern sz) as the sub-pattern fz.

Further, in the above-described example, when the process of selecting the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz is not executed, the performance mode (synchronization performance mode) corresponding to the performance mode of the main symbol sz is set for the sub-symbol fz, and the variable performance of synchronizing the variable display of the sub-symbol fz with the variable display of the main symbol sz is executed. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed so as to follow the variably displayed main symbol sz, so that the same variable display as the variable display of the third symbol in the first control example (see FIG. 122(b)) is executed. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the plurality of main symbols sz and the plurality of sub-symbols fz are variably displayed and controlled as a symbol row in a predetermined order (1 (main symbol sz)→triangle mark (sub-symbol fz)→2 (main symbol sz)→ . . . ) as shown in FIG. 122(b).

Therefore, when the performance mode of the main pattern sz and the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz are set to be different from each other, the performance with unexpectedness can be provided to the player, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the processing for setting the performance mode for the main pattern sz and the processing for setting the performance mode for the sub-pattern fz are made different, the processing for variably displaying the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz in a non-synchronized pattern can be easily executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the effect mode (variation pattern) for all the third symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz) as in the above-described first control example, for example, when setting the effect mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is changed, the effect mode in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is changed for all the third symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz). Although it is necessary to set (variation pattern), the performance mode for the main pattern sz and the performance mode for the sub-pattern fz can be set independently as in the second control example, so that only the performance mode for the sub-pattern fz needs to be variably set, and the processing for setting the performance mode for the third pattern can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 232, the description continues. When the processing for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed, it is first discriminated whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, and the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is selected by referring to the discrimination result and using a sub-symbol performance selection table (not shown). Here, in a sub-symbol performance selection table (not shown), the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz is specified at a predetermined ratio in correspondence with the result of the special symbol lottery and the performance mode set for the main symbol sz. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit'' and ``double reach'' is set as the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, ``ready line notice presentation'' is selected at a rate of 60%, ``reverse fluctuation display presentation'' is selected at a rate of 20%, and ``no sub-pattern presentation'' is selected at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit'' and ``single reach'' is set as the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, ``ready line notice presentation'' is selected at a rate of 20%, ``reverse fluctuation display presentation'' is selected at a rate of 20%, and ``no sub-pattern presentation'' is selected at a rate of 60%.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "miss" and "double reach" is set as the production mode of the main symbol sz, "reverse fluctuation display production" is selected at a rate of 40% and "no sub-symbol production" is selected at a rate of 60%. ” is selected, and “no sub-symbol effect” is selected at a rate of 90%.

Using the sub-symbol performance selection table (not shown) defined in this way, when the ``reverse fluctuation display performance'' is selected, next display mode selection processing for selecting the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed. In this display mode selection processing, processing for selecting the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the third symbol variation performance (performance mode of the sub-symbol fz) is executed, and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub symbol fz that can be selected here is the display mode stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which was described with reference to FIG. 203(c) in the second control example described above.

That is, in the display mode selection process executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a display sub-symbol mode command (display command) for specifying the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is set, and when the display control device 114 receives the set display sub-symbol mode command (display command), a process of reading the corresponding image data from the character storage area 234a2 is executed.

In the display mode selection process, for example, as shown in FIG. 203(c), any one of the display mode SD1 of "triangle mark" which is the normal display mode of the sub-symbol fz, the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, and the display mode SD3 imitating "number 16" indicating that an advantageous jackpot game (16-round game) will be executed which is advantageous to the player when the big win is won is selected. When the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a big win, it is easier to select the display mode SD2 than when it is other than the big win (case of loss), and furthermore, when the advantageous big win game is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed this time, the display mode SD3 is easier than when the advantageous big win game is not executed (when the big win is not won, the big win is won, but the big win game other than the advantageous big win game is executed). is configured so that it is easy to select

By constructing in this manner, the player can be interested in both the performance mode set for the sub-pattern fz and the display mode set for the sub-pattern fz, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

FIG. 232 shows a state in which the "reverse fluctuation display effect" is executed as the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" is set as the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are variably displayed in the opposite direction as the variable display of the third pattern (the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can be provided with unexpected variation presentation. Further, as a performance mode using the sub-pattern fz, the sub-pattern fz is variably displayed in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main pattern sz, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is different from the normal performance mode.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all the sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 imitating the "bubble" selected by the above-described display mode selection process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the display mode of any sub-symbol fz among the plurality of sub-symbols fz may be changed. In this case, only the display mode of the sub-symbol fz arranged in the vicinity of the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed may be easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-described display mode selection process. Thereby, it is possible to easily predict the stop display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub symbol fz.

In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 232 shows an example in which all the sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface have the same size, but the sub-symbol fz size (enlargement ratio), rotation angle, translucent value, etc. may be set differently. In this case, the values defined in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-symbol fz may be changed.

Also, in FIG. 232, at the timing when the third symbol variation is started, the display mode of the sub symbol fz is switched from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to the "bubble" display mode SD2, and the reverse variation display effect is executed. , or the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be switched during the period from the start of the current third symbol variation to the stop.

In addition, when the previous third design fluctuation is stopped, and the process of switching the display constitution of the sub -design FZ is performed in the period until the third design fluctuation is started, for example, the second special design is analyzed in the prize information stored in the winning information storage area 223B, and then executed. When the lottery (fluctuation) is a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning), it may be configured so that the display form of the sub -designed FZ that is displayed is variable. In this case, before setting the performance mode of the main pattern sz for showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (variation) to be executed next, the display mode used for the variable performance of the sub-pattern fz to be executed next is determined. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, it is possible to change the timing of notifying the player of each mode used in the performance mode of the third symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can be interested in the third symbol variation performance to be executed.

In addition, when the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed in the period from the start of the current third symbol change to the stop thereof, the sub-symbol fz may be displayed in the display mode before switching at the time when the third symbol change is started, or the sub-symbol fz may be displayed after the process of switching the display mode is executed.

<Regarding the switching control of the switching valve executed during the jackpot game>
In each control example described above, as described using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), when it is determined that a specific round game (V round game) has started, the control process for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120(b) or FIG. 213(b)) is configured to be executed. In other words, a specific round game (V round game) is executed only when the jackpot game to be executed is a probability variable jackpot game, and a specific round (V round game) is not executed when the jackpot game is a normal jackpot game. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from winning a V prize (passing to a specific area (V gate 65V)) during the normal jackpot game, but there is a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game is increased because it is necessary to change the contents of the control processing for the switching valve 65y according to the type of the jackpot game to be executed.

Therefore, control processing other than the control processing contents for the switching valve 65y used in each control example described above may be used. For example, although the V round game is executed even in the normal jackpot game, the condition for ending the V round game may be different from the probability variable jackpot game so that the ball cannot win the variable prize winning device 65 during the V round game. Further, as in the fourth control example in which the above-described V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is performed, when the switching valve 65y is switched and controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is performed, in the normal jackpot game, the switching valve 65y is controlled by setting the winning number of balls for switching control of the switching valve 65y to a number larger than the winning number (for example, 10) for ending the V-round game. may be configured so that is not executed.

Also, the control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y may be set to be the same for the variable probability big winning game and the normal big winning game, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during execution of the normal big winning game, the passage may not be processed effectively. That is, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Further, irrespective of the type of the jackpot game, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the jackpot game (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set), switching control may be executed so that the switching valve 65y is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and the opening pattern of the open/close door 65b in the jackpot game may be changed according to the type of the jackpot game, thereby making the V winning probability different for each jackpot game type.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, the effect mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz and the effect mode (variation pattern) of the sub symbol fz are both set (selected) by the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, the display control device 114 may be configured to set the effect mode (variation pattern). However, it is preferable to configure the display control device 114 to set the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz.

The second control example and the modified example of the second control example have been described above, but in the case of setting the effect mode of the variable effect that dynamically displays various symbols executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is sufficient that the effect mode is set independently for the type of symbol to be dynamically displayed and the display control is executed independently, and a configuration other than the configuration shown in the control example described above may be used.

For example, a plurality of display layers for displaying the sub-symbols fz may be provided, and the sub-symbols fz may be overlapped and variably displayed as in the modification of the second control example described above with reference to FIG.

In addition, a plurality of display layers are provided, and a priority order of display is set for each layer, and when the display modes displayed on the respective display layers overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, display control is performed so that the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority is visible to the player. It may be configured to be displayed in duplicate. In this case, for example, in the case of executing the "reverse variation display effect" with reference to FIG. 232, the display may be controlled (setting the translucency value and magnification rate of each sub-symbol) so that the sub-symbol fz imitating the "bubble" is displayed in the sub-symbol fz of the "triangle mark", and the sub-symbol fz may be displayed in a display mode that can suggest in advance that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz will change from the "triangle mark" to the "bubble".

As described above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as the game state, and the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. . Furthermore, it is configured such that the time saving state is set after the variable probability state ends.

Then, when the advantageous game state is set, the period until the next normal state is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set, the time saving state set after the variable probability state ends and the period until the normal state is set can be notified to the player as the continuation period of the advantageous game state. By constructing in this manner, the player can be notified of the period until the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, not the period until the currently set game state is ended, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, when a period in which a plurality of advantageous game states continue continuously is notified as the continuation period of one advantageous game state, it is configured so that the player can grasp the currently set detailed game state according to the contents and execution frequency of various performances executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加By constructing in this way, it is possible to perform a game while predicting the current game state while grasping the period until the normal state is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the most advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set first among the plurality of advantageous game states, and then the normal advantageous game state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous game state (probability variable state) is set. In a pachinko machine 10 configured to be more advantageous to the player in the latent probability state than in the variable probability state, the latent probability state (high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is also set, and the game state (variable probability state, time saving state, latent probability state) in which the special patterns or normal patterns are in the high probability state becomes the advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Then, the value of the variable probability counter 203i indicating the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues can be set to be larger than the value of the time reduction counter 203h indicating the period of continuing the high probability state of the normal pattern.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, for example, as the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game, ``100'' as the value of the variable probability counter 203i and ``50'' as the value of the time reduction counter 203h can be set, so that the variable probability state is set as the advantageous game state after the jackpot game is finished, and then the latent probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the period in which a plurality of advantageous gaming states continue continuously, that is, the period until the latent probability state set after the variable probability state ends may be reported as the duration of one advantageous gaming state. Also, in this case, it is preferable to construct so as to be able to execute a shift suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player whether or not there is a possibility that the currently set game state shifts to another game state during the continuation period of the advantageous game state. As a result, since the player can grasp only the possibility of shifting to another game state during the advantageous game state, the enjoyment of predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous game state can be provided. Furthermore, when there is a possibility that the currently set game state shifts to another game state during the continuation period of the advantageous game state, an advantageous shift suggesting performance capable of suggesting whether or not the game state after the shift is a game state more advantageous to the player may be executed. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the timing at which the game state shifts during the advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enjoy the game during the period while grasping the period until the normal state is set.

In addition, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, when the jackpot is won during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is terminated. However, among the plurality of advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time reduction state) that is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous game state (probability variable state) is set. In a pachinko machine 10 configured so that, for example, among a plurality of advantageous game states, a normal advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player among a plurality of advantageous game states is set first, and then a most advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal advantageous game state (variable probability state) is set, the case where the most advantageous game state is set without winning a jackpot can be more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot during the normal advantageous game state. Sometimes.

Therefore, it is preferable to perform the performance during the period in which the player can distinguish between the period in which winning the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and the period in which it is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery can be watched closely based on the contents identified by the period presentation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, as a jackpot type set when a large hits win in a special pattern lottery, if it is a pachinko machine 10 that has a large hit type that will be disadvantageous to the player if it is set in the normal advantageous gaming state, and a large hit type that will not be disadvantageous to the players even if it is set in the normal advantageous gaming state, the production of the above -mentioned period of production. , Based on the jackpot type set at the jackpot winning, it may be configured to perform a production that suggests whether it is a jackpot that is advantageous to players. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the game aiming at winning the big win in the special pattern lottery, but also in the timing of winning the big win and the kind of big win set at the time of winning the big win.

In the above-described first control example, one of a plurality of types (two types) of advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the big win game, but it is not limited to this, and the normal state may be set after the end of the big win game. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will be set after the end of the big winning game.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, a production mode (super chance mode) for notifying that a variable probability state has been set after the end of the big win game, and a production mode (chance mode) for notifying that an advantageous game state (variable probability state or time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the end of the big win game is set according to the performance result of the big win game performance executed during the big win game. Thus, in the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of meaningless performance that the chance mode is set after the jackpot game is finished despite the fact that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished.

For the technique of the first control example configured as described above, for example, an effect mode selection means is provided which allows the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode to be set after the end of the big win game, and the effect mode selection means can be used to select an arbitrary effect mode in advance, so that the effect mode of the big win game effect executed during the big win game and the effect mode set after the end of the big win game may be set in correspondence with the contents selected by the effect mode selection means. Specifically, as a performance mode set after the end of the jackpot game, a performance mode selecting means is configured to selectable from a ``complete notification mode'' for notifying the actually set game state and a ``chance notification mode'' for notifying only that the advantageous game state is set, and the player can select any of the performance modes by operating the operation means (frame button 22) during the period when the special pattern lottery is not executed in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

A storage means for temporarily storing a performance mode selected by a player is provided, and information enabling identification of the performance mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a part of the display surface (for example, a sub-display area Ds) of a third pattern display device 81 so that the currently set performance mode can always be identified by the player. Then, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, as a jackpot game effect, a V notification effect is executed as an effect to guide the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game, and when the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIGS. 127(b) and (d)) and passes. If not, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIGS. 127A and 127C). Then, when the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" (see FIG. 131A) indicating that the current game state is the probability variable state is set, and when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the current game state is the time saving state. A "chance mode" (see FIG. 128(a)) indicating that the With this configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as a trigger for determining the game state.

On the other hand, when a ``chance notification mode'' is stored in a storage means, the above-described V notification performance is not executed as a jackpot game performance, and after the jackpot game is finished, the ``chance mode'' is set regardless of the set game state. With this configuration, the game can be played without informing the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V winning which is the trigger for determining the game state. When the performance mode is not selected by the performance mode selection means, the ``initial mode'' is stored in the memory means as in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, it is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the big win game, the big win game performance is executed based on the lottery result, and the performance mode after the big win game performance is set based on the performance result of the big win game performance, as in the first control example described above.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an arbitrary effect mode desired by the player without discomfort, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Further, as a means for selecting various effects to be executed in the pachinko machine 10, there may be provided a performance frequency selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the selection ratio of various performance modes (see FIG. 148) selected for the operation performance to be executed when the chance mode is selected. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a performance frequency selection means that enables a player to select a selection ratio so that the selection ratio of various performance modes to be selected can be greatly deviated or the difference in the selection ratio can be reduced depending on whether the probability variable state is set or the time saving state is set. Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to provide an arbitrary performance mode desired by the player without any sense of incongruity, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the above-described first to fourth control examples, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbols is set after the jackpot game ends by passing the ball through the specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. As a configuration capable of providing the player with a special game different from the privilege game based on passing through the area, for example, when winning a small win that is a lottery result different from the big win in the special symbol lottery, a second privilege game (small win game) different from the privilege game (big win game) can be executed, and a variable ball entering means (a variable winning device 65 or another prize winning device may be separately provided) that is opened during the second privilege game passes. A configuration may be used in which a specific area to obtain is provided, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second privilege game, the privilege game (big win game) can be executed after the second privilege game (small win game) ends.

As the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above, as shown in FIG. 233, even if any game state is set, a game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by executing a left-handed game, and a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery by executing a right-handed game. Good.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 270. FIG. The fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first control example, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set as the game state, and after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the special symbol lottery winning, the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is changed to the low probability state. It was configured to be able to shift from the state to the high probability state. In addition, after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game, and when other termination conditions (for example, termination conditions established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number) are established, the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In other words, unless a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, the opportunity to shift the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) from the low probability state to the high probability state is not established. In the first control example configured as described above, the setting of a jackpot game capable of awarding a large number of prize balls to the player and the setting of a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) in which a lottery advantageous to the player is likely to be executed are all executed based on the fact that the player wins the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to make the player play the game willingly.

However, in the above-described first control example, since the probability state of each symbol can be shifted to the high probability state only when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, there is a problem that the player who has not won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is not given a privilege, and the player who has not won the jackpot for a long period of time loses his/her willingness to play.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state, and in a part of the lottery result (loss) where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is different from the jackpot winning, the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbols is established.

In other words, it is configured so that a privilege different from the big winning game can be given even to the player who did not win the big winning in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, a lottery result of executing a big winning game and a lottery result of setting a time-saving state (a high probability state of normal symbols) can be separately provided to the player, so that the types of lottery results advantageous to the player can be easily diversified.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the easiness of establishment of the opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, in addition to the presence or absence of jackpot winning when the special symbol lottery is executed, short-time winning (whether or not the opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols is established). The presence or absence can be determined, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, only the presence or absence of a big hit can be determined when a special symbol lottery is executed.

By constructing in this way, when the normal state is set, as the opportunity for setting the high-probability state of the normal pattern, the opportunity which can be established when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the opportunity which can be established when winning the time-saving lottery in the special symbol lottery are set, and in the game state other than the normal state, the opportunity which can be established when the high-probability state of the normal pattern is set as the opportunity for which the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set is set when the special symbol lottery is won. That is, in the normal state in which the presence or absence of time-saving winning can be determined, more opportunities are set for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern than in the game state other than the normal state.

Therefore, each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is set to a low probability state, and the normal state, which is a game state (game state disadvantageous to the player) in which winning is most difficult in each pattern lottery, can make it easier to set a high probability state of the normal pattern than other game states, so that the player's willingness to play the game in the normal state can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the normal symbol high probability state is set is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be memorizable (retainable) up to a predetermined number (4 pieces). And it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to win the time saving than the first special symbol lottery.

That is, when the game state shifts from one of the game states (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the normal state (when the game state changes from the game state advantageous to the player to the game state disadvantageous), it is configured to make it easy to win the time saving when the second special pattern lottery based on the execution right of the second special pattern lottery held and stored in the high probability state of the normal pattern before the shift is executed during the normal state after the shift.

With this configuration, the player can be made to execute the special symbol lottery for easily returning to the game state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period even when the game state is changed from the game state advantageous to the player to the game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed from being remarkably lowered when the normal state, which is the game state disadvantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game for acquiring the special symbol 2 suspension until the last moment when the normal symbol high probability state ends, in order to end the normal symbol high probability state with the upper limit number (four) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 suspension).

In the above-described first control example, the high-probability state of normal symbols can be set only based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game, as an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set. When the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game, the variable probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then the time saving state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, until the number of times of the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times after the big winning game. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is continued until the special symbols are executed 100 times.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, as described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, it is configured to be able to set the normal symbol high probability state even when the special symbol lottery wins the short time. I'm letting you

Specifically, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the second time saving is more likely than the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the first time saving. In this way, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, by making it possible to set the high probability state of the normal design in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting opportunity (the establishment opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design), not only whether the high probability state of the normal design is set, but also the process of the game of what kind of opportunity the high probability state of the normal design is set. You can make it easier to perform tricks.

In addition, in the fifth control example, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the ease of establishment of the time saving end condition (number of times of time saving) is different. The degree of advantage of a privilege (for example, the number of prize balls given during a big win game, or the type of game state set after the end of a big win game) given when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery during the high probability state of , may be made different.

First, referring to FIG. 234, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 234, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 119) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that the through gate 67 provided in the left area of the game board 13 (area on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is deleted, and the second ball entrance 640 provided with the electric accessory 640a is at least when the jackpot game is executed. The major difference is that the arrangement position of the variable winning device 65 that enables the game balls to win is different. Moreover, it is different in that the internal configuration of the variable winning device 65 is changed. Other contents are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the through gate 67, which is the ball entrance for establishing the opportunity for executing the lottery of normal symbols, is arranged only in the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern lottery while the game ball is shot toward the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance (a prize winning opening) 64, during the left-handed game.

The first entrance 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80 . A variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into right and left, a left flow path (left area) through which game balls can flow down is formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a right flow path (right area) through which game balls can flow down is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80.例文帳に追加A game ball flowing down the left channel (region) does not flow down the right channel (region), and a game ball flowing down the right channel (region) does not flow down the left channel (region).

Below the variable display unit 80, a lower area (common area) is formed in which both the game balls that have flowed down the left channel (area) and the game balls that have flowed down the right channel (area) can flow down, and an out port 66 is provided at the lowest part of the lower area (the lowest part of the game board 13). The first ball entrance 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the left channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right channel can enter. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the fifth control example, it may be configured such that only game balls flowing down the left channel can enter the first ball entrance 64 . By configuring in this way, when executing a right-handed game in which the game ball flows down to the right area, for example, when executing a game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed.

The second ball entrance 640 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path. The second ball entrance 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, a flow path through which the game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and a photosensor for detecting a game ball entering the opening is provided. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640a is attached as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate capable of closing the opening, and an opening solenoid (not shown) is provided for driving opening and closing to the front side with the variableness of the opening/closing plate as an axis. The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the normal pattern (second pattern) wins, the electric accessory 640a is tilted downward in the front by driving the opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the opening of the second ball entrance 640, and the open state and the normal closed state are repeated a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not a big win is made in the special pattern lottery (big win lottery), and to determine the short-time winning (time-saving lottery) for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols, and to make the big-win type determination when the big win is determined (when the big win is won), and to make the time-shorter type determination when the time-shorter win is made.

In the fifth control example, different jackpot types are defined by a first special pattern in which a lottery opportunity is established when a game ball enters a first ball entrance 64 and a second special pattern in which a lottery opportunity is established when a game ball enters a second ball entrance 640, and a 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5) and a 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B5) are defined for the first special pattern. In addition, 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5), 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C5), and 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D5) are defined for the second special symbol. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the type of the big win when the result is a big win.

Here, the ``16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5)'' is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds is executed, and a probability variable state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period). 1 special design or 2nd special design) is varied 60 times, period until 60th special design variation stops is set.

That is, the same condition (60th special symbol fluctuation stop) is defined for the jackpot A5 as the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period. Therefore, when a jackpot A5 is set as a jackpot type, a probability variable state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special pattern fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the probability variable state, both the special pattern high probability period and the general pattern high probability period are terminated and the normal state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern low probability state) is set. Since the game state is directly shifted from the game state in which the normal pattern high probability state is set to the normal state by constructing in this manner, the second special pattern lottery based on the second special pattern lottery right (special pattern 2 reservation) acquired during the normal pattern high probability state can be easily executed in the normal state.

``6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B5)'' is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed and a probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set after the jackpot game is finished. This jackpot B5 is the end condition for ending the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period. That is, the jackpot B5 is a jackpot type that differs from the jackpot A5 only in the number of round games (the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the fifth control example, since it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of normal symbols, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game during the normal state, and the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, either the big win A or the big win B is set as the big win type. In other words, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery mainly executed in the normal state, the big win game of different number of rounds corresponding to the set big win type is executed, and after the big win game is finished, the variable probability state with the same end condition is set.

By configuring in this way, even when any jackpot type is set, the player can be made to play the game under the same conditions after the jackpot game ends. In the fifth control example, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a big win type in which only the number of rounds of the big win game is different. Also, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, etc.) and the content of the game state (game state type, end condition) set after the jackpot game ends may be set differently.

In this case, as the types of the first privilege (jackpot game) and the second privilege (high-probability state of normal symbols) given to the player based on the jackpot winning of the special symbols, the jackpot category corresponding to the combination in which the first privilege and the second privilege are most advantageous to the player to the jackpot category corresponding to the combination in which the first privilege and the second privilege are most disadvantageous to the player may be defined in advance, and one of the jackpot categories may be set when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this way, the degree of advantage of a privilege that can be given after winning a big win in a special pattern lottery can be greatly changed based on the set big win class, so that the player can be interested in the set big win class. In order not to greatly differ the degree of advantage of the privilege granted based on the winning of the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, for example, only the jackpot type that combines the first privilege with the low degree of advantage and the second privilege with the high degree of advantage, or the jackpot type that combines the first privilege with the high degree of advantage and the second privilege with the low degree of advantage, i.e., only the jackpot types other than the jackpot types in which the degree of advantage of both the first and second benefits are both high or low are defined for the jackpot type. , and one jackpot type may be set from among a plurality of defined jackpot types.

The ``6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C5)'' is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed and a probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set after the jackpot game is finished. In the fifth control example, different periods can be set as a period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (special symbol high probability period) and a period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period), and the jackpot C5 is a special symbol high probability period. (First special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 56 times, and a period until the 56th special symbol variation stops is set.

In other words, the jackpot C5 defines an end condition (probability variable end condition) for ending the special pattern high probability period and an end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the normal pattern high probability period (time reduction end condition) differently, and is configured so that the time reduction end condition is established before the probability variable end condition is established. Therefore, when the jackpot C5 is set as the jackpot type, the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the 56th special symbol variation in the variable probability state is stopped and displayed, the high probability period for normal symbols ends earlier than the high probability period for special symbols, and the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. Then, when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed for the fourth time after the second probability variable state is set (60th time in total after the jackpot game is finished), the time-saving end condition is established, and the game state is changed so as to set the normal state.

Here, the period in which the probability variable state is set is a game state in which the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol lottery is easily acquired because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the game period is for making the player play the right-handed game. Therefore, it becomes a game period in which the player is made to play a left-handed game. That is, when the variable probability state shifts to the second variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the variable probability state is executed during the second variable probability state. Then, in the fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and up to four special figure 2 reservations are configured to be stored, so even if the state changes from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state with the upper limit number (four) of the special figure 2 reservations acquired, the second special symbol lottery is executed four times until the second probability variable state ends (until the special figure high probability period ends), so from the second probability variable state. The number of special figures 2 pending stored at the time when the game state shifts to the normal state becomes 0 pieces.

In other words, when the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type, a normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed after the jackpot game is finished is set, but the second special pattern lottery based on the special pattern 2 reservation obtained during the normal pattern high probability period is hard to execute in the normal state. Therefore, the jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B, which is the same jackpot type in that the jackpot game with the same content is executed and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and the jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B in terms of the ease of execution of the second special pattern lottery in the state in which the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are terminated and the normal state is set.

Although the detailed description will be given later, in the fifth control example, the same performance mode (pull-back mode) is set when the variable probability state is ended and the second variable probability state is set, and when the variable probability state is ended and the normal state is set. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp which game state, the second variable probability state or the normal state, is set after the variable probability state ends. Such a configuration makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the normal pattern high probability period is executed during the normal state or during the second variable probability state, so that it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the executed second special symbol lottery can win the time reduction (whether the time reduction lottery is executed).

Therefore, even when the second variable probability state is set, the game can be played while expecting the short-time winning.

In addition, in the fifth control example, after the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, before the high probability period of special symbols (the period of time during which the high probability state of special symbols continues), the high probability period of normal symbols (the period of time during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues) ends, and each end condition is defined so that the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). Specifically, the jackpot C5 is configured to set the period until the special symbol variation is executed 4 times as the period from the end of the normal high probability period to the end of the special symbol high probability period (the period during which the second probability variable state continues) so that the special symbol 2 hold acquired during the probability variable state is all consumed during the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). , second probability variable state, etc.), the game state in which the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is executed based on the acquired special symbol 2 reservation is varied. That is, as a game state in which a special symbol lottery is executed based on the acquired special symbol lottery, a configuration capable of varying the number of executions of the special symbol lottery that can be executed in an advantageous game state (normal state) advantageous to the player may be used.

For example, part of the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the probability variation state is consumed during the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the remaining special figure 2 reservation is consumed during the normal state. In this case, when the general pattern high probability period ends and the state shifts to the second probability variable state with the upper limit number of special pattern 2 reserves acquired during the probability variable state, two special pattern 2 reserves are consumed during the second probability variable state, and the second special pattern lottery based on the remaining two special pattern 2 reserves can be executed in the normal state. In this way, when each end condition is defined so that the variable probability state is set and the normal pattern high probability period ends earlier than the special pattern high probability period, the number of times of the second special pattern lottery that can be executed in the normal state can be varied only by changing the difference of each end condition.

In this fifth control example, in the case where the first special pattern holding memory (special diagram 1 hold) and the holding memory of the second special pattern (special diagram 2 hold) are both together, the second special pattern lottery will be executed with priority over the first special pattern lottery, so as described above, the special diagram obtained in the probable state 2 hold. The second special design lottery based on the special diagram 1 is executed regardless of the holding of special map 1 pending (2 special maps obtained before the hold), and if the gaming status (high probability status of the normal pattern) is easy to obtain a special map 2 (high probability status of ordinary patterns), that is, the special diagram 2 is difficult to obtain a suspension (low probability of normal patterns (normal pattern) Immediately after the state is set, the number of special maps 2 pending is decreased, but without limited to this, the first special pattern lottery based on the special map 1 hold and the second special pattern lottery based on the special map 2 pending may be configured in the order of each special map hold.

``6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D5)'' is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 is executed and a probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set after the jackpot game is finished. In the fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period), and the jackpot D5 is set to the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as the special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped, and the special symbol is set as the general symbol high probability period. (First special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 65 times, and a period until the 65th special symbol variation stops is set.

In other words, the jackpot D5 is defined by differentiating the termination condition (probability variable termination condition) for ending the special pattern high probability period and the termination condition (time reduction termination condition) for termination of the normal pattern high probability period, and the variable probability termination condition is satisfied before the time reduction termination condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a jackpot D5 is set as a jackpot type, a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed in the probability variable state, the special pattern high probability period ends earlier than the normal pattern high probability period, and a time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state) is set. When the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed for the 5th time after the time saving state is set (the 65th time in total after the jackpot game is finished), the time saving end condition is established, and the game state is changed so that the normal state is set.

Here, the period in which the time-saving state is set is a game state in which the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is easily obtained since the high probability state of normal symbols is set in the same manner as in the variable probability state, and it is a game period in which the player is allowed to play the right-handed game. In other words, when the probability variable state is shifted to the time saving state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game and acquire the special figure 2 reservation. In the fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and up to four special figure 2 reservations are stored, so that the number of special figure 2 reservations to be stored is four at the time of transition from the time saving state to the normal state with the upper limit number (four) of the special figure 2 reservations acquired.

That is, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, a normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed after the jackpot game ends is set, and a game that facilitates execution of the second special pattern lottery based on the special pattern 2 hold obtained during the general pattern high probability period in the same manner as the jackpot B5 is executed in the normal state. Therefore, the jackpot game with the same content is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, the variable probability state is set, then the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are terminated, and the degree of advantage is equal to that of the jackpot B5 in terms of easiness of execution of the second special pattern lottery in the state where the normal state is set.

Here, since the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery is set to be lower (1/300) in the time saving state than in the variable probability state, the time saving state becomes a game state in which it is more difficult to win a big win in the special symbol lottery than in the variable probability state. Therefore, in the jackpot B5 that shifts from the variable probability state to the normal state, during the final variation period of the special symbols executed during the variable probability state, it is necessary to perform the performance (variation performance) for indicating whether or not the big win is won in the variation, and the guidance notification (notification performance) for urging the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit number during the variable probability state, and the performance with different motives is performed redundantly.

On the other hand, as in the jackpot D5, when the end condition of the special pattern high probability period and the end condition of the normal pattern high probability period are defined so that the probability variable state shifts to the time reduction state and then shifts from the time reduction state to the normal state, during the final fluctuation period of the special pattern executed during the probability variable state, it is possible to execute only the production (variation production) for indicating whether or not the jackpot is won in the fluctuation. It is possible to make it easy for the player to pay attention to the variation performance for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the guaranteed period, that is, the special symbol lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, in the final variation of the time saving state, by executing guidance notification (notification performance) for urging acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number, it is possible to make it difficult to overlap a period during which the variation performance is executed for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with high expectation of winning the jackpot and a period during which the notification performance is executed for prompting acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number during the normal figure high probability period.

Therefore, the jackpot D5 is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the jackpot B5 in terms of the ease of understanding of the effect to be executed.

During the normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern high probability period), not only the winning probability of the second pattern is increased, but also the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is changed to set a longer time than during the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the time-saving state, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time may be increased more than during the normal state. Also, during the time-saving state, at least one of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit may be changed without changing the winning probability of the second symbol. Also, during the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened for one hit may be changed so as to increase only the winning probability of the second symbol as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general prize-winning holes (ball-entering holes) 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that variably displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by winning (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640; A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242) to display, for example, upper, middle and lower three pattern rows. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are laterally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by alternately lighting a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the time saving, so that the winning lottery (the number of times of variable display of the second pattern) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 . When the balls enter the second ball entrance 640, four balls are put out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray 17, so that the balls are easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, whereby the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player, the investment for lending out the balls additionally can be suppressed, and the lottery for the special pattern can be performed for a short period of time.

In addition, if the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving is achieved by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one time, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal period, the probability of winning may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one winning may be made constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the right channel of the variable display unit 80, and is configured so that part of the balls that flow down the left side of the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed by a second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of ``○'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of ``x'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown) is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using part of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64, a first prize entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turn-on of the first ball entry switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242) performs a lottery for a big win, and the first pattern display device 37A displays the result of the lottery. In the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, no prize balls are paid out, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of prize balls such as one ball may be paid out.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out in this case may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

The second ball entrance 640 is attached with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67, when the pattern of "O" is displayed on the second pattern display device, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the time saving, the probability of winning the second pattern is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is also short. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, in the second special symbol lottery executed by entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, in a specific game state (normal state), a time-saving state can be given as a privilege other than winning the jackpot. In other words, as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, in a part of the cases other than the big win (loss), after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the benefit of setting the time saving state can be given. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the special symbol lottery is executed.

In other words, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set so that the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 239, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is greatly different from the above-described first control example in that short-time winning is provided in addition to jackpot winning as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, and here, the presentation related to short-time winning will be mainly described. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of elements (display modes) having the same content as in the first control example described above will be omitted.

FIG. 235(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 235(a), when a jackpot game is executed, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed to congratulate the player for receiving a privilege (jackpot game). During the jackpot game, the third pattern indicating that the jackpot has been won is continuously stopped and displayed in the small display region Dm1 formed on the upper right of the main display region Dm, and in the example shown in FIG. The small display area Dm1 is an area for displaying a third pattern variably displayed corresponding to the first special pattern, and while the first special pattern is variably displayed, the third pattern is variably displayed in a display mode indicating that the first special pattern is variably displayed.

In addition, on the left side of the main display area Dm1, there are a small display area Dm4 in which a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game method during the jackpot game is displayed, a small display area Dm5 in which a round number notification mode is displayed for informing the player of the current number of rounds (the number of round games played), and a small display area Dm6 in which acquisition information is displayed to indicate a value corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in the games continuously executed without going through the normal state. In the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, "2 rounds" are displayed in the small display area Dm5, and "140P" is displayed in the small display area Dm6.

In other words, the game guides the player to execute the right-handed game during the jackpot game, informs the player that the second round of the jackpot game is currently being executed, and indicates that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game this time is 140.例文帳に追加In this way, it is possible to display the fact that the jackpot game is in progress, the game method during the jackpot game, and the information about the obtained privilege, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, when all the round games during the jackpot game are completed and the ending period of the jackpot game is set, an ending screen is displayed for suggesting to the player in advance the game state to be set after the jackpot game is finished, as shown in FIG. 235(b). FIG. 235(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed as the ending screen of the jackpot game. The example shown in FIG. 235(b) shows a display screen in which the player is notified that an effect (chance time) corresponding to the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game and that the period of the chance time is 56 times (56 special symbol variations). In the central part of the main display area Dm1, a display mode in which the character 801 keeps running from left to right is displayed as a display mode for informing the player of the contents of the performance to be executed during the chance time in advance.

In this way, the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game by using a partial period before the actual variable probability state is set (during the jackpot game), and by informing the player of the duration of the set variable probability state and the explanation of the performance contents to be executed during the variable probability state, the player can grasp in advance the contents of the game to be executed in the future, so that the game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, the contents of the chance time effect executed during the variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the chance time, and FIG. 236(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the final change of the chance time. During the chance time, the character 801 continues to run in the main display area Dm1, and by getting the V-icon 801v displayed on the screen, an effect is executed in which a big win is announced. As described above, during the variable probability state, a high probability state of normal symbols is set, so a game (right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into a second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game and a second special symbol lottery is executed (right-handed game) is an advantageous game method for the player.

Therefore, in the small display area Dm4, "Right-handed" is displayed for guiding the right-handed game. Then, a remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the chance time ends is displayed in the small display area Dm7. In FIG. 236(a), characters of "50 times left" are displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of times of special symbol variation that can be executed before the chance time ends is 50 times.

Here, the chance time is an effect executed corresponding to the variable probability state, and the end timing of the chance time is the timing at which the variable probability state ends. Here, in the fifth control example, depending on the type of the variable probability big win in which the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, there are a case where the normal state is set after the variable probability state (jackpot A5, B5), a case where the second variable probability state is set (jackpot C5), and a case where the time saving state is set (jackpot D5). Regardless of which jackpot type is set, during the special symbol variation (final special symbol variation in the variable probability state) when the variable probability state ends, the effect screen at the end of the chance time shown in FIG. 236(b) is displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 236(b) shows an example of the effect screen at the end of the chance time in the case of shifting from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state with the end of the variable probability state, or the normal state after the variable probability state ends. Then, as a game guidance mode for urging acquisition of the special figure 2 suspension up to the upper limit during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues, that is, the period in which the special figure 2 suspension is easily acquired, a comment of ``Right hit and accumulate the suspension'' is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a small display area Dm9 is formed in the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate the acquired special figure 2 suspension number.

In a small display area Dm9, a hold icon capable of notifying the player of the upper limit number of obtainable special figure 2 reservations and the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is displayed, and a first reservation icon h1 corresponding to the first special figure 2 reservation, a second reservation icon h2 corresponding to the second special figure 2 reservation, a third reservation icon h3 corresponding to the third special figure 2 reservation, and a fourth reservation icon h4 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reservation are displayed. In FIG. 236 (b), since it is in a state where three special figures 2 pending are acquired, the first pending icon h1, the second pending icon h2, and the third pending icon h3 are displayed in a display mode (black in the figure) to indicate that they have been acquired, and the fourth pending icon h4 is displayed in a display mode (white in the figure) to indicate that it has not been acquired. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired up to the upper limit.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when all the four reserved icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 have been acquired, that is, when the upper limit number (4) of special symbols 2 suspension is acquired during the special symbol final variation in the probability variable state, a new special symbol 2 suspension cannot be acquired even if the right-handed game is continued any more. Since a privilege that is advantageous to the player cannot be given, in the small display area Dm9, a display mode (for example, "MAX") is displayed to indicate that the upper limit number of special figure 2 reserves has been acquired, and the character "Right shot" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is made different from the display mode before acquiring the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations, and a display mode in which the need for the right-handed game is low (for example, the size of the characters is reduced) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to wastefully continue the right-handed game.

The pullback mode is an effect that is set corresponding to the period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state). In the fifth control example, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be short-time winning. That is, during the pullback mode, not only the jackpot winning but also the special pattern lottery with the possibility of the time saving winning is executed, so that the possibility of setting the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the content of the effects executed during the pullback mode will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the start of the pullback mode, and FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the short-time winning is won during the pullback mode.

When the pullback mode is set, as shown in FIG. 237(a), the number of treasure boxes 810a to 810d corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired is displayed, and the effect of opening the treasure boxes is executed in accordance with the second special symbol variation. Then, an effect is executed in which a display mode for indicating the lottery result of the corresponding second special symbol appears in the treasure box.

At the start of the pull-back mode, a comment of ``Get a big hit if 'V' comes out from the treasure box, get a short time if 'Time' comes out'' and a comment 'Open the treasure box' are displayed in a sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode for explaining the contents of the performance during the pull-back mode.

In the fifth control example, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode is determined regardless of the number of second special symbol variations performed during the pullback mode, and an effect of opening one treasure box is performed for one variation period of the second special symbol variation. , and when even one lottery result is a big win or a time-saving prize in the second special pattern variation executed during the pullback mode, a performance for showing the lottery result may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of variations of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the pull-back mode is set when either the normal state in which the time-saving lottery is actually executed or the second variable-probability state in which the time-saving lottery is not executed is set, that is, when the variable-probability state shifts to the game state (normal state, second variable-probability state) in which the low-probability state of normal symbols is set. That is, in the pullback mode when the second variable probability state is set, an effect in which "time" does not appear from the treasure box is executed as a result of the effect.

In this way, the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed and the game state in which the time-saving lottery cannot be executed (difficult to execute) are configured to execute the same performance (pull-back mode), so that the pull-back mode in which the performance result indicating the time-saving winning is easily displayed and the pull-back mode in which it is difficult to display can be set in advance as the performance result of the pull-back mode. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode set this time is a pull-back mode (advantage pull-back mode) in which the performance result indicating the time-saving winning is likely to be displayed or a pull-back mode (disadvantageous pull-back mode) in which the performance result indicating the time-saving winning is difficult to display.

In the fifth control example, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not the pull-back mode to be executed this time is the advantageous pull-back mode according to the type of background displayed during the pull-back mode, and the display screen shown in FIG.

That is, in the fifth control example, without pre-reading the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 reservation (without prior judgment), the background type of the pullback mode can be determined according to the set game state. By constructing in this manner, even if the background image of any type of background is displayed, the possibility of short-time winning or big win winning can be easily left, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Then, when the reduction in working hours is won during the withdrawal mode, the effect shown in FIG. 237(b) is executed. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the time reduction is won in the third second special symbol lottery in the pull-back mode, and a treasure box 810a and a treasure box 810b marked with crosses are displayed as a history display mode for indicating that the second special symbol lottery has already been executed twice, and the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed (the third second special symbol variation) is a display indicating that the lottery result is a time reduction election. A performance in which the mode appears from a treasure box 810c is executed, the lottery result is short working hours winning, and the number of times of short working hours to be provided is ``10000 times'', that is, ``'time'*10000'' is displayed as a display mode for showing that the short working hours state (high probability state of normal pattern) is substantially provided until the next big win is won. Also, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, the remaining number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the pullback mode, including the second special symbol variation being executed, can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the contents of the effect executed when the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode is won in the short time will be explained. In the fifth control example, when the special symbol lottery wins the time reduction, the period during which the normal symbol high probability state continues (the normal symbol high probability period) is more likely to be set longer (the normal symbol high probability period is difficult to end) than when the variable probability state is set based on the winning of the big win in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, in a part of the time-shortening winning, the time-shortening state (long time-shortening) in which the normal pattern high probability period continues until the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 10000 times without winning the jackpot can be set.

Then, when the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode is won and long working hours are set, the effect screen shown in FIG. 238(a) is displayed. FIG. 238(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during extended time which is executed when long working hours are set. When the long time reduction is set, it is almost always the big hit in the special symbol lottery before the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 10000 times. Therefore, as shown in FIG.

By constructing in this way, the player can play the game in the time saving state without worrying about the remaining period of the regular pattern high probability period, and it is not necessary to provide an area capable of displaying 5-digit numbers as the display area of the small display area Dm7, and the small display area Dm7 can be made small, so that the display area of the main display area Dm can be effectively used for other performances. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for guiding the player that the time-saving state (ordinary figure high probability period) will continue until the next big win is substantially continued, a comment of 'right-handed until the next big win is crispy' is displayed.

Here, when the long working hours are set, it is almost the case that the working hours are shortened until the time saving state continues until the next jackpot winning. When the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after being executed exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 9850 times), the display screen during the long time reduction is configured to be different.

FIG. 238(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the execution count of the special symbol variation executed during the long time reduction reaches 9900 times. As shown in FIG. 238(b), when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the long time reduction is set exceeds a predetermined number, "100 times left" is displayed as the remaining period notification mode for indicating the remaining period of the normal pattern high probability period in the small display area Dm7, and the character 801 running with a tired expression is displayed in the main display area Dm. By constructing in this way, even when the normal pattern high probability period in which the time saving state can be continued substantially until the next big win is set, when a situation occurs in which the normal pattern high probability period can actually end, the player can be notified of the specific remaining period, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 239, description will be given of the effect content when the time saving state is set after the end of the chance time. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing an example of a preparation time effect screen executed during the time saving state after the chance time ends. As described above, when the jackpot D5 is set as the type of the probability variable jackpot, the variable probability state shifts to the time saving state, and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. And, during the time saving state, the preparation time production is executed. This preparation time is an effect to be executed during the period when the time saving state is set, and during the period of the special symbol final variation in the time saving state, a mode prompting to obtain the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit is displayed in the same manner as the special symbol final variation in the variable probability state shown in FIG. 236(b) described above.

Next, the content of the background type displayed during the withdrawal mode will be described with reference to FIG. 240(a). FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed during the pullback mode and the content indicated by each background.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in the fifth control example, four backgrounds (heaven, night, evening, day) can be displayed as background types in the pullback mode. And, according to the type of the displayed background, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the benefits (jackpot, short-time winning) during the pullback mode this time.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 250, but in this fifth control example, when setting the pullback mode (when shifting from the variable probability state to the second variable probability state or normal state), one mode type can be determined from among four mode types based on the number of acquired special figures 2 pending, the type of game state after transition, and the presence or absence of jackpot winning and short-time winning in the hold, and the background type corresponding to the determined mode type is used as the background during the pullback mode. Configured to be visible.

The mode types in the pullback mode are defined so that the degree of expectation of giving a privilege is different, and there are four mode types from mode A most advantageous to the player to mode D most disadvantageous to the player. "Mode A" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning is extremely high during the pullback mode, and "Heaven" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when the background imitating heaven is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player can easily understand that there is a high possibility that some privilege will be given before the pullback mode ends. Next, "Mode B" is a mode with the second highest possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the pullback mode, and "Night" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating the night is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the possibility of giving some kind of privilege is the second highest until the pullback mode is finished. "Mode C" is a mode with the third highest possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the withdrawal mode, and "Evening" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when the background imitating the evening is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player can easily understand that the possibility of giving some kind of privilege is slightly high before the pullback mode ends. Finally, "mode D" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning is low during the withdrawal mode, and "daytime" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when the background imitating daytime is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player easily understand that there is a low possibility that some privilege will be given until the pullback mode ends.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of entering the pullback mode is not the upper limit number, the mode type of the high mode is configured not to be selected. Furthermore, when the special figure 2 reserved number at the time of entry into the pullback mode is not the upper limit number, the mode type is determined without determining whether or not the time reduction lottery is executed in the second special pattern lottery executed during the pullback mode. In other words, in order to make it easier to predict the mode type of the pullback mode, it is necessary to transition to the pullback mode with the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending numbers acquired.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240(b), a suggestion mode for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of suggestion mode in the pullback mode and the content of suggestion indicated by each suggestion mode. As shown in FIG. A to suggestions D) are set.

Specifically, ``suggestion A'' and ``suggestion B'' can be set as suggestion types according to the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the variation, and ``suggestion C'' and ``suggestion D'' can be set as suggestion types according to the set game state.

When "suggestion A" is selected, a different color (gold) is displayed as the display mode of the treasure box 810c displayed in the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a golden treasure box corresponding to this "suggestion A" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning due to the variation. When "suggestion B" is selected, a treasure box larger than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure box 810c displayed during the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a golden treasure box corresponding to this "suggestion B" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning with this variation. It should be noted that the selection of "suggestion A" is configured to increase the possibility of winning a big win or short-time winning as compared to the case of selection of "suggestion B".

When "suggestion C" and "suggestion D" are selected, a display mode in which the character 801 displayed in the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)) is equipped with an ornament is displayed, and the character 801 is displayed in a mode different from usual. Then, the currently set game state is suggested to the player according to the type of the displayed ornament.

When "suggestion C" is selected, as shown in FIG. 237(b), an ornament 801w imitating an angel's ring is displayed on the character 801, suggesting to the player that the currently set game state is likely to be the normal state. It is to be noted that the possibility that the normal state is set is higher when "suggestion C" is selected than when "suggestion D" is selected.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the mode type of the pull-back mode is determined according to the game situation at the time when the pull-back mode is set, and the suggestion mode is determined for the special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode. By compositely determining the mode type and the suggested mode type, it becomes possible for the player to accurately predict the current game situation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the aspects of various effects being executed.

<Regarding the game flow in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the game flow in this fifth control example will be described. FIG. 241 is a diagram schematically showing the game flow in the fifth control example, that is, the flow of game state transitions. As shown in FIG. 241, in the fifth control example, as the game state, normal state (special figure 1 normal, special figure 2 normal), time saving state (first time saving, second time saving), probability variable state, second probability variable state game state can be set, and various game states can be set according to the result of the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery and the result of the time reduction winning determination.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 251. FIG. FIG. 242 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. Note that, of the electrical configuration in the fifth control example, the description of the same electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 137) will be partially omitted.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device.

Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 243, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are used in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the special symbol jackpot type, the stop type selection counter (C3) used for selecting the stop type of the special symbol, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the variation pattern. A variation type counter CS1 used for selection and a time saving type selection counter CC1 used for selecting a time saving type at the time of time saving winning are used.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of normal symbols are used for initial value setting of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering a first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to a ball entered into a second ball opening 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). 4, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 time reduction type selection counter CC1 are stored respectively, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the time reduction type selection are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. Each value of the counter CC1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or among the various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, various values having special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

In this control example, two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are used, but the number of special symbols may be one. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol may be configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel). . Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as a lottery result of the special pattern, the judgment value for winning the jackpot and the judgment value for the short-time winning are made different so that the winning of the big win and the judgment value of the short-time winning can be made different from each other as the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the lottery result of winning only big wins, only short-time winning, and double winning of big wins and short-time winning according to the obtained determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1). In this case, it is preferable to configure so that a privilege more advantageous to the player is given to the player in the case of multiple winning than in the case of winning either one, and for example, the time saving state set based on the double winning should be configured to be more difficult to end than the time saving state set based on the other winning.

By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting to win multiple prizes.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the big hit and loss of the special symbol lottery result, in some cases where the special symbol lottery result is lost, it is configured to be able to set a time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) without executing a winning game. can be configured to With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small winning type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the value of the acquired small winning type counter is configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, when it is possible to win a small win in a special symbol lottery, for example, the transition contents of the game state based on the jackpot winning and the game state transition contents based on the small win may be configured to be different, for example, when the big win is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big win game, and further, based on the set big win type, a new game state can be set after the big win game ends, and when the small win is won, A small winning game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small winning game is completed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that the game rich in variations can be provided. As the lottery result of one special pattern lottery, four lottery results of winning a big win, winning a small prize, winning in a short time, and losing may be configured so as to be able to win, or a privilege that can be won in the special pattern lottery may be changed according to the type of the special pattern.

In this case, for example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the jackpot winning and the short-time winning are defined, and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the jackpot winning and the small winning are defined, and when the same game state is set, the player selects the direction in which the game ball is fired (by selecting the left-handed game or the right-handed game). It is preferable to configure the type of special symbol lottery to be selectable. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the type of privilege (additional privilege) other than winning the jackpot.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reservation areas (retained first area), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal pattern is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal pattern execution area, and the normal pattern fluctuation is started based on the stored various values.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process of main controller 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the big winning random number set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da, the special symbol jackpot is determined. In addition, the value of the random number winning the short working hour win in the special symbol lottery is set by a random number 5 table 202de for winning short working time stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with the value of the random number winning the short winning time set by the random number 5 table 202da for short working time winning, the winning of the short working hour is determined.

Here, the first winning random number 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 245(a). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202da. This first winning random number 5 table 202da is a table in which a random number value (determination value) for determining a big winning is defined in the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first random number 5 table 202da, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined by varying it according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 245 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, "0 to 2" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value, and other values ("3 to 899") are defined as the out determination values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 14" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value, and other values ("15 to 899") are defined as the out determination values. That is, since the update range of the first winning random number 5 table 202da is 900 of "0 to 899", the probability of being determined as a big win in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and the probability of being determined as a big win in the high probability state of special symbols is 1/60 (15 out of 900).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but without being limited to this, the probability of winning the jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be different for each of at most four types of game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the two types of lottery results of "big hit" and "loss", "time saving winning" is determined as the lottery result of the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG.245(c), random number 5 table 202de per time saving is demonstrated. Fig.245 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to random-number 5 table 202de per time saving. This time saving random number 5 table 202de is a table in which a random number value (determination value) for determining time saving winning is defined in the lottery of special symbols.

Concretely, in time saving random number 5 table 202de, the decision value which is decided as time saving election is changed according to special design kind and game state, it has specified. As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the first special symbol as the special symbol type, the judgment value (the value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the time-saving election is not defined. In addition, for the second special symbol as the special symbol type, a determination value corresponding to the short winning is defined only when the game state is a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), and a determination value corresponding to the short winning is not defined in the other game states (probability variable state, second probability variable state, time reduction state).

For the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set as the game state, ``51 to 200'' among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 are defined as time-saving winning determination values, and other values (``3 to 50, 201 to 899'') are defined as failure determination values. Although detailed description will be given later, this time-saving random number 5 table 202de is referred to when the result of the jackpot determination executed with reference to the first random number 5 table 202da is "missing". Therefore, it will be referred to when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ("0 to 2") that is determined as a big win is acquired as a lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Therefore, since the update range of the first winning random number 5 table 202da is 900 pieces of "0 to 899", the probability of being judged as a big win in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/300 (3 pieces out of 900 pieces), and the probability of being judged as short-time winning is 1/6 (150 pieces out of 900 pieces).

In other words, the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state has a probability of winning a big win of 3/900, a probability of winning a time-saving win of 150/900, and a probability of loss of 747/900.

In this control example, it is configured to execute determination of time-saving winning only in a special symbol lottery of a specific game state (normal state) and a particular special symbol type (second special symbol). Furthermore, even when a game state other than the normal state is set, determination of time-saving winning may be executable, and for example, determination of time-saving winning may be executable even in a second special symbol lottery executed in a state in which a low-probability state (second variable state) of normal symbols is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always execute the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) in the second special symbol lottery executed during the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 237).

In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of determination of short-time winning (probability of short-time winning) different between the short-time lottery executed during the normal state and the short-time lottery executed during the second variable probability state, and for example, it is preferable to make it easier to win the short-time lottery when the normal state is set than when the second variable probability state is set. By constructing in this way, in a normal state (low-probability state of special patterns) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than the second variable probability state (high-probability state of special patterns), the probability of short-time winning can be increased, so that the player can be prevented from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

In addition, without being limited to this, the second variable probability state may be configured to increase the time saving winning probability more than the normal state. In this case, in a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is set to a high probability (a high probability state of the special pattern), the probability of short-time winning can also be increased, so that the special pattern lottery executed during the second variable probability state can increase the probability of obtaining a lottery result (probability of not winning without winning) in which some privilege (big win, short time) is given than the special pattern lottery executed during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the time saving lottery can be executed only when the specific game state and the specific special symbol lottery are executed, so the time saving winning probability is always fixed. However, when the time saving lottery is executed under different conditions (special symbol type, game state), the time saving winning probability may be changed according to the opportunity for establishment of the time saving lottery.

In addition, not only when the time saving lottery is established, for example, when the number of variations of the special pattern variation executed without changing the game state exceeds a predetermined number, the time saving winning probability may be increased.

In addition to this, as a result of the third lottery, it may be possible to determine a "small win" as one type of "loss". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win 5" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. When the ``small win'' is one type of ``losing'', it is possible to give the player a prize ball in the small win game, but since the big win is not won, it is preferable that the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

In addition, in this control example, three types of lottery results, ie, ``big hit'', ``losing'' and ``time-saving winning'' are determined as the lottery results of the special symbols. If the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. When the ``small win'' is one type of ``losing'', it is possible to give the player a prize ball in the small win game, but since the big win is not won, it is preferable that the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

As described above, when it is configured so as to be able to win a ``small win'' as a lottery result of special symbols, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the ``small winning'' may be defined in the first winning random number table 202a. By constructing in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed by the same processing, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case of executing the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery by different processing. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is configured to be incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection 5 table 202dc to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd will be described with reference to FIG. 246(a).

FIG. 246(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 246(a), this big win type selection 5 table 202dd has a special figure 1 big win 5 table 202dd1 that is referred to when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 big win 5 table 202dd2 that is referred to when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery.

First, with reference to FIG. 246(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 will be described. FIG. 246(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the obtained first win type counter C2. The detailed contents defined in each data table are omitted because they have been described above.

Returning to FIG. 243, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db. As shown in FIG. 247 (a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db includes the normal/second probability variable 5 table 202db1 used in the state where the normal state or the second probability variable state is set as the gaming state, and the variable probability/time reduction 5 table 202db2 used in the state where the variable probability state or the time reduction state is set. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is changed according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be varied.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be described with reference to FIGS. 247(b) and 248(a). FIG. 247(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal/second probability variant 5 table 202db1. This normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1 is a data table referred to when the normal state or the second probability variation state, that is, the low probability state of normal symbols is set as the game state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit than when it is a loss, and different variation patterns are defined according to the type of special symbol lottery executed and the result of the executed special symbol lottery. It is In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is short-time winning (a part of loss), it is stipulated that the same fluctuation time as when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result of the special pattern is win (other than short-time winning).

First, with reference to FIG. 247(b), the normal/second probability variant 5 table 202db1 will be described. FIG. 247(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal/second probability variant 5 table 202db1. In this normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value of variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the win/loss determination result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. That is, even if the variation time is the same as 30 seconds, different variation patterns can be selected according to the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1. By configuring the main control device 110 to be able to select different variation patterns for the same variation time in this way, the processing for determining the variation presentation on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 that receives the command indicating the variation pattern can be simplified.

In addition to the basic time, an additional time may be added in accordance with the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. When the additional time is added, the total time obtained by adding the basic time and the additional time is set as the variable time, and a command indicating the basic time and a command indicating the additional time are output. In this case, when determining the additional time to be added, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 may be used, or the value of a dedicated counter used to select the additional time may be obtained. Then, when the command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (for example, 30 seconds) and the command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, it is preferable to set the variation pattern (normal reach) based on the information included in the basic command and to set the ready-to-win pattern (type of the third symbol) based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of the third pattern of the medium pattern row Z2, which is first visible to the player in the ready-to-win state, is always set to the specific third pattern (in this control example, the third pattern to which the number 1 is attached), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Similarly, when the pattern type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the deviation of 8 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the deviation of the variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit/fail determination is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149". Super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

When the success/failure determination result is out (time saving), that is, when the success/failure determination result is time saving winning and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is ``0 to 169'', super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

If the result of the determination is out of range and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", the out of reach range with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 198", the deviation of the variation time of 8 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

Next, with reference to Drawing 248 (a), the contents of 5 tables 202db2 for probability variation and time saving are explained. FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 5 table 202db2 for probability variation/time reduction. The 5 table 202db2 for probability variation/time reduction is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected according to the set game state, the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the big win game), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

Here, in the fifth control example, the high-probability state (probability variable state) of normal symbols is always set after the jackpot game ends. Then, the set normal pattern high probability state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In the fifth control example, as time saving end conditions, a first time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of special symbol fluctuations after the high probability state of normal symbols is set reaches a predetermined number of times, and a second time saving end condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set. configured to migrate.

Then, the number of executions of the special symbol variation (number of times of time reduction) set as the first time-saving end condition is different according to the jackpot type. For example, when the jackpot A5 or B5 is set as the jackpot type, the first time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 60 times (time-saving number of times is 60 times), and when the jackpot C5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is set when the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation reaches 56 times. It is constituted so that the first time-saving end condition is established (time-saving frequency of 65 times) when the execution frequency of special symbol variation reaches 65 times when a jackpot D5 is set.

In addition, in the fifth control example, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot (in the case of loss), the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) can be set (time saving state can be won), and the first time saving end condition is changed according to the time saving type set when the time saving wins. For example, when time saving A is set as the time saving type, the first time saving end condition is satisfied (10000 times of time saving) when the number of executions of special symbol variation reaches 10000 times, and when time saving B is set, the first time saving end condition is satisfied (100 times of time saving frequency) when the number of times of execution of special symbol variation reaches 100 times.

And, even when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, different variation patterns are selected according to the game state and the time saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable performance corresponding to the set game state and the type of time saving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), when the time saving type is "time saving after the jackpot", that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set based on the jackpot winning, the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 time ~ 60 times", the lottery result (whether determination result) wins regardless of the type of special symbol, regardless of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” is defined for the range of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 of “0 to 189”, and a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”.

Furthermore, during the period when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is ``61 times to 65 times'', a variation pattern (special variation) with a variation time of ``5 seconds'' is defined regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1.

Here, when the period in which the number of times of special symbol variation is ``61 to 65 times'' is referred to, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, that is, when the time saving state of 5 rotations is set after the variable probability state is finished. During this time-saving state, it is a period during which the production of preparation time (see FIG. 239) is executed, and a constant variable time (5 seconds) is always set regardless of the success/failure determination result. Therefore, since the entire period of the preparation time can be fixed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining period until the withdrawal mode is set.

Although the display screen during the preparation time has been described with reference to FIG. 239, in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 239, the remaining period (number of seconds) of the preparation time may be configured to be able to be notified. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which the preparation time ends and the withdrawal mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, when the remaining period of the preparation time can be notified, the period corresponding to the final variation of the special symbol during the time reduction state, that is, the range corresponding to the period in which it is confirmed that the acquired special figure 2 reservation will not be newly consumed during the time reduction state among the remaining period that is notified may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which the final variation of the special symbol is executed during the preparation time.

On the other hand, if the set time saving type is "time saving A" and the design type (special design type) is special figure 1 (first special design), the number of fluctuations (special design fluctuation number), the lottery result (special design lottery result), regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" is defined, and if the design type is special figure 2 (second special design), the number of special design fluctuations is "1 to 99 times. ' is defined so that the variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of '15 seconds' is selected regardless of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 when the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) is won. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” is defined for the range of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 of “0 to 189”, and a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”. A variation pattern (special variation) with a variation time of ``10 seconds'' is defined for the number of times of special symbol variation of ``100 times'' regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1. Furthermore, for the number of special symbol fluctuations of "101 times to 200 times", a variation pattern (ultra-short variation) with a variation time of "2 seconds" is defined regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) or the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1. variation) is specified.

In addition, when the set time reduction type is "time reduction B" and the design type (special design type) is special figure 1 (first special design), the number of fluctuations (special design fluctuation number), the lottery result (special design lottery result), regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1, the fluctuation time is "20 seconds" fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) is defined, and when the design type is special figure 2 (second special design), the number of special design fluctuations is "1 times to 99 times. ' is defined so that the variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of '15 seconds' is selected regardless of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 when the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) is won. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” is defined for the range of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 of “0 to 189”, and a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”. A variation pattern (special variation) with a variation time of ``10 seconds'' is defined for the number of times of special symbol variation of ``100 times'' regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning in the special symbol lottery (when the time-saving state is set without going through the jackpot game), regardless of the time-saving type to be set, the variation pattern is selected with common contents until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the time saving type set based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, for the 100th special symbol variation, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, in the fifth control example, when a special pattern lottery is won, the time saving type A or B can be set as the time saving type, and when the time saving A is set, the number of times of time saving is set to 10000 times, and when the time saving B is set, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times.

Then, when the time saving state is set based on the winning of the time saving lottery in the special pattern lottery, a performance (continuous performance) for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends (whether the time saving type is the time saving A or the time saving B) is executed by using the variation period of the 100th special pattern variation. In other words, regardless of which type of time reduction is set and regardless of the lottery result of the variation, the variation pattern of the fixed number of seconds (10 seconds) is selected, so that continuous performance can be easily executed.

When the time saving A is set, the time saving state is continued until the special pattern lottery is executed 10000 times at maximum, but since the low probability state of the special pattern is set during the time saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is the same as the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than in the normal state, the special symbol lottery may continue to be executed without winning the jackpot. In this case, during the time-saving state, game balls can be frequently entered into the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed games to obtain prize balls, so that the number of balls possessed by the player is not greatly reduced, but there is a possibility that the period until the next big win is extended and the player who has a limited playing time is forced to give up the game during the time-saving state.

Therefore, in the fifth control example, as the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state increases, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the time efficiency of the game when many special symbol lotteries are executed without winning a jackpot during the time saving state. In addition, since it is configured so as to make it difficult to select a shortened variable time during the period from when the time-saving state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), it is possible to suppress the execution of a plurality of big win games in a short time and the excessive supply of a large number of prize balls to the player in a short time.

Returning to FIG. 243, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) in the present embodiment, acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Since the structure of the second winning random number table 202c is the same as that of the first control example described above, its detailed description will be omitted.

The time-saving type selection counter CC1 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when the time-saving lottery is won in the special pattern lottery. The value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the time reduction type selection counter CC1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, using the acquired value of the time saving type selection counter CC1, it is configured to select the time saving type when the time saving type selection 5 table 202df is selected. Here, with reference to Drawing 248 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 5 table 202df are explained.

Drawing 248 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 5 table 202df. In this time saving type selection 5 table 202df, different time saving types are defined for the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time saving type “time saving A” is defined for the range of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 of “0 to 89”, and the time saving type “time saving B” is defined for the range “90 to 99”.

Here, when "time saving A" is set as the time saving type, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 10000, and when "time saving B" is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. In other words, the time saving A is in a time saving state with 10000 times of time saving, and the time saving B is in a time saving state with 100 times of time saving.

Returning to FIG. 242, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 244(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 244(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has at least a first winning random number 5 table 202da, a variation pattern selection 5 table 202db, a second winning random number 5 table 202dc, a jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, a time saving random number 5 table 202de, and a time saving type selection 5 table 202df. The first winning random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the time saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time saving type selection 5 table 202df have been described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. 243, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 242, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 243, the RAM 203 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 167) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 166) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

244(b), the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, and a variable counter 2. 03i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot middle flag 203k, and a memory area 203z. Since the contents of each storage area, each counter, and each flag described above are the same as those in the first control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 by the command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance role product (not shown), a voice output command is set for causing the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22, or a lamp output command is set for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226. Also, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in correspondence with the display content.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the error type to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example is different from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 144(a)) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above. da and a suggestion mode selection table 222db are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pull-back mode selection table 222da is a data table referred to when selecting the mode type in the pull-back mode, which is a production mode executed in correspondence with the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) set when the termination condition (time saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol is satisfied in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is established, and the special figure 2 reservation when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the variable probability state. Four kinds of mode types (backgrounds) are stipulated corresponding to the number (the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol), the value of a time-saving lottery number counter 223db, the presence or absence of a jackpot in the reservation (in the special figure 2 reservation), the presence or absence of the time-saving winning in the reservation (in the special figure 2 reservation), and the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number is "4", that is, the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations is obtained, the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db is "4", and the jackpot in the reservation is "yes", "Mode A" is defined for the range of "0 to 49" and "Mode B" is defined for the range of "50 to 99" for the value of the acquired production counter 223f regardless of whether or not the winning time is within the reservation. In addition, when the jackpot in the reservation is "no" and the short-time winning in the reservation is "yes", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as "mode B" in the range of "0 to 79", and "mode A" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". However, "mode D" is defined for the range of "60 to 99".

In addition, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "4", that is, the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations is acquired, the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db is "0", and the jackpot in the reservation is "yes", "mode B" is defined for the range of "0 to 59", and "mode C" is defined for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether the value of the production counter 223f obtained is "0 to 59". "Mode C" is defined for the range of "0-79", and "Mode B" is defined for the range of "80-99", regardless of the presence or absence of short-time winning within the hold.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “1 to 3”, that is, when the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations is not acquired, regardless of the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db, if the jackpot in the reservation is “yes”, regardless of whether the value of the production counter 223f obtained is in the range of “0 to 19”, “mode C” is in the range of “20 to 59”, “mode C” is in the range of “20 to 59”, and “mode D is in the range of “60 to 99”. ”is defined, and if the on-hold jackpot is “no”, if the on-hold short-time winning is “yes”, “mode B” is specified for the range of “0 to 49” for the value of the acquired production counter 223f, and “mode D” is specified for the range of “50 to 99”. "mode D" is defined for the range of

Since the detailed content has been described above with reference to FIG. 240(b), the description thereof will be omitted, but the four types of mode types (mode A to mode D) selected by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da are defined so as to make the degree of expectation of the awarding of the privilege to the player different. , mode C, and mode D so that the degree of expectation for giving a privilege is lowered in this order.

Furthermore, it is configured so that the selected mode type is greatly different according to the special figure 2 reservation number at the timing when the probability change state ends, and when the special figure 2 reservation number at the timing when the probability change state ends is not the upper limit number.

By constructing in this way, the player can be made to positively execute the right-handed game so that the number of reserved special figures 2 becomes the upper limit number in order to predict the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode.

The suggesting mode selection table 222db is a data table referred to when selecting a suggesting mode displayed in the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode, and defines different types of suggesting modes corresponding to the set mode type, the lottery result of the variation, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 249(b). As shown in FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a prize winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a production counter 223f, a sub-state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h, a time-saving medium counter 223da, and a time-saving lottery counter 223d. b, mode classification storage area 223dc, flag 223dd during long working hours reduction, initial setting flag 223de, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The contents of the command storage area 223a, winning information storage area 223b, special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, and normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h are the same as the contents of the above-described first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time-shortening counter 223da is a counter for measuring a period in which a time-shortening state (normal pattern high probability state) is set, and a predetermined value is set when the normal pattern high-probability state is set (after the end of a big winning game or after stop display of a special pattern variation in which a time-shortening win is made). When the special pattern variation is executed in a state where the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1, and when the value of the counter 223da during time saving becomes ``0'', it is determined that the normal pattern has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the counter 223da during time saving, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

A time-saving lottery number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of times of the second special pattern lottery that can be executed during the normal state, that is, the number of executions of the second special pattern lottery that can be short-time winning among the second special pattern lottery executed during the low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state) of the normal design, and the special figure 2 pending number acquired when the probability state of the normal design shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the low probability state from the high probability state of the normal design. A value is set based on the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) that is set when shifting to.

Specifically, when the state command indicating that the normal state has shifted from the high probability state of the normal design (probable variable state, time saving state) (S9102: No in FIG. 264), or when the state command indicating that the state has moved from the definite variable state to the second definite variable state is received (S9402 in FIG. 267: Yes) In the pullback mode setting process executed (see S9104 in FIG. 265), based on the acquired special figure 2 suspension The number of times of the second special symbol lottery to be executed (can be done) during the normal state is specified, and the value indicating the specified number of times is set to the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db. Then, the pullback mode selection table 222da is referred to when selecting the mode type of the pullback mode.

Also, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the pullback mode, the value of the time saving lottery counter 223db is read, and if it is determined that a value greater than 1 is set, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol lottery is executed (see S9607 in FIG. 269).

In other words, in the fifth control example, when the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbols is executed after the low probability state of the normal symbols is set, the performance of the same mode is executed regardless of the set game state. In other words, as a game state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, the same mode (pull-back mode) performance is executed in a normal state in which a special symbol lottery in which short-time winning is possible is executed and in a second variable state in which a special symbol lottery in which short-time winning is not possible is executed, and it is configured to make it difficult for a player to easily discriminate whether or not it is a game state in which short-time winning can be displayed as a lottery result of the second special symbol lottery being executed. By constructing in this way, even when the second variable probability state is set in which the special symbol lottery that cannot win the time saving win is set, the player can play the game while expecting the time saving win.

Further, the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery that can actually win the time saving lottery is discriminated, and the mode type of the pullback mode can be selected based on the discrimination result. By constructing in this way, the element (mode type) for predicting which game state is set to the player can be provided while the performance of the same mode (pull-back mode) is executed in the normal state in which the special symbol lottery that can win the short time win is executed and the second variable probability state in which the special symbol lottery that can not win the short time win is executed, so that the player who wants to quickly determine whether the currently set game state is the game state in which the short win is possible. Since it is possible to make the user pay attention to the content of the presentation being executed, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The mode type storage area 223dc is a storage area for storing the mode type selected by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da. The information (mode type) stored in this mode type storage area 223dc is read when determining the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode. Then, when the pullback mode ends, the stored information is cleared.

The long time saving medium flag 223dd is a flag for indicating that a long time (10,000 special pattern variations) time saving state is set, is set to ON when the long time saving state (time saving type "time saving A") is set, and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends. The setting state of the flag 223dd during long time reduction is referred to when determining the display mode for indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction (the remaining period of the high probability state of the normal symbol). Specifically, when determining the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state (S9613 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the long time saving medium flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269), and if the long time saving medium flag 223dd is not set to ON (S9615 in FIG. A display command for subtracting and displaying the remaining count displayed in the small display area Dm7 of the screen is set (S9614 in FIG. 269).

On the other hand, when the flag 223dd during long working hours is set to ON (S9615 of FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter during working hours 223da is less than 150 (S9616 of FIG. 269). If it is determined to be less than 150 (S9616: Yes in FIG. 269), the presentation mode for switching the display mode of the small display area Dm7 from "infinite" to "149" is determined (S9617 in FIG. 269).

The first time setting flag 223de is a flag for indicating that the first second special symbol lottery has been executed among the second special symbol lotteries executed during the pullback mode, and is set to ON after determining the special figure 2 production mode corresponding to the first second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode (see S9605 in FIG. 269). Then, it is referred to when setting the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode, and when it is determined that the first time setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9602 in FIG. 269: Yes), the processing for setting the first special figure 2 effect mode (S9603, S9604 in FIG. 269) is skipped.

<Regarding control processing contents in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 270, the contents of various control processes in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. This fifth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example in that part of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 261, control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process 5 (S104 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) is replaced with the special symbol big hit determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) is replaced with the special symbol variation pattern. Selection process 5 (S252 in FIG. 255) is replaced with update process (S221 in FIG. 160), update process 5 (S253 at time 256) is replaced with starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), and starting winning process 5 (S195 in FIG. 258) is replaced. Prefetching process 5 (S653 in FIG. 162) is performed instead of the prefetching process (S613 in FIG. 162), the jackpot control process 5 (S1894 in FIG. 260) is performed in place of the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 168), and the jackpot end process 5 (S8403 in FIG. 261) is performed instead of the jackpot end process (S1910 in FIG. 170). are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 252, the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 5 (S104 in FIG. 252) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104). This special symbol variation process 5 (S104) differs from the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) in that a part of the process to be executed when starting the special symbol variation and a part of the process to be performed when the variation time of the special symbol variation has passed are changed.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the same processes of S201 to S207 and S210 to S213 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) are executed. Then, when the process of S207 or the process of S213 is finished, the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, then the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) is executed, and this process is finished.

In addition, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol variation has passed (S214: Yes), the processing of S216 to S220, which is the same as the above-described special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 157), is executed to end this processing. (S254), and the process proceeds to S220.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 5 (S251) will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 5 (S251). This special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed in place of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, determination of time-saving winning (time-saving lottery process 5) is performed.

When the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S8001), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 5 table 202da (S8002), and when the lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S8003: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a big win (S8004), and the acquired winning type counter (first Based on the value of the hit type counter C2), the special design jackpot design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S8005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S8003: No), time-saving lottery processing 5 is executed (S8006), and this processing ends.

Here, the time saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. In other words, in the fifth control example, in the special symbol lottery, determination of big winning is first executed (S8003), and when the big winning is won, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing the determination of time saving winning, and only when the big winning is not winning, determination of time saving winning is executed. By constructing in this way, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, time-saving winning) are not given to the player in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the process content of the time saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is demonstrated. Figure 254 is the flowchart which shows the contents of time saving lottery processing 5 (S8006). In the time-saving lottery processing 5 (S8006), it is determined whether the current game situation is a game state in which the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) can be executed, and when it is determined to be executable, the processing of executing the time-saving winning determination is performed.

When the time saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current target (lottery target) is the special figure 2 (second special symbol) (S8101), and if it is determined to be the special figure 2 (S8101; Yes), the current game state stored in the game state storage area is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the read game state is the normal state (S8103).

In the process of S8103, when it is determined that it is in a normal state (S8103: Yes), the lottery result (time reduction winning judgment result) is acquired based on the time reduction per random number 5 table 202de (S8104), It is determined whether the time reduction is elected (S8105), and when it is determined that the time reduction is elected (S8105: Yes), based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2), the second A time-saving design of the special design to be displayed on the 1-design display device 37 is set (S8106), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, if it is determined that the current target is not the special figure 2 (the first special symbol) (S8101: No), in the processing of S8103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S8103: No), or if it is determined that the time reduction has not been won in the processing of S8105 (S8105: No), the value of the acquired per type counter (first per type counter C2) Based on this, the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S8107), and the process is terminated.

That is, in the fifth control example, as execution conditions for executing time-saving winning judgment in the special symbol lottery, it is specified that the special symbol lottery is not a big win, the second special symbol lottery is set, and the normal state is set. In this way, by setting the conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination, it is possible to create a case where only the big winning determination is executed and a case where both the big winning determination and the time-saving winning determination are executed according to the execution status of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability that a player is given a privilege (big hit or reduced working hours) in one special symbol lottery according to the situation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the game state such as the variable probability state and the time saving state, which are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is terminated and shifted to the normal state when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 times). In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the big win, the conditions for executing time-saving winning determination can be easily established, and therefore, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the big win, the probability of giving a privilege (big win or short working hours) to the player in one special symbol lottery can be increased more than before the execution of the predetermined number of times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a jackpot for a predetermined period of time from being extremely motivated to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252). In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252), first, in the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not a special symbol big win is set (S8201). In the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203), and the current game state (normal state, second probability variation state, probability variation state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. The variation pattern selection 5 table 202db corresponding to the information is read (S8204).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db read out in the process of S8204 (S8205), and a special figure variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Next, a special figure stop type command indicating a special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), the first symbol display device 37 sets a special symbol variation start (S8208), a value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern is set to a value of a special figure variation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and this processing ends. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time reduction lottery result (time reduction winning determination result) is time reduction winning (S8209), and if it is determined that it is time reduction winning (S8209: Yes), the time reduction type is determined by referring to the time reduction type selection 5 table 202df (S8210), and the processing of S8203. to Also, if it is determined that the time reduction election has not been made in the process of S8209 (S8209: No), the process of S8210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

Next, the processing contents of update processing 5 (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing the details of update processing 5 (S253). In this update process 5 (S253), the same process as the above-described update process (see S221 in FIG. 160) is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the process content of the time saving setting process 5 (S254) is demonstrated. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the details of the time saving setting process 5 (S254). In this time saving setting process 5 (S254), the process for setting the time saving state is executed when the time saving winning is won by the time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process 5 (S254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a time saving election (S8351), and when it is determined that the time saving winning is determined (S8351: Yes), a value corresponding to the determined time saving type is set in the time saving counter 203h (S8352), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area (S8353), and the value of the time saving counter 203h and the time saving state are set. A state command indicating the type gaming state (information indicating the time saving state and information indicating the set time saving type) is set (S8354), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8351, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won (S8351: No), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the fifth control example, the working hours reduction state is set at different timings according to the working hours winning opportunity, and when the working hours saving state is set at the timing of stopping the special symbol lottery when the working hours saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the working hours saving state is set based on the special symbol lottery winning big win, the working hours saving state is set at the jackpot game end timing instead of the stopping timing of the special symbols lottery.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the starting winning process 5 (S195) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting winning process 5 (S195). This starting winning process 5 (S195) differs from the above-described starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161) in that the value of the time reduction type selection counter CC1 is added to the type of counter value stored in each special symbol reserved ball storage area (S651, S652) and that the look-ahead process 5 (S653) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 259, the contents of the prefetching process 5 (S653) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 5 (S653). When this look-ahead process 5 (S653) is executed, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the time reduction type selection counter CC1, which are various counter values, is read out from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S750). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S702).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when the new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the big win determination is executed based on the newly reserved winning information. Because it is difficult.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information capable of specifying the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S751), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a big hit (S703: No), then it is determined whether the time-saving win is made (S752), and when it is determined that the time-saving win is not made (S752: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information capable of specifying the lost winning and the variation pattern is set (S705), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving winning is determined in the processing of S752 (S752: Yes), it is determined whether the holding fluctuation time is in a normal state (S753), and if it is determined that it is a normal state (S753: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can identify the time saving winning and the variation pattern is set (S754), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning command set in the processing of S704, S705, or S754 is set to include information indicating the above-described win/fail determination result (information that gives different meanings based on the win/fail determination result), and also information indicating the values of various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, based on various information included in the winning command, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the usual color).

In this control example, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to set information (results of determination of success) to be set in the winning command regardless of the game state. A winning command may be set based on the results of each determination, or a determination value (value of a first winning random number counter C1) for determining a big win regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state may be defined, and only when the determination value is read out, a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set.

By constructing in this way, a winning command indicating a big win or a short-time winning is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that the winning is a specific big win or a short-time winning, so that a feeling of expectation for the big win can be given to the special pattern variation in which the look-ahead performance is not executed.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and the winning/failure determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, prefetching processing based on the winning information is performed, and a win or miss determination is predicted in advance in the prereading processing. Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (stored) in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the result of winning/failure determination may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is preferably configured to be analyzed (prediction of the result of winning/failure determination). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894). In this jackpot control process 5 (S1894), in contrast to the above-described jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), the process to be executed when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes) is set to open a specific winning hole (S8401), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S8402). es), the difference is that the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is executed, and the rest is the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) executed in the jackpot control processing 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 5 (S8403). When this jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is executed, the currently executing jackpot type is specified (S8501), the value corresponding to the specified jackpot type (time saving end condition) is set to the probability variable counter 203i and the time saving counter 203h (S8502), the game state corresponding to the value of the probability changing counter 203i and the time saving counter 203h is set in the game state storage area (S8503), and the set probability The value of the variable counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the game state are set (S8504), the flag during the jackpot is set to OFF (S8505), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 270, the contents of control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, in place of the first control example described above, the command determination process 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262) instead of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175), the state command reception process 5 (S4282 in FIG. 263) instead of the state command reception process (S4202 in FIG. 176), and the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903 in FIG. 183) instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903 in FIG. 183). Processing 5 (S4983 in FIG. 268) is different in that special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is executed instead of special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262). As shown in FIG. 262, the command determination process 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262) differs from the above-described command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) in that the status command reception process is replaced with the status command reception process 5 (S4282), and the rest is the same.

FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing 5 (S4282). As shown in FIG. 263, in this state command receiving process 5 (S4282), a newly set gaming state is determined based on the state command received from the main controller 110, and processing for setting various effects based on the determination result is executed.

In state command reception processing 5 (S4282), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (S9001). If it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S9001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change in the game state in the process of S9001 (S9001: Yes), the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g is shifted, and the game state corresponding to the command received from the main controller 110 this time is set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S9002).

Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: Yes), normal state effect setting processing is executed (S9004), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the normal state effect setting process (S9004) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: No), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the processing of S9005, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting process is executed (S906), and this process ends. A detailed description of the time saving state effect setting process (S9006) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005: No), the process proceeds to S9007.

In the processing of S9007, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the second probability variation state (S9007). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the second probability variation state (S9007: Yes), the second probability variation state effect setting process is executed (S9008), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the second probability variation state effect setting process (S9008) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S9007, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the second probability variable state (S9007: No), the process proceeds to S9009.

In the processing of S9009, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the variable probability state (S9009). When it is determined that the command indicates a change to the variable probability state (S9009: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203da (S9010), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9009, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the probability variable state (S9009: No), this process ends.

FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the normal state effect setting process (S9004). This normal state effect setting process (S9004) is a process executed when a state command indicating a normal state is received in the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263). In this normal state effect setting processing (S9004), as shown in FIG. 264, a different effect mode is set according to whether the game state before the normal state is set is the second variable probability state, and if it is not the second variable probability state, that is, if it is determined that the state has changed from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state, the pullback mode setting processing for setting the performance mode corresponding to the pullback mode (pullback zone) is executed.

In the normal state effect setting process (S9004), first, the game state before change is read out from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9101). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read in the process of S9101 is the second probability variable state (S9102). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the second variable probability state (S9102: Yes), the display command for the effect mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S9102, when it is determined that the read gaming state before the change is not the second probability variable state (S9104: No), the pullback mode setting processing is executed (S9104), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the pullback mode setting process (S9104) will be given later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the pullback mode setting process (S9104). In this withdrawal mode setting process (S9104), as shown in FIG. 265, various processes are executed for setting display commands for indicating the display mode (effect mode) related to the effect screen shown in FIG.

In the withdrawal mode setting process (S9104), first, the game state before change is read from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9201). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball in the second special symbol (S9202). When it is determined that the second special symbol has a reserved ball (S9202: Yes), the number of lotteries for the second special symbol executed during the normal state is specified (S9203). Next, the value of the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed during the normal state specified in the process of S9203 is set to the time reduction lottery number counter 223db (S9204).

Next, the mode type is determined by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da (see FIG. 250) using the second special symbol pending number, the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db, and the special figure 2 pending information (S9205), the mode type determined in the process of S9205 is stored in the mode type storage area 223dc (S9206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9202, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball in the second special symbol (S9202: No), the display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9207), and this process is finished.

Figure 266 is the flowchart which shows the time saving state production setting processing (S9006). This time saving state production setting process (S9006) is a process executed when a state command indicating a time saving state is received in the state command receiving process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263). In this time saving state effect setting process (S9006), as shown in FIG. 266, if the game state before the time saving state is set is the variable probability state, the preparation time (see FIG. 239) Processing for setting the display mode (effect mode) corresponding to the preparation time (see FIG. 239) If it is in the normal state, the display mode for indicating that the time saving state has entered and the extended time corresponding to the long time saving (see FIG. 238) For setting the display mode (effect mode) corresponding to the extended time (see FIG. 238) process.

In the time saving state effect setting process (S9006), first, the game state before change is executed from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is the variable probability state (S9302). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding effect mode is set during the preparation time (S9303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is not the variable probability state (S9302: No), it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304). When it is determined that the gaming state before the change is not the normal state (S9304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving counter 223da (S9305), and it is determined whether the time saving type set this time is time saving A (S9306).

In the processing of S9306, when it is determined that the time saving type set this time is the time saving A (S9306: Yes), the long time saving medium flag 223dd is set to ON (S9307), a command for indicating the effect mode corresponding to the extended time is set (S9308), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving type set this time is not the time saving A (S9306: No), this process is terminated.

FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing the second variable probability state effect setting process (S9008). This second probability change state effect setting process (S9008) is a process executed when a state command indicating the second probability change state is received in the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263). In this second variable probability state effect setting process (S9008), as shown in FIG. 267, a different effect mode is set depending on whether or not the game state before the second variable probability state is set is the variable probability state, and if it is the variable probability state, the pullback mode setting process is executed for setting the effect mode corresponding to the pullback mode (pullback zone).

In the second probability variable state effect setting process (S9008), first, the game state before change is read out from the subsidiary state setting area 223g (S9401). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9401 is the variable probability state (S9402). If it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9402: Yes), the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 265) is executed (S9403), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S9402, when it is determined that the game state before the change is not the variable probability state (S9402: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

FIG. 268 is a flowchart for showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (S4983). In this special figure 1 production mode setting process 5 (S4983), a process for setting the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation to be executed is executed.

In the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (S4983), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S9501). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223da is subtracted by 1 (S9502), a display command for indicating the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is set (S9503), and the process proceeds to S9504. On the other hand, in the processing of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S9501: No), the processing of S9502 to S9503 is skipped, and the processing of S9504 is performed. In the process of S9504, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9504), and the process ends.

FIG. 269 is a flowchart for showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (S4987). In this special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (S4987), as shown in FIG. 269, a process for setting various effect modes is executed according to the gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed.

In the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (S4987), first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state (S9601). When it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602). When it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is not on (S9602: No), the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol to be executed during the pullback zone is determined based on the value of the time-saving lottery frequency counter 223db (S9603), and the performance mode corresponding to the determined number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is determined (S9604).

Next, the initial setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9605), and the process proceeds to S9606. On the other hand, in the process of S9602, if it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602: Yes), the processes of S9603 to S9605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9606.

In the process of S9606, the suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) is referenced to determine the suggested mode (S9606). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db (S9607), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db after the subtraction is 0 (S9608). When it is determined that the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db after the subtraction is 0 (S9608: Yes), the performance mode corresponding to the pullback zone final variation is determined (S9609), and the initial setting flag 223de is set to OFF (S9610). Then, a display command indicating the determined rendering mode is set (S9611), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9608, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time lottery number counter 223db after subtraction is not 0 (S9608: No), the processes of S9609 to S9610 are skipped, the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9601, when it is determined that it is not the normal state or the second variable probability state (S9601: No), the value of the counter 223da during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S9612). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S9613). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state, that is, if it is determined that the probability is variable (S9613: Yes), a display command for indicating the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is set (S9614), the effect setting process during the chance time is executed (S9619), the above-described S9611 process is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the effect setting process during chance time (S9619) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S9613, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S9613: Yes), it is determined whether the long time saving flag 223dd is on (S9615). When it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is not ON (S9615: No), the process proceeds to S9614 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9615: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during short working hours is less than 150 (S9616).

In the process of S9616, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the number of remaining time saving times is determined (S9617), and the process of S9614 described above is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S9616, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is not less than 150 (S9616: No), a display command indicating that the time saving state continues until the next big win is set (S9618), and the process shifts to the effect setting process during the chance time (S9619).

FIG. 270 is a flowchart for showing the effect setting process during chance time (S9619). This production setting process (S9619) during the chance time is a process for setting the production mode of the variable production executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the special figure 2 production mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269), and as shown in FIG.

In the chance time effect setting process (S9619), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reduced time counter 223da subtracted in the process of S9612 of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is 0 (S9701). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da after the subtraction is 0 (S9701: Yes), the performance mode including the guidance mode for saving the special figure 2 hold is determined (S9702), and then it is determined whether the long time saving flag 223dd is on (S9703).

In the processing of S9703, if it is determined that the long time saving flag 223dd is ON (S9703: Yes), the long time saving flag 223dd is set to OFF (S9704), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined (S9705), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9701, if the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is not 0 (S9701: No), or if it is determined that the long time saving medium flag 223db is not on in the process of S9703 (S9703: No), the above-described S9705 process is executed, and this process ends.

<First Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 271 to 277, a first modification of the fifth control example described above will be described. In the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving election can be made only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the first modified example, the difference is that the first special symbol lottery that is executed when the normal state is set can also be elected in a time-saving manner. Other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

In the above-described fifth control example, a game for executing the second special symbol lottery is played in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state of normal symbols. When the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 hold obtained during the normal symbol high probability state is executed in the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, a short time lottery is executed in addition to the big win lottery, so that the player who has experienced the game (advantageous game) during the normal symbol high probability state which is advantageous to the player is easily returned to the advantageous game with a higher probability than usual after the advantageous game is over. game) could be executed.

However, in the above-described fifth control example, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is executed, the benefits of the time-saving lottery cannot be received, and the player gets bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, since it is configured so that the time-saving lottery can be won even in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the player can easily receive the benefit of the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) set based on the special symbol lottery winning is shorter than the normal symbol high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the special pattern lottery wins the short-time win, the player can be provided with the privilege of facilitating the continuation of the normal pattern high probability period until the next big win win.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, when the first special symbol lottery wins, a short-time (for example, one time) time-saving state can be set, and a game for acquiring the right to execute the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the period (normal-pattern high-probability period) in which the short-term time-saving state is set. In other words, in the first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above can be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modified example, a plurality of variable times can be selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In this first modified example, when a time saving win is made in a first special symbol lottery executed during a normal state, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode (time saving symbol) for indicating the time saving win after a change of a predetermined variation time. After that, the time saving state (time saving number of times) is set, and the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation to be executed next is stopped and displayed.

That is, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues is determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state, the easier it is to acquire many special figures 2 reserves during the time saving state, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player can be obtained.

<Regarding the production contents of the first modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 271 to 273, a description will be given of the characteristic effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example of the fifth control example.

First, in the fifth control example described above, the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues after the jackpot game is over (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) are set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed 60 times and the 60th special pattern fluctuation stops), and during the general pattern high probability period, the lottery right of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) ) can be acquired, and when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period are over and the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set, the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) executed based on the special pattern 2 hold acquired during the normal pattern high probability period Only when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) was not a jackpot, time-saving judgment will be executed, and if the time-saving judgment is successful, time-saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high) probability state) was set.

The special figure 2 reservation means that when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is already fluctuating, the lottery right of the second special symbol is withheld, and up to four of the lottery rights are withheld (retained and stored).

In the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, so it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery (normal lottery) compared to the time saving state, and it is difficult to execute the normal symbol winning game (normal game) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. , Special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the normal pattern high probability period set after the end of the jackpot game, and the special pattern 2 reservation exists when the normal state is set after the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are finished.

Therefore, in order to set a state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state), it is necessary to win a big win at least once, and a player who cannot win a big win in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 has to play the game in the normal state, which is a disadvantageous game state, for a long period of time, so there is a possibility that the willingness to play may decrease.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifth control example, in the normal state, even if the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is not a big hit, the time saving judgment is executed, and if the time saving is won, the time saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed once and the special symbol stops changing). This is different from the fifth control example in that it is configured to be able to acquire hold.

Concretely, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is not a jackpot winning, time-saving determination is executed, and the time-saving winning probability in this case is made lower than the time-saving winning probability of the second special pattern (for example, the time-saving winning probability of the second special pattern is 1/6, and the time-saving winning probability of the first special pattern is 1/200). In addition, the number of times of reduced working hours given when winning the first special symbol (low probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols) continues) less than the number of times when winning the short working hours with the second special symbol It is a period until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops after it is changed once.

Here, if the probability of short-time winning in the second special symbol lottery (special 2 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is, for example, 1/200, the probability of winning at least once in 4 special 2 lotteries is about 2%, even if the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired up to the maximum number (maximum 4 in the embodiment) during the high probability period. When the high probability period is over and the normal state is set, the player hardly expects that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation in a short time, so it is difficult to make the player think that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is a special period, and there is a possibility that the player will not play the game willingly to acquire the special figure 2 reservation until the last moment when the general figure high probability period ends.

Therefore, the probability of short-time winning in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state is that if the special figure 2 reservation is acquired to the upper limit number (in this embodiment, up to 4 pieces) during the normal figure high probability period, the short-time winning can be fully expected in the special figure 2 lottery based on the acquired special figure 2 reservation. Even when the period is over and the normal state is set, the player can expect the setting of the advantageous state again by winning the time-saving special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation, and by making the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state think that the special figure 2 lottery is a special period, the player can be motivated to play the game to acquire many special figure 2 reservations until the last moment when the general figure high probability period ends.

On the other hand, if the probability of short-time winning in the first special symbol lottery (1st special lottery) in the normal state is set equal to the probability of short-time winning in the 2nd lottery in the normal state or higher than the probability of short-time winning in the 2nd special lottery in the normal state, the short-time lottery is frequently won in the normal state, and the short-time state is likely to be set, which may be excessively advantageous to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the time saving winning probability in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is set lower than the time saving winning probability in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the time saving is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving number of times is once, that is, the special pattern is changed once, and the time saving state is set for the period until the special pattern stops changing.

For example, if the number of times of time saving is granted two or more times, if the player is playing correctly, it is possible to obtain the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit. There was a fear of it being lost.

On the other hand, if the number of times of reduced working hours granted in the first special symbol lottery (special 1 lottery) is 1, the variation time of special symbols when the reduced working hours state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the variation time of normal symbols, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is opened as a privilege by winning the normal symbol lottery. Fig. 2 reservation) can be made different, and the easiness of short-time winning can be changed without changing the probability of short-time winning according to the number of special-Fig.

In this way, the time reduction determination is executed even in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and when the time reduction is won, the time reduction state in which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is set, so that even if the player cannot win a big win for a long period of time, the opportunity to acquire the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed from being lowered due to the long period of the unfavorable normal state for the player.

As described above, in the first modification of the fifth control example, since the time reduction determination is executed even in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, the game state is changed after the time reduction winning.

In addition, the contents of the game are different between the time saving state set when winning the time saving lottery in the special drawing 1 lottery during the normal state and the time saving state set when winning the time saving drawing in the second special pattern lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) during the normal state. In the time saving state set in the case where the game is set, the game aims to win a big win in a special symbol lottery, so it is necessary to make the display mode in the time saving state different so as not to confuse the player, and to make it easy for the player to understand which of the time saving state is set based on the time saving win in the special figure lottery.

Based on the above, an example of rendering in the first modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273. FIG.

FIG. 271(a) is an example of a variable display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot lottery or a time-saving lottery lottery lottery in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 271(a), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a short-time win, a rabbit character 801 and a treasure box 810e are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure box, a big win!" ! When "time" comes out, it's a short time GET! ! Open the treasure chest." is displayed. In other words, at the time when FIG. 271(a) is displayed, it is configured so that the player does not know whether the jackpot or the time saving has been won.

By constructing in this way, when the treasure box 810e is displayed, the player can expect to win either the big win or the short time win, and by making the player predict whether the big win or the short time win will be won during the period until the treasure box 810e is opened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

FIG. 271(b) is an example of a display screen when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is short-time winning in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols). In the main display area Dm, a treasure box 810e displayed in FIG. 271(a) is opened, and an effect is executed in which a ball tm1 described as ``Time x 1'' appears, and ``Time saving 1 time GET'' is displayed in the sub display area Ds, thereby informing the player of the time saving winning.

Incidentally, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a big win, the treasure box 810e is opened in the main display area Dm of FIG.

By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the game state set after the stop of the first special pattern during fluctuation is the jackpot game state or the time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns).

271(a) and (b) are executed when a jackpot win or a short-time win is made, but the effects of FIGS. 271(a) and (b) may be executed in part when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a loss in any judgment, and in this case, a display mode indicating that it is a loss in FIG. The configuration shall be such that

In this case, by changing the display mode of the treasure box 810e displayed in FIG. 271(a), it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot or short-time winning (for example, if the blue treasure box 810e is displayed, it is highly likely that the winning is lost, and if the gold treasure box 810e is displayed, it indicates that either one is highly likely to be won).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the fact that the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is out for a long period of time in any determination and the performance is not executed.

Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for displaying the number of lottery rights (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol acquired, and in FIG. state). That is, the embodiment is an example of effect executed when special figure 1 reservation is present and time saving is won in special figure 1 lottery in normal state.

Here, when an advantageous state (for example, time-saving state) is set, the game machine is generally configured so that the second special symbol is likely to be set for a shorter variation time than the first special symbol. By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is mainly executed when an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state) is set, and by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols when the lottery result is lost, the game in the advantageous state is prevented from being prolonged, and the player can comfortably play the game.

However, in the first modification of the fifth control example, in a situation where there is no special symbol 1 suspension, when the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) When it is notified that the time reduction wins as shown in FIG. A game (right-handed game) of shooting a game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the area is started, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the variation of the second special symbol is started. That is, the second special pattern, which tends to set a shorter variation time than the first special pattern, starts to fluctuate when the time saving state is set, and the time saving state ends when the second special pattern stops fluctuating, so the possibility that the player cannot acquire the lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special pattern up to the upper limit number is increased, and the player is in a disadvantageous situation.

In addition, if the second special symbol is likely to have a longer variation time than the first special symbol in the time saving state, and if the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery, it becomes easier to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit by varying the second special symbol. There is

Therefore, when the time saving lottery is won in the special figure 1 lottery in a situation where the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, the fact that the time saving winning is won is not notified even if the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has been won is stopped (for example, the contents of the treasure box 810e are displayed as empty). See) may be configured to execute.

By constructing in this way, in a situation where there is no special figure 1 reservation, even if the player wins the time saving lottery in the special figure 1 lottery, even if the player wins the time saving lottery, the player does not know whether or not the game ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 (left-handed game).

In order to vary the first special symbol during the time-saving state set based on the time-saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery, a starting port capable of varying the first special symbol may be provided above the second ball entrance 640 on the right side area of the board surface of the game machine.

With reference to FIGS. 272(a) and 272(b), the effect executed when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state will be described.

Although the details will be described later, in the first modification of the fifth control example, when the time reduction is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, the time reduction state is set for the period from the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is won to the time reduction to the end of the variation of the next one special symbol.

As described above, when the time saving state is set, the winning probability of the normal pattern is increased, and the normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessary 640a is in the open state is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

The number of special symbols 2 reserved that a player can obtain in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be varied by combining the variation time of special symbols, the variation time of normal symbols, and the release pattern of the electric accessory 640a by the normal symbol game.

For example, when the time saving state is set, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the electric role product 640a is opened 1 second x 2 times as a game per normal symbol. Since the electric role product 640a is open 12 times at maximum, the player can acquire the lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) up to the upper limit number (4 times in the embodiment) that can be reserved and stored.

On the other hand, when the variable time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds when the time saving state is set, the variable time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a is opened 1 second×1 time as a game per normal symbol, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 only once at maximum, so the player can obtain only one special figure 2 reservation.

Then, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped and the time saving state is ended, a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired by the player during the time saving state.

In the embodiment, the probability of short-time winning of the second special symbol in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is higher than the probability of short-time winning of the first special symbol (in the embodiment, 1/6), and the number of times of short-time awarded at the time of short-time winning is also large (10,000 times in the embodiment).

That is, the more the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving, the more the special figure 2 lottery can be received, so that the longer the fluctuation time of the special pattern when the time saving state is set, the more advantageous the player.

It should be noted that any of the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a by the normal per game may be a fixed value.

FIG. 272(a) is a display screen during the time saving state when the first special symbol won in the normal state is stopped, the variation time of the first special symbol to be executed next is 30 seconds, the variation time of the normal symbol is 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is 1 second×1 time.

A first special pattern is variably displayed in the small display area Dm1, and a display indicating that the second special pattern is not variably displayed is displayed in the small display area Dm8, so that the player can easily understand which special pattern is variably displayed.

Corresponding to the time saving state being set in the small display area Dm4, a display of ``right hitting'' is displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 on the right side area of the board surface of the game machine, and the sub display area Ds displays ``right hitting and save hold!'', so that even a player playing for the first time can play with a game method suitable for the game state.

In the main display area Dm, "Collect capsules within the time limit during charging!"

The capsule is a display for notifying that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, and one capsule is displayed in accordance with the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved pattern of the small display area Dm9 is illuminated in black. Here, the small display area Dm9 is a display area for indicating the special figure 2 reservation number acquired by the player entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and when the lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol does not exist, the reservation h1 to reservation h4 are displayed in white, and when the player acquires the special figure 2 reservation, the reservation h1 to reservation h1 to reservation h4 are lit in order from the youngest to the youngest, and when the reservation memory accumulates to the upper limit number, the reservation h1 to reservation h4. are all lit up in black.

In addition, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for indicating the number of first special symbol lottery rights (special figure 1 reservation) acquired by the player entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. When the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, the reservations h5 to reservation h8 are displayed in white, and when the player acquires the special figure 1 reservation, the reservation h5 is lit in black in order from the youngest, and the special figure 1 reservation is upper limit number (4 times in the embodiment). All of the pending h5 to h8 are lit black.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 272 (a), it shows that it is in a state of acquiring one special figure 1 reservation and one special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the upper limit number of reserved special symbols and the current reserved acquisition status of special symbols, and when the reserved number of special symbols is acquired up to the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the lottery right of each special symbol is not reserved. It is possible to make it easier to judge whether or not to continue the game for entering the ball.

In addition, when the reservation h4 is displayed in black based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the reservation h1 to the reservation h3 are displayed in black in the small display area Dm9, that is, when the special figure 2 reservation is stored as the upper limit number of 4, "MAX acquisition complete!" By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired up to the upper limit number, and the player can be relieved.

A small display area Dm5 displays the remaining time until the time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is completed, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special patterns during fluctuation, and ``capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX'' is displayed in the small display region Dm11. The content displayed in the small display area Dm11 corresponds to the special figure 2 pending number that can be acquired during the time saving state, and in the example shown in FIG. 272 (a), the variation time of the first special symbol is 30 seconds, the normal symbol variation time is 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a is set to 1 second × 1 time. On the other hand, when 5 seconds are set as the variation time of the first special symbol, 3 seconds as the variation time of the normal symbol, and 1 second×2 times are set as the release pattern of the electric accessory 640a, only one special figure 2 hold can be obtained at maximum, so that ``capsule upper limit acquisition expectation is low'' is displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the number of special figures 2 pending that the player can acquire in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) from the display content of the small display area Dm11, and when a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbols, It is possible to make the player shoot the game ball in a hurry, and the game ball is delayed in spite of the time saving state being set. It is possible to suppress the problem of failing to perform a technique.

It should be noted that the display of the upper limit expectation level of the capsule may be any display that indicates the level, and for example, the number of stars may be used to indicate the level of expectation.

In the embodiment, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) during the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reservation), and the variation of the first special symbol is executed based on the special symbol 1 reservation during the time reduction state. Alternatively, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and it is started when the fluctuation of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In addition, regardless of whether or not special figure 1 reservation exists, the time saving state is set at the time when the variation of the first special symbol that has been elected for time saving stops.

FIG. 272(b) is an example of the display screen displayed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the time saving state ends.

A first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1, and ``remaining 0 second'' is displayed in the small display area Dm5 to notify that the period in which the time saving state is set has ended.

In the small display area Dm9, the reservation h1 to the reservation h4 are lit black, and the character "Total4GET" and the capsules cp1 to cp4 are displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, thereby informing the player that he has acquired four lottery rights (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special pattern. Capsule cp1-capsule cp4 correspond to hold 1-hold 4, respectively, and for example, as a result of pre-discrimination of hold information of hold h2 (special figure 2 hold obtained second during charge performance) (read-ahead result), capsule cp2 is displayed in a display mode (black capsule) different from other capsules when the expectation of short-time winning is high.

Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that there is a reservation with a high possibility of winning a short-time win in the special figure 2 reservation, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the central part of the main display area Dm, "Charge completed, enter the promotion chance zone!" ” indicates that the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed after the time saving state is finished.

When the capsule cannot be acquired during the charge performance, that is, when even one special figure 2 reservation cannot be acquired, the game shifts to the normal mode without entering the promotion chance zone after the end of the charge performance.

In the embodiment, in the small display area Dm9 and the small display area Dm10, even if there is no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation, the reservations h1 to reservation h8 are displayed in white to indicate that up to four reservations can be made, respectively. It is good also as a structure displayed.

By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many lottery rights of each special pattern can be reserved, and even when the reserved number is obtained up to the upper limit, the shooting of game balls can be continued without noticing that the reserved number is obtained up to the upper limit.

In the embodiment, the display screen of FIG. 272(b) is displayed when the variation of the special symbol in which the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set is stopped, but not limited to this, when the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired to the upper limit number in a state where the remaining variation time remains until the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the display screen of FIG. 272(b) may be displayed. . In this configuration, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the display mode of the capsule changes, and it may be configured to suggest the expectation of winning a jackpot with special figure 2 or the expectation of short-time winning.

By constructing in this way, the player who has obtained the upper limit number of the special symbols 2 while the variation time of the special symbols still remains is expected to change the display mode of the capsule if the game balls are input to the second ball entrance 640, thereby making it possible to continue the game of entering the game balls to the second ball entrance 640 until the last moment when the special symbols stop varying.

In the embodiment, the capsules cp1 to cp4 corresponding to the holds h1 to hold h4 are respectively displayed, but this is not the only option. That is, in the later-described promotion chance zone, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on hold 1 to hold 4 is notified by opening the capsule once. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many special 2 reserves are obtained during the charging performance, and the player can enjoy the promotion chance zone performance without worrying about the number of the obtained special 2 reserves.

In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the player does not know that the special figure 2 reservation is obtained when the special figure 2 reservation is obtained in the charge effect.

By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation, so that the player's dissatisfaction due to the inability to acquire the special figure 2 reservation as desired during the charge performance can be suppressed.

FIG. 273 is an example of a display screen displayed when short-time winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation in the promotion chance zone.

In the small display area Dm1, a display indicating that the first special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the second special symbol has been won is displayed.

In addition, since the normal state (low-probability state of special pattern, low-probability state of normal pattern) is set, a display of ``left-handed hitting'' is displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64, so that the player is prevented from playing with an erroneous game method.

In the central part of the main display area Dm, a capsule cp1 described as "completed" indicating that it is already opened, a diamond dy1 described as "time x 10000" indicating that the result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reserved) was a short time winning, an opened capsule cp2, and capsules cp3 and cp4 that have not yet been opened are displayed.

In the example of FIG. 273, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on the firstly acquired special figure 2 reservation among the four special figure 2 reservations acquired during the charge performance is not won in a big hit and a short time, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the second acquired special figure 2 reservation is shown to have been won in a short time.

In the small display area Dm5, ``three more times'' is displayed, indicating that the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern based on the reservation of the special figure 2 is three times remaining, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated when the fluctuation display of the second special pattern is started. For example, when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the first special figure 2 reservation is started, ``four more times'' is displayed, and when the variation display based on the second special figure 2 reservation is started, ``three more times'' is displayed.

In the display of the small display area Dm9, when the variation of the second special pattern is newly started based on the special figure 2 suspension, the suspension display displayed in the suspension h1 is changed from black display to white display, and when the suspension h2 is black display, that is, when there are other special figure 2 suspensions, the display is shifted to the suspension h1, the suspension h1 becomes black display, and the suspension h2 becomes white display. At that time, if the pending h3 and the pending h4 are displayed in black, they are shifted to the pending h2 and the pending h3 respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 273, since the variation of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 suspension has been executed twice, two suspension h3 and suspension h4 are displayed in white.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand how many more times the variation of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 reservation will be executed.

In FIG. 273, an example of a production when winning a time reduction in a special figure 2 lottery based on a special figure 2 reservation was described, but when a jackpot is won in a special figure 2 lottery based on a special figure 2 reservation, the contents of the capsule may be configured to notify the player of the jackpot winning by displaying it as a different display mode (for example, a ball described as "V"), or the capsule itself may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, a red capsule).

In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is a loss in any judgment, the contents may be empty when the capsule is opened, or the configuration may be such that a display mode (for example, paper written as "sorry") indicating the loss from the capsule is displayed.

In addition, in the embodiment, as a result of preliminarily discriminating the hold information of the special figure 2 hold (pre-reading result), when the possibility of short-time winning is high, the capsule corresponding to the special figure 2 hold with high possibility of short-time win is displayed in a different display mode, but it is not limited to this.

For example, as a result of pre-reading the hold information of the third acquired special figure 2 hold, when there is a high possibility of short-time winning, in the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired special figure 2 hold, a paper written as "next big chance!" Alternatively, the display mode of the capsule written "Completed" displayed after the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired special figure 2 suspension is completed may be changed to a different display mode (for example, the capsule written "Next big chance").

By configuring in this way, when a capsule with a different display mode is displayed in the promotion chance zone, in the variation of the second special pattern based on the special figure 2 suspension executed before the special figure 2 suspension corresponding to the capsule, it is possible to make the player expect that the information on the special figure 2 suspension to be executed next will be displayed, and the opening performance of the capsule displayed in the normal display mode can also be made interesting.

In the promotion chance zone, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order of acquisition (in order from h1 to the youngest), and the capsules corresponding to the special figure 2 reservations to be digested are released in order (from the capsule cp1 to the youngest order). For example, when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on the firstly obtained special figure 2 reservation is short time winning, if the capsule cp4 is selected instead of the capsule cp1, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the display mode of the capsules but also in the order of opening the capsules, and further improve the amusement of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 274, the electrical configuration of the first modified example will be described. This first modification differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the time saving type can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and the time saving type set when the time saving win is made in the first special symbol lottery is different from the time saving type set when the time saving win is made in the second special symbol lottery. Moreover, it is different in that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is varied. Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG.274(a) is the figure which showed the content prescribed|regulated to random number 5a table 202dae per time saving. As shown in FIG. 274(a), the time saving random number 5a table 202dae is different from the time saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it defines the determination value of time saving winning in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) for the first special symbol, and is otherwise the same.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol and the set game state is the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first winning random number counter C1 acquired is defined as a winning judgment value for shortening the winning time in the range of ``51 to 54''.

That is, since the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 900, in the first special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state, it is constructed so as to win short time with a probability of 4/900.

Next, with reference to Drawing 274 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 5a table 202daf are explained. Drawing 274 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 5a table 202daf. The time saving type selection 5a table 202daf is different from the time saving type selection 5 table 202df of the fifth control example described above in that the time saving type set when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the special symbol type (special symbol type) is the first special symbol, regardless of the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, the time saving type "time saving C" is defined. When this time saving C is set, 1 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. That is, the time saving state of one time of time saving is set.

<Regarding control processing in the first modification of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277, the processing contents of the control processing in this first modified example will be described. This first modification differs from the above-described fifth control example in that part of the processing performed by the main controller 110 and part of the processing performed by the sound ramp control device 113 are changed, but the rest is the same. Here, differences from the fifth control example described above will be described.

Figure 275 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 5a (S8021). In this time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021), the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) are different from those of the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example. That is, in the fifth control example described above, the control process is executed so that the condition for executing the time-saving appropriateness determination can be established only when the type of the special symbol lottery being executed is the second special symbol (see S8101). That is, the difference is that the process of S8101 is deleted from the time saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above. Other processing contents are the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute time-saving adequacy determination also in the first special symbol lottery.

Figure 276 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 5a (S9026). This time saving state effect setting process 5a (S9026) is different from the time saving state effect setting process 5 (see S9006 in FIG. 266) of the fifth control example described above in that the processing content (S9321, S9322) when the time saving type (time saving C) set when the time saving type (time saving C) is set is added, and other than that, the description is omitted because it is the same.

When the time saving state effect setting process 5a (S9026) is executed, the same S9301 to S9308 processes as the time saving state effect setting process 5 of the fifth control example (see S9006 in FIG. 266) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9306, if it is determined that the time saving type is not the time saving A (S9306: No), then it is determined whether the time saving type is the time saving C (S9321).

Figure 277 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing 5a (S4993). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5a (S4993) differs from the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (S4983 in FIG. 268) in the above-described fifth control example in that the process for setting the effect mode in the case of winning the time saving in the first special symbol lottery and the process for setting the effect mode of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state are different.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5a (S4993) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 223da (S9502), and the time saving type is read from the secondary state setting area 223g (S9521), and the read time saving type is read. is the time saving C (S9522), and if it is the time saving C, the time saving performance mode corresponding to the remaining variation time of the special symbol of this time is determined (S9523), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9524), and this processing is finished.

That is, the display mode for guiding the remaining period of time reduction displayed in the small display area Dm5 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining time in which the time saving state continues in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, if it is determined that it is not time saving C in the processing of S9522 (S9522: No), it is a case where the first special symbol variation is executed in a state where other time saving types are set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db is 0, that is, if it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state (S9501: No), then it is determined whether it is a time saving winning fluctuation (S9526), and if it is determined that it is a time saving winning fluctuation (S9526: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the time saving winning is determined (S9527), S9524 to process. Here, the variable performance of the short-time winning variation shown in FIG.

<Second Modification of Fifth Control Example>
A second modification of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 278 to 282. FIG. In the above-described fifth control example, it is possible to set a high probability state (first time reduction) of normal symbols based on the fact that a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and to set a high probability state (second time reduction) of normal symbols based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the time reduction. As a result, it is possible to set a high-probability state of normal symbols at a plurality of opportunities, and by increasing the variation of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second modified example, in order to further improve interest, the contents of the privilege given when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set are configured to be different according to the occasion (first short time or second short time) when the high probability state of the normal symbols is set. In other words, the contents of the privilege given when the same jackpot type is set are different between when the big win is won during the first time saving and when the big win is won during the second time saving. By constructing in this way, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set, the player can be interested in when the time saving state is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the second modified example, as a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a jackpot game (2R jackpot) with a small number of rounds and a short playing time for one round game can be executed, and a time saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the contents of the game to be executed between when the time saving state is set based on the big win in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the first time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set without executing the big winning game, that is, when the second time saving state is set.

In addition, in the second modification, the variable performance executed in the process of setting the first time saving and the variable performance executed in the process of setting the second time saving are configured to be executable in the same performance mode. Specifically, the first period from the start of the special symbol variation indicating the winning of the jackpot (2R jackpot winning) in which the first time saving is set is started, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and then the 2R jackpot game is finished, and the second period, which is the variation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the winning of the time saving in which the second time saving is set, are set so as to be substantially the same period, and the production is executed in a common presentation mode using the period. are

By constructing in this way, since the performance of the common performance mode can be executed in the period from the start of the special pattern variation to the setting of the time saving state in the case of setting the first time saving and the case of setting the second time saving, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state is set.

<Regarding the effect contents in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the characteristic effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification of the fifth control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, although there is a difference between the number of times of reduced working hours granted after the end of the jackpot game (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) and the number of reduced working hours granted by the reduced working hours winning, there is a case where the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery during the reduced working hours state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) set based on the winning of the jackpot, and a jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery during the reduced working hours state set based on the short winning of working hours. , If the jackpot type is the same, the benefits (for example, the number of time reductions given after the jackpot game ends) are also the same.

Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set with either the jackpot winning or the time-saving winning as a trigger, there is no difference in the ratio of the jackpot types when the jackpot is won during the time-saving state and the benefits given even if the jackpot types are the same, and there is a fear that the game will become monotonous.

On the other hand, the second modification of the fifth control example is different from the fifth control example in that the ratio of the jackpot types and the benefits given even if the jackpot types are the same are different between when the jackpot is won during the time saving state set based on the jackpot winning and when the jackpot is won during the time saving state set based on the time saving win.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the ratio of the jackpot type (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds of the jackpot game) in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the opportunity of setting the time-saving state, or to change the prize to be given even in the same jackpot type, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Specifically, in the second modification of the fifth control example, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). For example, when the jackpot A is won while the first time saving state is set, the maximum number of times of time saving is given after the jackpot game is finished, but when the jackpot A is won when the second time saving state is set, the time saving number of times is given 10000 times at the maximum after the jackpot game is finished.

Thus, the privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won differs depending on whether the game state set when the jackpot is won is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state, and when the second time-saving state is set, an advantageous privilege (for example, the number of times of time-saving given after the end of the jackpot game is increased) is more likely to be given than when the first time-saving state is set. The game is played while expecting that the time saving state is set.

As will be described later, in the second modification of the fifth control example, a 16R probability variable jackpot in which prize balls can be acquired during the jackpot game and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and a 2R short-time jackpot in which it is difficult to acquire prize balls during the jackpot game and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed are prepared.

Therefore, when the jackpot type selected when winning the jackpot is the 2R time-saving jackpot, the prize ball cannot be obtained in spite of winning the jackpot, and the first time-saving state, which is more disadvantageous than the second time-saving state, is set, which may reduce the motivation of the player who wins the 2R jackpot.

Therefore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, the performance executed when winning the 2R time saving jackpot in which the first time saving state is set is the same as when winning the time saving jackpot in which the second time saving state is set is made to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the 2R time saving jackpot win or the time saving win is made.

By constructing in this way, even when winning the 2R short-time jackpot which is disadvantageous compared to the 16R variable variable jackpot, the player can be expected to win the short-time jackpot, and the player's desire to play when winning the 2R short-time jackpot can be suppressed.

FIG. 278(a) is an example of the chance time acquisition effect executed when winning the jackpot to give the first time saving state in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) in the normal state.

Two numbers ``2'' are displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, a pattern of ``chance time'' is displayed between them, and ``chance time GET!!'' is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify that the shift to the chance time will follow.

Here, the chance time means a performance mode displayed during a period from the setting of the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) to the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if it is a case where the time saving state of the 1st time saving state and the 2nd time saving state is set, the production mode displayed becomes a chance time. Therefore, it is configured such that the player cannot determine which time saving state the currently set time saving state is based on the displayed production mode.

In addition, it may be configured to suggest the set time saving state by using the performance executed during the chance time. For example, a plurality of background images to be displayed during the chance time may be prepared, and when the second time saving state is set, a specific background image may be set more easily than when the first time saving state is set.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the display mode during the chance time in order to guess the type of the time saving state, and the interest in the game during the chance time can be improved.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display mode indicating that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving jackpot. Here, in FIG. 278(a), the display in the small display area Dm1 is of a size that can be visually recognized by the player, but it is preferable that the display be made invisible to the player (for example, the small display area Dm1 is not displayed).

Then, since the big winning game is executed based on the winning of the 2R time-saving big winning of the first special symbol, the small display area Dm4 displays ``Right shot'' in order to inform the player that the game ball is being played toward the specific winning opening 65a on the right side area of the board surface of the game machine.

Here, when the 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the opening/closing plate 65b performs the opening/closing operation at high speed twice during the jackpot period in the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the short-time winning is won, the opening/closing plate 65b remains closed because the jackpot game is not executed. In other words, the player can determine whether the 2R time-saving jackpot winning or the time-saving winning is by confirming the operation status of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress this, the screen is intensely illuminated in the chance time acquisition performance so that the player does not pay attention to the opening/closing plate 65b by paying attention to the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In the embodiment, the screen is intensely illuminated so that the player does not pay attention to the opening/closing plate 65b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may be directed to the button by executing an effect for operating the button.

FIG. 278(b) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the short time winning is won in the first special symbol in the normal state.

The difference from the case of winning the 2R short working time jackpot is that a display mode for showing the winning of the short working time jackpot is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the other display is the same as the display screen displayed when winning the 2R short working time jackpot.

Even when the fluctuation of the first special symbol won in time saving stops, it is displayed in the small display area Dm4 as "Right shot", but since the time saving state is set, this is a display for prompting the player to play the game of shooting the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the board surface of the game machine.

In this way, the chance time acquisition performances in the case of winning the 2R short time jackpot and the time saving jackpot are made to be the same display mode, making it difficult for the player to discriminate which one is won, so that the player can be expected to win the time saving win even when the 2R big jackpot win is won, and the player's desire to play can be suppressed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is the 2R time saving jackpot.

Here, when the 2R short-time jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed during the chance time acquisition performance, but when the time-shorter win is won, the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special symbols stops at the same timing, the period from the display of the chance time acquisition performance to the start of the chance time is longer than that in the case of the short-time win when the 2R short-time jackpot is won. There is a possibility that the player can determine whether he or she has won the lottery or the time-saving lottery.

Therefore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, the period (determined period) from the start of the chance time acquisition performance to the actual stop of the variation of the special symbol is different between when the 2R time saving jackpot is won and when the time saving jackpot is won.

With reference to FIG. 279, the variation pattern of the special symbol at the time of winning the jackpot and the variation pattern at the time of winning the time saving will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 279(a) and (b), the performance mode is the same from the start of variation of the special symbols to the end of the chance time acquisition performance. However, in FIG. 279(a), the variation of the special symbols stops 1 second after the chance time acquisition effect is started, and the jackpot game is executed for 4 seconds, whereas in FIG.

Thus, by setting the period (determined period) from the start of the chance time acquisition performance to the actual stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols in the case of winning the short time jackpot longer than in the case of winning the 2R short time jackpot, the display time of the chance time acquisition performance does not change between when the big win game is executed while the chance time acquisition performance is displayed and when the big win game is not executed while the chance time acquisition performance is displayed, so that the player can easily determine whether the display time of the chance time acquisition performance is long or short. It is difficult to determine whether the 2R short-time jackpot was won or the short-time win.

In the embodiment, different fixed periods are set for the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the case of winning the time-saving jackpot, and the display time of the chance time acquisition performance is set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and when winning the time-shortening win, the fixed period is the same, and when the time-shortening win is won, after the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped, a standby period is provided in which the next special pattern does not start to fluctuate for a certain period, so that the display time of the chance time acquisition performance may be made the same.

In the embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the case of winning the time-saving prize, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the time-saving winning special symbol is fluctuating, there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reservation), and if the result (read-ahead result) determined in advance based on the reservation information of the special symbol 1-sustaining is a jackpot winning, the display mode of the chance time acquisition performance executed in the changing special symbol is set to a special display mode (for example, the 'chance time' symbol is displayed in rainbow colors) to suggest the player to win the jackpot after winning the time-saving winning. It is good as

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281. FIG. FIG.280(a) is the figure which showed the content of random number 5b table 202dbe per time saving. As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the time saving random number 5b table 202dbe differs from the time saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example in that it sets a prescribed value that is determined to be time saving winning even in the first special symbol lottery, and is otherwise the same.

FIG. 280(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1. As shown in FIG. 280(b), the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1 defines the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd of the fifth control example described above so as to be commonly referred to in the first special design and the second special design, and according to the game state at the time of jackpot winning and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type and the value of the time saving counter 203h corresponding to each jackpot type and the probability change. A value of the counter 203i is defined.

In this second modification, as described above, the high probability state (first time saving) of the normal design can be set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the normal design high probability state (second time saving) can be set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. The number of times of time saving (value set in time saving counter 203h) set after the end of the jackpot game is different between when the second time saving is set and when the second time saving is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 280(b), in the second modification, as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is two rounds, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the time-saving state. Here, when the jackpot B5b is selected as the jackpot type, the performance described above with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, that is, the specific performance that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time reduction is set or the second time reduction is set is executed.

That is, the same game state (time saving state) as when the second time saving is set can be set, and a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set.

Drawing 281 is a figure showing the contents of time saving classification selection 5b table 202dbf. The time saving type selection 5b table 202dbf differs from the time saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that the time saving type defined in correspondence with the acquired value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is different, and the rest is the same.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the second modification, the time saving end condition (the value set in the time saving counter 203h) when the second time saving is set is the time saving end condition (see FIG. 280 (b)) when the first time saving is set. Concretely, it is configured such that a time saving type in which one of "50", "200" and "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h is selected.

By configuring in this way, for example, when a high probability state of normal patterns is set after execution of a specific performance, the high probability state of normal patterns (time saving state) shifts to a low probability state (normal state) with the number of times of special pattern fluctuation reaching 50 times, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time saving has been set or the second time saving has been set up to now.

<Regarding control processing in the second modification of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described. Figure 282 is the flowchart which shows the contents of time saving state production setting processing 5b (S9056). In this time-saving state effect setting process 5b (S9056), the time-saving state effect setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in the fifth control example described above is different in that the contents of the control processing executed when it is determined that the game state has shifted from the normal state to the time-saving state are different. It is configured so that a special time saving mode is executed when it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation to be included.

In the time saving state effect setting process 5b (S9056), first, reading of the game state before change is executed from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is the variable probability state (S9302). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding effect mode is set during the preparation time (S9303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9302, when it is determined that the game state before the change is not the variable probability state (S9302: No), next, it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state (S9303). When it is determined that the gaming state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9305). Then, it is determined whether the time saving state set this time is the time saving state set with the opportunity of the time saving winning (S9351).

In the processing of S9351, when it is determined that the time saving state is set with the opportunity of the time saving winning (S9351: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not there is a reservation for winning a big hit in the second special symbol reservation (S9352). If it is determined that there is a hold to win a big hit (S9352: Yes), a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the special time saving mode is set (S9353), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9351, when it is determined that the time saving has not been won in the lottery of this time (S9351: No), or in the processing of S9352, when it is determined that there is no reservation for winning the big hit in the reservation of the second special pattern (S9352: No), a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the time saving mode is set (S9354), and this processing is ended.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 283 to 293. FIG. In the fifth control example and each modified example described above, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving lottery in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the sixth control example, it is greatly different in that it is configured so that the special symbol lottery can win short time even in the state where the game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring in this way, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when newly winning the time saving state, it is possible to update the remaining period in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state continues.

In addition, in the case of updating the remaining period in which the time saving state continues, it is constructed so that the period in which the time saving state continues is renewed (advantageous renewal) so as to be longer than the current remaining period (advantageous renewal) or renewed so as to be shortened (unfavorable renewal). That is, depending on the timing of the time-saving lottery winning and the number of times of time-saving (time-saving) set when the time-saving lottery is won, there are cases where the time-saving winning becomes an advantageous privilege for the player and a case where it becomes a disadvantageous privilege. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that includes a game property that expects time-saving winning and a game property that does not expect time-saving winning.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example, it is configured such that the more consecutive time-saving wins are made, the easier it is to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player without winning a jackpot. Specifically, a plurality of time-saving classifications with different degrees of advantage for the player are defined, and the more advantageous time-saving classifications are set as the time-saving winning is made in the time-saving state, the easier it is to set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot, the easier it is to give the player an advantageous benefit.

In addition, when the most advantageous time saving type for the player is set, it is configured to make the shift to the time saving type disadvantageous to the player easier than when the time saving type more disadvantageous than the time saving type is set. In other words, there are a plurality of stages of time-reduction classifications with different degrees of advantage, and the time-reduction classifications with a higher degree of advantage are gradually set based on the winning of time-reduction, and when the highest level of time-reduction classification is reached, it is configured to easily fall to the lowest stage of time-reduction classification. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the time saving type advantageous to the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

<Regarding the effects of the sixth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the characteristic presentation content in the sixth control example will be described. Fig. 283 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the time saving is won in the normal state and the time saving A is set as the time saving type, and Fig. 283 (b) is a state where the working time saving A is set.

In addition, FIG. 284 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when short working hours are won during the short working hours state and the number of remaining short working hours (short remaining time) increases. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 283, in the sixth control example, even in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, since the time saving winning determination is executable, an effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state (an effect in which an icon indicating the lottery result appears from the bag 863) is executed. In this case, for example, the current remaining number of reduced working hours during the time saving state and the newly elected reduced working hours type are distinguished, and if the number of reduced working hours set corresponding to the newly elected reduced working hours type is greater than the current number of reduced working hours remaining (see Dm7), an effect indicating that the number of reduced working hours remaining in the reduced working hours state increases as shown in FIG. ), as shown in FIG. 284(b), an effect indicating that the number of times of remaining time reduction in the time reduction state decreases is executed.

In addition, in the sixth control example, when the time saving is won in the time saving state, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied is easily set (it is easier to set than when the time saving is won in the normal state). Then, when the short working hours are elected in the state where the short working hours B are set, the advantageous short working hours state (10,000 times of the number of short working hours are set) which continues the state of short working hours until the next big win is easily given.

Then, when the time saving B is set, as shown in FIG. 283(b), a display mode capable of informing the player that the time saving state is set is displayed in a display mode different from the state in which the time saving A is set.

<Regarding the game flow in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the game flow in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing a game flow in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 285, it is different from the above-described fifth control example in that it is possible to determine whether the winning of time reduction is possible in a game state other than the normal state, that the probability of winning the time reduction is different according to the game state in which the determination of the time reduction election is performed, and that a plurality of time reduction types (time reduction A, time reduction B) are provided as the time reduction state, in which the degree of advantage of the bonus at the time of winning the jackpot is different.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
FIG.286(a) is the figure which showed the content of random number 6 table 202ee per time saving. As shown in Fig. 286 (A), the time -saving random number 6 table 202EE is the point that the judgment value is determined in the first special pattern lottery, which is determined to be a time -saving won in the first special pattern lottery, and the judgment value of the time saving in the first special pattern lottery. It is different from the specified point and the range (time -saving this probability) determined to be a time -saving election according to the game status.

By configuring in this way, the time saving winning probability can be varied according to the set game state and the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed.

FIG.286(b) is the figure which showed the content of the time reduction classification selection 6 table 202ef. As shown in FIG. 286 (b), the time saving type selection 6 table 202ef is different from the above-described time saving type selection 5 table 202df.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which game state is set.

FIG. 287 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 6 table 202ed. As shown in FIG. 287, in the 6 tables for big wins 202ed, the value of the time saving counter 203h set for each time saving type, that is, the number of time saving times is different from the above-described 5 tables for big wins 202dd according to the game state at the time of winning the big win. Specifically, when the same game state (time saving state), namely, the time saving B is set and the time saving A is set, the number of times of time saving set after the end of the jackpot game is different. In the sixth control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h set for each time saving type, that is, the number of times of time saving is defined to be different depending on the game state when the big win is won.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 288, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a time saving mode storage area 223ea is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The time saving mode storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the set time saving mode, and stores the time saving mode set in the time saving state effect setting process 6 (see S9076 in FIG. 290) (S9372 in FIG. 290). Then, it is referred to when setting the performance mode of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the read time saving mode.

<Regarding control processing contents in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293, the contents of control processing executed in this sixth control example will be described. Figure 289 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 6 (S8056). This time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056) differs from the above-described time-saving lottery process 5 (S8016) in that the process for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) are satisfied is changed. That is, as shown in FIG. 289, in most of the special symbol lottery to be executed, time-saving winning or losing winning is executed.

In the time saving lottery process 6 (S8056), first, the lottery result is acquired based on the time saving per random number 6 table 202ee (see FIG. 286(a)) (S8154). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a time-saving election (S8105). Next, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is time saving winning (S8105: Yes), based on the value of the obtained time saving type counter CC1, the time saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S8106), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S8105, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is not the time-saving winning (S8105: No), the special symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (S8107), and the process is terminated.

Next, FIG. 290 is the flowchart which showed the content of the time saving state production|presentation setting process 6 (S9076). This time saving state effect setting process 6 (S9076) differs from the time saving state effect setting process 5 (S9056 in FIG. 282) in the fifth control example described above in that the time saving type included in the state command received this time is executed in the time saving mode storage area 223ea.

Next, FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 6 (S4997). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 6 (S4997) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation, and differs from the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) in the above-described fifth control example in that the mode-specific effect setting process (S9651) for determining the effect mode during the time saving state is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 292, the contents of the mode-specific effect setting process (S9651) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing the contents of the mode-specific effect setting process (S9651). In this mode-by-mode effect setting process (S9651), the process for determining the effect mode of the various effects described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284 is executed.

In the effect setting process by mode (S9651), first, reading of the current time saving mode is executed from the time saving mode storage area 223ea (S9801). Next, it is determined whether the current time saving mode read from the time saving mode storage area 223ea is the time saving A (S9802). If it is determined that the current time saving mode is time saving A (S9802: Yes), it is determined whether this lottery is a time saving lottery (S9803).

When it is determined that it is a lottery to win time saving (S9803: Yes), the difference is calculated based on the number of times of time saving given based on this lottery and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9804). Next, based on the calculated difference, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count decreases (S9805). When it is determined that the number of times of time saving does not decrease, that is, the number of times of saving time increases (S9805: No), a display command is set to indicate that the number of times of remaining time saving increases (S9806), and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, in the process of S9805, if it is determined that the number of times of remaining time reduction is reduced based on the difference (S9805: Yes), a display command for indicating that the number of times of remaining time reduction is reduced is set (S9807), and the process proceeds to S9809. On the other hand, in the processing of S9803, if it is determined that the lottery of this time is not a lottery for short-time winning (S9803: No), the processing of S9804 to S9807 is skipped and the processing of S9809 is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S9802, when it is determined that the read current time saving mode is not time saving A (S9802: No), the effect setting process during time saving B is executed (S9808). A detailed description of the effect setting process during time saving B (S9808) will be given later with reference to FIG. Next, the read current time saving mode is compared with the game state set based on the lottery result (S9809), and it is determined whether there is switching of the time saving mode (S9810). When it is determined that there is switching of the time saving mode (S9810: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the switching of the time saving mode is determined (S9811), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9810, when it is determined that there is no switching of the time saving mode (S9810: No), the process of S9811 is skipped, and the process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the processing contents of the effect setting processing during time saving B (S9808) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process during time saving B (S9808). As shown in FIG. 293, in the time saving B medium effect setting process (S9808), the time saving type to be set when the time saving is won during the time saving B is determined, and other than the time saving B, that is, the time saving A is set.

In the production setting process during time saving B (S9808), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery is a lottery for time saving winning (S9851). When it is determined that it is a lottery to win time saving (S9851: Yes), it is determined whether it is a lottery to win time saving B (S9852). When it is determined that it is not a lottery to win the time saving B (S9852: No), the production mode for suggesting the end of the time saving is determined (S9853), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a lottery to win the time saving B (S9852: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the time saving continuation until the next big hit is determined (S9855), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9851, if it is determined that the current lottery is not a time-saving lottery lottery (S9851: No), it is determined whether it is a jackpot lottery lottery (S9854). When it is determined that it is a lottery to win a jackpot (S9854: Yes), the processing of S9855 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a lottery to win a jackpot (S9854: No), this processing is terminated.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 328. FIG. This seventh control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big winning (losing), and the big winning game can be executed by entering the game ball into a specific area during the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the determination of time-saving winning is performed only when the special symbol lottery is not winning the jackpot, whereas this seventh control example is different in that it is possible to determine both the big winning and the time-saving winning in one special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, after executing the determination of the jackpot winning, it is configured to perform the determination of the short-time winning, and in the case of the short-time winning, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the special symbol variation of the short-time winning is stopped and displayed. A time-saving state is set before the time-saving state, determination of big winning in the special pattern lottery is executed in the state where the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special pattern variation for showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is executed.

Concretely, when the first special symbol lottery in the normal state wins the time-saving lottery, as described above, it is configured to be in the time-saving state for a short period of time including the timing of execution of the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the fifth control example described above, a game advantageous to the player for the next big win (a game that makes it easy to execute a special symbol lottery) is performed for a predetermined period (up to 10000 times) without going through the big win game. A function (special lottery function) is provided to make it possible to execute the jackpot judgment of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state during the game (left-handed game) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing of executing the big-hit judgment in the time-saving state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute big hit judgment of the special pattern lottery in the time saving state while making it difficult for the player to grasp that the special pattern lottery has been won, so that it is possible to inform the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the privilege given when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is different between when the jackpot is won in the normal state and when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state, a benefit (for example, a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) more advantageous to the player is given. That is, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when both the short-time winning and the big win are won, a more advantageous privilege is given than when only the big win is won.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a suggesting mode (notification mode) capable of suggesting the presence or absence of a short-time winning and a suggesting mode (notifying mode) capable of suggesting the presence or absence of a jackpot winning can be set as the performance mode of the variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

In other words, by grasping the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed, the player can predict the result of big win determination executed for the special symbol lottery being executed and the result of short-time winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable effect, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the big win are configured to be different. By constructing in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing determination for providing a plurality of different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to comprehend (predict) at least one determination result and to comprehend a suggestion mode for suggesting another determination result.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when the performance result including the suggestive mode suggesting the presence or absence of the time-reduction winning (time-reduction performance) is the performance result including the suggestion mode suggesting non-winning of the time-reduction, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the case where the time-reduction performance is not executed. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of imparting a plurality of benefits with different grant determinations in one special symbol lottery, when a determination result suggesting performance capable of suggesting the grant determination result for one benefit is executed, the performance result of the determination result suggesting performance is a performance result suggesting that the first privilege is not granted, so that the degree of expectation for granting other benefits is higher than when the determination result suggesting performance is not executed, whereby the determination result suggesting performance is executed. At the point in time, the player can be notified that any privilege is more likely to be granted than in the case where the judgment result suggesting effect is not executed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described below, but the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 299. FIG. FIG. 294 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, FIG. 295 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, and FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 294, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball-entering port 64, a second ball-entering port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the second ball receiving port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that a game area is formed in front of the game board 13 where the game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (an area in which prize winning openings are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 294) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 294) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the central part while the momentum is attenuated.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 294). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the seventh control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b operates.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving or normal state by the lighting state, indicate by the lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating, and whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is finished) or a pattern corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is finished) or a missing pattern. is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combinations of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. The types of jackpots determined here include a 15R short-time jackpot (15R short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds and a short-time state is given after the jackpot, a 5R short-time jackpot (5R short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds and a short-time state is given after the jackpot ends, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and the short-time state is not given after the jackpot. No jackpot) is available.

In addition, in a part of the case where it is determined that the game is not a big win but a loss as the lottery result of the big win lottery, a small win is prepared which gives less privilege to the player than the above-mentioned big win (for example, a privilege to open the V winning device 650 only for one round). The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether the result of the lottery is a big win (whether it is a small win or not) as a stop pattern after the variation is finished, but also show a pattern corresponding to the big win classification when the lottery is a big win.

Here, the “15R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “5R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. In addition, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide any jackpot game out of ``15R short-time jackpot'' capable of giving the player the largest number of prizes, ``5R short-time jackpot'' capable of giving the next highest number of prizes, and ``5R normal jackpot'' giving the player the least number of prizes among the jackpot games, as the jackpot game provided when the jackpot of the special pattern is won. As a result, even when a big win is won in the lottery of special symbols, the player can play the game while expecting that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be provided among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given.

In the seventh control example, the size of the privilege given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the end of the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. In order to make the ball easily enter the second ball entrance 640, in the seventh control example, the variation time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a win is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. In order to set a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, other configurations may be used, only a part of the above-described setting contents may be used, and in addition to the above-described contents, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

In addition, in the seventh control example, in the first special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity can be established when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity can be established when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is configured so that time-saving winning can be won in addition to the above-described jackpot winning and small winning winning. Specifically, in a special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) executed in a state where a normal state (low probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) is set, determination of time-saving winning is executed.

Here, when the time saving state is won, the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is set before the execution of the jackpot determination in the special pattern lottery, and the processing (update processing 7) for determining whether or not the time saving state is terminated is executed at the timing when the special pattern variation for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is started. For example, in the case of the time saving state set to the time saving number 1 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1), in the updating process 7 executed at the timing when the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery for the time saving winning is started, the remaining time saving number (the value of the time saving counter 203h) is updated (subtracted), the time saving end condition is established, and it is determined that the time saving state is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state in which a value of a plurality of times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of time saving, the time saving state continues until the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the result of updating the number of times of remaining time saving executed by the update process 7.

That is, by using the setting timing of the time saving state and the end timing of the time saving state used in the seventh control example, it is possible to set the time saving state only at the special symbol lottery jackpot determination timing (excluding the special symbol fluctuation period) or to set the time saving state including the special symbol fluctuation period according to the number of time saving times to be set.

As a method of achieving the same effect, another processing timing may be set. For example, the time saving state may be set at the stop timing of the special symbol variation that has been won in the same way as the fifth control example described above, and the update processing of the time saving state (the processing of determining whether or not to end the time saving state) may be executed before the special symbol variation to be executed next starts. Even in the case of such constitution, it is possible to set the time saving state so as to include the special pattern variation period or to set the time saving state so as not to include the special symbol variation period by varying the number of times of time saving to be set. In this case, when the special pattern variation in which the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, and the next special pattern lottery is not started in the state in which the time saving state is set, the time saving end condition cannot be established, so the time saving state continues.

Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the time-saving winning only when the execution right (special figure reservation) of the special symbol lottery to be executed next is acquired before the time-saving winning special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (before the time-saving state is set), and when it is determined that the special symbol reservation is acquired, i.e., after the time-saving state is set, the next special symbol variation is immediately started and the time-saving state can be terminated. By constructing in this way, a player grasping that he/she has won a time-saving lottery can suppress the act of performing a right-handed game and executing the second special symbol lottery without executing the first special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (total number of fluctuations) for the time saving state that is granted based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. When any of the termination conditions (second termination condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, by preparing a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state, and shifting from the time saving state to the normal state when one of the plurality of end conditions is met, it is possible to set a plurality of timings for ending the time saving state, and the player can play the game while being excited about how long the time saving state more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, a plurality of small winning types (for example, small winnings A and B) are prepared as small winnings that can be won in the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), and the number of times that the second end condition is satisfied is set differently for each small winning type. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time saving state will be ended only by the number of small wins won during the time saving state, so that the player can always have a sense of tension and play the time saving game.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the time saving state (second time saving) is set based on the fact that the time saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the end condition different from the case where the time saving state (first time saving) is set based on the jackpot winning is set, and specifically, the number of time saving times "1" is set. In other words, the first working hour reduction set based on the winning of working hour saving in the special symbol lottery utilizes the working hour saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the judgment of the big win in the special symbol lottery in the working hour saving state.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (by detecting the ball by the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge channel 650e2 which is the specific area), a big win (so-called two-type winning) is achieved (see FIG. 298). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times (number of times of small win) that the second end condition set for each small win type is satisfied is set to be smaller for the small win type in which the small win game with high expectation of V winning is executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation for winning a V prize for obtaining two types of prizes when a small prize is won during a time saving game and the feeling of anxiety that the time saving state may end, and the player can be motivated to play the game more ambitiously.

In the seventh control example, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) is set as the end condition (first end condition) for the number of times of variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) as described above, but other end conditions may be set for the number of times of variation of special symbols. ), the termination condition of the time saving state may be established. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 (start winning); A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for display is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three pattern rows of top, middle and bottom are displayed (see FIG. 122). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are laterally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the seventh control example performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) by the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is displayed in accordance with the lottery result of the special pattern in the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the timing of the stop display of the first pattern in the display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in the display mode.

That is, the determination by the determination means is executed (the lottery for the special pattern is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and after the identification information (the third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until a predetermined dynamic display period elapses, the identification information (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in the display mode (combination of symbols) showing the determination result of the determination means (the lottery result of the special symbol). As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery result, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special symbol lottery result (for example, only the result of judgment such as a big hit or a loss, a short-time winning), or a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the jackpot won). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a loss, and a short time) as the lottery results of the special symbols, as the display mode of the third pattern, the lottery results of the special symbols may be any of the above-described three types of lottery results. In addition, in the case of duplicate winning in the determination that it is possible to win in duplicate (e.g., stable jackpot, short time determination), a display mode for indicating duplicate winning may be used, and when the contents of the game executed based on the double winning are the same as the contents of the game executed only based on the jackpot winning, the same display mode may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the seventh control example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

In the seventh control example, when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time saving state, the period for operating the electric accessory 640a (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the normal state. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, the configuration for making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state is not limited to the above-described content, and for example, a configuration such as increasing the probability of winning the second symbol or increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit may be used. In addition, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is changed to make the time-saving state easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal period, the probability of winning may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one winning may be made constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric role object 640a are varied, the variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time when the variable display of the second symbol is started, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the second symbol winning game, that is, the timing at which the electric role object 640a is activated) ), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessary 640a may be determined according to the game state set in ). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating winning during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a can be operated in the corresponding operation pattern during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

In addition, the relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second design, and the operation pattern of the electricity 640A may be specified other than the above contents, for example, if it is determined that the time -saving status is set as a gaming at one of the timing of the fluctuation start timing of the second pattern and the operation start timing of the electricity 640A. , As an operation pattern of an electric object 640A, it may be configured to configure an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during a time -saving state).

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turn-on of the first ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242) draws a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 294, the first ball entrance 64 has a nail planted on the game board 13 so that a ball can enter more easily in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 .

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242) draws a jackpot lottery, and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the seventh control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is awarded may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball inlet 640 may be five.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the switches (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting the balls that trigger the special symbol lottery (lottery opportunity for the big win) are provided in the ball entrance, so that the special symbol lottery opportunity and the prize ball can be obtained, but other configurations may be used. In the case of doing so, it may be configured so as to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least a part of the balls passing through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special pattern can be entered, and a ball entry hole is preferably provided for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls when the balls enter. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of the special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side in the view point of FIG. 294) and a retracted state (restricted state) retracted to the game board 13 side (restricted state). On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passing of the ball through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, when the winning is won in the lottery of the second symbol, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissible state), and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is divided into the left side (left-handed area) and the right side (right-handed area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 so that the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right-handed area and the left-handed area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery for whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a are arranged in the right-handed area, and when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed.

A nail is planted in the lower part of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball shot in the left-handed game does not enter the second ball-entered hole 640, and the ball is not entered into the second ball-entered hole 640 during the left-handed game. By constructing in this manner, a game of entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64 to vary the first special symbol is performed in the left-handed game, and a game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 is performed in order to vary the second special symbol in the right-handed game, and different game properties can be appropriately provided according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the V winning device 650 whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the left downward direction (lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 294) is arranged in the right hitting area, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). The ball reaching the right end of the electric role object 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric role object 640a changes to the retreat state before reaching the right end of the electric role object 640a, it is configured to enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric role object 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing the cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 655 by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, in a state in which no game is played (a state in which the power supply of the game machine is turned off), incident light to the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily performed. In addition, in the case of using a configuration that changes the visibility of the inside using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means that emits light for decoration as described above, and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric accessory 640a operates. For example, when it is determined that the operation of the electric accessory 640a will be performed (that is, when a prize is won in the normal symbol lottery), the light emitting means is controlled so that a character (e.g., "open") indicating that the electric accessory 640a operates is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655. The inside of 5 may be configured to be difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 295, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 295, among the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessary 640a has a length of 50 mm, is composed of a plate-like member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward the lower right direction (the lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 295). After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 295) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state in a state where the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning opening 63 provided below the electric accessory 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.

In the seventh control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a operates continuously in the game state (ordinary symbol probability state) is configured to be different, and when the electric accessory 640a operates in a state where the normal state (ordinary symbol low probability state) is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a moves to the retracted state before the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the projecting state reaches the area b (see FIG. 295). When the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a protrudes for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 295).

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is configured so that the period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 295 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the seventh control example). By constructing in this way, even when a right-handed game is played in a normal state, a normal symbol win is won, and a ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric role object 640a, the operation of the electric role object 640a is completed before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric role object 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be reliably prevented from being executed in the normal state.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric accessory 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the area b. As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the right-handed game is played during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entrance (second ball-entrance 640 or the general prize-winning opening 63) depending on the operation timing of the electric role object 640a and the arrival timing of the ball to the electric role object 640a, so that the player can continuously play the right-handed game during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning opening 63 is ten, and the number of winning balls corresponding to entering the second ball opening 640 is five. (2nd prize ball) can be given, and if the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) cannot be executed (during special pattern fluctuation), the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give a privilege (that is, 10 prize balls) that is more advantageous to the player.

As a result, the ball-entrance that the player desires to enter (the ball-entrance where many benefits can be obtained) can be varied according to the game situation (whether or not the special symbols are changed), so that the player can enjoy the right-handed game during the time-saving state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the seventh control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is set to be sufficiently longer (2 seconds) than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a operates, the ball is reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640. The operation period a may be configured to be slightly longer (for example, 0.9 seconds) than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the time saving state, the action of stopping the hitting of the ball and starting hitting the ball again after confirming the operation of the electric accessory 640a (so-called stop hitting) can be suppressed, so that the operation of the game can be improved by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 294, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 295, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. FIG. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", an open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates to change the opening state to a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a to an open state in which a ball can win a prize.

In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 295, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state. lower left) and flows out toward the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the seventh control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is set to 0.1 seconds×12 times, and the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 wins the V winning device 650 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens. Balls that have won the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow downwards toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 298(a)) while flowing down on the first restricting member 651 or the second restricting member 652. FIG. By constructing in this way, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position of the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can flow down smoothly.

In the seventh control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but other periods may be set as long as the balls flowing down the opening/closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650 during the open period of the opening/closing door 650f1. In addition, in the seventh control example, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, the period from opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 to the next opening in the small winning game (interval period between opening) is set to 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game, and 0.5 seconds at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the ball is not detected by the V switch 650e3 at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, a game guide display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed to emphasize the right-handed game to the player.

The interval period between opening is set longer than usual so that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650 even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which opening motions are executed a plurality of times, the interval period between opening of a part is set longer than the others, and when it is determined that the proper game is not played, the game guide display for prompting the proper game content can be displayed, so that the player who is playing the wrong game can play the game without anxiety.

In the seventh control example, a longer special opening interval period than others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the small winning game, at least one ball can be entered in one opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if the normal game (continuously right-handed game) is performed, the winning number (10), which is the condition for ending the small winning game, is reached during the 10th opening operation, and the small winning game is ended. .

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guide display using this timing, the execution of an unnecessarily long interval period between special openings for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is eliminated, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

As in the seventh control example, when the first inter-special opening interval period is set to the timing reached even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed (after the end of the fifth opening operation), the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first interval period between special opening has started (the period required for the ball entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed). When it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has detected a ball, a notification effect for notifying that effect is displayed during the first special opening interval period, and when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball, the game guidance display is displayed as described above. As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 296, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged so as to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 650b for screwing the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, and an LED being turned on from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 650c. a back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED board 650d with a base member 650c; an opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b; A switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 650e and a flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the rear side of the rear cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a rear side that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the rear side. It is composed of a fixing cover body 650m for fixing to the cover body 650j with screws.

297 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 297(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 297(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 297(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface inclined to the lower left so that the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 297(b). A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 297(a).

As shown in FIG. 297(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, so that the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 297(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 297(b). As shown in FIG. 297(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 298(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 298(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and is rotatably supported from the rear side of the channel cover 650g. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably arranged in the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 650g.

As shown in FIG. 298(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. A game ball passing through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is for communicating either a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3 or a flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass through the V switch 650e3. (See FIG. 298(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the seventh control example is configured such that the channel solenoid 650k is set to OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. Then, when a small prize is won, the channel solenoid 650k is set to ON in accordance with the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g, which will be described later with reference to FIG. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF, the state maintained for a long time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 298(a)) can be provided, so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the small winning game. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. By constructing in this way, even if the flow-down route of the ball is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 is opened in spite of not winning the small prize, the situation that the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 can be surely suppressed.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, at the end timing of the small winning game (the timing after the small winning ending period executed after the conditions for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number of prizes (10) or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is satisfied), if all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and the abnormality is notified to the outside. It is preferable to configure such that the game is stopped so as not to start the jackpot game or the normal game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, a game ball that has entered a specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, prize balls (10 prize balls for each winning ball in the seventh control example) can be paid out to the player as a privilege. Further, it is possible to sort whether or not the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 by using the game ball after being detected, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, according to the type of small win (small win A, B) set when winning a small win, a small win game with different periods and timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON is executed. By constructing in this manner, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game can be varied depending on the contents of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high V winning expectation will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 299, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the seventh control example is configured such that, as shown in FIG. 299(a), a ball that has reached the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows down the left upper surface 650y2 from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 294), and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

In the state shown in FIG. 299(a), when the small winning game is executed and the door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299(b). FIG. 299(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 can win the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

Also, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 (see FIG. 294) for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. 651 and the second restricting member 652, and then flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first restriction member, it is possible to prevent a ball that has won a prize from the open/close door 650f1 from directly colliding with the detection opening 650a1. In addition, since it is possible to secure a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball clogging occurs in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the variable member (opening and closing door 650f1) operated in the privilege game (small winning game) provided when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (lottery result of special symbols) is a predetermined discrimination result (small winning game) than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening and closing door 650f1) Since it is configured so that the ball flows down on the variable member (opening and closing door 650f1), the flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer. The ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in a closed state) during the trick can be surely won by the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, since the number of opening operations (12) in one small winning game is set to be larger than the number of prize winnings (10) required for ending the small winning game so that only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, a sufficient number of winning prizes can be secured even if the opening period (0.1 second) of one time is set short. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

<Regarding the production content in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
With reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, the characteristic performance contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described.

In the above-described fifth control example, when the winning decision (jackpot lottery) of whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery (special symbol lottery) executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, the time-saving lottery determination (time-saving lottery) for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed.

On the other hand, the seventh control example differs from the fifth control example in that the jackpot winning and the short-time winning can overlap in the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, a time -saving lottery is executed before a large hit lottery is executed in the first special design lottery in the normal state (low -probability status of special patterns, low -probability status of ordinary patterns), and a time -saving state (low -probability status of special patterns, high probability status of ordinary patterns) is set, and the time -saving status is set during the set time. When the lottery is executed, the jackpot lottery is completed, and the fluctuation of the first special pattern is started, the time -saving state is terminated. In other words, the period during which the time saving state is set by the time saving election is only the period during which the jackpot lottery is executed.

The ratio of the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won in the case where the normal state is set and the time-reduction state is set are different, for example, when the jackpot is won during the period when the normal state is set, the ratio of determining the 15R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is 15) is 10%, whereas when the jackpot is won during the period when the time-reduction state is set, the ratio of determining the 15R jackpot is 50%. In other words, if a jackpot is won during a period in which a time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, the possibility of determining a 15R jackpot is higher than when a jackpot is winning during a period in which a normal state is set, so that when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning are overlapped, it is advantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is made, the time-saving state continues only for a short period from the time of the time-saving win to the start of the next variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the player cannot play a game (right-handed game) in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, but in the time-saving state set based on the jackpot winning, it is possible to play the right-handed game.

Here, when the player is notified of the time-saving winning when the jackpot is not won, the player is confused whether the game state set after the stop of the variable special symbols is the normal state or the time-saving state, and there is a risk that the player who misunderstands that the time-saving state is set may erroneously play a right-handed game.

On the other hand, when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning are overlapped, even if the player is confused as to whether the normal state or the time-saving state is set after the stop of the variable special symbols due to the notice of the time-saving winning, the player can be made to recognize that the big winning game will be executed after the special symbols are stopped by being notified of the jackpot winning.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, when the short-time winning and the jackpot win are overlapped in the special symbol lottery, the short-time winning is notified or suggested, but when the short-time winning is not won, the short-time winning is not notified or suggested to the player.

By constructing in this way, when short-time winning and big winning win overlap, the player can discriminate which game state was set to make the big win winning, and when short-time winning is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state set after the stop of the changing special symbols and causing the player to play with an erroneous game method.

With reference to FIGS. 300 and 301, the display screen in the case of suggesting the time saving lottery result during the variation of the first special symbol will be described.

FIG. 300(a) is an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving lottery result suggesting effect (effect for suggesting the result of the time saving lottery) is executed during the variation of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery, "Omikuji time effect" is executed. The omikuji time effect is a effect that suggests to the player whether the time saving win or the time saving win does not occur depending on the contents of the capsule cp5 displayed in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, the closed capsule cp5 and the message ``Is this change short-time winning?'' are displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the Omikuji time performance is a performance suggesting whether or not the variable first special pattern wins short-time winning by the contents of the capsule cp5.

Here, the omikuji time performance is not performed for each change of the first special symbol, and the omikuji time performance may not be performed even when the short-time winning is won. In other words, when the Omikuji time performance is not executed, the player cannot recognize whether or not the changing first special pattern wins the time saving, and when the Omikuji time performance is executed, the player can recognize whether the changing first special symbol wins the time saving or not.

FIG. 300(b) is an example of a display screen in the case of suggesting that the time-saving winning is made during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the capsule cp5 is opened and a piece of paper k1 on which "o" is written appears. The paper k1 is a display mode for indicating that the first special symbol during fluctuation has won the time-saving winning, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the time-saving winning has been won.

In addition, it is suggested that the players are suggested that they have been elected time during the first special pattern in the normal state (low -probability status of special patterns, low -probability status of ordinary patterns), only when the time saving and the winning election are duplicated, and the result of the jackpot lottery (whether or not the jackpot is executed in the special design lottery) is missing. It is not suggested that the players have won the time saving even if they are elected time savings (that is, the fortune -time production is not executed). Therefore, when the paper k1 suggesting short-time winning is displayed in the Omikuji time performance, the player can recognize that the big win has been won before the third pattern of the display mode indicating the big win is displayed.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the ratio of the jackpot type when winning a jackpot differs. %.

Therefore, in the embodiment, when the paper k1 suggesting that the short-time winning is displayed in the omikuji time presentation, the ``super chance arrival presentation'' displaying ``super chance has arrived! If you win with this variation, you have a big chance to win the 15R jackpot!'' is executed to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the changing first special symbol will win the 15R jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery is notified after the omikuji time presentation ends. The interest in the game can be improved by making the player expect to win the 15R jackpot during the period up to.

FIG. 301(a) is an example of the display screen in the case of suggesting that the time-saving non-winning was made during the variation of the first special symbol. Unlike the case of short-time winning, an effect is executed in which a paper k2 on which "x" is written appears from the capsule cp5 in the omikuji time effect. The paper k2 is a display mode for indicating that the first special symbol during fluctuation has not won the time saving, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the time saving has not been won.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, it is only when the jackpot A (15R time saving jackpot) is won and the jackpot lottery is lost that it is suggested to the player that the time saving has not been won.

Here, in this embodiment, three jackpot types are defined as the jackpot types of the first special pattern in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns). It is a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after a trick is finished, and "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is five rounds and a normal state is set after a jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot A has more rounds of the jackpot game given to the player than the jackpots B and C, and is the most advantageous jackpot type because, unlike the jackpot C, a time-saving state more advantageous than the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, in the omikuji time presentation, when the paper k2 indicating that the short-time winning has not been won is displayed, the ``win-or-win presentation'' is executed to display ``best chance?! jackpot A? The interest in the game can be improved by making the player expect that the jackpot A has been won during the period until the result of (1) is reported.

FIG. 301(b) is an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when time saving winning and jackpot winning overlap. In the small display area Dm1, the first special pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won, and in the main display area Dm, a treasure box 810f is opened by a rabbit character 801, and a performance is executed in which a ball tm2 written with "V" appears from the treasure box 810f. The ball tm2 is a display mode for notifying the player that the first special symbol has won the big win, and the player can recognize that the big win has been won by displaying the ball tm2.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the super chance arrival performance displaying ``Super chance has arrived! If you win with this variation, you have a big chance to win a 15R jackpot!'' shown in FIG.

Incidentally, when the time-saving non-winning is won, but the jackpot B or C is won, the character 801 of the rabbit opens the treasure box 810f and the ball tm2 appears in the state where neither the super chance arrival effect nor the high chance effect is displayed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 301(b). On the other hand, when the jackpot A is won although the short-time winning is not won, and the high-stakes performance is executed during the above-mentioned omikuji time performance, the high-stakes performance is continuously displayed in the main display area Dm also in the big-hit winning notification screen of FIG.

After the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b) is displayed, an effect of notifying the determined jackpot type is executed (not shown).

In addition, when the first special symbol during fluctuation is not winning the short time and winning the jackpot, the Omikuji time performance is executed, and in the Omikuji time performance, when the Happiness or Happiness performance is displayed in the main display area Dm with the words "Best chance! Big win A? Or Lost?" In this case, the game player is notified that the jackpot has not been won by executing an effect in which a ball labeled "Unfortunate" appears from the treasure box 810f.

In the embodiment, the result of the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving winning for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern executed in the special pattern lottery) is suggested by the omikuji time production, but it is not limited to this, and the player can recognize the time-saving lottery result by displaying a specific character or background image.

Also, for example, in the super chance arrival effect shown in FIG. 300(a), the main display area Dm is configured to display "Super chance has arrived! If the jackpot pattern stops during the super chance display, a great chance to win a 15R jackpot!" If not, it may be configured to suggest to the player that the possibility of winning the 15R jackpot is low.

By configuring this way, it will be possible for the players to perform the gaming while hoping that the super chance arrives will continue to be displayed from the super chance and the winning screen of the jackpot after the superchangeable production is displayed, and the gaming can be improved, and the superchangeable production is displayed. Despite the announcement of the jackpot election in the state, it is possible to suppress the distrust of the players if the jackpot type is not 15R jackpot.

In FIG. 301(b), the configuration may be such that the type of the jackpot is notified by the display mode of the ball tm2. For example, if the color of the ball tm2 is rainbow, it may indicate the jackpot A (15R with a short time), and if it is blue, the jackpot C (5R with no time).

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the notification pattern when winning the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery will be described. Fig. 302 is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when winning a time saving lottery (judgment of time saving winning for setting a high probability state of normal symbols executed in a special symbol lottery) or a big win lottery (judgment of whether or not a big win is a big win executed in a special symbol lottery).

Fig. 302(a) is an example of a notification pattern in the case where time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap. During the ready-to-win production period, the Omikuji time production (see Fig. 300(a)) is executed, and the paper k1 (see Fig. 300(b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that the time-saving winning is displayed, and the "super chance arrival effect" (see Fig. 300(b)) are displayed to suggest to the player that the time-saving winning has occurred, and the ready-to-win production period is started. After that, a jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, so that the player is notified that the jackpot has been won. Therefore, when the short-time winning and the big win win overlap, the player can recognize that the short-time winning and the big win win overlap.

Fig. 302(b) is an example of a notification pattern in the case where a time-saving win was made but a jackpot was not won. In this case, unlike the case of Fig. 302(a), the omikuji time production (see Fig. 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach production period, so the player cannot know the result of the time-saving lottery. That is reported to the player. Therefore, when the player wins the time saving lottery but does not win the jackpot, the player cannot know the result of the time saving lottery, and can only recognize that the jackpot has not been won.

Fig. 302(c) is a notification pattern in the case of winning the jackpot even though the time saving was not won. As described above, the omikuji time production (Fig. 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach production period except for a part of the case where the jackpot A is won. Only the fact that the jackpot has been won is reported. Therefore, when the jackpot is won but the time-saving lottery is not won, the player cannot know the result of the time-saving lottery, and can only recognize that the jackpot has been won.

By constructing in this way, when short-time winning and big winning win overlap, the player can discriminate which game state was set to make the big win winning, and when short-time winning is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the game state set after the stop of the changing special symbols and causing the player to play with an erroneous game method.

In the embodiment, the production suggesting short-time winning is executed in the performance period before ready-to-win, but the present invention is not limited to this.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving winning suggestion performance does not occur in the pre-reach performance period, the time saving winning suggestion performance may be executed even on a screen informing that the jackpot winning is reported, so even if the time saving winning suggestion performance is not displayed in the ready-to-win performance period, the variable display of the first special symbol can be enjoyed while expecting the time saving winning without disappointing the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the embodiment, when the jackpot is not won even if the short-time winning is won, the short-time winning is not notified. For example, in the embodiment, the super chance arrival effect (see FIG. 300(b)) is executed only when the short-time winning and the jackpot win are overlapped. Winning of a big win is not decided even if a super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) is generated, and since the enjoyment of predicting the result of the big win lottery can be given to the player until the last moment when the result of the big win lottery is reported, the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 303, each counter of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. The counters used in the control examples described above are different in that the update ranges of the counters are partly different, but since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol reserved ball execution area at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the big winning random number set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, the special symbol jackpot is determined.

In addition, the first per random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types, a first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be small wins, it is possible to make the player's degree of expectation for giving a privilege (big win or small win) different between the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern. The first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 305 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa, Figure 305 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1, Figure 305 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2. This first winning random number 7 table 202fa is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a big win and a random value (determination value) determined as a small win are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 305(b), in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as big hit determination values, and other values are defined as determination values other than big hits (that is, out). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 305(c), in the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2, among the values of the random number counter C1, "0 to 4" is defined as the big hit determination value, "5 to 144" is defined as the small hit determination value, and "145 to 999" is defined as the other (that is, off) determination value. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the value is any one of '0 to 4', it is discriminated as a big win, and when it is any one of '5 to 144', it is discriminated as a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is configured to be incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state in which the lottery (variation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during variation of special symbols, a big winning game, and a small winning game), the ball is stored in a special symbol reserved ball execution area of a RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number discriminated as a special symbol jackpot or a small win, that is, if it is a random number discriminated as a special symbol omission, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol omission.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for the special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected by lottery, there are five random numbers that become a big hit in the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are stored in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 of the first winning random number 7 table 202fa as described above. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has a total of 1000 random numbers, and the total number of random numbers that will result in a big win is 5. Therefore, the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/200".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. In the seventh control example, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 306(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 306 (a), in the seventh control example, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 can be made different, or the ratio of selecting each of a plurality of kinds of jackpot types can be made different, so that the game using the first special pattern (special figure 1) and the game using the second special pattern (special figure 2) can be provided to the player with different game properties and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 306(b). FIG. 306(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 306(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is any one of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" when the random number is any one of "10 to 49", and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" when it is any one of "50 to 99". When the time-saving state is set as the game state, the kind of jackpot is ``jackpot D'' when the random number is any one of ``0 to 9'' in the first prize type counter C2, the jackpot type is ``jackpot A'' when the random number is any one of ``10 to 49'', and the jackpot type is ``jackpot B'' when it is any of ``50 to 99''.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Among 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first win type counter C2, 10 random numbers select ``jackpot A'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1) results in a jackpot, the ratio of selection of ``jackpot A'' is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Out of 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first win type counter C2, 40 random numbers select ``jackpot B'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1) results in a jackpot, the ratio of selection of ``jackpot B'' is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Out of 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first win type counter C2, 50 random numbers select the ``jackpot C'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1) results in a jackpot, the ratio of selecting the ``jackpot C'' is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win D" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Furthermore, the "jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to end the "jackpot A" described above. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A" in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% and the jackpot game of 5 rounds is selected at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in which the normal state is set. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

On the other hand, 15 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 50% and 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) executed in the state of setting the time saving state. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished.

That is, winning a jackpot in a time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in a normal state in terms of the contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used during the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 306(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 306(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" when the random number is any one of "0 to 99". That is, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big win D" for the player is always selected as the big win type.

In the seventh control example, there are four types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to four. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By constructing in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special pattern, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the player can expect a win with the second special pattern more. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type may be made the same, and only the range of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be made different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the small win type and the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when a special symbol win is achieved, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the ball is placed in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 64 in a state in which a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed (i.e., a state other than during special symbol fluctuation, big win game, and small win game). It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering 0.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) for determining the type of the small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff. As shown in FIG. 307, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff defines that two types of small hits A and B are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit types of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 89", the small hit type is "small hit A (jackpot A when passing V)", and when it is any of "90 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit B (jackpot B when passing V)".

Here, in each small winning type (small winning A, B), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game to be executed after the small winning game is completed is set. In the case of the small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times, wins the small win A once, or wins the small win B three times) is set. In the case of the small win B, a big win B (5R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times, wins the small win A once, or wins the small win B three times) is set.

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (15R) and a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win game.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in the seventh control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (the number of times the small winning A wins, or the number of times the small winning B wins, etc.), or the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be set. By constructing in this way, when a jackpot is won in a state in which the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is one or more, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the time saving state is not ended even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is changed after the jackpot is finished. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed and a small win (small win A, small win B) that can execute a big win game is won, the time saving end condition is satisfied before the time saving end condition is established based on the number of times of special symbol fluctuations, and the time saving state can be ended. It is possible to suppress repeated execution until it is established.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIG. 308(a). FIG. 308(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308 (a), in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the game state and the time reduction variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 used in the state where the time reduction state is set are defined. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is changed according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be varied.

FIG. 308(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308(b), in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1, the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 139" in association with a short deviation with a variation time of 7 seconds. are defined in association with each other, and super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in correspondence with the range of ``0 to 29'' with various types of normal reach with a variation time of 40 seconds, with the range of ``30 to 189'' with correspondence with super reach with a variation time of 80 seconds, and with the range of ``190 - 198'' with association with various types of special reach with a variation time of 140 seconds.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the long deviation of 180 seconds is defined in the entire range, and when the lottery result is "big win or small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the long deviation of 180 seconds is defined in the entire range.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special pattern, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and by transmitting a command indicating this variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation performance corresponding to the variation time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, in the seventh control example, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is not entered into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, that is, the game of executing the lottery for the first special symbol is performed. A case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state constituted in this way is a case in which the player illegally enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second special symbol lottery is illegally performed in a short period of time. When it is determined that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the result of the lottery is displayed may be used to inform the outside that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is fraudulently executed. Further, when the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern is fraudulently executed, the result of the lottery (fluctuation) of the fraudulently executed second special pattern may be forcibly created and displayed as the result of the lottery (fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 308 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 is 7 seconds (selection rate is about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%) when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out. In addition, when the lottery result is a jackpot, it is stipulated that selection is likely to occur in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of the variation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big win and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a loss are configured to suggest the degree of expectation for the big win when the specific variation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the seventh control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of the winning jackpot. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and different variation pattern tables may be used depending on whether the type of the jackpot indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) or other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is preferably configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected in a variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed is, the more advantageous the game result can be expected for the player, so that the player can be interested in the variation time of the special symbol.

Also, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating a probability variable jackpot may be configured so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected in a variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating a probability variable jackpot, thereby making it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time.

Next, referring to FIG. 309, the contents of the working hours reduction variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 7 table 202fd2. As shown in FIG. 309, in the time saving variation pattern 7 table 202fd2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, if the fluctuation time is short of 2 seconds in the entire range, and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is short of 2 seconds in the entire range. Hit is defined. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "loss", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the deviation of 20 seconds is defined in the entire range. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the entire range. In the range, medium and small wins with a variable time of 30 seconds are defined, and when the lottery result is a "big win", a medium and big win with a variable time of 30 seconds is defined.

Returning to FIG. 303, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the seventh control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67, and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number to be the winning of the normal pattern is set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, the winning of the normal pattern (second pattern) is determined. In addition, in the seventh control example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, two types may be provided, one for when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which normal symbols are in a normal state) and one for when the probability of winning in normal symbols is higher than that in the low probability (a period when the normal symbols are in a time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and whether the current game state is the time-saving state is discriminated, and if the game state is the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 3 seconds on the second pattern display device 83.例文帳に追加On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.

If the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of ``5 to 204'', it is determined that the game is won, and after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is finished, the pattern of ``○'' is lighted and displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time-saving state at the time when the second pattern is stop-displayed (fixed display), and when the time when the second pattern is stop-displayed (fixed display) is the time-saving state and when the second pattern starts to fluctuate is also the time-saving state, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds×2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation control (short opening control) of the electric accessory 640a is performed so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (the opening period of the second ball entrance 640, the number of times of opening) are configured to be variable according to the set game state, and when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to the normal state. When the lottery result of two symbols is a win and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as ``0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times'' as compared with the other cases, so that the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 .

In the seventh control example, the variation time of the second symbol and the operation contents of the electric role product 640a are set differently according to the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric role product 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, but other configurations may be used. A discrimination means for discriminating that the time saving state is continuously set is provided until the operation start timing of a, and the variation time of the second pattern and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are set using the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to set the time saving state at both the timing of the start of the normal symbol fluctuation and the start of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating winning at the timing when the time saving state is set, or the second pattern that starts changing at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating winning at the timing when the normal state is set. When straddling the skill state, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Fig. 314), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 7 (see Fig. 325).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the big win lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results on the second symbol display device 83, according to the values of the counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 304(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 304(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes, as part of the fixed value data, the first random number 7 table 202fa, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb, the second random number 7 table 202fc, and the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the time reduction grant 7 table 202fe, the small type selection 7 table 202ff, the open scenario 7 table 202fg, and the time reduction per random number 7 table 2. 02fh, the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi is stored at least.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, the big winning type selection 7 table 202fb, the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff have already been described in detail, so the description is omitted.

The time saving provision 7 table 202fe is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and when the jackpot game ends (S1612 in FIG. 326: Yes), different times of time saving (time saving end conditions) are set according to the jackpot type.

Here, with reference to FIG.306(d), the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 7 table 202fe is demonstrated. FIG.306(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 7 table 202fe. In the seventh control example, there are jackpot types (jackets A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set), and as shown in FIG.

The seventh control example has a first time-shortening end condition established according to the number of fluctuations of special patterns, a second time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win A is won in a special pattern lottery, and a third time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win B is won in a special pattern lottery.

As shown in FIG. 306 (d), the time saving provision 7 table 202fe defines values to be set to various counters corresponding to each of a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value set as the first time saving end condition is set to the medium counter 203h, the value to be set as the second time saving end condition is set to the small winning A counter 203fg, and the value to be set as the third time saving end condition is set to the small winning B counter 203fh.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are jackpots A and B, the time-saving end conditions are set to "100" for the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "1" for the small hit A counter 203fg, and "3" for the small hit B counter 203fh. It is stipulated to set a value of "2" to the counter 203fg and a value of "10" to the small winning B counter 203fh.

As described above, in the seventh control example, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot C of the time saving 7 table 202fe does not define the values to be set for the various counters described above. In this way, by making the end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game different for each type of jackpot won, even if the fact that the time saving state is set after the end of the big win game is notified in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific contents of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game in a state of heightening the desire to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

In the seventh control example, in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving 7 table 202fe, the time saving state is also ended when a special symbol jackpot is won, but the time saving end condition established based on this jackpot winning does not differ according to the set jackpot type, so it is omitted from the time saving 7 table 202fe. The value may be defined in the short addition 7 table 202fe.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the time saving state (second time saving) is set even when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, but the time saving end condition set for the second time saving will be described with reference to the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi described later. In the seventh control example, the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is set by referring to the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi instead of the time saving 7 table 202fe.

In addition, in the seventh control example, as a plurality of time-saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time-saving end condition to third time-saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time-saving end conditions. A time-saving end condition may be set that is established when the number of times of operation (the sum of the values of the small hit A counter 203fg and the small hit B counter 203fh) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

Furthermore, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the lottery result. may be configured.

As described above, by setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and composing so that the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of a plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions may be configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, two) is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a satisfaction number determining means for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition attainment determining means for determining whether the number of fulfillment determined by the satisfaction number determining means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), and to terminate the time saving state (set a normal state) when the condition attainment determining means determines that the number of satisfactions has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time saving end condition which is met first may be provided, and discrimination reference number variable means for varying a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference of the condition attainment discriminating means based on the discrimination result of the content discriminating means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition established first, so that the player can be motivated to play the game even after the time-saving state is set.

In addition to the contents described above, a predetermined period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times), and a result determining means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measuring means are provided. An end condition invalidation means may be provided for invalidating the time saving end condition that is met when it is determined that the time is within the predetermined period. Further, while the result discriminating means discriminates that the present time is within a predetermined period, it is possible not to perform the processing of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied and updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, when using the process of ending the time saving state based on the establishment of a plurality of time saving end conditions as described above, the plurality of time saving end conditions are a priority time saving end condition (for example, a time saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of special symbols reaches 100 times) and a non-prioritized time saving end condition (e.g., a time saving end condition that is established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times). , It is preferable to configure so as to end the time saving state when only a plurality of non-priority time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

The opening scenario 7 table 202fg is a data table that stores an opening scenario in which opening patterns (patterns for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 are scenarioized in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) executed when a big win or a small win is won by lottery of special symbols, and corresponds to the big win type set for the winning big win or the small winning type set for the won small win. Then, the contents of the release scenario are specified.

In this way, by varying the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario) according to the winning result (big win or small win) and the winning type (big winning type, small winning type), the degree of advantage of the privilege game can be set in a plurality of stages, so that even after winning the big win or the small win, the player can be entertained as to which type of win has been won.

The opening scenario 7 table 202fg includes a start interval period during a winning game (period from the start of a winning game until the first prize winning device is opened), an opening operation mode of the winning device (type of the winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), an inter-round interval period (a period during which the winning device is closed during the round game), and an end. An interval period (a period from the end of all round games to the end of a winning game (a period until the start of a new special symbol variation is permitted)) and the ON/OFF switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are defined respectively.

Concretely, corresponding to the jackpot type won A, ``2 seconds'' as the start interval period, ``15 rounds'' for the ``variable prize winning device 65'' as the opening operation mode of the prize winning device, ``29 seconds continuously'' as the opening operation mode for one round game, ``1 second'' as the inter-round interval period, and ``4 seconds'' as the end interval period are defined. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot A, the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game pays out many prize balls to the player. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, so the jackpot A is a jackpot to which a privilege most advantageous to the player is given.

Next, corresponding to the jackpots B and C of the winning types, ``2 seconds'' is defined as the start interval period, ``5 rounds'' for the ``variable prize winning device 65'' as the opening operation mode of the prize winning device, ``continuous 29 seconds'' as the opening operation mode for one round game, ``1 second'' as the inter-round interval period, and ``4 seconds'' as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot types are the jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for five rounds is executed, and about 1/3 of the prize balls of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A are put out to the player. When the jackpot type is the jackpot B, a time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished is set, and in the case of the jackpot C, since the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot giving a privilege disadvantageous to the jackpot A but more advantageous than the jackpot C.例文帳に追加

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the start interval period is "1 second", the "V prize winning device 650" is opened in the "1st round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, the "variable prize winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the 1st round is "0.1 seconds open 12 times with an interval between openings of 0.5 seconds", and the 2nd to 15th rounds are "continuously open for 29 seconds". The release operation mode is defined as an inter-round interval period of "10 seconds" after the end of the first round and "1 second" otherwise, and an end interval period of "4 seconds".

That is, the contents stipulated in the period from the start interval period of the big win D to the execution of the second round (round game contents (opening/closing operation mode) of the 1st round, and the inter-round interval period after the end of the 1st round) are configured to be the same as the contents stipulated in the small winning game to be described later. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the winning game being executed this time is the big winning game or the small winning game until the timing when the first round ends (until the timing when the small winning game ends in the case of the small winning game). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small winning and recognized that a small winning game is being executed.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the second special symbol lotteries are set so that a small win is won (see FIG. 305(c)). Therefore, the time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, the winning game is started from the same opening operation regardless of whether a big win or a small win is won, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which win (big win or minor win) he has won.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special pattern, the probability of winning a big win is set to be lower than that of winning a small win, and a time saving state is provided after the big win game corresponding to the big win D is finished. Therefore, since a player who has won a big win is not provided with a privilege that is more disadvantageous than when he wins a small win, a game with unexpectedness (a big win game corresponding to the big win D) can be made a game advantageous to the player, so that the player can be more excited.

In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result from the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b showing the special pattern lottery result, the stop display timing of the special pattern and the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are set to be different. Alternatively, the stop display timing of the special symbols and the stop display timing of the third symbols are synchronized, but in order to make the display of the third symbols more difficult for the player to identify at the stop display timing or in the period before or after that, the display mode or the display area is varied, or at the stop display timing of the special symbols, the performance symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are switched from the third symbols to the normal symbols for performance corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbols. good to do

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged apart from each other, and the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650 at the timing of the stop display of special symbols (timing to inform the player that one of the winning prizes has been won), or the first symbol display device 37a as in the seventh control example. , 37b is made smaller than the display area of the third pattern display device 81 so that the first pattern is more difficult to see than the third pattern. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of the current special pattern is a big win or a small win by the stop display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the player can expect to win the big win continuously even during the winning game.

In addition to the small winning game (1 round game), the content of the winning types defined corresponding to the small winnings A and B also defines an opening scenario of the big winning game (2 to 15 round games) which is continuously executed after the small winning game is finished by the V switch 650e3 detecting the ball during the small winning game. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game contents of the winning small winning type with the big winning game contents that can be executed after finishing the small winning game, so that a proper game can be provided.

Specifically, for the small win A, the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device is opened for "1 round", and the opening interval period is "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th opening ends (opening interval 1), 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th opening ends (opening interval 2)". are

A ``variable winning device 65'' as a big prize game that can be executed after the end of the small prize game is opened in ``2nd to 15th rounds'', and one round game ``continuous opening for 29 seconds'' is defined as an interval period between rounds, ``10 seconds'' after the 1st round is finished, otherwise ``1 second'', a start interval ``2 seconds'', and an end interval period ``8 seconds''.

In addition, the hit type is a small hit, and as a small gaming B, the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operating manner of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened, "1 round" opened, "0.1 seconds open 12 times", the opening interval period, "The fifth and tenth opening ends, except for the end of the opening interval. It is 0.5 seconds (opening interval 1), and 5 seconds (opening interval 2) after the 5th and 10th opening.

A ``variable winning device 65'' is opened in ``2nd to 5th rounds'' as a big prize game that can be executed after the end of the small prize game, and one round game ``continuously open for 29 seconds'' is defined as an interval period between rounds, ``10 seconds'' after the 1st round is finished, otherwise ``1 second'', a start interval ``2 seconds'', and an end interval period ``8 seconds''.

That is, the big winning game that can be executed after the small winning game corresponding to the small winning B is finished is set so that the number of round games is smaller than the big winning game corresponding to the small winning A described above. In addition, when the type of the small win is the small win B, a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the end of the corresponding big win game, is set, so that the small win B becomes a small win given a privilege more disadvantageous than the small win A.例文帳に追加

The time saving random number 7 table 202fh is a data table in which the value (determination value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as the time saving winning in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is defined corresponding to the game state. Here, with reference to Fig.310 (a), the content of random number 7 table 202fh per time saving is demonstrated. Drawing 310 (a) is a figure showing the contents prescribed to random number 7 table 202fh per time saving.

Specifically, regardless of the special symbol type, when the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the determination value of short-time winning within the range of ``3, 4, 140 to 287'', and the determination value of short-time winning is not provided for other game states.

Here, in the seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, determination of big hit winning and determination of time saving winning can be performed in duplicate. In addition, the determination of the small hit winning and the determination of the short time winning are configured to be executed in duplicate. Therefore, for example, when the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination performed using the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305 (a)), and it is determined as a short time winning in the time saving winning determination performed using the time saving winning random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310 (a)). Similarly, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "140 to 144", it is determined as a small hit in the small hit determination performed using the special symbol 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 (see FIG. 305 (c)), and because it is determined as a short time winning in the short time winning determination performed using the time saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310 (a)), it is possible to win a small hit and a short time. become.

As described above, in the seventh control example, after executing the determination of time-saving winning, it is configured to execute the big win (small win) determination, so when the winning is duplicated, the big win (small win) is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player as compared with the case of winning the jackpot (minor win) without winning the time-saving prize.

In this seventh control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special symbol lottery is used to determine whether the big hit (small hit) or the time-saving winning is determined, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is the winning determination value in any determination. The value of the random number counter and the value of the random number counter for short-time winning are separately obtained, and the obtained values are used to determine the big win (small win) and the short-time winning decision.

A time saving type selection 7 table 202fi is a data table referred to when setting a time saving end condition for a time saving state (second time saving) set when a time saving lottery is won in a special symbol lottery, and the time saving type is defined corresponding to the value of a time saving type selection counter CC1.

Here, with reference to Drawing 310 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 7 table 202fi are explained. Drawing 310 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 7 table 202fi. As shown in FIG. 310 (b), in the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving end condition corresponding to the defined time saving type is defined.

Specifically, the time saving type A is defined as the time saving type for the entire range (“0 to 99”) of the time saving type selection counter CC1 that has been obtained. And, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition in which "1" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is defined. In other words, a time saving end condition is set in which the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the special symbol working time saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, in the case of winning the time-saving lottery, the time-saving state is set at the time of winning the time-saving lottery, and after that, the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery is executed, and the time-saving state is set until the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is started.

In other words, when the special symbol lottery wins the time-saving lottery, the time-saving state can be set only for executing the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (executing the special lottery). Therefore, when the special pattern lottery wins the time-saving lottery, only the jackpot determination can be executed in the time-saving state without the player noticing that the time-saving win is won, so that when the big win is won, the player can be given an unexpected benefit (big-win game content, time-saving state after the big-win game ends).

As shown in FIG. 310(b), in the seventh control example, when the time saving type is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving type A is always set as the time saving type. In this case, for example, if the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "0 to 94", time saving A is defined as the time saving type, and if the value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "95 to 99", time saving Z different from time saving A may be defined as the time saving type.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the time saving state for continuously executing the second special pattern lottery instead of the time saving state for executing the special lottery in a part when the special pattern lottery is won, so that the game with more unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 304(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 304(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 304(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh control example includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time saving counter 203h, It has a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot medium flag 203k, a small jackpot type storage area 203fa, a small jackpot start flag 203fb, a small jackpot middle flag 203fc, a V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V passage flag 203ff, a jackpot A counter 203fg, a jackpot B counter 203fh, and a memory area 203z.

That is, with respect to the RAM203 (see FIG. 244 (b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, the small hit type storage area 203fa, the small hit start flag 203fb, the small hit medium flag 203fc, the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd, the V flag 203fe, the V passage flag 203ff, the small hit A counter 203fg, and the small hit B counter 203fh are added. are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small hit type storage area 203fa is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set for the won small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit is won (S10306 in FIG. 317: Yes), the obtained small hit type is temporarily stored (S10310 in FIG. 317). Then, during the small winning game, the number of openings of the V winning device 650 reaches a predetermined number (S11707 in FIG. 327: Yes), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is not set to ON (S11708 in FIG. 327: No), the stored small winning type is referred to (S11709 in FIG. 327), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small winning type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

The small winning start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203fb is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (S11703 in FIG. 327). This small winning start flag 203fb is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure or the like when power failure or the like occurs.

The small hit medium flag 203fc is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S11720 in FIG. 327). This small winning medium flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure or the like when power failure or the like occurs.

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a storage area for storing data for determining the jackpot type set when a ball winning the V prize device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when a small prize game is executed. The V passage big win type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the determined small win type when the fluctuation of the special symbol that determines the small win stops (S10402 in FIG. 320). When a ball flows down a special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing big win type storage area 203fd is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs.

In the V flag 203fe, when a ball flows down a special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the flag corresponding to the big winning type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327: Yes), the big winning type to be executed is determined from the flag set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big winning game is set (S11718 in FIG. 327). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs.

The V passage flag 203ff is a flag used for determining whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. In the seventh control example, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, and are set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 323) corresponding to the ball that first wins the special discharge channel 650e2 (S11207 in FIG. 323).

Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 323), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203ff is set to ON (S11201 in FIG. 323), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S11201 in FIG. 323: Yes), the processing of S11202 to S11208 in the V passage processing (see FIG. 323) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small win game, and to prevent V passage management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 from becoming complicated by transmitting the V passage command to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times.

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, and in the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 326), when it is determined that the ending production end timing (jackpot end timing) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (100) defined in the time saving provision 7 table 202fe is set. (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, the value of the counter is referenced in the update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10601 in FIG. 319), and when it is determined that the value of the counter is greater than 0 (S10601 in FIG. 319: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S10604 in FIG. 319: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S10605 in FIG. 319). In the seventh control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of times a small win is won), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S10505 in FIG. 321). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than a time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (reset), so that the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The small hit A counter 203fg is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. A specified value (1) is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, when it is determined that the small winning type won this time in the small winning time saving update processing 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small winning start setting processing (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special symbol variation processing 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) is a small winning A (S10502 in FIG. 321: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203fg after subtraction is 0 (S10504 in FIG. 321: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is established (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, the seventh control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time saving end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small win A counter 203m is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set (reset) to 0, so that the process of subtracting the value of the small win A counter 203m is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The small hit B counter 203fh is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit B is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, and is defined in the time saving grant 7 table 202fe when it is determined in the big win control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that the ending production end timing (jackpot end timing) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes). (3) is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, when it is determined that the small winning type won this time in the small winning time saving update process (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small winning start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) is a small winning B (S10510 in FIG. 321: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh after the subtraction is 0 (S10512 in FIG. 321: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, the seventh control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time saving end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (third time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small win B counter 203fh is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the small win B counter 203fh is set to 0 (reset), so that the process of subtracting the value of the small win B counter 203fh is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Next, referring to FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the seventh control example differs from the ROM 222 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db are deleted, and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a data table referred to when determining the performance mode of the variation performance executed corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation, and one mode is selected from a plurality of modes as a mode for suggesting (notifying) the result of the special symbol lottery (the determination result of the big win determination and the determination result of the short winning determination). This lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is referred to in special figure 1 performance mode setting processing 7 (see S14893 in FIG. 328) for setting the performance mode of the variation performance (special figure 1 variation performance) for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (see S19502 in FIG. 328).

Here, with reference to FIG. 312, the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 312, the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa defines different lottery result notification modes corresponding to the game state at the time of big win determination, the big win determination result, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f, and the selected notification mode is used to set the performance mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot determination is the normal state, that is, when the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery does not result in short-time winning, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A (15R jackpot)", "time-saving winning suggestion + jackpot winning notification" is defined for the range of the value of the acquired production counter 223f "0 to 64", and "time-saving non-winning suggestion + jackpot winning notification" is defined for the range "65 to 79". A "jackpot winning notification" is defined for the range of "80 to 99". In addition, when the jackpot determination result is ``jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)'', ``suggestion of short-time winning + jackpot winning notification'' is defined for the range of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f of ``0 to 4'', and ``jackpot winning notification'' is defined for the range of ``5 to 99''. When the jackpot determination result is ``missing'', ``jackpot non-winning notification'' is defined for the range of the value of the obtained performance counter 223f from ``0 to 98'', and ``time reduction non-winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification'' is defined for the value of ``99''.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of jackpot determination is a time-saving state, that is, when the time-saving winning decision is made in the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot determination result is ``jackpot A, D (15R jackpot)'', ``short-time winning suggestion + jackpot winning notification'' is defined for the range of ``0 to 89'' for the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, and ``jackpot winning notification'' is defined for the range of ``90 to 99''. In addition, when the jackpot determination result is ``jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)'', ``suggestion of short-time winning + jackpot winning notification'' is defined for the range of ``0 to 79'' for the value of the obtained performance counter 223f, and ``jackpot winning notification'' is defined for the range of ``80 to 99''. When the jackpot judgment result is ``off'', ``suggestion of short-time winning + notification of non-winning of jackpot'' is defined for the range of ``0 to 9'' of the obtained performance counter 223f, and ``notification of non-winning of jackpot'' is defined to the value of ``10 to 99''.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 311(b). As shown in FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a production counter 223e, a game state storage area 223f, a time saving information update area 223g, a temporary winning determination flag 223h, a temporary time saving information update area 223i, and a temporary time saving end flag 223. j, time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time saving before end change flag 223n, state effect counter 223o, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. In the winning information storage area 223a, when the winning command processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4212 in FIG. 177) is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is stored in order from the first area. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) of the main controller 110.

Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted by one (the winning information stored in the second area is shifted to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 182) each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed, the sound lamp control device 113 side can surely grasp.

In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (prefetch information of the special symbol) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, based on receiving the winning information command, when performing the effect (so-called look-ahead continuous effect) using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command, corresponding to the winning information command. Winning information can be held until the above-described look-ahead continuous effect ends.

In the seventh control example, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) are configured to be able to be retained and stored. Therefore, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area. In addition to the execution area, the winning information storage area 223a may be provided with four areas for the first special symbol (reserved information area) and four areas for the second special symbol (reserved information area).

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of variable effect pending balls (waiting times) reserved in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the number of pending balls is subtracted by performing variable display in special symbols in main controller 110, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4182 in FIG. 262). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the number of reserved balls counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or the information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1. When information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 is transmitted as the reserved ball number command, a calculation means for calculating and managing the current reserved ball number based on the information contained in the received reserved ball number command may be provided in the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4204 in FIG. 262), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S4902 and S4906 in FIG. 182). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control of the variation presentation is started so that the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4207 in FIG. 262), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4910 in FIG. 182). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type for display is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (S4911 in FIG. 182).

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, is updated each time the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. In the seventh control example, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and the values of each counter are updated without synchronism.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters having different values updated every time the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Furthermore, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main controller 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the seventh control example, the data in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 223f is also erased. However, in the seventh control example, the state command is set (S11412 in FIG. 324) in the start-up process (main control unit) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control unit 110 that is executed after the power is turned on (S11412 in FIG. 324). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after variably set is set (S10509 in FIG. 321, S10607 in FIG. 319, S11616 in FIG. 326, etc.).

The time saving information update area 223g is a data area for storing the end conditions of the time saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times an event targeted by the end condition (for example, a change in a special symbol, a small win, or a big win) is executed). A state (situation) display mode Dm3a to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223a (end condition and progress of the time saving state). This time saving information update area 223g is a time saving related command including working time setting information from the main control device 110, that is, when the main control device 110 jackpot control processing 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) determines the end timing of the ending production (S11612 in FIG. 326), and when the ending conditions for the time saving state are set (S11614 in FIG. 326) When receiving the time saving setting information command set, this time saving state is received. A termination condition is set for terminating the

Then, in the time -saving update process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), it is determined that the update information for updating the time -saving information (fluctuation information to indicate that a special pattern fluctuation has been executed or a small hit information to indicate that it has been elected in a small hit) (Fig. 60 S2604: S2604: The current time saving situation is updated by corresponding to the YES, S2615: YES of Fig. 60, and the received update information.

To explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223g in detail, the time saving information update area 223g includes each item that can be the condition for ending the time saving state (for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the number of winning times for each small winning type (small winnings A, B) (number of times the operation of the V winning device 600 was started), small winnings. It is formed so as to temporarily store information corresponding to the number of winnings (total number of winnings obtained by adding up the number of winnings of each small prize type, etc.), and for each item, time saving setting information (the number of times the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied) and update information of each item during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times actually executed) are stored.

In the seventh control example, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is used to determine the termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied than other termination conditions from among a plurality of termination conditions, or to determine the remaining number of executions until each termination condition is satisfied. Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information may be calculated, and the degree of time saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, percent).

In addition, in the seventh control example, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times it has already been executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)). However, without being limited to this, the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied may be calculated, and the information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the time saving setting information and the update information are configured to be stored (stored) separately, but without being limited to this, for example, the information stored as the time saving setting information may be directly updated. By comprising in this way, the capacity|capacitance of 223 g of time saving information update areas can be reduced.

The provisional win determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the prize information (reserved and stored prize information) before the lottery (variation) of the special pattern is executed includes the prize information for winning the big prize, and is set to ON to indicate that the prize information for winning the big prize is included in the prize information for the reserved and stored prize. This tentative win determination flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that the winning information of the winning information command received from the main controller 110 has winning information in the winning information related process executed when the winning information command acquired in the look-ahead process 5 of the main controller 110 is received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Then, when it is determined that it is referred to in the winning information related process and set to ON, various determination processes for the subsequently received winning information command are skipped. In addition, it is referred to in the performance setting processing executed in the variable display setting processing, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the processing for setting the state display command for display indicating the state display mode is skipped.

As described above, when the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information reserved and stored at the end of the big win includes the winning information for winning the big win, it is constructed so as not to determine whether the winning information included in the newly received winning information command includes the winning information for winning the big win or whether the end condition of the currently set game state is satisfied or not. In other words, when it is determined that the time saving state is terminated by winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set working time saving state is terminated based on the winning information obtained after that, so that the unnecessary processing is skipped. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the seventh control example, it is configured to execute processing for determining the content of winning information when a new winning information command is received or when a jackpot game ends. As a timing other than that, for example, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, each winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shown in the start-up process (main controller) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main controller 110. It is also possible to set up a win-win information command at the time of return and transmit all to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives the above-mentioned win-win information command at the time of return, it may be configured to execute processing for determining the content of the win-win information.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when a new winning information command is received or when a jackpot game ends, processing for determining the contents of the winning information is always executed. In this case, the predetermined prohibition conditions include, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition established when the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of performance modes and one of them is set, a addictive prohibition condition established when a special symbol lottery result other than a big hit (loss) continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), and a continuous performance executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the big win lottery result (whether determination result) included in the winning information. It is preferable to set a prohibition condition during continuous performance that is established during the continuous performance, and a frequent prohibition condition that is established during a predetermined period (for example, a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed twice) after the continuous performance is completed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set a period during which a performance (so-called look-ahead performance) corresponding to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period in which the performance cannot be executed, so that even when the look-ahead performance is not executed for the player, the player can maintain the expectation for the big win. It should be noted that the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be reduced when the prohibition condition described above is satisfied, and the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be increased instead of always determining the contents of the winning information when the prohibition condition is not satisfied. Further, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the prohibition condition described above is satisfied.

The provisional working hours information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing working hours information (temporary working hours information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In the seventh control example, by referring to the provisional working hours information stored in this provisional working hours information update area 223i, the timing at which the working hours saving state ends can be determined in advance.

As described above, when the winning information included in the received winning information command satisfies the time-saving end condition, the winning information included in the newly received winning information command thereafter does not determine whether or not the winning information for winning a big hit is included and whether or not the ending condition of the currently set game state is satisfied. In other words, when it is determined that the time saving state is terminated by winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set working time saving state is terminated based on the winning information obtained after that, so that the unnecessary processing is skipped. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times of variation of special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to a termination condition established based on the number of times of variation of special symbols, and is set to ON to indicate that the number of times of variation of special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times.

In this way, by providing a flag which is set to ON according to the state of progress until the time-saving end condition is established, and changing the presentation mode according to the setting state of the flag, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing when the time-saving end condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation suggesting the end timing of the time saving state.

In addition, in the 7th control example, although it comprises so that the progress condition until the completion|finish condition of time saving is satisfied may be discriminate|determined by two steps, you may provide more steps. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) capable of identifying the state is provided every time the variation of the special pattern is executed 10 times in a state in which the time saving state is set, and the performance mode may be varied according to the flag (counter).

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of times of variation of special patterns has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to a termination condition established based on winning a small prize by lottery of special symbols, and is for indicating that the number of times of variation of special patterns in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times by being set to ON.

The time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the change before the time saving state ends (the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the change before the end of the time saving state is executed. Specifically, it is set to ON when a period (number of fluctuations) until the establishment of the time reduction end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the plural set end conditions of the time reduction state becomes one time remaining. By executing the change display setting process (see FIG. 182) in a state where the fluctuation flag 223n before the end of time saving is set to ON, it is possible to determine that the change is the final change in the time saving state, and the performance corresponding to the final change in the time saving state can be executed.

In addition, in the seventh control example, in order to determine that the variation before the end of the time saving is completed (executed), the change flag 223n before the end of the time saving is set, but in addition to that, for example, a configuration that can hold and store the winning prize information of the second special symbol is provided. Based on the command, the winning information of the second special symbol for winning a small hit is determined in advance. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the variation before the special symbol variation in which the small prize winning that satisfies the termination condition of the time saving state is performed is performed, a configuration may be added such that the variation flag 223n before the end of the time saving is turned on. Thus, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the special symbol variation immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied.

The state performance counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting performance modes of various performances executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and although not shown, is updated by 1 each time main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. A detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above.

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (appropriateness determination result, setting status of various flags), the display mode selected based on the randomly updated value (the value of the state effect counter 223o) is further classified in detail, thereby diversifying the display mode and allowing the player to easily grasp the current game state (renewal state of the time saving state) by the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81). It can be suppressed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example performs a left-handed game and a special 1 (special figure 1) game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 during the normal state (normal state) as described above. Here, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed, first, determination of time-saving winning is performed. Then, when it is determined that the short-time winning is not determined in the determination of the short-time winning, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol lottery is executed while the game state is the normal state. When the first special symbol jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. As described above with reference to FIG. 295, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 (hardly) even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state (during a normal game). As will be described later, in the seventh control example, the lottery (game) for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol during the time-saving state. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, since there is no configuration for holding and storing the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, the winning information of the second special symbol is retained and stored during the time saving state (while the electric accessory 640a is likely to be moved to the projecting position), and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol in the normal state is not executed based on the retained and stored winning information. . As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

On the other hand, when short working hours are won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state (when it is judged that short working hours are won in the judgment of short working hours), big win judgment is executed in the short working hours. When the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination executed in this state, the time saving state is set at a rate of 100% after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the time saving win is determined in the determination of the time saving win executed in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is finished at the timing when the first special symbol variation for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery is started, and the normal state is set, so the normal state game (left-handed game) is continued.

When the time-saving state is set based on the fact that a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is set so that the time-saving state continues for a period in which the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (protruding operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, so a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small win is won (winning probability 140/1000) by the lottery of the second special pattern, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), and the big win game is started. In the seventh control example, when the big winning game is set (executed) via the small winning game, after the big winning game ends, the time saving state is always set as the gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.

In the seventh control example, a small winning game with different possibilities (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting the ball) of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game is executed according to the small winning classification (small winning A, B) set when winning the small winning by lottery of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the seventh control example, as the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state set based on the big hit winning, the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is the specified number of fluctuations (100 times). A condition for ending the number of times of operation (second time saving condition) that is established when the number of times of operation of the prize device 650 reaches a specified number of times of operation is set.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to a small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is established, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (one type is won), or the special symbol lottery is won. set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, if either the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second time saving end condition (end condition according to the small winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied before winning one or two types, the game state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example configured in this manner can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time saving state (possibility of fulfilling the second time saving end condition) and the possibility of winning two types of wins when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern executed when the time saving state is set. Therefore, the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 313, when the time-saving state is set and a big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the big win game ends. By constructing in this way, in a state in which a normal state is set as a game state, that is, a state in which a left-handed game is played, a jackpot is won when the number of reserved balls (retained memory number) of the first special pattern is the upper limit number (4), and even if the player wins the jackpot, even if the player wins the jackpot in the ``first special pattern variation (lottery) during the time-saving state'' that can be executed when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. can be suppressed from being provided to

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 314 to 327. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing 7 that is executed after the start-up processing, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in the seventh control example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds), and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal. and explain. Of the control processes executed by main controller 110 in the seventh control example, the same processing contents as those of the above-described fifth control process are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

314 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S10101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the seventh control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the time saving type selection counter CC1 (not shown) are updated (S10103). Specifically, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the time reduction type selection counter CC1 (not shown) are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (999, 99, 99, 239, 99, respectively, in the seventh control example), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CC1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process 7 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S10104). After that, the starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S10105). The details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S10107). The detailed contents of the starting winning process (S10105), the normal symbol variation process (S10106), and the through gate passing process (S10107) are the same as the starting winning process, the normal symbol changing process, and the through gate passing process in the fifth control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the through gate passing process (S10107), the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S10108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S10109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S10110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S10111), and the timer interrupt process ends. The shooting control process is a process of determining whether to shoot the ball on or off on condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, special symbol variation processing 7 (S10104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104). This special symbol variation process 7 (S10104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104), first, it is determined whether or not the present is in the midst of a special symbol jackpot (S10201). The period during the special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during the jackpot game (round game period), and the grace period from the end of the round game period to the start of the next lottery (fluctuation) of the new special symbol. (ending period) and are included.

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S10201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S10202: No), the number of the first special symbol reserved balls. The value (N1) of the counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol reserved ball that starts the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special figure) indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation 2 pending ball number command) is set (S10206). After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, time-saving lottery processing 7 (S10208), special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209), and special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S10210) are executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211) because the second special symbol reserved ball for starting the variation (lottery) is not secured at the present time.

When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), since the reserved ball of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) is not secured at the present time, this processing for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is indicated by the reserved ball number command ( Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number command) is set (S10213). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, time-saving lottery processing 7 (S10208), special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209), and special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S10210) are executed, and this processing ends.

In the process of S10202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed (S10211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this variation time has not passed (S10215: No), that is, if the current is during the special symbol variation period, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S10216), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10215: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10252), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the seventh control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Thus, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed for a moment, the player can surely recognize the contents of the stopped and displayed first pattern.

In the seventh control example, the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol is set to 0.5 seconds, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of performing a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state to indicate that the first symbol is fluctuating, a period longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when performing the blinking display may be set as the above-described determined period. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the processing of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbols being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination processing 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a special symbol jackpot (S10218). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10218: Yes), a jackpot start flag 203j and a jackpot middle flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), a time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special figure confirmation command is set (S10221), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the seventh control example, as explained in the processing of S10220, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the time saving state is finished at the timing from when the variation of the special pattern is finished (final display of the first pattern is finished) to when the jackpot game is started. The timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described seventh control example, in addition to the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol), for example, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol won by the jackpot, or the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display is started). In addition, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the timing when the jackpot game is finished.

Furthermore, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (the timing for establishing the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) may be set in advance from among the above-mentioned plurality of timings, or the time saving state may be ended at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is ended (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state is set, or whether the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-reduction end condition is established (the timing at which the time-reduction state is ended when the big win is won) for each of a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result) of the special pattern based on the end timing of the time-reduction state. In part of the timing at which the time-saving end condition set for each of a plurality of jackpot types is established, when the player identifies the timing at which the time-saving state is ended, the player can be notified that the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special pattern is a big win, that is, the time-saving end timing dedicated to the big win at which the time-saving end condition is completed only when the time-saving end condition is established by winning the big win may be provided.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. In addition, in order to exhibit such an effect more, it is preferable to set the above-described time-saving end timing dedicated to the big win in the first half of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S10218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). In the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10222: Yes), a small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) of the seventh control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol is established (prior to the establishment of the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol (processing of S10204 in FIG. 315). This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, can be varied (easily varied) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and the second special symbol, which cannot be varied (difficult to vary) when the normal state is set, is configured to be a special symbol which is more difficult to execute variation (lottery) than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, if the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are established at the same time (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) of the main controller 110), if the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol in which the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the player will feel uncomfortable. become. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol, so that it is easier for the player to win the lottery result (so that it is easier to win a small win). In this case, if the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol in which the variation (lottery) is difficult to be executed, there is a problem that the player feels more uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the processing for starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventh control example), which has a high added value for the player (the probability of winning the small win is higher than the first special symbol, and the actual lottery (variation) is difficult to be executed) is preferentially determined (first), so the occurrence of the above problem can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 316, processing contents of time saving lottery processing 7 (S10208) are explained. Figure 316 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 7 (S10208). As shown in FIG. 316, the time saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is different from the time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in the fifth control example described above in that the conditions for executing the time saving lottery and the data tables that are referred to when determining the lottery result of the time saving lottery (whether or not the time saving lottery is won) are different. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S18103), and if it is determined that it is not the normal state (the time-saving state) (S18103: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in a normal state (S18103: Yes), the lottery result (judgment result of time reduction election) is acquired based on the time reduction per random number 7 table 202fh (S18104), It is determined whether the time reduction is elected (S18105), and if it is determined that the time reduction is elected (S18105: Yes), the time reduction counter 20 based on the contents specified in the time reduction type selection 7 table 202fi The value of 3h is set to 1 (S18106), and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined that the time reduction has not been elected in the process of S18105 (S18105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the seventh control example, regardless of the special symbol type, the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the normal state is the execution condition for time-saving winning determination. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is configured to be able to set two types of game states, a normal state and a time saving state. That is, in the seventh control example, in all of the special symbol lottery executed in a state in which the time saving state is not set, it is configured so that the determination of the time saving election is executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while always having the possibility of setting the time saving state.

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the special symbol lottery wins the time-saving win, the time-saving state set based on the time-saving win is set only during the period in which the big win determination is executed in the special symbol lottery.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209). The special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is a process executed after the time saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) is executed in the above-described special symbol variation process 7 (see S10104 in FIG. 315).

As shown in FIG. 317, this special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) differs from the special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) in the above-described fifth control example in that a process to be executed when a small hit is determined is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 317, for convenience of explanation, the same processing contents as the above-described special symbol determination processing 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) are given different reference numerals, but the processing contents with the same description contents are the same.

When the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S10301), the lottery result (big win (small win) determination result) is acquired based on the first winning random number 7 table 202fh (S10302), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big win (S10303). When it is determined to be a big win (S10303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a big win (S10304), based on the value of the acquired win type counter (first win type counter C2), the big win pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S10305), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not won in the process of S10303 (S10303: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is won (S10306), and if it is determined that the small hit is won (S10306: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the small hit (S10307), and is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2). A small hit symbol of the special symbol to be played is set (S10308), and the process is terminated.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the processing of S10305 and the processing of S10308, different winning patterns are set depending on whether the special symbol lottery wins the time saving or not winning the time saving. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be able to set a display mode combining the presence or absence of time-reduction winning and the presence or absence of win winning (big win winning, small win winning) as a display mode of special symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210). As shown in FIG. 318, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is configured to execute the update process 7 (S8253) before setting the start of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be ended before the special symbol variation is started.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the update process 7 (S8253) is executed after the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is selected until the special symbol variation is actually started. Therefore, since the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be selected corresponding to the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the current game state by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed even when the game state is switched by the execution of the update processing 7 (S8253).

Further, even if the special symbol variation is executed after the time saving state ends, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation can be determined using the data table referred to during the time saving state. Dedicated effects can be executed smoothly only by defining corresponding patterns.

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure the update process 7 (S8253) to be executed before the process of S8252 in FIG. 318 is executed. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be ended before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so that, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the judgment whether or not the special symbol lottery big win determination is executed during the time saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not a special symbol big win is set (S8201). In the processing of S8201, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 306(a)) (S8251), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small win, that is, whether or not a special symbol small win is set (S8209). When it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is set in the processing of S8209 (S8209: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) (S8254), and the process moves to S8203.

Also, in the process of S8209, when it is determined that the special symbol small hit is not set, that is, the special symbol deviation is set (S8209), the process of S8254 is skipped and the process of S8203 is performed.

In the processing of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203). Next, the current game state (normal state, time saving state) is specified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the specified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd read in the process of S8252 (see FIG. 308 (a)) to select a variation pattern based on the data table (S8205), based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Next, a special figure stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), and update processing 7 is executed (S8253). A detailed description of update processing 7 (S8253) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S8208), and ends this process. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the processing contents of update processing 7 (S8253) executed in special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S10210 in FIG. 318) will be described. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the details of update processing 7 (S8253). In this update process 7 (S8253), similarly to the update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above, a process for updating the information regarding the end condition for ending the game state (time saving state), a process for determining whether the updated information satisfies the end condition, and a process for ending the game state (time saving state) when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied are executed.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the seventh control example, since the normal state and the time saving state can be set as the game state, in the update process 7 (S8253), the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is updated, and the processing based on the updated information is performed. That is, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the process of ending the time saving state based on the determination result (the process of clearing the values of various counters referred to when executing the determination of whether the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed.

This update process 7 (S8253) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), updates the number of times of time reduction, and sets the game state to the normal state.

When the update process 7 (S8253) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S10601). In the process of S10601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S10601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S10603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) described later.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and the small hit A counter 203fg and the small hit B counter 203fh are set to 0 (S10606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315).

As described above, in the seventh control example, whether or not the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is established is determined by the update processing 7 (see FIG. 319), and whether or not the time saving end condition (winning frequency end condition) established based on the number of times the special symbol is won is determined by the time saving update processing 7 for the small winning (see FIG. 321). Then, in any process, when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) for indicating the state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.

In the seventh control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, a value indicating each time saving end condition is set to various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set. When the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition is determined, the value of the various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. , the value of the counter is incremented by 1 when the corresponding time saving information is determined, and the time saving state is terminated when it is determined that the value of the counter after the addition is a value indicating the time saving end condition. In other words, it is only necessary to provide a means for determining whether or not a time saving end condition is established, and an update means for updating time saving information corresponding to various time saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small wins, etc.) in the state where the time saving end condition is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, small hit start setting processing 7 (S10223) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing the small hit start setting process 7 (S10223). This small hit start setting process 7 (S10223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and based on the small hit type (small hits A, B), a process for setting the start of the small hit game and updating the time saving information according to the won small win (update process for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the small winning game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), so that the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which balls can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained) and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing the big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, different small winning games are executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A, B) set when winning the small winning, and the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning playing is different according to each small winning type.

By constructing in this way, the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (2 types of winning) by the small winning game to be executed can be varied, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the small winning is won but also in the type of the winning small winning, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the small hit start setting process 7 (S10223) is executed, first, an open scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10401). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd (S10402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202ff, the V passing big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (15 rounds with short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is determined to be a big hit B (5 rounds with short time) (See FIG. 307). In other words, in the seventh control example, the content of the jackpot game (two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game and the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot (one type) is won by lottery of the special symbols are the same. It is configured to be set according to the type.

In this way, when two types of wins are won, the jackpot types are set, and the process of starting the jackpot game based on the set jackpot types is executed, so that the processing related to the jackpot games can be shared between the case of winning one type and the case of obtaining two types of wins, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the seventh control example, the jackpot game that can be executed may be set only when one type is won or only when two types are won, or different jackpot game processing may be executed for one type and two types.

Returning to FIG. 320, the description continues. When the processing of S10402 is completed, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S10403), and the small hit start flag 203fb and the small hit middle flag 203fc are set to ON (S10404). After that, small winning time saving update processing 7 is executed (S10405), and this processing ends. This small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405) is a process for updating the time saving information corresponding to the winning times end condition which is the ending condition of the time saving state that can be established when winning a small win, and a process for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the winning times end condition is satisfied by updating the time saving information, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 321, the small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405). This small hit time saving update process 7 (S10405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process 7 (see FIG. 320) of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314). It is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small win and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small winning working hours update process 7 (S10405), first, it is determined whether the value of the working hours counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time saving state. In the processing of S10501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10501: No), since it is a state in which a small prize is won in a game state other than the time saving state, all this processing is skipped in order to update the time saving information, and this processing ends. In addition, in the seventh control example, since it is configured so as not to win a small win except in the state where the time saving state is set (so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is not executed), when it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the processing of S10501, it may be configured to set an error command for executing error notification (abnormal notification).

On the other hand, in the processing of S10501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, the time saving state is set (S10501: Yes), next, it is determined whether the small win type of the small win won this time is "small win A" (S10502). Here, in the process of S10502, the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa in the process of S10310 of the special symbol determination process 7 (see FIG. 317) is read out and the determination is performed.

In the processing of S10502, if it is determined that the small hit type is "small hit A" (S10502: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit A counter 203fg (S10503), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit A counter 203fg after subtraction is 0 (S10504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S10504: Yes), the time saving is achieved by winning the small hit this time. Since the end condition (the condition for ending the number of wins corresponding to the small win A) is satisfied, the value of the short-time counter 203h, which measures the period until the condition for ending the number of times of variation is satisfied, is set to 0 (S10505), the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh, which measure the conditions for the end of the number of wins, are set to 0 (S10506), and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507).

By executing the above-described processing of S10505 to S10507, when one of the time saving end conditions set in a plurality is satisfied, the value of the counter for measuring the period until the other time saving end condition is satisfied can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied. 03fg, small winning B counter 203fh, processing for updating the value of the time saving counter 203h) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the seventh control example, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions are set to 0 (value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended the previous time saving state, but for example, a storage means that can store the satisfied time saving end condition. may be provided, and the types of time saving termination conditions that have been met in the past and the number of times that they have been met may be determined.

By constructing in this way, for example, the easy-to-establish time-saving end condition is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishment times, and based on the determined contents, the easy-to-establish time-saving end condition can be suggested (notified) to the player. Furthermore, when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied, the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end condition (for example, the value of the small winning A counter 203fg and the small winning B counter 203fh at the time when the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0) can be stored. can be configured to

When the processing of S10507 is completed, next, a remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each small hit counter that has been subtracted is set (S10508), a state command indicating the current game state is set (S10509), and this processing ends. Here, the commands set in S10508 and S10509 are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) described later. The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving command, and sets the state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (period until the time saving state ends). Also, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10504, if it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203fg is not 0 (S10504: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small win winning this time, so the processing of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time saving state is skipped and the process of S10508 is performed.

Returning to the processing of S10502 described above, the description continues. In the processing of S10502, if it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit A" ("small hit B") (S10502: No), then it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is "small hit B" (S10510), and if it is determined to be "small hit B" (S10510: Yes), the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is subtracted by 1. (S10511), after that, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the small hit B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512).

In the process of S10512, if it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512: Yes), the time saving end condition (winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small win B) is established in this small win winning.

On the other hand, in the process of S10512, when it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is not 0 (1 or more) (S10512: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small win winning this time.

In the process of S10510, when the small win type of the small win won this time is not "small win B" (S10510: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small win winning this time, so the processing of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time saving state is skipped and the process of S10508 is shifted to.

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol won as a small win has passed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small win win is subtracted, and it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the small win win is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to terminate the time saving state according to the winning times termination condition before the small winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state even when any of the time saving end conditions of the fluctuation frequency end condition and the winning number end condition are established.

Specifically, in the seventh control example, when the fluctuation number end condition, that is, the time reduction end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is satisfied, the time reduction state is ended at the timing when the finalized display of the special pattern (first pattern) is completed. If the winning number end condition, that is, the time reduction end condition that is established based on the number of times a small win is won in the lottery of the special pattern is satisfied, the start of the small winning game is set after the final display of the special pattern (first pattern). It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing.

In other words, even if any of the time saving termination conditions are established, the time saving state is terminated immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time saving end condition has been established and the time saving state set this time has ended. In order for the player to determine whether the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a. For example, by setting the time saving state to end when the small winning start is set (immediately before the small winning game is started) as in the seventh control example, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state has ended immediately after the small winning game is started.

In addition, in the seventh control example, even if any of the end conditions of the number of times of fluctuation end condition and the end condition of the number of winning times is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the time saving state is ended at substantially the same timing (concept including a time difference that is difficult for the player to distinguish). It may be configured such that the time saving state is ended after the end of the small winning game executed after the pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the time-saving state during the period in which the small winning game is being executed.

Therefore, during the small prize game, the player cannot discriminate whether or not the time saving state has ended due to the winning of the small prize this time, and until the small prize game ends (until the game result as to whether or not two kinds of prizes have been obtained is notified), it is difficult to understand whether the time saving state has ended or not. Further, as in the seventh control example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of obtaining two kinds of wins during the small winning game, by notifying the player whether or not the time saving state has ended after the small winning game is finished, the current small winning game is based on the small winning winning that ends the time saving state. Since the game is played while predicting that, it is possible to always aim for two kinds of wins willingly in the small win game executed during the time saving state.

Next, the V entrance passage processing (S10108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V entrance passage processing (S10108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S11101). In the process of S11101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not turned on (S11101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11101, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is ON (S11101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is open (S11102).

In the process of S11102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is open (S11102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S11103), and this process is terminated. The V entrance passing command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 313).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S11102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S11104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned on (S11105), and the process ends.

Next, the V passage processing (S10109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing V passage processing (S10109). This V passing process (S10109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ff is ON (S11201). In the process of S11201, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203ff is ON (S11201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11201 that the V passage flag 203ff is not ON (S11201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S11202). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S11202, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S11202: No), the process ends.

In the processing of S11202, if it is determined that there is V passage (S11202: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S11203). If it is determined that it is during the V passage valid period (S11203: Yes), the V passage jackpot type value stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S11204), and the V flag 203fe indicating the acquired V passage jackpot type is set to ON (S11205). Then, the V passing command is set (S11206).

Next, the V passage flag 203ff is set to ON (S11207). After that, the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S11208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11203, if it is determined that it is not during the V passage valid period (S11203: No), an error command is set (S11209), and this process ends. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when it is not during the V passing valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S11209, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

Next, referring to FIG. 324, startup processing (main controller) 7 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing this start-up process (main controller) 7. FIG. This start-up process (main controller) 7 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial settings are executed upon power-on (S11401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in the seventh control example) is executed (S11402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S11403).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S11404), and if it is turned on (S11404: Yes), the process proceeds to S11415. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405).

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S11406), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S11407: No), i.e., if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S11515 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S11415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S11415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S11416, S11417).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. Similarly, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S11416, S11417) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S11416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S11417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S11410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), the power failure information is stored (S11405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S11407: Yes), the power failure information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S11408). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S11409), and the process proceeds to S11410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S11410, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is read (S11411), and the state command based on the read value is set (S11412). Then, the channel solenoid 209a is turned off (S11413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S11414), and the process proceeds to main processing 7, which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 325, main processing 7 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after startup processing (main controller) 7 described above will be described. FIG. 325 is a flow chart showing this main process 7. FIG. In this main process 7, main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S11501 to S11508 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S11511 and S11512 is executed in the remaining time.

In main processing 7 (see FIG. 325), first, during execution of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314), external output processing for transmitting output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S11501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the special figure 1 pending ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 315) and the start winning process (see FIG. 161). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S11501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command (S11602), round number command (S11607), and ending command set in jackpot control processing 7 (FIG. 326, S11504) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S11611). In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the seventh control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502), the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11503), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) To open or close. (S11504). In the jackpot control process 7 (S11504), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has passed, or the corresponding winning opening (second 1 It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in the seventh control example, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, in the case of a small winning state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning and small winning control processing 7 for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S11505). In the small winning control process 7 (S11505), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or the corresponding winning opening (first variable It is determined whether or not a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In addition, in the seventh control example, the small hit control process 7 (S11505) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S11506). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S821 or S823 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S11507). In the first symbol display update process (S11507), when the variation pattern is set by the process of S8206 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In the seventh control example, among the LEDs of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished and the green LED is lit, if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished and the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting color of the LED is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process (S11507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S8206 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) has ended, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 294) is terminated, and the process of S10305 or S10308 of the special symbol determination process 7 (see FIG. 317) is set. In the display mode, a stop pattern (first pattern) is stopped (lighted up) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S11508). In the second symbol display update process (S11508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 or the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S11508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163). The pattern display device 83 is stopped (lighted up).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11509), and if power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S11509: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process 7 has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the seventh control example) has elapsed since the start of the main process 7 this time (S11510).

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main process 7 this time (S11510: No), the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 (S11511, S11512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and each counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in the seventh control example). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S11502 (S11512).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S11501 to S11508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time (S11511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. I can.

In the process of S11509, if the RAM 203 stores the information on the occurrence of power failure (S11509: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and as a result of the power failure signal SG1 being output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S11513), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S11514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S11515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11516), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The process of S11509 is executed at the timing of the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S11501 to S11508, or the end of one cycle of the processes of S11511 and S11512 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when recovering from the power failure state, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501 after the start-up processing (main controller) 7 is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S11501 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process (main controller) 7. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the process of S11501 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S11401). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 326 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S11504). This jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state with special symbols, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (FIG. 326, S11504), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S11601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203j. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S10215 of the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 315) (S10216). In the processing of S11601, if it is determined that it is time to start the big win (if it is determined that the big win start flag 203j is ON) (S11601: Yes), the opening command is set (S11602), then the big win start flag 203j is set to OFF (S11603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF) (S11601: No), next, it is determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S11604). During the special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the predetermined time after the special symbol jackpot game ends, and the period during which the above-mentioned jackpot flag 203k is set to ON corresponds. In the processing of S11604, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is off) (S11604: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S11604, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S11604: Yes), determination processing (S11605 to S11612) for determining whether it is time to execute various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot is executed.

In the process of S11604, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S11604: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of a new round (S11605). In the process of S11605, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. If the process of S11605 is determined to be a new round start timing (S11605: YES), based on the open scenario table 202FG, the corresponding prize is 65A or the V prize equipment 650 V prize in 650A. (S11606) and set the number of round number commands indicating the newly launched round (S11607). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol variations (the number of lotteries) during execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during a period in which the time-saving state is repeatedly set between the jackpot games), the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot games to be continuously executed. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 includes a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chance period) for determining that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command or the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation means for adding the round game number (round number) of the new jackpot game to the round game number (round number) in the previously executed jackpot game when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, and the round. A round accumulation number display control means for transmitting a display round number command corresponding to the round accumulation number accumulated by the number accumulation means to the display control device 114 and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11605, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S11605: No), next, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is met (S11608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) win the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S11608, if it is determined that the condition for closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is met (S11608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is closed (S11609), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not met (S11608: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the start of the ending effect (S11610). The start timing of the ending performance is discriminated as the start timing of the ending performance when 15 rounds (the final round game preset in the current jackpot game) are completed, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in the seventh control example), which is the ball throwing time, elapses.

In the process of S11610, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S11610: Yes), the ending command is set (S11611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S11610, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S11610: No), in the process of S11612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S11612). In the processing of S11612, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has not come (S11612: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S11612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S11612: Yes), then it is determined which of the jackpot types A to D is the jackpot type being executed (S11613). In the processing of this S11613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, corresponding time saving end conditions are set using the time saving 7 table 202fe (S11614). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R with short working hours) or jackpot B (5R with short working hours), 100 is set in the short-time counter 203h, 1 is set in the small-hit A counter 203fg, and 3 is set in the small-hit B counter 203fh. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), 100 is set to the short-time counter 203h, 2 to the small-hit A counter 203fg, and 10 to the small-hit B counter 203fh.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot), it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the value (time-saving end condition) is not set for each of the time-saving counter 203h, the small win A counter 203fg, and the small win B counter 203fh. When the processing of S11614 described above is completed, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the processing of S11614 is set (S11615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time saving setting information command, it sets the time saving information indicating the time saving end condition of the current time saving state in the time saving information update area 223g and the temporary working time saving information update area 223i. Based on the time saving information set here and the update information of the time saving state updated based on the variation (lottery) of the special pattern, the remaining number of times of the time saving state (remaining condition) is discriminated, and various performance modes are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times.

When the processing of S11615 is finished, next, a state command corresponding to the game state set after the big win is set (S11616), the end of the big win is set (S11617), the mid-big win flag 203k is set to off (S11618), and this processing is finished.

As described above, in the seventh control example, it is configured to be able to set different termination conditions for the time saving state according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be satisfied is set as a time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) when a big win is won by a lottery of a second special pattern than when a big win is won by a lottery of a first special pattern.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when winning one type instead of two types during the right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In the seventh control example, the same time-saving end condition is set for the big win types (big wins A and B) set when a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbol. Also, some of the plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set so that the big win A is more likely to be established, and the other conditions are more likely to be established for the big win B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306(d), in the seventh control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition (based on the value of the time saving counter 203h) and the winning number ending condition (ending condition based on the value of each small winning counter) relating to the number of times a small win was won as a result of the special symbol lottery are configured to be set.

In addition, it is configured to set end conditions corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of winning a small win as the end conditions for the number of times of winning. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand which small winning game corresponding to which small winning type will be executed and how soon the time saving state will end before the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (100 times).

In the seventh control example, only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set as the fluctuation frequency end condition, but different fluctuation frequency end conditions may be set according to the jackpot type. Further, as the fluctuation number end condition, a first special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is provided, and the first special symbol fluctuation end condition is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, it is configured to set the end condition based on the measurement results of the counters (small win A counter 203fg, small win B counter 203fh) corresponding to each small win type as the winning number end condition, but without being limited to this, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times the small win is won, or a small win game in which a predetermined number (two) of a plurality of (3 or more) small win types It is also possible to provide means for summing and measuring the number of times that is executed, and to set the termination condition based on the measurement result of the means.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the time saving termination condition is set for all the small winning types that can be set when the small winning is won, but without being limited to this, the small winning type Z may be set as a small winning type in which the time saving ending condition cannot be established no matter how many times it is set when the small winning is won. As a result, even if the player grasps that the small win has been won during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is coming to an end due to the small win this time.

In addition, when the above-described small winning type Z is provided, it is preferable to perform a small winning game having the same contents as the small winning game in which the winning number end condition is set. By constructing in this way, even if the game contents of the small win game executed during the time saving state are identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the small win game this time.

In this way, by determining whether a small win has been won or by determining the game contents of a small win game executed based on the winning of a small win, that is, by discriminating the game contents of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end), so that the player can have a strong interest in the performance suggesting (informing) the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end). In the seventh control example, the contents of the effect control performed by the third symbol display device 81 will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 327, small hit control processing 7 (S11505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 327 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process 7 (S11505). This small winning control processing 7 (S11505) is executed in the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, it is a processing for executing various effects according to the small winning and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process 7 (FIG. 327, S11505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S11701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON by the processing of S10404 of the small hit start setting process 7 (see FIG. 320), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S11701, when the special symbol small winning is started (S11701: Yes), an opening command is set (S11702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S11703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11701, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S11701: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S11704). The small winning of the special pattern includes the time when the small winning of the special pattern (including the small winning game of the special pattern) is being displayed in the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the predetermined time after the small winning game of the special pattern is finished. Determination of S11704 is determined by analyzing whether the flag 303fc is set to ON during the small hit. In the processing of S11704, if it is determined that the special symbols are not in the middle of a small hit (S11704: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S11704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of a small hit (S11704: Yes), the process of S11705 is executed. In the processing of S11705, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S11705). In the process of S11705, if it is determined that it is time to open the V winning opening (S11705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11706), and it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707).

In the process of S11707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing in the processing of S11707 (S11707: Yes), then in the processing of S11708, it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11708). Read (S11709), then set an instruction command corresponding to the read small hit type (S11710).

As an instruction command set in the processing of S11710, for example, an instruction command for changing the display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on a small hit (for example, a small hit A) in which a ball easily passes through a specific area during a small hit game as a small hit type and a small hit (for example, a small hit B) in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area during a small hit game is set.

Returning to FIG. 327, the description continues. In the processing of S11705, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the V winning opening 650a is met, that is, whether it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11711). When it is determined that it is time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711: Yes), the V winning opening 650a is closed (S11712), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11711, if it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11711: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S11713). In the process of S11713, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S11713: Yes), the ending command is set (S11714), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S11713, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S11713: No), in the process of S11715, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S11715). In the process of S11715, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S11715: No), this process ends.

In the processing of S11715, if it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S11715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11716), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S11716: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S11717), and the jackpot start flag 203 is set. j, set the big hit flag 203k to ON (S11718), set the V flag 203fe to OFF (S11719), set the V passage flag 203ff to OFF (S11720), set the small hit flag 203fc to OFF (S11721), and finish this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. Figure 328 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing 7 (S14983). In this special figure 1 performance mode setting processing 7 (S14983), in order to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state, the processing using the performance mode determined by referring to the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is executed (see S19502).

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 7 (S14983) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (S19501). When it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S19501: Yes), the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 312) is referred to determine the notification mode (S19502). Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined in the process of S19502 is set (S19503), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S19501, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S19501: No), the processing of S19502 is skipped, the processing of S19503 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to determine both the determination of winning a big hit and the determination of a short time winning, and when both the big win and the time saving are won, it has a different technical idea from the other control examples in that it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player, but the technical idea peculiar to the seventh control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in other control examples. In addition, even when a game state other than the normal state is set, it may be configured to be able to execute determination of time-saving winning.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when the processing relating to the special symbol lottery is executed, the process of judging the winning of the short working hours can be executed before the process of judging the winning of the big win, and when the short winning of the working hours is won, the short working hours state is set before the judgment of the big winning is executed, and the short working time state is ended after the judgment of the big winning is executed and before the start of the special symbol variation for showing the judgment result. In other words, it is possible to set the time saving state only for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed.

By constructing in this manner, the time saving state can be used for a purpose different from the case of setting the time saving state for the purpose of facilitating the execution of the special pattern lottery like the conventional pachinko machine 10, so that the players can be provided with various games.

In addition, as a configuration for setting the time saving state only for the purpose of changing the game state when the judgment of the big win in the special symbol lottery is performed, a configuration other than the configuration described in the seventh control example may be used.

In this case, when the right to execute the special symbol lottery (special symbol reservation) is acquired, the time period during which the time saving state is set is an instant, so the time saving state can be set for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of the big win in the special symbol lottery is executed, as in the seventh control example. On the other hand, when the special symbol reservation is not acquired, the time saving state continues until the next special symbol lottery is executed, so that it is possible to set a period for easily executing the special symbol lottery. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery can be easily executed only for the player who cannot smoothly execute the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the seventh control example, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning in one special symbol lottery, and in the case of double winning, it is possible to give a privilege more advantageous to the player than in the case of not winning double.

In addition, as the determination that can be repeatedly elected, not only the determination of jackpot winning, the determination of time-saving winning, but also the determination of time-saving end condition establishment, and the determination of falling lottery winning may be used. In other words, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of determinations to be executable based on the establishment of a specific execution opportunity, and to provide a privilege different from the case of a combination different from the predetermined combination when the combination of the plurality of types of determination results is a predetermined combination.

<Modified Example of Game Board Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, a modified example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example to the seventh control example described above, the game board 13 has a game board 13 capable of executing a left-handed game for entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and executing a right-handed game for entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 where it becomes easier to enter when the time-saving state is set. That is, the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of switching between the game for executing the first special symbol lottery and the game for executing the second special symbol lottery according to the game state has been described.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 329, in the normal state, by executing a left-handed game, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 to enable execution of the first special symbol lottery, and by executing a right-handed game, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 1641 to execute the second special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the player can select a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) in a state where the same game state is set (by operating the operation handle 21 to adjust the firing intensity), so that a special pattern lottery of an arbitrary special pattern type can be executed, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

Next, novel game features using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 329 will be described.

<Playability 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 having game characteristics used in the above-described seventh control example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured so as to win the big win at the same selection ratio, in addition, in the first special symbol lottery, determination of short-time winning in addition to big win winning is executable, and in the second special symbol lottery, determination of small win winning as well as big win winning is executable. Then, when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning, the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 1640, the right hitting game is executed, and the game aimed at the big winning game by the small winning winning can be executed.

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, the left-handed game aims to set the time-saving state via the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, or the game (first game) aiming to set the time-saving state via the time-saving winning of the first special symbol, and the right-handed game aims to set the time-saving state via the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, or aim to set the time-saving state via the small winning of the second special symbol. A game (second game) can be selected by the player.

In this case, for example, the time saving state (second time saving) set when the time saving is won makes it easy to establish the time saving end condition, and at a rate of about 50% when the second time saving is set, a big winning game is executed via the small winning during the second time saving, and the probability of the time saving winning in the first special pattern lottery is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning in the second special pattern lottery.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to select whether to execute the first game or the second game in accordance with the taste of the player in order to execute the game process in which the big winning game is executed via the winning of the small winning of the second special pattern lottery. In this case, it is preferable to define the entry ratio of game balls into each ball entrance, the time-saving winning probability, the small winning probability, and the execution probability of the big winning game at the time of winning the small winning so that the ratio of the number of won prize balls in the case of shooting the prescribed number of game balls becomes equal between the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the normal state. As a result, a fair game can be provided to the player regardless of which game is executed.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to make the first game and the second game different in the period required for the ratio of the number of won prize balls to become equal when the prescribed number of game balls are shot, or to make the deviation of the number of won prize balls different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that matches the taste of the player.

<Other playability: Depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more disadvantageous than the normal state and a time saving state that is advantageous>
As in the above-described fifth control example, a time-saving state (first time-saving) set via a jackpot winning in a special symbol lottery executed in a normal state and a time-saving state (second time-saving) set via a time-saving winning are configured to be settable, and a second time-saving A advantageous to a player and a second time-saving B disadvantageous to a player can be set as a time-saving type set when the second time-saving is won.

When the second time-saving A is set, a time-saving state in which the electric accessory 640 performs an opening operation is set so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more easily than in the normal state, as in the fifth control example described above. On the other hand, when the second time saving B is set, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640 is controlled by the opening operation in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only at the same ball entry rate as in the normal state.

And when the second time saving B is set, that is, in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving winning determination is not executed. By constructing in this way, when the normal state is set, the game is executed in the special symbol lottery for the determination of the winning of the jackpot and the determination of the short-time winning in the special pattern lottery, and when the second time-saving B is set, the game is performed in which only the determination of the winning of the big prize is executed in the special pattern lottery. That is, since the time saving winning determination is not executed for the normal state, a game disadvantageous to the player is executed in the second time saving B. - 特許庁

Then, different times of special symbol lottery times (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times) can be set as time saving end conditions for the second time saving B.

Further, as the selection ratio of the lottery result in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the probability of winning the jackpot is assumed to be 1/200, and the probability of winning the short time is assumed to be 199/200. Then, when the time saving is won, the ratio of selecting the second time saving A is set to 10%, and the ratio of selecting the second time saving B is set to 90%. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, if the lottery result is other than the jackpot lottery, it is constructed so that the time-saving lottery is always won.

By constructing in this way, the timing of executing the special pattern lottery in the normal state becomes only the special pattern lottery when the time saving end condition of the second time reduction B is established after the end of the jackpot winning, and the normal state is set, that is, only the special pattern lottery executed in the specific cycle. As a result, a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player (a special symbol lottery in a normal state) can be periodically executed (every time the end condition of the second time saving B is satisfied).

In addition, by making it possible to set a different number of times of special symbol lottery as the time saving end condition of the second time saving B, the period in which the special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is executed can be varied, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

In this case, as in the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 329, when using the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery are different in the probability of winning the time saving, the selection ratio of the time saving type set at the time of the time saving winning is different, or the content of the time saving end condition when the second time saving B is set. It is good to configure so that

By constructing in this way, the probability of setting the second time saving A advantageous to the player can be varied according to the type of special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery in the normal state) which is periodically executed and which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as the time-saving end condition of the second time-saving B, instead of the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery, the time-saving end condition that is established when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific discrimination result (for example, a small win) can be set, and as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, a small win different from the big win and the time-saving win can be won. By constructing in this way, when the second time saving B is set, the second time saving B can be quickly terminated to execute a special pattern lottery in a normal state, thereby aiming at winning a small prize.

<Playability 2: Combination of game machines with simultaneous fluctuation specifications and short-time winning>
A lottery for a first special pattern and a lottery for a second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (parallelly), and when both special patterns are won as a jackpot, a big win game is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern on the side where the special pattern fluctuation is stopped first (fixed display of the special pattern), and when the special pattern fluctuation is stopped first (fixed display of the special pattern), depending on the jackpot type, the other special pattern fluctuation is displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. A game machine configured to forcibly stop and display is configured to be able to execute time-saving winning determination in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

Then, like the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning decision) is executed before each special symbol variation is started, and when a time-saving winning is made, a time-saving state is set at the special symbol variation stop timing. In this case, when the first special symbol lottery wins the time saving state, the first privilege is set, and when the second special symbol lottery wins the time saving state, the second privilege different from the first privilege is set.

Furthermore, in the second special pattern lottery executed during the variation of the first special symbol in which the time reduction is won, when the time reduction is won, the time reduction state in which the third privilege more advantageous than the first privilege and the second privilege is awarded can be set. By constructing in this way, in the Pachinko machine 10 constructed so that the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed at the same time (in parallel), it is possible to set the time saving state in which different benefits are given according to the timing of winning the time saving in each special pattern lottery.

The privilege to be granted may be, for example, a third privilege in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first privilege or the second privilege, or a third privilege in which a special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the first privilege or the second privilege.

Further, the timing for setting the time saving state of the third privilege may be the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed first among the special pattern variations executed in parallel, or may be the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed later. Also, regardless of before or after the stop display timing, it may be the timing when the previously executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed, or the timing when the later-executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed. Moreover, the timing at which a specific special symbol type is stopped and displayed may be used.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot is won in each special pattern lottery in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a plurality of special pattern type lotteries at the same time (in parallel), and an excessive privilege (jackpot game) is given to a player at the same time.

Furthermore, even if the player wins a big win disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, the player can win a big win advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery before the winning result is stopped (fixed display). In this case, by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win. As a result, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a disadvantageous win, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special pattern lottery while one special pattern won in a disadvantageous win is fluctuating, and stop display (determine display) the winning result prior to the winning result in the disadvantageous win.

<Regarding game machines that can set infinite number of times of time saving (number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during high probability state of normal symbols)>
In the above-described first to fourth control examples, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery is won, the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the big win game is configured to be able to set the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state). Also good.

For example, in the above-described first control example, as the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition for ending the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, one special symbol fluctuation number can be set from among a plurality of number of fluctuations including at least the first number of fluctuations and the second number of fluctuations different from the first number of fluctuations, the first number of fluctuations is 100 times, the second number of fluctuations is 200 times, the third number of fluctuations is 300 times, the fourth number of fluctuations is 500 times, and the fifth number of fluctuations. The number of fluctuations is assumed to be 10000 times (substantially until the next jackpot election).

As a performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81, when the time saving state is set, ``remaining 100 times'' is displayed regardless of which end condition is set, and when the number of times of variation of 100 times or more (for example, the fourth number of times of variation) is set, the performance of adding a predetermined number of times to the value of the number of times of remaining variation displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, ``+30 times'') is executed.

By configuring in this way, even when a super chance mode (a high probability state (probability variable state) of a special symbol for a limited period of time until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times) is not set after the end of the jackpot game, when the period until the special symbol variation is executed 10,000 times is set as the period during which the time-saving state continues, the state in which the balls are more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 continues for a long period of time than when the variable probability state is set. Although the jackpot probability of the pattern is low, it is possible to execute a jackpot lottery with more special symbols while maintaining the number of game balls acquired, and the possibility of winning a jackpot increases. Therefore, even if the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the player expects that the long time saving state will be set. can be made

In addition, the probability variable state is set by the game ball passing through the specific area during the jackpot game, and the time saving state is set when the game ball does not pass, so the high probability state of the special pattern is set. The player can be made to select which game state to play, the game in the time saving state or the game in the time saving state.

<Regarding a game machine having a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a high probability state (variable probability state) of special symbols is set until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the jackpot game>
In a game machine having a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of a jackpot game when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery, and when the number of times of special symbol variation after setting the variable probability state reaches a specific number (for example, 100 times), termination conditions of the variable probability state are established (so-called ST specification), a plurality of termination conditions may be defined and one termination condition may be set from among them.

For example, as the special symbol variation frequency set as the end condition for ending the probability variable state set after the end of the jackpot game, one special symbol variation frequency can be set from among a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency, the first variation frequency is 100 times, the second variation frequency is 200 times, the third variation frequency is 300 times, the fourth variation frequency is 500 times, and the fifth variation frequency is 10000. times (until the next jackpot election).

As a performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81, when the variable probability state is set, ``remaining 100 times'' is displayed regardless of which end condition is set, and when the number of times of variation of 100 times or more (for example, the fourth number of times of variation) is set as the end condition, the performance of adding a predetermined number of times to the value of the remaining number of times of variation displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, ``+30 times'') is executed.

By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the remaining period during which the variable probability state continues, so even when the remaining period until the end of the variable probability state displayed (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbols) is small, the player can expect the occurrence of additional performance, and the player can play the game while having the expectation that the variable probability state may continue until the last moment when the variable probability state ends.

It should be noted that the above-described configuration may be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) in which a big win is given when a special symbol lottery results in a big win or when a game ball enters a specific area.

<Regarding game machines with a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit to the period in which high probability states can be set continuously>
It should be noted that the above-described configuration capable of setting an infinite number of times of time saving may be applied to a game machine having a function (limit function) of setting an upper limit to a period in which a high probability state can be continuously set.

Here, the limit function refers to a threshold value for executing processing for setting a low probability state (low probability state) of special symbols or ordinary symbols after the end of the jackpot game, even when winning a big win of a jackpot type in which a high probability state (high probability state) of special symbols or normal symbols can be set after the end of the jackpot game.

For example, when a jackpot (variable probability big win) of a type in which a high probability state (variable probability state) of a special pattern is set is won in a low probability state after the end of a big winning game, and three times are set as the number of times of variable probability limit, and when the variable probability big win is won three times in a row after the variable probability state is set, the variable probability limit is reached at the third variable probability winning, and the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the big winning game.

The variable probability limit number is a value set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state of a special symbol, and a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is finished. In the variable probability state, a jackpot for which the variable probability state is set is won after the end of the jackpot game, the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, and whether or not the variable probability limit is reached is determined using the updated value.

In a game machine having a conventional variable probability limit, for example, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the distribution of the jackpot types is 90% for the probability variable jackpot and 10% for the normal jackpot, and when the probability variable limit number of times is set to 3, the probability variable jackpot is won in a low probability state, and after the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, when the probability variable jackpot is won three times in a row, the probability variable limit is reached at the third probability variable jackpot, and the third jackpot game is played. After completion, a time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set for a predetermined period (for example, until special pattern lottery is executed 100 times), and when the predetermined period elapses without winning a jackpot of special patterns, the machine shifts to a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns).

In addition, even when a normal jackpot is won before reaching the variable probability limit, a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set for a predetermined period (for example, until a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times) after the jackpot game ends, and when the predetermined period elapses without winning the jackpot for special patterns, the game machine shifts to a normal state. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won in the time saving state, the probability variable limit number of times 3 times is newly set.

That is, in a conventional gaming machine having a variable probability limit, when a normal jackpot is won, the number of times of the probability variable limit is released, but if the special symbol jackpot is not won in a special symbol low probability state within a limited period (for example, the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), the normal state is changed. Since the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the same regardless of whether the jackpot to be won is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play is reduced in the variable probability state when the remaining number of times until reaching the variable probability limit is one.

On the other hand, by setting a normal jackpot in which an infinite number of times of time reduction (until the next jackpot is won) is set, by winning the normal jackpot after the variable probability state is set, the low probability state of the special pattern in which the number of times of the probability limit is canceled is set. Even in a variable probability state when the remaining number of times until reaching the variable limit is 1, the player is expected to win a normal jackpot, thereby preventing the player's desire to play from dropping and enhancing the interest in the game.

In the case of winning the normal jackpot to which the infinite number of times of time saving is given, a special performance different from the case of winning the variable probability jackpot (for example, the performance of rewinding the remaining number of times until reaching the displayed variable probability limit, etc.) may be executed.

<Regarding a configuration that can execute a two-time jackpot loop in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation method) capable of simultaneously (in parallel) performing the variation display based on the first special symbol lottery and the variation display based on the second special symbol lottery>
In a gaming machine which does not have a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation system) capable of simultaneously (parallelly) performing variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbols and variable display of the second special symbols based on the lottery, the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbols and the normal symbols is set until the next big win is won after the end of the big win game, the low probability state of the special symbols for a predetermined period after the end of the big win game (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times), and A gaming machine (a so-called probability variable loop machine) having two types of jackpots, that is, a normal jackpot in which a high-probability state (time-saving state) of normal symbols is set is generally known.

In a conventional variable probability loop machine, when a variable probability big win is won, a variable probability state is set after the end of a big win game, and one more big win is assured, but when a normal jackpot is won after winning a variable probability big win, unless a jackpot is won in a time-saving state set for a predetermined period, a normal state is set, so that two more big wins cannot be guaranteed without changing the ratio of the variable probability big win.

However, by making it possible to set the above-mentioned time-saving number of times infinite (until the next big win is won), it is possible to ensure that two more big wins will be won when the probability variable big win is won without changing the probability variable big win ratio.

Specifically, when a variable probability state is set and a normal jackpot is won, a time-saving state with an infinite number of times of time-saving (until the next big win is won) is set, and when a normal jackpot is won when the normal state or the time-saving state is set, a time-saving state is set for a period shorter than the infinite number of times (for example, until special symbol lottery is executed 20 times).

With this configuration, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game, one more big win is guaranteed regardless of the type of the next big win won, so winning the variable probability big win once guarantees two more big wins. Therefore, by winning the variable probability jackpot, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game in anticipation of winning the variable probability jackpot.

<About the configuration that does not reset the time saving state even if the jackpot is won when the time saving state (normal high probability state) is set>
In a conventional game machine, it is common to set a time saving state for a predetermined period (for example, until a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times) after the end of a big win game, to end the time saving state set when a big win game is started based on winning a big win during the time saving state, and to newly set the time saving state for a predetermined period after the big win game is over (reset the time saving state).

In order to further improve interest in the game machine having such a configuration, the game machine is configured not to reset the time saving state even if the big win is won when the time saving state is set, so that the player can enjoy how many big wins can be won within a predetermined period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols), a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game (first win), and as a special symbol variation frequency set as an end condition for ending the time-saving state, one special symbol variation frequency can be set from among a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency, and the first variation frequency is 100 times and the second variation. The number of times is 300 times, the number of times of the third variation is 500 times, and the number of times of the fourth variation is 10000 times (until the next jackpot election).

Then, for example, when the third variation frequency is set as the end condition, when a jackpot is won by the special pattern variation executed for the 20th time, the time saving state is not terminated (not reset) at the start of the big winning game, so the remaining variation frequency until the completion condition of the time saving state after the end of the big winning game is 480 times.

In this way, the time saving state set based on the first win is not terminated by winning a jackpot during the time saving state, and the time saving state set after the end of the big win game based on the first win is taken over even after the newly executed jackpot game ends. New games can be provided.

As a condition for ending the time saving state, when the number of fluctuations set as the end condition becomes 0 times (that is, when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed during the time saving state) and when the number of winning jackpots in the time saving state reaches a specific number of times, for example, when the time saving state is set after the big win game ends, and when the third big win is won after the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended at the start of the big win game, and the time saving state is newly established after the big win game ends. may be set.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game in which consecutive chances are aimed at in order to continue a state (for example, time-saving state) more advantageous than the normal state, and to further improve the amusement of the game.

<Regarding a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player when the second probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set than the first probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state)>
As the game state, at least four game states can be set: normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), first variable probability state, and second variable probability state. It is good also as a structure which performs short lottery (judgment of whether to set the time saving state in a special design lottery).

Specifically, the difference between the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern is set small (for example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/50.1, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is 1/50). The ratio of determining the jackpot type in which the time-saving state is set at 5% is set to 5%, and prize balls cannot be obtained during the jackpot game.

In addition, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the normal state, the time saving state, and the first variable probability state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed only in the second variable probability state.

Only when a big win is not won in the second special pattern lottery, a small win lottery (determining whether or not a small win is won in the special pattern lottery) is executed, and the player can get prize balls by a small win game executed when a small win is won.

When the special pattern lottery in the normal state does not win the jackpot, the time-saving lottery is executed, and when the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special pattern variation is executed 20 times).

Further, when the first variable probability jackpot is won in the normal state, the first variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the first probability variable state, the high probability state of the special pattern continues until the next big win is won, but the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the low probability state when the end condition is satisfied, and as the number of special pattern fluctuations set as the end condition, one special pattern variation frequency can be set from among a plurality of variation frequencies including at least the first variation frequency and the second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency, for example, the first variation frequency is once and the second variation frequency is 50. times, the number of times of the third change is 100 times, the number of times of the fourth change is 200 times, and the number of times of the fifth change is 300 times.

By configuring in this way, when the end condition of the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in the first probability variable state, the high probability state of the special pattern and the low probability state of the normal pattern, that is, the second probability variable state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player can be provided with a novel game aiming at ending the high probability state of the normal pattern without winning the jackpot in the first probability variable state.

When the jackpot is won with the second special pattern, the ratio of determining the second probability variable jackpot (jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) is set to 95%, and the ratio of determining the time-saving jackpot is set to 5%.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the 100% second probability variable state is set.

An upper limit may be set for a period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern can be continuously set (time saving limit), for example, the number of times of the time saving limit is set to 10 times, and the second probability change state is set after the 10th big win game is completed by winning 10 times in the first probability change jack. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a more advantageous game state is set by making a succession of big wins, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

A small winning lottery may be executed also in the first special symbol lottery, and when a small winning lottery is won, a small winning classification may be determined from among a plurality of small winning classifications including a small winning classification for which a second probability variable state is set at least after finishing the small winning game. By configuring in this way, the opportunity to shift to the second variable probability state increases, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.

When the first variable probability state is set, an effect may be executed to suggest to the player the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbols until the end condition of the high probability state of the set normal symbols is satisfied. For example, when the fifth variation frequency (variation frequency 300 times) is set as the end condition, the third pattern display device 81 displays "accumulate 300 points", and the second probability variation state is set when 1 point is accumulated for each variation of the special symbol and 300 points are accumulated. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the first variable probability state, the acquired points are reset (that is, returned to 0).

Incidentally, even when the first variation frequency (1 variation frequency) is set as the end condition, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display "accumulate 300 points", and when one variation of the special symbol is completed, 300 points may be obtained, or the number of points given for one variation of the special symbol may be varied according to the number of variations of the set termination condition.

By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which number of fluctuations is set as the termination condition of the high-probability state of the normal pattern, so that the enjoyment of predicting which number of fluctuations is set from the number of points to be given can be provided, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Summary of technical ideas>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, regarding the technical idea that when the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 reserve acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number of times, the probability of being granted an advantageous privilege by the special figure 2 lottery increases, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has means for acquiring the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information), and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation). ) up to an upper limit (4) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved and stored second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) (discriminating means capable of executing the discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is jackpot winning (first determination result). After the jackpot game is finished, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 continues until the end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination separately from the determination of big winning, and when it is determined that time-saving winning is determined in the time-saving winning determination (when it is determined to be the second determination result), a high probability state (specific setting) of normal symbols can be set without executing a big winning game. Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of game states can be set, but among them, only in the state where the normal state (specific period) is set, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed.

By constructing in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the big win in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set not at the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation but at the end timing of the big win game, and when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the short winning in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation. Therefore, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the timing of setting the time saving state.

In addition, since a period during which time-saving winning determination can be executed (a period during which a normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be executed (a period during which the normal state is not set) can be set, the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed can also make the player interested. In the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning determination is configured to be executed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period in which the time-saving winning determination can be executed and a period in which the time-saving winning determination is not performed.

Further, instead of switching whether or not to execute the time saving success/failure determination according to the set game state, the probability of winning the time saving success/failure in the time saving success/failure determination may be changed according to the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game state in which short-time winning is likely to occur and a game state in which short-time winning is difficult to occur, so that the same effect as the above-described technical idea, that is, the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed can also make the player interested.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, a first ball entrance 64 (first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter) that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by entering a game ball, and a second ball entrance 640 (second ball entry means that is different from the first ball entrance means) that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery are provided, and time-saving winning determination is configured to be executable only in the second special symbol lottery.

That is, in the first special symbol lottery, no matter what game state is set, time-saving winning judgment is not executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a specific period (normal state). By constructing in this way, the amount of value given to the player later can be greatly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and furthermore, the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time saving winning determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning determination during the specific period (normal state). may be configured as possible. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 easily imparts a value more advantageous to the player than a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 more easily imparts a value advantageous to the player than entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a more advantageous value is likely to be awarded.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modification shown in FIG. 329, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 should be configured so that the degree of entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the degree of entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 are the same regardless of which game state is set. With such a configuration, the player can select which ball entrance the game ball is to enter, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning by the time saving winning determination is more likely to be set than the time saving state (first time saving) set based on the jackpot winning, the time saving state advantageous to the player, that is, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied. That is, according to the setting opportunity of a time saving state, it comprises so that the advantageous degree of the set time saving state may be varied. As a result, the period (time-saving end condition) for which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set can be varied according to the discriminated result (setting opportunity), so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the amusement can be further improved.

In this case, depending on the game state before the time saving state is set, a time saving state where the second time saving is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving and a case where the first time saving is more advantageous to the player than the second time saving may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which situation the time saving state was set.

More specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the last big win game is over (the number of times of addiction) exceeds a predetermined number, it may be made easier to be in an advantageous time-saving state than when it does not.

Next, in the above-described seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning (see FIG. 315). As a result, the jackpot winning (first discrimination result) and the short-time winning (second discrimination result) can be discriminated redundantly, so that in one special pattern lottery, various lottery results can be expected, such as winning a big win, short-time winning, and winning both a big win and a short-time win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning are overlapped, a jackpot game more advantageous to the player than when there is no overlap is executed (see FIG. 306(b)). As a result, a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is easily executed due to redundant discrimination, so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified by providing the player with benefits corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, as a configuration for giving a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the case of duplicate winning than in the case of non-multiple winning, a configuration other than the above-described seventh control example may be used, for example, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to be able to set a more advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state, time-saving state, etc.) in the case of double winning than in the case of non-multiple winning.

In addition, in the above-described seventh control example, after executing the determination of time-saving winning (determining whether it is the second determination result), it is configured to perform the big win determination (determining whether it is the first determination result). In the case of one special symbol lottery, when the time-saving lottery is won, the big-hit determination in the special symbol lottery can be performed in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the advantageous degree of the privilege game executed in the case of duplicate winning and the advantage degree of the privilege game executed in the case of non-multiple winning different.

Next, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state (first time reduction) set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning (second time reduction) is set based on the normal symbol high probability state (second time reduction), and the normal symbol high probability state is set. See FIG. 280(b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game (the content of the jackpot game and the number of times of reduced time to be granted) is variable according to the setting type (first time reduction, second time reduction), the privilege given to the player can be made different even in the same normal pattern high probability state (second game state), and the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved without setting many game states.

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, a difference is provided in the number of time reductions to be provided according to the setting type (first time reduction and second time reduction).

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time saving is set rather than the first time saving, that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set without executing the big winning game, the high probability state of the normal symbol in which the end condition is difficult to be established is more likely to be set. In other words, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning a prize ball during the jackpot game, that is, the second time reduction, which has fewer benefits until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than the first time reduction, can lengthen the high probability state of the normal pattern, so that there is an effect that the privilege can be imparted fairly to the player.

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, similarly to the fifth control example and the first modification of the fifth control example described above, time-saving winning determination (discrimination of the second determination result) can be executed only in the normal state. In other words, except for the normal state, execution of the time-saving winning determination is regulated. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect that the player is more interested in the set game state and expects that the game state in which the second judgment result can be judged is set.

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the effect mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so as to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set (see FIGS. 278 and 279). That is, when the first time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 278(a)) is executed for the first period obtained by adding the special symbol variation time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol variation time (including fixed time).

More specifically, the variation time and the jackpot game period are defined in advance corresponding to each special pattern lottery result so that the first period and the second period are substantially the same period, and the performance period of the specific performance is configured to be the same. By constructing in this way, as the performance displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the performance showing the normal pattern high probability state is executed after the specific performance having the same performance period and the same performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player watching the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to discriminate in which setting opportunity the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning determination even during the time saving state (second game state), and when the time saving win is made during the time saving state (second game state), it is possible to set the time saving state (second game state) of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (the number of time saving times is large or the time saving winning probability is high).

Thus, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set, the easier it is to set the time saving state of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that the privilege game can be easily executed.

In addition, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the time saving winning probability is changed according to the set game state, but the time saving winning probability may be defined to be the same. In addition, although the time-saving winning probability is varied according to the game state, the time-saving winning probability may be changed according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big win game is executed. In this case, when the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big winning game is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the time saving winning probability should be increased. By constructing in this way, a player who has not won a big win for a long time in the special symbol lottery can be easily provided with the privilege of short-time winning, which is different from the big win game. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

In the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329, the first determination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing the first determination, and the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is the first determination result (jackpot winning). Based on that, the first benefit (jackpot game) can be granted, and the first determination result is the second determination result (shorter time winning) different from the first determination result. A first privilege granting means, a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of performing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and a first privilege can be granted based on the fact that the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means is a third discrimination result (jackpot winning), and a second privilege capable of granting a third privilege (small winning game) different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on the fact that the result of the second discrimination is a fourth discrimination result (small winning) different from the third discrimination result. and a granting means, configured so that the third privilege is not granted based on the first discrimination executed by the first discriminating means and the second privilege is not granted based on the second discrimination executed by the second discriminating means.

As a result, different benefits can be given depending on whether the first discrimination is executed or the second discrimination is executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game by making different judgments, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine related to the above-mentioned <game property 2>, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and when both special symbols are won in the jackpot, the big win game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). To provide a game machine configured to forcibly stop and display pattern fluctuations in a display mode indicating that a lottery result is lost, so as to be capable of executing time-saving winning determination in both a first special pattern lottery and a second special pattern lottery. A first advantageous state and a third advantageous state (a third advantageous state of time saving) that are more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be set based on the determination that the second condition is satisfied (a time saving state of the first privilege) is set by the second distinguishing means during a period from when the first determining means determines that the first condition is satisfied (time saving is won) until the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state (time saving state of the first privilege). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 constituted so that the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), it is possible to set a time saving state in which different benefits are given according to the timing of winning the time saving in each special pattern lottery.

In <Other game features> described above, in a gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being the first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means is configured so that the first game state (normal state) is set. A second game state (second time saving B) can be set based on the fact that the result of determination by the determination means (special symbol lottery) executed in the set state is a second determination result (second time saving B winning) different from the first determination result, the first game state can be set based on the completion of the end condition (time saving end condition) in the state where the second game state is set, and the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set is the first determination. A third game state (second time saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set based on the third determination result (second time saving A winning) different from the result and the second determination result. Further, the discrimination means can perform discrimination so that the probability that the discrimination result will be the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability that the discrimination result will be the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%).

Furthermore, as a termination condition (time reduction termination condition of the second time reduction B), at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of determinations (number of times of special symbol lottery) by the determination means executed in the state where the second game state is set reaches a predetermined number can be set. In addition, it is possible to set a second end condition that can be established based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result (minor winning).

In this case, as a setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, at least a first setting (normal time saving state) that can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means and a second setting that can set the second game state (time saving state) without executing the privilege game based on the result of the discrimination performed by the discrimination means being a second discrimination result (second time saving B winning) different from the first discrimination result. The game state setting means can set an advantageous second game state (ordinary time saving state) which is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state) and a disadvantageous second game state (second time saving B) which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type (time saving type) set by the type setting means.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 335. FIG. The fifth control example described above is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state) and to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means 640 during the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state). Furthermore, it was configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election (time-saving lottery) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, the lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol can be stored (retained storage) up to a predetermined number (four pieces) as an upper limit.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured as described above, the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is terminated while the special-figure 2 reservation is retained and stored, and the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern is set, so that the second special design lottery based on the reserved and stored special-figure 2 reservation is executed in the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal design, and when the second special design lottery executed during the normal state wins the time-saving lottery, the normal design is again executed. was configured to set a high-probability state (time-saving state).

In other words, the period from when the normal design high probability state (time saving state) ends and when the normal design low probability state (normal state) is set until the predetermined period (the period during which the second special design lottery is executed based on the special figure 2 hold) passes, can be set as a period (pullback period) in which the normal design high probability state (time saving state) is easily set. it was possible.

On the other hand, the eighth control example is different in that determination of time saving winning (time saving lottery) can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the time saving lottery is configured to win with a high probability (most of the lost winnings), and the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is configured to be a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are easily executed alternately, and as the end condition of the above-described second time saving, the end condition is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example configured as described above, when a special pattern lottery executed in a state where a normal state is set does not win a jackpot (jackpot probability 1/300), a second time saving is set by winning a time saving with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time saving until the end condition of the second time saving is established.

In addition, as end conditions for the second time reduction, the first time reduction end condition established when the total number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second time reduction reaches a specific number (100 times) and the second time reduction end condition established when the special symbol lottery is executed in a predetermined order are set, and the second time reduction end condition is constituted so as to be established before the first time reduction end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time saving is set, the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second time saving end condition in order to quickly end the second time saving.

In addition, the degree of advantage to the player is differentiated according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and it is easier to set an advantageous game state after the end of the big winning game in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state than in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed after the second time saving is finished.

Now, with reference to FIG. 331, the configuration of the sorting unit 1064 will be described. 331(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 1064. FIG. Actually, the cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and the surface of the spiral pattern is colored so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through, so that the inside is difficult to see.

At the top of the distribution unit 1064, a passage opening 1064b through which a game ball can enter is provided, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 1064a is arranged to detect that a game ball has passed through the passage opening 1064b. A game ball that has passed through the passage port 1064b is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port 1641 arranged therebelow.

The distribution member 900 receives the game ball entered into the passage opening in the storage portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When a game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the weight of the game ball causes the distribution member 900 to rotate counterclockwise (see FIG. 331(a)) to guide the game ball to the first ball inlet 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900b.

On the base body provided on the rear side of the distribution unit 1064, the base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the opening through which the magnet 901b of the distribution member 900 passes. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a bar-shaped magnet, similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. When the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900b comes directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 come closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (N pole and N pole, for example), they repel each other, and the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 does not stop at the position facing directly upward, and is maintained at the position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the distribution member 900 reaches a position where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that the distribution member 900 rotates left or right, and either the housing portion 900a or the housing portion 900b faces the side of receiving the game balls entering the distribution unit 640 (the upper side of the game machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring as a result of a game ball entering the game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and guides the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, the distribution member 900 can be prevented from rotating to the right (accommodation portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a, the accommodation part 900b faces upward, and the game ball entered into the distribution unit 640 is received by the accommodation part 900b, and the weight of the game ball rotates the distribution member 900 to the right by about 90 degrees to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance 1641.例文帳に追加In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution unit 640 to the first ball entrance 64 a and the second ball entrance 1641 . Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641 to win prizes, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) resulting from the winning of the first ball entrance 64a and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from the winning of the second ball entrance 1641, which will be described later, can be efficiently executed.

The right second ball entrance 1640 is a ball entrance where, like the second ball entrance 1641, the lottery for the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters. In the second special symbol, the second entrance 1641 and the second entrance 1640 on the right side are combined to hold four balls.

A game ball passing through the right side of the variable display unit 80 as well as a game ball passing through the left side of the variable display unit 80 can be entered into a passing port 1064b (a size allowing one game ball to pass) of the distribution unit 1064, and only a game ball passing through the right side can be entered into the right second ball entering port 1640.例文帳に追加

Here, FIG. 331(a) is a diagram showing a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped while being rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage port 1064b, the game ball is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a, and the weight of the game ball rotates the distribution member 900 counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first ball inlet 64a while being guided to the guide portion 900z1.

After the game ball is distributed to the first ball entrance 64a by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the accommodation portion 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 331(b). After that, when the game ball passes through the passage port 1064b, it is housed in the housing portion 900c and distributed to the second ball entrance 1641.例文帳に追加Therefore, the balls can be alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 a and the second ball entrance 1641 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 331(b), among the game balls entering from the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064, the game balls that could not be properly guided to the first ball entering port 64a or the second ball entering port 1641 by the sorting member 900 flow down the ball discharge path formed between the outer wall portion of the sorting unit 1064 and each ball entering port, and are discharged to the outside of the sorting unit 1064. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, for example, even if a game ball flowing into the passage port 1061b of the distribution unit 1064 with force collides with the distribution member 900 and flows down the distribution unit 1064 without being guided by the guiding parts 900z1 and 900z2, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the distribution unit 1064.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position (rotating state) of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor (not shown). Specifically, a rotation sensor capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating shaft 900d of the distribution member 900 is provided, and the position of the distribution member 900 can be specified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor. Based on the position of the sorting member 900 specified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor, it is possible to determine to which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance 1061) the game ball entering the passage opening 1061b next is guided.

By configuring in this way, a notification performance for notifying the player of whether or not the special figure reservation of the same type can be continuously acquired, and a guidance performance for continuously acquiring the special figure reservation of the same type can be executed, so that the player can easily understand the game for establishing the second time reduction end condition.

In the fifth control example, the rotation sensor is used to identify the position of the distribution member 900, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the position of the distribution member 900 may be determined each time based on the ball entrance. Specifically, the sorting member 900 is configured to identify the state in which the accommodating portion 900c faces upward based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, and to identify the state in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1641. By configuring in this way, the position of the distribution member 900 can be specified without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Further, even if the distribution member 900 is rotated due to vibration or the like, the position of the distribution member 900 can be correctly specified by updating and determining the position each time the ball enters the entrance.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 331, if normal, the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 1064 are alternately guided to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641, and when a new special figure reservation cannot be acquired based on the game ball entering each ball entrance, the game ball is entered into the distribution unit 1064 without acquiring the special figure reservation. , By varying the position of the distribution member 900, the same type of special figure reservation is configured to be continuously obtainable, but without being limited to this, for example, some of the game balls flowed into the distribution unit 1064 may enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 2164 without being accommodated in the distribution member 900.

By constructing in this way, the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired in an irregular order by using a configuration capable of alternately obtaining the special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery using the distribution member 900, and the configuration for obtaining the special figure reservation without using the distribution member 900. - 特許庁Therefore, it can be made easy to satisfy the second time saving end condition.

Returning to FIG. 330, the description continues. In the right area of the game board 13, there are provided a right second ball entrance 1640 and an electric accessory 1640a as a variable means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right second ball entrance 1640 and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state.

This electric role product 1640a, like the electric role product 640a in the fifth control example described above, is configured to be varied from a closed state to an open state according to a predetermined variable pattern by a winning game (normal symbol winning game) executed when winning is won in a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of a game ball through the through gate 67. The technology related to the normal symbol lottery and the contents of the control process for the electric role product 1640a executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example used in the fifth control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the eighth control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, a normal pattern winning game (long open winning game) that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640 when winning in the normal symbol lottery, and a normal symbol winning game (normal open winning game) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640 than the long open winning game. In both the game state in which the state is set and the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the long opening winning game is configured to be executable.

By constructing in this way, when the unfavorable time-saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set as the game state among the time-saving states, it is possible to enter a plurality of game balls into the right second ball entrance 1640 by winning the normal symbol lottery and executing the long open winning game. Thus, in the eighth embodiment in which the special symbol lottery is executed in accordance with the order of entering the game balls, the special symbols of the same type (second special symbol) can be continuously executed, and the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) for ending the disadvantageous time saving state can be easily established.

Therefore, by executing a winning game in the normal pattern lottery and executing a long open winning game, in addition to the privilege of efficiently executing the game special pattern lottery, the privilege of ending the disadvantageous time-saving state can be given, so that the player can be interested in the result of the normal pattern lottery.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the eighth control example, as the time saving state, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player (advantageous time saving state) and a time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (disadvantageous time saving state) are configured to be executable, and in terms of execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time saving state is configured to have a higher execution efficiency than the disadvantageous time saving state. More specifically, in a state in which the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the degree of expectation for entering the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640 during the normal pattern winning game executed based on winning in the normal pattern lottery is configured to be approximately the same as in the normal state.

In addition, in terms of benefits (big win game contents, game state set after the end of the big win game) given when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery, the advantages are given (easier to be given) to the player in the advantageous short working hours state than in the unfavorable short working hours state. More specifically, the privilege given when the jackpot is won during the disadvantageous time-saving state is configured to be given (easier to be given) to the player than when the jackpot is won during the normal state.

Therefore, among the three game states of the normal state, the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state, the advantageous time saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player, the normal state is the game state advantageous to the player, and the unfavorable time saving state is the most unfavorable game state for the player.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the defined content of the time saving end condition (advantageous time saving end condition) for ending the advantageous time saving state and the time saving end condition (adverse time saving end condition) for ending the disadvantageous time saving state are different. Specifically, in both the advantageous time-saving end condition and the unfavorable time-saving end condition, the first time-saving end condition established based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set is defined, and in addition to the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, the second time-saving end condition established based on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is defined.

Further, as described above, in the eighth control example, the distribution unit 1064 is configured so that the game balls can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 alternately. Therefore, normally, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are alternately executed. Here, for example, when the long open winning game is executed based on the winning in the normal symbol lottery, the game of entering the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640 is executed by the right-handed game, so that it is possible to create the event that the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

In the eighth control example, as the second time-saving end condition established based on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the second time-saving end condition established based on the continuous execution of the special symbol lottery of the same type can be set. Therefore, the player to whom the disadvantageous time-saving state is set can be made to play a game while expecting that the long open winning game will be executed in order to satisfy the second time-saving end condition.

Also, in order to continuously execute the special symbol lottery of the same type, it is conceivable to execute a game in which game balls flow into the sorting unit 1064 in a state in which, for example, a new special symbol reservation cannot be obtained, that is, in a state in which the special symbol reservation is retained and stored up to the upper limit number, without executing a long open winning game. For example, in a state in which new special symbol variation is difficult to execute, for example, in a state where a left-handed game is executed during a jackpot game and the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are acquired up to the upper limit number, game balls are made to flow into the distribution unit 1064 to execute a game in which the position of the distribution member 900 is varied.

In the eighth control example, by specifying the position of the distribution member 900 during the jackpot game, based on the acquisition status (acquisition order) of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation, a guidance effect (see FIG. 333 (b)) for creating a state in which the special figure reservation corresponding to the special symbol of the same type can be continuously acquired is configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property such that a game advantageous to the player can be executed by executing the left-handed game based on the contents of the guidance performance to be executed during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed.

<Regarding the production content in the eighth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described.

In the eighth control example, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-reduction state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols), probability variable state (high-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) can be set. state) and a disadvantageous time-saving state (time-saving state that is set with a high probability when a time-saving election is won) can be set.

The disadvantageous time-saving state is actually set to a high-probability state of normal patterns, but compared to the advantageous time-saving state, it is configured to make it more difficult to enter a game ball into a right second ball-entering port 1640, and is a time-saving state in which a game ball can be entered into the right second ball-entering port 1640 only to the same extent as in a substantially normal state (low-probability state of normal patterns). Therefore, even when the time-saving state is set, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, similarly to the case where the normal state is set, it is configured such that a game in which game balls flow into a sorting unit 1064 by a left-handed game is more advantageous than a game in which game balls are entered into the right second ball entrance 1640 by a right-handed game.

When winning the jackpot of the special pattern in the normal state, a benefit (for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is large, etc.) more advantageous than when winning the jackpot of the special pattern in the unfavorable time-saving state is provided. Therefore, the disadvantageous time saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. On the other hand, in the advantageous time-saving state, a normal game is executed so that the game ball can be relatively easily entered into the right second ball entrance 1640, and the right-hand hitting game is an advantageous game for the player. Therefore, the game state becomes advantageous to the player in the order of disadvantageous time-saving state, normal state, and advantageous time-saving state.

Although the details will be described later, the disadvantageous time-saving state is a game state that can be set after the variable display ends when the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery is won, and in the eighth control example, the time-saving lottery is configured with a high probability (299/300). The termination condition of the unfavorable time saving state is different depending on the type of the special pattern won in the disadvantageous time saving state, and when the disadvantageous time saving state is won in the first special pattern, the first special pattern is changed and displayed once (that is, the first special pattern is changed and displayed continuously), or the first special pattern and the second special pattern are changed and displayed 100 times in total, and the unfavorable time saving state is ended. On the other hand, when the disadvantageous time-saving winning is made with the second special pattern, the disadvantageous time-saving state is terminated when the second special pattern is displayed once (that is, when the second special pattern is continuously displayed), or when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed 100 times in total.

As described above, in the gaming machine 13 in this control example, the game balls entering the sorting unit 1064 (see FIG. 330) are alternately sorted by the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331). A lottery is executed, and when the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls enter the corresponding ball entrances. For example, when winning in the order of the first entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331), the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in that order. In this way, either the variable display for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol or the variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed continuously.

Here, in this control example, an example of the case where the variable display of any special symbol type is continuously executed will be described. In the gaming machine 13, as described above, the game balls are distributed by the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331). When the number of reserved special symbols reaches the upper limit (four in this control example) and the game ball newly wins the corresponding entrance, the winning information is not reserved (hereinafter referred to as overflow winning). Then, when the game ball enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330) in a state where the reserved number of both special symbols reaches the upper limit (in this control example, the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are accumulated in total 8), the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the game ball to a ball entrance different from the ball entrance corresponding to the eighth reserved special symbol type, but overflow winning. Therefore, the winning information will not be reserved. In addition, since the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is variable by distributing the game ball, the game ball entered into the next distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 331) can be distributed to the entrance corresponding to the eighth reserved special symbol type, and the variable display of the special symbol type of the same type as the eighth reserved can be continuously executed, thereby ending the disadvantageous time saving state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to launch the game ball in order to save the holding time in order to end the disadvantageous time saving state.

In this control example, the winning information of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be reserved up to four, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less (for example, two) or five or more reserved balls (for example, eight). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the small display area Dm19, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) corresponding to the number of reserved balls. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 332(a) is an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol reservation is continuously obtained by overflow winning in the disadvantageous time saving state. When the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance fluctuation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and when the fluctuation display of each special symbol is executed, the number is decremented by one and updated. Incidentally, the chance variation in this control example refers to the variable display of the special symbols for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In this manner, the player can determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the unfavorable time-saving state, and the player can easily determine whether or not to continue the game according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance fluctuation.

The first special pattern is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the second special pattern is being variably displayed in the small display area Dm2, so that the player can easily discriminate which special pattern is being variably displayed.

Reserved patterns of special patterns are displayed in the small display area Dm19, a hatched circle indicates that the first special pattern is reserved, and a black circle indicates that the second special pattern is reserved. The display screen shown in FIG. 332(a) indicates that the reserved number of the first special symbols is 3 and the reserved number of the second special symbols is 4. Since the reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 are reserved symbols indicating the winning information of the second special symbols, the variable display of the second special symbols is continuously executed. As described above, when the variable display of one of the special symbols is continuously executed, the unfavorable time-saving state is terminated, so the unfavorable time-saving state is terminated by stopping the variation of the special symbols based on the reserved symbol hr7, and after the variable display of the special symbols to be executed next becomes the chance variation.

Here, if the display shown in the small display area Dm12 is decremented by 1 every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved symbol hr7 is executed, ``73 times left until the chance variation'' is displayed, and the number of remaining variations until the actual variation of the chance is executed does not match the number of remaining variations displayed in the small display area Dm12, which may make the player distrust the game information.

Therefore, in this control example, the condition for ending the disadvantageous time reduction state as shown in FIG. The number of fluctuations and the number of remaining fluctuations displayed in the small display area Dm12 are matched to provide correct game information.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 332(a), by displaying "Lucky" above the reserved pattern hr6 and the reserved pattern hr7, the player is suggested in advance that the termination condition of the disadvantageous time saving state is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize in which hold the chance variation is executed, so that the player can easily understand the variation to which the player should pay attention.

In this control example, the number of remaining variations up to the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and the number is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect of accumulating points may be used, and a chance variation may be executed when a specific number of points (for example, 100 points) is accumulated. In this case, one point is added each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed, and when the variable display of the same kind of special pattern is continuously executed, the points are accumulated up to the MAX, so that the performance which does not give a sense of incompatibility to the player can be realized.

In this control example, the unfavorable time saving state is ended after the variable display of the same kind of special pattern is continuously executed, and the variable display of the special pattern to be executed next is made the chance change, but it is not limited to this.

FIG. 332(b) is an example of a display screen displayed when a normal symbol winning game is won and an electric accessory 1640a (see FIG. 330) attached to the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330) is long open as a normal symbol winning game. In the small display area Dm11, a display mode indicating that the winning of the normal symbol is won is displayed, and when the normal symbol winning game is executed, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right hit" to guide the player to the game method in the normal symbol winning game, and the small display area dm18 displays that the electric accessory 1640a (see FIG. 330) attached to the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330) is in the open state. is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and "Right hit and aim for an electric chew" is displayed. As a result, the player can be guided to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330) in an easy-to-understand manner, and the game can be played in a game method suitable for the game state.

Here, when the game ball wins in the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. In the case of FIG. 332(b), since the last reserved symbol hr5 displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, when the game ball is made to win the second ball entrance 1640 on the right side (see FIG. 330), the variable display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the disadvantageous time saving state can be terminated. Therefore, in order to inform the player that it is advantageous to let the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the main display area Dm displays "chance to get variable chance". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the game ball will enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), and to motivate the player to play the game.

In addition, when three reserved second special symbols are already accumulated and the last reserved symbol (for example, reserved symbol hr6) displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol, even if a plurality of game balls are entered into the second ball entrance 1640 on the right side (see FIG. 330), only one winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, so that the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be continuously executed. . Therefore, if the condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state cannot be satisfied even if the game ball is entered into the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), a different display mode (for example, a display such as "a chance to accumulate hold") may be displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to provide appropriate game information to the player, and the reliability of the game information can be enhanced.

FIG. 333(a) is an example of a display screen displayed when suggesting that the unfavorable working hours reduction state ends. A main display area Dm12 displays ``three more times until the chance variation'', which indicates that the variation display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern after the setting of the unfavorable time saving state is performed 98 times in total. In other words, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved symbol hr2 ends, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, and the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state is established. In this case, since the lottery of a special pattern based on the holding pattern HR3 will be executed in the normal state, the holding pattern HR3 is different from the holding pattern that supports the winning information of the first special pattern and the second special design in order to suggest that the lottery of the special pattern will be executed in the normal state and the holding pattern that corresponds to the winning information of the second special pattern (white circle). The star -shaped pattern is displayed in the holding pattern), and the "attention" is displayed at the top of the holding pattern HR3. By constructing in this way, the player can easily recognize that the variable display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 is the chance variation, and the player's expectation for the variable display of the special pattern executed based on the reserved pattern hr3 can be enhanced during the period until the variable display based on the reserved pattern hr3 is executed.

In addition, the main display area Dm displays ``This chance variation may be a lucky variation'', which suggests the result of pre-reading the prize winning information of the reserved pattern hr3, and in this case, suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 is highly likely to be a jackpot. As a result, the player's expectation for the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the reserved symbols hr3 can be further enhanced.

In this control example, the prefetch result of the reserved design hr3 is suggested in the main display area Dm, and the display mode of the reserved design hr3 displayed in the small display area Dm19 suggests that the lottery for the special design based on the reserved design hr3 is executed in a normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to suggest a look-ahead result by the display mode of the reserved symbol hr3. For example, it is also possible to notify the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the color of the reserved symbol.

FIG. 333(b) is an example of the display screen displayed during the ending period during the jackpot game based on winning the normal jackpot. In the small display area Dm, a display mode indicating the winning of the normal jackpot is displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, ``Ending'' is displayed to inform the player that it is the ending period of the jackpot game.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, it is configured such that winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the second special symbol. Then, when the jackpot game after winning the normal jackpot is completed, the first lottery for the special symbol after the jackpot game is finished is executed in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying ``Lucky, the normal variation starts from the special symbol 1'' in the sub-display area Ds, the player is notified in advance that the first special symbol lottery executed after the end of the big win game is executed with the first special symbol advantageous to the player, and the player can be interested in the variable display of the special symbol after the end of the big win game. When the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is executed with the second special symbol, a different display mode (for example, a display mode in which "Lucky" is not displayed) is displayed.

During the jackpot game, since the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, it is a period in which the player is likely to accumulate reservations. As described above, when a game ball enters the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330) when the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit, winning information is not reserved, but the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be varied. In this control example, the position of the sorting member 900 can be identified by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown). Therefore, in this control example, the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol hr8 and the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) are identified, and it is configured to inform the player whether it is advantageous for the player to change the position of the distribution member by overflow winning.

Specifically, when the next winning information can be reserved, if the winning information of the same special symbol type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 cannot be reserved, that is, if the winning information of the same special symbol type can be reserved by changing the position of the distribution member 900 due to the overflow winning, as shown in FIG. , and a schematic diagram corresponding to the current position of the distributing member 900 (see FIG. 331) is displayed in the small display area Dm18, so that the player is prompted to enter the game ball into the distributing unit 1640 (see FIG. 330). By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the game in which the game ball is shot even during the ending period of the big win.

In addition, when the next winning information can be reserved, if the winning information of the special symbol type of the same kind as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 can be reserved, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is changed due to the overflow winning. If you put a ball in your navel by then, you will have a great chance" is not displayed.

When the next winning information can be reserved, if the winning information of the special symbol type of the same kind as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 can be reserved, a display mode for notifying that the overflow winning is disadvantageous may be displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to judge whether the overflow winning is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state.

In this control example, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) may be determined each time based on the entrance of the ball. Specifically, based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331), the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) is configured to determine that the accommodating portion 900c (see FIG. 331) faces upward. With this configuration, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. In addition, even if the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is rotated due to vibration or the like, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time the ball enters the entrance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 338, the contents of the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described. This eighth control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the configuration of the ROM 222 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 334(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example has a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb instead of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db, a jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, and a time saving random number 8 table 202g instead of the time saving random number 5 table 202de in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 244(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above. The difference is that e is provided with a time saving type selection 8 table 202gf instead of the time saving type selection 5 table 202df.

The jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, like the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd described above, is a data table that is referred to when selecting a jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. In the fifth control example described above, there are a special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. Also in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is referred to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 335(a), detailed contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described. FIG. 335(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 335(a), in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, jackpot types (jackpot A8, jackpot B8) are defined in association with the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (normal state), the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is defined in the range of ``0 to 94'' as ``jackpot A8'', and in the range of ``95 to 99'' as ``jackpot B8''. In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than normal (normal state), that is, when the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is in the range of ``0 to 49'', ``jackpot A8'' and ``jackpot B8'' are defined in the range of ``50 to 99'', respectively.

The jackpot type ``jackpot A8'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is the jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the probability variable counter 203i are set to ``60'' and ``60'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after finishing the big winning game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot A8'' is 95 (0 to 94) in the normal state, so that the ratio of determining the ``jackpot A8'' is 95% (95/100) when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state. On the other hand, since there are 50 pieces (0 to 49) in a state other than the normal state, when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the ratio of determining "big win A8" is 50% (50/100).

The jackpot type ``jackpot B8'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed, and is the jackpot type in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the probability variable counter 203i are set to ``60'' and ``60'' after the jackpot game is finished. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability big winning game (when not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after finishing the big winning game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot B8'' is 5 (95 to 99) in the normal state, so that the ratio of determining the ``jackpot B8'' is 5% (5/100) when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state. On the other hand, since there are 50 pieces (50 to 99) in a state other than the normal state, when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the ratio of determining "big win B8" is 50% (50/100).

In other words, in the eighth control example, when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, the selection ratio of the jackpot type set according to the set game state is varied, and when the jackpot wins in the normal state, the jackpot type (jackpot A8) advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than when the jackpot wins in a state other than the normal state.

By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that many special symbol lotteries will be executed during the normal state.

Next, the time saving per random number 8 table 202ge is explained. This time-saving winning random number 8 table 202ge is a data table referred to in the time-saving judgment executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the big winning (lost), and is used for judging the presence or absence of the time-saving winning.

Here, with reference to FIG.335(b), the content of random number 8 table 202ge per time saving is demonstrated. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content defined in the random number 8 table 202ge per time saving. As shown in FIG. 335(b), in the time saving random number 8 table 202ge, the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as time saving election is defined in correspondence with the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the game state.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the judgment value of short-time winning in the range of ``3 to 899''. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure). Similarly, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the judgment value of short-time winning in the range of ``3 to 899''. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

Here, in the eighth control example, the determination of short-time winning in the special symbol lottery (time-saving lottery) is configured to be executed when the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, that is, when the big win is won in the special symbol lottery. When the big winning is not won in the pattern lottery, it is constituted so that the winning is always shortened.

In the eighth control example, as described above, the content of the time saving random number 8 table 202ge is defined so that the time saving random number 8 table 202ge is always won when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is lost. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to continuously execute the special symbol lottery without winning the time-saving lottery.

In addition, in the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 335(b), the determination value for time saving winning is the same regardless of the special symbol type, but it is not limited to this, and different determination values may be defined according to the special symbol type. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, it may be more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than when the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this way, by making the probability of short-time winning different according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the number of times of the special symbol lottery continuously executed during the normal state can be easily changed according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed, so that the player can be made interested in which special symbol lottery of which special symbol type is executed (whether or not) during the normal state.

When the probability of short-time winning is changed according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed during the normal state (when winning the jackpot, the player is likely to be given a privilege) should be configured so as to make it difficult to win the time-saving lottery. With this configuration, the first special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, and when the lottery result is a big win, the player can easily be given a privilege advantageous to the player, and when the lottery is not a big win, the special symbol lottery can be easily executed again in the normal state, so that the special pattern type more advantageous to the player can be made.

In addition, as in the eighth control example, basically, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be easily alternately executed, and when the second special symbol lottery is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state may be configured to be less likely to be won than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By constructing in this way, even if the special pattern lottery executed first in the state where the normal state is set is the second special pattern lottery, the first special pattern lottery can be easily executed after that while the normal state is continued. By configuring in this way, for example, when the unfavorable time-reducing state is ended and the normal state more advantageous to the player than the unfavorable time-reducing state is set, the unfavorable time-reducing state is set again just by executing the second special symbol lottery, which is disadvantageous to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 335 (b), in the eighth control example, it is configured to execute the determination of the time saving election (time reduction lottery) only when the normal state is set, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute the time reduction election determination (time reduction lottery) even if another game state is set.

For example, even when a disadvantageous time-saving state disadvantageous to the player (time-saving state set when a specific time-saving type is won) is set among the time-saving states, the determination of the time-saving winning (time-saving lottery) can be executed, and when the time-saving winning is made during the unfavorable time-saving state, the short-time state where the time-saving end condition is immediately established is preferably set. By constructing in this way, a game aimed at establishing a time saving end condition and a game aiming at winning a time saving can be concurrently executed in order to end the disadvantageous time saving state for a player who is playing a game in the disadvantageous time saving state.例文帳に追加

In addition, it may be constituted so as to shift to a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) set after the end of a jackpot game when the time-saving state is elected in the disadvantageous time-saving state, or it may be constructed so as to be able to execute determination of the time-savings winning (time-saving lottery) even in the advantageous time-saving state, and to be shifted to the disadvantageous time-saving state when winning the time-saving state during the advantageous time-saving state.

In this way, it is possible to determine whether to win the short working hours (time saving lottery) in a situation where the short working hours state is already set, and when the short working hours are won, to shift to the short working hours state in which the degree of advantage is different from the set short working hours state. In addition, in the eighth control example, by winning the short working hours during the normal state, the disadvantageous short working hours state is more likely to be set than the advantageous short working hours state.

In this case, for example, the contents of the presentation for suggesting the result of the short-time winning to the player may be configured to be different according to the set game state in addition to the result of the short-time winning, and when the short-time winning is made during the period in which the short-time winning is better (the period in which the short-time winning is set unfavorably), the player is disappointed when the short-time winning is won in the period in which the short-time winning is better (the period in which the short-time winning is favorable). It is preferable to configure so that the mode of presentation to be made can be set. By constructing in this way, a performance can be executed in a performance mode corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player for the result of the same time-saving lottery, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 334(a), the description continues. Like the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the fifth control example described above, the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb is a data table that defines the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery. 02db2 (see FIG. 336(a)) is provided, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to Drawing 336 (a), detailed contents of 8 tables 202db2 for probability variation and time saving are explained. FIG. 336(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 8 table 202db2 for probability variation/time reduction. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), the 8 table 202db2 for probability variation/time saving has a different variation time variation pattern depending on the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved, number of special figures 2 reserved) It is different in that it is defined.

As shown in FIG. 336(a), in the eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, a variation pattern with different variation times is defined according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, but illustration of the variation pattern defined for each range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 is omitted.

Specifically, when the time saving type is "time saving after the jackpot (high probability state of normal symbols set after the end of the jackpot game)", the number of special figures 1 reserved (0 to 4) and the number of special figures 2 reserved (0 to 4) Various variation patterns are defined corresponding to each value and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the special symbol variation is performed with a variation time of "5 to 90 seconds" according to the selected variation pattern. Although detailed explanation is omitted, various variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, it is easier to select a variation pattern corresponding to a longer variation time (90 seconds) than when the big win is not won, as in the above-described control examples.

Various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the special figure reservation number so that the variation pattern corresponding to the shorter variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the number of special figure reservations is large than when the number is small.

Next, when the time saving type is "time saving A8", when the special figure 1 reservation number is "0 to 2" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 90 seconds" are defined, and when the special figure 1 reservation number is "0 to 2" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined. Also, when the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined, and when the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is defined.

Furthermore, when the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined, and when the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is defined.

Here, in the eighth control example, the special symbol lottery is executed in accordance with the order (winning order) in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641, and the right second ball entrance 1640. It is configured to select a variation pattern based on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired, and the variation pattern with a shorter variation time when the number of each special figure reservation is greater than when the number is small. is configured to be easily selected. By constructing in this way, a state in which a large number of reserved special symbols is obtained makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery in a shorter fluctuation time, so that the situation in which both the number of reserved special symbols 1 and the number of reserved special symbols 2 reach the upper limit number can be made difficult to occur.

By constructing in this way, the game balls are made to flow into the distribution unit 1064 in a state where both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number have reached the upper limit number, and by varying the position of the distribution member 900, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the game for continuously acquiring the special figure reservation of the same type.

In addition, even if the special figure pending number is close to the upper limit number, it may be possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time with a low probability (eg, 1/100). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a period in which game balls are easily made to flow into the distribution unit 1064 in a state in which the special figure reservation number has temporarily reached the upper limit number.

Next, when the time saving type is "time saving B8", various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the values of the special figure 1 reservation number (0 to 4), the special figure 2 reservation number (0 to 4), and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Although detailed explanation is omitted, various short variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, it is easier to select a variation pattern corresponding to a longer variation time (90 seconds) than when the big win is not won, as in the above control examples.

The time saving type selection 8 table 202gf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the time saving type that is set when the time saving type is won, and is provided instead of the time saving type selection 5 table 202df (see FIG. 248 (b)) in the fifth control example described above.

Here, with reference to Drawing 336 (b), detailed contents of time saving classification selection 8 table 202gf are explained. FIG. 336(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection 8 table 202gf.

As shown in FIG. 336(b), in the eighth control example, it is configured so that the time reduction can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (see FIG. 335(a)).

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special Figure 1 (first special symbol)", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "0 to 95", the time saving type "Time saving A8a", and the time saving type "Time saving B8" is defined for the range of "96 to 99". The time saving type “time saving A8b” is defined for the value of “99”, and the time saving type “time saving B8” is defined for the value “99”.

Here, in the eighth control example, when "time reduction A8 (time reduction A8a, time reduction A8b)" is set as the time reduction type, a disadvantageous time reduction state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state is set, and when "time reduction B8" is set, an advantageous time reduction state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. Various control contents in the disadvantageous time-saving state, that is, the control contents for executing the game in the high probability state of the normal symbol so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal state, will be omitted in order to adopt each technique described in each control example described above. It may be executed in an open pattern, or may be configured so that a longer variation time than the normal state is easily selected as the variation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, the definition of the disadvantageous time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state includes not only the technical idea of making the special symbol lottery more difficult to execute than the normal state, but also the technical idea of disadvantageous to the player for the privilege given based on the special symbol lottery to be executed even if the special symbol lottery is executed with the same ease or slightly more difficult to execute in the normal state.

When "shortening of working hours A8a" is set, that is, 95% of the time when shorting of working hours is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a short of working hours state is set. Then, as conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state, a first time-saving end condition established when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state reaches 100 times and a second time-saving end condition established when the special symbol lottery executed after the time-saving state is set is a special figure 1 lottery are set. In other words, when two special figure 1 reservations are obtained in succession, that is, when the special figure 1 lottery is continuously executed, the second time saving end condition is established.

By constructing in this way, when a special figure 1 lottery is won and a disadvantageous time-saving state is set, when the type of the special symbol lottery executed next to the special figure 1 lottery that is won at that time is the special figure 1 lottery, the disadvantageous time-saving state can be terminated by the first special figure lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, and a normal state can be set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the aim that the second time saving end condition is met before the first time saving end condition is met.

In the eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be satisfied according to the type of the first special drawing lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, but before the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, if it can be satisfied according to the execution order of the special symbol lottery to be executed, other contents may be defined as the second time-saving end condition.

For example, a second time-saving end condition may be defined that is established when a plurality of special symbol lotteries are executed according to a predetermined rule during a disadvantageous time-saving state, or a second time-saving end condition that is established when each variation pattern of special symbol variations for indicating the results of a plurality of consecutive special symbol lotteries or the results of a plurality of continuous special symbol lotteries corresponds to a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the disadvantageous time saving state ends.

That is, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in the eighth control example, when the time reduction is won in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) lottery, the advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set more easily than when the time saving is won in the special figure 2 (second special symbol) lottery (the time saving B8 is easier to select). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

FIG. 334(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 334(b), it differs from the RAM 203 (see FIG. 244(b)) in the fifth control example described above in that a variation execution flag 203ga, a variation order storage area 203gb, and a time saving flag 203gc are added. The rest is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation execution flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is preferentially set.

The variable order storage area 203gb is an area for storing the winning order for each reserved data (reserved design) stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203gb, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in order of winning. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time reduction flag 203gc is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which a disadvantageous time reduction state (time reduction state in which the time reduction type "time reduction A8" is set) can be shortened, and is set to ON when the unfavorable time reduction state can be shortened. While the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, a process for determining whether or not a condition (second time saving end condition) for shortening the disadvantageous time saving state is established is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338, the details of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 337(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 337(a), the ROM 222 in the eighth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga is added.

The look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the look-ahead suspension effect (see FIG. 333(a)) executed as a look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect) for showing the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure suspension. In the eighth control example, by executing the look-ahead processing, the special symbol reservation corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be specifiable, and the look-ahead suspension performance can be executed for the special symbol retention.

Here, the detailed contents of the prefetch suspension mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 338 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the prefetch suspension mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 338, in the look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga, each parameter is defined so that the display mode of the look-ahead design is determined based on the special figure type corresponding to the look-ahead suspension performance target special figure suspension, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) corresponding to the special figure suspension, and the value of the obtained performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the special figure type is "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" and the look-ahead result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 79", and "3 stars" for the range of "80 to 99". "2 stars" for the range of "49" and "1 star" for the range of "50 to 99" are defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern, respectively, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving A8a" or "out", "1 star" is defined as the display mode for the reserved pattern for the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f of "0 to 99".

In other words, as the display mode of reserved patterns to be the target of the prefetch reserved performance, the prefetch reserved performance capable of suggesting to the player that a special pattern lottery advantageous to the player is executed in a normal state is executed as the number of displayed stars increases.

In the eighth control example, the display command is set so that the display mode selected using the look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga becomes the display mode of the reserved pattern to be targeted as it is, and the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode showing the effect result of the look-ahead suspension effect. Alternatively, the look-ahead suspension performance may be executed so as to change the display mode of the special figure suspension to be the target of the look-ahead suspension performance in stages so as to finally obtain the stored final performance result. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the special symbol lottery to be the object of the prefetching suspension performance to be variable every time the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be the target of the prefetching suspension performance is executed, and in this case, the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to the display mode corresponding to the final performance result when many special symbol lotteries are executed from when the foreseeing suspension performance is executed to when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol reservation to be actually targeted is executed. It is good to configure so that it can be easily changed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the intention of always acquiring a large number of reserved special symbols. In addition, since the performance result of the prefetching suspension performance can be easily changed based on the acquired special figure suspension number when the prefetching suspension performance is executed, for example, it is possible to easily execute the prefetching suspension performance rich in variation without determining whether or not the prefetching suspension performance is executed according to the acquired special figure suspension number, or without varying the content of the performance result of the prefetching suspension performance.

When the special figure type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the look-ahead result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as "two stars" for the range of "0 to 99" as the display mode of the reserved design, and when the lookahead result is "time saving B8", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 29" for the range of "two stars" and "30 to 99". ``1 star'' is defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern respectively, and when the look-ahead result is ``time saving A8b'' or ``missing'', ``1 star'' is defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern for the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f of ``0 to 99''.

In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 335(a) and 336(b), the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery among the special symbol lotteries executed in the normal state. As shown in FIG. It is configured so that it is easy to obtain a good effect result (a display mode with a large number of stars).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the look-ahead result in more detail by referring to the performance result of the look-ahead suspension performance and the type of the special figure suspension to be the performance target.

In the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 333, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation are configured to be displayed in different display modes so that the player can grasp the type of special figure reservation that has already been acquired. may be configured to be displayed in the display mode. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the second time saving end condition is established, and to make it difficult to predict the result of prefetching based on the display mode of the prefetching suspension performance. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol reservation targeted for the look-ahead reservation performance is actually executed.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, the look-ahead suspension performance is configured to be executable only for the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, but without being limited to this, the performance (pseudo-lookahead suspension performance) equivalent to the lookahead suspension performance (pseudo-lookahead suspension performance) can also be executed for the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (unfavorable time saving state).

When the pseudo look-ahead suspension performance is executed, a display mode is determined for a specific suspension pattern in the same manner as the look-ahead suspension performance, and as shown in FIG. Then, when the special pattern lottery corresponding to the specific reserved pattern targeted for the pseudo-prefetching reserved performance is executed, it is preferable to display the performance result of the pseudo-prefetching reserved performance for informing the player that the pseudo-prefetching reserved performance has been executed as the performance to be executed during the special figure fluctuation period.

By constructing in this way, even when the unfavorable time-saving state continues for a long time, it is possible to easily provide a player with a game that does not get bored by executing the pseudo-read-ahead suspension performance equivalent to the look-ahead suspension performance. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure reservation with the result of the look-ahead winning as a jackpot winning is more likely to be the object of the pseudo look-ahead withholding performance than the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure reservation with the result of the look-ahead not being the big winning. As a result, even when the performance result of the pseudo-prefetching suspension performance for informing the player that the pseudo-prefetching suspension performance is being executed is displayed, the possibility of winning a big win can be increased, so that the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from being remarkably lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example has a distribution state storage area 223ga, a hold state storage area 223gb, and a flag 223gc during unfavorable time reduction with respect to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 249(b)) of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example. The difference is that the Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The distribution state storage area 223ga is a storage area for storing information for indicating the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 provided in the distribution unit 1064 . The distribution state storage area 223ga stores information for identifying which of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 the game ball that has flowed into the distribution unit 1064 next enters.

In the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a ball entry sensor 1064a is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through the passage port 1064b of the sorting unit 1064, and the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a. Based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 and the detection result of the entering ball sensor 1064a, the position (sorting state) of the sorting member 900 can be specified, and the image icon corresponding to the specified result can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see display area Dm18 in FIG. 333(b)).

This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp which ball entrance (the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641) the game ball is guided to when the game ball is flowed into the distribution unit 1064 next time.

Therefore, for example, a left-handed game is executed for causing a plurality of game balls to flow into the distribution unit 1064 during the jackpot game, and from the form of the image icon displayed according to the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900, it is determined to which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 1641) the game ball that has flowed into the distribution unit 1064 will enter, and finally obtained among the already acquired special figure reservations. It is possible to easily create a sorting state in which game balls are guided to a ball entrance capable of acquiring the lottery right of the same special symbol type as the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol reservation (special symbol reservation in which the winning information is stored in the eighth storage area of the winning information storage area 223b).

In the eighth control example, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 can be specified based on the detection result of the entering ball sensor 1064a and the information included in the prize winning command.

The suspension mode storage area 223gb is a storage area for temporarily storing the suspension mode set by the look-ahead suspension performance, and the suspension mode (display mode) selected by referring to the look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga is stored together with information for specifying the corresponding special figure suspension. Then, in the pending number display update process (see S4106 in FIG. 346) executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the stored information is read.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the execution of a new look-ahead suspension effect is restricted during the period when information is stored in the suspension mode storage area 223gb. In other words, during the period when the prefetching pending effect is executed, the time saving state ends before all the special pending effects that have been acquired are consumed, and the normal state is set. It is configured not to execute the process of specifying the content of transition of the game state based on the look-ahead result of the special figure reservation after the figure reservation. As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unfavorable time-saving medium flag 223gc is a flag for indicating that the disadvantageous time-saving state is set among the time-saving states, and is set to ON when the time-saving type “time-saving A8a” or “time-saving A8b” is set. Then, in the winning command process 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351), when a general pattern winning information command indicating that a long opening per game is executed is received, the setting status of the unfavorable time reduction medium flag 223gc is determined (S4451 in FIG. 351), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451 in FIG. 351: Yes), to suggest that a general pattern long opening per game (electric churong opening) will be executed A display command corresponding to the effect of is set (S4405 in FIG. 351). As a result, as shown in FIG. 332, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be established. And when it determines with having received the state command which shows that the disadvantageous time saving state ended (S9051 of FIG. 348: Yes), it is set to OFF (S9052 of FIG. 348).

<About control processing contents of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 339 to 345, among the control processing contents of main controller 110 in the present eighth control example, differences from the fifth control example described above will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example differs from the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example in the processing of determining the execution order of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the processing of determining whether or not the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established, and the processing executed when the game ball starts winning.

Specifically, the special symbol variation process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339) is performed instead of the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and the start winning process 8 (see S10195 in FIG. 344) is performed instead of the starting winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258). Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 339, the contents of the special symbol variation process 8 (S10154) will be described. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 8 (S10154). As shown in FIG. 339, the special symbol variation process 8 (S10154) differs from the above-described special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) in that the contents of the process executed to start a new special symbol variation and the contents of the process performed when the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed are different, and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 8 (S10154) is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S203 as the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) are executed. After that, the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) is executed. Details of this variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, but a process for determining the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is executed.

When the processing of S10251 is finished, next, it is determined whether the type of the special symbol variation to be newly executed is the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) (S10252), and when it is determined that it is the special symbol 2 (S10252: Yes), S205 to S207, which are the same as the special symbol variation processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and S251, S252 are performed, End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10252, when it is determined that it is not special symbol 2 (S10252: No), next, it is determined whether the type of the special symbol variation to be newly executed is special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S10253), and when it is determined that it is special symbol 1 (S10253: Yes), S211 to S2 which are the same as the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). 13, and S251 and S252 are executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the processing of S10253, when it is determined that it is not special figure 1 (S10253: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Also, in the process of S202, if it is determined that it is in the process of varying (S202: Yes), for the same process as the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), update process 5 (S253 in FIG. 252) instead of updating process 8 (S10254) is executed, and time saving setting process 8 (S10255) is executed instead of time saving setting process 5 (S254 in FIG. 252), End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, detailed description will be given of the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339). FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the details of the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251). This variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) is a process for determining whether the special symbol variation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is to be performed based on the values of various counters stored in which execution area, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251), first, the variation execution flag 203ga is initialized by setting 0 (S10271), and the data in the variation order storage area 203gb is acquired (S10272). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203gb is shifted (S10273). In the process of S310273, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203gb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→holding 3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→5th area, 7th area→holding 6th area, 8th area→holding 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S10274).

In the process of S10274, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S10274: Yes), the variation execution flag 203ga is set to the variation execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S10275), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special figure 1 (1) (S10274: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special figure 2 (2) (S10276). In the process of S10276, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (2) (S10276: Yes), the variation execution flag 203gb is set to the variation execution with the special figure 2 (S10277), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

In the process of S10276, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 2 (2) (S10276: No), since there is no reserved ball to be varied, the process ends with the variation execution flag 203gb remaining in the initial state, and returns to the special symbol variation process.

As described above, by executing the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251), the various pending memories (special figure pending) stored in the variable order storage area 203gb can be varied in the order in which they are stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the process content of the time saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is demonstrated. Figure 341 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 8 (S8076). This short time lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed in the special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) of the special symbol variation process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339).

Specifically, when the time saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed, regardless of the type of special symbol fluctuation executed this time (S8101 for determining the type of special symbol fluctuation to be executed in the time saving lottery process 5 (see FIG. 254)), the same S8103 to S8106 processes as the time saving lottery process 5 (see S8101 in FIG. 254) described above are executed, and this process ends.

That is, in the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 335(b), regardless of the type of special symbol, when the normal state is set, the time saving lottery (judgment of time saving winning) is configured to be executed. Therefore, in time saving lottery process 8 (S8076), regardless of the type of the newly executed special symbol variation, it is determined whether or not to execute the time saving lottery (judgment of time saving winning) by determining only the game state at the time when the special symbol variation is newly executed. are

In this way, in the time saving lottery process 8 (S8076), the process of determining whether the execution condition (time saving lottery execution condition) of the time saving lottery (determination of time saving lottery) is satisfied and the processing of executing the time saving lottery (judgment of time saving lottery) when the time saving lottery execution condition is satisfied. For example, in addition to the normal state, when it is configured to execute the time-saving lottery even when it is set in a specific game state (for example, disadvantageous time-saving state, etc.), the process of S8103 may be added to determine whether the disadvantageous time-saving medium flag 223gc is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 342, the processing contents of update processing 8 (S273) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of update processing 8 (S273). This update process 8 (S273) is different from the update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above in that a new process is added as a process for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, when the update process 8 (S273) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351), and if it is determined that the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351: Yes), the time saving flag 203gc is set to OFF (S8352), then it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (S8353), and the time If it is determined that the short end condition is satisfied (S8353: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S8354), the command indicating the time saving is determined (S8355), and then the same S8301 to S8306 processing as the update processing 5 (see S253 in FIG. 342) is executed to update the probability variable counter 203i, the time saving counter 203h value, and various values. A state command indicating the later game state and the presence or absence of shortening of working hours is set (S8356), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S8351, if the time saving flag 203gc is not set to ON (S8351: No), in the process of S8353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S8353: No), the process of S8301 is performed as it is, and the processes of S8301 to S8306 that are the same as the above-described update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 342) are executed, 03i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, the game state after updating various values, and the state command indicating the presence or absence of time saving reduction are set (S8356), and this processing ends.

As shown in the update process 8 (S273), in the eighth control example, when the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, that is, when a disadvantageous time saving state in which the time saving type "time saving A8" is set is set, it is configured so that a special time saving end condition can be satisfied only for a predetermined period after the disadvantageous time saving state is set.

Specifically, when a time-saving lottery wins and a disadvantageous time-saving state is set, a time-saving end condition is established when a special pattern variation of the same type as the special symbol type winning a time-saving state is executed as the first special symbol variation after the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten and end the disadvantageous time saving state, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the process content of the time saving setting process 8 (S10255) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process 8 (S10255). This time saving setting process 8 (S10255) differs from the above-described time saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in that a process (S8371) for setting the time saving flag 203gc to ON when the time saving is won is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Specifically, after executing the processes of S8351 and S8352 which are the same as the time saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257), the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8371), then S8353 and S8354 are executed, and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, among the cases where the time saving state is set, only when the time saving state is elected (only when the time saving lottery is elected), the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, so the updating process 8 (See S273 in FIG. 342). (executed during the set time saving state (game time saving state)) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 343, in the eighth control example, the time saving flag 203gc is always set to ON when the time saving is won, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the time saving flag 203gc to ON when it is determined whether or not the disadvantageous time saving state (time saving type "working time saving A8") has been set, and it is determined that the disadvantageous working time saving state (working time saving type "working time saving A8") has been set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the start-on process 8 (S10195) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-on process 8 (S10195). This start-up process 8 (S10195) differs from the above-described start-up prize process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) in that a process for storing information in the variation order storage area 203gb is added and the processing contents of the look-ahead process are changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the starting entry process 8 (S10195) is executed, the same S601 to S651 processes as the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) are executed, and after finishing the process of S651, the special figure 1 (1) is set to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203gb (S671), and the process proceeds to S607. In the process of S671, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203gb in the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of variation, that is, the starting port fluctuates the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as in the eighth control example, the variation can be started in the order of winning the starting port.

Next, the processing of S607 to S652, which is the same as the starting winning processing 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258), is executed. When the processing of S652 is finished, the special figure 2 (2) is set to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203gb (S672), the look-ahead processing 8 is executed (S673), and this processing is finished. In the process of S672, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203gb in the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of variation, that is, the starting port fluctuates the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as in the eighth control example, the variation can be started in the order of winning the starting port.

Next, referring to FIG. 345, the contents of the prefetching process 8 (S673) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 8 (S673). This look-ahead process 8 (S673) is different from the look-ahead process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 259) in the above-described fifth control example in that the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the read-ahead winning information is executed is specified, and a winning command including the specified information (information indicating the game state at the time of the pending change) is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 355, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. This eighth control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that liquid crystal effect execution management processing 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354), preceding winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in FIG. 355), command determination processing 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and variable display setting processing 8 are executed as processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 346) of the sound lamp control device 113. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 346, the processing contents of the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 346 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the main processing. As shown in FIG. 346, in the tenth control example, a process that differs from the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example in that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354), the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182 in FIG. 355), the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and the variable display setting process 8 are executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the contents of the command determination process 8 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (S4183). In this command determination process 8 (S4183), the status command reception process 5 (S4282) is replaced with the state command reception process 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348), and the winning command process 8 (S4292 in FIG. 351) is replaced with the winning command process (S4212) in the command determination process 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example. The difference is that the jackpot related process 8 (S4293) is executed instead, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 348, the contents of the state command reception process 8 (S4291) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291). As shown in FIG. 348, in the state command reception process 8 (S4291), in contrast to the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above, when it is determined that the game state has changed to the normal state based on the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 (S9003: Yes), the processing content to be executed and the game state changes based on the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110. The difference is that the content of the processing executed when it is determined that the state has been changed to the short state (S9005: Yes) is different. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 8 (S4291) is executed, the same processes from S9001 to S9003 as the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S9003, if it is determined that the gaming state has changed to the normal state (S9003: Yes), then it is determined whether the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S9051). 9053), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9051, when it is determined that the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is not set to ON (S9051: No), the processing of S9052 is skipped and this processing ends. Details of the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S9003, if it is determined that it has not been changed to the normal state (S9003: No), then it is determined whether the gaming state has been changed to the time saving state (S9005), and if it is determined that it has not been changed (S9005: No), S9007 to S9010, which are the same as the state command reception processing 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above, are executed, and this processing is performed. exit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9005, when it is determined that the state has been changed to the time saving state, the time saving state effect setting processing 8 is executed (S9054), and then this processing ends. The contents of the time saving state effect setting process 8 (S9054) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, the processing contents of the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) executed in the state command reception process 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be described. FIG. 349 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053). This normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) is different from the above-described normal state effect setting process (S9004 in FIG. 264) in that the processing content in the case of shifting from the disadvantageous time saving state to the normal state is added, and the other processing content is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) is executed, first, the game state (game state before change) set before the game state set this time is read from the subordinate state setting area 223g (S9101), and it is determined whether the game state before change is a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151). In the processing of S9151, when it is determined that it is in a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151: Yes), the display command for the production mode corresponding to the chance variation is set (S9152), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9151, if it is determined that it is not in a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151: No), the same S9102 to S9104 processing as the above-described normal state effect setting process (see S9004 in FIG. 264) is executed, and this process ends.

By setting the display command for the performance mode in the processing in S9152, the background image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the normal state is set based on the establishment of the time saving end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation to be executed next is the special symbol variation (lottery) to be executed in the normal state.

Next, with reference to Drawing 350, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 8 (S9054) performed in state command reception processing 8 (S4291 of Drawing 348) are explained. Figure 350 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 8 (S9054). This time saving state effect setting process 8 (S9054) is different from the above-described time saving state effect setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the normal state to the time saving state are changed, and other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving state production setting process 8 (S9054) is executed, first, the same S9301 to S9304 processes as the time saving state production setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) are executed. Then, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of working hours included in the command received this time is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9305). ), the flag 223gc during unfavorable time reduction is set to ON (S9382), a display command for indicating the effect mode corresponding to the unfavorable time reduction is set (S9383), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9381, when it is determined that the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is not the time saving A8 (S9382: Yes), the processes of S9382 and S9383 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the winning command process 8 (S4292) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 351 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning command process 8 (S4292). This winning command process 8 (S4292) is different from the above-described winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) in that the processing contents when receiving the winning information command for the general figure and the winning information command for the special figure are changed. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning command process 8 (S4292) is executed, first, the same processes of S4401 to S4403 as the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) are executed. Then, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the winning information command for the normal pattern received this time contains the winning information indicating that the normal pattern lottery will be won (S4403; Yes), Next, it is determined whether the flag 223gc is set to on (S4451), and if it is determined to be set to on (S4451: Yes), the electric chew long open is suggested. A display command for displaying is set (S4405).

That is, in the eighth control example, when information (specific normal pattern winning information) indicating that the normal pattern long opening winning game is executed is included in the normal pattern winning prize information acquired in the state where the disadvantageous time saving state is set, an effect for suggesting the normal pattern long opening winning (electric churning long opening) is performed to the player. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player who is executing the game in the unfavorable time saving state that an opportunity to continuously execute the same type of special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) will come before the actual execution of the normal pattern long open winning game, so that the player can play the game while expecting the unfavorable time saving state to end (shorten).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured such that the game method (left-handed game) executed when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set is different from the game method (right-handed game) executed during the normal long open winning game, as in the eighth control example, it is possible to notify the player that the normal long open winning game will be executed before the normal long open winning game is actually executed. Since it is possible to set a grace period for changing the game method, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the game corresponding to the normal figure long open per game.

In addition, in the eighth control example, it is configured so that an effect for suggesting a normal pattern long opening hit (electric churong opening) is executed based on the reception of the winning information command related to the normal symbol. In other words, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the normal symbol lottery winning per normal long open is executed before the normal symbol lottery winning per normal long open is executed, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be able to suggest to the player that the normal long open winning game will be executed using the period from the execution of the normal symbol lottery winning per normal long open until the lottery result is stopped and displayed (normal per long opening fluctuation period).

Further, each time a prize information command relating to a normal pattern is received, it is determined whether or not information indicating that a normal pattern long open hitting game is executed is included, and when it is determined that information indicating that a normal pattern long open hitting game is executed is included, a calculating means capable of calculating a period until the normal pattern long open hitting game is executed is provided, and based on the period calculated by the calculating means, a period in which an effect for suggesting to the player that the normal pattern long open hitting game is executed is determined. It may be configured to In this case, for example, when the variation period per normal pattern is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), the performance may be executed from the stage before the variation per normal pattern is executed, for example, from the stage of receiving the winning information command related to the normal pattern indicating that the game with long open per normal pattern is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the processing contents of special figure winning information command processing 8 (S4451) executed in winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) will be described. Figure 352 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of winning information command processing 8 for special figure (S4451). This special figure winning information command process 8 (S4451) is a process executed when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, and based on information included in the winning information command, for example, information for indicating winning, processing for setting an effect (prefetching effect) effect for suggesting information included in the winning information command to the player before the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed.

In the eighth control example, by executing this special figure winning information command process 8 (S4451), it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved symbols in correspondence with the information for indicating winning included in the winning information command, or to vary the display mode of the reserved symbols in correspondence with the information for indicating the special symbol type included in the winning information command.

Further, in the eighth control example, in order to suggest to the player which special symbol holding corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed in a specific game state (normal state) is received, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the received prize information command is executed can be determined in advance when the winning information command related to the special symbol is received.

By constructing in this way, by confirming the display mode of the special symbol reservation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol reservation is executed.

Specifically, when the special figure winning information command process 8 (S4451) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted (specified) based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551: Yes), then it is determined whether the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4552). Predict whether or not conditions are established (S4553), and determine whether or not the time-saving end conditions are established (whether the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command received this time is a special symbol lottery executed in a normal state) based on the result of whether or not the time-saving end conditions are established predicted in the process of S4553 (S4554).

In the process of S4554, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (S4554: Yes), the display mode (the number of stars) of the corresponding reserved pattern is determined by referring to the look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga (S4555), and the information for indicating the determined reserved mode (display mode of the reserved pattern) is stored in the reserved mode storage area 223gb (S4556). Then, based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command (including the display command for indicating the display mode determined in the processing of S4555) is set (S4507), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4551, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is not greater than 0 (S4551: No), in the process of S4552, when it is determined that the flag 223gc during unfavorable time saving is not set to ON (S4552: No), in the process of S4554, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S4554: No), the process of S4507 is performed as it is. to

Next, the jackpot related process 8 (S4293) executed in the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347) will be described. This jackpot related process 8 (S4293) differs from the above-described jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) in that the ending process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 180) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4714 in FIG. 180: Yes), and otherwise the same process is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the processing executed in ending processing 8 (S4293) will be described. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process 8 (S4293).

The ending process 8 (S4293) is different from the above-described ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the next variable special figure type notification effect for notifying the player of the type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the big win game (after the end of the small win game) is added.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353, when the ending process 8 (S4293) is executed, after executing the same S4801 to S4803 processing as the above-described ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181), the special figure type (special design type) of the next variation is read based on the information stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a (S4851), and a display command for indicating the read special figure type is set. (S4852). Then, execution of the ending display is set (S4804), and this processing ends.

By setting the display command for indicating the special figure type read out in the processing of S4852, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the processing of S4851, if it is determined that no information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, that is, if no special figure reservation is acquired, the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery that is executed first after the end of the big win game cannot be notified to the player based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The processing for displaying the display mode for showing is skipped.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, based on the processing result of the preceding winning detection processing 8 (see S4182 in FIG. 355) to be described later, the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery to be executed next is predicted, and a display command for displaying the display mode based on the prediction result may be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181) will be described. FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181), a process for updating the value of a variable time counter (not shown) in which a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, and a process for determining the effect mode corresponding to the updated value is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S55401), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S55401: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5402), the effect mode corresponding to the updated counter value is set (determined) (S55402), and other effect-related update processing is executed (S5407), and the update result is obtained. A display command is set to indicate the mode of presentation based on (S5408), and the process ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, suggestive performance for suggesting the current game state to the player) when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after execution of the special symbol variation. In this case, regardless of the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time, it is preferable that the execution opportunity of the suggestion performance can be set, and the suggestion performance is executed only when the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time is longer than the elapsed time of the execution trigger of the suggestion performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the suggestive effect is executed according to the set variation pattern.

Further, the display area in which the suggestive performance is executed may be configured to overlap the display area in which the variable performance is executed, and the situation in which the performance contents of the suggestive performance can be visually recognized by the player and the situation in which the performance contents of the suggestive performance are difficult to see (not visible) can be created by the performance mode of the variable performance being executed at the timing when the execution opportunity of the suggestive performance is established and the suggestive performance is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加By constructing in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the suggestive performance visible to the player is executed according to the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and the contents of the variable performance being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 354, as the processing content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181), the value of the variation time counter in which the value corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation is set is updated, and the processing content of setting (determining) the effect mode corresponding to the updated value is shown.

For example, a process of updating the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time from the start of a big winning game or a process of updating the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time from execution of a specific performance may be executed, and a process of setting (determining) a performance mode corresponding to the update result may be executed. Further, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181), the values of various counters are updated, it is determined whether or not the update result satisfies the execution condition, and if the execution condition is satisfied, only the process of setting the flag to indicate that the execution condition is satisfied is executed, and on the condition that the flag for indicating that the execution condition is satisfied is set to ON, another process (for example, the variable display setting process) may be configured to execute the process for executing the specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the contents of the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flow chart showing the details of the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182). This preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, when a ball is detected by the entering ball sensor 1064a, the process for predicting whether the entrance into which the detected game ball can enter is the first ball entering hole 64a or the second ball entering hole 1641, and actually which ball enters. When a ball enters the mouth, a process for specifying the state (position) of the sorting member 900 is executed to indicate which ball entrance the game ball entering the sorting device 1064 next can enter.

In the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182), first, whether or not the ball has entered the sorting device 1064 is determined by the entering ball sensor 1064a (S9901). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the sorting device 1064 (S9901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the sorting device 1064 (S9901: Yes), it is predicted whether the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902). As a method of predicting the destination of the incoming ball, a sensor (not shown) mounted on the shaft of the distribution member 900 for detecting the tilt is used to calculate the orientation of the distribution member 900 from the tilt. The detection of the direction of the distribution member 900 for predicting the destination of the ball may not be performed by a sensor that detects the inclination, but may be performed using, for example, a magnet and a Hall sensor. In addition, since the direction of the distribution member 900 is alternately left and right as described above, the winning destination may be predicted based on the number of winning times, in which case the sensor can be eliminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S9902 (S9903), and when it is predicted that the ball will not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: No), the process proceeds to S9905. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: Yes), the second ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball entering the allocation device 1064 can enter the second ball entrance 1641 (high possibility) is stored in the allocation state storage area 223ga (S9904), and the process proceeds to S9905.

In the processing of S9905, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the second ball entrance 1641 by the processing of S9902 (S9905), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902: Yes), the first ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball entering the sorting device 1064 can enter the first ball entrance 64 (high possibility) is stored in the sorting state storage area 223ga (S9906), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the eighth control example, determination of time-saving winning is executed by special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and it is configured so that time-saving winning can be achieved with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel playability such that the special symbol lottery in the normal state is difficult to execute.

In addition, when the short-time winning is determined by the judgment of the short-time winning, either a disadvantageous short-time state which is more disadvantageous than the normal state or an advantageous short-time state which is more advantageous than the normal state is set. Then, when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the special symbol lottery in the normal state is not executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied. As time-saving end conditions, a time-saving end condition established when the special pattern lottery is executed in a specific order and a time-saving end condition established when the number of execution times of the special pattern lottery reaches a predetermined number can be set.

Therefore, when the unfavorable time-saving state is set, the more the special pattern lottery is executed, the easier it is to establish the time-saving end condition, so that the player who is playing the game in the disadvantageous time-saving state can be made to continue playing the game.

In addition, in the eighth control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time saving state, it is possible to set a variation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times.

In this case, for example, the time saving type can be set as time saving AA8, time saving BB8, and time saving CC8, and the time saving number "100 times" as the change number end condition for the time saving AA8, and the time saving number "200 times" as the change number end condition for the time saving BB8. It is preferable to configure the time saving CC 8 to set the number of times of time saving "300 times" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations. By comprising in this way, the continuation period of a disadvantageous time-saving state can be varied according to the time-saving classification set.

In this case, as the number of remaining time reductions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of remaining time reductions corresponding to the case where the number of time reductions "100 times" is set can be displayed as an initial display, and the number of remaining time reductions displayed may be increased according to the progress of the game in the disadvantageous time reduction state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the disadvantageous time saving state ends.

In the eighth control example, when the disadvantageous time-saving lottery is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous than the normal state is executed even in the first special symbol lottery until the disadvantageous time-saving state ends. In other words, according to the result of one special symbol lottery, a penalty can be imposed on other special symbol lotteries.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 356 to 375. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example adopts a specification in which a high-probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game when a game ball enters (passes through) a specific area (V gate) provided in a game area (an area in the variable prize winning device (attacker) 3650 that is opened during the jackpot game), similarly to the above-described fifth control example. Further, similarly to the fifth control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is out, it is configured to be able to determine the time-saving symbol winning.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is configured to set a game state (second time-saving state) that is most advantageous to the player when a time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state. By constructing in this way, a player who is playing in a normal state can concurrently execute a game aiming at winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery and shifting the game state to a probability variable state which is more advantageous than the normal state while acquiring a prize ball by the jackpot game, and a game aiming at setting a game state (second time-saving state) most advantageous to the player by winning the special symbol lottery in the normal state and setting a game state (second time-saving state) most advantageous to the player, in parallel. .

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, the opportunity to shift to the game state (second time saving state) that is most advantageous to the player is configured so that only time saving winning is selected, and determination of time saving winning (time saving lottery) is performed only in the normal state, so that when a probability changing state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set, the game state cannot be shifted from the probability changing state to the second time saving state.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the variable probability state and the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the time reduction state are configured to be different in order to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the second time reduction state than in the variable probability state.

Specifically, during the variable probability state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state, and the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery. In addition, during the time saving state in which the high probability state of normal patterns is set, the special pattern lottery is more easily executed than in the normal state, and the second special pattern lottery is more easily executed than the first special pattern lottery. Then, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

By constructing in this way, the probability variable state and the time saving state can be set as game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the second time saving state can be set as the time saving state more advantageous to the player than the probability changing state.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the contents of various control processes are partially changed. This is the change. It should be noted that descriptions of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Ninth Control Example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 356 to 361. FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifth control example in that various non-electric openings are provided inside the normal electric accessory 3071 (the game area where the game ball can flow (becomes easier to flow) when the normal electric accessory 3071 is in an open state), and when a game ball enters the various non-electric openings. There is a big difference in that various non-electrical accessories that are activated by balled game balls are provided, and that a ball entrance is provided that allows a ball to be entered by activating the various non-electrical accessories.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 356, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, a non-electric role (special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) associated with the ball entry means (right first ball entrance 3064) capable of acquiring the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserve), and a non-motorized role (special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) associated with the ball entry means (second ball entrance 3065) capable of acquiring the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserve). An electric accessory (non-electric accessory 3065a) is provided, and any non-electric accessory is configured to operate when a game ball enters a corresponding non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) provided inside the normal electric accessory 3071.

Then, according to the type of normal pattern per game that is likely to be executed when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of the normal pattern is set as the game state, the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 during the normal pattern per game is easy to enter into the special figure 1 non-electric work opening 3073a, and the second general figure per game that is easy to enter into the special figure 2 non-electric work opening 3073b is executed. configured as possible.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, when the normal symbol high probability state is set, the normal symbol per game is more likely to be executed than when the normal symbol low probability state is set. A time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is easily executed and a time-saving state (second time-saving state) that makes it easier to execute a second normal-pattern game than a first normal-pattern winning game (second time-shortening state) can be determined according to a game state set when winning a normal-pattern winning game.

By constructing in this way, the type of the special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbols can be varied depending on the type of the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set.

Also, in the ninth control example, the lottery is more advantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player execute a game with a different degree of advantage according to the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player can be interested in not only whether the high probability state of the normal pattern is set but also the type of the set game state.

In addition, in the ninth control example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed, and when the probability variable state is set, the first special symbol lottery is easily executed. Then, in a part of the time when the time saving state is set (when the second time saving state is set), as a time saving end condition for ending the second time saving state, a condition (the number of times of time saving is 10000 times) which is difficult to be satisfied is set. That is, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to continue substantially until the next jackpot game is executed. Further, when a big win is won in a second special pattern lottery which is likely to be executed during the second time saving state, the second time saving state is set after the big win game is finished with a high probability (90%).

By constructing in this way, even in a time-saving state in which the probability of winning a big win in a special pattern lottery is lower than in the variable probability state, the player can easily play a game aiming at the next big win game without terminating the game state, and a privilege given when winning a big win can be made more advantageous to the player than in the variable probability state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 356, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 356 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 356, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example (see FIG. 234) in that the configuration of the lower area and the right area of the game board 13 is different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 356, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to execute the first special symbol lottery can be obtained. In the right area of the game board 13 formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, an operating device 3070, a special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, a special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, and a through gate 67 are provided.

The operating device 3070 has a flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and has a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a and a special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b into which the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter. An ordinary electric accessory 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070 .

The normal electric accessary 3071 is opened by a normal pattern winning game which is executed when winning a normal pattern lottery (a lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67). In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 3071 based on the normal symbol winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 640a in the above-described fifth control example. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special diagram 1 non -electrical operation mouth 3073A is connected by a special map 1 non -electric object 3064a (not shown), and when the special map 1 non -electric actor 3064a is closed, when the game ball enters the special map 1 non -electric operation mouth 3073a, the operation mechanism is activated by the own weight of the entering the ball, which is a non -diagram. It is configured so that 3064a of electric writer 3064a is mechanically released. In other words, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for opening the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a.

Similarly, the special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown). . That is, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

In addition, the detailed description of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

In addition, as described above, the non-electrical accessories (Special Figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a and Special Figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a) are configured to open and close by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball, not by electrical control. Therefore, opening/closing control is not executed by the main controller 110 or the like of the pachinko machine 10, unlike the electric accessory that is electrically controlled to open/close (for example, the normal electric accessory 3071, the opening/closing door 3650f of the variable winning device 3650, etc.).

Therefore, in the ninth control example, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the actual operating status of each non-electric role item (special figure 1 non-electric role item 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role item 3065a) is provided, and each non-electric role item (special figure 1 non-electric role item 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role item 3065a) is configured to be able to detect the operating status (opening/closing status).

Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is operating (open), or the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is operating (open), The player is notified by the special figure 1 non-telegraphic notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegraphic notification lamp 3065b. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the operation status of each non-electric accessory in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the ninth control example, the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b are configured to notify the player whether or not the corresponding non-electric role product is operating (open), but a notification means capable of informing other situations may be provided. An informing means capable of informing (suggesting) the player whether the situation is likely to be activated may be provided. In this case, for example, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) to the player which non-electrical accessory is easily operated (into which non-electrical operation opening the game ball is easy to enter) the normal pattern winning game will be executed based on the normal pattern winning type set when winning the normal symbol lottery.

By configuring in this way, the timing before the special non-electric accessory is actually activated, for example, the first period from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the stop display of the result of the normal per drawing lottery, the second period from the stop display of the result of the normal per per drawing lottery to the execution of the normal per pattern game, the third period from the execution of the normal per pattern game until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, the third period from the execution of the normal per pattern game to the non-electric opening after the execution of the normal per game It is possible to notify the player of the type of the non-electric accessory to be operated (released) during any one of the fourth period until the ball enters, the fifth period from the entry of the game ball into the actuator 3070 until the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening, the sixth period from the entry of the game ball into the non-electrically operated opening until the non-electrically operated accessory is activated, or the total period obtained by selecting and combining a plurality of periods. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp (predict) the contents of the game to be executed later based on the contents suggested by the informing means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when executing the notification by the notification means in any period (corresponding to the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period) from the execution of the normal drawing lottery to the inflow of the game ball into the operating device 3070, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the content of the notification of the informing means. In other words, when an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) that makes it easy to open the non-electric role is set, when any one non-electric role (for example, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) is in operation, the game ball is entered into the ball entry means (for example, the right first ball entrance 3064) (when the first special symbol lottery is executed), the advantageous game state ends, but other non-electric roles (for example, When the game ball is entered into the ball entry means (second ball entrance 3065) that can be entered when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is operating (when the second special symbol lottery is executed), the notification by the notification means described above can be executed in a state where the advantageous game state is not terminated, so that the player can choose whether to continue the advantageous game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select the game method (whether or not game balls are to be shot), the results of games to be executed later can be greatly varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to play a more advantageous game.

Further, in this case, when a game ball is entered into one ball entering means, a game more advantageous to the player is executed than when a game ball is entered into another ball entering means, but the advantageous game state is easily ended, and when a game ball is entered into another ball entering means, a game which is more disadvantageous to the player is executed than when a game ball is entered into one ball entering means, but the advantageous game state is less likely to be ended. It is preferable to define the contents of a privilege (for example, a special symbol lottery) to be given when a game ball enters each ball entering means and the conditions for ending an advantageous game state.

Here, to specifically explain the detection sensor for detecting the operating status of each non-electric role object, the operating mechanism (special figure 1 operation mechanism 3074, special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075) that operates when a game ball that enters the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) is in contact. A means (proximity sensor) is provided, and when the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is positioned at the operating position (when the determination means determines based on the detection signal output from the detection means), it is configured to be able to specify that the non-electric accessory is open.

In addition, as a method for managing the operation status of each non-electric role, it is possible to use a method other than the method of detecting the actual operation status of the non-electric role 3065a as described above. It may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has entered b), and to specify the operation status of each non-electric accessory based on the determination result. In this case, the operation status of each non-electric role may be specified by determining whether or not the closing condition of each non-electric role is satisfied based on the operating status of the specified non-electric role and the acquired prize information. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means only for managing the operation status of the non-electric accessory, so the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to provide a management process for detecting the entry of a game ball into a ball entry means with different easiness of entry depending on whether the non-electrical accessory is operating or not, comparing the detection result with the content specified as the operation status of the non-electrical accessory, and determining whether the specified content is normal or not.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359, detailed contents of various configurations formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 357(a) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 357(a), a game ball downstream flow path is formed in the right area of the game board 13 in the vertical direction, and a game ball shot toward the right area (a game ball shot in a right-handed game) flows down the game ball downstream path and finally flows into the out port 66.

A plurality of nails are planted in the downstream direction of the game ball in the vertical direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 357), and by the plurality of implanted nails, the downstream channel of the game ball is divided into a left channel (a channel formed between the plurality of nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right channel (a channel formed on the right side of the plurality of nails).

As shown in FIG. 357(a), a plurality of pegs for dividing the game ball downstream channel into the left channel and the right channel are planted so as to form a passage area through which a game ball can pass so that a game ball flowing down the left channel can flow into the right channel and a game ball flowing down the right channel can flow into the left channel.

The actuating device 3070 is provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the left side of the game ball downstream flow path, i.e., the game balls flowing down the left side flow path, flow more easily than the game balls flowing down the right side flow path, and the special figure 1 non-motorized accessories 3064a and the special diagram 2 non-motorized accessories 3065a are provided at positions where the game balls flowing down the right side of the game ball flow down path, i.e., the game balls flowing down the right side flow more easily than the game balls flowing down the left side flow path. .

By forming the left flow path and the right flow path in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of paths for the game ball fired by the right-handed game to flow down. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of devices provided in the right side area (operating device 3070, special figure 1 non-electric role item 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric role item 3065a, etc.) are in a state (open state) where the ball can be entered (open state), the game ball enters only the device provided on the upstream side of the right side area, and the game ball enters the downstream side. By making it difficult for a game ball to enter the provided device, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the progress of the game is delayed.

A detailed configuration of the actuator 3070 will now be described. Actuating device 3070, when winning in the normal pattern lottery (when a game per normal pattern is executed), the game ball is in a state where it can be entered (that is, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened), and two non-electric openings (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) provided inside the operating device 3070 When the game ball enters the corresponding non-electric opening. The electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is in an open state.

The game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070 a and reaches the movable piece 3072 . This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when a normal game is executed, and is variably configured between an open position in which game balls flowing down the first flow path 3070a can flow into the second flow path 3070b, and a closed position in which the game balls flowing down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. In addition, in the state (non-normal game per game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be positioned at the closed position.

In other words, the movable piece 3072 serves as means for allowing the inflow of the game ball into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is established (when a normal game is executed). In the ninth control example, the contents of the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery are configured to vary according to the normal pattern winning type. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal figure per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state is varied. On the other hand, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal pattern per game is executed regardless of the normal pattern per type.

Then, by varying the length of the opening period according to the type of the normal pattern, by varying the length of the period required from the execution of the normal pattern per game until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072, the game ball reaching the movable piece 3072 is easily guided to the second flow path 3070b. Techniques and are configured to be executable.

A special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 8070b, and all game balls that flow down the second path 8070b enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. The special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a via the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, and when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the entered game ball comes into contact with the operating mechanism 3074, the operating mechanism 3074 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064 is in a closed state. It is configured to change a to an open state.

In addition, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, the operating mechanism 3074 is operated in the open state, so that the game ball entered into the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a does not come into contact with the operating mechanism 3074. In other words, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for varying the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source. Means for varying the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a.

The special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is a non-electric accessory attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 3064 and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is changed from a closed state to an open state by operating the operating mechanism 3074 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 non-electric working opening 3073a. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on two game balls entering the right first ball entrance 3064 .

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that has entered the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064. When two game balls are held by the holding means, the game balls held by their own weight flow out of the game machine to a discharge path for discharging the game balls. without) is provided.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a that was in the open state is configured to be variable to the closed state.

As described above, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is configured to be mechanically variable using the weight of the flowing game ball without using electrical control in either case of changing from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state.

On the downstream side of the third flow path 3070c, a special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is provided, and all game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c are configured to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. The special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a via the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075, and when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the entered game ball comes into contact with the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075, and the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 2 is in a closed state. It is configured to change the non-electric accessory 3065a to the open state.

In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state, the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 is operated in the open state, so that the game ball entering the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is configured so as not to contact the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for varying the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a.

The special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3064b is a non-electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 3065 and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is changed from the closed state to the open state by operating the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 based on the fact that the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric activation opening 3073b. Then, after being changed to the open state, the open state is changed to the closed state based on two game balls entering the second ball entrance 3065 .

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that has entered the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065. When two game balls are held by the holding means, the game balls held by their own weight flow out of the game machine to a discharge path for discharging the game balls. ) is provided.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that was in the open state is configured to be changed to the closed state.

As described above, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is configured to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using electrical control in either case of being varied from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357(b), the contents of the game ball flowing down during the normal game per game will be described. Figure 357 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a during the game per normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 357(b)) in the open state passes through the movable piece 3072 positioned at the open position and enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 operates, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a becomes an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 357 (b)).

When the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to a position that closes the right side channel, so that most of the game balls that flow down the right side channel 3060 out of the game balls that are shot by the right-handed game and flow down the right side channel 3060 enter the right first ball entrance 3064.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), in the ninth control example, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is provided for the right channel, and the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided upstream of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a. there is no difference. Therefore, by changing the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a to the open state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot flow into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal figure and the game cannot be smoothly progressed.

In addition, while the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is changed to the open state, even if the normal figure per game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electrical activation opening 3073b is executed, since the special figure 1 non-electrical accession 3064a does not restrict the entry of the game ball to the operating device 3070, the game ball can be surely entered into the special figure 2 non-electrical activation opening 3073b.

In addition, in the ninth control example, since the game ball flowing down the right side area 3060 is configured to flow down two flow paths (left flow path, right flow path), even if the normal figure electric accessory 3071 provided on the upstream side is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right channel can be made easier to reach the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a provided on the downstream side. In other words, when both the normal figure electric accessory 3071 and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a are in an open state, the game ball can easily reach any of the accessories in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the game ball flowing down the right side area 3060 flows down one flow path.

Then, when two game balls enter the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state, as shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the ninth control example, even when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, the game ball can be entered into the operating device 3070. Therefore, for example, the game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 is not operated by the entered game ball, so the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a is kept open. In addition, the value of the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state is also continued as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a remains open, the player is not given any benefits.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, before the next game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the game can be motivated to enter a predetermined number (two) of game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is attached.

In the ninth control example, as described above, in the state in which the special figure 1 non-electric role product 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be entered into the actuator 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the special figure 1 non-electric role product 3064a is in the open state, the operating device is positioned more difficult to reach than when the special figure 1 non-electric role product 3064a is in the open state. 3070 (ordinary electric accessory 3071) may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the winning number of game balls to the operating device 3070 during the period when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, than during the period when it is not in the open state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358(a), when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, the ball flow of the game ball launched by the right-handed game will be described. Figure 358 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the flow when a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 358(a), in the state where the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is variable (operating) to the open state, the game ball enters the state where it is easy to enter the right first ball entrance 3064, and when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, the closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is activated. It is variable (actuates) to the closed state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358(b), operation contents of various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b will be described. Figure 358 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b during the game per normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 358(b)) in the open state flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 operates, and the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory 3065a is in an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 358(b)).

When the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is changed to the open state, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is changed to a position that closes the right channel, so that most of the game balls that flow down the right channel out of the game balls that are shot by the right-handed game and flow down the right region 3060 enter the second ball entrance 3065.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), in the ninth control example, the normal electric role product 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is provided for the right channel, and the normal electric role product 3071 is provided upstream of the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a. there is no difference. Therefore, by changing the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a to the open state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball in the game per normal figure cannot be flowed into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot be smoothly progressed.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, since the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is arranged above the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is in the open state, when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is variable (actuated) to the open state, the game ball fired by the right-handed game is more than the second ball entrance 3065, the right first ball entrance 3 It is configured to preferentially enter 064.

By constructing in this way, excessive execution of the second special symbol lottery in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed, that is, excessive entry of game balls into the second ball entrance 3065 can be suppressed. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is in an open state, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065, so it is possible to make it easier to continue the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a for a long time. Before doing so, the game is played so that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is variable (operated) to the open state, so that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a can be maintained in the open state even after the time saving state is finished.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to make the game situation (opening/closing situation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) advantageous to the player when the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, the game contents of the game per normal pattern in the ninth control example will be described. Figure 360 is a diagram showing the flow of a game per normal figure when the open pattern A (open pattern that is likely to be set during the first time saving state) is set, and Figure 361 is an open pattern per normal figure B (an open pattern that is easily set during the second time saving state) is set.

In the ninth control example, the operation contents of the normal pattern winning game are changed according to the normal pattern winning type (game state at the time of winning) set when the winning is won in the normal pattern lottery, so that the inflow timing of the game balls to the operating device 3070 during the normal pattern winning game is made different. Then, according to the inflow timing of the game ball into the operating device 3070, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is easier to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a than the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured to be able to execute an easy normal pattern per game (normal pattern per normal game in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is set).

Further, when a time saving state is set as a game state, a time saving type (first time saving state) in which an opening pattern A per a normal game is more likely to be set than an opening pattern B in a normal game (first time saving state) and a time saving type (second time saving state) in which an opening pattern B per a normal game is more likely to be set than an opening pattern B per a normal game (second time saving state) can be set.

By configuring in this way, a game ball can enter the actuator 3070 more easily than in a normal state (a period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is open in a normal per unit time game can be made longer than in the normal state) is set. It is possible to set a second time saving state (advantageous time saving state) in which it is easier to execute.

The normal pattern per game is a period (opening period) from the execution of the normal pattern per game until the normal electric role product 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), the period in which the normal electric role product 3071 is in the open state (open period), and the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric role product 3071. conditions) are predetermined and defined, and the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 is performed according to the defined contents. Furthermore, it is configured to perform movement control to move a movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 780) provided in the actuator 3070 in a predetermined movement pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 360, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern A is set will be described. Specifically, in the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern A is set, as shown in FIG. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to enter the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds.

That is, in the general-purpose per game of the general-purpose per open pattern A, the state in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special-figure 2 non-electric activation opening 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state) is set. Therefore, all (almost) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the general pattern per open pattern A is executed and the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state pass through the movable piece 3072 in the open state and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrical working opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a operates to an open state, so that the general figure winning game of the general figure opening pattern A becomes the general figure winning game that facilitates the execution of the first special symbol lottery.

In the ninth control example, as end conditions for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071, in addition to the time end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) has elapsed, the entering ball end condition that is satisfied when the number of game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 (game balls that have passed through the normal electric accessory 3071 in the open state) exceeds two is also set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the flow of many game balls into the operating device 3070 in one game per normal figure, so that, for example, the game balls are clogged in the operating device 3070, or the movable piece 3072 is easily broken (broken) due to an increase in the number of game balls that collide with the movable piece 3072. It can be suppressed.

Further, when the game balls are continuously shot, a maximum of 100 game balls can be shot in 60 seconds, so that the right-hand hitting game is continuously executed during the normal game, so that the ball entry end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the time end condition, so that the normal game can be finished earlier when the right-hand hitting game in which the game balls are continuously shot is executed. Therefore, for example, in a time saving state in which a time saving type (time saving B) that is easier to be executed than a normal drawing hitting game of a normal drawing opening pattern A, which will be described later, is set (time saving B) to end the working hours saving state, more normal symbol lotteries are executed until the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, and the game ball is continuously fired to the player to execute the second special symbol lottery even once. can be improved.

In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is operated to the open state just before the time saving end condition is satisfied, the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. A game can be played in anticipation of execution of a normal pattern per open pattern B that allows a game ball to be entered.

Next, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern B is set will be described. Specifically, in the general pattern per game executed when the general pattern per open pattern B is set, as shown in FIG. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to enter the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in the general-purpose per game of the general-purpose per open pattern B, the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special-figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is closed) (the period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the general-purpose per game is executed). Therefore, all (almost) of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal pattern per open pattern B is executed and the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the closed state, and enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrical operation opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a operates to an open state, so that the general figure winning game of the general figure opening pattern B becomes the general figure winning game that facilitates the execution of the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the ninth control example, by varying the length of the opening period in the normal per game according to the per normal per game type, the game ball flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal per per game can enter (easy to enter). In this case, even if the contents of the normal pattern per game other than the length of the opening period of the normal per pattern game are made common to the normal per pattern per type, the type of the special non-electrical opening into which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal per pattern game can enter (is easy to enter) can be reliably differentiated, so that when the time saving state is set, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 is increased by the processing load of the pachinko machine 10. can be executed while reducing

In addition, when the time saving state is set, the configuration for realizing the novel game property of facilitating execution of a different type of special symbol lottery is not limited to this. By changing the movable pattern of the movable piece 3072 according to the type of hit, the type of the special figure non-electric opening into which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter) may be configured to be different.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 is configured to enter one of the special non-electrically operated openings. However, without being limited to this, for example, a discharge port may be provided for discharging the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 back into the game area, or a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the actuator 3070 is provided. It may be configured so that some of the game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 enter the winning opening without entering the special figure non-electric working opening.

By configuring in this way, even when a game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a regular game, it is possible to create a pattern in which none of the special non-electrical accessories is activated to the open state, so that it is possible to suppress the player from giving a certain relationship that any special non-electrical accessories will be in an open state when a regular game is executed, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

Also, as described above, due to the nature of the non-electric role, there is no effect even if the game ball enters the special non-electric opening corresponding to the case where the special non-electric role is in the open state. The game balls flowed into the operating device 3070 not only actuate (variably) the special non-electrical accessories to the open state, but also have the possibility of awarding prize balls, so that the players can be interested in the normal game when the special non-electrical accessories are in the open state.

In this case, when the special non-electrical accessory is in the open state, the game ball that can enter the corresponding special non-electrical activation opening is more likely to enter the winning opening than when the special non-electrical activation is in the closed state. A game ball contacts the operating mechanism to operate the operating mechanism, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and when the special figure non-electrical accessory is in an open state, the game ball entered into the special figure non-electrical operating opening is preferably configured to flow down toward the winning opening without contacting the operating mechanism. By constructing in this way, when the special non-electrical accessory is in the open state, it becomes easier to acquire more prize balls during the normal game than when the special non-electrical accessory is in the closed state.

Therefore, since the normal pattern winning game when the special non-electric role is open can be made a game advantageous to the player in terms of winning the prize ball, the player can play the game while expecting that the normal pattern winning game will be executed regardless of the opening/closing state of the special figure non-electric role, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

First, with reference to FIG. 360, the contents of the open pattern A per normal pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 360, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the measurement of the opening period is started and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.

The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always stipulated to be constant regardless of the type of normal game, and a scenario is defined in which the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position for 1.5 seconds after 0.5 seconds from the start of the normal game. In other words, the scenario is defined so that the closing period of 1.5 seconds is set at a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the normal pattern per game is executed) every time the normal pattern per game is executed.

In the normal pattern per open pattern A, 3 seconds are defined as a period (opening period) from when the normal pattern per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), 2.5 seconds are defined as the period (opening period) during which the normal electric function 3071 is changed to the open state, and 1 second is defined as the period (ending period) from the end of the normal pattern per game to the end of the normal pattern per game. That is, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the scenario of the game per normal pattern is defined so that the game period of the game per normal pattern is 6.5 seconds at the longest.

In addition, the open period (2.5 seconds) in the above-described normal game per game is configured to be able to be terminated by conditions other than the passage of time. Specifically, when the number of game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period reaches a predetermined number (two) (when the winning number end condition is satisfied), the open period is terminated without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. In other words, when the normal pattern winning game is executed, the normal pattern winning game can be finished when the number of inflows (the number of entering balls) of the game balls into the area (the inside of the operating device 3070) where the game balls are more likely to enter than when the normal pattern winning game is not executed reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this way, since the upper limit can be set for the privilege amount that can be given to the player for one game per normal pattern, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of the privilege to the player.

Further, by ending the normal pattern per game by establishing the winning number end condition, the game period of the normal per pattern game can be shortened compared to the case of ending the normal per pattern game based on the passage of time, and as a result, the number of normal pattern lotteries per unit time can be increased. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which the normal pattern per open pattern A that allows game balls to enter the special figure 1 non-electric working opening 3073a is likely to be set, the second special symbol lottery is executed as many times as possible before the time saving state ends (performing the general figure per game that allows game balls to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b). can be facilitated to improve

In particular, in a time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure is likely to be set, the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4 pieces), that is, even if the game ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 3064, a new special figure 1 reservation cannot be acquired (stored). However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, the player can be made to select the act of continuing the game in order to obtain the second special symbol reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the novel game property of allowing the player to select between the game in which the game balls are not used wastefully and the game in which the game balls are used wastefully with the aim of giving an advantageous privilege.

As shown in FIG. 360, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, 3 seconds is set as the opening period, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period elapses. Therefore, when the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A is set, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened, and the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and the second flow path 3070b to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a (see FIG. 357 (b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set will be described. In this ninth control example, only the length of the opening period of the normal pattern winning game is different between the normal pattern winning pattern A and the normal pattern winning pattern B, and other than that, the normal pattern winning game having the same contents is executed. A detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 361, since 0.5 seconds is defined as the opening period of the game per normal pattern B, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the period in which the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position can reach the movable piece 3072.

As described above, in the ninth control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, and the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) into which the game ball is likely to enter during the normal figure winning type is set to be different when the general figure winning is won.

The game period of the general pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game in which the normal pattern winning opening pattern B is set) in which the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b which is the execution machine of the second special pattern lottery advantageous to the player is set to be shorter.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving type B, which is a time saving type that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, is set as the type of the time saving state, the game per normal figure can be efficiently executed, so that the player can smoothly execute the game during the time saving state.

On the other hand, as the type of the time saving state, the game ball can be entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, which is the execution machine of the first special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the excessive increase in the number of executions (the number of executions of the normal symbol lottery).

In addition, when the normal pattern A is set, the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 is opened after the period in which the game ball can be entered into the special pattern 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during the general pattern per game of the general pattern A is entered into the special pattern 2 non-electric opening 3073b.

That is, according to the set per normal pattern open pattern, the period during which the game ball can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric accessory 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is located in the closed position (closed period of the movable piece 3072) By varying the degree of overlap, the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. As a method that can set a normal pattern per game (disadvantage per pattern game) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the operation opening 3073b, the method used in the ninth control example, that is, the length of the opening period of the normal pattern per game is varied according to the per normal pattern type, and the normal per pattern game in which a short opening period is set becomes an advantageous normal per pattern game, and the normal per pattern with a long opening period is set as a disadvantage per per pattern game. It may be configured so that the set normal pattern per game becomes a disadvantage normal pattern per game, and the general pattern per game in which a long opening period is set becomes an advantageous normal pattern per game.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 will be positioned at the closed position at a timing later in time series than the timing at which the game ball flows into the actuator 3070 due to the unfavorable normal game. For example, the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 during the unfavorable normal game will stay in the game area within the actuator 3070, and the movable piece 3072 may reach the movable piece 3072 after it is positioned at the closed position. .

On the other hand, in the method used in the 9th control example, the duration of 3072 in the motion of 3072 ends in the closed position before the timing of the flowing into the operating device 3070 by the play of the disadvantaged general map, so the playballs flowing into the operation device 3070 by the intercourter general map of the game 3070. Even if you stay in the gaming area inside, it can be suppressed from entering a special map 2 non -electric operation mouth 3073B. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a fraudulent act of intentionally staying in the operating device 3070 for the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to a game with an unfavorable pattern.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, in this ninth control example, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game is configured to be able to set the normal game per open pattern A that cannot enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b and the general game opening pattern B that surely enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the hit release pattern is set, depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 and the period required for the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 to reach the movable piece 3072, it may be configured to switch between the case where the ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b and the case where it cannot.

In this case, for example, when a game ball is caused to flow into the operating device 3070 during a part of the period (first 0.5 seconds or last 0.5 seconds) of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 3071 during the normal game, it is preferable that the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 positioned at the closed position. By configuring in this way, whether or not the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b is determined by the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, so that the player can be interested in at what timing the game ball enters the operating device 3070.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which the game ball flowing into the actuator 3070 can flow down are formed inside the actuator 3070, and the period required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 is varied according to the flow path through which the game ball flows down. 2, or it may be configured to reach the movable piece 3072 positioned at the closed position when the period required from the time it flows into the actuator 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072 .

In the ninth control example, as described above, the type of the special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is different depending on the type of the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Further, in the ninth control example, the type of the non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can enter is determined in correspondence with the opening pattern of the normal per game to be executed. In other words, it may be configured so that a game ball can enter any non-electrically operated opening even when the normal game is executed in any open pattern, and the easiness of ball entry into each non-electrically operated opening may be made variable corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal figure winning game.

<Regarding transition contents of the game state in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 362 is a game flow showing transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example.

In the ninth control example, three game states can be set as game states: a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). A first time-saving state and a second time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively difficult to be established can be set. Specifically, the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, is more likely to be set when the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning determination (time-saving lottery) than when the time-saving state is set based on the big win in the special symbol lottery.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not the time saving state is set, but also whether the time saving state is set based on which time saving setting opportunity.

First, the contents of the game in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 362, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is provided with a first ball entrance 64 at a position where a game ball launched in a left-handed game can flow down (left-handed area), that is, a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery is executed. On the other hand, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is low (1/240) in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the game ball is difficult to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 because it is difficult to flow the game ball into the operating device 3070.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

In the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot lottery (jackpot winning judgment) is executed with a probability of 27/8192, and a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed with a probability of 1/8192. Here, when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, a big win A and a big win B are set as the big win types, and when the big win A (70% selection ratio) is set, a probability variable state (space mode) is set after the big win game is finished. On the other hand, when the jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the probability variable state (space mode), a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240). state. Therefore, during the variable probability state (space mode), the right-handed game becomes a game that is advantageous to the player.

During the variable probability state (space mode), the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, so basically the first special symbol lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot types A and B are set as the jackpot types as described above, so when the jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, the variable probability state (space mode) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and when the jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240). It becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which a ball is entered. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second special symbol lottery is executed. When the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, the big win A and the big win C are set as the big win types, and when the big win A (selection ratio 10%) is set, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set after the big win game is finished. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (90% selection ratio) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), similarly to the first time-saving state (challenge mode) described above, a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240). Alternatively, the game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 3065 can be easily executed. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second special symbol lottery is executed. When the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, the big win A and the big win C are set as the big win types, and when the big win A (selection ratio 10%) is set, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set after the big win game is finished. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (90% selection ratio) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in the ninth control example, the easiness of establishment of the time saving end condition is made different between the first time saving state and the second time saving state, and the first time saving state is configured so that the time saving end condition is more likely to be established than the second time saving state. Specifically, in the first time-saving state, a time-saving end condition is set as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, which is satisfied when the sum of the number of execution times of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery reaches 10 times, and when the time-saving end condition is established without executing the big winning game, the game state shifts to the normal state.

On the other hand, in the second time-saving state, a time-saving end condition is set as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, which is established when the total number of lotteries obtained by summing the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery reaches 10000 times, and when the time-saving end condition is established without executing a big winning game, the game state shifts to the normal state. In the eighth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is set to about 27/8192, so when the second time saving state is set, the time saving state is substantially continued until the next big win is won.

<Regarding the production content in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 363 and FIG. 364, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the contents of the time-saving winning effect for indicating the time-saving winning during the normal state and the contents of the effect mode screen corresponding to each game state will be described. Effect elements that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 363(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when the time saving pattern hits (time saving winning) in the normal state. FIG. 363(a) is a diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving symbol is hit (time saving winning) in the normal state.

In the ninth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only during the normal state. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is not the jackpot lottery (loss), it is constituted to determine the presence or absence of the time-saving lottery, and is constructed so as to win the time-saving lottery with a low probability of 1/8192 when the special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the time saving is won, the time saving state (second time saving state) is set after stopping and displaying the special pattern variation for showing the result of the target special pattern lottery. Here, in the ninth control example, since the second time-saving state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can aim for the time-saving winning while aiming for the big win in the special symbol lottery.

Then, when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. In the eighth control example, similarly to each control example described above, when determining (selecting) the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, it is configured not to refer to the presence or absence of time-saving winning. Specifically, regardless of the presence or absence of the time-saving election, the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the loss.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not there will be a short-time winning from the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed. In addition, as in each control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the normal state, the variation pattern of the different variation time is selected, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation of the time-saving winning is also set to have a different variation time.

Further, as in the ninth control example, a specific image (blackout image) is continuously displayed as a variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation indicating that the short-time winning is received until a special symbol stop command is received, thereby simplifying the process of determining the variation performance corresponding to the short-time winning as the variation performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 even when the variation pattern of the different variation time is selected.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the display screen shown in FIG. 363 (a) is always displayed as the variation effect corresponding to the time-saving winning (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation), thereby reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the variation effect corresponding to the time-saving winning, the variation pattern command (variation pattern command indicating the winning out) output from the main control device 110. A blackout image may be displayed from a specific timing (for example, timing when 5 seconds have passed since the execution of the variable performance, timing when the performance mode of the variable performance progresses (ready-to-win display timing), or timing of stopping and displaying the third pattern in a combination indicating the failure) during the execution period of the set variable performance.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the most advantageous privilege (time-saving winning) is given while the variable performance for indicating that the special symbol lottery is lost is being executed, that is, in a period when the player's willingness to play is likely to decline, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from being lowered even while the variable performance is being executed in which the result of the special symbol lottery is highly likely to be lost.

In addition, as a method of interrupting the performance indicating the time-saving winning during the period in which the normal variable performance is executed, as described above, in addition to the method of interrupting the performance indicating the time-saving winning at a predetermined specific timing, for example, when the operation performance for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed, the performance indicating the time-saving winning may be interrupted as a part of the performance result of the operation performance. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a performance for informing the presence/absence of the short-time winning based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

Next, with reference to Drawing 363 (b), the contents of the production in the 2nd time saving state (heaven mode) are explained. FIG.363(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed during the 2nd time saving state (heaven mode).

As shown in FIG. 363(b), when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a rear image imitating heaven is displayed as the rear image of the main display area Dm. In the small display area Dm31, characters of ``continuation rate 90%'' are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating the probability (continuation rate) that the second time saving state (heaven mode) is set again when the jackpot is won. Then, in the sub-display area, a comment ``Even if it ends, the destination is the universe'' is displayed as a guidance mode for explaining the contents of the game when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is not set (when it is not continued) after winning the jackpot.

Also, in a small display area Dm32 formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, performance modes (heaven, space, normal) corresponding to each game state are displayed in order corresponding to the degree of advantage to the player. In the ninth control example, the more advantageous the game state is to the player, the more distant the place (higher altitude) from the ground becomes the background of the performance mode.

In this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually determine whether or not the displayed performance mode is advantageous to the player by forming a relation between the aspects of the plurality of performance modes and the degree of advantage for the player. In addition, the guidance mode displayed in the small display area Dm32 makes it easy for the player to visually grasp the entire settable (shiftable) performance modes, the currently set performance mode, and the degree of advantage of each performance mode, so that the player can easily determine whether the currently set performance mode should be continued or should be shifted to a more advantageous performance mode, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be easily provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 363(b), during the second time saving state (heaven mode), 10000 times are set as the number of time saving times, and in fact, without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the time saving end condition is established based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is executed 10000 times, and it is configured to shift to the normal state, but the special symbol lottery is executed 10000 times without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Since the ratio is very small, it is configured not to display the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (remaining time reduction number) until the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to think that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will continue until the next big win is won. In the event that the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), a warning image for notifying the player that the second time reduction state is likely to end, and an attention effect of displaying the number of remaining time reductions may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the second time saving state ends without any warning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364(a), the contents of the display screen during the variable probability state (space mode) will be described. FIG. 364(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen during the variable probability state (space mode). As shown in FIG. 364 (a), during the probability variation state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed by the right-handed game, so the display mode (indicated by three arrows in the figure) for indicating that the first special symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm1. A background image simulating outer space is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm, and characters of "outer space mode" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating the current rendering mode.

Then, in the small display area Dm31, characters of "continuation rate 70%" are displayed as a guide mode for indicating the probability (continuation rate) that the variable probability state (space mode) will be set again after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the small display area Dm32, a display mode is displayed to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current game state is the variable probability state. The game state in which the space mode is set, that is, the probability variable state is constituted so that the probability of winning a big win in a special pattern lottery is high (1/60) and the probability variable state continues until the next big win is won. That is, when the variable probability state (space mode) is set, as in the case where the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a game advantageous to the player (a game in which a special symbol lottery is easy to execute) is continuously performed until the next big winning game is performed, resulting in a game state advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to Drawing 364 (b), the contents of production performed when the 1st time saving state (challenge mode) are set are explained. Drawing 364 (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed during the 1st time saving state (challenge mode). As shown in FIG. 364(b), when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set, the rocket 1851 is configured to perform an effect for gradually increasing the altitude (altitude). A display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm8 to show the remaining number of times of the second special symbol lottery (10 times) executed during the first time saving state, and a comment of 'delivery to heaven' is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state executes a performance corresponding to the game aiming at winning the jackpot.

In other words, during the first time-saving state, a variable performance is executed in which the degree of rise of the rocket 1851 is varied based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, and when a big win is won, the performance that the rocket 1851 reaches heaven is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition of the first time saving state, that is, the lottery result of the time saving final change is not successful, the rocket 1851 breaks down and falls to the normal background (for example, the ground), and the player is informed that the normal state is set after the first time saving state ends.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 shifts to the space mode while wandering in space. By constructing in this way, the performance can be continuously executed over the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times during the challenge mode, so that the player can be provided with the performance that is easy to understand.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 365 to 375. FIG. In the ninth control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed from the pachinko machine of the fifth control example described above. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 365 to 367. FIG. FIG. 365(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 244 (a)), in that a first winning random number 9 table 202ha is provided instead of the first winning random number 5 table 202da, and a jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb is provided instead of the first winning type selection 5 table 202db. It is different in that 02hf and a random number table 202he per time saving are added.

The normal per pattern selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to for determining the per per normal pattern type when winning (per normal pattern) in the lottery of normal symbols. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. The contents defined in the normal figure per type selection 9 table 202hf will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the per-universal figure type counter C6, like other various counters (first per random number counter C1, etc.), is a counter whose value is periodically updated by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the type counter C6 per normal figure is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to the minimum value 0. In other words, the normal figure per type counter C6, the value is updated while looping the range of "0 to 99". Then, the updated value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 . When the general pattern is elected, the general pattern per type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 is read and referred to when the general pattern per type is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365(b), the first winning random number 9 table 202ha in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 365(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 9 table 202ha in the ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), the first winning random number 9 table 202ha is different from the above-described first winning random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)) in that the value range of the first winning random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot winning is different. Further, in the ninth control example, the possible range of values of the first hit random number counter C1 is varied. Specifically, in the fifth control example described above, the possible range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as 900 "0 to 899", but in the ninth control example, it is defined as "0 to 8191" 8192. By configuring in this way, it is possible to define a determination result with a lower probability in various determinations determined by referring to the value of the first winning random number counter C1. In the ninth control example, only the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is different, and since the processing for updating the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the configuration for storing the updated value are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability", the lottery result "jackpot" is specified for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range "0 to 26", and the lottery result "off" for the range "27 to 8191". Lottery result "out" is stipulated.

That is, when the probability state of the special pattern is ``low probability'', the value determined as the big win is 27 against the values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 8192, so the winning probability of the big win is 27/8192 (approximately 1/300). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special pattern is ``high probability'', the value determined as a big win is 137 against the values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 8192, so the probability of winning the big win is 137/8192 (approximately 1/60).

Next, with reference to FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 366(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 366(a), in the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb, two types of jackpots A9 and B9 are provided as jackpot types corresponding to the first special symbol (special pattern 1), and two types of jackpots A9 and C9 are provided as jackpot types corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

As shown in FIG. 366 (a), as the type of special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69" for the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), "jackpot A9" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 70 counter values become ``jackpot A9'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining ``jackpot A9'' is 70% (70/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot B9". This "jackpot B9" is a jackpot type (9th round first time reduction jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the first time reduction state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 30 counter values become ``big win B9'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining ``big win B9'' is 30% (30/100).

In addition, as the type of the special symbol, for the special symbol 2 (second special symbol), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is defined in association with "jackpot A9". This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 10 counter values become ``jackpot A9'', so the ratio of determining ``jackpot A9'' when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 99" in association with "jackpot C9". This "jackpot C9" is a jackpot type (9 round second time saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the second time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 90 counter values become ``jackpot C9'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the ratio of determining ``jackpot C9'' is 90% (90/100).

Next, with reference to FIG.366(b), the detailed content of random number 9 table 202he per time saving is demonstrated. FIG. 366(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 9 table 202he per time saving. This time saving random number 9 table 202he is different from the time saving random number 5 table 202ge in the above-described fifth control example in that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that can win the time saving is different and that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that can win the time saving in the second special symbol lottery is defined. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the normal state is set, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is ``8192'' in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the judgment value for judging the short-time winning is defined. In other words, in the ninth control example, the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is configured to win the short time prize with a probability of 1/8192. Since the second time saving (time saving B) is always set as the time saving type when the time saving is won, the machine shifts to the second time saving state (heaven mode) after winning the time saving.

Next, with reference to FIG. 367, the detailed contents of the per normal pattern type selection 9 table 202hf will be described. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal figure per type selection 9 table 202hf. This normal pattern winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table referred to when determining the normal pattern winning type set in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, and different normal pattern winning types (normal pattern winning A, general pattern winning B) are respectively defined in association with the set game state and the value of the acquired normal pattern winning type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367, when the gaming state is "probability change" or "first short time", and the value of the acquired per-normal figure type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "per-normal figure A" is determined as the type per normal figure. configured to be determined.

Here, the contents of the per-universal figure type will be explained. In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern low probability state is set differently depending on whether the normal pattern low probability state is set or the normal pattern high probability state is set, and the period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one normal pattern per game is shorter when the normal pattern low probability state is set than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol.

As described above, inside the actuating device 3070, the special figure 1 non-electric function 3073a for operating the special figure 1 non-electric role object 3064a associated with the right first entrance 3064 from the closed state to the open state, and the special figure 2 non-electric function 3073b for operating the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a associated with the second entrance 3065 from the closed state to the open state. A state in which game balls are easily made to flow into a device 3070 (normal pattern high probability state) is a game state in which special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than a state in which game balls are difficult to flow into an operating device 3070 (normal pattern low probability state), so that the game state is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the ninth control example, different time-saving types can be set in a time-saving state in which a high-probability state of normal patterns is set, and according to the set time-saving types, the selection ratio of the normal-symbol winning type determined when winning in the normal pattern lottery is varied. In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367(b), as the general pattern per type, it is configured to be selectable from "per general pattern A" and "per normal pattern B".

The length of the period (opening period) from the execution of the normal pattern winning game to the opening of the normal electric role product 3071 is made different without changing the length of the period in which the normal electric role product 3071 is in the open state in one normal pattern winning game, depending on whether ``normal pattern winning A'' is determined as the normal pattern winning type or when ``normal pattern winning B'' is determined. That is, even if any normal pattern per type is determined, a normal pattern per game is executed that makes it easier for the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070 than the normal pattern per game executed in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). It is configured to be able to execute a general pattern per game that is easy to enter into the 1 non-electric working port 3073a and a general pattern per game that is easy to enter into the special figure 2 non-electric working port 3073b.

Specifically, when "normal game hit A" is set as the normal game hit type, the opening period of the game per normal game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in an open state in the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072. The opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that 2 is likely to be closed.

In addition, in the ninth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, as a normal game per game, the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. B normal game per game), but not limited to this, for example, in the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is open due to the normal per game, if the game ball is allowed to flow into the actuator 3070 within the first period, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric activation opening 3073b, and when the game ball is allowed to flow into the actuator 3070 during the second period different from the first period It may be configured to be able to execute a general pattern per game (for example, general pattern per type "normal pattern per C") that allows a game ball to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a.

By configuring in this way, the non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is not determined according to the type of the set normal figure, but the non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3) that can enter according to the flow situation of the game ball (inflow timing to the operating device 3070, flow speed and flowing path in the operating device 3070, etc.) 073a, special figure 2 non-electrical operation opening 3073b) is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is likely to be executed until the game ball enters one of the non-electrical openings (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b).

In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367, the contents of the normal pattern per type selection table 202hf are defined so that the set normal per pattern type can be reliably changed according to the set game state. Good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is suddenly executed in a high probability state of normal symbols in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 368 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example. As shown in Figure 368, the configuration of the RAM203 in the present ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM203 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 244 (b)) in that a special figure 2 variation counter 203pa is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type. In addition, about the detailed content of jackpot classification storage area 203eb, since it is the same as the content mentioned above in 9th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 369(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above only in that an expectation level selection table 222pa is added. This expectation degree selection table 222pa is, in a state in which the time saving type "time saving A", that is, the time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, "time saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute is set, or "time saving A2" in which it is relatively easy to execute is set. is a table.

Here, as described above, in the ninth control example, "time saving A" can be set as a time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, as "time saving A", "time saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed is set, or "time saving A2" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively easy to be executed can be set. When "time saving A" is set, a common mode performance (time saving A mode) is executed regardless of which type of time saving (time saving A1, working time saving A2) is set.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the set time saving type is 'time saving A1' or 'time saving A2' to the player who executed the presentation of the time saving A mode. In addition, since the mode suggestion performance can be executed while the performance of the time-saving A mode is being executed, an element for predicting the actually set time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) can be provided to the player in the state where the performance of the time-saving A mode is being executed.

Here, the details of the expectation level selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 369(b). FIG. 369(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 369(b), in this expectation level selection table 222pa, for each time saving type, the type of expectation level (expectation level in which the time saving type of time saving A2 is set) and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 369 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A1" (time saving type in which the probability of executing the second special symbol lottery is relatively low among the time saving A), the value of the production lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the high expectation production mode in the range of "0 to 4", the production mode for medium expectation in the range of "5 to 49" is defined in correspondence, and the production mode for low expectation in the range of "50 to 99". Production modes are defined in association with each other.

Since the performance lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values from '0 to 99', the ratios of the high-expectation, medium-expectation, and low-expectation performance modes determined in the time-saving type A1 are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 369 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A2" (time saving type in which the probability of executing the second special symbol lottery is relatively high among the time saving A), the value of the production lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the high expectation production mode in the range of "0 to 19", and the medium expectation production mode (not shown) is defined in the range of "20 to 79" in correspondence, and in the range of "80 to 99". An effect mode for low expectations is associated and defined.

Since the performance lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values of ``0 to 99'', the ratios of determining the performance mode for high expectation, medium expectation and low expectation when time saving A2 is reached are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100) and 20% (20/100), respectively. From these stipulations, it can be said that the production mode for the high expectation level is more likely to be selected when the time reduction A2 is set, but is less likely to be selected when the time reduction A1 is set. In addition, the performance mode for the medium expectation level is selected at a relatively high rate even when either the time reduction A1 or the time reduction A2 is set, and the performance mode for the low expectation level is less likely to be selected when the time reduction A2 is set and more likely to be selected when the time reduction A1 is selected. Therefore, when the performance mode for the high expectation is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type is likely to be the time saving A2, and when the performance mode for the low expectation is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type is likely to be the time saving A1. In addition, when the performance mode for medium expectation level is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type may be any of time saving A1 and time saving A2. As a result, the player can predict the degree of expectation for execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state according to the degree of expectation suggested by the performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 370 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 370, the RAM 223 in the ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth control example in that an effect lottery counter 223ha, a short remaining time counter 223hb, a special figure 1 non-electric open flag 223hc, a special figure 2 non-electric open flag 223hd, and an initial fluctuation standby flag 223he are added.

The effect lottery counter 223ha is a counter used to select one effect mode (expectation level type) from the above-described expectation level selection table 222pa. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ha is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When a performance mode (expectation level type) of special small winning performance is selected, a random number value (counter value) defined in an expectation level selection table 222pa is compared with the value of the performance lottery counter 223ha, and one corresponding performance mode (expectation level type) is selected. This effect lottery counter 223ha is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process 17 (see FIG. 807).

The remaining time reduction counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the remaining time reduction number of times during the time reduction state.

The special figure 1 non-electric opening flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in an open state (in operation) and is set to OFF when it is in a closed state (not in operation).

The special figure 2 non-electric opening flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state (in operation) and is set to OFF in the case of the closed state (not in operation).

The initial variation standby flag 223he is a flag for indicating a period from the end of the big win game to the execution of the first special symbol variation, and is set to ON when the big win game ends. After the end of the jackpot game, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol variation is executed. That is, the flag is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the first special symbol variation.

This initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is referred to when determining a period for continuously displaying the game explanation screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, regardless of the special symbol type to be executed after the end of the jackpot game, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the initial variation standby flag 223he is configured to be set to OFF. The initial variation waiting flag 223he may be set to ON until the symbol variation is executed. In other words, the special symbol variation type for setting the initial variation standby flag 223he to OFF may be changed according to the time saving type of the time saving state to be set, or the initial variation standby flag 223he may be set to ON until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type mainly executed by the set time saving type is executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375, characteristic contents among the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. It should be noted that detailed description of the same control processing contents as those executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above will be omitted. In addition, among the control processing that has the same content as the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, some of the control processing are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of explanation, but the detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

FIG. 371 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (S54112). In this command determination process 9 (S54112), when it is determined that a state command has been received (S4309: Yes), the state command process 9 is performed (S54301) and when it is determined that a time saving related command has been received (54303: Yes), the time saving related process 9 is performed (S54304). Other than that, they are identical.

Here, the content of the state command process 9 (S54301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 9 (S54301). This state command process 9 (S54301) is a process that is executed when a state command is included in the command received from the main controller 110, and a process for setting an effect mode based on the game state set by the main controller 110 and a process for setting the number of remaining time reductions (time reduction end condition) when the time reduction state is set are executed.

When state command processing 9 (S54301) is executed, it is first determined whether a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351), and if it is determined to have been received (S54351: Yes), game state update processing 9 is executed (S54352), and the process proceeds to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), then it is determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of times of working hours has been received (S54353). If it is determined that (S54355: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa is set to "10000", and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "time saving A" ("time saving B") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time saving counter 223hb is set to 10 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.

That is, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is set to the remaining time reduction count (time reduction end condition) corresponding to the time reduction type (S54356, S54357). Here, the value of the set remaining time reduction counter 223hb is displayed as the remaining time reduction number of the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time reduction state is set. In addition, in this 9th control example, it comprises so that the value of "10000" may be set to remaining time reduction counter 223hb as time reduction end conditions of a 2nd time reduction state. In other words, it is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is not won in 10,000 special symbol lotteries.

In this case, since the special symbol lottery in the time saving state wins the big win with a probability of 27/8192, the big win is almost certainly won before the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the second time saving state is set, until the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223hb reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to execute the processing of updating and displaying the remaining time saving number of times, and instead, the character "∞" is continuously displayed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to omit the trouble of executing processing for updating and displaying the display mode showing the number of remaining time reductions every time a special symbol lottery is executed in a period when the player is not interested in the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state (a period in which the number of remaining time reductions remains large), and to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

In this case, after winning the jackpot, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed in the second time saving state may be displayed to the player as part of the result display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to analyze the actually executed game.

In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a high probability state of normal symbols with different types of special symbol lottery to be mainly executed, by setting an element for establishing a time saving end condition that is mainly likely to be established to the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223hb, the process for updating and displaying the remaining time saving number of times may be executed based on the update contents of the remaining time saving number counter 223hb, and the process for updating the display mode showing the remaining time saving number of times. can be simplified.

In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information included in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 373, the content of the game state update process 9 (S54352) will be described. FIG. 373 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 9 (S54352). This game state update process 9 (S54352) is a process executed when a command indicating the game state is received in the state command process 9 (see S54301 in FIG. 372), and the process based on the game state before transition and the game state after transition is executed.

When the game state update process 9 (S54352) is executed, first, based on the state command received this time, information for indicating the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223i (S4401), and it is determined whether or not the state has shifted to the normal state (S54401). In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that the state has shifted to the normal state, that is, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state is included in the state command received this time (S54401: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is cleared to 0 (S54402).

Next, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 reservation (reservation storage of the second special symbol) (S54404), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 reservation (S54404: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S54404, if it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation (S54404: Yes), a display command for showing the pullback effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations is set (S54405), and this processing ends.

That is, in the processing from S54404 to S54405, when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the time when the ``time saving A (time saving A mode)'' in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is completed, the processing for executing the exclusive performance (pullback performance) for the second special symbol lottery which is preferentially executed after shifting to the normal state is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in a special state while the pull-back effect is being executed.

In the process of S54401, if it is determined that there is no transition to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether it is a transition to the time saving state (S54406), and if it is determined that it is not a transition to the time saving state (S54406: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the transition to the time saving state is made (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is set to ON (S54407), the display command corresponding to the time saving type is set (S54408), and this processing ends.

That is, in the above-described processing of S54407 and S54408, when the big win game ends and the time saving state is set, the display of the game explanation screen displayed during the ending period of the big win game is executed continuously even after the big win game ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the content of the time-saving related process 9 (S54304) is demonstrated. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving related process 9 (S54304). In this time saving related process 9 (S54304), a process for determining the effect mode based on the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is executed.

When the time saving related process 9 (S54304) is executed, first, the current time saving type is read out from the game state storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time saving type is "time saving A" (S54602), and when it is determined that the current time saving type is "time saving A" (S54602: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is a special figure 2 variation related (related to the execution of the second special symbol variation) command (S54603).

In the processing of S54603, if it is determined that it is related to special figure 2 fluctuation (S54603: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223pb (S54604), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203pb after the addition is greater than 5 (S54605). In the process of S54505, if it is determined that it is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), set a display command for indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation number has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and proceed to the process of S54609.

When the command for display is set in the processing of S54606, in the time saving state where the time saving A in which the second special pattern lottery is difficult to be executed is set, a display mode for congratulating that the second special pattern lottery has been executed more than ``five times of execution of the second special pattern lottery'' which is the time saving end condition set for the time saving B is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S54602, when it is determined that the time saving type read this time is not "time saving A" (S54602: No), this process ends as it is.

In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining short time counter 223hb is updated based on the received information (S54609), a display command for indicating the updated value of the remaining short time counter 223hb is set (S54610), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, the contents of the non-power status management process (S54102) will be described. FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing the contents of the non-power status management process (S54102). In this non-electric situation management process (S54102), based on the detection signal output from the detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the processing for managing the operation status of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is executed.

Conventionally, a ball entry means capable of executing a lottery (for example, a special pattern lottery) by entering a game ball, a first position (open state) capable of allowing a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a second position (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first position are provided, and variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory) are provided, and a winning game (for example, a normal pattern winning game executed when winning in a normal pattern lottery) is provided. There is a pachinko machine capable of executing a game in which a game ball is entered into a ball entering means by variably operating the .

Further, there is a pachinko machine configured to be able to set an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a winning game is likely to be executed or a period in which the variable means is positioned at the first position in one winning game is likely to be long, that is, an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a game ball can be easily entered into the ball-entering means.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to make it easier to enter a game ball into the ball-entering means than when a game state other than the advantageous game state (for example, a normal state) is set, so that the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the advantageous game state to be set.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, only one type of lottery is executed when a game ball is entered into the ball-entering means, so if the lottery contents are excessively advantageous to the player, the game will be excessively advantageous to the player when an advantageous game state is set. There was a problem that it became difficult to

It is also conceivable to set lottery contents that increase the degree of advantage for the player and reduce the frequency of setting the advantageous game state, that is, the frequency of setting the game state in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entry means for the player. I had a problem with getting bored.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, when a game ball enters a ball entering means in which the game ball can easily enter due to the setting of the advantageous game state, a lottery of a plurality of types is easily executed. Then, the degree of advantage to the player is made different for a plurality of types of lotteries that are likely to be executed.

More specifically, according to the behavior (falling result) of the game ball entered into the ball entering means, the first special symbol lottery with a low degree of advantage or the second special symbol lottery with a high degree of advantage can be executed (facilitated). By configuring in this way, while providing a predetermined period of time during which the player can easily execute the special symbol lottery by setting the advantageous game state (time saving state), by switching the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed (facilitated to be executed) during the period, the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player during the advantageous game state (time saving state) can be changed, so that the excessively advantageous game can be prevented from being provided to the player.

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 356 for the detailed description, in the ninth control example, the special figure 1 non-electric activation opening 3073a that triggers the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a within the area (within the operating device 3070) in which the game ball is likely to enter during the normal symbol lottery that is executed when winning the normal symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 non-electric activation opening 30 that triggers the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a. 73b is provided, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a or the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b according to the operation pattern of the game per normal figure.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electrical role 3064a is activated, so that the game ball easily enters the right first ball opening 3064, which is the trigger for the execution of the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 3065 which is a trigger. Further, the second special symbol lottery is constructed so that a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the game ball is difficult to reach the second ball entrance 3065 when the special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a are operating together.

Specifically, it is configured so that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in operation blocks the flow path in which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in a state in which both the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are operating, the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entrance 3064 more easily than the second ball entrance 3065.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, as a termination condition for terminating the advantageous game state, a termination condition is set which is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in the ninth control example, since the through gate 67, the normal electric role object 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric role object 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric role object 3065a are arranged in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to shoot the game ball toward the through gate 67 and the ordinary electric role object 3071 without making the game ball reach each non-electric role object. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to play the game without entering the game ball into the right first ball entrance 3064 until the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 3065 where the lottery advantageous to the player is executed (the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is activated).

In other words, when the game ball is shot toward any one of the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the game ball can enter the other device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player executes a game in which a game ball is entered only to a specific device.

In the ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are all provided in the right area of the game board 13. However, it is not limited to this, and at least a plurality of the above-described various devices may be arranged at positions where game balls that flow down the same flow path can enter.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 to 395. FIG. The tenth control example, like the above-described seventh control example, is configured so that a small winning can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big winning (losing), and it has a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type type) that can execute a big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on the winning of a small winning. When the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the second special symbol reservation memory (special figure 2 reservation) and the time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain can be set.

The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example in that a predetermined number (four) of special figure 2 reserves can be stored, and in that the game state that is set after the big win game is executed based on the big win winning in each game state or after the big win game is executed based on the small win winning in each game state is different. Furthermore, it is different in that the content of the production executed during the time saving state is changed. In the following, differences between the tenth control example and the above-described seventh control example will be mainly described. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the seventh control example described above will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example (including each modification), at least a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set as the game state. 2. It is configured so that the ball can be easily entered into the ball entry hole (winning hole) 640.例文帳に追加

Then, when a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 results in a lottery other than a big win (for example, a small win), a small win game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small win game (when information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area at the end of the small win game is stored), the big win game is executed. was doing In addition, by configuring the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol so that it can be held and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) as the upper limit, by holding and storing the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol in the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol), even after the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (even after shifting to the low probability state of the normal symbol), the second special symbol lottery can be executed. Even in the case of shifting, the player can be made to execute the game in a normal state (normal state in which the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol is held and stored) which is more advantageous than usual, so that the player who has finished the time-saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player can maintain a state in which the possibility of executing a big win game is increased more than usual, and it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from remarkably decreasing.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above, in order to end the time saving state with the second special symbol lottery opportunity acquired for the player who is normally playing the game during the time saving state, the normal pattern winning probability is increased in the time saving state, and the period during which the variable means is opened is increased. ) always becomes the same number, and there is a problem that it is impossible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In addition, when the acquired special figure 2 reserved number is always the same when the time saving state ends, in order to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, it is necessary to prescribe low the ratio of setting the time saving state, including the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery executed after the time saving state ends, or predefine the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery low. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to play the game during the time saving state, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, as the time saving state, it is possible to set a time saving state (advantageous time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain special figure 2 reservation and a time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) in which it is difficult to obtain special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to vary the number of special figures 2 pending at the time when the time saving state ends according to the type of the time saving state that has been set. Therefore, even if the ratio of setting the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game is increased, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game that is excessively advantageous to the player, so that the player can be easily made to execute the game in the time saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Further, in the tenth control example, when a big winning game is executed based on the special symbol lottery winning, a disadvantageous time saving state is set after the big winning game is completed, and when a big winning game is executed based on the special symbol lottery winning a small winning game, an advantageous time saving state can be set after the big winning game is completed.

That is, according to the execution opportunity of the big winning game, it is configured to vary the advantage degree of the time saving state to be set after the end of the big winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which execution opportunity the big winning game was executed based on.

In the tenth control example, as described above, the setting ratio between the advantageous time saving state and the unfavorable time saving state is configured to be different according to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the ratio of setting the advantageous time-saving state is preferably higher when the big-win game is performed when the time-saving state is set than when the big-win game is performed when the normal state is set as the game state. Thus, in the most unfavorable game state for the player, even when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the disadvantageous time saving state is easily set and the time saving state is easily ended, but when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state and the working time saving state is set again, the advantageous time saving state is easily set, so that the time saving state can be easily looped through the jackpot game.

With this configuration, the player can play games with different degrees of advantage step by step, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. In addition, in the tenth control example, as in each control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is configured so that the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the time saving state (advantage time saving state) that is easy to end with the special figure 2 reservation is obtained is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) that is easy to end without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. For example, the first special symbol lottery may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery, and the time saving state which is easy to end when the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state which is easy to end when the special symbol 2 reservation is obtained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each control example described above, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state continues by making it possible to set a different number of times according to the type of the big win as the number of times of special symbol variation for ending the time saving state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. As a result, the player can play while expecting that the time saving state will continue for a longer time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example described above, the time saving state is terminated at the stop timing of the special symbol variation in the special symbol variation of the number of times to end the time saving state (special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition).

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation. Furthermore, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation once can be set. That is, when the time-saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation once is set, the time-saving state continues until the first second special symbol variation is performed during the time-saving state, and when the first second special symbol variation is performed, for example, when the time-saving state is set without having the lottery right for the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation), the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state, When the second special symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state is terminated.

By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery can be surely executed when the time saving state is set, and the period for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation can be shortened in the time saving state. That is, in the tenth control example, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is set, which is established by executing the second special symbol variation once, becomes a disadvantageous time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation twice can also be set. In this case, since the time saving state can be continued until the second special symbol variation is started, the period during which the first second special symbol variation is varied is a period in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball inlet 640.例文帳に追加That is, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation twice becomes an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, as described above, the time saving end condition is configured to end at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation where the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving end condition that can be established in the first special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state can be set. A pachinko machine 10 configured to terminate the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol variation may be configured to be able to select a short variation pattern in which a short variation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set and a long variation pattern in which a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and a disadvantageous time-saving state depending on the selected variation pattern. In other words, when the same content of the time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state, the easiness of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation can be varied according to the set variation pattern.

Moreover, in this case. Different types of time-saving states can be set according to the game state at the time of winning the big win (small win), and the selection ratio of the above-described short variation pattern and the long-variation pattern can be changed according to the time-saving type to be set, or a period in which the short variation pattern is likely to be selected and a period in which the long variation pattern is likely to be selected based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the last big winning game is completed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state in a period from setting one time-saving state to ending the time-saving state, so that a player can play a game while expecting a game to be executed in the advantageous time-saving state until the last moment when the time-saving state ends.

Further, by combining the technology of the tenth control example and the technology of each control example described above, the time saving state may be terminated at various timings such as the start timing and stop timing of the special symbol variation executed in the time saving state. In this way, when the time saving end condition is established, the timing of actually ending the time saving state is variable, whereby it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time saving state ends, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 to 380. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example differs from the game board 13 (see FIG. 294) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example in that the arrangement position and structure of the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game are changed, the arrangement positions of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are changed, the structure of the electric accessory 640a that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is changed, and the game is played. The difference is that the configuration of the right side area of the board 13 is changed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 376, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is activated when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is display means for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . The first symbol display device 37 is also activated when the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is also a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, the pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol may be used without being limited to this.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a lighting state, indicates whether or not special symbols (first symbols) are changing (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result) by a lighting state, and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to an advantageous win for the player, a symbol corresponding to a disadvantageous win, or a missing symbol. is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and a combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various game states are notified by combinations of the light emitting colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify various game states.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters (wins a prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a win/loss determination (hit lottery) is performed as to whether or not a small hit has been won. Here, a small winning game, which is a privilege game advantageous to the player, is executed based on the determination that the small winning has been won.

During the small winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state is provided in which the V winning device 650 is easily allowed to win a ball. When the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game wins a specific area (V winning opening 1650) described later, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends. During the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state is provided in which the variable winning device 65 is easily allowed to win a ball.

In this control example, the total number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the game is larger in the big win game than in the small win game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls that the player acquires, the big winning game is a privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game. It should be noted that the small winning game may be configured so that the total number of prize balls that the player can obtain is larger than that of the big winning game. In this way, by configuring to be able to give a privilege with a different degree of advantage according to the privilege game to be executed, the player can play the game while enjoying which privilege game is to be played.

In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, a game state (for example, normal state) different from the game state before the jackpot game is executed is set, and after the jackpot game is finished, a new game state can be set based on the information related to the executed jackpot game (for example, the small win type (jackpot type) and the game state at the time of winning (small win winning)). On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, the game state before executing the small winning game continues during the small winning game and continues even after the small winning game ends. In other words, during the big win game having a high degree of advantage for the player (the number of winning balls is large), a normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, is set to prevent the player from being provided with excessive benefits during the big win game, while the game state is not changed when the small win game having a lower degree of advantage than the big win game is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game state from being changed triggered by the execution of a small winning game with a low degree of advantage. In addition, without being limited to this, a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player may be set during the small winning game like the big winning game, or the game state after finishing the small winning game may be determined based on the type of winning the small winning. Also, it may be configured to determine a game state set after the end of the winning game based on the game result during the winning game (during the big winning game, during the small winning game). In this case, it is determined whether or not the ball entered by the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 (variable ball winning device) that makes it easier to enter the ball during the winning game (privilege game) has passed through a specific area provided in the variable ball entering means, and based on the determination result, the winning game is played. It is preferable to configure the type of game state to be set after the end of the game to be different, for example, to set a game state that is more advantageous to the player when passing through the specific area than when not passing through the specific area, or to set a game state which is more disadvantageous to the player when passing through the specific area than when not passing through the specific area. As a result, during the winning game, it is possible to play a game aiming at setting an advantageous game state after the winning game ends, and the player can play the game enthusiastically.

In addition, when a winning game is executed in a state in which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an event in which the game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set continues even after the winning game is completed, a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) is continuously performed, the game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player may be forcibly set after the winning game is completed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game state advantageous to the player is excessively continued.

When the jackpot game is executed, an open state in which balls can be easily entered into a specific prize winning port 65a of a variable prize winning device 65 is achieved, and a game capable of acquiring many prize balls in a short period of time is executed by allowing balls to enter the specific prize winning port 65a. This jackpot game is executed (in case) after the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped (confirmed display) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds). An opening period of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) (a period during which a closed state is set to make it difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 0.00) from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. 5 seconds), an interval period in which a closed state is set, and an ending period in which a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) of the closed state is set after the end of the last round game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period in accordance with the start timing of the big win game, it is possible to make preparations for shooting balls in an arbitrary direction in accordance with the timing of opening the specific prize winning port 65a during the big win game, so that the big win game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

By setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game, so that preparations can be made for shooting balls in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed after the jackpot game is finished, so that the game can be switched smoothly.

In addition, in this control example, based on the ball entering the specific area (V winning opening 1650) during the small winning game, the big winning game can be executed after the small winning game ends. Therefore, by setting the ending period as the final period of the small winning game, a preparation period for switching from the game (left-handed game) executed during the small winning game to the game (right-handed game) executed during the big winning game can be provided, so that the player can smoothly switch the game.

Regarding the length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period), the timing at which the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed at the time of the special symbol lottery (at the time of winning the small winning), the game state set at the start of the small winning game, the end of the small winning game, the start of the big winning game, or the end of the big winning game. As a method), when winning a jackpot in which the game content (game method) different from the game content (game method) before the jackpot game is set, the ending period (for example, 10 seconds) of the jackpot game is set to be longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of the other jackpot games, and during the ending period, the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is finished can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (game method) before starting the jackpot game is the same as the game content (game method) executed after the jackpot game ends, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot game may be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of the other jackpot games. This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration for actually discriminating between the game content (game method) before the big win game and the game content (game method) to be executed after the big win game ends, for example, based on the type of the big win game (small win type) to be executed and the game state set before the big win game, the game state to be set after the big win game is defined in advance, and the length of the ending period of each big win game is set according to the defined content. may be configured.

In the tenth control example, the game state is set to either the "normal state" or the "time saving state". A normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is a game state in which a special pattern jackpot probability is set to (30/1000) and a normal pattern win probability is set to a low probability (3/300).

In this control example, after the time-saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time-saving end condition) is established, the game state is configured to shift from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving mentioned above indicates the time-saving end condition. In other words, the number of times of shortening time means that the termination condition of shortening of time is established when the lottery of special symbols is executed once without executing a jackpot game after setting of the shortening of time state.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, it is possible to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing of starting the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine how long the time saving state will continue.

In this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a condition (time saving number of times) regarding the number of special symbol lotteries during the time saving state is defined, but other configurations may be used as the time saving end condition. A time-saving end condition that is established when the time-saving state has elapsed, or an end condition that is established when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63a) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5) during the time-saving state may be set.

In addition, the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing of ending the time saving state may be different, for example, at the timing of starting the special symbol variation, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied by this special symbol variation, and when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied, depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated before the special symbol variation is started, or the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the stop (special symbol) It may be configured to end the time saving state at a predetermined timing (including the stop display timing of the fluctuation). Since the timing which performs the process for discriminating whether the time saving end conditions were satisfied by this can be unified, the control process for ending a time saving state can be simplified.

In addition, as the above-mentioned specific condition (element for determining the timing to end the time saving state when the time saving end condition is satisfied), the type of game state (normal state or time saving state) set at the time the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery that won the small win) that triggered the execution of the big win game is executed. Even if the same small win type (big win type) is set in the case and the time saving state and the same time saving end condition is set, the timing of ending the time saving state may be made different.

Similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to execute a winning game (normal winning game) in which the electric role object 640a attached to the general electric prize winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○").

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern (ordinary pattern fluctuation time) is defined with different lengths of fluctuation time according to the probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state), and the normal pattern fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds in the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is set to 1 second in the high probability state of the normal pattern. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of normal pattern per game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state).

In addition, a configuration different from the tenth control example may be used, for example, regardless of the probability state of normal symbols, the same normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) may be set. In a pachinko machine 10 constructed in such a manner that the time required for variable display of normal patterns (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer in the normal state than in the time reduction state in order to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern winning game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) is difficult to be executed, and the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern low probability state) is easily executed. When the game state shifts to (normal pattern high probability state), it is possible to suppress the setting of a long period in which the normal pattern lottery is not executed in the time reduction state, even though the time reduction state is set, by shifting to the time reduction state during the execution of the normal pattern variation (ordinary pattern winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time reduction state) executed in the normal state.

In this case, since the normal pattern lottery is executed once per second at the maximum in the low probability state of the normal patterns, the normal pattern winning game is easily executed in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal patterns, so the probability of winning the normal pattern in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal patterns should be set low.

In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric accessary 640a) of the normal figure per game to be executed is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving state. In other words, the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁Specifically, when the normal state is set, after an opening period of 4.1 seconds (closed period of the electric role product 640a), a normal game per game (normal game per game) in which an open period of 0.1 seconds is set is executed, and when a time saving state is set, a game per normal game (a game per normal game) in which an open period of 3 seconds is set after an opening period of 1 second (closed period of the electric role product 640a) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 376, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a will be described. The electric accessory 640a in the tenth control example is configured to be displaceable between an embedded state (restricted state) embedded in the game board 13 and a protruding state (induction state) protruding from the game board 13, and is configured to be positioned in the embedded state (closed state) when a normal game is not executed. And, when the normal figure per game is executed, it is displaced to the protruding state (induction state) for a predetermined period (up to 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, terms for the displacement state of the electric accessory 640a will be explained. The closed state of the electric role object 640a is a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric role object 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is closed, that is, the electric role object 640a is a term used to indicate a state of being embedded in the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term restricted state (a state in which the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is restricted) is sometimes used.

In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 640a is a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is open, that is, the electric accessory 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the electric accessory 640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term induced state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is sometimes used.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the electric role object 640a is in the guided state, the electric role object 640a is arranged so that most of the balls fired by the left-handed game flow into the flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric role object 640a in the guided state. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is formed with a ball flow lower surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and the ball that reaches the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows down to the second ball entrance 640.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal game, it is configured to end the normal game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can be won into the second ball entrance 640 during one game per normal pattern is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 376, in this control example, the game method advantageous to the player is the same (left-handed game) during the game state in which the normal state is set and in the game state in which the time saving state is set. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, a normal symbol lottery opportunity is established even in the normal state (a ball passes through the through gate 67), and a normal symbol lottery is executed. As a result of the normal pattern lottery, when winning is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball shot by the left-handed hitting game can reach is controlled to be opened, so there is a possibility that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the normal winning game.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game even if the normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state. Specifically, the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640 is set to about 1 second, while the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the induced state by the normal game in the normal state is set to 0.2 seconds.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a structure for executing a game in the same game method in a normal state (normal pattern low probability state) and a time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), i.e., in the pachinko machine 10 capable of winning a game per normal pattern even in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is constructed so that most (approximately 100%) of the balls launched to the game board flowing down the left area of the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, a variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of ``O'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of ``x'' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 376, the description continues. A V winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (on the left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 376) so that the ball that is launched in the left-handed game and flows down the left side area can win. Here, with reference to FIGS. 377 to 380, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 650 will be described. In this control example, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, a small win game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. And it is configured so that a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed by winning a ball in a V winning opening 1650 provided in the V winning device 650 .

This control example is constructed so that the big winning game is executed based on the passing (winning) of the ball through the specific area (V winning opening 1650) during the small winning game executed when the small winning is won without winning the big winning by the special pattern lottery. In this way, a player can be provided with a game that keeps the player from getting bored by executing a privilege game (big win game) that is advantageous to the player by establishing the first condition (small winning) and the second condition (passing through the specific area) in stages.

In addition to this, it may be constructed so as to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the execution opportunity of the big win game (special big win game) established when the big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, there is the execution opportunity of the big win game (V big win game) established when the ball wins in a specific winning port (V winning port 1650). In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

First, referring to FIG. 377, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can easily win in the V winning device 650 and a closed state in which the ball is less likely to win than in the open state. This open/close door 650a is provided at a position (see FIG. 376) where balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a small winning game is executed.

In the V winning device 650, a first flow path 650b through which the ball that has passed through the opening/closing door 650a in the open state flows down is formed in the space between the first partition wall 650k1 and the second partition wall 650k2. A storage part capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 660a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is temporarily stored in the storage part. A storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that the ball is stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 650b, and based on the detection of the ball by the ball detecting sensor 650s2, the number of balls winning in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is measured, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. Thus, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at the position where the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down immediately afterward, it is possible to suppress the situation in which more than a specified number of balls win the V winning device 650, and to immediately give the player the prize balls during the small winning game.

A second flow path 650c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first out port 1163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 377, the second flow path 650c is configured so that the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 650b do not directly flow into the second flow path 650c, but that the subsequent balls that have flowed down the first flow path 650b come into contact with the balls that are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a and are guided to the second flow path 650c. The first out port 1163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 650c is a ball entrance for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball flows down the second flow path 650c (falling period of 0.1 second), and the ball entering the first out port 1163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a release state in which balls are less likely to be stored than in the storage state according to the progress of the small winning game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small winning game is executed). When the reservoir valve 660a is in the released state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650b or the ball that has been stored in the reservoir of the reservoir valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. The third flow path 650d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm, which is formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 650k1 and the third partition 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. The first movable valve 660b is configured to move in a predetermined movable pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, between a guiding position (protruding position) capable of receiving the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d and a passing position (recessed position) unable to receive the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d. Specifically, it is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and is configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d driven and controlled by the main controller 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 660b moves to the passage position (the position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 660b retreats from the V winning device 650, and the first movable valve solenoid 2 09d is set to OFF (when the electricity is shut off), the first movable valve 660b is configured to move to a guiding position protruding into the V winning device 650 (a position protruding from the game board 13).

The first movable valve 660b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d with the first movable valve 660b at the guiding position (protruding position) (falling period of 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b toward the fourth flow path 650e. A second out port 1163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 650e, and the ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 650e (falling period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 1163b. This second out port 1163b is, like the first out port 1163a described above, a ball entry port for ejecting the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the ball entering the second out port 1163b flows down a ball ejection path (not shown) and is ejected to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the passage position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f are communicated with each other, and the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d (falling period of 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (flowing period of 0.1 second). A V winning port 1650 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 650f. The V prize winning port 1650 is a prize winning port that can serve as a trigger for executing a big winning game, and when a ball wins the V winning prize port 1650 while the big winning game is not being executed, the winning information is stored (the right to execute the big winning game is acquired), and the big winning game is executed after finishing the small winning game being executed.

As shown in FIG. 377, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first outlet 1163a and a second outlet 1163b. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650 when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state from flowing into the flow path (the third flow path 650d, the fourth flow path 650e, and the fifth flow path 650f) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 660a is in the released state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first out port 1163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e may be communicated, the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, and the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c may enter the second out port 1163b. In this case, the third partition wall 650k3, which is provided linearly in the vertical direction in FIG. 377, should be inclined from the upper end side to the lower end side in the lower right direction from the viewpoint in FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c flows into the fifth flow path 650f.

As described above, in this control example, the big winning game is executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 1650 during the small winning game. Hereinafter, when the jackpot games are described by classifying execution opportunities, the jackpot game executed when the player enters the V winning port 1650 will also be referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 650 of this control example is configured so that when a small winning game is executed, the ball enters an open state in which the ball can win a prize, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. It is configured to determine whether or not to award.

In the tenth control example, the first movable valve 660b is operated so that the game ball enters the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that the game ball can enter the V winning device 650 without fail. The movement of the first movable valve 660b may be defined so that there are cases where the ball enters and cases where the ball does not enter. For example, the first movable valve 660b may be configured to always move in a movable pattern in which the time at the guidance position (the time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 1650) is 6 seconds, and the time at the passing position (the time during which the ball can enter the V winning opening 1650) is 1 second. As a result, the ratio of the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d to the V winning opening 1650 can be reduced to about 1/6.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 378 to 380, unlike the tenth control example, the content of the flow of the winning ball in the V winning device 650 during execution of the small winning game in the modified example in which the small winning game in which the game ball can enter the V winning opening 1650 and the small winning game in which the game ball cannot enter will be described. In the following description, even if a plurality of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that only one ball flows down the third flow path 650d. First, with reference to FIG. 378, the ball flow in the first half period of the small winning game (the period in which the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state) will be described. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state in the small winning game. Although a detailed description will be given later, the reservoir valve 660a is configured to be operationally controlled to be in the reservoir state from when the small winning game is executed until the V winning device 650 is closed. When a plurality of balls enter the V winning device 650 while the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, the ball P1 that wins first is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 660a, and the ball P2 that wins the second prize comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the out port 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, all the winning balls (for example, the balls P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a are configured to enter the out port 1163a. In addition, since the storage valve 660a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 650a of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d can be reliably reduced to one in one accessory game.

By constructing in this way, since the easiness of winning the ball to the V winning opening 1650 is not changed according to the timing of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the number of winning, all the players can be provided with a fair game.

However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 can be changed according to the number of winnings that the ball enters the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. establish. Of the six storage parts, only the balls stored in a specific storage part can be entered into the V winning port 1650 when the storage state of the storage part is released, and the balls (maximum five) stored in storage parts other than the specific storage part are configured to enter the second out port 1163b when the storage state of each storage part is released. In addition, when the next ball is sorted by the sorting member toward the storage section in which the balls are already stored, a flow path communicating between the storage sections is provided so that the ball collides with the already stored ball and is stored in another adjacent storage section.

By constructing in this way, the winning ratio to the V winning opening 1650 can be changed according to the winning number of winning balls to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Even in the case of such a constitution, the actual winning ratio to the V winning opening 1650 can be varied by changing the number of times of canceling the storage state of the storage part for causing the balls to flow down to the out port during one small winning game according to the type of the small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the contents of the ball flow (second half period of the game per role) when the storage valve 660a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. Figure 379 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the small hit game, when the storage valve 660a is shifted from the storage state to the release state. As shown in FIG. 379, after the V opening/closing door 650a is closed and new balls cannot enter the V winning device 650, when the storage valve 660a shifts to the released state (indicated by the dotted line in the drawing), the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 379, the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the guiding position, so the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, flows down the fourth flow path 650e, and enters the second out port 1163b.

On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, the ball flow when the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the passage position will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 380 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the small hit game, when the storage valve 660a is shifted from the storage state to the release state. As shown in FIG. 380, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b and the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the passing position, it flows down the fifth flow path 660f and enters the V prize opening 1650.

In the tenth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 376 to 380, the game for entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state and the game for entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state are configured to cause the player to play the left-handed game. However, without being limited to this, the player may be made to play a game in a different game method between the normal state and the time saving state, as in each control example described above.

<Regarding the production content in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 381 to FIG. 383, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described. In the tenth control example, when the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving state reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the player can be notified of the number of times that the big winning game (big winning game based on the small winning winning) can be executed based on the information indicating the result of the look-ahead for the special figure 2 reservation.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is stipulated that a big win or a small win is always won, and the game ball can be surely passed to a specific area by normally playing the game during the small win game executed based on the small win.

In other words, in the tenth control example, a game with a game property to acquire the right to execute the big winning game is executed by the number of special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired. In addition, in the tenth control example, a normal state and a time saving state can be set as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and further, as the time saving state, it is possible to set a disadvantageous time saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the special figure 2 reservation and an advantageous time saving state in which it is easier to obtain the special figure 2 reservation than the disadvantageous time saving state.

When a predetermined condition (special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit) is satisfied in the time saving state, it is determined whether or not an advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired, and based on the decision result, the number of rights that can make the player execute the jackpot game can be notified.

In this way, in addition to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, the game state set after the end of the big winning game to be executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 reservations is predicted, and the number of times the big winning game can be executed (the number of times of execution of the big winning game) can be reported, so that it is possible to notify the number of times that the big winning execution is possible, which is larger than the number of the acquired special figure 2 reservations.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the number of times to notify the player as the number of executable jackpots is configured to vary based on the game state at the time when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit and the look-ahead result. In other words, the number of times other than the maximum number can be notified to the player as the number of times the jackpot can be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from completely grasping the content of the game to be executed later based on the reported number of times of execution of the big win and lowering the player's willingness to play.

In addition, in the tenth control example, during the final variation period of the time saving state in which the special figure 2 suspension can be acquired, even if the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired to the upper limit number, the drawing result of the final variation and the performance mode of the guidance performance for acquiring the special figure 2 suspension can be changed based on the prefetch result of the acquired special figure 2 suspension, or the performance different from the guidance performance can be executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the conventional type pachinko machine 10 having the same game property as the tenth control example, in the final variation period of the special symbols in the time saving state in which the special figure 2 suspension is easy to acquire (the final variation period of the special figure 2), by executing the guidance performance for acquiring the special figure 2 suspension to the upper limit number, the player is made to play the game that makes the most of the privilege given to the player during the time saving state (the privilege that makes it easy to acquire the special figure 2 suspension). there is something

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, for example, regardless of the result of the lottery result of the final time-saving variation or the result of the second special symbol lottery executed after the final time-saving variation (the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation performed during the normal state), the guidance effect is executed. In such a case, the player is forced to play a game in which game balls are shot unnecessarily, and there is a problem that the player cannot be guided to a proper game.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when determining the performance mode to be executed during the time saving final variation period, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the time saving final variation and the look-ahead result corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 suspension, it is determined whether or not the time saving state in which the special figure 2 suspension can be acquired is set again after the time saving final variation period has passed, and whether or not the guidance performance is executed is differentiated based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a guidance effect that suppresses the player from playing a game for reaching the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number unnecessarily.

In addition, in the tenth control example, it is configured to vary the performance mode of the guide performance according to the content of the game that can be executed after the time saving final variation period has passed (acquisition difficulty of the special figure 2 reservation). It is configured to execute a guidance performance emphasizing the guidance mode of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation for the player rather than in a time saving state (unfavorable time saving condition) in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, by providing strength and weakness to the guidance mode as the performance mode of the guidance performance executed during the time saving final variation period, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game disadvantageous to the player due to the end of the period without acquiring the special figure 2 suspension during the period in which the player is disadvantaged unless the special figure 2 suspension is acquired, compared to the case where the monotonous guidance performance is always executed.

In the tenth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) in which it is difficult to obtain the special figure 2 reservation (unfavorable time-saving state) or a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) in which it is easy to obtain the special figure 2 reservation can be set after the end of the big winning game.

Specifically, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the first second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is started, and when the advantageous time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the second special symbol variation performed during the time-saving state is started. By constructing in this way, when a disadvantageous time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed only once is set without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, and when an advantageous time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations can be obtained is set.

First, with reference to FIG. 381(a), the effect contents when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 381(a) shows an example of the display screen displayed during the first second special symbol variation in the time-saving state (first hit state) set after winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. As shown in FIG. 381(a), the drawing result of the second special symbol variation being executed is the drawing result (unfavorable drawing result) in which the unfavorable time saving state is set or the drawing result (advantageous drawing result) in which the advantageous working time saving state is set.

According to the example shown in FIG. 381(a), an icon 1800a imitating "V" is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the unfavorable lottery result, and an icon 1800b imitating "Vx5" is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the advantageous lottery result. Then, when the icon 1800b is selected, a ``super chance mode'' is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding transition to a super chance mode, and a comment of ``Vx5 for 5 consecutive chances'' is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding acquisition of 5 jackpot game execution rights (5 consecutive chances possible) when the icon 1800b is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 381(b), the content of the effect during the big win game executed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the special figure 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 381(b), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a notification effect for notifying the player in advance of the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is executed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 382 (a), the contents of the production in an advantageous time saving state are explained. Drawing 382 (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen in super chance mode showing that it is in an advantageous time saving state. As shown in FIG. 382 (a), the super chance mode is configured so that the time saving state continues until the second special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times, and during the variation period of the second special symbol variation It is configured to be able to acquire the special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, there is displayed a comment saying that the special figure 2 reservation can be easily obtained at present, and a comment ``Right hit and save V'' to prompt the player to obtain the special figure 2 reservation.

And, in the small display area Dm9, a V icon that increases or decreases corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 pending number is displayed. This V icon is configured to be able to display up to the same number as the special figure 2 reserve, and each time the special figure 2 reserve is acquired, the first V icon hr1 to the fourth V icon hr4 are displayed in order. In the example shown in FIG. 382(a), since two special figure 2 reserves are acquired, the first V-icon hr1 and the second V-icon hr2 are displayed.

After that, when the player obtains the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2, as shown in FIG. 382(b), an icon hx simulating "MAX" is displayed in the information of the small display area Dm9 as an upper limit notification mode for indicating that the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2 is obtained, and an effect is executed in which a treasure box 1810 appears in the center of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Treasure box appears" are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "What is the content?" are displayed as a guidance mode for explaining the progress of the effect being executed to the player. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect of opening the treasure box 1810 will be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383(a), when the treasure box 1810 is opened, an effect is executed in which the contents 1810a appear from the treasure box 1810, and the number of jackpot game execution rights currently acquired by the player is notified by the display mode of the contents 1810a. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 383 (a), because the fourth special figure 2 pending look-ahead result is a small winning winning in which the advantageous working hours reduction state is set, the jackpot game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed (once), the jackpot game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 reservation (4 times), and the fourth special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game. Contents 1810a are displayed in a display mode 'V×10' for notifying that the right to execute the jackpot game is obtained 10 times by combining the jackpot game (once) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed and the jackpot game (four times) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserve obtainable during the change.

By configuring in this way, in the tenth control example, not only the number of already acquired jackpot game execution rights, but also the game content after the jackpot game execution that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot game execution rights is predicted, and information regarding the jackpot game execution rights that can be acquired can be notified to the player. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how the execution right of the jackpot game will be generated (whether it can be obtained), and the game can be provided without getting bored.

In the tenth control example, when a proper game (right-handed game) is executed during the small-hit game, it is configured so that the big-hit game can be executed. When the big winning game is not executed, it is preferable to execute an effect for reducing the number of right to execute the big winning game notified in advance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of times of the big winning game executed has decreased according to the contents of the executed game. In this case, it is preferable to be able to inform the player of information for letting the player know how the number of rights to execute the jackpot game has decreased (the right to execute has been extinguished). As a result, when the number of rights to execute the big winning game remains, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of rights to execute the big winning game decreases again.

In the tenth control example, when an appropriate game (right-handed game) is executed during a small winning game, it is configured to be able to execute almost a big winning game, so that the player can be provided with the same number of big winning games as the number of rights to execute the big winning game notified to the player in advance. Not only the number but also game contents after the end of the big winning game which can be executed based on the acquired right to execute the big winning game are predicted, the number of rights to execute the big winning game which can be acquired by the player may be calculated, and part of the calculation result may be notified to the player in advance.

Thus, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to execute a jackpot game with a probability of about 1/2 when a small winning game is executed, when the player is configured to notify the player in advance of half the number calculated as the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that can be obtained, the number of execution rights of the jackpot game notified in advance is increased based on the number of actually executed small winning games and the number of jackpot games. By enabling execution of update processing for increasing or decreasing, the player can easily predict the number of times a big win game can be executed, and the reliability of information used for prediction can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 383(b), the description continues. FIG. 383(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the final variation period of the second special symbol in the super chance mode indicating the advantageous time saving state. In the tenth control example, the period in which the advantageous working hours reduction state is set is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the period in which the advantageous working hours reduction state is not set. During the second special symbol fluctuation period (during the final fluctuation period) in which the conditions for ending the advantageous working hours state are satisfied, as shown in FIG. Although the notification is configured to be executable, when the special symbol variation that is the final variation period is executed, the special figure 2 suspension corresponding to the winning in which the advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set in the already acquired special figure 2 suspension If there is, as shown in FIG.

In other words, during the special pattern fluctuation period in which the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, even if the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained, if the specific condition is satisfied, the guidance information for urging the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number unnecessarily.

<Regarding the game state transition in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 384, the game state transition contents in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 384 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 384, in the tenth control example, as in the above-described seventh control example, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set, and even if any game state is set, the player is configured to be able to execute a left-handed game.

As the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a normal state (first normal state) is set in a state in which special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension are not obtained. In this first normal state, a game for entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. In this first normal state, since the special symbol low probability state is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed with a probability of 30/1000 for winning the jackpot.

Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type. After the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, a time saving state is set.

In the tenth control example, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which the game degree of the player is varied, and a second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a first time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) can be set. More specifically, the degree of play in the time saving state is varied by varying the easiness of obtaining the special figure 2 reservation during the period in which the time saving state is set, and when the second time saving state (advantageous time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is configured to make it easy to enter a plurality of game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during the short period of time. On the other hand, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set, it is configured to make it difficult to enter a plurality of game balls into the second ball entrance 640 within a short period of time.

In other words, the degree of advantage to the player is made different by making the easiness of acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball during the time saving state different between when the first time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) is set and when the second time saving state (advantageous time saving state) is set.

The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) and a time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) as game states. Since the low probability state of the normal pattern is set in the normal state, it is difficult to win the normal pattern, and even if the normal pattern is won, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a is short and the ball is difficult (cannot be made to enter) into the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁Therefore, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game and a first special symbol lottery is executed is mainly performed.

Then, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is executed to win the jackpot with a probability of 30/1000. When the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, and the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the content of the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 384, in this control example, the first time saving state and the second time saving state can be set as the time saving state. Here, the difference between the first time saving state and the second time saving state will be described. The first time saving state and the second time saving state are both time saving states in which a special pattern low probability state and a normal pattern high probability state are set, and the winning probability of the special pattern lottery and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are the same. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.

The only difference is the timing when the time saving state ends (shifts to the normal state), and in the first time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed once, the time saving state is finished at the start timing of the second special symbol lottery, and in the second time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed twice, the time saving state is finished at the start timing of the second special symbol fluctuation.

That is, since the second time saving state can be set longer than the first time saving state by the variation period of the second special symbol variation, it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during one normal game is one, and the time saving end condition is established when the second special symbol variation is executed once. Therefore, when the first time saving state is set, the time saving state is easily ended in a state where the second special symbol holding memory (special figure 2 holding) is not acquired. On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues even during the variation period of the second special symbol variation, so that the time-saving state is easily ended in a state in which the second special symbol retention memory (special figure 2 suspension) is acquired. That is, from the point of view of the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving state ends, it can be said that the second time saving state is a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

Then, although the details will be described later, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set at a rate of 5% is selected. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than to the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is configured to easily shift to the second time saving state at a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, the game state (normal state, first time saving state) in which the transition rate to the second time saving state most advantageous to the player can be changed step by step for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game before the second time saving state is set. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the game state shifts to the second time saving state more easily than the normal state, the operation of the game can be easily improved.

In the first time-saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by the left-handed game, the normal pattern lottery is executed, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a small win is won with a probability of 970/1000 and a big win is won with a probability of 30/1000. During the first time saving state, the time saving end condition is established based on the execution of the second special pattern lottery once, and the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern variation (second special pattern variation) for showing the result of the second special pattern lottery in which the time saving end condition is established. As a result, the time saving state is likely to end without being able to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, so after setting the time saving state, the game state becomes a game state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed only once.

In the tenth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, a big win or a small win is always won, and when the small win game is executed, when the game is normally executed, the execution right of the big win game (winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 1650) can be certainly acquired. That is, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the jackpot game can be the same number. Therefore, the game aiming at setting the second time saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is performed rather than the first time saving state.

In the time saving state, the selection ratios of the small winning types set when winning the small prize in the special figure 2 lottery are different, and the selection ratio of the small winning A in which the first time saving state is set after finishing the big winning game is 80%, the selection ratio of the small winning B in which the normal state is set after finishing the big winning game is 15%, and the selection ratio of the small winning C in which the second time saving state is set after finishing the big winning game is 5%.

That is, when the first time-saving state is set, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery can be continued until the small win B for which the normal state is set is selected after the big win game is finished.

When a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set is selected at a rate of 5%. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than to the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is configured to easily shift to the second time saving state at a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, the game state (normal state, first time saving state) in which the transition rate to the second time saving state most advantageous to the player can be changed step by step for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game before the second time saving state is set. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the game state shifts to the second time saving state more easily than the normal state, the operation of the game can be easily improved.

During the second time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the second time with respect to the first time saving state, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state is finished at the start timing of the second special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied. In other words, since the variable period of the second special pattern variation until the time-saving end condition is satisfied can be set to the time-saving state, the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained during the variation period, and the time-saving state can be easily ended in the state of obtaining the special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, the second time saving state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

In addition, since it is the same as the 1st time saving state mentioned above about the transition content of the game state based on the result of the 2nd special design lottery performed during the 2nd time saving state, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. Then, when the second time saving state is terminated, that is, when the second special pattern variation satisfying the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained, the state is shifted to the first normal state in the same manner as when the first time saving state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation satisfying the time-saving end condition is stopped and displayed, if the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is shifted to the second normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this second normal state, the super chance mode is continuously set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special symbol lottery for winning a small hit is executed with the same probability (970/1000) as in the time saving state. Then, the small hit type is selected at the same selection ratio as the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In other words, if many special figure 2 reservations are obtained, even if the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to easily return to the time saving state with a high probability.

In the tenth control example, the selection ratio of the small winning type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small winning type in the time saving state are set to be the same, but without being limited to this, one game state may be configured to make it easier to select a small winning type that is more advantageous to the player than the other game state. By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time saving state in the state that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, so that the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time saving state and the second time saving state can be easily increased.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 385 to 390. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the partial configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the partial configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, but the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 385, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385 (a), the ROM 202 of this control example replaces the first random number 7 table 202fa with the first random number 10 table 202ia, the small winning type selection 10 table 202if instead of the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff, and the time saving giving 10 table instead of the time saving giving 7 table 202fe. 202ie and a new addition of a small win scenario 10 table 202ii, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For convenience of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted in FIG. 385(a).

The first winning random number 10 table 202ia is different from the above-mentioned first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) in that the specified value determined as a big win and the specified value determined as a small win are different, and are otherwise the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 386, the contents defined in the first winning random number 10 table 202ia will be described. FIG. 386(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 386(a), the first winning random number 10 table 202ia includes a special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 that is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and a special symbol 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 386(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 will be described. FIG. 386(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 386(b), the "big win" is defined for the range "0 to 29" out of the range "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take. That is, in the tenth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 3/100 (30/1000).

Next, with reference to FIG. 386(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 will be described. FIG. 386(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 10 table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 386(c), among the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take, "big win" is defined for the range of "0 to 29", and "small win" is defined for the value of "30 to 999". That is, in the tenth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 3/100 (30/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 97/100 (970/1000).

In the tenth control example, the type and number of judgment values for judging that a small winning is determined to be a constant value regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, a high probability state (special symbol high probability state) in which the probability of winning a small winning is high and a low probability state (special symbol low probability state) in which the probability of winning a small winning is low may be set according to the game state. In addition, in the tenth control system, only the second special symbol lottery is configured so that a small winning can be determined, but the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 may be defined so that a small winning can be won even in the first special symbol lottery.

The small hit type selection 10 table 202if is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This small hit type selection 10 table 202if is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the content of the defined small hit type is changed, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 387, the small hit type selection 10 table 202if will be described. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 10 table 202if. In the tenth control example, the degree of advantage of the time saving state after the end of the big winning game executed based on the fulfillment of the execution condition during the small winning game is made different according to the set small winning type. More specifically, it is configured to be able to set an advantageous time-saving state or a disadvantageous time-saving state according to the set small hit type.

Specifically, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the three types of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 79". There is a "small hit C (5R short time no big hit C when passing V)" for the range of "95 to 99".

Here, in each small winning type, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 1650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game (big winning type) to be executed after that is set. ``Big win A'' is set as a kind of big win for ``Small win A'', ``Big win B'' is set for ``Small win B'', and ``Big win C'' is set for ``Small win C''.

In the tenth control example, even when any one of ``jackpot A'' to ``jackpot C'' is set, a jackpot game (five-round game) in which a round game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened is executed five times as a jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a time saving state is set. And, although the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 388, according to the set jackpot type, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving end condition with different contents is set.

In other words, it is configured to provide privilege games (jackpot games, games in a time-saving state) in which only time-saving end conditions are changed according to the small-hit type set when a small win is won. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the type of the big win by the content of the big win game executed based on the winning of the small win and predicting in advance whether the time saving state to be set later is the advantageous time saving state or the unfavorable time saving state.

In the tenth control example, the contents of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the small win are configured to be the same (5 rounds (R) jackpot game) regardless of the type of the small win. In this case, it is preferable that the jackpot game with the same jackpot game content is executed in the jackpot type in which the disadvantageous time-saving state disadvantageous to the player is set and at least a part of the jackpot type in which the advantageous time-saving state is set in the player's advantage.

By configuring in this way, a jackpot game that makes it difficult for a player to discriminate whether the time saving state set after the jackpot game is an advantageous time saving state or a disadvantageous time saving state while the jackpot game is being executed, and a jackpot game that makes it easy for the player to determine that the time saving state set after the jackpot game is an advantageous time saving state while the jackpot game is being executed (a jackpot game that can be executed only for the jackpot type in which the advantageous time saving state is set). can be executed, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of contents the jackpot game is executed.

A time saving 10 table 202ie is a data table prescribing end conditions (time saving end conditions) of a time saving state to be set at the end of a jackpot game, and defines the time saving giving contents (time saving end conditions) corresponding to each jackpot type. This time-saving provision 10 table 202ie is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, is referred to when a big winning game is ended (end of the ending period of the big winning game), and sets different number of time-saving times (time-saving ending conditions) according to the kind of big win.

Here, with reference to FIG. 388, the contents defined in the time saving provision 10 table 202ie will be described. FIG. 388 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving provision 10 table 202ie. In this control example, the first time-saving end condition (value set in the time-saving counter 203h) established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, and the second time-saving end condition (value set in the special figure 2 variation counter) established based on the number of times of the second special symbol variation can be set.

Specifically, when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery or when a small win type "small win A" is set, "10" is specified in the value of the time saving counter 203h as the first time saving end condition, and "1" is specified as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ia as the second time saving end condition. That is, when the time saving state corresponding to the ``jackpot A'' is set, the first time saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of execution times of the first special symbol variation and the execution frequency of the second special symbol variation reaches 10 times, and the time saving condition is set in which the second time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation reaches 1 time. As described above, in the tenth control example, since the time saving state is terminated at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is established, the time saving state corresponding to the "jackpot A" is set. When the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends at the first second special symbol fluctuation start timing after the time saving state is set. Therefore, it becomes a disadvantageous time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, a second time-saving end condition that can be established earlier when the game is normally executed in the time-saving state and a first time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established than the second time-saving end condition are set. And it is prescribed|regulated so that "10" may be set to the value of the time saving counter 203h as 1st time saving end conditions. The value of this "10" is defined to be a value larger than the upper limit number "4" of the special figure 1 reservation. Therefore, the time saving state is set in a state where the upper limit number of special figure 1 reservations is stored, and even if all the special figure 1 reservations are completed before the second special pattern variation is executed, the time saving state is not terminated. In addition, when the action of executing only the first special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated when the number of times of the first special symbol variation reaches 10 times, so that the continuous execution of the abnormal game can be suppressed. In this control example, the same value is set as the first time-saving end condition for all the jackpot types for which the time-saving state is set.

For the ``big win B'' set when the small win type ``small win B'' is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to ``0'' as the first time saving end condition, and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ia is set to ``0'' as the second time saving end condition. In other words, when "jackpot B" is set, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. As described above, in the tenth control example, when the time saving state is set rather than when the normal state is set, it is easier for the player to execute the game (second special symbol lottery).

For the ``big win C'' set when the small win type ``small win C'' is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to ``10'' as the first time saving end condition, and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ia is set to '2' as the second time saving end condition. That is, when the time saving state corresponding to the ``jackpot C'' is set, the time saving state is set in which the first time saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of execution times of the first special symbol variation and the execution frequency of the second special symbol variation reaches 10 times, and the second time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation reaches two times. As described above, in the tenth control example, since the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is established, the time saving state corresponding to the "jackpot C" is set. When the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends at the second special symbol variation start timing after the time saving state is set. That is, the time saving state continues during the fluctuation period of the first second special pattern fluctuation after the time saving state is set, and it becomes a period in which the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the normal pattern winning game. Therefore, it becomes an advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having the first time-saving end condition and the second time-saving end condition is used as a plurality of time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as time-saving end conditions. A time-saving end condition may be set that is established when the number of times that 0 is operated reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times).

Furthermore, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the lottery result. may be configured.

As described above, by setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and composing so that the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of a plurality of time saving end conditions are established, the time saving end condition may be established. In this case, it is preferable to provide a satisfaction number determining means for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition attainment determining means for determining whether the number of fulfillment determined by the satisfaction number determining means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), and to terminate the time saving state (set a normal state) when the condition attainment determining means determines that the number of satisfactions has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time saving end condition which is met first may be provided, and discrimination reference number variable means for varying a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference of the condition attainment discriminating means based on the discrimination result of the content discriminating means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition established first, so that the player can be motivated to play the game even after the time-saving state is set.

In addition to the contents described above, a predetermined period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times), and a result determining means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measuring means are provided. An end condition invalidation means may be provided for invalidating the time saving end condition that is met when it is determined that the time is within the predetermined period. Further, while the result discriminating means discriminates that the present time is within a predetermined period, it is possible not to perform the processing of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied and updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, when using the process of ending the time saving state based on the establishment of a plurality of time saving end conditions as described above, the plurality of time saving end conditions are a priority time saving end condition (for example, a time saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of special symbols reaches 100 times) and a non-prioritized time saving end condition (e.g., a time saving end condition that is established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times). , It is preferable to configure so as to end the time saving state when only a plurality of non-priority time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

Returning to FIG. 385(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385 (b), in this tenth control example, the RAM203 (see FIG. 304 (b)) in the above-described seventh control example is different in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for storing information indicating the game state included in the state command received from the main control device 110 in the same manner as in each control example described above. are

The special figure 2 variation number counter 203ia is a counter referred to when determining whether the number of variations of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state satisfies the second time saving end condition, and a value corresponding to the second time saving end condition is set when the time saving state is set. Then, every time control processing for starting the second special pattern variation is executed during the time saving state, the value is subtracted, and it is determined whether the value after the subtraction satisfies the second time saving end condition (whether it is 0).

By configuring in this way, even if the content of the second time saving end condition is changed depending on the type of the time saving state to be set, it is only necessary to change the content of the value to be set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ia when setting the time saving state, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 389(a). FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the above-described seventh control example (see FIG. 311(a)) in that the lottery result notification mode selection table 202fa is deleted, and the final variation effect selection table 222ia and the notification target selection table 222ib are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The final variation performance selection table 222ia is a data table referred to when determining the performance mode of the variation performance (final variation performance) executed during the final variation of the second special pattern variation (special figure 2 time saving final variation) performed during the time saving state, and is referred to when determining the variation presentation pattern of the special figure 2 variation immediately before the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established.

In the tenth control example, as described above, the timing of ending the time saving state is the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, so the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation one before the time saving end condition is satisfied is the last chance for the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, in the tenth control example, the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation immediately before the time saving end condition is established becomes the time saving final fluctuation period, and the final fluctuation performance is executed in the time saving final fluctuation period.

Specifically, by the update process 10 (see FIG. 393) executed by the main controller 110, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ia are updated, and the remaining time short number command indicating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ia after being updated is set (see S10603 in FIG. 393). Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction command output from the main control device 110, the remaining information (remaining time reduction number) until the time reduction end condition is satisfied for the time reduction state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be specified.

Here, once as the remaining time reduction number of times, that is, when it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied by the special symbol variation executed next to the special symbol variation corresponding to the remaining time reduction number command received this time, specifically, when information indicating "1" as the value of the time reduction counter 203h or the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ia is received as the remaining time reduction number command, the variation period of the corresponding special symbol variation (time reduction final variation) is set as the time reduction final variation period. It is configured to specify and determine the performance mode of the time saving final variation performance for the time saving final variation period.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily secure the period for executing the performance (holding acquisition performance) for prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 suspension even when the processing for ending the time saving state is executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the tenth control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, it becomes a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special symbol 2 hold. If the pachinko machine 10 defines the stop timing of the special symbol variation as , the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is established is specified as the time shortening final variation period, and the performance mode of the time shortening final variation performance is determined for the time shortening final variation period.

Further, the performance period of the time reduction final variation performance may at least overlap with at least a part of the period corresponding to the above-described time reduction final variation period, and the time reduction final variation performance may be executed with only a part of the time reduction final variation period as the performance period, or the time reduction final variation performance may be executed so as to straddle a part of the time reduction final variation period and a period different from the time reduction final variation period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 390, the contents defined in the final variation effect selection table 222ia will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final variation effect selection table 222ia. In the tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 382(a) or FIG. 383(b), it is possible to set an effect mode in which different information can be given to the player as the time-saving final variable effect. For example, during the period in which the time-saving final variable production is executed, a production mode corresponding to the reservation acquisition production (see FIG. 382 (a)) that encourages acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation, and a production mode corresponding to the blessing production (see FIG. 383 (b)) for notifying that information that can give an advantageous privilege to the player is included in the special figure 2 suspension that has already been acquired.

In this final variation effect selection table 222ia, as shown in FIG. 390(a), the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation effect is executed (result of determination), the special figure 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variation effect of the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation effect is executed, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223e. are

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed (result of winning/failure determination) is "big hit" or "small hit C", and the special symbol 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable effect of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed is "1 to 3", the value of the acquired effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 69". "Goal" (see FIG. 383 (b)) is defined as the range of "70 to 99", and "storage weak" (see FIG. 382 (a)) is defined as the production mode, and the special symbol 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable production of the special symbol fluctuation in which the time saving final fluctuation production is executed When the value of the acquired production counter 223e is "0 to 69". For the range, the rendering mode of "save weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is defined, and for the range of "70 to 99", the rendering mode of "goal" (see FIG. 383(b)) is defined.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed (result of determination) is "small hit A", and the special symbol 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable effect of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 69", and the effect mode is "storage weak" ( In FIG. 382(a)), the effect mode "save strong" is defined for the range of "70 to 99".

Furthermore, when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed (result of determination) is "small win B", and the special symbol 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable effect of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed is "1 to 3", the value of the acquired effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 69". , For the range of "70 to 99", "weak accumulation" (see FIG. 382 (a)) is defined as the production mode, respectively, and when the special symbol 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable production of the special symbol fluctuation in which the time saving final fluctuation production is executed is "0", the value of the acquired production counter 223e is "0 to 99". are

Here, in the tenth control example, when "small win C" is set as the small win type, the second time saving state (advantageous time saving state) is set after the big win game executed based on the winning of the small win is finished. That is, when "small hit C" is elected, it is configured so that a time saving state having a period in which special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is set later. Therefore, as the performance mode of the time-shortening final variation performance, the performance mode corresponding to the blessing performance ("goal") without prompting the player to obtain the special figure 2 reservation during the performance period of the time-shortening final variation performance can be set.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress prompting the player to shoot a game ball unnecessarily in order to obtain the special figure 2 reservation in the time saving final variation period indicating the end of the time saving state. Further, the ratio of setting the performance mode corresponding to the blessing performance ("goal") is set differently according to the number of already acquired special figure 2 reservations, and the performance mode corresponding to the blessing performance ("goal") is more likely to be set when the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is larger than when it is small.

In other words, when the game ball is shot to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the final variable performance period, the state in which the privilege given to the player is small (the state in which the newly obtainable special figure 2 reservation number is small) makes it difficult to execute the reservation acquisition performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further suppress the urging of a game in which a game ball is shot unnecessarily in order to obtain the special figure 2 reservation for the player.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, even in a state in which there is a high possibility that the advantageous time-saving state will be set again (a state in which a small winning C is won), the reservation acquisition performance is executed at a low probability, so that the player can be prevented from surely grasping the subsequent game contents by the performance mode of the time-saving final variation performance.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when "small win B" is set as the small win type, the time saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the big win game executed based on the winning of the small win is finished. In other words, when "small win B" is won, it is configured so that the period during which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is not set later. Therefore, as the performance mode of the time saving final variation performance, it is configured to be able to set the performance mode that prompts the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the performance period of the time saving final variation performance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to surely acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the last period in which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired. In addition, in the tenth control example, as the performance mode of the reservation acquisition performance for urging the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, it is possible to set a weak performance mode ("store weak") that encourages the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation and a strong performance mode ("store strong)" that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation than the weak performance mode. It is constituted so that the ratio of setting the strong performance mode as the performance mode of the pending acquisition performance is different between when the normal state is set later (when the small win B is won) and when the performance mode is set.

In other words, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, it is difficult to newly obtain the special figure 2 reservation, but for example, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set in a state in which not even one special figure 2 reservation is obtained, the second special symbol lottery can be newly executed once. In other words, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the disadvantageous time-reduction state is set, it becomes a game state in which it is difficult to newly acquire the special figure 2 reservation, but the unfavorable time-reduction state becomes a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is newly executed. Then, by newly executing the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that an advantageous time-saving state is set based on the lottery result, so that 'small win C' in which a disadvantageous time-saving state is set is more likely to be set later than 'small win B' in which a normal state is set.

Therefore, in the tenth control example, the performance mode (strong accumulation) for strongly urging the player to obtain the special figure 2 reservation is more easily set when winning the small win B than when winning the small win A.例文帳に追加

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, in the final period (time-saving final variation period) in which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained in the time saving state, the performance (holding acquisition performance) for unconditionally prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is executed. However, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the time-shortening final variation period, there is no advantage in obtaining the special figure 2 hold during the time-shortening final variation period, and only the disadvantage of shooting the game balls unnecessarily occurs in some cases.

Then, the situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 reservation (for example, the time saving state ends as it is, and the special figure 2 reservation cannot be newly acquired) and the situation where the merit of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation is low (for example, the special symbol lottery being executed is a big win (small winning), and after the end of the big win game executed based on the lottery result, the time saving state in which it is possible to easily acquire the special figure 2 reservation again is set). is executed, when the pending acquisition effect is executed, there is a possibility that the game motivation to newly acquire the special figure 2 pending is gradually lowered.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, as the performance mode of the reservation acquisition performance, the performance mode in which the degree of prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 suspension can be set can be set, and in a situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 suspension (for example, the time saving state ends as it is and the special figure 2 suspension can not be newly acquired), the performance mode (strong storage) that strongly urges the player to acquire the special figure 2 suspension is configured to be easily set.

By constructing in this way, a player who has seen the reservation acquisition performance executed in a performance mode different from the normally executed reservation acquisition performance and in which the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation is strongly urged can be made to actively play the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, as an effect mode that strongly urges acquisition of the special figure 2 hold, for example, in contrast to the effect mode of the normal hold acquisition effect shown in FIG. By changing the display mode of the information provided to the player in the effect, it may be configured to strongly urge the player to shoot the game ball, or the display screen shown in FIG. In addition, by executing an additional effect using the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 and the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 hold (for example, the time saving state ends and the special figure 2 hold cannot be newly acquired).

In addition, in the tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 390 (a), the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation effect is executed (result of winning or not) and the number of special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired Although it is configured so that the effect mode of the time saving final variation effect can be determined based on other information, for example, the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 2 suspension (pre-discrimination result) ) may be configured to be able to determine the mode of presentation based on the information.

In this case, based on the result of the special symbol lottery (determination result of success) and the result of prefetching (preliminary determination result) of the acquired special symbol 2 reservation, it is determined whether or not the advantageous working hours reduction state is set later, and based on the determination result, the performance mode of the final variable presentation of time saving may be determined. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the time-saving final variation production with higher accuracy.

The notification target selection table 222ib is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode (notification number) of the notification effect (see FIG. 383(a)) for notifying the player of the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired), and is referred to when the conditions for executing the notification effect are established and the information for determining the effect mode of the notification effect is specified (see S20108 in FIG. 394).

Here, the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be described with reference to FIG. 390(b). FIG. 390(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 390(b), in the notification target selection table 222ib, the result of reading the pending storage information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (small hit type "small hit C" in which the advantageous time saving state is set) Based on the position (storage area) where the holding storage information corresponding to the "small hit C" is stored and the number of holding storage information corresponding to the "small hit C"), the holding storage information to be the target of the notification effect (to be notified) is defined differently.

Here, as described above, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four reservation areas (first area to fourth area) for the special symbols, and in each of these areas, the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 is stored as reserved storage information in order from the first area. In other words, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to store the reserved memory information in the order in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol.

Therefore, by reading the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbols stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to specify the number of reserved memory information for winning the small win C and the order of execution of the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved memory information for winning the small win C.

Although detailed description is omitted, the first area (area 1) of the winning information storage area 223a stores the pending memory information corresponding to the second special symbol lottery to be executed next, and then the second area (area 2), the third area (area 3), and the fourth area (area 4) store the pending memory information in this order. In the tenth control example, since the special pattern lottery is executed in the order of winning prize information, the reserved memory information stored in the first area (area 1) becomes the reserved memory information stored first, and the reserved memory information stored in the fourth area (area 2) becomes the reserved memory information stored last.

As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib is configured to determine the small winning C reservation to be notified in association with the final small winning C reservation storage position and the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation. The final small hit C reserved storage position specifies reserved memory information for winning a small hit C among reserved memory information corresponding to a plurality of second special symbols stored in a winning information storage area 223a, and indicates a reserved area (first area to fourth area) in which reserved memory information stored last in the identified reserved memory information is stored.

That is, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "1", it indicates that the reservation storage information (small winning C reservation) for winning the small winning C is stored only in the first area (area 1) among the reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a. The final small win C reserve storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small win C reserve, and when the final small win C reserve storage position is '2', there are cases where the small win C reserve is stored in the first area (area 1) and cases where the small win C reserve is not stored.

Similarly, when the final small win C reserve storage position is "3", it indicates that the area where the small win C reserve is finally stored is the third area (area 3) among the reserve areas of the winning information storage area 223a. The final small winning C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small winning C reservation, and when the final small winning C reservation storage position is '3', there is a case where the small winning C reservation is stored in the first area (area 1) or the second area (area 2), and a case where it is not stored.

Further, when the final small win C reserve storage position is "4", it indicates that the area where the small win C reserve is finally stored is the fourth area (area 4) among the reserve areas of the prize information storage area 223a. The final small winning C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small winning C reservation, and when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "4", the first area (area 1), the second area (area 2) and the third area (area 3) may or may not store the small winning C reservation.

In addition, as described above, the final small winning C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small winning C reservation, and does not specify the number of acquired special figures 2 reservation (the total number of reservation storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a). Therefore, when the reserved special figure 2 number obtained is ``1'' or ``4'', and when the small winning C reservation is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved area, the final small winning C reservation storage position is specified as '1'.

The number of reserved small wins C reserved indicates the number of reserved memory information corresponding to the small winning C reservation (reserved memory information for small win C winning) among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a. When the number of reserved small wins C reserved is "1", the reserved memory information corresponding to the small winning C reservation is one among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a. When the number of reserved small hits C is "2", the reserved storage information corresponding to the small winning C reservation is 2 among the reserved storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a.When the number of reserved small hits C reserved is "3", the reserved storage information corresponding to the small winning C reservation is 3 among the reserved storage information corresponding to the second special design stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a, and the reserved small winning C reservation number is "4". ' indicates that there are four pieces of pending storage information corresponding to the small hit C pending among the pending storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(b), the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 390 (b), for the final small hit C reservation storage position "1", without specifying the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation, "area 1 (first area)" is defined as the small hit C reservation to be notified. In other words, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is '1', since there is no other small winning C reservation, the small winning C reservation stored in 'area 1 (first area)' is determined as a notification object by the notification performance.

In addition, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "2", when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, when the small winning C reservations are stored only in the "second area (area 2)" of the reservation areas, "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be announced. In this case, since the 'area 1 (first area)' is in a state in which the reservation of the small winning C is not stored, the number of execution rights of the big winning game calculated based on the reservation storage information stored in the 'area 1 (first area)' is determined as the notification number of the reporting performance, instead of the number of execution rights of the big winning game on the assumption that the small winning C is won.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the notification performance in which the number of execution rights of the big win game notified by the notification performance and the number of execution rights of the big win game actually acquired (including the acquisition plan) are deviated from each other, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected performance.

When the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, since the 'area 2 (second area)' stores the reserve C of the small winning game, it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time as the notification number of the notification performance.

Next, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "3", when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, when the small winning C reservations are stored only in the "third area (area 3)" among the reserved areas, "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be announced. In this case, since the last stored small winning C reservation is stored in the 'area 3 (third area)', it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time as the notification number of the notification performance.

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 2 (second area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small winning C reservation storage position is "3", it is determined that the small winning C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reservation areas. Then, since the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is '2', the small winning C reservations are stored in either 'area 2 (second area)' or 'area 1 (first area)' in which the reservation storage information is stored prior to 'area 3 (third area)'.

Here, when the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'', the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'' to be notified, so the number of notifications based on the reservation storage information stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'' (the number of notifications including the number of execution rights of the big winning game that can be obtained during the advantageous time saving state set based on the winning of the small winning C) is set as the number of notifications of the notification performance. On the other hand, when the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 1 (first area)'', the small winning C reservation is not stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'' to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation storage information (small winning A, small winning B or big winning) stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'' is set as the notification number of the notification performance.

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is surely stored. Specifically, since the final small winning C reservation storage position is "3", it is determined that the small winning C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reservation areas. Since the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is '3', only the state in which two small winning C reservations are stored in 'area 2 (second area)' or 'area 1 (first area)' in which the reservation storage information is stored before 'area 3 (third area)' or 'area 1 (first area)' corresponds to the state in which the small winning C reservations are surely stored in 'area 1 (first area)'. In this case, since the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 1 (first area)'' to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation storage information stored in the ``area 1 (first area)'' (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the big winning game that can be obtained during the advantageous time saving state set based on the winning of the small winning C) is set as the notification number of the notification performance. In this case, the small winning C reservation is stored in the area after the 'area 1 (first area)', and the notification number based on the reservation storage information stored in the 'area 3 (third area)' is the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be notified by the notification performance at the present time. In this way, a number different from the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game can be notified as the notification performance, thereby providing the player with the pleasure of predicting the number of actually executed big winning games (the number of consecutive wins).

Similarly, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "4", when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, when the small winning C reservations are stored only in the "fourth area (area 4)" among the reservation areas, "area 4 (fourth area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be announced. In this case, since the ``area 4 (fourth area)'' stores the last stored small win C reservation, the maximum number of rights to execute the big win game at the present moment can be set as the notification number of the notification performance.

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 3 (third area)" may or may not store a small winning C reserve. Specifically, since the final small win C reserve storage position is "4", it is determined that the small win C reserve is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reserve areas. Then, since the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is '2', the small winning C reservations are stored in any of 'area 3 (third area)', 'area 2 (second area)', or 'area 1 (first area)' in which the reservation storage information is stored prior to 'area 4 (fourth area)'.

Here, when the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 3 (third area)'', since the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 3 (third area)'' to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation storage information stored in the ``area 3 (third area)'' (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the big winning game obtainable during the advantageous time saving state set based on the winning of the small winning C) is set as the notification number of the notification performance. On the other hand, when the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 1 (first area)'' or the ``area 2 (second area)'', the small winning C reservation is not stored in the ``area 3 (third area)'' to be notified. Therefore, the notification number based on the reservation storage information (small winning A, small winning B or big winning) stored in the ``area 3 (third area)'' is set as the notification number of the notification performance.

When the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 2 (second area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small win C reserve storage position is "4", it is determined that the small win C reserve is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reserve areas. Then, since the number of small winning C reservations in the holding is '3', the small winning C reservations are stored in two areas among 'area 3 (third area)', 'area 2 (second area)' and 'area 1 (first area)' in which the holding storage information is stored prior to 'area 4 (fourth area)'.

Here, when the small winning C reservation is stored at least in the ``area 2 (second area)'', since the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'' to be notified, the number of notifications based on the reservation storage information stored in the ``area 2 (second area)'' (the number of notifications including the number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be obtained during the advantageous time saving state set based on the winning of the small winning C) is set as the number of notifications of the notification performance. On the other hand, when the small win C reserve is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" and "area 3 (third area)", the small win C reserve is not stored in the "area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the number of notifications based on the reserve storage information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in the "area 2 (second area)" is set as the number of notifications of the notification effect.

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "4", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is surely stored. Specifically, since the final small win C reserve storage position is "4", it is determined that the small win C reserve is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reserve areas. Then, since the number of small winning C reservations in the holding is '4', only three small winning C reservations are stored in 'area 3 (third area)', 'area 2 (second area)', and 'area 1 (first area)' in which the reserved storage information is stored prior to 'area 4 (fourth area)', so that the 'area 1 (first area)' is in a state where the small winning C reservations are surely stored. In this case, since the small winning C reservation is stored in the ``area 1 (first area)'' to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation storage information stored in the ``area 1 (first area)'' (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the big winning game that can be obtained during the advantageous time saving state set based on the winning of the small winning C) is set as the notification number of the notification performance. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in the area after the ``area 1 (first area)'', and the notification number based on the reservation storage information stored in the ``area 4 (fourth area)'' is the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be notified by the notification performance at the present time. In this way, a number different from the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game can be notified as the notification performance, thereby providing the player with the pleasure of predicting the number of actually executed big winning games (the number of consecutive wins).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 389(b). FIG. 389(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311 (b)) in that a state storage area 223ia, a time saving final variation flag 223ib, and an executed flag 223ic are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The tenth control example also differs in that the types of information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are increased compared to the seventh control example. Specifically, in the tenth control example, a notification effect for informing the player of at least a part of the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired can be executed, and the number of rights to execute the jackpot game is notified based on the reserved storage information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia. The winning information storage area 223a is configured to store information for indicating that the pending storage information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia is a notification target.

By constructing in this way, even when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the storage area of the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted, it is possible to easily determine which reserved memory information is to be announced.

In the tenth control example, when the notification performance for reporting the execution right number of the jackpot game is executed, a new notification performance is not executed until the special pattern lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation, which is the object of the notification performance, is executed, so that the player thinks that all the acquired (including scheduled to be acquired) jackpot game execution right numbers have been notified by the notification performance.

Thus, in order to control so as not to execute a new notification performance until the special pattern lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation, which is the target of the notification performance, is executed, it is configured to discriminate whether or not the information indicating the notification object of the notification performance is included in the reservation memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. This makes it possible to easily determine the end timing of the notification effect.

In the tenth control example, the execution of the new notification effect is restricted during the execution period of the notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the new notification effect may be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired) and is not notified by the notification performance exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), it is determined that the additional execution condition is met, and regardless of whether the notification performance is being executed or not, the new notification performance can be executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of rights to execute a big winning game that is not reported by the reporting performance, the player losing interest in the reporting performance, and the deterioration of the performance effect. In addition, as the additional execution condition, in addition to the condition that is satisfied based on the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been obtained (including the number of rights to be obtained) that is not notified by the notification effect, for example, it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, two) of specific information (for example, information indicating that a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed, or information indicating that the game state set after the jackpot game will be a game state advantageous to the player) is included in the information contained in the reserved storage information. It is also possible to provide a condition that is satisfied when

Further, the notification mode for notifying the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been obtained (including the number of execution rights to be obtained) is selectable by the player, for example, when the player selects the first notification mode, all the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been obtained (including the number of execution rights to be obtained) is configured to be notified to the player, and when the player selects the second notification mode, a part of the number of execution rights is randomly set as in the tenth control example. It may be constructed so as to be selectively notified to the player, and when the player selects the third notification mode, only the minimum number of rights to execute, that is, only the result of whether or not the number of rights to execute the jackpot game already acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired) is reported to the player. In this case, when the first notification mode is selected, a new notification performance is executed by acquiring a new special figure 2 reservation so as to increase the number of execution rights of the jackpot game already acquired (including scheduled acquisition) notified by the notification performance.

State storage area 223ia is a storage area for temporarily storing information included in the state command output from main controller 110 . By reading the information stored in the information storage area 223a, the currently set game state and its type (advantageous time saving state, unfavorable time saving state) can be specified on the side of the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the information storage area 223a is provided with a storage area capable of storing information regarding the currently set game state and a past storage area capable of storing information regarding the game state set in the past. The past storage area has a storage area (first past storage area to third past storage area) capable of storing up to three previous game status information (first past storage area to third past storage area). When a status command indicating a change in the game status is received from the main controller 110, the information corresponding to the received status command is stored in the storage area, the information stored in the storage area before that is shifted to the first storage area, and the information stored in the first past storage area is transferred to the second past storage area. The information stored in the area is shifted to the third past storage area, and the information stored in the third past storage area is erased.

In this way, by configuring the game state set in the past so that it can be temporarily stored, it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to the content of transition of the game state a plurality of times or a performance corresponding to the game state set in the past, so that various performances can be provided to the player.

The time-shortening final variation flag 223ib is a flag for indicating a special symbol variation period for executing the time-saving final variation performance, and is set to ON when the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation period for executing the time-saving final variation performance is executed.

In the tenth control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, it becomes a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation. It is set to OFF at the timing when the special symbol variation immediately before the symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

The executed flag 223ic is a flag for indicating that the notification effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the notification effect is executed. Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved memory information to be notified of the notification effect is executed (when the variation effect of the corresponding special symbol variation is set), it is set to OFF. In the tenth control example, while the executed flag 223ic is set to ON, a new notification effect is not executed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described. This tenth control example differs from the above-described seventh control example in that special symbol variation processing 10 (see FIG. 391) is performed instead of special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 315), special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (see FIG. 392) is performed instead of special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (see FIG. 318), and update processing 10 (see FIG. 393) is performed instead of update processing 7 (see FIG. 319). are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that, for portions where detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those described in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted, the contents described in each control example and each embodiment described above are applied. Further, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the tenth control example, and the modification examples and additional examples described in each control example described above and each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 391, special symbol variation processing 10 (S10154) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 10 (S10154). This special symbol variation process 10 (S10154) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

In the special symbol variation process 10 (S10154), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S10201). The period during the special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during the jackpot game (round game period), and the grace period from the end of the round game period to the start of the next lottery (fluctuation) of the new special symbol. (ending period) and are included.

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S10201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S10202: No), the number of the first special symbol reserved balls. The value (N1) of the counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol reserved ball that starts the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special figure) indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation 2 pending ball count command) is set (S10206). After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, time saving lottery processing 7 (S10208), special design determination processing 7 (S10209), processing of special design fluctuation pattern selection processing 10 (S10251) are executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211) because the second special symbol reserved ball for starting the variation (lottery) is not secured at the present time.

When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), since the reserved ball of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) is not secured at the present time, this processing for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is indicated by the reserved ball number command ( Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number command) is set (S10213). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). Thereafter, the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S10202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed (S10211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this variation time has not passed (S10215: No), that is, if the current is during the special symbol variation period, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S10216), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10215: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10252), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Thus, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed for a moment, the player can surely recognize the contents of the stopped and displayed first pattern.

In the tenth control example, the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above is set to 0.5 seconds, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of performing blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state in order to indicate that the first symbol is fluctuating, a period longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when performing the blinking display may be set as the above-described determined period. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the processing of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbols being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination processing 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a special symbol jackpot (S10218). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10218: Yes), a jackpot start flag 203j and a jackpot middle flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), a time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special figure confirmation command is set (S10221), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the tenth control example, as explained in the processing of S10220, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the time saving state is terminated at the timing from the end of the variation of the special symbol (end of the confirmation display of the first symbol) to the start of the jackpot game. The timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing. As in the tenth control example described above, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the special symbol won as the big win starts to fluctuate, or the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the final display is started). In addition, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the timing when the jackpot game is finished.

Furthermore, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (the timing for establishing the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) may be set in advance from among the above-mentioned plurality of timings, or the time saving state may be ended at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is ended (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state is set, or whether the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-reduction end condition is established (the timing at which the time-reduction state is ended when the big win is won) for each of a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result) of the special pattern based on the end timing of the time-reduction state. In part of the timing at which the time-saving end condition set for each of a plurality of jackpot types is established, when the player identifies the timing at which the time-saving state is ended, the player can be notified that the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special pattern is a big win, that is, the time-saving end timing dedicated to the big win at which the time-saving end condition is completed only when the time-saving end condition is established by winning the big win may be provided.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. In addition, in order to exhibit such an effect more, it is preferable to set the above-described time-saving end timing dedicated to the big win in the first half of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S10218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). In the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10222: Yes), a small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in the special symbol variation process 10 (S10104 in FIG. 391) of the tenth control example, priority is given to whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol is established (first), and it is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol is established (processing of S10204 in FIG. 391). This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, can be varied (easily varied) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and the second special symbol, which cannot be varied (difficult to vary) when the normal state is set, is configured to be a special symbol which is more difficult to execute variation (lottery) than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, if the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are established at the same time (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) of the main controller 110), if the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol in which the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the player will feel uncomfortable. become. Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol. There is a problem that if the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol in which the variation (lottery) is difficult to be executed when it is established, the player feels more uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when the processing for starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the tenth control example) having a high added value for the player (the winning probability of the small win is higher than the first special symbol, and the actual lottery (variation) is difficult to be executed) is preferentially determined (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (S10251) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 392 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251). As shown in FIG. 392, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is configured to execute the update process 10 (S8272) before setting the start of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be ended before the special symbol variation is started.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not a special symbol big win is set (S8201). In the process of S8201, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot A is determined as the jackpot type (S8271), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small win, that is, whether or not a special symbol small win is set (S8209). When it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is set in the process of S8209 (S8209: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection 10 table 202if (see FIG. 387) (S8273), and the process moves to S8203.

Also, in the process of S8209, when it is determined that the special symbol is not set, that is, the special symbol is not set (S8209: No), the process of S8273 is skipped and the process of S8203 is performed.

In the processing of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203). Next, the current game state is specified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the specified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd read in the process of S8252 (see FIG. 308 (a)) to select a variation pattern based on the data table (S8205), based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Next, a special figure stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), and update processing 10 is executed (S8272). A detailed description of update processing 10 (S8272) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S8208), and ends this process. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure the update process 10 (S8272) to be executed before the process of S8252 in FIG. 392 is executed. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be ended before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so that, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the judgment whether or not the special symbol lottery big win determination is executed during the time saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the details of update processing 10 (S8272). In this update process 10 (S8272), as shown in FIG. 319, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, and based on the determination result, the time saving state is terminated (the process of clearing the values of various counters referred to when determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed.

When the update process 10 (S8272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S10601). In the process of S10601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S10601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S10603). The remaining time reduction number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325).

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), then a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (see FIG. 392).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 394 to 395, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described. The tenth control example differs from the seventh control example described above in that the pending ball number command process 10 (see FIG. 394) and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (see FIG. 395) are executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that, for portions where detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those described in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted, the contents described in each control example and each embodiment described above are applied. Further, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the tenth control example, and the modification examples and additional examples described in each control example described above and each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 394, the pending ball number command process 10 (S20101) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending ball count command process 10 (S20101).

When the pending ball count command process 10 (S20101) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the executed flag 223ic is ON (S20102). If it is determined that the execution completion flag 223ic is ON (S20102: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not ON (S20102: No), the pending information is extracted from the command received from the main control device 110 this time, and the corresponding value is stored in the corresponding special symbol pending ball number counter (special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b or special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203b1) (S20103).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104). When it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is not 4 (S20104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104: Yes), the second special symbol reserved storage information is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S20105). Then, it is determined whether or not there is reserved storage information corresponding to the small hit C in the read reserved storage information (S20106). When it is determined that there is no information corresponding to the small hit C in the read reservation storage information (S20106: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S20106, when it is determined that there is information corresponding to the small hit C from the reservation storage information read out in the process of S20105 (S20106: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is the second time saving state (S20107). If it is determined that the current game state is the second time saving state (S20107: Yes), the notification target selection table 222ib (see FIG. 390 (b)) determines the small winning C suspension to be notified (S20108), and the process proceeds to S20109. On the other hand, in the process of S20107, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the second probability variable state (S20107: No), the last acquired small hit C hold is determined as an announcement target (S20112), and the process proceeds to S20109.

In the processing of S20109, the display mode indicating the number of consecutive wins corresponding to the storage position of the small winning C reservation determined in the processing of S20108 or S20112 is determined (S20109), and the notification target information is added to the winning information storage area 223a (S20110). Then, the executed flag 223ic is set to ON (S20111), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S14994) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S14994).

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S14994) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S19551). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (S19551: No), the processing of S19552 to S19555 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state (S19551: Yes), it is determined whether the current variation is the final variation of the time saving (S19552). If it is determined that the current variation is not the final variation of the time saving (S19552: No), the processing of S19553 to SS19555 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S19556.

On the other hand, in the processing of S19552, when it is determined that the current variation is the final variation of the time saving state (S19552: Yes), the time saving state is read from the state storage area 223ia (S19554). Then, it is determined whether the read time saving state is the second time saving state (S19554). The final variation effect selection table (see FIG. 390(a)) that has been read out is referred to determine the effect mode (S19555), and the process proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read gaming state is not the second time saving state (S19554: No), the process of S19555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S19556.

Next, it is determined whether or not the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556). When it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is ON (S19556: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current target variation is a notification target (S19557). When it is determined that the target variation of this time is to be notified (S19557: Yes), the executed flag 223ic is set to OFF (S19558), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S19559), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S19556 that the executed flag 223ic is not ON (S19556: No), or if it is determined in the process of S19557 that the current target variation is not the notification target (S19557: No), the process of S19559 described above is executed, and this process ends.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 396 to 405. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured so as to be able to win a small win in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (lost), and has a game property (so-called 1 type, 2 types type) capable of executing a big win game by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small win game executed based on the small win.

The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example differs greatly from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example in that, in the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), the game for executing the first special symbol lottery (left-handed game) and the game for executing the second special symbol lottery (right-handed game) can be selected, and based on the result of the first special symbol lottery. The difference is that the game characteristics of the time saving state are different between the case where the time saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery and the case where the time saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery, during the normal state is the most advantageous game method for the player, and the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery during the normal state. When the time saving state is set, the game board 13 is constructed so that the second special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first special pattern lottery in the time saving state so that the right-handed game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is the trigger for executing the second special pattern lottery, becomes the most advantageous game method for the player.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example is configured such that a game method that is advantageous to the player is defined in advance according to the set game state, and the player executes a game according to the game method. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game, but there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game because the game is executed by the game method determined for the player.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured so that the player can select a game aiming at executing the first special symbol lottery (left-handed game) and a game aiming at executing the second special symbol lottery (right-handed game) in a state where the normal state is set. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select the game method, so that the game can be executed in various game methods. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, the expected value of the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) that can be obtained is about the same between the case of executing the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery and the case of executing the right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, but the process until the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the expected value is obtained is different. Briefly, when a left-handed game is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is easily continued, and when a right-handed game is executed, the time-saving state is set more easily than when a left-handed game is executed, and the time-saving state is difficult to continue.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game that suits his/her convenience, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

First, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 396 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 396, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 294) in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 where the game ball fired by the right-handed game flows down) is different, and an index (display mode) for indicating the game method to the player. It is different in that it is attached above the game area formed on the game board 13 . It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the seventh control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 396, of the game areas formed on the game board 13 (areas through which the shot game ball can pass), the upper area (above the variable display unit 80) is provided with a turtle-like mode k1 and a shark-like mode k2 as modes corresponding to the game methods (left-handed game, right-handed game). Mode k1 is a mode corresponding to the left-handed game, and is attached to the upper left position of the variable display unit 80 that enables the player to play the left-handed game by shooting the game ball aiming at the mode k1.

On the other hand, the mode k2 is a mode corresponding to the right-handed game, and is attached to the upper right position of the variable display unit 80 that enables the player to play the right-handed game by shooting the game ball aiming at the mode k2. By constructing in this manner, the player can adjust the game method while following the trajectory of the actually shot game ball rather than the operation content (rotation amount) of the operation handle 22, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A different technique may be used to notify the player of the game method being executed. For example, of the game areas formed on the game board 13, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the left area (game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) where a game ball shot by a left-handed game may flow down, and notification means is provided to notify the player that a left-handed game is being executed based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Alternatively, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in a right area (a game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) in which a game ball shot in a right-handed game may flow down, and a notification means may be provided for notifying the player that a right-handed game is being executed based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.

Next, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In the eleventh control example, a second ball entrance 1640 and a right second ball entrance 1641 are provided as ball entrances (starting ball entrances) for executing the second special symbol lottery in the right area of the game board 13.

The second ball entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (ordinary winning game) executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery, and according to the set game state, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to enter a game ball (high probability state in normal symbols) and a state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball (low probability state in normal symbols). In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric accessory 1640a that is opened and closed in the winning game (normal game) that is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol lottery are the same as the contents of the electric accessory control described in each control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the game balls launched by the right-handed game can enter at a constant rate regardless of the set game state, and in the eleventh control example, the right second ball-entered hole 1641 is arranged so that the rate of entry of the game balls launched by the left-handed game into the first ball entrance 64 is about the same. With this configuration, the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game and the second special symbol lottery executed by the right-handed game can be executed at the same frequency in the normal state, so that the player can play the game without any sense of incongruity regardless of which game method is selected.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set, a normal pattern lottery based on a high-probability state of normal symbols so that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 1640 by executing the right-handed game, and a normal pattern winning game for opening and closing the electric accessory 1640a are executed, so the right-handed game is an advantageous game method for the player during the time-saving state. The normal symbol lottery based on the high-probability state of normal symbols and the contents of the normal symbol winning game for opening and closing the electric accessory 1640a are the same as those in the above-described seventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, below the right side area of the game board 13, a V winning device 1650 that is opened during the small winning game and a variable winning device 1065 that is opened during the big winning game are arranged. This V winning device 1650 has the same content as the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and the variable winning device 1650 has the same content as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 401. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the partial configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the partial configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, but are otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 398, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 395 (a), the ROM 202 of this control example replaces the first per random number 7 table 202fa with the first per random number 11 table 202ja, the small per type selection 11 table 202jf instead of the small per type selection 7 table 202ff, and the time reduction per random number 7 table 202fh instead of the time reduction per random number 7 table 202fh. The number 11 table 202jh is different in that the time saving type selection 11 table 202ii is provided instead of the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For convenience of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted in FIG. 385(a).

The first winning random number 11 table 202ja is different from the above-described first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) in that a special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is provided instead of the special symbol 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 referred to during the second special symbol lottery. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 399(a), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 will be described. FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is a data table referred to when executing the winning lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

Specifically, of the range of ``0 to 999'' that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take, a ``big win'' is defined for a range of ``0 to 4'', and a ``minor win'' is defined for a value of ``5 to 54''. That is, in the eleventh control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 1/200 (5/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 1/20 (50/1000).

The small hit type selection 11 table 202jf is a data table referred to when selecting the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This small hit type selection 11 table 202jf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the selection ratio of the defined small hit type is changed, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 399(b), the small hit type selection 11 table 202jf will be described. Figure 399 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 11 table 202jf. "Minor win A (jackpot A when passing V)" is defined for the range of the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 "0 to 4", and "small win B (jackpot B when passing V)" is defined for the range of "5 to 99".

The time saving random number 11 table 202jh is a data table referred to in the time saving winning determination (time saving lottery) executed in the special symbol lottery, and is different from the time saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310 (a)) in that the determination value corresponding to the time saving winning is different, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the content defined in the random number 11 table 202jh per time saving will be described. FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 11 table 202jh per time saving. As shown in FIG. 400 (a), in the time saving random number 11 table 202jh, the determination value of time saving winning determination is defined only for the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is in the range of "900 to 949". That is, since the number of judgment values for judging short-time winning is 50 while the possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 are 1000, the probability of short-time winning in the normal state is 1/20 (50/1000). In addition, as shown in FIG. 400(a), in a game state other than the normal state, there is no time-saving winning. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, it may be constructed so as to be elected in a short time even in a game state other than the normal state with a low probability (for example, 1/1000).

A time saving type selection 11 table 202ji is a data table referred to when setting a time saving end condition for a time saving state set when a time saving lottery is won in a special symbol lottery, and the time saving type is defined corresponding to the value of a time saving type selection counter CC1. In the eleventh control example, different types of time saving are selected depending on whether the first special symbol lottery wins the time saving lottery or the second special symbol lottery wins the time saving lottery.

Here, with reference to Drawing 400 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 11 table 202ji are explained. Drawing 400 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 11 table 202ji. As shown in FIG. 400(b), in the time saving type selection 11 table 202ji, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the type of the special symbol that has been won and the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving end condition corresponding to the defined time saving type and the presence or absence of the time saving limit setting are defined.

Specifically, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction A11 is defined as the time reduction type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the obtained time reduction type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition is defined in which the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time saving limit setting "none" is set. That is, a time saving end condition is set in which the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the special symbol working time saving counter 203h is executed 200 times.

On the other hand, when the time reduction is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time reduction B11 is defined as the time reduction type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the obtained time reduction type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving B, a time saving end condition is defined in which "200" is set in the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) and the time saving limit setting "yes" is set. In other words, when the processing for updating the value of the special pattern time saving counter 203h is executed 200 times, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set, and when the number of times the time saving state is continuously set reaches a predetermined number (10 times), the time saving limit is reached and the normal state is set.

Therefore, when winning the time-saving lottery in the special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery in which the time-saving limit is not set can set a time-saving state more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to select whether to execute the big win lottery and the time saving lottery advantageous to the player by playing the left hand game or to execute the big winning lottery, the small winning lottery or the time saving lottery disadvantageous to the player by playing the right hand game in the normal state where the time saving lottery is executed, and the enjoyment of allowing the player to select the game method can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 398(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 398(b), the eleventh control example differs from the RAM 203 (see FIG. 304(b)) in the seventh control example described above in that a time saving limit number counter 203ja is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving limit number counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured to be capable of measuring the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbols is continuously set (the number of normal continuous setting times) without setting the low probability state of the normal symbols except during the jackpot game, and when the number of times of normal continuous setting reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time reduction limit is reached), the low probability state of the normal symbols is set even when the conditions for setting the high probability state of the normal symbols are established. A forced setting process (time reduction limit process) is configured to be executable, and the game state (first probability variable state) advantageous to the player is suppressed from being excessively continuously set.

In this time-saving limit number counter 203ja, when the time-saving winning is won by the second special symbol lottery in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, ``10'' is set as an initial value (see S18182 in FIG. 402). Then, the counter value is decremented each time the normal continuous setting number is updated (see S13104 in FIG. 405), and the counter value after subtraction is referred to in the determination process of whether or not the time reduction limit has been reached (see S13107 in FIG. 405). Then, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is cleared to 0 when the time saving limit is reached or when the jackpot type being executed sets the low probability state of normal symbols.

Information indicating the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is set as a state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot ending process.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, as described above, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja for measuring the number of normal continuous settings is set to the normal continuous setting number until the normal continuous setting number is reached, and the counter value is decremented each time the normal continuous setting number is subtracted. Each time, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is incremented by 1, and the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after addition is a value (for example, 10) indicating that the time saving limit has been reached.

In such a configuration, for example, when a second special condition (e.g., winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set, even if the condition for establishing the time saving limit (reaching condition) is changed, it is possible to determine whether or not the time saving limit is reached only by comparing the changed establishment condition (reaching condition) with the value of the time saving limit frequency counter 203ja.

In addition, when the special condition in the above-described example content is established, the condition for establishment of the time reduction limit may be changed so as to be less likely to be established than before the change, or may be changed to be easier to be established than before the change. In addition, when the condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit is changed, it may be immediately determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja at the present time satisfies the condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit. In particular, in the latter case, the termination of the high-probability state of the normal pattern is suppressed immediately when the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time-saving limit is changed, and since the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery is guaranteed at least (one time) during the period when the high-probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In the eleventh control example, as a trigger for setting the normal pattern high probability state, a trigger for setting a value in the time saving limit number counter 203ja (a trigger for setting the saving time limit) and a trigger for not setting (a trigger for not setting the saving time limit) are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger the time saving state was set.

Further, in the eleventh control example, even when a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is updated (subtracted) or not updated (subtracted) depending on the timing of execution of the jackpot game. Specifically, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is not updated even when the time saving state is set after the big win game executed based on the big win win, and when a small win wins the special symbol lottery, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is updated (subtracted) when the time saving state is set after the big win game executed based on the small win win. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a player disadvantageous to the opportunity (big win winning) which is difficult to be realized as a chance to execute the big winning game (big winning winning) and to the player who is easy to achieve (small winning). Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while aiming to win the big win in the time-saving state in which it is easy to win the small win. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of aiming to realize the execution opportunity of the big winning game which is difficult to be established in a period until the execution opportunity of the big winning game which is easy to be established is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), and further, to expect that the execution opportunity of the big winning game which is easy to be established is not established.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, as a privilege when an opportunity (jackpot winning) that is difficult to be established as a trigger for executing a jackpot game is established, a privilege is given that does not update the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja. It may be configured as possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 401 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 401, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example differs from the RAM 223 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311 (b)) in that a remaining time reduction counter 223ja and a time reduction limit flag 223jb are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The remaining short time number counter 223ja is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of the short time limit number counter 203ja set in the main control device 110 is set, and is for indicating the period until the short time limit is reached (the remaining number that can be set continuously for the high probability state).

This remaining time reduction counter 223ja is set to a value (10) corresponding to a command including information related to a time reduction type for setting a time reduction limit in a limit information update process executed when a limit-related command is received in a state command process executed in a command determination process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the already set value is subtracted by 1 when a time reduction limit number command is received.

The value of this remaining short time number counter 223ja is referred to when executing the processing for determining the effect mode in each game state. Then, in the state command processing of the voice lamp control device 113, the value is cleared (set) to 0 when it is determined that the command indicating that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set is received in the game state update processing executed when the game state command is received.

The time-saving limit flag 223jb is a flag for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached, and is set to ON when a time-saving limit reaching command for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached is received in the limit information updating process executed when a limit-related command is received in the state command process executed in the command determination process.

<About control processing contents of the main controller in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 402 to 405, the contents of the control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. The eleventh control example differs greatly from the above-described seventh control example in that the upper limit can be set for the period in which the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player continues across the jackpot game.

First, the contents of the time saving lottery process 11 (S10288) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 402 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 11 (S10288). As shown in FIG. 402, the time saving lottery process 11 (S10288) determines that the time saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) has won the time saving lottery process (S18105: Yes). 81: Yes), a process of setting "10" to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja (S18182) is added.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the time saving limit only when the time saving lottery is won in the time saving lottery in the normal state and the special pattern type of the time saving win is the second special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, the contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574) will be described. FIG. 403 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574). This jackpot control process 11 (S11574) is different from the jackpot control process in each of the control examples described above in that the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed at the end timing of the ending effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 11 (S11651) will be described. FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 11 (S11651). This jackpot end processing 11 (S11651) is executed when the jackpot game ends, and includes processing for updating the time reduction limit and processing for determining the game state to be set after the jackpot game is finished and setting the game state according to the decided contents.

When the jackpot end processing 11 (S11651) is executed, first, the time saving limit update processing is executed (S13001). Details of the time saving limit update process (S13001) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the information indicating the game state set after the end of the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area (S13002), the number of times of time saving corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed is determined (S13003), the determined number of times of time saving is set in the time saving counter 203h (S13004), the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (S13005), the game state after the big win and the time saving limit number counter 203ja are set. A status command corresponding to the value is set (S13006), and the process ends.

Next, the details of the time saving limit update process (S13001), which is one process in the jackpot end 11 process (see S11651 in FIG. 404), will be described. FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process (S13001). In this time saving limit updating process (S13001), a process for setting a normal pattern high probability state based on the winning jackpot type or time saving type, a process for setting an upper limit value for continuously setting a high probability state for normal patterns, and a process for updating the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit value are executed.

In the time saving limit update process (S13001), first, the big hit type of the special symbol being executed is read out (S13101). Next, it is determined whether the executed jackpot type read out in the process of S13101 is the jackpot type in which the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols is set after the jackpot ends (S13102). After the end of the big win, when it is determined that the big win type is set to the high probability state of the normal pattern (S13102: Yes), it is determined whether the big win game of this time is the big win game based on the winning of the small win (S13103).

In addition, in the process of S13103, the timing for executing the big winning game is determined based on the information based on the past game status stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the processing of S13103, when it is determined that it is a big winning game based on winning a small winning (S13103: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, the normal pattern probability state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (S13104: No), since the value of the time saving limit number counter 203 is not set continuously to the high probability state of the normal pattern, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S13104, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (S13106), and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (S13107). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (S13107: Yes), since the upper limit value for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously reached, the time saving limit reach flag is set to ON (S13108), and the process is finished. On the other hand, in the processing of S13107, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit number counter 203ja is not 0 (S13107: No), this processing ends.

As described above, in the eleventh control example, in the state where the normal state is set, the player is configured to be able to select a game (left-handed game) aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery and a game (right-handed game) to execute the second special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select the game method, so that the game can be executed in various game methods. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, the expected value of the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) that can be obtained is about the same between the case of executing the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery and the case of executing the right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, but the process until the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the expected value is obtained is different. Briefly, when a left-handed game is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is easily continued, and when a right-handed game is executed, the time-saving state is set more easily than when a left-handed game is executed, and the time-saving state is difficult to continue.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game that suits his/her convenience, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, when a left-handed game is executed in a normal state, the player is made to play a game aiming at winning a big win in a special symbol lottery and a game aiming at a short-time winning in a special symbol lottery, and when a right-handed game is executed, the player is made to play a game aiming at a big winning, a small winning, and a short-time winning in a special symbol lottery. That is, in terms of ease of execution of the jackpot game, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the player to execute the jackpot game than the left-handed game. On the other hand, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player when winning the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game than when winning the second special symbol lottery executed by the right-handed game. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method.

In the eleventh control example, an upper limit (time reduction limit) can be set to the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive continuation of game states that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, it is configured such that determination as to whether or not to set the time reduction limit is executed in accordance with the trigger that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. That is, it is configured to be able to create a case where the time reduction limit is set and a case where it is not set by the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the time saving state will be set without setting the time saving limit.

Further, even in the state where the time reduction limit is set, it is possible to create a case where the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set is updated and a case where it is not updated according to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game expecting that the jackpot game will be executed without updating the remaining number of times until the time limit is reached.

In the eleventh control example, a configuration is used in which an upper limit (shorter time limit) can be set for the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously, but a different configuration may be used as a function for suppressing the continuous setting of the game state advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the upper limit for the number of times the "special symbol high probability state" is continuously set (special symbol continuous setting number) and the upper limit for the number of times the "normal symbol high probability state" is continuously set (normal symbol continuous setting number) may be configured to be updated and managed separately. (When the variable limit is reached), "High probability state of special symbols" is changed to "Low probability state of special symbols" "Time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" When the number of normal symbol continuous setting reaches the upper limit (when reaching the short time limit), "High probability state of normal symbols" is changed to "Low probability state of normal symbols" "Second variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols" )” can be set.

Further, the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern can be continuously set (the number of times of continuous setting of the special pattern) is larger than the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern can be continuously set (the number of times of continuous setting of the normal pattern). In addition, in the special symbol high probability period in which the special symbol high probability state is continuously set, the first period in which the first variable probability state (high probability state in special symbols, high probability state in normal symbols) is set, and the second period in which the second variable probability state (high probability state in special symbols, low probability state in ordinary symbols) is set may be configured so that more prize balls can be given to the player.

By constructing in this manner, when a jackpot is won in a state in which a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set and a first variable probability state is set, the first period is set until the time reduction limit is reached, and then the second period is set.

Therefore, after the first game capable of awarding many prize balls to the player is executed for the first period, the second game difficult to award the prize balls can be executed for the second period, thereby suppressing the situation that the first game is excessively continuously executed and the player is excessively awarded the prize balls.

Further, the length of the first period during which the first game can be executed may be set to the period from the setting of the first variable probability state to the time-saving limit (until the second variable probability state is set) (for 10 jackpot winnings), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be executed may be the period from the setting of the second variable probability state to reaching the variable probability limit (for 30 jackpot winnings). In this way, the length of the first period and the second period set in the special figure high probability period can be set based on the number of times of winning the big prize, so that the length of the period in which the special figure high probability period is set can be managed.

More specifically, in the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, and the content of the big win game (the number of round games) to be executed when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period may be configured so as not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed and the contents of the big winning game to be executed.

By constructing in this manner, the first period can be set with a length corresponding to the period (number of times of special pattern fluctuation) until the 10th big win is won in a high probability state of the special pattern (probability of big win 30/1000).

In the second period in which the second variable probability state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery which is mainly executed is always constant (0.1 second) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, and the content (the number of round games) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (two rounds). In other words, the length of the second period may be configured so as not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be performed and the content of the big winning game to be performed.

By constructing in this way, the second period can be set with a length corresponding to the period (number of times of special pattern fluctuation) until the 30th big win is won in the high probability state of the special pattern (probability of big win 30/1000).

Furthermore, during the first period, which is a part of the special high-probability period, a large number of prize balls can be given to the player to increase the number of paid balls.

By configuring in this way, in the specific period in which the special high-probability period is set, even if it is configured so that the appropriate increase in the number of payout balls that can be given is biased in the first period, that is, even if it is configured so that an excessively large number of payout balls can be given to the player when looking at only the first period, the appropriate increase in the number of payout balls can be obtained when viewed from the increase in the number of payout balls in the entire special-high probability period. It is possible to prevent the player from being awarded excessive balls.

In addition, when the jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the first probability variable state is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game than when the jackpot is won in the second probability variable state (high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns). In other words, a game state in which it is difficult to win a big win but easily shifts to the first game state most advantageous to the player when winning a big win and a game state in which it is easy to win a big win but difficult to shift to the first game state most advantageous to the player when winning a big win may be set.

By configuring in this manner, the game purpose to be aimed at by the player can be changed according to the set game state, so that the player can be easily prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In the state in which the first variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be changed depending on whether the variable probability limit is reached first, the short time limit is reached first, or the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time.

By constructing in this way, even when winning the jackpot of the same type (for example, the first variable probability big win in which the first variable probability state is set), different game states can be set according to the reaching state of each limit, so that various games can be easily provided to the player.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, even if the ratio of setting the same game state (for example, the first variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot game is increased (always set) when none of the limits is reached, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game state (for example, the first variable probability state) with a high setting ratio is continuously set for a long period of time, the game becomes monotonous, and the willingness to play decreases.

Furthermore, when the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time, a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player may be set. That is, in the first variable probability state in which the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are set, when the normal state is set based on the simultaneous arrival of the variable probability limit and the short time limit, the normal state (special normal state) more advantageous to the player than the normal normal state is set. By constructing in this way, even when an opportunity (each limit) for forcibly shifting the probability state of each symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state is established, when a special condition is established, the game state can be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player.

Therefore, the player can be made to perform a game in which the player expects that the variable probability limit or the short time limit will not be reached and the game in which the player expects that the limit will be reached at the same time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, when there are elements (each limit) for determining the game state (game situation) to be set after the end of the jackpot game in addition to the jackpot type of winning the jackpot, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp in advance which game state will be set after the jackpot game of the same jackpot type is executed.

On the other hand, the performance mode may be changed based on the set game state, the remaining number of times until reaching the variable probability limit (remaining number of winnings), and the remaining number of times until reaching the short time limit (remaining number of winnings).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the future game content based on the content of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to easily provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in a part of the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery which is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the first variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the end of the big win game. It may be configured such that a change state is set.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set during the special symbol high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, that is, when the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery When the second probability variable state is set forcibly after reaching the short time limit due to the continuous setting of the first probability variable state and the second probability variable state is forcibly set after the jackpot game ends 2 when the probability variation state is set), the period until reaching the probability variation limit can be reliably set to the second probability variation state. Therefore, after the advantageous gaming state (first variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set, the unfavorable gaming state (second variable probability state) can be reliably and easily set for a predetermined period.

Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the big win type set when the big win is won in the second probability variable state is changed according to the occasion when the second probability variable state is set, and for example, when the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing, the big win type in which the second probability variable state is set after the big win game is completed may be set more easily than when the second probability variable state is set based on the big win type.

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won in a state where a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, and a high probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, a game excessively disadvantageous to the player is executed without setting the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) which is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player until the probability variable limit is reached. can be suppressed.

Further, when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, the special pattern high probability state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but the special pattern low probability state may be set in part when the jackpot win is made. Further, in the first embodiment, a plurality of game states can be set, and games with different degrees of advantage can be executed according to the set game states. Specifically, the degree of advantage to the player is the first variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the most advantageous game state for the player, then the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), second variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols) (state) and then the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and may be constructed so as to differentiate the degree of advantage of the player in each game state by making the game content to be executed in each game state different.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 406 to 438. FIG. In the eleventh control example described above, during the period in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. On the other hand, the twelfth control example is different in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification).

By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in the eleventh control example described above, the time-saving lottery was executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in the twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. It is different in that it is configured so that an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the game is played.

Although the details will be described later, in the twelfth control example, the time saving A state is set when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol wins short working hours in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) is set (short working hour winning variation state), and when the second special symbol wins short working hours until the variation of the first special symbol is completed (that is, until the first special symbol indicating that the short working hours win is stopped and displayed), a short working B state more advantageous to the player than the short A state is set.

With this configuration, when one special pattern wins the time-saving win, the other special pattern also wins the time-saving win so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given to the player, so that one special pattern wins the time-saving win, and while the special symbols showing the time-saving win are fluctuating, by making the player think that the other special pattern also wins the time-saving win, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even when winning a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal patterns) can be set after the jackpot game is finished, processing for setting a normal state (low-probability state of normal patterns) is executed after the jackpot game is finished.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the continuation of a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and suppress the improvement of the gambling spirit of the player.

In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, it is common to forcibly stop (discard) or temporarily stop (interrupt) the variable display of the other special symbol. However, in the 12th control example, it is configured to determine whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the variable display of the other special symbol depending on the big win type (or small win type). In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.

With this configuration, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stop-displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the setting of an unfavorable game state can be prevented when a jackpot of the jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of the other special symbols is won, but a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues when a jackpot of the jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, so that the jackpot win is won. In this case, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, an overview of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. The jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example is 1/50, which is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the time saving winning probability is 1/50, which is common between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, although the small winning probability is 1/50, the small winning lottery is executed only with the second special symbol.

Although the details will be described later, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won is determined by different tables (see FIGS. 410 and 411) for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern, the 100% jackpot A (5R short time A jackpot) is decided regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 411, the jackpot type is determined according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 411, when the second special symbol wins the jackpot in the normal state, a 100% jackpot A is set. That is, in the normal state, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same.

In the second special symbol, a small winning lottery is also executed, and when a game ball enters a specific area 1650 in a small winning game, the second special symbol is a special symbol more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol because the big winning B or C is more advantageous than the big winning A.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are different between the normal state (low-probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols), and since the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, the first special symbol tends to stop earlier. In the time saving state, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol tends to stop earlier.

By constructing in this manner, the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery is suppressed in the normal state, the player is prevented from becoming excessively advantageous, and in the time-saving state, the first special symbol is stopped before the second special symbol is stopped, thereby suppressing the setting of a game state relatively disadvantageous to the player, so that the game with sharpness can be provided.

In the normal state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, and in the time saving state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol.

Here, a game state set in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. In this twelfth control example, as the game state, it is possible to set a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). In the time saving state, there are two types of time saving, a time saving A state that ends when the special pattern variation after the time saving state is set is executed 5 times, and a time saving B state that ends when the special pattern variation is performed 10000 times after the time saving state is set, and when the time saving A state is set, the probability of winning a big hit (jackpot winning probability: 1/50) or a small win (small winning winning probability 1/50) in 5 special pattern lotteries is about As low as 18%, when the time-saving B state is set, almost 100% of the jackpot or small win can be won, so the time-saving B state is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 12th control example, only the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won in the normal state. In addition, the game state set when only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins the time saving A state is only the time saving A state, and the time saving B state is not set.

Here, in the twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 414, when the first special symbol wins short working hours in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) is set as the variation time of the first special symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 416, during the long time variation of the first special symbol (time saving winning variation state), an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, in the time-saving winning fluctuation state, it is possible to execute more second special symbol lotteries than in the normal state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 411, when the second special symbol wins the jackpot during the time saving winning fluctuation state, 100% big win B (10R time saving B jackpot) is determined, and the time saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the second special symbol wins the short working hours during the short working hour winning fluctuation state, the short working hour B state is set.

By constructing in this way, when the first special pattern is won, the second special pattern lottery is executed as many as possible in the period until the first special pattern is stopped and displayed, and the player can be motivated to play the game to set the time saving B state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the time-saving winning variation state, when the second special symbol wins the big win (or small win) or the time-saving B state is set by the time-saving winning, the variable display of the first special symbol winning the time-saving winning is continuously executed, and when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the set time-saving B state is discarded, and the time-saving A state is newly set. That is, the time saving B state continues only until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the winning first special pattern can be discarded, the game can be executed in the time saving B state until reaching the time saving limit described later, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. The time saving limit refers to a threshold for executing processing for setting a non-time saving state after the jackpot game ends even when winning a jackpot of the jackpot type in which the time saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example can provide the player with different game properties between a game aiming at discarding the first special symbol and a game aiming at obtaining a large number of prize balls by continuously playing until reaching the time saving limit, even in the same time saving B state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time-saving winning variation state is set when the first special symbol is won. In this case, by making the fluctuation time of the time-saving winning variation different depending on the special pattern type, a relatively advantageous time-saving winning variation state and a relatively unfavorable time-saving winning variation state can be set for the player according to the special pattern type, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time saving type set when only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins the time saving A state is set, but it is not limited to this. Although it is more advantageous to the player than the time saving B state, it may be configured to set the time saving C state (for example, the number of time saving times is 100 times) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving B state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 406 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 406, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example has the same configuration as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 396), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 407 to 416, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described. This twelfth control example differs from the above-described eleventh control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed. Other than that, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 407, the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example includes the first winning random number 12 table 202ka instead of the first winning random number 11 table 202ja, the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb instead of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb, and the second winning random number 7 table 202fc in place of the first winning random number 11 table 202ja. Instead, the second random number 12 table 202kc, the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the variation pattern 12 table 202kd, the small per type selection 11 table 202jf, the small per type selection 12 table 202kf, the time saving per random number 11 table 202jh, the time saving star random number 12 table 202kh, the time saving type selection 11 table 202ji instead, The difference is that the time saving type selection 12 table 202ki is used, the time saving giving 7 table 202fe and the time saving type selection 11 table 202ji are deleted, and the small winning random number 12 table 202ke is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 408 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. With respect to the 11th control example described above, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf, the short time winning fluctuation state flag 203kg, and the short time limit reaching flag 203kh are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka and the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb are timers for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, and when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka and the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb (see Y701 in FIG. 424 and Y901 in FIG. 433).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030kc is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure 1 is stopped. When it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the lottery result stops the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is a jackpot other than the big win D (Y903 in FIG. 433), and is referred to in the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (see FIG. 235) and the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424, Y708). As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (see FIG. 423) (Y2801 in FIG. 423: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 423). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON by performing the same processing as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit as well as when it is a big hit.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure 2 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, and when it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the suspended update (subtraction) of the variation time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit (Y703 in FIG. 424), and is referred to in the second special symbol variation executing process 12 (see FIG. 432) and the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 43). It should be noted that the content referred to in this process is the same as the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation executing process 12 (see FIG. 432) (Y2901 in FIG. 432: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 432).

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit D or the small hit B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 433 and Y932 in FIG. 435). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to off (see Y722 in FIG. 425). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the variation of the big win D or the small win B of the second special symbol stops first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to ON when the first special symbol wins short working hours and fluctuation display is started (Y405 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203kf is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to off (Y632 in FIG. 434). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the first special symbol is won in a short time and the variation is started.

The time-saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has been elected for time-saving is being variably displayed (that is, it is in the time-saving election fluctuation state). This time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving winning (see Y403 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, when the first special symbol winning the time saving is stop-displayed and the time saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 426), and when the second special symbol wins the jackpot D or the small win B and the variation of the first special symbol is canceled (see Y726 in FIG. 425), it is set to OFF. As a result, the time-saving winning variation state can be set in a period until the time-saving winning of the first special symbol and the end of the variation of the first special symbol.

The time reduction limit reaching flag 203kh is a flag for indicating that the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (the number of times of continuous setting of the normal pattern) reaches the upper limit value, and is set to ON when the number of times of continuous setting of the normal pattern reaches the upper limit value and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to the low probability state.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(a), the contents defined in the first winning random number 12 table 202ka will be described. FIG. 409(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 12 table 202ka. In this 12th control example, as shown in FIG. 409(a), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 18/900 (that is, 1/50).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the probability of the big win is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is not variable in any game state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and when a specific jackpot type is determined, a special symbol high probability state (so-called probability variable state) may be set after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(b), the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc defined in the ROM 202 will be described. FIG. 409(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc. The second winning random number 12 table 202kc is a data table in which winning determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "0 to 2" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design. In addition, in the high probability state of the normal design, "0 to 149" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number 12 table 202kc are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the winning is the normal symbol.

Here, referring to FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 1640a arranged in the right area of the game board 13 is opened, and the right second ball entrance 1640 can be entered.

Therefore, when a high-probability state (time-saving state) of normal patterns is set, the electric accessory 1640a is easily opened, and game balls are easily entered into the right second ball entrance 1640, so that the second special pattern lottery is more easily executed than in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG.409(c), the content of random-number 12 table 202kh per time saving is demonstrated. FIG.409(c) is the figure which showed typically the content of random number 12 table 202kh per time saving. As shown in FIG. 409(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time saving lottery is executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The short-time winning probability in each special pattern is common and is 18/900 (1/50). In addition, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, and the time-saving lottery is not executed in the time-saving state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have the same time-saving winning probability, but the invention is not limited to this.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the time-saving lottery may be executed even in the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to 409(d), the contents of the small winning random number 12 table 202ke will be described. Drawing 409 (d) is a figure showing typically the contents of small hit random number 12 table 202ke. As shown in FIG. 409(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, a small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol. The small hit winning probability is 18/900 (1/50).

Although the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is configured to execute the small winning lottery for the second special symbol, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute the small winning lottery even for the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the jackpot winning probability, the time saving winning probability and the small winning winning probability are all 1/50. For example, the jackpot winning probability may be 1/300, the time saving winning probability may be 1/30, and the small winning winning probability may be 1/100.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb will be described. FIG. 410(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. In the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb, a special figure 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 are defined.

FIG. 410(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. As shown in FIG. 410(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the 100% jackpot A is selected. Jackpot A is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, 5 times is set as the counter value of the time reduction counter 203h.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one type, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpot types may be set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the jackpot classification selected according to a game state differs.

FIG. 411 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. When the big win is won with the second special pattern, the big win type is selected according to the game state set when the big win is won, the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern after the game state is changed, and the value of the first win type counter CS2. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations is also reset, for example, when a jackpot is won in the time saving B state and the time saving B state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

First, when the game state is a normal state, there are a non-time-saving winning variation state and a time-saving winning variation state, and the non-time-saving winning variation state is a state in which a time-saving winning variation state flag 20 kg is off, that is, a state in which the first special pattern winning time-saving is not variably displayed. The time-saving winning variation state is a state in which the time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is ON, that is, the state in which the first special symbol that has been short-time winning is being displayed in a variable manner. In the non-time-saving winning variation state of the normal state, 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is selected regardless of the number of times of variation of the second special symbol, and 5 is set to the counter value of a time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game is finished. In the time saving winning variation state of the normal state, 100% big win B (10R time saving B big win) is selected regardless of the number of times of variation of the second special symbol, and 10000 is set to the counter value of the time saving counter 203h after the big win game is finished.

In this way, in the normal state, the advantage given to the player is different depending on whether the time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is turned on or not at the time of winning the jackpot, thereby suppressing the excessive advantage of the player playing the game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the 100% jackpot A (or jackpot B) is selected in the normal state regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol. For example, either the big win A or the big win B can be selected in the non-short-time winning variation state of the normal state, and the big win A is more likely to be selected than the big win B from the 0th to 50th rotations, and the big win B is more likely to be selected than the big win A after the 51st rotation. By constructing in this way, even when losing winning continues in a normal state, the kind of big win advantageous to the player is easily selected, so that the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

In addition, it is also possible to change the types of jackpots that are likely to be selected in a specific period such that the jackpot A is more likely to be selected than the jackpot B from the 0th to 50th rotations, the jackpot B is more likely to be selected than the jackpots A from the 51st to 100th rotations, and the jackpot A is more likely to be selected than the jackpots B from the 101st to 150th rotations. By constructing in this manner, a period advantageous to the player is generated periodically, the player can be interested in the number of variations of the second special pattern, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the time-saving state includes a time-saving A state and a time-saving B state, and in the time-saving A state, a jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is selected at 50% and a jackpot C (5R time-saving B jackpot) is selected at 50% regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol. In the time saving B state, the type of jackpot to be selected varies according to the number of variations of the second special symbol, 100% jackpot (10R time saving B jackpot) is selected from 0 to 50th rotation, jackpot B (10R time saving B jackpot) is selected at 50%, and jackpot D (10R time saving B jackpot) is selected at 50% after the 51st rotation. The jackpot B and the jackpot D are jackpot types in which 10 rounds of the jackpot game and the time-saving B state are set after the jackpot game is finished, but they are different jackpot types in that when the jackpot B is won, the process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the changing first special pattern is executed, and when the jackpot D is won, the changing first special pattern is forcibly stopped (discarded). In other words, when the winning of the second special symbol continues up to a specific number of times, the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be discarded.

By constructing in this way, the loss winning of the second special pattern continues in the state that the first special symbol won in the short time is variably displayed, and even when the variation time of the first special pattern is short, the possibility that the variation of the first special symbol can be discarded is increased, so that when the loss winning of the second special symbol continues, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, only in the time-saving B state, the jackpot type that is likely to be selected is changed according to the number of times the second special symbol changes.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the 100% jackpot B is selected from the 0th to the 50th spins, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a different jackpot type can be won even from the 0th to the 50th spins. For example, the jackpot B is selected at 80% and the jackpot D is selected at 20%. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the player may win the jackpot D and cancel the variable display of the first special pattern even in the period when the time saving B state is just set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the easy-to-select jackpot type is switched between "0 to 50th rotation" and "after the 51st rotation", but it is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which changes the jackpot classification which is easy to be selected in a specific period, such as easy to be selected. By constructing in this manner, a period advantageous to the player is generated periodically, the player can be interested in the number of variations of the second special pattern, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 412, the contents of the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf will be described. FIG. 412 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf. As shown in FIG. 412, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, two types of small winning types are defined. In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is configured such that a small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol.

The small hit A is a small hit type selected at 80% of the time when the small hit is won, and when the specific area 1650a is passed (V passage) in the small hit game, the big hit C (5R short time B big hit) is awarded. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the variation display of the first special symbol being executed may be forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the type of the small win. When the small win A is executed, the process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the variation of the first special symbol being executed is performed.

On the other hand, the small hit B is a small hit type selected at 20% when the small hit is won, and when V passes in the small hit game, the big hit B (10R short time B big hit) is given. When the small hit B is executed, the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) the variation of the first special symbol being executed is executed. In addition, although there are two kinds of small winning types in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the number of small winning types is not limited to this, and three or more types of small winning types may be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 413, the contents of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd will be described. FIG. 413 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the variation pattern 12 table 202kd, a normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, a time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2, and a time saving winning variation state variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 are defined, and each variation pattern table is referred to according to the game state.

FIG. 414 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "first special symbol" and the result of the judgment is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139", and the variation time is 7 seconds (7000 milliseconds). "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of "150 to 179" for the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) in the range of "180 to 189" is defined. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is "hit", "normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of "0 to 29", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of "30 to 189". 198”, a “special reach” with a variable time of 140 seconds (140000 milliseconds) is defined. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is "shorter working hours", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198" and "long shorter working hours" with a variation time of 300 seconds.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is "second special symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" and the variation time is 600000 milliseconds. seconds) is defined, and when the result of the success/failure determination is “big hit, small hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, in the normal state, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is likely to be set shorter than that for the second special symbol. This is a structure in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed, and when the small winning lottery is won, a time-saving B state most advantageous to the player is set, so that the game efficiency is deteriorated by lengthening the variation time of the second special symbol, and the player who plays the game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed is suppressed from becoming excessively advantageous.

Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is "time saving win", "long time saving win" is set. During the long time-saving winning variation, a time-saving winning variation state is entered, and a pattern table 202kd3 for time-saving winning variation state is referred to until the first special symbol in which the long time-saving winning is set is stop-displayed (or discarded), and the variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation (0.5 seconds), so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed a plurality of times. Even when the big winning (or small winning) win or the short working time state is set based on the short working time winning during the fluctuation of the long working time winning (during the short working time winning fluctuation state), the pattern table 202kd3 for the short working winning fluctuation state is referred to during the period when the long short working winning fluctuation continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins short time, 100% "long time short win" is set, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from among a plurality of change patterns based on the value of the change type counter CS1. For example, at 50%, a “long time reduction hit” with a variation time of 300 seconds is selected, at 30%, a “short time reduction hit” with a variation time of 200 seconds is selected, and at 20%, a “super time reduction hit” with a variation time of 500 seconds is selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the time-saving winning fluctuation state by the fluctuation time of the selected first special symbol, and improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the configuration is such that the time-saving winning variation state occurs only when the first special symbol wins short-time winning. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the short-time winning variation state can be set even when the second special symbol wins short-time winning. 600 seconds), it is possible to set a short-time winning variation state advantageous to the player and a short-time winning variation state relatively unfavorable to the player depending on which special pattern wins the short-time winning, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

FIG. 415 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 is a variation pattern 12 table referred to when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and is common to the time saving A state and the time saving B state. In addition, as described above, when the long time saving variation of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving winning variation state variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referred to instead of the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2.

As shown in FIG. 415, in the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the first special symbol becomes long variation (600 seconds) and the second special symbol becomes short variation (3 to 5 seconds). As described above, when the first special pattern wins the jackpot while the time-saving B state is set, the time-saving A state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving B state is set, so that the variation of the second special pattern is easily stopped and displayed first, so that the time-saving B state advantageous to the player is easily set continuously.

FIG. 416 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for the time reduction winning variation state defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time saving winning variation state, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the short-time winning variation state is set, the short variation (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the determination of the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the time-saving winning variation state, when the first special symbol winning the time-saving winning variation is stopped and displayed, the lottery ends. Therefore, in order to improve the game efficiency in the time-saving winning variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened and many second special symbol lotteries can be executed.

In addition, the first special pattern is already fluctuating in the time-saving winning variation state, and the time-saving winning variation state is also terminated when the variation of the first special pattern is completed, so that the variation pattern of the first special pattern is not set in the time-saving winning variation state. Therefore, in the variable pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time saving winning variable state, only the variable pattern of the second special symbol is selected.

As described above, even if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, during the long time saving winning variation of the first special symbol (when the time saving winning variation state flag 203kg is set to ON), when selecting the variation pattern, the time saving winning variation state variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referred to.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 416 to 437. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example is different from the control processing of the main controller 110 in the above-described fifth control example. ) is executed, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1), which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), and the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 2) are configured to be able to perform variable display at the same time (in parallel).

First, with reference to FIG. 417, the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is in progress (Y231). When it is determined that it is during a big hit or a small hit (Y231: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y232). In the process of Y232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is suspended because one special figure is stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the win. In the process of Y232, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (Y233), that is, for the special figure for which the subtraction of the variation time is interrupted, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of Y231, when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (Y231: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating). Y237) executes the same processing, and then shifts to Y238 that executes the variation processing regarding special figure 2.

In the process of Y234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation executing process 12 (Y235) is executed. This first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y235) is finished, next, the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y236) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the process of Y238-Y241, the same process as Y234-Y237 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is varying) (Y238), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Y239) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation executing process 12 (Y240) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y240) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is finished, next, the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y241) is performed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 418, the first special symbol variation start process 12 (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104), will be described. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process 12 (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 417, Y237), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is ON (Y301). In the process of Y301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is ON (Y301: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is not ON (Y301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (Y302), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (Y304), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (Y 305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110.

When the process of Y305 ends, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y306 is finished, then the first special symbol determination process 12 is executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307 in FIG. 418) will be described later in detail, but it is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set gaming state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Note that the game state update process 12 (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 is executed (Fig. 420, Y308). Although details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) ends, then the game state update process 12 is executed (Y309). This game state update process 12 (Y309 in FIG. 421), which will be described in detail later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time reduction counter 203h) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of Y309 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is ON (Y311), and if it is determined to be ON (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y311: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on is set (Y313) After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing 12 (Y307) will be described. FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing 12 (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) of the fifth control example described above, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, the determination of time-saving winning (special figure 1 time-saving lottery process 12) is performed.

When the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (Y8001), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8002), and when the lottery result is determined to be a big win (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big win (Y8004) and acquired. Based on the value of the winning type counter (first winning type counter C2), the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (Y8005), the value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the special figure 1 hour-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8007), and this process is terminated.

Here, the special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the twelfth control example, first, in the first special symbol lottery, determination of winning the jackpot is executed (Y8003), and when the jackpot is won, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing determination of the time-saving winning, and determination of the time-saving winning is executed only when the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, time-saving winning) are not given to the player in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

Next, referring to FIG. 420, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 418, Y237), will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (FIG. 420, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 419, Y307), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not the first special symbol big win is set (Y501).

In the process of Y501, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (Y501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb (see FIG. 410(b)) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of Y8005 in the first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) (Y502), and the process of Y503 to

On the other hand, in the process of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 413 to 416) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (Y506).

When the process of Y506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (Y508), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the processing content of special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is demonstrated. Figure 421 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 time saving lottery processing 12 (Y8007).

When the special figure 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving election determination result) is acquired based on the time-saving per random number 12 table 202kh (Y401), and it is determined whether the time-saving winning is determined (Y402). Time saving A is set as the time saving design of the special design to be displayed in 7 (Y404), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag kf is set to ON (Y8105), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Y402 that the time-saving winning is not made (Y402: No), based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2), the missing design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (Y406), and this processing is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 422, the content of the game state update process 12 (Y309) will be described. FIG. 422 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 12 (Y309).

When the game state update process 12 (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (Y602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (Y603). . Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined to be 0 (Y604: Yes), it is in a state where the time-saving game is not provided (that is, normal state), so a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and the present process is finished as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 423 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235). In this first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON will be briefly described. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a specific hit (big hit A to C or small hit A) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds in the main control unit 110 loops, and when the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON) special symbol variation processing 12 (FIG. 417) is executed, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress in the process of Y231. 1 Special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) is not executed. Then, when the big winning game (or small winning game) ends and it is determined that the big winning (or small winning) is not in progress in the process of Y231, the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y235) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON is the timing of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation, which has been interrupted, when the big win (or small win) game ends.

Returning to FIG. 423, the description continues. In the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y2801: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (Y2802), set the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to off (Y2803), and proceed to Y2804. On the other hand, in the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2801: No), skip the processes of Y2802 and Y2803 and proceed to the process of Y2804.

In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104), will be described. FIG. 424 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y236).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 424, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set (Y702). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y703). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kd is turned on is set.

After finishing the process of Y703, the special figure 1 stop classification command indicating the set stop classification is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (Y706). Then, the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (Y707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether the time-saving winning of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, when it is determined that the time saving election is set (Y710: Yes), the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time saving setting process 12 (Y711), the process related to the setting of the time saving state corresponding to the winning time saving type is executed. In addition, this time saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ke is ON (Y708). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is off in the process of Y708 (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is ON in the process of Y708 (Y708: Yes), the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed, special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y709). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop processing 12 (Y236), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during variable display has passed (Y701: Yes), the processing (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped to fluctuate with the symbol indicating the big win (or small win) and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), a process (Y709) for forcibly stopping the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is executed. It should be noted that, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped with a symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) (Y702: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped).

Next, with reference to FIG. 425, special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 (Y709), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 424, Y236), will be described. FIG. 425 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 (Y709).

In the special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 (figure 425, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y721). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is ON (Y721: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set to OFF (Y722), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating OFF of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set (Y723). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to be off (Y724), and it is determined whether the time reduction winning variation state flag 203kg is on (Y725). In addition, although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped by the off symbol, and the special figure 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set.

In the processing of Y725, when it is determined that the time reduction winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is ON (that is, the result of the first special symbol lottery is the time reduction winning) (Y725: Yes), the time reduction winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y726), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, if the time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is not ON (that is, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is not the time saving winning) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped and this process ends.

Since the jackpot D capable of discarding the variation of the first special symbol can be won only when the time saving B state is set, the time saving variation state flag 203kg is not set to OFF based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol in the normal state. In that case, after the process of Y725, a process of setting a special flag to ON when a jackpot D is won in a normal state may be provided to set a game state (for example, a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)) more advantageous than the time-saving B state. By constructing in this way, different game states are set for the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the normal state and the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the time-saving state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time flag 203ke is not on (Y721: No), it means that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on.

Thus, in the twelfth control example, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is turned on (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit with the second special symbol stops), the fluctuation is forcibly interrupted even if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has not elapsed, or the fluctuation is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination of the deviation. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth control example, a case where the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and a case of temporary stop (interruption) is provided depending on the type of the second special symbol big win or small win.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the time saving A and the time saving B can be set as the types of the time saving state. Then, the number of times of time saving A is 5 times (see FIG. 411), and the probability that the second special pattern wins a big hit (winning probability 1/50) or a small win (winning probability 1/50) with 5 times of time saving is about 18%. On the other hand, since the number of times of time saving B is 10000 times (see FIG. 411), when time saving B is set, the next big hit or small win can be expected with high probability. Therefore, it can be said that the time saving B state is a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the time saving A state.

Here, in the period until the first special symbol wins the time reduction win and the first special symbol indicating that the time savings win is stopped and displayed (that is, when the time savings winning fluctuation state is set), when the time saving B state is set by the second special symbol winning the jackpot, the small win, or the time saving win, when the first special symbol indicating that the time saving win was won without being forced to stop as a symbol, the change of the first special symbol is forcibly missed. The time saving B state that has been done is discarded, and the time saving A state is newly set. That is, in this case, the time saving B state continues only until the variation time (300 seconds in this twelfth control example) of the first special symbol winning the time saving elapses, and the possibility that the time saving state ends before reaching the time saving limit increases.

On the other hand, in the period until the first special symbol wins the time reduction and the first special symbol indicating that the time reduction win is stopped and displayed (that is, when the time reduction winning variation state is set), the second special symbol wins the jackpot, the small win, or the time reduction B state is set. The time saving B state can be continued until the time saving limit is reached, and the player can win a large amount of prize balls.

In this way, in the twelfth control example, in the period until the first special symbol wins the time-saving election and the first special symbol indicating that the time-saving election is stopped and displayed (that is, when the time-saving election fluctuation state is set), when the time-saving B state is set due to the second special symbol winning the jackpot, the small winning, or the time-saving election, the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner is forcibly removed and stopped (discarded), and the advantageous time-saving state can be continued. A new playability can be provided to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the process content of the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) is demonstrated. FIG. 426 is the flowchart which showed the processing content of the time saving setting process 12 (Y711). In this time saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process for setting a time saving state is executed when working time saving is won by time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving type is the time saving A (Y8351), and if it is determined to be the time saving A (Y8351: Yes), the time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), the value corresponding to the determined time saving type is set to the time saving counter 203h (Y8353), and is stored in the game state storage area. The time saving state is set (Y8354), the value of the time saving counter 203h, the state command indicating the time saving type game state (information indicating the time saving state and the information indicating the set time saving type) are set (Y8355), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8351, when it is determined that it is not time saving A (that is, when it is time saving B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. In addition, although not illustrated, in the process of Y8353, after clearing the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the determined time saving classification is newly set. Therefore, when the time saving A state is set based on the time saving winning, if the value corresponding to the time saving B (for example, 10000 times) is already set in the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the time saving B is discarded and the value corresponding to the time saving A (5 times) is set.

Thus, in the twelfth control example, the time saving state is set at different timings depending on the timing of time saving winning, and when the time saving state is set in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set at the stop timing of the special symbol lottery.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 427, the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104), will be described. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process 12 (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is ON (Y831). In the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is ON (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not ON (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (Y832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (Y834), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after subtraction is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (Y834). 835).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

When the process of Y835 ends, next, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, then the second special symbol determination process 12 is executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set game state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the process of Y837 is finished, next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 is executed (Fig. 431, Y838). Although details will be described later, this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) ends, then the game state update process 12 is executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game state update process 12 (FIG. 421, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed in the first special symbol, and since the details have been described with reference to FIG. 422, detailed description will be omitted. When the process of Y839 ends, the special figure 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. Incidentally, the game state update process 12 (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag is ON (Y841), and if it is determined to be ON (Y841: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y841: No), the special figure 2 standby flag is set to on (Y842), and the special figure 2 standby command indicating on is set (Y843) After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing 12 (Y837) will be described. FIG. 428 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing 12 (Y837). In this second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837), unlike the above-described first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307 in FIG. 419), when it is determined that the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery is out, determination of short winning (special figure 2 short lottery process 12) and determination of small winning (small winning lottery process 12) is performed.

When the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (Y8101), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8102). 4) Based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2), set the big winning design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8105), store the value indicating the current gaming state in the winning state storage area (Y8107), and finish this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), the special figure 2 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8106), and this process ends.

Thus, in the twelfth control example, when the big winning lottery of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big winning lottery, the time saving lottery and the small winning lottery are executed. Therefore, there are many opportunities for the player to be in an advantageous state (time saving state) compared to the first special symbol, and it can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol more advantageous than the first special symbol. As described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long time (600 seconds), and the game efficiency of the player who intends to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is degraded.

Also, although the details will be described later, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8106), unlike the special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007 in FIG. 421), when the time saving is won, the time saving type to be set depending on whether the time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is on. Specifically, the time saving B state is set only when the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is ON. That is, the time saving B state is set only when the second special pattern wins the time saving during the variable display of the first special pattern indicating the time saving winning, and the time saving A state is set in other cases. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction in the absence of the time reduction winning variation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery without varying the first special symbol can be prevented from being excessively advantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429, the processing content of the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is demonstrated. Figure 429 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 time saving lottery processing 12 (Y8107).

When the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time saving election determination result) is acquired based on the time saving random number 12 table 202kh (Y8201), It is determined whether the time saving is elected (Y8202), If it is determined that the time saving is elected (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is on (Y8203), When it is determined that the short winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is ON (Y8203: Yes), the time saving B is set as the time saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8205), and this processing is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the short-time winning has not been won (Y8202: No), based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (Y8206), and this processing is finished.

In the process of Y8203, when it is determined that the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time saving A is set as a special time saving pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8204), and this processing is finished.

In this way, in the twelfth control example, only when the time saving winning variation state flag kg is on (that is, when the first special symbol wins the time saving winning and the variable display of the first special symbol indicating that the time saving winning is being executed), the time saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time saving win. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction in the absence of the time reduction winning variation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery without varying the first special symbol can be prevented from being excessively advantageous. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property of aiming for the short-time winning of the second special symbol within the period until the first special symbol is won in the short-time winning and the first special symbol indicating the short-time winning is stopped and displayed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the small winning lottery process 12 (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837), will be described. FIG. 430 is a flow chart showing this small winning lottery process 12 (Y8108).

In the small winning lottery process 12 (Y8108 in FIG. 430), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is time-saving winning, that is, whether or not the time-saving winning of the second special symbol is set (Y8301).

In the process of Y8301, when it is determined that the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not set for time saving (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small hit random number 12 table (Y8302), and if it is determined that the small hit is won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired, the small hit type is selected from the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf, and the first symbol is selected. A small winning design of the special design to be displayed on the display device is set (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, when it is determined that the small hit is not won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and the present process ends.

In this way, the twelfth control example prevents the player from being excessively advantageous by suppressing the awarding of a plurality of benefits to the player by not overlapping the winning of the big win, the short-time winning, and the winning of the small win in one second special symbol lottery.

In this case, for example, when the jackpot winning and the short-time winning overlap, a time-saving state that is more advantageous after the jackpot game than when only the jackpot is won is set, so that even if the big win of the same kind is won, the game state after the big win game is completed can be diversified depending on whether or not the time-saving win is won, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 431, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239), will be described. FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (FIG. 431, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y8103), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not the second special symbol big win is set (Y921).

In the process of Y921, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (Y921: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 (see FIG. 411) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of Y8105 in the second special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 428) (Y922), and the process proceeds to Y923. do.

On the other hand, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 413 to 416) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (Y926).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y928), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 432, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 432 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240). In this second special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the second special symbol is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control unit 110 loops, and when the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON) special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104) is executed, it is said that the big hit is in the process of Y231. Since it is determined, the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the process of Y231, the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is executed in the state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON is the timing of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation, which has been interrupted, when the big winning game is finished.

Returning to FIG. 432, the description continues. In the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901: Yes), then set the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command (Y2902), set the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd to off (Y2903), and proceed to Y2904. On the other hand, in the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2901: No), skip the processes of Y2902 and Y2903 and proceed to the process of Y2904.

In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 433, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241) will be described. FIG. 433 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241). This second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241) executes processing for stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and in addition to the configuration of suspending the variation of the special figure 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the variation time) when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 424), when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D), the variation of the special figure 1 is forcibly stopped. The difference is that the configuration is provided and the processing that is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol variation time has ended (Y901). Whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether or not the counter value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0.

When it is determined that the variation time has ended in the process of Y901 (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (Y902), and when it is determined that it is not a big hit (is out) (Y902: No), then it is determined whether the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 is a small hit (Y912). In the process of Y910, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (Y912: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a time-saving election (Y914). When it is determined that it is not time-saving winning, the second special symbol confirmation command is set (Y908), the variation of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped (Y909), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of Y914, when it is determined that the time saving is won (Y914: Yes), the time saving setting process 12 is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is performed. In addition, since the time saving setting process 12 is the same process as the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) executed as one process of the above-described first special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y236 in FIG. 424), detailed description is omitted.

In the process of Y912, when it is determined that the small hit is won (Y912: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit stop process 12 is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is performed. The special figure 2 small hit stop processing 12 (Y913) is forcibly stopping (discarding) or temporarily stopping (interrupting) the variable display of the first special symbol depending on the type of the small hit won, and the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Y902, when it is determined that it is a big hit (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot D (Y903), and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y904), the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y906), and the big win scenario is set (Y90) 7) After that, Y908 and Y909 are processed.

On the other hand, in the process of Y903, when it is determined that it is a big hit D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON (Y905), and the processes of Y906 to Y909 are executed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON, and in the case of other jackpot types, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, so that the case where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the jackpot type can be changed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 411, the kind of big win determined when the second special pattern wins the big win differs depending on the number of variations of the executed second special pattern, and the big win D is configured to be easily determined when the big win is won after the 51st rotation. By constructing in this way, even when the second special symbols are not able to win the jackpot and winning continues (so-called addiction), the kind of big win advantageous to the player is easily determined, so that the player's willingness to play can be suppressed when the player is addicted.

In the process of Y901, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y901: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203kf is ON (Y910). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is off in the process of Y910 (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is turned on in the process of Y910 (Y910: Yes), the first special symbol is stopped by the big hit or the time saving election is won. In addition, the details of this special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the second special symbol stop processing 12 (Y241), when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has passed (Y901: Yes), the processing of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol lottery game is executed. Further, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big win and the big winning game with the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins short working hours and the variable state of short working hours winning is set (Y910: Yes), a process (Y911) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol under variable display is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 434, special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 (Y911), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 433, Y241), will be described. FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 (Y911).

In the special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 (figure 434, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y631). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is ON (Y631: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to OFF (Y632), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating OFF of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set (Y633). Then, the variation type of the second special symbol is set to be out (Y634). In addition, although not shown, after the process of Y634, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped, and the special figure 2 confirmation command of the second special symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not on (Y631: No), since the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on, a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation of the second special symbol is set (Y635), and this process is finished.

In this way, in the twelfth control example, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is turned on (timing to stop the variation that becomes a big hit with the first special symbol), the variation is forcibly interrupted and forcibly stopped even if the variation time of the second special symbol has not passed. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is sufficient to execute the jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the short-time winning, the variation stop flag kf of the second special symbol is turned on at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. In the twelfth control example, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) in the normal state, so if the variation display of the second special symbol is already started when the first special symbol is won in the short time winning state, if the variation of the second special symbol continues as it is, the set short time winning variation state will end before the stop display of the second special symbol that is changing, and the player will draw the second special symbol in the short winning variation state. may cause a problem that it is not possible to execute

Here, when the fluctuation of the first special pattern is started when the first special pattern is won in the short time winning, the fluctuation stop flag kf of the second special pattern is turned on, so that when the fluctuation of the first special pattern in which the first special pattern is won in the short time is started, the fluctuation of the second special pattern during fluctuation is discarded, so that the lottery of the second special pattern can be newly received in the state of the short winning winning fluctuation and the player is prevented from being unable to execute the lottery of the second special pattern in the state of the short winning winning fluctuation. I can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 435, special figure 2 small hitting stop processing 12 (Y913), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 433, y241), will be described. FIG. 435 is a flow chart showing the contents of special figure 2 small hit stop processing 12 (Y913).

In the special figure 2 small hit stop processing 12 (FIG. 435, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small hit type is a small hit B (Y931), and when it is determined to be a small hit B (Y931: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON (Y932), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the ON of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set (Y933). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y931, when it is determined that it is not a small hit B (Y931: No), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to ON (Y937), the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag kc is set (Y938), and Y934 is processed.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, it is possible to discard the first special symbol during fluctuation not only by the specific big win type but also by the specific small win type. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small wins, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the fluctuation of the second special symbol indicating the winning of the small win B is stopped. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which discards a 1st special design at the time of the start of a small-hit game, and it is good also as a structure which discards at the time of the end of a small-hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 436, the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) executed in the main process will be described. FIG. 436 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004). This jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) is different only in that the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) is executed instead of the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) of the above-described eleventh control example, and the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 437, the contents of the jackpot ending process 12 (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 437 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 12 (Y11613). When the jackpot end processing 12 is executed, first, the time saving limit update processing 12 (Y2701) is executed. A detailed description of the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438, but the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to the time saving limit number counter 203ja.

Here, with reference to FIG. 438, details of time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), which is one process in jackpot end process 12 (see Y11613 in FIG. 437), will be described. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), a process for setting an upper limit that can continuously set a high probability state of normal symbols and updating the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit is executed.

In the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not set to a value that allows setting a normal high probability state, so the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is set to 10 (Y3005), and the time saving flag is set to ON ( Y3006). Then, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja (Y3002), and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit frequency counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), since the upper limit value for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously reached, the time saving limit reach flag 203kh is set to ON (Y3004), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, when it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit number counter 203ja is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process ends.

In this embodiment, 10 times are set as the time saving limit number of times.

Returning to FIG. 437, the description continues. After executing the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), it is determined whether the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is ON (Y2702), and when it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is ON (Y2702: Yes), the information indicating the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) as the game state set after the jackpot game ends is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703 ), set a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game (Y2707), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, when it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is not ON (Y2702: No), the information indicating the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) is stored in the game state storage area 203g as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (Y2704), and based on the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb shown in FIGS. The corresponding number of times of time saving is set to the counter value of the time saving counter 203h (Y2705), the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (Y2706), and Y2707 is processed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the upper limit for setting the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) continuously after the end of the jackpot game is set, and by limiting the number of times that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set, it is possible to suppress the player's gambling ambition by obtaining excessive prize balls.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is finished, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished.

Although not shown, the details of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. In conventional pachinko machines, when a special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) for indicating a specific result is stopped and displayed, a corresponding game state is generally set. For example, when a special pattern wins the jackpot, the player predicts that the jackpot win is possible by means of the performance during the variable display of the special pattern indicating the jackpot win, the special pattern is stopped and displayed, and the display mode indicating the jackpot win is displayed, whereby the player can recognize that the jackpot win has been won. In this case, since the player can predict in advance that a different game state will be set after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to smoothly cope with the change in the game state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, as described above, when the first special symbol wins short-time winning and the variation of the first special symbol starts, the short-time winning variable state is set. As shown in FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the first ball entrance 64 that triggers the start of the first special symbol lottery is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter regardless of whether the game ball flows down the left side area or the right side area of the board, but the second ball entrance 1641 that triggers the second special symbol is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter only when the game ball flows down the right side area of the board. It is

As a result, for example, when a player who is playing a game (a so-called left-handed game) in which a game ball is made to flow down the left side area of the board surface and enter the first ball entrance 64 wins the time-saving game, if the left-handed game is continued despite the time-saving winning variation state being set, the time-saving winning variation state may end without executing the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol is won in a short working hour, the winning of the short working hour is won before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect of announcing that the winning variation state is in the short working hour is executed.

Specifically, when the first special symbol wins the time saving, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the pseudo symbol stops when a predetermined time elapses (for example, after 10 seconds), a display mode indicating that the time saving winning variation state has been set is displayed (for example, "entering the time saving winning variation zone"), and "Right shot" is displayed to make the player shoot the game ball aiming at the second entrance 1641. - 特許庁

By displaying in this way, the player can recognize that the time-saving winning variation state has been set, and can play a game with a game method suitable for the game state. At the same time, it is preferable to perform a display to inform the player that the time saving B state is set by winning the big win (or small win) or the time saving win with the second special symbol during the time saving winning fluctuation state.

In addition, when it is determined as a result of pre-reading the winning information that the winning information for short-time winning is present in the winning information of the first special pattern (special figure 1 reserved) reserved in the normal state, a configuration may be added to notify that the short-time winning fluctuation state is set in the next fluctuation of the first special pattern on the stop display screen of the first special pattern executed immediately before the fluctuation of the first special pattern for short-time winning. That is, when the special figure 1 suspension exists, it is notified that the next variation is the time saving winning variation state in the variation of the first special symbol immediately before the time saving winning variation state is set, and when the special figure 1 suspension does not exist, it is configured to notify that the time saving winning variation state is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation of the first special symbol in which the time saving winning variation state is set.

In this way, when the special figure 1 suspension does not exist, there is a loss of variation time from the start of the time reduction winning variation to the notification of the time reduction winning variation state, but when the special figure 1 suspension exists, since it is reported in advance that the time reduction winning variation state is set, the variation time loss from the start of the time reduction winning variation to the notification of the time reduction winning variation state is eliminated. Therefore, the player can motivate the player to play the game by making him/her think to maintain the state in which the holding is always accumulated in order to eliminate the loss of the fluctuation time in the time-saving winning fluctuation state.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports the fluctuation|variation time of the 1st special design in a time-saving election fluctuation|variation state to a player intelligibly.

As described above, the twelfth control example is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and when both special symbols are won in the jackpot, the big win game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). A game machine configured to forcibly stop and display pattern fluctuations in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out is constructed so as to be able to execute time-saving winning judgment in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery.

Then, like the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning decision) is executed before each special symbol variation is started, and when a time-saving winning is made, a time-saving state is set at the special symbol variation stop timing. In this case, when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving, the time saving state as the first privilege is set. In addition, when the time saving state is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state (working time saving A state) as the first privilege is set, and when the working time saving state is won in the second special symbol lottery, the working hours saving state (time saving C) serving as the second privilege different from the first privilege may be set.

Further, in the second special pattern lottery executed during the variation of the first special pattern in which the time reduction is won, when the time reduction is won, a time reduction state (time reduction B state) in which a third privilege more advantageous than the first and second benefits is given can be set. By constructing in this way, in the Pachinko machine 10 constructed so that the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed at the same time (in parallel), it is possible to set the time saving state in which different benefits are given according to the timing of winning the time saving in each special pattern lottery.

The privilege to be granted may be, for example, a third privilege in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first privilege or the second privilege, or a third privilege in which a special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the first privilege or the second privilege.

Further, the timing for setting the time saving state of the third privilege may be the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed first among the special pattern variations executed in parallel, or may be the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed later. Also, regardless of before or after the stop display timing, it may be the timing when the previously executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed, or the timing when the later-executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed. Moreover, the timing at which a specific special symbol type is stopped and displayed may be used.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a jackpot is won in each special pattern lottery in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a plurality of special pattern type lotteries at the same time (in parallel), and an excessive privilege (jackpot game) is given to a player at the same time.

Furthermore, even if the player wins a big win disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, the player can win a big win advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery before the winning result is stopped (fixed display). In this case, by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win. As a result, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a disadvantageous win, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special pattern lottery while one special pattern won in a disadvantageous win is fluctuating, and stop display (determine display) the winning result prior to the winning result in the disadvantageous win.

In the twelfth control example, the special symbols for short-time winning are varied long to set the short-time winning variation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbols for big-hit winning are varied long to set the big-hit winning variation state, and during the big-hit winning variation state, the other special symbol changes short.

<Summary of technical ideas>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, in the fifth control example, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is constituted so as to establish the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbols in a part of the lottery result (loss) different from the jackpot winning.

In other words, it is configured so that a privilege different from the big winning game can be given even to the player who did not win the big winning in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, a lottery result of executing a big winning game and a lottery result of setting a time-saving state (a high probability state of normal symbols) can be separately provided to the player, so that the types of lottery results advantageous to the player can be easily diversified.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the easiness of establishment of the opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, in addition to the presence or absence of jackpot winning when the special symbol lottery is executed, short-time winning (whether or not the opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols is established). The presence or absence can be determined, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, only the presence or absence of a big hit can be determined when a special symbol lottery is executed.

By constructing in this way, when the normal state is set, a big win or short-time win in the special symbol lottery can be realized as an opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, and in a game state other than the normal state, a big win in the special pattern lottery can be established as an opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern. That is, the normal state in which the presence/absence of time-saving winning can be determined is more likely to establish the opportunity for setting the high-probability state of normal symbols than in the game state other than the normal state. Therefore, each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is set to a low probability state, and in the normal state which is the game state (game state disadvantageous to the player) in which it is most difficult to win in each pattern lottery, it is possible to make it easier to set the high probability state of the normal pattern than in other game states, and to increase the willingness of the player who is executing the game in the normal state.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the normal symbol high probability state is set is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be memorizable (retainable) up to a predetermined number (4). And it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to win the time saving than the first special symbol lottery.

That is, when the game state shifts from one of the game states (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the normal state (when the game state changes from the game state advantageous to the player to the game state disadvantageous), it is configured to make it easy to win the time saving when the second special pattern lottery based on the execution right of the second special pattern lottery held and stored in the high probability state of the normal pattern before the shift is executed during the normal state after the shift.

With this configuration, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for easily returning to a game state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period even when the game state is changed from a game state advantageous to the player to a game state disadvantageous to the player, so that the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from being remarkably reduced when a normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbols with the upper limit number (four) of execution rights (special symbol 2 suspension) of the second special symbol lottery acquired, the game for acquiring the special symbol 2 suspension can be motivated until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbols ends.

In the fifth control example, the high probability state of normal patterns can be set not only when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, but also when the special pattern lottery wins short working hours, and the easiness of establishment of the termination condition for ending the high probability state of the normal patterns is differentiated between the high probability state of the normal patterns (first short time) set based on the jackpot winning and the high probability state of the normal patterns (second short time) set based on the short time winning.

Specifically, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the second time saving is more likely than the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the first time saving. In this way, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, by making it possible to set the high probability state of the normal design in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting opportunity (the establishment opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design), not only whether the high probability state of the normal design is set, but also the process of the game of what kind of opportunity the high probability state of the normal design is set. You can make it easier to perform tricks.

In the fifth control example, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the ease of establishment of the time saving end condition (the number of times of time saving) is different. The degree of advantage of a privilege (for example, the number of prize balls given during a big win game or the type of game state set after the end of a big win game) given when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery in a high probability state may be made different.

Next, a first modified example of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving election can be made only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the present first modification, the difference is that the first special symbol lottery, which is executed when the normal state is set, can be elected in a short time.

In the above-described fifth control example, a game for executing the second special symbol lottery is played in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state of normal symbols. When the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 hold obtained during the normal symbol high probability state is executed in the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, a short time lottery is executed in addition to the big win lottery, so that the player who has experienced the game (advantageous game) during the normal symbol high probability state which is advantageous to the player is easily returned to the advantageous game with a higher probability than usual after the advantageous game is over. game) could be executed.

However, in the above-described fifth control example, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is executed, the benefits of the time-saving lottery cannot be received, and the player gets bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, since it is configured so that the time-saving lottery can be won even in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the player can easily receive the benefits of the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) set based on the special symbol lottery winning is shorter than the normal symbol high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the special pattern lottery wins the short-time win, the player can be provided with the privilege of facilitating the continuation of the normal pattern high probability period until the next big win win.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, when the first special symbol lottery wins, a short-time (for example, one time) time-saving state can be set, and a game for acquiring the right to execute the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the period (normal-pattern high-probability period) in which the short-term time-saving state is set. In other words, in the first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above can be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modified example, a plurality of variable times can be selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In this first modified example, when a time saving win is made in a first special symbol lottery executed during a normal state, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode (time saving symbol) for indicating the time saving win after a change of a predetermined variation time. After that, the time saving state (time saving number of times) is set, and the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation to be executed next is stopped and displayed.

That is, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues is determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state, the easier it is to acquire many special figures 2 reserves during the time saving state, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player can be obtained.

Next, a second modified example of the fifth control example will be described. In the above-described fifth control example, it is possible to set a high probability state (first time reduction) of normal symbols based on the fact that a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and to set a high probability state (second time reduction) of normal symbols based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the time reduction. As a result, it is possible to set a high-probability state of normal symbols at a plurality of opportunities, and by increasing the variation of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second modified example, in order to further improve interest, the contents of the privilege given when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set are configured to be different according to the occasion (first short time or second short time) when the high probability state of the normal symbols is set. In other words, the contents of the privilege given when the same jackpot type is set are different between when the big win is won during the first time saving and when the big win is won during the second time saving. By constructing in this way, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set, the player can be interested in when the time saving state is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the second modified example, as a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a jackpot game (2R jackpot) with a small number of rounds and a short playing time for one round game can be executed, and a time saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the contents of the game to be executed between when the time saving state is set based on the big win in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the first time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set without executing the big winning game, that is, when the second time saving state is set.

In addition, in the second modification, the variable performance executed in the process of setting the first time saving and the variable performance executed in the process of setting the second time saving are configured to be executable in the same performance mode. Specifically, the first period from the start of the special symbol variation indicating the winning of the jackpot (2R jackpot winning) in which the first time saving is set is started, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and then the 2R jackpot game is finished, and the second period, which is the variation time of the special symbol variation for indicating the winning of the time saving in which the second time saving is set, are set so as to be substantially the same period, and the production is executed in a common presentation mode using the period. are

By constructing in this way, since the performance of the common performance mode can be executed in the period from the start of the special pattern variation to the setting of the time saving state in the case of setting the first time saving and the case of setting the second time saving, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state is set.

Next, a sixth control example will be described. In the fifth control example and each modified example described above, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving lottery in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the sixth control example, it is greatly different in that it is configured so that the special symbol lottery can win short time even in the state where the game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring in this way, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when newly winning the time saving state, it is possible to update the remaining period in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state continues.

In addition, in the case of updating the remaining period in which the time saving state continues, it is constructed so that the period in which the time saving state continues is renewed (advantageous renewal) so as to be longer than the current remaining period (advantageous renewal) or renewed so as to be shortened (unfavorable renewal). That is, depending on the timing of the time-saving lottery winning and the number of times of time-saving (time-saving) set when the time-saving lottery is won, there are cases where the time-saving winning becomes an advantageous privilege for the player and a case where it becomes a disadvantageous privilege. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that includes a game property that expects time-saving winning and a game property that does not expect time-saving winning.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example, it is configured such that the more consecutive time-saving wins are made, the easier it is to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player without winning a jackpot. Specifically, a plurality of time-saving classifications with different degrees of advantage for the player are defined, and the more advantageous time-saving classifications are set as the time-saving winning is made in the time-saving state, the easier it is to set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot, the easier it is to give the player an advantageous benefit.

In addition, when the most advantageous time saving type for the player is set, it is configured to make the shift to the time saving type disadvantageous to the player easier than when the time saving type more disadvantageous than the time saving type is set. In other words, there are a plurality of stages of time-reduction classifications with different degrees of advantage, and the time-reduction classifications with a higher degree of advantage are gradually set based on the winning of time-reduction, and when the highest level of time-reduction classification is reached, it is configured to easily fall to the lowest stage of time-reduction classification. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the time saving type advantageous to the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be described. This seventh control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that it is configured so that a small winning can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big winning (losing), and the big winning game can be executed by entering the game ball into a specific area during the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the determination of time-saving winning is performed only when the special symbol lottery is not winning the jackpot, whereas this seventh control example is different in that it is possible to determine both the big winning and the time-saving winning in one special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, after executing the determination of the jackpot winning, it is configured to perform the determination of the short-time winning, and in the case of the short-time winning, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the special symbol variation of the short-time winning is stopped and displayed. A time-saving state is set before the time-saving state, determination of big winning in the special pattern lottery is executed in the state where the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state can be terminated at the timing when the special pattern variation for showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is executed.

Concretely, when the first special symbol lottery in the normal state wins the time-saving lottery, as described above, it is configured to be in the time-saving state for a short period of time including the timing of execution of the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the fifth control example described above, a game advantageous to the player for the next big win (a game that makes it easy to execute a special symbol lottery) is performed for a predetermined period (up to 10000 times) without going through the big win game. A function (special lottery function) is provided to make it possible to execute the jackpot judgment of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state during the game (left-handed game) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing of executing the big-hit judgment in the time-saving state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute big hit judgment of the special pattern lottery in the time saving state while making it difficult for the player to grasp that the special pattern lottery has been won, so that it is possible to inform the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the privilege given when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is different between when the jackpot is won in the normal state and when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state, a benefit (for example, a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) more advantageous to the player is given. That is, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when both the short-time winning and the big win are won, a more advantageous privilege is given than when only the big win is won.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a suggesting mode (notification mode) capable of suggesting the presence or absence of a short-time winning and a suggesting mode (notifying mode) capable of suggesting the presence or absence of a jackpot winning can be set as the performance mode of the variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

In other words, by grasping the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed, the player can predict the result of big win determination executed for the special symbol lottery being executed and the result of short-time winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable effect, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the big win are configured to be different. By constructing in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing determination for providing a plurality of different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to comprehend (predict) at least one determination result and to comprehend a suggestion mode for suggesting another determination result.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when the performance result including the suggestive mode suggesting the presence or absence of the time-reduction winning (time-reduction performance) is the performance result including the suggestion mode suggesting non-winning of the time-reduction, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the case where the time-reduction performance is not executed. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of imparting a plurality of benefits with different grant determinations in one special symbol lottery, when a determination result suggesting performance capable of suggesting the grant determination result for one benefit is executed, the performance result of the determination result suggesting performance is a performance result suggesting that the first privilege is not granted, so that the degree of expectation for granting other benefits is higher than when the determination result suggesting performance is not executed, whereby the determination result suggesting performance is executed. At the point in time, the player can be notified that any privilege is more likely to be granted than in the case where the judgment result suggesting effect is not executed.

Next, an eighth control example will be described. The fifth control example described above is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state) and to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means 640 during the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state). Furthermore, it was configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election (time-saving lottery) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) was configured to be stored (reserved storage) up to a predetermined number (four pieces) as an upper limit.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured as described above, the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is terminated while the special-figure 2 reservation is retained and stored, and the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern is set, so that the second special design lottery based on the reserved and stored special-figure 2 reservation is executed in the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal design, and when the second special design lottery executed during the normal state wins the time-saving lottery, the normal design is again executed. was configured to set a high-probability state (time-saving state).

In other words, the period from when the normal design high probability state (time saving state) ends and when the normal design low probability state (normal state) is set until the predetermined period (the period during which the second special design lottery is executed based on the special figure 2 hold) passes, can be set as a period (pullback period) in which the normal design high probability state (time saving state) is easily set. it was possible.

On the other hand, the eighth control example is different in that determination of time saving winning (time saving lottery) can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the time saving lottery is configured to win with a high probability (most of the lost winnings), and the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is configured to be a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are easily executed alternately, and as the end condition of the above-described second time saving, the end condition is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example configured as described above, when a special pattern lottery executed in a state where a normal state is set does not win a jackpot (jackpot probability 1/300), a second time saving is set by winning a time saving with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time saving until the end condition of the second time saving is established.

In addition, as end conditions for the second time reduction, the first time reduction end condition established when the total number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second time reduction reaches a specific number (100 times) and the second time reduction end condition established when the special symbol lottery is executed in a predetermined order are set, and the second time reduction end condition is constituted so as to be established before the first time reduction end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time saving is set, the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second time saving end condition in order to quickly end the second time saving.

In addition, the degree of advantage to the player is differentiated according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and it is easier to set an advantageous game state after the end of the big winning game in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state than in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed after the second time saving is finished.

In the eighth control example described above, when the type of the special symbol lottery executed immediately after the time saving state is set satisfies the specific condition (the same type as the special symbol in which the time saving state is set), the special symbol lottery executed immediately after that is configured to establish the time saving end condition (establish the shortening time saving end condition), but the configuration for establishing the shortening time saving end condition is not limited to this. , and when the time saving is won during the time saving state, a new time saving state with the contents of the time saving winning may be set.

In the eighth control example, when the disadvantageous time-saving lottery is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous than the normal state is executed even in the first special symbol lottery until the disadvantageous time-saving state ends. In other words, according to the result of one special symbol lottery, a penalty can be imposed on other special symbol lotteries.

As a game method for imposing such a penalty, for example, as in the above-described 12th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification), in a specific game state (normal state), when the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing an inappropriate game, a disadvantageous time reduction state is set, and while the disadvantageous time reduction state is set, the second special symbol lottery is executed. A special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state may be executed in one special symbol lottery.

Next, a twelfth control example will be described. In the eleventh control example described above, during the period in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. On the other hand, the twelfth control example is different in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification).

By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in the eleventh control example described above, the time-saving lottery was executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in the twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. It is different in that it is configured so that an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the game is played.

Although the details will be described later, in the twelfth control example, the time saving A state is set when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol wins short working hours in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) is set (short working hour winning variation state), and when the second special symbol wins short working hours until the variation of the first special symbol is completed (that is, until the first special symbol indicating that the short working hours win is stopped and displayed), a short working B state more advantageous to the player than the short A state is set.

With this configuration, when one special pattern wins the time-saving win, the other special pattern also wins the time-saving win so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given to the player, so that one special pattern wins the time-saving win, and while the special symbols showing the time-saving win are fluctuating, by making the player think that the other special pattern also wins the time-saving win, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even when winning a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal patterns) can be set after the jackpot game is finished, processing for setting a normal state (low-probability state of normal patterns) is executed after the jackpot game is finished.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the continuation of a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and suppress the improvement of the gambling spirit of the player.

In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, it is common to forcibly stop (discard) or temporarily stop (interrupt) the variable display of the other special symbol. However, in the 12th control example, it is configured to determine whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the variable display of the other special symbol depending on the big win type (or small win type). In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.

With this configuration, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stop-displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the setting of an unfavorable game state can be prevented when a jackpot of the jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of the other special symbols is won, but a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues when a jackpot of the jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, so that the jackpot win is won. In this case, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Summary of technical ideas>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, regarding the technical idea that when the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 reserve acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number of times, the probability of being granted an advantageous privilege by the special figure 2 lottery increases, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has means for acquiring the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information), and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation). ) up to an upper limit (4) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved and stored second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) (discriminating means capable of executing the discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is jackpot winning (first determination result). After the jackpot game is finished, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 continues until the end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination separately from the determination of big winning, and when it is determined that time-saving winning is determined in the time-saving winning determination (when it is determined to be the second determination result), a high probability state (specific setting) of normal symbols can be set without executing a big winning game. Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of game states can be set, but among them, only in the state where the normal state (specific period) is set, the time-saving winning determination can be executed.

By constructing in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the big win in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set not at the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation but at the end timing of the big win game, and when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the short winning in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation. Therefore, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the timing of setting the time saving state.

In addition, since a period during which time-saving winning determination can be executed (a period during which a normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be executed (a period during which the normal state is not set) can be set, the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed can also make the player interested. In the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning determination is configured to be executed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period in which the time-saving winning determination can be executed and a period in which the time-saving winning determination is not performed.

Furthermore, instead of switching whether or not to execute the time saving success/failure determination according to the set game state, the probability of winning the time saving success/failure in the time saving success/failure determination may be changed according to the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win a short-time win and a game state in which it is difficult to win a short-time win, so that the same effect as the above-described technical idea, that is, the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed can also make the player interested.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, a first ball entrance 64 (first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter) that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by entering a game ball, and a second ball entrance 640 that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery (second ball entrance means different from the first ball entrance means) are provided, and time-saving winning determination is configured to be executable only in the second special symbol lottery.

That is, in the first special symbol lottery, no matter what game state is set, time-saving winning judgment is not executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a specific period (normal state). By constructing in this manner, the amount of value given to the player later can be greatly changed between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and furthermore, the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time saving winning determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning determination during the specific period (normal state). may be configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 tends to give a value more advantageous to the player than the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the situation in which the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 more easily imparts a value advantageous to the player than the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a more advantageous value is likely to be given.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modification shown in FIG. 329, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 should be configured so that the degree of entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the degree of entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 are the same regardless of which game state is set. With such a configuration, the player can select which ball entrance the game ball is to enter, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning by the time saving winning determination is more likely to be set than the time saving state (first time saving) set based on the jackpot winning. That is, according to the setting opportunity of a time saving state, it comprises so that the advantageous degree of the set time saving state may be varied. As a result, it is possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) in which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set according to the discriminated result (setting opportunity), so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the amusement can be further improved.

In this case, depending on the game state before the time saving state is set, a time saving state where the second time saving is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving and a case where the first time saving is more advantageous to the player than the second time saving may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which situation the time saving state was set.

More specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the last big win game is over (the number of times of addiction) exceeds a predetermined number, it may be made easier to be in an advantageous time-saving state than when it does not.

Next, in the above-described seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning (see FIG. 315). As a result, the jackpot winning (first discrimination result) and the short-time winning (second discrimination result) can be discriminated redundantly, so that in one special pattern lottery, various lottery results can be expected, such as winning a big win, short-time winning, and winning both a big win and a short-time win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning are overlapped, a jackpot game more advantageous to the player than when there is no overlap is executed (see FIG. 306(b)). As a result, a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is easily executed due to redundant discrimination, so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified by providing the player with benefits corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, as a configuration for giving a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the case of duplicate winning than in the case of non-multiple winning, a configuration other than the above-described seventh control example may be used, for example, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to be able to set a more advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state, time-saving state, etc.) in the case of double winning than in the case of non-multiple winning.

In addition, in the above-described seventh control example, after executing the determination of time-saving winning (determining whether it is the second determination result), it is configured to perform the big win determination (determining whether it is the first determination result). In the case of one special symbol lottery, when the time-saving lottery is won, the big-hit determination in the special symbol lottery can be performed in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the advantageous degree of the privilege game executed in the case of duplicate winning and the advantage degree of the privilege game executed in the case of non-multiple winning different.

Next, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state (first time reduction) set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning (second time reduction) is set based on the normal symbol high probability state (second time reduction), and the normal symbol high probability state is set. See FIG. 280(b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game (the content of the jackpot game and the number of times of reduced time to be granted) is variable according to the setting type (first time reduction, second time reduction), the privilege given to the player can be made different even in the same normal pattern high probability state (second game state), and the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved without setting many game states.

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, a difference is provided in the number of time reductions to be provided according to the setting type (first time reduction and second time reduction).

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, when the second time saving is set rather than the first time saving, that is, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without executing the big winning game, the high probability state of the normal pattern in which the end condition is difficult to be established is more likely to be set. In other words, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning the prize balls during the jackpot game, that is, the second time reduction, which has fewer benefits until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than the first time reduction, can lengthen the high probability state of the normal pattern, so that there is an effect that the privilege can be imparted fairly to the player.

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, similarly to the fifth control example and the first modification of the fifth control example described above, time-saving winning determination (discrimination of the second determination result) can be executed only in the normal state. In other words, except for the normal state, execution of the time-saving winning determination is regulated. Therefore, since the time-saving winning determination is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect that the player is more interested in the set game state and expects that the game state in which the second determination result can be determined is set.

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the effect mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so as to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set (see FIGS. 278 and 279). That is, when the first time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 278(a)) is executed for the first period obtained by adding the special symbol fluctuation time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol fluctuation time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the fluctuation time and the big winning game period are defined in advance corresponding to each special pattern lottery result so that the first period and the second period are substantially the same period, and the performance period of the specific performance is configured to be the same. By constructing in this way, as the performance displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the performance showing the normal pattern high probability state is executed after the specific performance having the same performance period and the same performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player watching the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to discriminate in which setting opportunity the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning judgment even during the time saving state (second game state), and when the time saving win is made during the time saving state (second game state), it is possible to set the time saving state (second game state) of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (the number of time saving times is large or the time saving winning probability is high).

Thus, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set, the easier it is to set the time saving state of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that the privilege game can be easily executed.

In addition, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the time saving winning probability is changed according to the set game state, but the time saving winning probability may be defined to be the same. In addition, although the time-saving winning probability is varied according to the game state, the time-saving winning probability may be changed according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big win game is executed. In this case, when the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big winning game is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the time saving winning probability should be increased. By constructing in this way, a player who has not won a big win for a long time in the special symbol lottery can be easily provided with the privilege of short-time winning, which is different from the big win game. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

In the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329, the first determination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing the first determination, and the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is the first determination result (jackpot winning). Based on that, the first benefit (jackpot game) can be granted, and the first determination result is the second determination result (shorter time winning) different from the first determination result. A first privilege granting means, a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of performing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and a first privilege can be granted based on the fact that the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means is a third discrimination result (jackpot winning), and a second privilege capable of granting a third privilege (small winning game) different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on the fact that the result of the second discrimination is a fourth discrimination result (small winning) different from the third discrimination result. and a granting means, configured so that the third privilege is not granted based on the first discrimination executed by the first discriminating means and the second privilege is not granted based on the second discrimination executed by the second discriminating means.

As a result, different benefits can be given depending on whether the first discrimination is executed or the second discrimination is executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game by making different judgments, and there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine related to the above-mentioned <game property 2>, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and when both special symbols are won in the jackpot, the big win game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). To provide a game machine configured to forcibly stop and display pattern fluctuations in a display mode indicating that a lottery result is lost, so as to be capable of executing time-saving winning determination in both a first special pattern lottery and a second special pattern lottery. A first advantageous state and a third advantageous state (a third advantageous state of time saving) that are more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be set based on the determination that the second condition is satisfied (a time saving state of the first privilege) is set by the second distinguishing means during a period from when the first determining means determines that the first condition is satisfied (time saving is won) until the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state (time saving state of the first privilege). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 constituted so that the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), it is possible to set a time saving state in which different benefits are given according to the timing of winning the time saving in each special pattern lottery.

In <Other game features> described above, in a gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being the first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means is configured so that the first game state (normal state) is set. A second game state (second time saving B) can be set based on the fact that the result of determination by the determination means (special symbol lottery) executed in the set state is a second determination result (second time saving B winning) different from the first determination result, the first game state can be set based on the completion of the end condition (time saving end condition) in the state where the second game state is set, and the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set is the first determination. A third game state (second time saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set based on the third determination result (second time saving A winning) different from the result and the second determination result. Further, the discrimination means can perform discrimination so that the probability that the discrimination result will be the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability that the discrimination result will be the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%).

Furthermore, as a termination condition (time reduction termination condition of the second time reduction B), at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of determinations (number of times of special symbol lottery) by the determination means executed in the state where the second game state is set reaches a predetermined number can be set. In addition, it is possible to set a second end condition that can be established based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result (minor winning).

In this case, as a setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, at least a first setting (normal time saving state) that can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means and a second setting that can set the second game state (time saving state) without executing the privilege game based on the result of the discrimination performed by the discrimination means being a second discrimination result (second time saving B winning) different from the first discrimination result. The game state setting means can set an advantageous second game state (ordinary time saving state) which is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state) and a disadvantageous second game state (second time saving B) which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type (time saving type) set by the type setting means.

As the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each embodiment described above, the following configuration may be used.

<Regarding the high-probability state of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends. However, as a setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol lottery, a setting opportunity other than the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery may be provided. (2 times the value of ), the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be established.

By constructing in this way, when a special pattern lottery (fluctuation) that does not win a jackpot is repeatedly executed, i.e., a situation in which the player's willingness to play tends to decrease, a privilege advantageous to the player (a high probability state of normal patterns) can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from being remarkably lowered.

Further, the number of executions of the special symbol variation, which is an element for establishing the setting opportunity described above, may be configured to be variable according to the game situation, for example, it may be configured to vary the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol according to the set game state. Specifically, when a normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when a second variable probability state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the number of executions of special symbol variation that establishes a setting opportunity may be varied according to the type of game state in which the low-probability state of normal symbols is set. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the set game state.

In this case, the second probability change status with a high probability status of the special pattern is set, so that it is easier to win the large hits by a special pattern lottery than the normal state in which the low -probability status of the special pattern is set (because it is high probability of a large hit), so if the second probability change is set, the normal state is set. It is good to configure the setting opportunity to set the high probability status of the normal pattern by the number of executions of the small special pattern fluctuation. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the easiness of establishment of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbols to the same degree regardless of which game state is set.

On the other hand, when the normal state is set rather than when the second variable probability state is set, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design may be established with fewer execution times of the special design variation. In other words, in the normal state (game state most disadvantageous to the player) in which the low probability state disadvantageous to the player is set even in the probability state of the special pattern, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be easily established, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to execute the excessively disadvantageous game. In addition, since the high probability state of normal patterns is easily set based on the setting opportunity established when the number of execution times of special pattern variation reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to easily provide a game with unexpectedness that the high probability state of normal patterns is set without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case where the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols is configured to be different according to the set game state, a game state in which the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols cannot be established (is difficult to establish) may be provided in a part of the set game states. A setting opportunity for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols may be established more easily when the normal AB game state is set than when the normal AA game state is set.

By configuring in this way, at what timing is the high-probability state of the normal symbol set for the player playing the game on the gaming machine in which the normal state is set? Or, is it a game state in which a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols can be established? Since the game can be played while predicting the game, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In this case, it is preferable that the game state currently set (game state for each type) is a game state in which the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol is likely to be established or not.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine having a game specification in which a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is more advantageous to a player when winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (a game state set to the end of a jackpot game) is more likely to be given to a player in a special symbol lottery than in a game state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set. and information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (or information for indicating the result of pre-discrimination (read-ahead result) obtained by discriminating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in advance).

For example, in determining the performance mode of performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) that is more likely to be executed when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot than when it is not won, the remaining period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) until the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is established is referred to. A different performance mode is determined in a second situation in which the state is not set for a while, and the performance mode of the ready-to-win performance is preferably determined so as to make it easier to execute the ready-to-win performance in a performance mode capable of notifying that the first situation is more advantageous to the player than the second situation.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win performance in different performance modes depending on the timing of executing the ready-to-win performance for suggesting the winning of the jackpot and the timing to set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so that the ready-to-win performance can be executed in various performance modes and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, based on the performance mode of the ready-to-win performance to be executed, it is possible for the player to grasp the advantage of the timing at which the ready-to-win performance is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), so that it is possible to provide a novel performance that makes the player expect that the performance result of the ready-to-win performance being executed will be lost (the performance result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost).

In a game machine constituted so that when a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot in a state where a low probability state of a normal pattern is set, a high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the high probability state of the normal pattern is more likely to be set when the jackpot is won during the high probability state of the normal pattern than when the jackpot is won during the low probability state of the normal pattern, after the jackpot game ends. As a variable performance for indicating a result, a specific performance (e.g., a ready-to-win performance) which is easier to be executed when a jackpot is won in another pattern lottery than when the jackpot is not won is executable, and as a performance mode of the specific performance, a first performance mode suggesting that a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after a big win game is set, and a second performance mode simply suggests winning a big win, and a special performance mode is set until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. Regardless of the number of remaining pattern variations, the frequency of execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode may be fixed, and the frequency of execution of the specific performance of the second performance mode may be made lower as the number of remaining special pattern variations decreases until the high probability state of normal patterns is set.

By configuring in this way, the selection ratio of the first performance mode in the case where the specific performance is executed can be increased as the number of times of special symbol fluctuations set in the high probability state of normal symbols is approached, so that even when the specific performance is executed in a state close to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set (for example, the number of times of special symbol fluctuations is between 90 and 99 times after the end of the previous jackpot game), the performance result of the specific performance is not disappointing to the player. can be of interest.

Further, a frequency lottery means for determining the number of execution times of the special symbol variation to establish the setting opportunity for setting the normal symbol high probability state may be provided, and the execution frequency of the special symbol variation to establish the setting opportunity may be determined based on the lottery result of the frequency lottery means. In this case, for example, as the range of the number of executions that can be determined by the number-of-times lottery means, the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be determined to be "0" as the number of executions at which the setting opportunity is most likely to be established.

By constructing in this way, even when a big winning type in which a low probability state of normal patterns is set is set, substantially the same game state as when a high probability state of normal patterns is set can be set.

That is, even when the same big winning type (big winning type in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set) is set in the same game state, the game state (probability state of normal symbols) set after the big winning game is finished (until the first special symbol variation is executed) can be made different based on the lottery result of the number of times lottery means.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and to provide the player with an unexpected game.

In addition, the timing of executing the above-mentioned number of lottery means may be appropriately set, for example, the timing at which the big win game ends, or the number of times lottery means may be executed every time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In this case, when the number of execution times of the special pattern variation determined as the lottery result of the number-of-times lottery means has already passed, the high-probability state of the normal pattern may be set immediately after the lottery by the number-of-times lottery means is executed.

In this way, by configuring the number-of-times lottery means to be executable each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to vary the contents of the setting opportunity (number of times of special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity) for setting a high-probability state of the normal symbol within the period in which the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times without winning a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In this case, it is preferable to vary the range of the execution frequency of the special symbol variation determined by the lottery based on the number of execution times of the lottery by the lottery means during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the next jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily set a high-probability state of normal symbols as the number of times of special symbol variations executed between big hits increases, so that the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from being remarkably lowered.

In addition, in the above-mentioned number-of-times lottery means, a lottery is executed to determine the number of times of special symbol fluctuations at which the setting opportunity for setting the high-probability state of the normal symbols is established.

Furthermore, in a game machine configured to execute a number of lottery means every time a special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, a number of lottery means can be executed when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on the execution of the special symbol variation, a normal pattern high probability lottery means may be provided instead of the above-mentioned number of times lottery means, and when the normal pattern high probability lottery means is won, a high probability state of the normal pattern may be set.

In addition, another setting opportunity may be provided as a setting opportunity for the high probability state of the normal symbol, for example, a measurement means for measuring the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (for example, a small winning) other than the big winning winning may be provided, and when the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined measurement result, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be established. (For example, when the degree of decrease in the number of balls paid out is extremely high), the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be established.

Furthermore, the establishment degree (easiness of establishment) of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbols may be varied according to the past game result. For example, when the jackpots won in the past are biased toward the jackpots disadvantageous to the player, i.e., when the game disadvantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbols may be easily established, or the game advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period. In the case of being, it may be configured so that the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is difficult to be established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing for a long time from continuing to play an excessively disadvantageous game or an excessively advantageous game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied in a state in which the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times of special symbol variation is executed (performed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

In addition, the content of the time saving end condition is not limited to this, for example, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the type of special symbol. Specifically, the time saving end condition may be established when the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed the first time, when the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is performed the second number of times, or when the total number of times of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is performed the third number of times.

Further, when setting the time-saving end condition to be established based on the number of execution times of the special symbol variation, various times may be settable as the number of times of special design variation for which the time-saving end condition is established. You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be satisfied, when the number of times (for example, 50 times) less than is performed. Further, the content of the time saving end condition may be changed according to the setting opportunity (jackpot type, special pattern fluctuation frequency, etc.) established to set the time saving condition, and the number of times of special pattern fluctuations for which the time saving end condition is established may be reduced so that the time saving end condition is more likely to be established when another setting opportunity is established than when the first setting opportunity is established. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends when the time saving state is set, and to make the player interested in which setting occasion the time saving state is set based on.

In addition, an element other than the number of executions of the special pattern variation may be used as an element for establishing the time saving end condition, for example, the time saving end condition may be established when the number of times that the result of the special pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small hit) reaches a predetermined number of times.

The timing for ending the time saving state based on the establishment of the time saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special pattern variation (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special pattern variation, or the specific timing until the next special pattern lottery of the corresponding special pattern variation is executed. Furthermore, the time saving state may be terminated at the start timing or end timing of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game), or at the start timing or stop timing of normal pattern fluctuation or the start timing or end timing of the normal pattern winning game.

In this case, even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated at the same timing, or may be configured to end the time saving state at different timings according to the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. It is preferable to configure so as to terminate the time saving state at a predetermined timing related to a winning game (a small winning game, a big winning game) executed based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing of ending the time saving state can be changed according to the type of the established time saving end condition, so it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how long the time saving state continues.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game is configured to be executed with a game property that can increase the number of balls released without winning a jackpot (a game property that can increase the number of balls released by a small winning game that frequently occurs). It may be configured so that the number of balls paid out can be increased even in a state in which the skill state is set.

For example, by setting a large number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters a ball entrance (for example, the right first ball entrance 64b2) where a ball is likely to enter when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out without winning a jackpot when the high probability state of normal symbols is set. By constructing the game machine in this manner, the player can be made to execute the game aiming at the special winning jackpot winning and the game aiming at the winning winning of the normal pattern in duplicate, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the length of the normal symbol variation time is varied in order to differentiate the number of balls to be output per unit time between the first game state (time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the second game state (variable probability state), or the length of the period during which the ball can actually enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 in the game period of the normal symbol per game executed when the normal symbol is won. The gaming state may be configured such that more balls can be obtained per unit time than in the second gaming state.

In addition, it is preferable to provide the above-described setting opportunity (setting opportunity established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) as a setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of normal symbols for a game machine having a performance capable of increasing the number of balls to be released without winning a big hit in the state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set. As a result, it is possible to set a high probability state of normal patterns and execute a game (relief game) for increasing the number of balls to be put out for a player who is executing a special pattern variation (lottery) for a long time without winning a jackpot in a normal state of a low probability state of normal patterns. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

As described above, in the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols), the number of balls to be paid out can be increased by a game that is executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, even in a game machine having a game specification that tends to lengthen the game during the time saving state (for example, a game specification with a low special pattern jackpot probability or a game specification in which a relatively long variation time is set as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state), it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play the game during the time saving state that continues for a long time.

As mentioned above, although the structure regarding the high probability state of a normal design was demonstrated, you may apply the same content as a structure regarding the high probability state of a special design. In this case, the element corresponding to the normal design of the content described above, may be applied to the configuration of the content of the change to the special design. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the special pattern is set, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, the configuration described above may be used for both normal symbols and special symbols.

<About the configuration regarding the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game is set, the same ratio is used for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. The high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the big win game by causing the ball to pass through the specific area during the big win game in a state where the right for setting the high probability state of the special pattern is acquired), and the big win game executed based on the big win winning of the first special pattern lottery and the big win game executed based on the big win winning of the second special symbol lottery are the advantageous big winning game capable of passing the ball to the specific region during the big winning game and the big winning. It may be configured such that the execution ratio of the disadvantageous jackpot game in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area during the game is different.

By constructing in this way, even if the same ratio of the big winning type corresponding to the first special pattern and the big winning type corresponding to the second special pattern is previously defined as the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big winning game, the ratio of actually setting the high probability state of the special pattern can be made different between the case of winning the big win in the first special pattern lottery and the case of winning the big win in the second special pattern lottery.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol may be configured to be set in advance by differentiating the ratio at which the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big winning game is finished. In this case, furthermore, it may be constituted so as to prescribe different ratios of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big win game for the same special pattern type according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the big win.

Further, it may be constructed so that a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, information for determining whether or not the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the big win game is set to the jackpot type of each special pattern may be provided. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game situation includes, for example, a jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls that the player has won, and the like, and it is preferable to set the high-probability state of the special symbols more easily when the game situation determination result is disadvantageous to the player than when the determination result is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

Similarly, when a big win is won in a state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set, the above-described contents may be applied to a ratio of setting a low probability state of a special pattern after finishing the big win game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, as the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game is set, the same ratio is defined in advance between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. In a state in which a state-settable jackpot type is set (a state in which the right to set a high-probability state of a special pattern is acquired), a ball does not pass through the specific region during the jackpot game, so that a ball is set to a low-probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game ends, and the ball is transferred to the specific region during the jackpot game in the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of the first special pattern lottery and the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of the second special pattern lottery. It may be configured such that the execution ratio of the advantageous jackpot game that can be passed and the disadvantageous jackpot game that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game can be made different.

By constructing in this way, even if the same ratio is previously defined for the big winning type corresponding to the first special pattern and the big winning type corresponding to the second special pattern as the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big winning game, the ratio of actually setting the low probability state of the special pattern can be made different between the case of winning the big win in the first special pattern lottery and the case of winning the big win in the second special pattern lottery.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern may be configured so as to prescribe different ratios for setting the low probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game winning during the high probability state of the special pattern is completed. In this case, further, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the big win, it may be configured so as to prescribe different ratios of setting the low-probability state of the special symbols after the end of the big win game for the same special symbol type.

Further, it may be constructed so that a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, information for determining whether or not the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the big win game is finished for each special pattern big win type may be provided. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game situation includes, for example, a jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like, and it is preferable to set the low-probability state of the special symbols more easily when the game situation determination result is advantageous to the player than when it is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively advantageous game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to set the end condition based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. It may be used as an end condition for ending the high-probability state of the handle.

Specifically, the end condition may be established when the number of special symbol variations after the special symbol high probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 150 times). As a result, the high probability state of the special symbols having a high probability of winning the jackpot can be terminated without winning the jackpot, so that the player who is playing the game state in which the high probability state of the special symbols is set is motivated to play the game to win the jackpot before the termination condition is established.

Also, the game machine may be configured to have both the end condition and the time-saving end condition, and in this case, the number of executions of the special symbol variation set as the end condition and the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation set as the time-saving end condition are different. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is satisfied, so that the player can enjoy the game without getting tired of it.

Furthermore, as the number of special symbol variations set as a termination condition, one number of special symbol variations may be set from among a plurality of number of variations including at least a first number of variations and a second number of variations different from the first number of variations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

In addition, when the game machine configured to be able to change the special symbol variation frequency set as the termination condition is configured to be able to set the termination condition related to the special symbol variation frequency set as the termination condition, it is preferable to configure the first variation frequency to be smaller than the special symbol variation frequency that satisfies the time saving end condition, and the second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency to be the variation frequency that is greater than the special symbol variation frequency that satisfies the time saving end condition. By comprising in this way, the conditions satisfied first can be varied among termination conditions and time saving termination conditions according to the termination conditions set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, the game state to be set next is the second probability variable state) (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) or time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state). A game that predicts the game state to be set next can be executed while letting the player play, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine configured such that different contents can be set as end conditions and time-saving end conditions, information for indicating the contents of the currently set conditions may be configured to be capable of executing a notification performance capable of informing the player. By constructing in this manner, information for predicting the timing at which each condition can be established and the contents of each set condition can be given to the player, so that the player can be interested in the information performance to be executed and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the above, the termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation has been described as the termination condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol, but without being limited to this, for example, the lottery (dropping lottery) for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state can be executed separately from the special symbol jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery), and the termination condition can be established when the fall lottery is won. Even in this case, the winning probability of the drop lottery and the number of execution times of the drop lottery during the period in which the special pattern lottery is executed once can be changed so that the easiness of establishment of the termination condition in the high probability state of the special pattern can be made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

<Regarding the function (limit function) that sets the upper limit for the period in which the high probability state can be set continuously>
A high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as a probability state of a special pattern, and a high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as a probability state of a normal pattern, respectively, and a game state of a different degree of advantage can be set according to the set probability state. By providing a function (limit function) for forcibly setting a low-probability state), it is possible to prevent excessive setting of a game state advantageous to a player and execution of a game excessively advantageous to the player.

In a game machine having such a limit function, the activation condition of the limit function may be changed according to the established limit setting condition. Specifically, based on the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, either the first activation condition under which the limit function is easily activated or the second activation condition under which the limit function is more difficult to activate than the first activation condition may be selected and set.

Specifically, in a gaming machine having a probability variable limit function that sets an upper limit to the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously and forcibly sets the low probability state of the special symbol when the upper limit is reached, the upper limit until the variable probability limit function is activated can be set differently according to the jackpot type. When the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "5 times", and when the second jackpot type different from the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "3 times." , so that the activation condition can be set.

By constructing in this way, the length of the advantageous game period in which the game can be continued and executed in a game state advantageous to the player can be changed according to the value set as the activation condition based on the set jackpot type.

In the above example, the limit function (probability variable limit function) for the high probability state of the special symbol was explained, but without being limited to this, the limit function (shorter time limit function) for the high probability state of the normal symbol The above-described contents may be applied, or the above-mentioned contents may be combined and applied to each limit. Furthermore, for a game machine having a game specification in which a low probability state can be a game state more advantageous to a player than a high probability state as the probability state of the pattern type, a limit function may be provided for setting an upper limit to the number of times the low probability state is continuously set and forcibly setting the high probability state when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above-described example, the above-described limit function is used for the purpose of suppressing the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may be used for other purposes. For example, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times a game state (low-probability state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set in succession, and forcibly sets a game state (high-probability state) that is advantageous to the player when the upper limit is reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

<Regarding a configuration that can execute a winning game based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game can be executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Another execution opportunity may be provided as an execution opportunity for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, for example, a ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a variable means that performs an opening operation in a variable pattern that can be changed between a first state and a second state different from the first state when an operation condition is established based on the ball entering the ball entrance means, and a ball that is easier to enter when the variable means is changed to the first state than when changed to the second state. A configuration having two ball entering means, a specific area through which a ball entering the second ball entering means can pass, and a big winning game executing means capable of executing a big winning game based on the passage of the ball into the specific area, that is, a game machine configured so that the execution opportunity of the big winning game is established based on the passage of the ball through the specific area (so-called two-type specification). With this configuration, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined by the behavior of the ball entering the second ball entering means, so the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball.

In addition, in such a two -kind play machine, it may be configured so that the operation condition is established based on the ball entering the above -described means, or the operation lottery is performed based on the ball in the ball in the case of the ball, and the operation condition may be established when the operation lottery is elected. The ball can always be established by the ball entering the ball, making it easier for the players to be interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, even if a ball enters the ball-entering means, the operation condition is not satisfied unless the ball is won in the operation lottery.

Further, in the above-described two-spec game machine, a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path capable of passing through the specific area and a second flow path having a difficulty in passing through the specific area compared to the first flow path are provided as flow paths for balls entering the second ball-entering means, and a distribution means capable of distributing a ball that has entered the second ball-entering means to any of the plurality of flow paths is provided. It may be configured to be variable.

By constructing in this way, the establishment degree of the execution opportunity of the big win game can be changed according to the distribution situation of the distribution means, so that the player can be interested in the timing when the ball entering the second ball entering means reaches the distribution means.

As described above, in a gaming machine that has a configuration that can make the degree of execution of the jackpot gaming depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, it may be configured so that a certain operation is always executed after the power is turned on the pachinko machine 10 as the content of the distribution operation of the distribution means. Based on the establishment of the criteria or the entry of the ball in the second pitching means, it may be configured to be constantly executed.

Further, the contents of the distribution operation of the distribution means may be varied according to the establishment conditions. For example, according to the type of winning in the case of winning the operation lottery, any one of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a first distribution operation content in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a second distribution operation content in which the ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first distribution operation content may be determined, and the distribution means may be operated.

In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called mixed specification of one type and two types) configured so that the opportunity to execute a big win game can be established both when a special symbol lottery is won and when a ball passes through a specific area, the execution period of the big win game being executed can be extended by the ball passing through the specific area during the big win game executed based on the special symbol lottery winning, in other words, the big win executed based on the special symbol lottery winning. It may be configured such that the big win game being executed can be continued without being terminated in the middle by passing the ball through the specific area during the game. That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the big winning game executed based on the winning of the special symbol lottery, the big winning game being executed may not be extended (forcibly terminated).

By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in both the result of the special symbol lottery and the behavior of the ball flowing down toward the specific area.

<Regarding the configuration for changing the falling direction of the ball>
In addition to the nail member used in each of the above-described embodiments, i.e., a member capable of giving a change in the downward flow direction of the balls within a range that does not oppose the direction of gravity, means for moving the balls in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., upward direction) may be provided as a configuration for changing the direction in which the balls flow down the game area formed on the game board 13 formed in the pachinko machine 10. For example, an electric drive source or other movement energy of the balls may be provided. may be used to move (eg, raise) the sphere in a direction (eg, upward direction) different from the direction of gravity.

By configuring in this way, the direction of movement of the ball flowing down the game area can be set in various directions including directions different from the direction of gravity, so that the movement of the ball with unexpectedness can be provided to the player who watches the behavior of the ball. In addition, since it is possible to move (raise) the ball which has reached the vicinity of the most downstream of the game area, i.e., the ball which has not entered the ball entrance where a privilege is given to the player, to the upstream side of the game area, the player can have expectations for the behavior of one ball until the end.

Furthermore, for example, in a game machine which is configured to provide a gate member through which a ball can pass in a game area and to give a predetermined privilege when a ball passes through the gate member, it is preferable to provide a moving means in an area where the ball can reach after passing through the gate member, and to discharge the ball above the gate member by the moving means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a plurality of benefits can be given to the player with one ball.

Further, the moving means described above may be provided in an area (for example, an internal area of the winning device that is opened during a winning game) in which a ball is likely to enter during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). With this configuration, it is possible to raise the balls inside the winning device. For example, in a gaming machine that is configured to allow balls to pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game to give an advantageous privilege to a player, the balls that have won a prize in the winning device in a round prior to the specific round are raised by the moving means to stay there for a predetermined period of time, and can pass through the specific area during the specific round according to the timing at which the accumulated balls are discharged. It becomes possible.

Thus, a moving means may be used to cause the sphere to stay within a specified area for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.

<Regarding the structure that acts on the entrance of the ball to the ball entrance to open another ball entrance>
A first actuation opening into which a game ball can enter, and a first actuation member acting upon entry of a game ball into the first actuation opening to operate in a first state in which the game ball is likely to enter the first actuation opening are provided, and the first actuation member acts upon entry of a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls into the first actuation opening to operate into a second state in which entry of the game ball into the first actuation opening is more difficult than in the first state. configured to

A second operating member is provided which acts upon the game ball entered into the first operating port entering into a specific region and operates to a third state in which the game ball can enter the second operating port different from the first operating port. The second operating member is configured to operate to a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter the second operating port than in the third state when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls enter the second operating port.

With this configuration, the second operating member operates to the third state based on the entry of the game ball into the first operating port, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second operating port, and in this state, the second operating member operates to the fourth state by allowing one game ball to enter the second operating port. Then, the first operating member makes it possible to enter the game ball again into the first operating port in the first state, thereby operating the second operating member again to the third state and allowing the game ball to enter the second operating port.

More specifically, when a game ball is entered into the first operating port while the first operating member is in the second state, a maximum of four balls can be entered into the operating port (first operating port, second operating port). Further, a first winning lottery (a lottery of a first normal symbol) is executed based on the fact that the game ball that entered the second operation port entered the second specific area, and if the result of the first winning lottery is a win (probability of winning about 1/2), the first normal electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the first variable ball entering means is opened until the first closing condition (e.g., 5.8 seconds has elapsed, or four wins) is established (first To change the entry of a game ball into a variable entry means to an allowable state. Then, based on the fact that the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means enters the third specific area where the ball can be entered, a second winning lottery (second normal symbol lottery) is executed, and when the result of the second winning lottery is a win (probability of winning about 1/1), the second normal electric function capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the second variable ball entering means is opened until the second closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds has passed or four winning) is established ( The game ball entry into the second variable ball entry means is changed to an allowable state. Then, based on the fact that the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means has entered the fourth specific area where the ball can be entered, a third winning lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and when the result of the third winning lottery is winning (probability of winning is about 1/1), the third normal electric function capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the third variable ball entering means is opened until the third closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds has passed or 10 winning) is established ( It is preferable that the configuration is such that the entry of the game ball to the third variable entry means is variable to an allowable state.

In this case, the maximum winning number of game balls that can be entered into each operating hole based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating hole is "4", which is obtained by multiplying the maximum winning number of "2" into the first operating hole by the maximum winning number (1) of the second operating hole that can be won every time a game ball is entered into the first operating hole. The number of game balls that can be entered into each operating hole during the period until a winning game (a winning game using a plurality of normal electric accessories) is executed based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating hole is the maximum number of winnings, that is, the number of winnings required until the winning game is executed once (the number of balls entering the first operating hole "1" and the number of balls entering the second operating hole "1" added " 2”), or the maximum winning number to the first operating opening may be calculated by adding a value obtained by dividing the maximum winning number to the first operating opening by the maximum winning number to the second operating opening that can be won each time the game ball is made to enter the first operating opening.

The winning game may be terminated when the maximum number of winning prizes reaches a predetermined limit number, and based on the satisfaction of the switching condition, the maximum winning number calculated when determining whether or not the limit number has been reached may be switched from among the values (maximum winning number) calculated by the above-described various calculation formulas (maximum winning number). If the switched value has not reached the limit number, the winning game may be extended until the maximum winning number after switching reaches the limit number.

In other words, by using various calculation formulas that can vary the value after calculation, the maximum number of winning prizes for each operating opening is defined so that the number of game balls that can be awarded to a plurality of operating openings in a series of game flows becomes a limited number when a game ball enters the first operating opening. You may comprise so that a winning game may be performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the content of the winning game (total number of wins to each operation port and each variable ball entry means) according to the specified calculation formula.

Further, the value of the maximum number of prizes to be won may be changed according to the conditions. For example, when the first condition is satisfied, the maximum number of prizes to be won for the first operation opening may be changed from "2" to "3", and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the maximum number of prizes to be won for the first operation opening may be changed from "2" to "1". By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the contents of the winning game (the game in which the game ball is entered into each operating hole and the variable ball entry means) to be executed when the game ball enters the first operating hole according to the condition to be established, so it is expected that the advantageous condition for the player (establishment condition that the total number of prize balls given during the winning game is set to increase) is established and that the winning game is executed in the state where the advantageous condition is established. It is possible to play a game while

<Regarding game machines that can set multiple levels of settings>
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided in multiple stages, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a variable-probability state) can be set to any one of a plurality of steps (for example, 6 steps). Instead of or in addition to the combinations of the jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is achieved according to settings may be implemented. That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big win may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the big win is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) a disadvantageous game state (such as a normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In the setting 6, when a big win is achieved, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of setting 6, which is the most advantageous, is extremely high, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In place of or in addition to these, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot games during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot type can be easily determined (decided rate increases) with specific settings. In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probabilities of big wins in accordance with the setting, in the low-probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the variable probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is disadvantageous to the player. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of game machine in which the number of winning balls tends to increase as the number of times of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of awarded balls tends to increase more than the number of fired game balls) in the variable probability state. More specifically, for example, the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won, and by applying it to a game machine of a type where the variable probability state gives a small win with a high probability, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with set values in a plurality of stages, by changing the set set values, a configuration other than the configuration in which the probability of winning (big win, small win, etc.) by special symbol lottery is changed may be used. high probability state), and a specific period is set as the period during which the second game state continues, for example, a period until the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times, or a period until a predetermined end lottery (so-called drop lottery) is won. It may be configured such that the specific period during which the second game state continues is likely to be longer than in the case of the second game state.

With such a constitution, the winning frequency of the special symbol lottery can be varied according to the set value by varying the length of continuation of the second game state without using the configuration for changing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery according to the set value.

In the above-described example, in a pachinko machine provided with multiple stages of set values, set values that are advantageous to the player and set values that are disadvantageous to the player can be set regardless of the game situation. A set value advantageous to the player and a set value disadvantageous to the player may be set in at least one of the game situations (a game situation in which a trick is executed and a game situation in which a small winning game is executed). The contents of the game set corresponding to each set value may be defined so that the set value of is more advantageous to the player in a predetermined game situation other than the specific game situation.

By constructing in this way, absolute advantages and disadvantages are eliminated for the set values, and the degree of relative advantage of each set value can be switched according to the game situation to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game regardless of what kind of set values are set.

Also, the player who grasps the set value can be expected to play the game in a game situation in which the set value is relatively more advantageous than other set values. That is, it is possible to set a different game situation as the game situation desired by the player according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that does not cause the player to quickly become bored.

In the above example, the configuration aimed at varying the player's degree of advantage according to the set value has been described, but the configuration may be such that multiple stages of set values are provided for other purposes. For example, without changing the degree of advantage to the player, the game process until a privilege corresponding to the degree of advantage is given to the player may be configured to differ according to the set value. In the machine 10, the length of the predetermined period may be varied according to the set value so that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot within the predetermined period does not differ (not greatly differ) depending on the set value. For example, when the set value "1" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/10 (probability of winning the jackpot during the particular period is about 65%) can be executed during the specified period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, and the set value "6" is set. When it is set, during a specific period until the special pattern lottery is executed 9 times, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/9 (probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is about 65%) can be executed.

By constructing in this way, even when the big winning probability of the special pattern lottery is changed according to each set value, only the game content can be changed without greatly changing the degree of advantage to the player. Therefore, the player can be allowed to play various games.

Moreover, it is preferable to configure (change) the above-described set values in multiple stages as part of the processing (initial setting processing) based on power-on of the pachinko machine. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on, so that, for example, it is possible to make it difficult for a player during a game to illegally operate the setting values.

Other timing may be used as the timing at which the set value can be set (changed). For example, the currently set value may be changed to a different set value (a set value disadvantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in the game played on the pachinko machine) exceeds the upper limit, or the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine may be changed to a different set value. Based on the fact that the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls used in the game on the co-machine does not exceed the lower limit, the set value currently set may be changed to a different set value (set value advantageous to the player). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the value (AN) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the command for the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (AN) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 b in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by one. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times the voice lamp controller 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced, so that the control load on the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of winnings to the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to four times. In addition, the number of reserved balls to be changed based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by numbers, or in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the four divided areas.

Further, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the pattern as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying the pattern in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but includes, for example, an effect display in which one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern, by variously displaying actions or changing display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third design. Further, each display mode may be set by using common image data of the display control device 114, for example, so that the player can hardly distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game state, but without being limited to this, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Also, a left-handed game may be executed during the time saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, by which the player presses down to determine that the operation means has been operated. or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for changing the performance mode of the performance performed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for performance are provided, output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of operation means for performance can be centrally managed, so that the mode of performance for the operation of the player to the operation means for performance can be set smoothly.

The distribution (ratio) of the jackpot type, the number of times of reduction in time after the end of the jackpot, the number of times of variable probability (ASAT number), the probability of jackpots, the probability of small wins, the probability of normal patterns, the number of prize balls for winning in each winning port, and the numerical values (probabilities) related to game specifications such as the number of winning balls and the number of probability limits are not limited to the numerical values of the above embodiments, and can be arbitrarily changed within the scope of each embodiment. The degree of advantage of the player can be further enhanced by increasing the ratio of the types of advantageous big wins, increasing the number of times of time saving and ASAT, increasing the probability of big wins and small wins, increasing the number of prize balls, and increasing the number of probability variable limits. Conversely, it is possible to suppress excessive advantages for the player by lowering the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, reducing the number of times of time saving and ASAT, lowering the probability of jackpots and small hits, reducing the number of prize balls, and reducing the number of probability variable limits.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a 2-time right product or a 3-time right product) in which the expected value of a big win is increased until a big win state occurs a plurality of times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the big win once. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a winning device having a special area such as an AV zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a variable-probability state) can be set to any one of a plurality of steps (for example, 6 steps). Instead of or in addition to the combinations of the jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is achieved according to settings may be implemented. That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big win may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the big win is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) a disadvantageous game state (such as a normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In the setting 6, when a big win is achieved, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of setting 6, which is the most advantageous, is extremely high, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In place of or in addition to these, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot games during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot type can be easily determined (decided rate increases) with specific settings. In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probabilities of big wins in accordance with the setting, in the low-probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the variable probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is disadvantageous to the player. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of game machine in which the number of winning balls tends to increase as the number of times of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of awarded balls tends to increase more than the number of fired game balls) in the variable probability state. More specifically, for example, the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won, and by applying it to a game machine of a type where the variable probability state gives a small win with a high probability, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting multiple stages of settings, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b referred to when selecting a variation pattern by the main controller 110 is varied based on the set values, the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol is selected by the voice lamp control device 113 is varied, or the type of various selection tables referred to when selecting a detailed effect mode to be executed as a variable effect. It is good to configure so that By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the contents of the variable performance to be executed, so that the variable performance that the player is interested in can be executed.

In addition, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, the effect mode of the "suggest setting" for suggesting the set value is defined as the effect mode of the operation effect so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each set value, and the effect contents of the operation effect executed in the effect mode of the "suggest setting" are configured to differ according to each set value, and other effect modes are provided. It is preferable to configure so that the selection ratio is variable according to the set value. By constructing in this way, by comprehensively grasping the content of the performance when the operation performance of ``setting suggestion'' directly suggesting the set value is executed, and the selection ratio of each performance mode when the other operation performance is executed, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can be interested in various operation performances to be executed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to be different according to the set game state, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value can be set in six stages from the setting "1" that is disadvantageous to the player to the setting "6" that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set. , settings ``4'' to ``6'' are set, and a second game state (time-saving state) more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set, so that the player playing the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value disadvantageous to the player is set can be made to think that the setting value advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and the other game conditions (lottery result of big win, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)) are configured to vary the selection ratio of the presentation mode, thereby preventing the player from easily discriminating the set value set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, the slot machine is a well-known machine in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid pattern line, and the pattern is changed by operating an operation lever, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to provide a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitely displays the identification information, and the variability display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a starting operation means (e.g., an operation lever), and the variability display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, there is provided a display device for confirming and displaying a pattern after variably displaying a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns, and not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. In this case, after putting the specified ball based on the prescribed operation (button operation), the pattern fluctuates due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, the design is stopped due to a predetermined time. A special game is generated as a requirement of a hidden pattern, which gives a prescribed gaming value to the player, and a large amount of balls are paid to the lower plate for the players. If such a game machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game values in the game hall, so that problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game values seen in the current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist can be solved.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means blinds the passed means>
The game machine A1 is characterized by comprising: a path constructing means configured to allow game balls to flow down; and a passing means configured to allow the game balls flowing down the path configuring means to pass therethrough, wherein the path configuring means comprises displaceable means that can be arranged at a position overlapping at least a part of the first game balls on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first game balls flowing down the path configuring means when viewed from a predetermined direction.

There is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that is equipped with a big winning component 300 capable of configuring multiple types of flow-down paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and configured such that the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize by the decorative plate 302 (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the decorative plate 302 makes it difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431. Therefore, it is not possible to cope with the game mode of confirming the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 and continuing or stopping the shooting of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player feels dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the portion related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the path construction means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to construct a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. Therefore, in a state where the first game ball is easy to see, it becomes easy to determine whether to continue or stop the shooting operation of the game ball by confirming the flowing down of the first game ball, so that the part related to the shooting operation of the game ball can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the downflow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting hole) related to a pattern lottery, a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, or other means through which game balls can pass.

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the displaceable means is a second game ball that flows down the upstream side of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the means to be passed, so that the material cost and the design cost can be reduced as compared with the case of preparing other decorative members as the displaceable means.

The game machine A3 in the game machine A2 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, since the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, at least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball in a front view.

In the game machine A3, the back-and-forth path is configured such that, when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path forming means at a shooting interval set in a shooting device, the second game ball hides at least part of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path constructing means while maintaining the shooting interval, the effect of making it difficult to recognize the first game ball by the second game ball can be produced. This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize even in normal times.

A gaming machine A5, wherein in the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-side component of the front-back direction path is arranged closer to the center of the game area than the back-side component.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed, so that the state in which the first game ball is hidden by the second game ball can easily occur. That is, the blindfold effect can be improved.

A gaming machine A6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A5, the front side component is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, a similar blinding effect can be produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the front-rear direction path.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blinding effect can be improved, but when the first game ball and the second game ball are arranged on the line of sight, the effect of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the path forming means comprises a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows the second game ball to be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows the game ball to flow down in the left-right direction upstream of the front-rear direction path.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the game balls flowing down the horizontal path, so that the blinding effect can be produced not only when the player visually recognizes the means to be passed with the line of sight not displaced to the left and right with respect to the means to be passed, but also when the player looks at the means to be passed by shifting the position to the left and right and peeking. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This action is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in a configuration in which one of the left and right sides is closed by the wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to construct a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path constructing means comprises a first flow-down path through which the game ball passes through the passing means in a first mode and a second flow-down path through which the game ball passes in a second mode, and regardless of which flow-down path of the path configuring means the first game ball flows down, at least a part thereof is covered by the predetermined displaceable means so as to be visible.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flow state of the game ball flowing down the path construction means regardless of whether or not the passaged means passes, so that the attention to the game ball flowing down the path construction means can be improved.

Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the ball flows in a different direction, or a mode in which the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the game machine A9 is characterized by comprising branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means, the branching means comprising switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received game ball, and the path configuring means being a game ball whose flow path is divided by the branching means, and the game balls reaching the switching means are configured to flow down the same path in a predetermined section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the game ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same route in a predetermined section, so that it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the flow down of the game ball compared to the case where the game ball reaches the switching means immediately becomes a flow-down mode corresponding to the subsequent flow-down route. As a result, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine A9, the game machine A10 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a protruding portion protruding toward the flowing game ball, and the protruding portion acts on the branching of the game ball in the branching means.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the protruding part can act on the branching of the game ball, so for example, compared to the case where the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body, the durability of the structure can be improved.

In the gaming machine A10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion, and the projecting amount of the first projecting portion and the projecting amount of the second projecting portion are different.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the influence of the first projecting part on the game ball and the influence of the second projecting part on the game ball can be made different according to the flow-down mode of the game ball. As a result, while using the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, it is possible to cause the action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means appeals to the introduction to the passed means>
The game machine B1 is characterized in that it comprises a path constructing means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passaged means configured to allow the game ball that has flowed down the path constructing means to pass through, the path constructing means comprising a predetermined portion constituting an upstream side of the passed means, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and configured to be able to guide the game ball to the passed means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 capable of constructing a plurality of types of flow-down paths for a game ball toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize by a decorative plate 302, and depending on the difference in the state of the big winning component 300, a game ball flows down at a position deviated from the decorative plate 302 or hidden behind the decorative plate 302. , see JP-A-2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a highly visible game ball flowing down from the decorative plate 302 is configured to rather deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and a part of the game ball flowing down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 is guided to the ball detection hole 431, so that the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player's attention to the game ball tends to be wasted. could be dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the manner in which the game ball flows after attracting attention worthy of attention.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the game ball flowing down the predetermined part arranged on the conspicuous side is configured to be guided to the passing means, it is possible to associate the improvement degree of attention to the game ball with the passing of the game ball through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion will pass through the means to be passed.

Further, by constructing in this way, the player's line of sight can be easily guided by the game ball flowing down the predetermined part, and the possibility of the player missing that the game ball is heading to the means to be passed can be reduced.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting hole) related to a pattern lottery, a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, or other means through which game balls can pass.

In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the display device side, which is easy to catch the player's eye, or on the winning opening side or the starting opening side, or on the front side (near side) where it is easy for the player to visually recognize, or on the stage side (mainly, the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where game balls are temporarily retained) as a part where the probability of entering a specific ball entrance is remarkably high. The operation button side, the range where the game ball that deviates from the ball entrance flows down (the range where players are frustrated and follow with their eyes), the bright side for switching between light and dark with light emitting means, and other sides are also acceptable. In addition, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the game machine B1, the path constructing means is provided with a second predetermined part that makes a game ball entering the path constructing means less conspicuous than when the ball is entered, and the predetermined part is arranged on a more conspicuous side than the second predetermined part.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the attention of the game ball when flowing down the predetermined part can be emphasized by lowering the attention in the second predetermined part before the game ball entering the path forming means flows down the predetermined part.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion comprises sections in which game balls flow at different speeds.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the effect of attracting the player's line of sight can be improved compared to the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the game balls.

In the game machine B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the second flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is faster than the first flow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the game ball entering the path forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the predetermined portion includes a section in which the game ball is displaced at different speeds when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, it is possible to configure a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed from a predetermined direction is different regardless of the actual flow speed of the game ball.

It should be noted that the manner in which the displacement speed of the apparent game ball is varied is not limited at all. For example, there may be differences between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-back direction in front view and displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component, displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or meandering manner, or other differences.

A game machine B6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the gaming machine B6 is characterized by comprising introducing means configured to allow a game ball to be introduced into the path configuring means, and wherein the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure both the visibility of the introducing means and the improvement of the attention of the game ball which is highly likely to pass through the passing means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the game machine B7 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured so that the game ball on the front side of the path constructing means flows down to avoid the line of sight directed to the passed means or the predetermined portion.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to flow down on the front side of the path configuring means, and the flow-down path of the game ball is provided with the avoiding means for avoiding the line of sight directed to the means to be passed, so that it is possible to secure both the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the means to be passed.

It should be noted that the manner in which the game ball is flowed under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or it may flow down avoiding the front position of the last position where the player can see the game ball heading for the means to be passed as a reference, or it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned final position and the position of the player's eyes.

In the gaming machine B7, the path constructing means comprises a receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the flowing game balls can be received and a non-accepting state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and the receiving state changing means is configured to be capable of guiding the game balls that have reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state to the side of the path configuring means in the state change from the receiving state to the non-accepting state.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowed down after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight directed to the means to be passed.

The game machine B9 is characterized in that, in the game machine B7 or B8, the game machine B9 is characterized in that it is arranged above the passed means in a front view and comprises a partition means for partitioning a game area, and the partition means is configured so that a game ball can flow down left and right outside.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7 or B8, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the means to be passed by the dividing means, so that the field of view toward the means to be passed can be easily secured.

In addition, as a mode of a division means, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that constitutes a flow-down surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entrance constituting means that allows a game ball to enter. Further, the dividing means may be a means having a fixed shape (appearance) or a means having a variable shape (appearance).

The game machine B10 in the game machine B9 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and a portion of the dividing means on the receiving state changing means side is configured to easily guide the game balls to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, it is possible to configure such that game balls in the process of being received by the receiving state changing means are pushed into the receiving state changing means by the partitioning means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball slipping sideways while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

For example, as the receiving state changing means, a special winning device having an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on the horizontal axis is assumed, and as the partitioning means, the first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed. A game ball reaching a special winning hole just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often caught between the turning tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the formation direction of the edge (rotating axis direction of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the turning tip of the opening/closing plate, when at least a part of the opening/closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, the game ball after skidding may pass the front position of the means to be passed after dropping to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not drop to the front side.

When the game ball cannot be prevented from falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to dispose the opening/closing plate while avoiding the position of the means to be passed in the front view, so that the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate after skidding, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.

A game machine B11 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B7 to B10, the game balls flowing down the path constructing means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the path constructing means are configured to flow down in a similar flow manner.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B7 to B10, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the number of game balls flowing down the path forming means by making it difficult to distinguish between the game balls that may flow down the route forming means and pass through the means to be passed and the game balls that flow down the front side of the route forming means and do not pass through the means to be passed.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the game balls flowing down near the path construction means whether the game balls are likely to enter the path construction means or difficult to enter.

A gaming machine B12 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, a gaming machine B12 is provided with light-emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B11, the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined part is reflected by light, and it is possible to easily avoid the ball becoming difficult to see.

<Points for securing the length of the path to the V-door while saving space>
A path construction means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball that has flowed down the path construction means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state; Game machine C1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit 75 configured to be movable to the left and right is arranged in the flow-down path of the game ball that entered the second big prize hole 12, and the distribution unit 75 is arranged so that the flow direction of the game ball can be changed. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the short-term operation of the distribution unit 75 is essential to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and ball catching by the distribution unit 75, and some players feel distrustful of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and cannot continue the game with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is lengthened. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distributing part 75 from directly under the second big winning hole 12 to a position near the left and right central part of the game area (near the first big winning hole 10), a long channel length from the second big winning hole 12 to the dividing part 75 can be secured. As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the game ball flow-down path over a wide range from the second big winning hole 12 to the first big winning hole 10, and the degree of freedom in designing the game area is limited in this range. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73 .

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the path constructing means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the path constructing means in the front view is shortened to save space, it is possible to secure a long time for the game ball entering the path constructing means to pass through the passing means.

As a result, the timing at which the state switching means needs to be operated to switch whether or not the game ball enters the passing means can be set after a predetermined time from the entry of the game ball into the path forming means, so that an erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device for switching whether or not the game ball enters the path forming means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, there may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is configured in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path for causing the game ball to flow down along the flow-down path having a forward-backward direction component may be provided.

In the game machine C1, the delay means comprises a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are configured such that the flow-down path toward the front side has a greater acceleration of the game ball flowing down than the flow-down path toward the back side.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, it is possible to ensure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the delay means comprises a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are configured such that the flow-down path toward the front side has a larger acceleration of the game ball flowing down than the flow-down path that flows down while maintaining the front-back position.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing on the near side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the delay means comprises a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are configured such that the game ball passes through a position in front of the means to be passed when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C3, when the game ball is arranged in the front position, visibility in the vicinity of the means to be passed can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.

According to the game machine C5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, at least part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the rear side rather than the game balls on the inner side, the field of vision toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced.

In this case, when the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined flow-down path is short, it is possible to construct a state in which the game balls are always arranged in one of the front positions, so that it is possible to construct a state in which the means to be passed cannot be visually recognized.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the path configuring means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the route constructing means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall compared to the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the path can be improved, and the possibility of clogging of the balls can be reduced compared to the folded path that is folded back at 180 degrees.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, game machine C7 is characterized in that the path construction means comprises a front-rear flow path section extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the lateral width of the path constructing means can be suppressed, so that the pair of path constructing means can be bilaterally symmetrical and configured with the suppressed lateral width.

In any one of game machines C1 to C7, game machine C8 is characterized in that said passing means is arranged obliquely downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of said path constructing means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means can be easily accommodated in the field of vision of the player viewed from the front side.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the path configuring means includes first receiving means configured to be capable of receiving game balls, and second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be capable of receiving game balls, and the game machine C9 is characterized in that profits obtained by the player vary depending on the manner of receiving the game balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be capable of receiving game balls at all times, and furthermore, since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game balls.

It should be noted that the manner of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which game balls are accepted only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are accepted only in the second receiving means, or a mode in which a predetermined number of balls are received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of them are received by the second receiving means. Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means is different, or a mode in which ball entry positions are different.

The game machine C10 is characterized in that, in the game machine C9, a change in the profit obtained by the player occurs depending on whether the game ball is received only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the game ball is received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the player can easily launch the game ball in a predetermined shooting mode by setting the amount of profit that the player can obtain.

It should be noted that the profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the falling game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the falling game ball (distribution of prize balls, winning of a jackpot, changing the game state after the jackpot to a variable state, changing the game state to a normal state (falling), etc.).

A game machine C11 in the game machine C9 or C10, wherein the path construction means is bilaterally symmetrical from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the game machines C9 to C11, the game machine C12 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C9 to C11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that the influence of the player's technical proficiency in shooting game balls on the profit obtained by the player can be reduced.

A game machine C13 characterized in that, in the game machine C12, the mode of state change of said acceptance state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects of the game machine C12, even when the game balls are shot in a fixed shooting mode, the receiving mode of the game balls to the first receiving means and the second receiving means can be changed. As a result, it is possible to adjust the profit that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the acceptance state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the flowing direction of the sphere>
A game machine XA1 comprising: a path configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to change a state between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path configuration means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path configuration means, wherein the state switching means is configured such that a direction of displacement caused by the state change is along a flowing direction of the game ball.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the direction in which the game ball flows down and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning component 300 are substantially perpendicular directions, and the opening/closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the flowing direction of the game ball, by displacing the state switching means while the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling mode of the game ball to change. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the right with the game ball on it, so that the game ball is given a load to rotate in the forward direction of rolling rotation, so that the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left with the game ball riding on it, so that the game ball is given a load to rotate in the opposite direction of rolling rotation, so that the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Further, when the state switching means slides so as to skim the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also the component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction can be applied to the game ball.

Due to the effect on the flow-down mode of the game ball, the flow-down mode of the ball on the state switching means can be variously changed during the opening/closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball can concentrate on the game without getting bored.

Also, the positional relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged to rub against the side of the game ball, or may be arranged to collide against the game ball in the flowing direction.

In the state switching means displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball so that the subsequent introduction of the game ball can be regulated with less resistance.

In the game machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means can be executed while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means can cause the game ball to rotate.

In the game machine XA1 or XA2, the game machine XA3 is characterized in that the state switching means comprises change means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting with the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine XA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XA1 or XA2, the load applied from the game ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load applied to the state switching means can be reduced.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when open and in the second direction when closed>
A path construction means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to change the state between an introduced state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state and to guide the game ball in the second direction in the non-introduced state. Characterized game machine XB1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it protrudes forward, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely when retracted to the rear, and does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of retreating to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) for guiding the downflow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the downflow of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XB1, since the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or the non-introduced state, it is possible to eliminate the need for a special member for guiding the downflow path of the game ball, thereby reducing the number of necessary components (members). As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of game balls in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set laterally with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, in a front view, the difference in direction after the start of guidance by the state switching means can be maximized while only slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guiding portion that causes the guiding action of the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged in a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be arranged in a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball may be switched to a state in which the game ball approaches or easily contacts the guide portion by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide part is arranged on the movable member, it is preferable that the design considers not only the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, when the state switching means is provided with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, providing a wall portion in the shape of a surface (flat surface, curved surface, etc.) inclined with respect to the flowing direction rather than providing a planar wall portion perpendicular to the flowing direction makes it easier to avoid the situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction that causes the game ball to flow backward. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

In the game machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means caused by the load given by the guided game balls.

In the game machine XB1 or XB2, the path construction means includes a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means includes a pair of guide portions capable of receiving game balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide portions are configured symmetrically.

According to the game machine XB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XB1 or XB2, it is possible to complicate the path along which game balls flow. In addition, since the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide portions are configured symmetrically, the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load received by the pair of guide portions from the game ball can be made symmetrical.

As a result, for example, when substantially equal numbers of game balls enter a pair of left and right paths, it is possible to easily uniform the arrangement of the state switching means according to the load received by the guide portion from the game balls.

The gaming machine XB4 in the gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that the state switching means comprises an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in a direction crossing the third direction.

According to the game machine XB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine XB3, the projecting portion can reduce the contact area with other members, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

The game machine XB5 is characterized in that, in the game machine XB3 or XB4, the game machine XB5 is characterized by comprising an abutment means configured to be capable of abutting in the introduced state or the non-introduced state of the state switching means, and by abutting with the abutting means, the lateral displacement of the state switching means can be corrected.

According to the game machine XB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine XB3 or XB4, the load from the game ball can be received from either the left or right direction, so that the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to be disorderly, can be returned in an orderly manner by the action of the abutting means.

<Separation, reversal, combination, and rotation are a series of actions>
A gaming machine D1, comprising displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change a visually recognized surface, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, wherein the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to relatively displace in a predetermined mode of displacement.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 can be rotated multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface seen by the player is the same.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable along with the displacement, it is possible to maintain attention to the displacement means.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by relatively displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member approach and separate from each other with reference to a collective portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate with respect to the collection portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, if only the first displacement is used as the displacement relative to the collecting portion, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member tends to be reduced at the end portion where the distance from the collecting portion is the shortest or the longest, and there is a possibility that the first displacement member and the second displacement member will stop and the performance effect will be reduced.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the game machine D3 is characterized in that the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player can be significantly different before and after the third displacement.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by adsorption or adhesion, and a load associated with the fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load associated with fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, in the case of transmission of driving force by a gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement occurs. If load related to fixation is taken into consideration, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes conspicuous, thereby delaying the displacement timing of the member.

Also, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixation differs depending on the side viewed by the player, the strength of the fixation on the side viewed by the player can be set.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united to make it easy to see as one, and the other surface is loosely united to facilitate relative displacement, making it easy to see.

Further, for example, by configuring the degree of attraction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different.

In addition, the aspect which enables adsorption|suction is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape, or may utilize the attractive force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed so as to use fixing screws, screws, or the like, for example, as the metal portion to be attracted to the magnet.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, the displacement means is displaced in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and in the second displacement mode, after the displacement in the predetermined mode, the displacement means is displaced in the first displacement mode.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the attention to the displacing means at the time of retraction, so that it is possible to relatively increase the attention to the displacing means displaced at the performance position.

In the conventional machine, since the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, it was necessary to rotate in the reverse direction several times again before retracting to the retracted position (outside position of the liquid crystal display area) after projecting to the effect position (position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area). In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to be drawn to the member retreating from the rendering position, which may be regarded as a problem.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, across a plurality of planes, or three-dimensional.

In the game machine D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means comprises release means configured to release the load transmission when the motion resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed depending on the magnitude of the movement resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine D7 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means comprising the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member being configured such that the visibility of the light from the light emission means can be changed depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means can be changed corresponding to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it can be changed between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as if they are integrally emitting light.

A gaming machine D8 characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be capable of detecting whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state.

According to the game machine D8, in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect the state in which the displacement means can be displaced, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with the surrounding structure during displacement.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detection means, by controlling the displacement in a displacement mode including enlargement/reduction after displacing from the performance position to the retracted position to some extent, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to the case of displacing in a displacement mode including enlargement/reduction from the start of displacement when displacing from the performance position to the retracted position.

A gaming machine D9 characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be capable of detecting two or more numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D7, it is possible to reduce the number of detection means. Various modes are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to the change in the motion mode when the motion mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between an attitude in which the surface facing the player side is one side and an attitude in which the side facing the player side is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other. A gaming machine D10 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be indistinguishable when the displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D9, it is possible to maintain a high expectation of the player for the occurrence of the reversal motion regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side.

<Points for changing easily visible surfaces by arranging displacing means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
The game machine E1 is characterized by comprising displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visually recognizable, wherein the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible, depending on the arrangement.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that includes a reversible operation unit 71 and is configured to change the appearance viewed by the player by changing the viewed surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the viewed surface. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the displacing means switches between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to see, so that the line of sight of the player who wants to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a mode along the route of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening is provided for opening the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, a player who visually recognizes the inner side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is arranged closer to the rear side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the central side of the open part, the displacement means can be largely visually recognized on the front side, and when the displacement means is arranged on the edge side of the open part, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that the displacement means includes a plurality of pairs of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in a state in which one pair of the first visible surface and the second visible surface is visible, another pair of the first visible surface and the second visible surface is difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the play machine E1 to the E3, the first visual and second visuals can be visualized to players who can see different characters and figures for players who can see the displacement means by applying different characters and figures for each group. By configuring the visible aspects and the second visual aspects, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displaced means from becoming eliminated.

For example, in the first set, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big win and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second set, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big win and the expectation is high are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface. In this case, even after the displacing means is withdrawn from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the big win by the displacement means can be maintained, so that even a player who looks away from the liquid crystal display device can continue to visually recognize the display of the expectation of the big win.

In addition, the aspect which comprises hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be structured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is configured such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during operation.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to easily avoid the prediction of the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be displayed on the player side during the operation (before confirmation) of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface in the gaming machine E4. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

It should be noted that there is no limitation on the aspect configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to recognize, a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be detachable from each other, and these parts and other parts may be operated in a separated state to make it difficult to recognize, or it may be difficult to recognize by making a relatively dark part by setting the brightness by the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion may be visible, and the other portion may be configured to face the back side so that the other portion is not visible, or may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other portion are visible at the same time but are visible with a shift in arrangement.

The game machine E6 is characterized in that the game machine E5 is provided with an opening for opening the displacement means to be visible, and the switching operation is executed in a state in which the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and to improve the attention to the switching action.

In the game machine E5 or E6, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side and the other part faces the side different from the front side during the switching operation.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5 or E6, the first visible surface can be made difficult to recognize during operation by making part of the first visible surface visible during operation and making the entire surface invisible.

A gaming machine E8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the gaming machine E8 comprises second displacement means configured to be capable of shielding at least part of a line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state for allowing the first visible surface to be visually recognized together with the second displacement means.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E7, the degree of freedom in designing the performance position of the displacement means can be improved by configuring at least part of the second visible surface by the second displacement means to make it difficult to visually recognize.

A game machine E9 in any one of game machines E1 to E8, characterized in that the displacement means is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface in accordance with the displacement.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the easily visible surface can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the change amount of the player's line of sight.

A game machine E10 characterized in that, in the game machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of the game machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the attitude of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E9 or E10, wherein the gaming machine E9 or E10 comprises auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means in the first state, and the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means in the second state.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of the game machine E9 or E10, it is possible to configure a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means and viewed integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separately viewed, and a plurality of impressions that the displacement means gives to the player can be configured.

In addition, the aspect of an auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means whose arrangement is fixed, or movable means.

In the game machine E11, the game machine E12 is characterized in that the auxiliary means can switch between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of the game machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the visible mode with respect to the number of members.

<Points where the ratio of the amount of displacement of the displacing means and the amount of displacement of the arranging means at the same point in time differs between sections>
A game machine F1 comprising: displacing means configured to be displaceable; disposing means for disposing a first portion on the displacing means; and supporting means for supporting the second portion of the disposing means, wherein the supporting means is configured to be able to control the disposition of the second portion with reference to the first portion during displacement of the displacing means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating accessory 211, and is configured to rotate the rotating accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated during the tilting displacement of the base arm 220, there is a possibility that the mechanism may malfunction.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the disposing means is supported by the displacing means and the supporting means at least at two points, and the two supporting points are configured to be relatively displaced during displacement of the displacing means, and the disposing means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacing means while stably supporting the disposing means. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

In addition, the aspect of a support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means so as to restrict its displacement, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be capable of displacing a first section and a second section, the support means includes a first range for supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range for supporting the second section when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the direction in which the second section is displaced in the first range and the direction in which the second section is displaced in the second range are different. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being configured differently.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arrangement means can be varied, and since the support means is configured to allow a change in the direction of displacement of the second portion, even if the direction of displacement of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the arrangement means can be smoothed.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the support means comprises a restricting portion for restricting the displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be restricted at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first range and the second range. Therefore, when the second portion is displaced from the large displacement side toward the small displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first range and the second range.

The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the second portion is pulled or a mode in which the second portion is pushed may be used.

It should be noted that the mode of the restricting section is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be configured to switch the direction of displacement of the second portion.

In the game machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the amount of displacement of the arrangement means relative to the displacement means in the second section is smaller than the amount of relative displacement of the arrangement means to the displacement means in the first section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section in which the amount of displacement of the disposing means relative to the displacing means is small at the mid-displacement position of the displacing means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a position where the displacing means and the disposing means are easily visually recognized in an integrated manner in addition to the displacement terminal position of the displacing means.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion is variable.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arrangement means on the support means side can be changed.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement velocity of the second portion at the end of displacement.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and it is possible to easily stop the arrangement means early at the end of the displacement.

Note that the technique for preventing the second portion from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of the displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used, or a method of restricting the displacement of the second portion by constructing a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion when the first portion is stopped may be used.

Further, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the method of increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion may be employed. For example, a magnetic force or the like may be applied at the end of the displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or an urging force such as a coil spring may be used to improve the displacement resistance.

In the game machine F6, the supporting means is configured such that a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion and a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of displacement intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the return displacement (bound) of the second portion when the first portion stops can be reduced by the support means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion.

A gaming machine F8 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, supported means displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means is displaced by a displacement amount corresponding to a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F7, a complicated performance can be executed by the supported means displaced together with the arrangement means.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, it may be displaced so as to run parallel to the disposing means on a predetermined plane on which the disposing means is displaced, or may be displaced in a manner different from the displacing manner of the disposing means (e.g., sliding displacement manner on a predetermined plane) at a position away from the predetermined plane on which the disposing means is displaced (e.g., a rotational displacement manner about a predetermined axis).

It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a posture change, or a displacement while maintaining the posture.

In the game machine F8, the game machine F9 is characterized in that, while the first part is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second part has a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first part.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8, while the first part is being displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second part with respect to the first part can return and change (for example, increase and then decrease). Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the displacement amount of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second part.

A gaming machine F10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the disposing means is the same as the displacement speed of the displacement means.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means interposed therebetween. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F10, the game machine F11 is characterized in that the disposition means includes posture change means for changing the posture so as to switch the side facing the player side between the first face and the second face as the player displaces itself, and the posture change means is configured so that the first face or the second face faces the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the end of the displacement.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F10, the player can grasp that the second part has reached the end of displacement by turning the first face or the second face of the attitude changing means toward the player side, so that the end of the performance operation by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines F1 to F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that it is configured such that an electrical wiring is inserted through the second portion and into the disposing means, the electrical wiring is disposed therein and is fixed to the second portion, the disposing means includes an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with a peripheral portion formed therearound.

According to the game machine F12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F11, it is possible to avoid contact of the electric wiring with the surrounding portion.

The arranging means may be configured as means for uniting the plurality of members when the second portion is composed of a plurality of members, or may be configured as means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion when another member is provided in the second portion.

<Characteristic AA group>
first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; second information acquisition means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; In a gaming machine having second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of second identification information, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means. and selectable performance mode selection means, wherein the performance mode selection means selects the performance mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AA1, since the performance mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied depending on the number of the stored second information, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information that can be executed thereafter, and even when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, the player continues to be interested in the subsequent game, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the game machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the performance mode executing means executes the performance mode when the specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to store the second information, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In the game machine AA1 or AA2, the presentation mode is set in a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of the second information stored.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA1 or AA2, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable over the dynamic display period of the second identification information which is continuously performed a plurality of times, there is an effect that the second dynamic display mode a plurality of times can be shown as one dynamic display to improve interest.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established. and advance determination means capable of determining in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, wherein the performance mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific performance mode at least based on the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AA1 to AA3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily discriminating the establishment of a specific condition which is a trigger for facilitating the acquisition of the second information, so there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristics AB group> (Effect variable depending on the number of special figures 2 pending during the execution of the variation pattern)
first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; second information acquisition means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; In a gaming machine having second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of second identification information, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during a dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means. and selectable performance mode selection means, wherein the performance mode selection means selects the performance mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines aim to increase interest in games by determining an effect mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning hole, and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AB1, since the performance mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, not only the result of the first determination but also the information about the possibility of executing the second determination can be determined from the performance mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine AB1, the rendering mode selection means selects the rendering mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1, since the performance mode is selected according to the number of the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of second information stored during the execution, there is an effect that various performance modes can be executed.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the performance mode is a performance related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information to be executed after that.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, when the second information is stored, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the performance mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information is started.

In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established. and advance determination means capable of determining in advance whether the specific condition is established before the establishment of the specific condition, wherein the performance mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific performance mode at least based on the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AB1 to AB3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily discriminating establishment of a specific condition, which is a trigger for facilitating the acquisition of the second information, so there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristic AC group> (Use special figure 1 variation effect as a pseudo effect of special figure 2 variation)
first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; second determination means for performing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; first privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; and based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result. Second privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player, first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the execution of the first determination, and second effect executing means for performing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination, wherein the second effect executing means has at least a predetermined specific condition. The game machine AC1 is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect when established.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the first effect can be executed as the effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect executing means is capable of executing the second effect of a effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC1, the second effect using the display mode showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination can be executed, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect executing means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group> (Double display including probability variation even for normal hits)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying a plurality of first identification patterns on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying the combination to indicate the first determination result by the first determination means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination; 2. A gaming machine comprising: dynamic display means; and privilege granting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when the first identification symbols are stop-displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific first determination result on the display means or when the second identification symbols are statically displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, wherein the privilege provision means is stop-displayed in the combination of the identification patterns corresponding to the first specific combination among the specific combinations. a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is displayed, the gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege to be given by the privilege giving means; The game machine AD1 is characterized in that the first identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination after displaying a plurality of ready-to-win display modes in which the patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either the first specific combination or the second specific combination.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the benefits to be given after that are different depending on the type of displayed symbols, thereby improving the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that some of the patterns constituting a combination that does not give a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player are stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game is reduced before the result is reported.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

According to the game machine AD1, when identification patterns are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through a plurality of ready-to-win display modes, so that there is an effect that the expectation that both the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the combination corresponding to the second privilege are displayed can be kept for a long time, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD1, even in the specific period when the first privilege is determined by the determining means, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display mode, so that even when the first determination is executed in the specific period, there is an effect that it is possible to easily have an expectation for the second privilege to be given.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when the specific period is set, dynamically displays one second identification pattern and after displaying the special multiple ready-to-win display mode in which the remaining identification patterns are statically displayed in a combination that can be any combination of two or more different second specific combinations, the second identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination. A game machine AD3 characterized in that it is displayed by.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD2, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given when the specific second determination result is obtained during the specific period.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control at probability variable hit)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and a game state set after the execution of the privilege game when the game ball passes through the specific area. In a gaming machine having a setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state until an end condition is satisfied, and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the game state set after execution of the privilege game when the privilege game ends, the suggestion mode comprises a combination of a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the advantageous game state are suggested. The gaming machine AE1 is characterized in that the second suggestive mode for playing is composed of a suggestive mode configured in the same period.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a win, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during the winning game of a specific type, the variable ball entry area is changed to the state where the game ball can be entered and the state where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the game ball enters the winning game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of winning game is executed, the game ball may not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. There was a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load.

According to the game machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation of the period for displaying the suggestion mode and set the mode suggested by the state of the ball entering the specific area, thereby facilitating the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game and reducing the control load.

In the gaming machine AE1, the gaming machine AE2 comprises: suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means corresponding to the type of the privilege game to be executed when the privilege game is executed; and switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode among the suggestion modes set when a game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific privilege game to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific privilege game. .

According to the game machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE1, even if the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game, the suggestion mode can be switched to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode, so that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be performed.

<Feature AF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot)
determining means capable of executing determination; privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result; privilege game type determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting the period.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set according to the type of privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AF2 is characterized in that the game machine AF1 is provided with specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1, the specific performance can be executed in different periods set according to the type of the privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AF3 is characterized by comprising a period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game in the game machine AF1 or AF2.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AG group> (The ED period is variable depending on whether or not there is a V prize)
determining means capable of executing determination; privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result; a specific area through which a game ball can pass during execution of the privilege game; game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area during execution of the privilege game; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game, and the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set different lengths of the specific period depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, an effect mode for informing the result of a lottery based on a lottery result or the like is determined as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole, and by executing the determined effect mode, the interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AG1, different lengths of specific periods can be set depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AG2, gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing state of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.

According to the game machine AG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic AH group> (Restriction control of button operation)
In a game machine having display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and benefit providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, an operation means for a player to operate, a setting execution means for executing a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information. a regulating means for regulating the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means when a specific condition is established in the game machine AH1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the result of the lottery is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol variation period of a predetermined period, and various performances (variation performances) are executed using the period (special symbol variation period) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result, so that the player does not get tired of the game early. Among them, there is a configuration in which a plurality of performance modes are prepared in advance, and the mode of the variation performance executed during the special symbol variation period is varied for each performance mode.

In the game machine constructed in this manner, different variable performances can be provided to the player by switching the performance mode, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early due to the provision of only the same variable performance. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily switch the production mode by operating an operable operation means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249877). In such a game machine, the player himself/herself can select the most interesting performance mode among a plurality of performance modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early due to the execution of the variable performance with little interest. In addition, since the player himself/herself needs to operate the operation means in order to switch the production mode, the interest in the game can be improved.

However, as described above, if the player can switch the performance mode at any timing by operating the operating means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, or when a short period of variation is set as the special symbol variation period, the switching of the performance mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, so there is a problem that the player's motivation to operate the operation means is reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation of players to play games.

According to the game machine AH1, it is possible to restrict the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means when the specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that the occurrence of trouble due to the operation of the operating means can be suppressed.

The gaming machine AH1 is characterized by: dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until an end condition is satisfied;

According to the game machine AH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH1, it is possible to restrict the execution of setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that it is possible to suppress the player's difficulty in grasping the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine AH3 is characterized in that the game machine AH1 or AH2 has a performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means.

According to the game machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH1 or AH2, different performance modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

AH4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines AH1 to AH3 has a specific setting means capable of executing a specific setting, and the regulating means is configured to be able to execute the specific setting by the specific setting means without causing the setting executing means to execute the setting based on the operation of the operation means when the specific condition is set.

According to the game machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AH1 to AH3, even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operation means during the period when the specific condition is established, the specific setting is executed, so that the operation of the operation means can be made a meaningful action to the player who has operated the operation means by providing the operation due to the operation of the operation means.

In the game machine AH4, the game machine AH5 is characterized by having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting information of the identification information stop-displayed before the identification information is stop-displayed based on the specific setting.

According to the game machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH4, when a specific condition is satisfied, the information of the identification information to be stop-displayed can be identified by a suggestive performance before the stop display, and when the specific condition is satisfied, various performances are executed by operating the game machine AH5, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored early.

<Characteristic AI group> (Information of advantageous period across multiple game states)
A game having a determining means capable of executing determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state as a game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and different from the second game state. In the machine, the game state setting means can set the second game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, can set the third game state when a first setting condition is satisfied in the state in which the second game state is set, can set the first game state when a second setting condition different from the first setting condition is satisfied in the state in which the third game state is set, and the game state setting means can The game machine AI1 is characterized by having an advantageous period determining means for determining an advantageous period based on a period until the second set condition is established when the second game state is set, and an informing means capable of notifying the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period deciding means.

Conventionally, when an advantageous game state (for example, time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the number of special symbol fluctuations). Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are some that can set a plurality of state types as an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and as the advantageous game state, there are some that can set a first advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) and a second advantageous game state (for example, a variable state) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In the game machine configured in this way, for example, when the first advantageous game state (for example, time saving state) is set, it is possible to inform the player of the period (remaining period) during which the first advantageous game state continues, but there is a problem that it is not possible to inform which game state is set after the first advantageous game state is finished. In other words, when the first advantageous game state ends, the player cannot grasp whether a game state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game state is set or whether a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous game state is set, and it is difficult for the player to understand what the player should aim at during the first advantageous game state, and the desire to play is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the enjoyment of a game by increasing the willingness of a player to play the game.

According to the game machine AI1, when the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set, the notifying means informs the advantageous period determined based on the period until the first game state is set again, so even in the game machine having a plurality of game states more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the period during which the game state more advantageous than the first game state is set can be grasped. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AI1, the game machine AI2 is characterized by having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means in a state in which the informing means informs that it is the advantageous period.

According to the game machine AI2, it is possible to suggest the currently set game state while informing the player of the advantageous period until the first game state is set, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the suggestion performance to be executed and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the game machine AI2, the suggestive effect execution means can also execute a past suggestive effect for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means in a state in which the notifying means informs that it is the advantageous period.

According to the gaming machine AI3, the game state set in the past can be suggested to the player by the suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the content of the past suggestive performance, or to analyze the past game content during the advantageous period, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AI2 or AI3, the notifying means can display a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period on the display means, and the suggestive effect executing means can suggest a currently set game state or a game state set in the past by varying the remaining period display mode.

According to the game machine AI4, since the suggestive performance regarding the game state is executed by varying the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, the suggestive performance can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player who pays attention to the remaining period of the advantageous period, and the effect of enhancing the performance effect is obtained.

In any of the game machines AI1 to AI4, the game machine AI5 is characterized by having a second suggestive effect means capable of suggesting the timing at which the first set condition can be established in a state where the notifying means informs that it is the advantageous period.

According to the game machine AI5, the player can predict the timing at which the game state is switched during the advantageous period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous period.

The game machine AI6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines AI1 to AI5 has an advantage informing means capable of informing the player of a game state advantageous to the player, out of the second game state and the third game state.

According to the game machine AI 6, since the player can grasp the superiority or inferiority of a plurality of game states set during the advantageous period, the player can be interested by predicting which game state the currently set game state is.

<Characteristic AJ group> (1 symbol row is variably displayed by multiple symbol display control)
In a gaming machine comprising: display means for displaying suggestive information capable of suggesting a determination result; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means; and award granting means capable of awarding a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is composed of a first symbol row composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and a plurality of symbols different from the first symbol row. The game machine AJ1 is characterized in that at least a second pattern row composed of a series of different pattern rows is set, and the dynamic display means is configured to dynamically display the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in the first direction.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which a third symbol is variably displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, various performances (variation performances) are executed during the variable display of the third pattern, and the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play the game while expecting a big win. Further, in a general game machine, one pattern row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9), and a plurality (for example, three) of the pattern rows are used to perform a symbol variation display, and when a predetermined third symbol is stop-displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol row other than the one pattern row, a performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) that increases the expectation of winning a big win is performed. In this way, by executing the variable performance for suggesting whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot while the third pattern is variably displayed by using a plurality of pattern rows, the degree of expectation of the winning of the jackpot can be gradually raised for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the third symbol is variably displayed for each symbol row without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row, there are only variations such as varying the speed of the variable display of each symbol row, varying the direction of variation of each symbol row, and varying the size of each symbol row displayed. There was

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine AJ1, the first pattern row and the second pattern row are dynamically displayed in directions different from each other, so that the first pattern row and the second pattern row can be easily distinguished, and the discrimination result can be easily distinguished from the suggestive information.

The gaming machine AJ1 has dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, the first symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second symbol row is moved in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol row overlap at least part of the symbols constituting the second symbol row. A gaming machine AJ2 characterized by being dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1, dynamic display is performed at the position where the first pattern row and the second pattern row are overlapped, so there is an effect that a performance can be executed by effectively using the display area.

The gaming machine AJ2 is characterized by comprising dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and wherein the first symbol row and the second symbol row are dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ2, the first pattern row and the second pattern row are dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine AJ4 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3 has display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestive information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first symbol row so as to display the determination result according to the display mode of the first symbol row.

According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ3, the determination result is displayed using the display mode of the first symbol row. Therefore, the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol row may be controlled based on the determination result, and the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row can be freely set. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the dynamic display of the suggestive information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine AJ4 has a first display layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that at least a portion of the first display area of the first display layer and the second display area of the second display layer overlap, and where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first symbol row overlaps the second symbol row. A game machine AJ5 characterized in that it can be displayed so as to be visually recognizable to a player with priority over the game machine AJ5.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ4, when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, the first symbol row is displayed so as to be visible to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode for showing the determination result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player while performing an effect that makes effective use of the display area.

In the game machine AJ4 or AJ5, the display control means is capable of displaying and controlling the first symbol row and the second symbol row so that the plurality of symbols constituting the first symbol row and the plurality of symbols constituting the second symbol row are arranged in a predetermined order to form a combined symbol row.

According to the game machine AJ6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ4 or AJ5, the first pattern row and the second pattern row can be dynamically displayed as a total pattern row, so that the player can be made to think that the total pattern row is formed. Among them, since the first pattern row and the second pattern row can be dynamically displayed in the opposite direction, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance and to enhance the performance effect.

In the gaming machine AJ6, the display control means is capable of performing display control so as to facilitate dynamic display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row as the combined symbol row when the determination result is other than the specific determination result than when the determination result is the specific determination result.

According to the game machine AJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ6, dynamic display of the first pattern row and the second pattern row as the combined pattern row can be made more difficult when the determination result is a specific determination result. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first pattern row and the dynamic display of the second pattern row are in different modes, it is possible to heighten expectations for a specific discrimination result and to enhance the performance effect.

<Characteristic AK group> (executes the tongue control of the V chance based on the number of attackers entering the ball)
In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player and a variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a first specific area through which the game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and a first detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed the first specific area. a second detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the second specific area; a guide path capable of guiding the game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; A game machine AK1 characterized in that it is configured to be variable from a state to the allowable state until a variable condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, a specific area is provided in an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a game ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game, a game machine that sets a variable probability state after the jackpot game is completed (so-called V certain machine) (For example, Patent Document 1: JP 2015-119807 A). In such a game machine, by setting the first state in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed period from the start of the jackpot game, the rate at which the variable probability state is set can be defined in advance.

However, in the conventional type game machine, since the first state is set based on the elapsed period after the execution of the jackpot game, there is a problem that, for example, a predetermined period of time during which the first state is set passes while a game ball cannot be won by an attacker due to the trouble of the game machine during the jackpot game, and the player's desire to play decreases.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the enjoyment of a game by increasing the willingness of a player to play the game.

According to the game machine AK1, the variable means is changed to the allowable state based on the measurement result of the game balls entering the variable ball entering means, so that the game balls can be passed to the second specific area according to the number of the entering balls by the variable entering means, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by making the player interested in the number of entering the variable ball entering means.

In the gaming machine AK1, the variable means changes the first specific region to the allowable state in a period during which the game balls that are the predetermined number can reach the variable means in the state of being varied to the allowable state.

According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK1, it is possible to allow the predetermined number of game balls that have passed through the first specific area to enter the second specific area, and to control the game balls that pass through the second specific area to limit the number of balls entering the second specific area.

In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the gaming machine AK3 is characterized by comprising a period discriminating means capable of discriminating a period from when the predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area until the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, and an abnormality processing means capable of executing an abnormality process based on the discrimination result of the period discriminating means.

According to the game machine AK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AK1 or AK2, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly find a problem such as when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area but stay on the guideway.

In any one of the game machines AK1 to AK3, the end condition is set to be established when a period shorter than a period for the next game ball to reach the variable means elapses after the predetermined number of game balls are detected by the second detection means.

According to the game machine AK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AK1 to AK3, there is an effect that a predetermined number of game balls can be reliably entered into the second specific area.

The gaming machine AK5 is characterized by having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on detection of a game ball by the second detecting means in any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4.

According to the game machine AK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AK1 to AK4, even when a privilege game is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to enter the game ball into the second specific area, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the privilege game becomes boring.

<Characteristic AL group> (Some patterns in the pattern row are switched by changing the pattern row)
A game machine having: a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; a display means for displaying an identification pattern for indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means; dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period including at least a period in which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and setting means capable of setting such that, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern for indicating a first result in the first period, and a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed in the second period for indicating a second result different from the first result. Game machine AL1.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various performances (variation performances) are executed during the variable display of the third pattern, and the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play the game while expecting a big win. Further, in a general game machine, one pattern row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9), and a plurality (for example, three) of the pattern rows are used to perform a symbol variation display, and when a predetermined third symbol is stop-displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol row other than the one pattern row, a performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) that increases the expectation of winning a big win is performed. In this way, by executing the variable performance for suggesting whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot while the third pattern is variably displayed by using a plurality of pattern rows, the degree of expectation of the winning of the jackpot can be gradually raised for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional game machine, since only the third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third pattern variation to the stop display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and loses the desire to play during the period from the start of the variation display of the third pattern to the end of the variation display.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation.

According to the game machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can be continuously interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine AL1, the dynamic display means can stop and display the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period after at least the first period has passed.

According to the game machine AL2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL1, the end of the first period and the start of the second period can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine AL2, the dynamic display means can display, as the first result, the first identification pattern for indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the game machine AL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL2, the determination result of the determination means can be notified to the player before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means elapses, so that the player who wants to quickly grasp the determination result of the determination means can pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine AL3, the dynamic display means can display the second identification pattern for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means as the second result.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to display the identification pattern for indicating the type of privilege after the end of the second period. That is, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means can be displayed after displaying the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, after informing the player that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the specific discrimination result, the player can be notified of the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means, so that there is an effect that the dynamic display of the second period can be executed in a state where at least the privilege game is executed with a sense of security.

In the gaming machine AL4, the privilege type determination means determines one of a plurality of privilege types including at least a first privilege type and a second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode including at least information for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means.

According to the game machine AL5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AL4, the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means, so that the player can predict the determined privilege means even during the period when the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine AL5 includes symbol row setting means capable of setting a symbol row in which the plurality of identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means being capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbols based on the symbol row set by the symbol row setting means, and the symbol row setting means switching the first identification symbols forming at least a part of the first symbol row set during a first period to the second identification symbols. A gaming machine AL6 characterized by being able to set two symbol rows.

According to the game machine AL6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AL5, the second pattern row is set by switching the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row to the second identification pattern, so that the number of identification patterns in the first pattern row can be the same as the number of identification patterns in the second pattern row. Therefore, there is no need to change the dynamic display mode of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of the set pattern sequence, so that there is an effect that the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification pattern can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AL6, the symbol row setting means can form the first symbol row in which the first identification symbols for indicating the same discrimination result of the discrimination means are overlapped, and when setting the second symbol row, any one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

According to the game machine AL7, since the first identification symbols included in the first symbol row are switched to the second identification symbols, it is possible to confirm each of the first identification symbols displayed in the dynamic display performed during the first period even during the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AM group> (restriction is released by another operation during restriction control of button operation)
In a game machine having display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and privilege providing means capable of providing a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed in a static manner on the display means, an operable operation means, an operation determination means capable of at least determining a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation as types of operations for the operation means; A gaming machine AM1, comprising setting execution means capable of executing a setting based on a determination result of the operation determination means, and restriction means for restricting execution of the first setting by the setting execution means when the first operation is determined by the operation determination means, wherein the setting execution means is capable of executing the first setting when the second operation is determined by the operation determination means during the restriction by the restriction means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the result of the lottery is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol variation period of a predetermined period, and various performances (variation performances) are executed using the period (special symbol variation period) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result, so that the player does not get tired of the game early. Among them, a plurality of production modes are facilitated in advance, and there is one that is configured to vary the aspect of the variation production executed during the special symbol variation period for each production mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).

In the game machine constructed in this manner, different variable performances can be provided to the player by switching the performance mode, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early due to the provision of only the same variable performance. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily switch the presentation mode by operating an operable operation means. In such a game machine, the player himself/herself can select the most interesting performance mode among a plurality of performance modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early due to the execution of the variable performance with little interest. In addition, since the player himself/herself needs to operate the operation means in order to switch the production mode, the interest in the game can be improved.

However, as described above, if the player can switch the performance mode at any timing by operating the operating means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, or when a short period of variation is set as the special symbol variation period, the switching of the performance mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, so there is a problem that the player's motivation to operate the operation means is reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation of players to play games.

According to the game machine AM1, even in a state where the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be performed by performing the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means to perform various operations.

In the game machine AM1, the setting executing means can execute a second setting different from the first setting when the first operation is determined by the operation determining means during the restriction by the restricting means.

According to the game machine AM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1, the second setting is executed when the first operation is executed during regulation, so that the setting execution means can be prevented from executing nothing despite the execution of the first operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The game machine AM1 or AM2 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until an end condition is satisfied, and the restricting means, when the short game state is set and the first operation is determined by the operation determining means, the setting execution means performs the first operation. A gaming machine AM3 characterized by being capable of regulating execution of 1 setting.

According to the game machine AM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1 or AM2, it is possible to restrict the execution of setting based on the operation of the operating means during the short game state, so that it is possible to suppress the player's difficulty in grasping the discrimination result of the discrimination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine AM3 is characterized by having a performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means.

According to the game machine AM4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM3, different performance modes can be set based on the operation of the operation means, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of game machines AM1 to AM4, game machine AM5 is characterized in that the operation means has a first operation unit for executing the first operation and a second operation unit different from the first operation unit for executing the second operation.

According to the game machine AM5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AM1 to AM4, the operation is performed on different operation units when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine AM5, the second operation section is provided at a position where it is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operation section.

According to the game machine AM6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM5, by making the operability of each operation part different, the first operation using the first operation part can be normal operation, and the second operation using the second operation part can be emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AN group> (execution of other contents by operation during restriction control of button operation)
In a gaming machine comprising display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and benefit providing means capable of providing a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, operation means operable by the player, first setting execution means capable of executing a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and the operation. A game machine AN1 characterized by comprising a regulation means for regulating the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the means, and a second setting execution means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operation means is operated in a state where the execution of the first setting is regulated by the regulation means.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various performances (variation performances) are executed during the variable display of the third pattern, and the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play the game while expecting a big win. Further, in a general game machine, one pattern row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9), and a plurality (for example, three) of the pattern rows are used to perform a symbol variation display, and when a predetermined third symbol is stop-displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol row other than the one pattern row, a performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) that increases the expectation of winning a big win is performed. In this way, by executing the variable performance for suggesting whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot while the third pattern is variably displayed by using a plurality of pattern rows, the degree of expectation of the winning of the jackpot can be gradually raised for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional game machine, since only the third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third pattern variation to the stop display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and loses the desire to play during the period from the start of the variation display of the third pattern to the end of the variation display.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation.

According to the game machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can be continuously interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

According to the game machine AN1, when the operating means is operated in a state where the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so it is possible to suppress the situation where nothing is executed despite the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the game machine AN1, the regulation means can regulate execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

According to the game machine AN2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AN1, the execution of the first setting is regulated by the regulation means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the dynamic display result of the identification information due to the execution of the first setting.

The gaming machine AN2 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until an end condition is satisfied, and the restricting means executes the first setting by the setting executing means when the short game state is set and the operation determining means determines the first operation. The game machine AN3 is characterized by being able to regulate

According to the game machine AN3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN1 or AN2, it is possible to restrict the execution of setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that it is possible to suppress the player's difficulty in grasping the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine AN4 is characterized by having a performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means in the game machine AN3.

According to the game machine AN4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN3, different performance modes can be set based on the operation of the operation means, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of game machines AN1 to AN4, the game machine AM5 is characterized in that the operation means has a first operation section for executing a first operation and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing a second operation different from the first operation.

According to the game machine AN5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AN1 to AN4, different operation sections are executed when the first operation is executed and when the second operation is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly executing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AN5, the second operating section is provided at a location that is more difficult for the player to operate than the first operating section.

According to the game machine AN6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN5, by making the operability of each operation part different, the first operation using the first operation part can be normal operation, and the second operation using the second operation part can be emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AO group> (If you change the stage in a state where it is difficult to change the stage, you have a chance)
In a game machine having a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a benefit giving means for giving a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a first performance mode as a performance mode and a second performance different from the first performance mode are provided based on operation of an operation means operable by the player and the operation means. a performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a mode; a first period in which the performance mode setting means can set the performance mode; and a second period in which the performance mode setting is more difficult to set than the first period, and the game machine can provide information more advantageous to the player when the performance mode is set during the second period than when the performance mode is set during the first period.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various performances (variation performances) are executed during the variable display of the third pattern, and the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play the game while expecting a big win. Further, in a general game machine, one pattern row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9), and a plurality (for example, three) of the pattern rows are used to perform a symbol variation display, and when a predetermined third symbol is stop-displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol row other than the one pattern row, a performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) that increases the expectation of winning a big win is performed. In this way, by executing the variable performance for suggesting whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot while the third pattern is variably displayed by using a plurality of pattern rows, the degree of expectation of the winning of the jackpot can be gradually raised for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional game machine, since only the third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third pattern variation to the stop display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and loses the desire to play during the period from the start of the variation display of the third pattern to the end of the variation display.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation.

According to the game machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can be continuously interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

According to the game machine AO1, when the performance mode is set in the second period in which the performance mode is difficult to set, advantageous information can be provided to the player, so that the player can play the game while expecting the performance mode to be set during the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AO1, the presentation mode setting means can set a third presentation mode different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode when setting the presentation mode during the second period.

According to the game machine AO2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AO1, the setting of the third performance mode can inform the player that the performance mode has been set during the second period, so that the player can be provided with an effect that is easy to understand.

In any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, the game machine AO4 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until an end condition is satisfied, and the period setting means can set the second period when the short gaming state is set.

According to the game machine AO4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AO1 to AO3, it is possible to make it difficult to set the performance mode during the short game state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the discrimination result of the discrimination means by setting the performance mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine AO5 is characterized in that any one of the game machines AO1 to AO4 has an informing means capable of informing the player that the second period is set by the period setting means before the second period is set.

According to the game machine AO5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AO1 to AO4, the player can be made to grasp in advance that the second period will be set, so that the second period can be set while a desired performance mode is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second period from being set in the performance mode that the player does not desire and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

<Characteristic AP group> (Variable ease of stage change by looking ahead)
information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition; information storage means storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the information storage means; and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game as follows: the information stored in the information storage means can be determined in advance before the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the information is executed; A gaming machine AP1 characterized in that a second preliminary determination result different from the first preliminary determination result is more likely to be established.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various performances (variation performances) are executed during the variable display of the third pattern, and the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play the game while expecting a big win. Further, in a general game machine, one pattern row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9), and a plurality (for example, three) of the pattern rows are used to perform a symbol variation display, and when a predetermined third symbol is stop-displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol row other than the one pattern row, a performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) that increases the expectation of winning a big win is performed. In this way, by executing the variable performance for suggesting whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot while the third pattern is variably displayed by using a plurality of pattern rows, the degree of expectation of the winning of the jackpot can be gradually raised for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional game machine, since only the third pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third pattern variation to the stop display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and loses the desire to play during the period from the start of the variation display of the third pattern to the end of the variation display.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation.

According to the game machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can be continuously interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

According to the game machine AP1, since the easiness of fulfillment of the switching condition can be varied according to the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means, the player can predict the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means when the presentation mode is switched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine AP1 is characterized in that the game machine AP1 has operation means operable by a player and operation determination means capable of determining an operation for the operation means, and the switching condition can be established when the operation is determined by the operation determination means.

According to the game machine AP2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AP1, the switching condition can be established even when the player operates the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the game machine AP2, the switching means can switch from the first effect mode to a third effect mode different from the second effect mode when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result.

According to the game machine AP3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP2, by setting the third performance mode, it is possible to inform the player that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and game state setting means for setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until an end condition is satisfied, and the switching condition is less likely to be satisfied when the short game state is set than when the short game state is not set. Characteristic game machine AP4.

According to the game machine AP4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AP1 to AP3, it is possible to make it difficult to switch the performance mode during the short game state, so that setting the performance mode can prevent the player from grasping the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any of the game machines AP1 to AP4, the game machine AP5 is characterized by having an informing means capable of informing a player that the short game state is set by the game state setting means before the short game state is set.

According to the game machine AP5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AP1 to AP4, the player can be made to grasp in advance that the short game state is set, so that the operation means can be willingly operated to establish the switching condition before the short game state is set. As a result, it is possible to easily set the short game state in a state in which the desired performance mode is set, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the short game state being set in the performance mode not desired by the player.

<5066 Series>
<Feature A group> (If the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number, the probability that advantageous benefits will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases)
A gaming machine comprising acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on a determination result by the determination means being a first determination result, and setting means capable of setting a specific setting until a termination condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed, wherein the determination means uses the determination means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by comprising setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when a second determination result different from the first determination result is determined, and the determination means is configured to be able to determine the second determination result when a specific period is set.

According to the game machine A1, when the specific period is set, it can be determined as the second determination result, so that when the specific period is set, the specific setting is set by being determined as the second determination result, and the specific setting is set at a timing different from the normal time, so that not only the specific game is executed but also the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the expectation during the period when the specific period is set.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, since an advantageous state is not set unless a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous for a player who has continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game does not win. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine A1 has a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the determining means determines the second determination result based on the second information. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is configured to be identifiable.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the second determination result can be determined by making the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entered can be varied between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the game can be played as if the second information is stored when the specific period is set, and the game can be diversified to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that, in the game machine A1 or A2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the period in which the specific setting is set can be changed according to the discriminated result, so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest can be further improved.

<Feature B group> (If you win a jackpot and a short time in one special lottery, benefits and grants that are more advantageous than if you win either one)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that a determination result by the determination means is a first determination result, and setting means capable of setting specific settings until a termination condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed. A game machine B1 characterized in that the game machine has setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when the determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result, and the determining means is configured to be capable of redundantly determining the first determination result and the second determination result.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, since an advantageous state is not set unless a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous for a player who has continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game does not win. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine B1, since the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are overlapped and discriminated, the specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not established, and the effect of improving the interest of the game is obtained by diversifying the timing of the specific setting.

In the game machine B1, when the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are overlapped and discriminated by the discriminating means, the type of the specific game advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than when the specific game is not discriminated redundantly.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is easily executed by overlapping discrimination, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by giving the player a privilege corresponding to various discrimination results.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting in a period for determining whether the first determination result is obtained after the determination means determines the second determination result.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, when the second determination result is determined, the specific setting is made during the period in which the determination as to whether it is the first determination result is executed after that, so it is possible to determine whether it is the first determination result or not in the state in which the specific setting is made, and it is possible to perform the determination in various states.

<Characteristic group C> (Different degrees of advantage when the time saving jackpot is elected during the time saving state depending on the opportunity for time saving establishment)
In a gaming machine having determining means capable of executing a determination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination performed by the determining means being a specific first determination result, and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determining means is more likely to be executed than in the first game state, the game state setting means sets the second game state as a setting type for setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means. At least a first setting capable of setting a state and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result can be performed, and the gaming machine varies a selection ratio of the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is possible to make a game.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, when an advantageous state is set, there is an effect that the game success or failure lottery is easily executed, but when the result of the game success or failure lottery is a win in the advantageous state, the same privilege is always given, resulting in a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine C1, since the selection ratio in the type of the privilege game is varied according to the setting type, the same second game state can be set to be different, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by diversifying the game without setting many game states.

In the game machine C1, the second game state is continuously set until the end condition is satisfied, and when the privilege game is executed when the second setting is set, the game machine C2 is characterized in that it is easy to set the period until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is executed to lengthen the period.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the second setting makes it possible to lengthen the period in which the second game state is set, so that there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the period until the end condition is set when the privilege game is executed in the second game state.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that, in the game machine C1 or C2, the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, since the second discrimination result is not discriminated by the game state, there is an effect that the player is more interested in the set game state and expects that the game state in which the second discrimination result can be discriminated is set.

<Characteristic group D> (The more addicted you are, the easier it is to set advantageous time saving when time saving is established)
In a gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result executed by the determining means is a specific first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determining means is easier to execute than the first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means ends, wherein the second game state is set in the game state setting means. wherein the first game state can be set based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in a state, the game machine has setting information determination means capable of determining setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and when second setting information set after the first setting information is determined by the setting information determination means, the second game state in which the end condition is unlikely to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game can be set. Technique D1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, since an advantageous state is not set unless a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous for a player who has continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game does not win. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine D1, the longer the period in which the second game state is set, the more difficult it is to establish the end condition when the privilege game is executed, so that the period in which the player expects the privilege game to be executed and the period in which the privilege game is not expected to be executed can be switched and set, and the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be further improved.

A game machine D2 characterized in that the game machine D1 has setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the setting information is determined by the determining means as a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting the setting information corresponding to the type of the set setting information.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the setting information set according to the history of the setting information can be varied regularly, so that the effect that the period during which the second game state is set can be easily determined.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1 or D2, the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, since the second discrimination result is not discriminated by the game state, there is an effect that the player is more interested in the set game state and expects the setting of the game state in which the second discrimination result can be discriminated.

<Feature group E> (Special figure 1 that can execute jackpot lottery + short-time lottery, and special figure 2 that can execute jackpot lottery + small lottery)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on the fact that the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is a first determination result; and a first privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the result of the first determination being a second determination result different from the first determination result; a second privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege based on the fact that the result of the second determination executed by the means is a third determination result, and capable of granting a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on the fact that the result of the second determination is a fourth determination result different from the third determination result; The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second privilege is not awarded based on the second determination that is executed.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted.

However, when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, the privilege given when winning is the same, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine E1, since different benefits can be given depending on whether the first discrimination is executed or the second discrimination is executed, the player can be motivated to play the game by making different judgments, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Feature F Group> (A specific advantageous state can be set when a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of the first advantageous condition and the establishment of the first advantageous condition.)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition is satisfied; a first state setting means capable of setting a first advantageous state based on the fact that the first condition is determined to be satisfied by the first determination means; a second determination means capable of performing a second determination for determining that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied; and a third state setting means capable of setting the first advantageous state and a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state based on the determination that the second condition is satisfied by the second determining means during a period from when the first determining means determines that the first condition is satisfied until the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted.

However, when the first lottery is executed and the second lottery is executed, when the lottery result is a lottery result that the privilege is given, the corresponding privilege is only given, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine F1, the first advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the second condition. When the second condition is satisfied after the first condition is established until the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the first condition is satisfied and the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic group G> (executing advantageous lottery in a specific cycle)
In a gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the game state setting means is determined by the determining means executed in a state in which the first game state is set. The second game state can be set based on the result of the determination being a second determination result different from the first determination result, the first game state can be set based on the fact that the end condition is satisfied in the state where the second game state is set, and the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set is a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result. The game machine G1 is characterized in that it is possible to set a third game state advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been proposed.

However, there is a problem that the lottery with the same contents is always executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine G1, it is possible to make it difficult to set the third game state while the second game state is set, so that the player aims at a game in which the third game state is set during the period when the first game state is set. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game with different degrees of advantage according to the game situation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine G1, the determining means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination will be the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination will be the second determination result.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the second discrimination result is more likely than the third discrimination result, so that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result, and the player can play a game aiming at setting the third game state while avoiding the game state from shifting to the second game state in which the third game state is difficult to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized by comprising, as the ending condition, an end condition setting means capable of setting at least a first end condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the state where the second game state is set reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated when the number of times of determination executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number, determination by the determination means in the first game state can be performed at least in a specific cycle. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G3, the end condition setting means can set a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the second game state can be finished at an interval shorter than the specific period by satisfying the second end condition, so that there is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the determining means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination performed during the second game state is the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination performed during the first game state is the third determination result.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the third game state is more likely to be set in the first game state than in the second game state, there is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the discrimination will be executed in the situation where the second game state is not set.

<Characteristic H group> (It is possible to set the time saving that it is better to finish and the time saving that it is better not to finish)
In a gaming machine comprising: determining means capable of executing a determination; privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination performed by the determining means being a specific first determination result; and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. A type setting means capable of setting at least a first setting capable of setting the second game state after completion of the privilege game executing means, and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on the fact that the result of the discrimination performed by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the game state setting means has an advantageous second game that is more advantageous than the first game state according to the setting category set by the category setting means. The game machine H1 is characterized in that it is possible to set a state and a disadvantageous second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, there is a problem that the advantageous state is only set after the privilege game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine H1, a game state more advantageous than the first game state and a game state more disadvantageous than the first game state can be set, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Technical concept of 5068>
<Feature A group> (If the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number, the probability that advantageous benefits will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases)
A gaming machine comprising acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on a determination result by the determination means being a first determination result, and setting means capable of setting specific settings until a termination condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed, wherein The gaming machine A1 is characterized by comprising setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when a second determination result different from the first determination result is determined, and the determination means is configured to be able to determine the second determination result when a specific period is set.

According to the game machine A1, when the specific period is set, it can be determined as the second determination result, so that when the specific period is set, the specific setting is set by being determined as the second determination result, and the specific setting is set at a timing different from the normal time, so that not only the specific game is executed but also the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the expectation during the period when the specific period is set.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, since an advantageous state is not set unless a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous for a player who has continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game does not win. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine A1 has a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the determining means determines the second determination result based on the second information. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is configured to be identifiable.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the second determination result can be determined by making the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entered can be varied between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the game can be played as if the second information is stored when the specific period is set, and the game can be diversified to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that, in the game machine A1 or A2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2, the period in which the specific setting is set can be changed according to the discriminated result, so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest can be further improved.

<Feature B group> (If you win a jackpot and a short time in one special lottery, benefits and grants that are more advantageous than if you win either one)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that a determination result by the determination means is a first determination result, and setting means capable of setting specific settings until a termination condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed. The game machine B1 is characterized by comprising setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when the determination means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result, and the determination means is configured to be capable of redundantly determining the first determination result and the second determination result.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, since an advantageous state is not set unless a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous for a player who has continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game does not win. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine B1, since the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are overlapped and discriminated, the specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not established, and the effect of improving the interest of the game is obtained by diversifying the timing of the specific setting.

In the game machine B1, when the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are overlapped and discriminated by the discriminating means, the type of the specific game advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than when the specific game is not discriminated redundantly.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is easily executed by overlapping discrimination, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by giving the player a privilege corresponding to various discrimination results.

In game machine B1 or B2, game machine B4 is characterized in that said setting control means is configured to be able to set said specific setting during a period for determining whether said result is said to be said first determination result after said determination means has determined said result to be said second determination result.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, when the second determination result is determined, a specific setting is made during the period in which the determination as to whether it is the first determination result is executed after that, so that it is possible to determine whether the first determination result is obtained in a state in which the specific setting is made, and to perform the determination in various states.

<Characteristic group C> (Different degree of advantage when winning a time saving jackpot in a time saving state according to the opportunity for time saving establishment)
In a gaming machine having determining means capable of executing a determination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination performed by the determining means being a specific first determination result, and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determining means is more likely to be executed than in the first game state, the game state setting means sets the second game state as a setting type for setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means. At least a first setting capable of setting a state and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result can be performed, and the gaming machine varies a selection ratio of the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is possible to make a game.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, when an advantageous state is set, there is an effect that the game success or failure lottery is easily executed, but when the result of the game success or failure lottery is a win in the advantageous state, the same privilege is always given, resulting in a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine C1, since the selection ratio in the type of the privilege game is varied according to the setting type, the same second game state can be set to be different, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by diversifying the game without setting many game states.

In the game machine C1, the second game state is continuously set until the end condition is satisfied, and when the privilege game is executed when the second setting is set, the game machine C2 is characterized in that it is easy to set the period until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is executed to lengthen the period.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the second setting makes it possible to lengthen the period in which the second game state is set, so that there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the period until the end condition is set when the privilege game is executed in the second game state.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that, in the game machine C1 or C2, the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, since the second discrimination result is not discriminated by the game state, there is an effect that the player is more interested in the set game state and expects that the game state in which the second discrimination result can be discriminated is set.

<Characteristic group D> (The more addicted you are, the easier it is to set advantageous time saving when time saving is established)
A gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the determination result executed by the determining means being a specific first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determining means is easier to execute than the first game state after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, wherein the second game state is set in the game state setting means. wherein the first game state can be set based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in a state, the game machine has setting information determination means capable of determining setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and when second setting information set after the first setting information is determined by the setting information determination means, it is possible to set the second game state in which the end condition is unlikely to be satisfied after the privilege game is over. Technique D1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, since an advantageous state is not set unless a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous for a player who has continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game does not win. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the monotonousness of a game.

According to the game machine D1, the longer the period in which the second game state is set, the more difficult it is to establish the end condition when the privilege game is executed, so that the period in which the player expects the privilege game to be executed and the period in which the privilege game is not expected to be executed can be switched and set, and the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be further improved.

A game machine D2 characterized in that the game machine D1 has setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the setting information is determined by the determining means as a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting the setting information corresponding to the type of the set setting information.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the setting information set according to the history of the setting information can be varied regularly, so that the effect that the period during which the second game state is set can be easily determined.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1 or D2, the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, since the second discrimination result is not discriminated by the game state, there is an effect that the player is more interested in the set game state and expects the setting of the game state in which the second discrimination result can be discriminated.

<Feature group E> (Special figure 1 that can execute jackpot lottery + short-time lottery, and special figure 2 that can execute jackpot lottery + small lottery)
In a gaming machine comprising: first determining means capable of executing a first determination; and first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on the fact that the result of the first determination performed by the first determining means is a first determination result, and capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the result of the first determination being a second determination result; second determining means capable of executing a second determination different from the first determination; is a specific second determination result, and based on the result of the second determination being a fourth determination result different from the third determination result, a third benefit different from the first and second benefits can be granted, and the gaming machine is not provided with the third benefit based on the first determination performed by the first determination means, and the second determination performed by the second determination means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second privilege is not given based on.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted.

However, when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, the privilege given when winning is the same, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine E1, since different benefits can be given depending on whether the first discrimination is executed or the second discrimination is executed, the player can be motivated to play the game by making different judgments, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Feature F Group> (A specific advantageous state can be set when a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of the first advantageous condition and the establishment of the first advantageous condition.)
display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the result of the first determination by the first determination means; first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and then displaying the first determination result in a stopped manner; second determination means for performing the second determination; second dynamic display means capable of stopping and displaying the second determination result in a mode for indicating the second determination result to the player, wherein the game state setting means sets a specific game state when dynamic display of the first identification information for setting an advantageous game state that can be advantageous to the player is started;

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted.

However, when the first lottery is executed and the second lottery is executed, when the lottery result is such that the privilege is given, the corresponding privilege is only given, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine F1, the first advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the second condition. When the second condition is satisfied after the first condition is established until the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the first condition is satisfied and the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine F1, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the advantageous game state is set, the dynamic display mode is controlled to be selected from the dynamic display mode group in which the dynamic display of the period longer than the period in which the dynamic display of the second identification information executed in the specific game state can be executed multiple times is likely to be selected, and when the specific game state is set, the dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display period shorter than the normal game state is more likely to be selected from the dynamic display mode group as the dynamic display mode of the second identification information. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that is selected.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the specific game state can be set long by selecting a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and in the specific game state, the dynamic display period of the second identification information is set short and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed many times, thereby making it easier for the player to motivate the player to perform more dynamic display of the second identification information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The game machine F3 is characterized in that, when the specific game state is set in the game machine F1 or F2, a game state more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game state can be set based on the specific second determination result.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, when the second identification information becomes a specific second determination result, a game state more advantageous than the advantageous game state is set in the specific game state, so that there is an effect that the privilege given to the player can be varied according to the remaining period of the specific game state, and the game can be diversified.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the dynamic display of the second identification information is stop-displayed, and the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed due to the establishment of a specific condition is forcibly stop-displayed so that the advantageous game state is not set.

According to the game machine F4, since the advantageous game state to be set by the dynamic display of the second identification information can be forcibly discarded in any one of the game machines F1 to F3, there is an effect that the game can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, when the specific game state is set and the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to execute the privilege game, the dynamic display period of the dynamically displayed first identification information is interrupted, and after the execution of the privilege game is completed, the dynamic display is resumed to execute the dynamic display.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted and restarted after the privilege game is finished during the period when the privilege game is played, so that the performance of the privilege game reduces the expectation for the advantageous game state and suppresses the inconvenience of lowering the value of the privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the advantageous gaming state can be set at least based on a first setting condition set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed to execute a privilege game executed after the dynamic display of the first identification information, and a second setting condition is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed not to execute the privilege game.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the advantageous game state can be set even if the privilege game is not executed, so that the timing of setting the advantageous game state can be made difficult to predict and the game can be given freshness.

<Characteristic G group> (executing advantageous lottery at a specific period)
In a gaming machine comprising: determining means capable of executing a determination; privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a first determination result; and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the game state setting means is determined by the determining means executed in a state in which the first game state is set. The second game state can be set based on the result of the determination being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the first game state can be set based on the fact that the end condition is satisfied in the state where the second game state is set. The game machine G1 is characterized in that it is possible to set a third game state advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been proposed.

However, there is a problem that the lottery with the same contents is always executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine G1, it is possible to make it difficult to set the third game state while the second game state is set, so that the player aims at a game in which the third game state is set during the period when the first game state is set. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game with different degrees of advantage according to the game situation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine G1, the determining means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination will be the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination will be the second determination result.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the second discrimination result is more likely than the third discrimination result, so that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result, and the player can play a game aiming at setting the third game state while avoiding the game state from shifting to the second game state in which the third game state is difficult to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized by comprising, as the ending condition, an end condition setting means capable of setting at least a first end condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the state where the second game state is set reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated when the number of times of determination executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number, determination by the determination means in the first game state can be performed at least in a specific cycle. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G3, the end condition setting means can set a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the second game state can be finished at an interval shorter than the specific period by satisfying the second end condition, so that there is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the determining means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination performed during the second game state is the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination performed during the first game state is the third determination result.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the third game state is more likely to be set in the first game state than in the second game state, there is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the discrimination will be executed in the situation where the second game state is not set.

<Characteristic group H> (It is possible to set the time saving that it is better to finish and the time saving that it is better not to finish)
A game machine having a determining means capable of executing determination, a display means dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the second game state is set. A game machine H1 is characterized by having a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which a game state advantageous to a player is set when a termination condition for terminating the setting is established, and a second state in which a game state more favorable to the player than when the termination condition is not satisfied is set.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the lottery of the game is easily executed after the privilege game is completed.

However, there is a problem that the advantageous state is only set after the privilege game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine H1, when the second game state is set, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the establishment of the end condition by setting the first state and the second state, so that there is an effect that the amusement caused by the end of the second game state can be varied and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine H1, the first game state is set by satisfying the end condition when the first state is set, and the second state is set based on the setting of the second game state from the state in which the first game state is set.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, after the first state is set, the second game state is set through the first game state, and then the second game state is set, so that an advantageous game state is set according to the order in which the game states are set.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second game state can be set based on a first condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed for executing the privilege game and a second condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed for not executing the privilege game.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the timing at which the second game state is set can be diversified, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided.

<Feature Group I> (If special figure 2 lottery is executed in normal state, penalty for special figure 1 lottery for a predetermined period)
A game machine having a first determination means capable of executing a first determination and a second determination means capable of performing a second determination different from the first determination, wherein the game machine has a setting means capable of setting a first setting that can be set when the first determination means and the second determination means are determined in a first order, and a second setting that can be set when the determination is performed in a second order different from the first order.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of opportunities such as winning are determined in a predetermined order, and the player is notified based on the determination result, and when a specific notification such as winning is given. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, even if the order of execution of the determination of winning or the like is different, the game is only executed based on the individual determination results, and the game is not executed with different game characteristics due to the difference in the order, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine I1, since different settings are made according to the execution order of the first discrimination and the second discrimination, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the discrimination is executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine I1 comprises a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the game state setting means can set the second game state based on the execution of the first determination, and can set the first game state based on the next execution of the first determination.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the first game state can be set periodically, and the game state can be changed in a constant cycle to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine I2, the game state setting means can set the second game state based on the execution of the second determination, and then set the first game state based on the execution of the second determination.

By alternately executing the first discrimination and the second discrimination, the first game state can be continuously set, and there is an effect that the interest in the order of discrimination can be enhanced to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, in the first setting, a first privilege game is executed based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and in the second setting, a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the second setting can be advantageous for the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be varied in the order of discrimination.

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the game state setting means can set the first game state on the basis that, when the second determination is executed next to the first determination that triggered the setting of the second game state, a setting condition that can be established by at least performing the first determination a plurality of times is established.

<Feature J Group> (Three game states, normal state, advantageous state, and super advantageous state, can be set, and from the normal state, it is possible to shift to either the advantageous state or the super advantageous state, and it is difficult to shift from the advantageous state to the super advantageous state.)
In a gaming machine having a determining means capable of executing a determination, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the determination performed by the determining means being a first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, wherein the game state setting means is , it is possible to set the second game state after the end of the privilege game, and it is possible to set the third game state based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state in which the first game state is set is a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the determination means determines the second determination result in the determination performed in the state in which the first game state is set more than in the determination performed in the state in which the second game state is set. The game machine J1 is characterized in that the game machine J1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the third game state when the determination is performed when the first game state is set than when the determination is performed when the second game state is set.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of game states are set, and the game state is switched when conditions such as winning are satisfied, so that a player can switch between various game states.

Furthermore, there is a game state in which game states with different degrees of advantage to the player can be set as a plurality of game states, and the game state is gradually switched from a game state with a low degree of advantage to a game state with a high degree of advantage, thereby making the player aim to switch to a game state that is more advantageous than the current one, thereby maintaining a high desire to play.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the game state is periodically switched, the player does not get tired of the game early and can continue to have a high desire to play. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

According to the game machine J1, determination is executed that the first game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state and the third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state are more likely to be set than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine in which a player who has been set in the first game state can concurrently execute a game aiming to set the second game state after the execution of the privilege game and a game aiming to set the third game state, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, since the possibility of switching the game state to the third game state can be increased by continuing the first game state for a long time without switching the game state to the second game state, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play even when the first game state disadvantageous to the player continues.

In the gaming machine J1, the determining means can execute a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and can perform a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and can be set so that the establishment of the second determination condition is restricted in the first game state and the second game state, and the establishment of the second determination condition is permitted in the third game state.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, since the easiness of establishment of the discrimination condition is changed for each type depending on the game state, the game method can be changed, and there is an effect that the game can be given freshness.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second game state when the third game state is set and a specific determination result is determined by the second determination.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, it is possible to shift to the second game state which is an advantageous game state even after the third game state, and there is an effect that the state advantageous to the player can be continued for a longer period.

<Feature K group> (Accumulate pending during time saving)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entering means, a storing means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the acquiring means, a determining means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storing means, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the determination result of the determining means being a first determination result, and stored in the storage means. a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state capable of making it easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the first game state based on a condition that can be established based on the information, wherein the first condition is satisfied based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means when the second game state is set in a gaming machine having: The game machine K1 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means configured to execute a specific effect that is not executed in the first game state.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, information such as a random number value is acquired when a game ball enters a start hole or the like, and a lottery is executed based on the random number value.

Further, a configuration has been proposed in which a predetermined number of acquired information can be stored up to an upper limit, and a first game state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into a starting hole or the like and a second game state in which it is easier to enter a game ball than in the first game state can be set as game states.

In such a conventional game machine, it is likely that ending the second game state in a state in which more information is stored is the most advantageous game for the player.

However, depending on the content of the lottery based on the already acquired information, the right to set the second game state may be acquired again even after the end of the currently set second game state, and there is a risk that the player will unnecessarily execute a game for entering a large number of game balls into a starting port or the like. Also, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous just before the second game state ends, and the interest in the game decreases. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine K1, it is possible to early identify the establishment of the first condition by executing the specific performance based on the result of preliminary determination in the second game state, and it is possible to increase the value of the setting of the second game state and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are arranged as the ball entering means, the discrimination means can execute a first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and can carry out a second discrimination that is more advantageous than the first discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second game state can easily change the variable means from the first state to the second state. The game machine K2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, in the second game state, the second ball-entering means can increase the frequency of ball entry, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In the game machine K1 or K2, a first end condition and a second end condition more advantageous to the player than the first end condition can be set as conditions for ending the second game state, and the first condition can be established based on the determination that the second end condition can be established by the prior determination.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, when the first condition is established, more information can be stored and more advantageous second determinations can be performed, so that it is possible to early determine that the second determination will be performed more often by executing the specific performance, and there is an effect that expectations for the game can be increased in advance.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then for confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated under the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information. A gaming machine equipped with a special game state generating means". In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine includes an operation handle, and a ball is shot to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and on the condition that the ball wins (or passes through) an operation opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to win prizes, and valuable values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) corresponding to the number of prizes awarded are provided.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the integrated game machine, a special game advantageous to the player is provided with a variable display means that confirms and displays the identification information after dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information, the identification information starts to change due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (e.g., stop button), or after a predetermined period of time has passed. The game machine is equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a state, uses balls as game media, requires a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display of the identification information, and is constructed so that a large number of balls are put out at the time of the generation of the special game state.
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the determination result by the determination means being a first determination result, and setting means capable of setting specific settings until a termination condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed. and setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when the determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result, and the determining means is configured to be capable of determining the second determination result when a specific period is set.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, further comprising a first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the acquisition means being capable of acquiring the first information as the information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and being capable of acquiring the second information as the information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, wherein the determination means is , the second determination result can be determined based on the second information.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is configured such that, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the determination result by the determination means being a first determination result, and setting means capable of setting specific settings until an end condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed. and setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when the determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result, and the determining means is configured to be capable of determining the second determination result when a specific period is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the acquiring means can acquire first information as the information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, can acquire second information as the information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determining means can determine the second determination result based on the second information. There is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area;
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result;
a second ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and different from the first ball-entering means;
a displacement means capable of being displaced between a first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position;
a displacement control means capable of executing at least a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position;
The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control. It is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established,
The game machine is
A predetermined value is awarded to a player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed so that at least a first mode based on execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means can occur.

Images